Amazon unveils new Alexa tablets with Alexa+ and Google Play Store access

Amazon on Thursday unveiled a new lineup of Alexa tablets that feature personalized intelligence from its Alexa+ AI assistant and full access to the Google Play Store. The lineup includes three models: Amazon Alexa Tablet 12 Pro, Amazon Alexa Tablet 11, and Amazon Alexa Tablet 8.

The tech giant says each tablet features an aluminum unibody design, high-resolution displays, and runs on Android. Plus, with access to the Google Play Store at launch, users will be able to download millions of apps, including YouTube, Netflix, Gmail, and more.

Until now, Amazon’s tablets have run Fire OS and ship with its own app store. With these new tablets, however, Amazon is taking a different approach to reach a wider audience. An Amazon spokesperson told TechCrunch that these are an all-new product line with new hardware and a new OS, rather than a rebrand of Fire Tablets.

The Amazon Alexa Tablet 12 Pro measures 6.5 mm thick and is engineered for “perfect balance,” Amazon explained in a press release. It houses a 12-inch, 280 PPI display, a 120Hz refresh rate, and a 3:2 aspect ratio for more usable screen space, which the company says is perfect for reading, watching, or working. It comes in two display options: a standard display and a Nanomatte display with anti-glare.

Amazon says the Alexa Tablet 12 Pro delivers nearly three times the processing performance and nine times the graphics performance of any tablet it has shipped before. The company says the tablet can easily handle everything from multi-window multitasking and graphics-intensive gaming to 4K streaming. It features Dolby Atmos speakers, Wi-Fi 6E, and 16 hours of video playback.

Image Credits:Amazon

The company also announced the Alexa Tablet Pro Pen and Pro Keyboard, which Amazon says are designed to turn the Alexa Tablet 12 Pro into a full workstation.

The Alexa Tablet 12 Pro starts at $499.99, while the Nanomatte model starts at $549.99. The tablet comes in Graphite.

The new tablets are launching with built-in access to Alexa+. Users will be able to say “Alexa” or tap the “Ask Alexa” button to get answers to questions, control their smart home, and more. With On-Screen Intelligence, users will be able to ask Alexa to look at what’s on screen to receive contextual help. For example, while browsing a list of trails, users can ask Alexa, “Which of these hikes is best for me?”

The Alexa Tablet 11 is an 11-inch device with a 2.5K display at 276 pixels per inch, 90Hz smooth scrolling, and a 16:10 aspect ratio. The tech giant says it’s designed for streaming, gaming, reading, and browsing. It features 15 hours of video playback and dual Dolby Atmos speakers. It starts at $329.99 and comes in Graphite, Amethyst, and Matcha.

The Alexa Tablet 8 is the smallest and most portable of the three, featuring an 8.7-inch display and an all-aluminum design that weighs 329 grams. It’s designed to be held in one hand and carried anywhere for reading, browsing, and streaming on the go, Amazon says. It starts at $229.99 and comes in Graphite, Rosette, and Teal.

All of the new tablets are launching with a new Kindle reading experience. When users open the Kindle app, notifications are silenced, blue light is reduced, and battery life can last up to 20 hours.

Image Credits:Amazon

The company also announced on Wednesday that it’s launching new Amazon Kids Tablets, with 8.7-inch and 11-inch sizes available. Bundles include a tablet, a kid-proof case, and a year of Amazon Kids+, which provides access to thousands of kid-friendly books, games, videos, and apps in an ad-free environment.

There are separate versions for pre-K kids (ages 3+) and kids 6+, as younger kids get a soft bumper case in designs from franchises like Paw Patrol and Barbie, while older kids get a slim hard case with a built-in kickstand.

All three Amazon Alexa Tablets and the Amazon Kids Tablets will go on sale October 14, 2026, in the U.S., Mexico, and Canada. They’ll launch in the U.K., Germany, France, Italy, and Spain on October 19, while the Amazon Kids Tablets will also be available in Japan starting October 14.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Natura’s $99 smart ring puts AI agents on your finger

Meet Interface, a new $99 smart ring from AI and hardware startup Natura that’s designed for the era of AI agents. With a press of your finger, you can ask an AI agent to complete a task, capture thoughts, and get things done without reaching for your phone. And while AI is at the heart of Interface, the ring also doubles as a health tracker, as it monitors metrics like heart rate, HRV, sleep, and activity.

The startup was founded by Carlo Edoardo Ferraris, who previously founded tech accessories company Rolling Square. After years of building consumer hardware, he became convinced that rapidly advancing AI needed a new kind of interface that lets people ask for what they want the way they’d ask a person.

The idea behind Interface is to help people look up from their phones while getting everyday tasks done more quickly and naturally. At launch, the ring will connect with a range of AI agents and apps, including Meta’s Muse, Instinct, Grokbot, Claude, ChatGPT, and more. 

Pre-orders are expected to open next month, with shipping slated for December or January.

Image Credits:Natura /

The smart ring was not the company’s first product. Those were HumanPods, a pair of AI-enabled earbuds designed to let users interact with AI agents. But Natura believed it needed a new form factor built for the latest advances in voice technology.

“Over time, we evolved to an understanding where you really want to have access to your agents 24/7,” Ferraris told TechCrunch in an interview. “You don’t want to have even one hour of your day where you cannot access them. And the form factor of the ring is perfect for this because it’s basically an extension of you. You can go shower with it; you can sleep with it. You never take it off.”

The company says the use cases are endless. If you’re out for a run, you could ask the ring to start tracking your workout. When you wake up, you could ask what’s on your schedule for the day. If you’re in the shower and realize you’re out of shampoo, you could ask the ring to reorder it. If you’re falling asleep while watching TV, you could tell it to turn off the TV and set an alarm for the morning. After using it to record a meeting, you could ask it to send your notes from the discussion to a coworker.

Responses from agents can be delivered through connected headphones, an iPhone Live Activity, or the NatureOS app. 

Plus, users who rely on multiple AI agents and apps can specify which one they want to handle a particular task. For example, they could ask Claude to write code, Instinct to book a reservation, and Grokbot to take care of something else.

Image Credits:Natura /

In addition to controlling AI agents, users can control their devices, including their computers. Ferraris says he believes that, ultimately, most of the things people do on their computers will be handled through AI agents. He sees the ring eventually replacing many tasks that currently require screens, from filling out forms and messaging in apps to finding files and drafting presentations, with simple voice requests to an AI agent.

“Ultimately, the main interface between users and technology is going to be the ring,” Ferraris said. “So it’s not going to be immediate because even today, not everybody has a personal agent, but I think everybody is bound to have one. So in this first phase, we expect it’s going to be for the people that already have a personal agent, which is mostly people in tech. But eventually, I think within a year, more or less, most people will have a personal agent.”

Although the ring will launch at $99, Natura plans to eventually raise the price. For now, the company wants to get the device into people’s hands, build usage, and create demand before doing so. After an initial three- to six-month free period, Natura plans to charge a $9 monthly subscription fee. 

The company says the ring’s manufacturing costs are comparable to those of products like the Oura Ring and Samsung Galaxy Ring because they use many of the same components. However, Natura plans to price its ring lower initially to reduce the barrier to entry and drive adoption. 

Image Credits:Natura /

As for health tracking, the ring tracks heart rate, resting heart rate, heart rate variability, different sleep stages, daily movement and step count, and skin temperature over time.

The company says the ring can last 6 to 12 days on a full charge, depending on usage, and takes 100 minutes to fully recharge.

While the smart ring market is filled with health-focused offerings from companies like Oura, Ultrahuman, and RingConn, as well as AI-focused ones from companies like Pebble and Vocci, Ferraris believes Interface stands out by combining both worlds.

“This ring that we’re about to launch is significantly different compared to any other ring out there today because we were able to combine not only the highest quality health tracking with the rest of the components that allow for agent communication and meeting recordings and external memory, but we were also able to do that with an incredibly long battery life, which is vital for a product like this, and in a size that is very, very small. The product itself is, from a hardware perspective, very different from anything else that’s out there.”

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

$39 Cloth Face Mask · Top10Gadgets

No for pollution protection, which is how it is sold. CoverSafe Pro is a washable fabric face cover with ear loops, and a $9 three-layer version adds a nose bridge. For dusty chores or cold, windy days it is fine. But the page calls it “anti-pollution”, “dust free” and “clean breathing”, and the EPA says cloth masks will not filter wildfire smoke. With no filtration data and a $39 price, a NIOSH-approved N95 is the better buy. CoverSafe Pro scores 3.0 out of 10, held back by its claims and price.

  • What it is: a reusable fabric cover for nose and mouth, with a three-layer upgrade.
  • Price: $39 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $99 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: a comfortable, washable cover for everyday use.
  • Biggest drawback: pollution and “clean breathing” claims without any filtration data.
  • Our score: 3.0 out of 10.

Fabric face covers are comfortable and reusable, and they have everyday uses. The pros reflect that. The cons are about what the page implies a cloth cover can filter and what it costs.

What we like

  • Washable and reusable, per the offer page
  • Shaped to cover nose and mouth, with ear loops
  • A three-layer version with a nose bridge is offered for $9 more
  • Light and comfortable fabric covers suit dust and cold-weather use
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • ‘Anti-pollution’ and ‘clean breathing’ oversell cloth: EPA says cloth masks will not filter wildfire smoke
  • No filtration rating, test result or fabric details
  • The nose bridge and third layer, which help fit, cost extra
  • At $39 for one, it costs far more than a box of NIOSH-approved N95 respirators
  • Checkout add-ons include a $39 soap dispenser and a $19 sanitizer bracelet
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

CoverSafe Pro is a contoured fabric cover that sits over your nose and mouth, held by elastic loops around your ears. Air passes through the fabric as you breathe, and the weave catches some particles. How much it catches depends on the fabric, the number of layers and, above all, how well the edges seal against your face, since air takes the easiest path around gaps.

The standard CoverSafe Pro cover. Image: CoverSafe

  1. Fit it over nose and mouth

    Step 1: Hook the loops over your ears and pull the cover up over your nose and down under your chin.

  2. Close the gaps

    Step 2: If you have the three-layer version, pinch the nose bridge so the top sits snugly with no gaps at the sides.

  3. Wash after use

    Step 3: Wash it after each day of use and let it dry fully before wearing again.

The page title calls it a “reusable face cover”, “anti-pollution cover cloth”, “dust free cover”, “anti fog face cover”, “clean breathing cover” with “triple layers”, and a “highly effective face cover”. The six bullets promise a natural fit over nose and mouth, being “easy to wear everywhere and regain freedom”, high air flow materials, “antiperspirant” properties for winter and summer, a lightweight “put and forget” design and many washes.

Single or triple layer?

The title mentions triple layers, but the checkout sells a “triple layer version” as a $9 add-on for “a more contaminated environment”. The standard cover’s layers are not stated. The add-on image shows a black outer layer, a grey mesh middle with a nose bridge strip and a white inner layer.

What the page leaves out

There is no fabric type, filtration test, breathability figure, size or washing instruction. “Anti fog” is listed in the title without explanation; a nose bridge, which helps reduce fogging glasses, is only in the add-on.

CoverSafe Pro suits people who want a washable cover for dusty chores, cold or windy weather, or places where a face cover is requested. It does not suit anyone who needs real protection from smoke, fine pollution or infection, who should use a well-fitting NIOSH-approved respirator. Our PureAir Max review covers another “clean air” product from the same checkout.

  • People who want a washable cover for dusty chores or cold, windy days
  • Anyone who wants a reusable fabric cover where one is requested
  • People who prefer fabric to disposable masks for everyday comfort

Dusty chores

Sweeping, light gardening or sorting a dusty loft: a cover can stop larger dust reaching your nose and mouth. For sanding, mould or insulation, use a rated respirator.

Cold-weather walkers

A fabric cover warms the air you breathe and protects your face from wind.

Everyday wearers

Some people like to wear a cover on public transport. Fit matters more than the brand.

Who should skip it

Skip CoverSafe Pro if you need protection from wildfire smoke, traffic fumes or fine pollution, if you need respiratory protection at work, or if you are at higher risk from infections and want the most protection available.

  • Anyone who needs protection from wildfire smoke or fine pollution: use a NIOSH-approved N95
  • People who need respiratory protection at work
  • Anyone at higher risk from infections who wants the most protection
  • Bargain hunters, since fabric covers sell for much less elsewhere

Not the fine particles that matter most. The EPA says cloth masks, wet or dry, will not protect you from wildfire smoke, and recommends NIOSH-approved N95 or P100 respirators that fit closely. The CDC ranks loosely woven cloth as giving the least protection of common options. CoverSafe Pro’s page offers no test to show it does better.

What the EPA says

The EPA’s wildfire smoke and ash guidance says cloth masks will not protect you from smoke and that a NIOSH-approved respirator marked N95 or P100, worn properly with no gaps, will reduce exposure. It also advises staying indoors with filtered air where possible.

What this means for you: on smoky or high-pollution days, use an N95 and limit time outdoors.

What the CDC says about mask types

The CDC’s 2022 guidance on types of masks and respirators ranks loosely woven cloth as the least protective, layered finely woven fabric as more, surgical masks and KN95s as more again, and well-fitting NIOSH-approved respirators such as N95s as the most protective.

“Highly effective face cover”

Effective against what is not stated. Without a filtration figure, the phrase cannot be checked.

“Anti fog”

Fogging comes from warm breath escaping at the top edge. A snug nose bridge helps, and that comes only with the $9 version.

What to do: if you buy, choose the triple layer version for the nose bridge and extra layers.

On 6 October 2026, one CoverSafe Pro cost $39, with the five-pack at $99 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered the triple layer version for $9, a touch-less foam soap dispenser for $39, a HandSan Wrist sanitizer bracelet for $19 and a 3-year warranty for $9. A box of NIOSH-approved N95s typically costs less than one cover.

CoverSafe Pro price and bundles

PackageTotalPer cover1 CoverSafe Pro$39$39.002 CoverSafe Pro$59$29.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$79$26.334 CoverSafe Pro$89$22.255 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$99$19.80

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. Two or three covers let you rotate while one is being washed. You can check today’s packages on the CoverSafe Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

Triple layer version

For $9, “additional protection for a more contaminated environment”. The image shows three layers and a nose bridge, the parts that make a fabric cover fit and filter better. If you buy, this is the version to get.

The $9 triple layer version and its parts. Image: CoverSafe

Touch-less soap dispenser and HandSan Wrist

For $39, a foam soap dispenser called FOAMatic that dispenses when you hold a hand under it. For $19, the HandSan Wrist sanitizer bracelet, which our HandSan Wrist review found listed at $39 on its own page. Neither has anything to do with the face cover.

The $39 touch-less soap dispenser add-on. Image: CoverSafe

Warranty

The 3-year warranty costs $9, nearly a quarter of the price of a fabric cover; skip it.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as panameedia.

CoverSafe ProScore 3.0/10

Best for: People who want a washable cover for dusty chores or cold, windy days

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

No. For pollution, smoke or infection, a well-fitting NIOSH-approved N95 protects far more and usually costs less per wear. N95s are tested to filter at least 95% of airborne particles. Surgical masks and KN95s sit in between. CoverSafe Pro’s only edge is that it is reusable and may feel softer.

OptionFiltration testedReusableBest forCostCoverSafe ProNoYesComfort, dust, cold$39NIOSH-approved N95Yes, 95%LimitedSmoke, pollution, infectionLow per maskSurgical maskYes, for fluidsNoGeneral useVery lowPlain fabric coverNoYesComfortLow

CoverSafe Pro vs an N95

N95s seal to the face and are certified by NIOSH. That is the clearest case where a rival wins.

CoverSafe Pro vs a plain fabric cover

A plain cover from a pharmacy or clothing shop does the same job for a fraction of $39.

Other health gadgets from this checkout

Our LiveTemp Pro review covers a thermometer, and our RadiationStopper Pro review a phone sticker sold with protection claims. Our KneeWrap Pro review looks at a knee support from the same seller.

If you want a washable fabric cover, you can see today’s bundles on the CoverSafe Pro offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

CoverSafe ProScore 3.0/10

Why people buy it: Washable and reusable, per the offer page

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

CoverSafe Pro is a real product from a named seller, and a face cover should arrive if you order. Before buying, decide whether you need a cover or a respirator, switch from the five-pack, choose the triple layer version, untick the soap dispenser and bracelet, and note the card statement name.

Cover or respirator?

What to do: for smoke, pollution, mould, sanding or infection risk, buy NIOSH-approved N95s instead.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $99 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one or two covers.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as panameedia. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. Worn face covers may not be returnable for hygiene reasons.

How to buy CoverSafe Pro the smart way

  1. Decide whether a fabric cover meets your need.
  2. Open the CoverSafe Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to one or two covers.
  4. Add the triple layer version; leave the soap dispenser, bracelet and warranty unticked.
  5. Note the card statement name, panameedia.

CoverSafe Pro scores 3.0 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.3, build durability 0.9, price competitiveness 0.3, usability 1.1 and owner satisfaction 0.4, each out of 2. A washable fabric cover is comfortable and reusable. The score falls on “anti-pollution”, “dust free” and “clean breathing” claims that EPA and CDC guidance do not support for cloth, no filtration data, a nose bridge sold separately and a high price.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.3 / 2Pollution and clean breathing claims unsupportedBuild durability0.9 / 2Washable fabric; no material detailsPrice competitiveness0.3 / 2$39 for a cloth coverUsability1.1 / 2Easy to wear; fit depends on add-onOwner satisfaction0.4 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal3.0 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for CoverSafe Pro by that name. Owners of similar contoured fabric covers on large retail sites tend to like the comfort and washability, and complain about gaps at the nose, glasses fogging, loops that stretch after washing and covers that become damp and hard to breathe through.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used CoverSafe Pro. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with EPA and CDC guidance on masks and respirators and the pages that rank for CoverSafe Pro. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Wash your hands, hold the cover by the loops, pull it over nose and chin, then pinch the nose bridge so there are no gaps at the top or sides. Wear it dry, swap it when damp, and wash it after every day of use. For smoke or pollution days, switch to a NIOSH-approved N95.

  1. Wash your hands. Before putting it on.
  2. Hold it by the loops. Not the front.
  3. Cover nose and chin. No gaps at the sides.
  4. Pinch the nose bridge. If you have the triple layer version.
  5. Do not wear it under your nose. It does little there.
  6. Change it when damp. Wet fabric is harder to breathe through.
  7. Wash after each day. Dry fully before reuse.

Washing

Wash with laundry detergent at the warmest temperature the fabric allows, then dry completely. Replace covers that thin or lose their shape.

Glasses wearers

Pinch the nose bridge firmly and pull the cover high on the nose. Your glasses can rest on top to seal the edge.

CoverSafe ProScore 3.0/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about children, exercise and how long a cover lasts. Children need smaller covers and supervision, exercise in a damp cover is uncomfortable, and covers wear out after many washes. Browse our health gadget reviews for other options.

Can children wear it?

The page does not list a child size. Children need a cover that fits their face, and the very young should not wear one.

How long does a fabric cover last?

Until the fabric thins or the loops stretch. Hold it up to a light: if it looks see-through, replace it.

Is it good for allergies?

It may catch some pollen. For allergy relief, staying indoors on high-pollen days and showering after being outdoors help more.

Does it protect others?

A cover catches some droplets you breathe out. Fit and fabric determine how much.

Does CoverSafe Pro protect against pollution?

Not against fine particles. The EPA says cloth masks will not protect you from wildfire smoke and recommends NIOSH-approved N95 or P100 respirators that fit well. A cloth cover may catch larger dust and pollen, but the page gives no filtration data.

How much does CoverSafe Pro cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one CoverSafe Pro for $39, two for $59, three (two plus one free) for $79, four for $89 and five (three plus two free) for $99, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. The triple-layer version cost $9 extra and a 3-year warranty $9.

Is a cloth mask as good as an N95?

No. The CDC ranks loosely woven cloth as giving the least protection, layered finely woven fabric more, surgical masks and KN95s more, and well-fitting NIOSH-approved respirators such as N95s the most.

Is the triple layer version worth it?

If you buy, yes. The CDC says layered, finely woven fabric protects more than loosely woven cloth, and the image shows a nose bridge, which helps reduce gaps. Both should arguably be standard.

How often should I wash it?

The page says it is washable and reusable many times but gives no washing instructions. Wash it after each day of use and replace it when the fabric thins or the loops stretch.

Can I wear it for exercise?

The page says it uses high air flow materials. Cloth covers can become damp with sweat, which makes breathing harder; change to a dry one if it gets wet.

Is CoverSafe Pro legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are anti-pollution claims without data, no fabric details, a high price and return postage at your cost.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

This content is for informational purposes and is not medical advice. Talk to a qualified professional before using any product that affects your health.

Prices accurate as of October 6, 2026. Check the seller’s checkout for current pricing, promotions and terms.

What we checked: No hands-on use. Claims, product title, feature bullets, photos, US dollar prices, bundles, add-ons and their images, warranty price, seller details and card statement name from the CoverSafe Pro offer page our link opens (gadgetxaura.com) and the data in the page’s own code on 2026-10-06. The 30-day guarantee text was read in the same page code that day; the fuller refund and returns terms are as recorded from the site’s terms page on 2026-10-04. The EPA’s wildfire smoke and ash guidance, the CDC’s January 2022 guidance on types of masks and respirators (via CDC Stacks) and the top-ranking CoverSafe Pro pages were read on 2026-10-06.

MemorySafeX Review (2026): Worth $59? · Top10Gadgets

Worth it only if your phone still has a Lightning or micro USB port and you want an offline photo backup. MemorySafeX is a 64GB swivel flash drive with Lightning, micro USB and USB-A plugs, and for an iPhone 14 or older it is a simple way to copy photos without a cloud plan. But every iPhone since the iPhone 15 uses USB-C, most current Android phones do too, the “64,000 photos” claim assumes 1MB files, and the page never names the app you need. MemorySafeX scores 4.2 out of 10, held back by its dated plugs and inflated photo count.

  • What it is: a 64GB metal flash drive with a Lightning plug, a micro USB plug and a USB-A plug, for copying phone photos and videos.
  • Price: $59 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $149 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: an offline copy of your photos with no subscription.
  • Biggest drawback: no USB-C plug, so it does not fit the iPhone 15 or later or most new Android phones without an adapter.
  • Our score: 4.2 out of 10.

A physical backup has real advantages: no monthly fee, no upload limits, no reliance on Wi-Fi. MemorySafeX delivers that for the phones it fits. The cons are mostly about which phones those are in 2026, and about claims the page makes without detail.

What we like

  • Backs up photos and videos without a cloud subscription or internet connection
  • Three plugs on one stick: Lightning, micro USB and full-size USB-A for a computer
  • A swivel metal cover protects the plugs in a pocket or bag
  • Small, at about 65 by 14 millimetres, with a key-ring loop
  • A one-off price rather than a monthly storage fee

What we don’t

  • Lightning only fits iPhones up to the iPhone 14; the iPhone 15 and later use USB-C
  • Micro USB fits few current Android phones, which mostly use USB-C
  • ‘64,000 photos’ assumes 1MB per photo, and phone photos are usually larger
  • The page does not name the app you need on an iPhone
  • One drive is a single copy, not a full backup plan
  • Return postage is yours to pay, and the add-on images show the same drive

MemorySafeX is a USB flash drive with three connectors. A swivel metal cover rotates to expose either end. One end carries a Lightning plug for older iPhones and iPads. The other end has a full-size USB-A plug for computers, with a micro USB tip, so the same end can go into an older Android phone. You plug it into the phone, copy photos and videos onto it, then later plug it into a computer to move or keep a second copy.

The drive with its swivel cover open. Image: MemorySafeX

  1. Plug it into your phone

    Step 1: Swing the cover aside and plug the Lightning end into an older iPhone, or the micro USB end into an Android phone that has that port.

  2. Open the app and copy

    Step 2: On iPhone, a companion app reads the drive and copies photos and videos onto it. On Android, a file manager or the phone’s own storage settings can usually see the drive directly.

  3. Move files to a computer

    Step 3: Plug the USB-A end into a computer to copy everything off the stick, so your photos live in more than one place.

The page title calls it a “high speed stable USB 3.0 controller” storage device for iPhone, Android and PC. The six bullets promise instant backup of photos and videos, plug-and-play ease, backup directly from your phone, 64GB for “64,000 photos”, iOS and Android compatibility and safe, secure transfer. It does not give read or write speeds, the app’s name, what file types the app copies, or whether the drive can encrypt its contents.

Why iPhones need an app

An iPhone can open USB-C drives in its Files app, but Lightning flash drives of this kind work through a companion app made for the drive’s chip. That app does the copying and lets you view what is on the stick. The MemorySafeX page shows no app name, screenshots or link. That is the one piece of information an iPhone buyer needs most.

Android and USB storage

On Android, USB storage generally shows up in the Files app or the phone’s storage settings when you plug it in, as long as the phone supports USB on-the-go, which most do. You then copy the DCIM folder, where your camera saves photos and videos, onto the stick.

MemorySafeX suits someone with an iPhone 14 or older, or an older Android phone with a micro USB port, who wants a local copy of photos without paying for cloud storage. It is a good fit for a relative with an older phone who does not want an online account, or as a second copy alongside a cloud backup.

  • Owners of an iPhone 14 or earlier who want an offline photo backup
  • People with older Android phones that still have a micro USB port
  • Anyone who wants a local copy of photos without paying for cloud storage

Owners of older iPhones

If your iPhone has a Lightning port, the drive plugs straight in. Phones from the iPhone 5 to the iPhone 14 all use Lightning. For a phone that is filling up, copying photos to a stick and then deleting some from the phone frees space without paying for a bigger iCloud plan.

Older Android phones

Many Android phones sold before about 2018, and some budget models after that, used micro USB. If yours does, the drive fits. Most Android phones from the last several years use USB-C, which this drive does not have.

People who avoid the cloud

Some people do not want their photos on a company’s servers, or have slow or capped internet. A stick in a drawer keeps photos under your control. Make two copies, though, because a single stick is easy to lose.

Grandparents and less confident users

A physical object can feel easier to understand than a cloud setting. Plug it in, press a button in the app, and the photos are on the stick. Help them set it up the first time, and show them how to check that the photos really copied.

Travellers

On a trip with limited Wi-Fi, a stick lets you clear space on your phone without waiting for uploads. Keep it separate from your phone, so losing one does not mean losing both.

Families sharing photos

A stick is an easy way to hand a batch of holiday photos to a relative who does not use shared albums. Copy the folder, give them the stick, and they can open it on a computer. Expect to get the stick back, or buy a second one for the purpose.

Small businesses and tradespeople

Some people use phone photos for work: before-and-after shots for a tradesperson, stock photos for a small shop. A stick gives a quick offline copy of those, but for business records a cloud service with version history and access from any device is safer and easier to share with an accountant or customer.

Who should skip it

Skip MemorySafeX if your phone has a USB-C port, if you want backups to happen on their own, or if your camera roll is mostly high-resolution photos and 4K video that will fill 64GB quickly.

  • Anyone with an iPhone 15 or later, or a recent Android phone with USB-C only
  • People who want automatic backups without plugging anything in
  • Anyone with a large library of 48-megapixel photos or 4K video
  • Buyers who would rely on one stick as their only copy of irreplaceable photos

Only if your phone has a Lightning or micro USB port. Apple moved the iPhone 15 range to USB-C in September 2023, and later iPhones followed. Most Android phones switched to USB-C years ago. MemorySafeX has no USB-C plug, so on most phones sold in the last few years you would need an adapter, and the page does not say whether its app works through one.

The iPhone switch to USB-C

Fortune reported on 12 September 2023 that Apple was adopting USB-C for all four iPhone 15 models, ending the Lightning connector on new iPhones. If you bought an iPhone in late 2023 or since, it almost certainly has a USB-C port, and MemorySafeX’s Lightning plug will not fit it.

What this means for you: check the port on the bottom of your phone before ordering. A Lightning port is a small, flat slot; USB-C is a slightly wider oval.

The Lightning plug and the USB-A plug, from the U-shaped holder add-on image. Image: MemorySafeX

Which iPhones have Lightning?

Every iPhone from the iPhone 5 in 2012 to the iPhone 14 range in 2022 uses Lightning, along with the second and third-generation iPhone SE. Many of these phones are still in daily use, often handed down to children or older relatives. Those are the phones MemorySafeX was designed for, and for them it plugs straight in.

Android and micro USB

Micro USB was the standard Android port for years, but most phones now use USB-C, and the EU’s common charger rules have pushed that further. If your Android phone has USB-C, the micro USB tip on this drive will not fit.

What about adapters?

A small USB-C to USB-A adapter would let the USB-A end plug into a USB-C phone or laptop. Whether that works on a phone depends on the phone supporting external storage, which most Android phones do. On a USB-C iPhone, you could open the drive in the Files app through such an adapter, but at that point a plain USB-C flash drive is simpler and usually cheaper.

What happens when you upgrade your phone

If you buy a USB-C iPhone next year, a Lightning stick stops being useful for backups from the new phone, though you can still read it on a computer. That limits how long the purchase stays useful. A drive with USB-C, or a cloud service, follows you to the next phone.

iPads

Older iPads use Lightning, and newer ones use USB-C. The same rule applies: check the port first.

Computers

The USB-A end fits most desktop PCs and many laptops. Recent MacBooks and many slim Windows laptops only have USB-C ports, so you would need an adapter or a hub to copy files off the stick.

Only if every photo is about 1MB, and modern phone photos are usually bigger. 64GB divided by 64,000 photos is 1MB each. A file-format guide puts typical 12-megapixel iPhone photos in the HEIC format at 1.5 to 2.5MB, larger as JPEGs, and 48-megapixel shots well above that. Formatting also leaves less than 64GB usable. Expect somewhere between about 20,000 and 40,000 photos, and far fewer if you store video.

Where the 64,000 figure comes from

The bullet “Large Capacity 64GB – 64,000 Photos” uses a round 1MB per photo. That fits small, compressed images from older phones. It does not fit current iPhones or high-end Android cameras.

What a guide says about photo sizes

A guide to HEIC files says a 12-megapixel HEIC photo is typically 1.5 to 2.5MB and the same scene as a JPEG 3 to 5MB. At 2MB each, 64GB holds roughly 30,000 photos. At 5MB, it is closer to 12,000.

Usable capacity

Storage makers count a gigabyte as a billion bytes, while computers often show capacity in binary units, so a 64GB drive usually shows around 59GB to 60GB free after formatting. That alone trims the photo count by several thousand.

Video changes everything

A minute of 4K video at 30 frames per second can take a few hundred megabytes, depending on the phone and settings. A camera roll with a few hours of video can fill 64GB on its own. If you shoot a lot of video, the stick will fill quickly.

What to do: check the size of your photo library in your phone’s storage settings before buying. If it is near or over 40GB, 64GB will not hold it all with room to spare.

Duplicates and organisation

Sponsored pages say MemorySafeX removes duplicates and organises files automatically. The offer page does not claim that. Whether it happens depends on the companion app, which the page does not name. Do not count on duplicate removal until you have seen the app.

File types

Sponsored pages also mention RAW, PDF and DOC support. On a computer, any flash drive stores any file type. On a phone, what you can copy depends on the app or file manager. If you shoot RAW photos or want to back up documents from your phone, check that the app handles them.

“High speed” with no figures

The title mentions a USB 3.0 controller, which can be fast on a computer. Over Lightning, transfers to an iPhone are limited by the phone’s own port, which on most Lightning iPhones runs at USB 2.0 speeds. The page gives no megabytes per second figure, so you cannot judge speed in advance. Large libraries can take a long time to copy.

On 6 October 2026, one MemorySafeX cost $59, with the five-pack at $149 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered an aluminium body for $9, a U-shaped holder for $4, a car charger for $9 and a 3-year warranty for $9. The main product photo already shows a metal body and a key-ring loop, so ask what the first two add-ons change.

MemorySafeX price and bundles

PackageTotalPer drive1 MemorySafeX$59$59.002 MemorySafeX$89$44.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$109$36.334 MemorySafeX$129$32.255 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$149$29.80

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. A second drive is useful for a second copy of your photos, so two is a reasonable choice. Five is more than most people need. You can check today’s packages on the MemorySafeX order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

The aluminium body

The $9 add-on promises protection “with aluminum body against physical damage”. Its image is a side view of the same silver swivel drive with dimension lines showing 65 by 14 millimetres. The main photo already shows a metal swivel cover. What to do: ask support what the standard drive is made of before paying for this.

About 65 by 14 millimetres, from the aluminium body add-on image. Image: MemorySafeX

The U-shaped holder

The $4 holder is described as an attachment to carry the drive. Its image shows the same drive again, swivel cover open. The drive already has a loop at the end of the swivel for a key ring. Skip it unless support explains what you get.

The car charger

A $9 USB car charger has nothing to do with backup. Skip it if you already own one.

Warranty and value

The 3-year warranty costs $9. Flash memory can fail without warning, so a warranty has some value on a backup device, but it replaces the drive, not your photos. Your real protection is a second copy somewhere else.

What a year of backups costs

A $59 stick is a one-off cost. A typical paid cloud tier with enough room for a large photo library costs a few dollars a month. Over two years, the costs can be similar. The difference is that the cloud runs on its own and keeps copies off-site, while the stick needs you to remember it and keep it safe.

The “regular price”

Add-ons are shown against crossed-out prices, and the page carries a countdown timer. Sponsored pages quote higher “regular” prices too. We found no evidence that MemorySafeX sells for more elsewhere. Silver swivel drives with this exact Lightning and USB-A layout are sold by many sellers under different names.

Spare connectors

If the Lightning plug bends or breaks, the stick cannot be repaired, though the USB-A end may still work on a computer. Keep the swivel cover closed when the stick is in a pocket, and never use the stick as a lever or stand while it is plugged into a phone.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as drone720x.com, which has nothing to do with storage, so note it down.

MemorySafeXScore 4.2/10

Best for: Owners of an iPhone 14 or earlier who want an offline photo backup

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

It is cheaper than ThePhotoStick Mobile and similar in idea, but cloud backup beats both for most people because it runs on its own and keeps copies off-site. For a USB-C phone, a plain USB-C flash drive is the obvious hardware choice. MemorySafeX makes most sense as a cheap second copy for an older Lightning iPhone.

OptionPlugsCapacityAutomatic?PriceMemorySafeXLightning, micro USB, USB-A64GBNo$59ThePhotoStick MobilePhone connector plus USB-AVaries by modelNo$64.99 in our reviewThePhotoStick OmniFour-way adapter headVaries by modelNo$69.99 in our reviewCloud photo backupNone neededBy planYes, over Wi-FiFree tier, then monthlyPlain USB-C flash driveUSB-C (some also USB-A)Many sizesNoVaries

MemorySafeX vs ThePhotoStick Mobile

Our ThePhotoStick Mobile review covers a better-known backup stick with a phone connector, USB-A and a dedicated app, at $64.99. It has the same Lightning problem on new iPhones and a short warranty. MemorySafeX costs a little less and adds micro USB. Neither wins clearly; both are aimed at older phones. Our is ThePhotoStick legit article explains what we found about that brand’s claims.

MemorySafeX vs ThePhotoStick Omni

Our ThePhotoStick Omni review looks at a version with a four-way adapter head that includes USB-C. If you have a mix of old and new devices, a multi-plug stick with USB-C covers more of them. That is a case where a rival wins on compatibility.

MemorySafeX vs cloud backup

Cloud photo services back up automatically when your phone is on Wi-Fi and keep copies in a data centre, so a fire, theft or lost bag does not take your photos with it. Most offer a free tier and charge monthly for more space. The stick costs once but only helps if you remember to use it.

MemorySafeX vs an encrypted drive

If privacy matters, our Omni DataSafe review covers a keypad drive with AES-256 encryption. MemorySafeX’s page promises “safe and secure transfer” without mentioning encryption, so anyone who finds the stick can read it.

MemorySafeX vs a plain flash drive

For a computer or a USB-C phone, a plain flash drive from a known brand gives you more capacity for the money and a clearer warranty. The only reason to pay more for MemorySafeX is its Lightning plug.

If you have a Lightning iPhone and want a cheap offline copy, check today’s packages on the MemorySafeX offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

MemorySafeXScore 4.2/10

Why people buy it: Backs up photos and videos without a cloud subscription or internet connection

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

MemorySafeX is a real product from a named seller, and a drive should arrive if you order. Before buying, check your phone’s port, ask which app the iPhone version uses, switch from the five-pack, skip the add-ons that repeat what the photos show, and note the card statement name. Then treat it as one copy, not your only backup.

Check your phone’s port

What to do: look at the charging port. Lightning or micro USB means it fits. USB-C means it does not without an adapter.

Ask for the app’s name

What to do: email support@g63com.com and ask for the iPhone app’s name, then look it up in the App Store before ordering. Check its ratings, last update date and whether it supports your iOS version. An app that has not been updated in years may not work on current iOS.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $149 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change it to one or two drives before you enter your details.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as drone720x.com. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: note the statement name, and read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. A drive that does not fit your phone is not a defect.

What to do: check compatibility before you order, and test the drive with a few photos on the day it arrives.

Delivery and support

The seller ships from overseas and gives no delivery estimate. What to do: save your order email, and if nothing arrives in three weeks, ask support for tracking.

Privacy

The page promises “safe and secure transfer” but mentions no encryption or password. If someone finds the stick, they can read every photo on it. What to do: keep it somewhere safe at home, and do not store passport scans, ID photos or banking screenshots on it. If privacy matters, use an encrypted drive.

App permissions

On iPhone, the companion app will ask for access to your photo library. That is necessary for it to copy photos. Check whether it also asks for location, contacts or network access it does not need, and decline anything unnecessary in Settings.

How to buy MemorySafeX the smart way

  1. Check that your phone has a Lightning or micro USB port.
  2. Ask support for the iPhone app’s name and check it in the App Store.
  3. Open the MemorySafeX order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  4. Change the five-pack to one or two drives.
  5. Skip the car charger, and ask about the aluminium body and holder before adding them.
  6. Note the card statement name, drone720x.com, and save your order email.

MemorySafeX scores 4.2 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.7, build durability 1.0, price competitiveness 0.9, usability 1.1 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. It is a straightforward backup stick for older phones. It loses points for plugs that miss most current phones, a photo count based on 1MB files, an unnamed app, add-ons that repeat the standard design and no independent owner ratings.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.7 / 2″64,000 photos” assumes 1MB files; “high speed” with no figures; iOS support limited to LightningBuild durability1.0 / 2Metal swivel cover; flash memory life not statedPrice competitiveness0.9 / 2$59 is below ThePhotoStick Mobile, above plain drivesUsability1.1 / 2Simple on older phones; app unnamed; no USB-COwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings; ranking pages are promotionalTotal4.2 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for MemorySafeX by that name. The ranking pages are sponsored articles quoting a 4.7-star average with no source. Owners of similar Lightning flash drives on large retail sites tend to praise the convenience for freeing up space, and complain about slow transfers of large libraries and companion apps that break after iOS updates.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used MemorySafeX. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with Fortune’s report on the iPhone 15’s USB-C switch, a guide to HEIC photo sizes and the pages that rank for MemorySafeX. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Back up to MemorySafeX regularly, check that the photos really copied, then copy the stick to a computer or the cloud so you have two copies in different places. Keep the phone charged during long transfers, copy in batches, label the stick with the date, and store it away from heat and magnets.

  1. Check free space first. Compare your photo library size with the stick’s free space.
  2. Charge the phone. Long copies can drain the battery, especially on older iPhones.
  3. Copy in batches. Do a year or a few months at a time rather than everything at once.
  4. Spot check. Open a few photos and a video from the stick to confirm they copied.
  5. Make a second copy. Copy the stick to a computer, an external drive or the cloud.
  6. Only then delete from the phone. Never clear your phone until you have two copies.
  7. Repeat monthly. Set a calendar reminder.

Backing up an iPhone

Install the companion app the seller names, plug the drive in, allow the app access to your photos and follow its backup option. Live Photos, edits and albums may not copy the same way as in iCloud, so check how they appear on the stick.

Backing up an Android phone

Plug the drive in, open your Files app, find the DCIM folder in internal storage, and copy it to the drive. Some phones also store screenshots and downloaded images in separate folders.

Restoring photos to a phone

If you lose a phone and want your photos on a new one, copy them from the stick to a computer first, then into your new phone’s photo library through your computer’s photo app or a cloud service. Restoring straight from a Lightning stick only works if the new phone also has Lightning.

Copying to a computer

Plug the USB-A end into a computer, open the drive, and copy the folders to a dated folder on your computer or an external hard drive. That is your second copy.

Naming and dating your backups

Create a folder on the stick for each backup, named with the date, such as “2026-10 phone photos”. When you copy the stick to a computer, keep the same names. That makes it easy to find a photo later and to see when you last backed up.

Following the 3-2-1 idea

A common rule for important files is three copies, on two different kinds of storage, with one kept somewhere else. For phone photos, that could be the phone, the stick and a cloud service or a drive at a relative’s house. A single stick in the same bag as your phone does not protect you from theft or fire.

Keeping the stick safe

Close the swivel cover when not in use, keep the stick on a key ring or in a drawer you remember, and do not leave it in a hot car. Flash memory slowly loses data if left unpowered for many years, so plug it in and check it once in a while.

If the drive is not recognised

Clean the plug gently, try another port, restart the phone, and on iPhone check that the app is up to date. If it still fails, contact support within the 30-day window.

MemorySafeXScore 4.2/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about whether sticks back up contacts and messages, how long data lasts on them and whether they slow down your phone. Most photo sticks copy photos and videos, sometimes contacts, rarely messages. Flash memory is fine for years but not forever. A stick does not speed up your phone unless you delete photos after copying them.

Does MemorySafeX back up contacts and messages?

The page only mentions photos and videos. Some companion apps can export contacts as a file. Messages and app data are better backed up through your phone’s own backup feature.

Will it speed up my phone?

Only by freeing space after you delete the copied photos. Copying alone does not change your phone’s speed.

How long will photos last on a flash drive?

Flash drives can hold data for years, but they are not designed as archives and can fail without warning. That is why a second copy, on a computer, a hard drive or the cloud, matters. Browse our phone accessory reviews for other backup and charging gear, and see our guide to the best phone accessories for the ones that scored highest.

Can I back up two phones to one stick?

Yes, as long as there is space. Make a separate folder for each phone so the photos do not mix. The app on each iPhone may create its own folder automatically.

Does it work with an iPad?

Older iPads with a Lightning port should work with the same app as an iPhone. Newer iPads with USB-C need a different drive or an adapter.

Can I use it like a normal USB stick for documents?

Yes. On a computer it works like any flash drive, so you can store documents, music or anything else, within the space left.

Does MemorySafeX work with iPhone 15 or 16?

Not directly. MemorySafeX has a Lightning plug for iPhones, and Apple switched the iPhone 15 range to USB-C in September 2023. Later iPhones also use USB-C. You would need an adapter, and the page does not say whether its app works through one. For newer iPhones, a USB-C drive or cloud backup is simpler.

Can MemorySafeX really hold 64,000 photos?

Only if each photo is about 1MB, because 64GB divided by 64,000 is 1MB. Photos from recent phones are usually larger: a file-format guide puts 12-megapixel iPhone HEIC photos at around 1.5 to 2.5MB, and 48-megapixel shots higher. Formatting also leaves less than 64GB free. Expect tens of thousands of photos, fewer with video.

How much does MemorySafeX cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one MemorySafeX for $59, two for $89, three (two plus one free) for $109, four for $129 and five (three plus two free) for $149, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. Add-ons cost $4 to $9, and a 3-year warranty costs $9.

Do I need an app to use MemorySafeX?

On an iPhone, yes. iPhones cannot open a Lightning flash drive in the Files app the way they open a USB-C drive, so drives like this rely on a companion app. The MemorySafeX page does not name the app. On Android, a file manager can usually see the drive if your phone supports USB storage.

Is MemorySafeX better than iCloud or Google Photos?

It is different. Cloud services back up automatically over Wi-Fi and keep copies off-site, which protects you if a phone and a drive are lost together. A stick is a one-off cost with no subscription, but you must remember to plug it in, and it can be lost or broken. Using both is safest.

Does MemorySafeX work on a computer?

Yes. The full-size USB-A plug fits most Windows and Mac computers, though recent MacBooks and many thin laptops only have USB-C ports and need an adapter. Once plugged in, the drive should appear like any other flash drive so you can copy files off it.

Is MemorySafeX legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are the dated Lightning and micro USB plugs, the photo-count claim, the unnamed app, the five-pack flagged as best seller and return postage at your cost.

A 3G Phone at $139? · Top10Gadgets

Check one line before anything else. MaxPhone’s own spec bullet lists GSM 2G and W-CDMA 3G bands and nothing newer, and in the US those networks are gone: the FCC says the big three carriers finished their 3G shutdowns in 2022, and T-Mobile began switching off 2G in 2025. Outside the US, where older networks may still run, you get a big-screen Android phone with dual SIM, FM radio and a headphone jack, but no stated Android version, RAM, storage or battery. The charger is $9 extra. MaxPhone scores 2.2 out of 10, held back by its network bands.

  • What it is: a large-screen Android phone with a triple rear camera, dual SIM, microSD, FM radio and a 3.5mm jack.
  • Price: $139 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $449 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: dual SIM plus the old-school extras of FM radio and a headphone jack.
  • Biggest drawback: the listed bands are 2G and 3G only.
  • Our score: 2.2 out of 10.

The pros are real features many cheap phones have dropped. The cons start with networks, which decide whether the phone can make a call at all.

What we like

  • Large screen, dual SIM with dual standby and a microSD slot
  • Keeps an FM radio and a 3.5mm headphone jack
  • Runs Android with Google Play, according to the page
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • The listed bands are 2G GSM and 3G W-CDMA only, and US carriers have shut both down
  • No Android version, RAM, storage, battery, processor or camera megapixels on the page
  • The charger is a $9 add-on
  • At $139, it costs more than budget 4G and 5G phones from known brands
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

MaxPhone is a standard slab Android phone with a notched screen, three rear lenses in a square bump and two SIM slots that can stay on standby together. The page says it runs Android with Google Play. Calls, texts and mobile data go over whichever of its listed networks your carrier still runs. On Wi-Fi, apps work regardless of the bands.

The MaxPhone as shown on the offer page. Image: MaxPhone

  1. Check the bands first

    Step 1: Compare the listed 2G GSM and 3G W-CDMA bands with the networks your carrier still runs before ordering.

  2. Insert SIM and microSD

    Step 2: Fit one or two SIM cards and an optional microSD card, then charge it with a USB charger.

  3. Sign in to Google Play

    Step 3: Set up the Google account and check the Android version and security patch date in Settings.

The page title piles up names: “Android Smartphone”, “Google Play Smartphone”, “Triple Camera Smartphone”, “HD Selfie Smartphone”, “Large Display Smartphone” and “Dual-SIM Mobile Phone”. Under the headline “A New Design Smartphone Packed With All Features”, it lists six bullets, the last being the network line.

The spec line that matters

“GSM 2G: GSM850/900/1800/1900MH, W-CDMA 3G: 850/1900/2100”. There is no LTE band anywhere on the page. That is the most specific spec MaxPhone gives, and it sets the ceiling on what the phone can do.

What the page leaves out

There is no Android version, security patch level, processor, RAM, storage, battery capacity, screen size or resolution, or camera megapixels. Top-ranking pages for MaxPhone add little: one widely syndicated article mentions an f/1.8 lens and “2G and 3G capabilities” but no core specs, and its buy links point to a third-party order site.

MaxPhone only makes sense where 2G or 3G networks still carry calls, or as a Wi-Fi-only handset for radio and apps. For US readers, our Xone Phone review looks at a $199 phone that at least lists 4G, though it runs an old Android version.

  • People outside the US in countries where 2G or 3G networks still run
  • Buyers who want a cheap second handset for FM radio and Wi-Fi apps
  • Anyone who values a headphone jack and dual SIM over speed

Buyers where older networks still run

Some countries keep 2G running for basic phones and machines. Check your carrier’s current network plans first.

A Wi-Fi handset

On home Wi-Fi it can stream radio, play music through the jack and run messaging apps, if the Android version supports them.

Dual-SIM travellers

Two SIMs on standby help people who keep a home and a local number, as long as both networks still run 2G or 3G.

Who should skip it

Skip MaxPhone if you live in the US, need a phone you can trust for emergency calls, want known specs and security updates, or are comparing value with budget 4G or 5G phones.

  • Anyone in the US, where 2G and 3G networks have been switched off
  • People who need a reliable phone for emergency calls
  • Buyers who want known specs and years of security updates
  • Anyone comparing value with budget 4G or 5G phones

For calls, texts and mobile data, probably not. The page lists only 2G GSM and 3G W-CDMA bands. According to the FCC, AT&T shut down 3G in February 2022, T-Mobile in July 2022 and Verizon by the end of 2022. GSMArena reported T-Mobile’s 2G shutdown starting in February 2025, after AT&T, Verizon and Sprint had already dropped 2G. Prepaid brands ride these same networks.

What the FCC says

The FCC’s guide to the 3G network phase-out warns that many older phones will be unable to make or receive calls and texts, including calls to 911, or use data once 3G is gone. It lists Cricket, Boost, Straight Talk and Lifeline providers among those that use the big carriers’ networks.

What this means for you: switching to a smaller carrier does not bring 3G back.

2G is going too

GSMArena’s report on T-Mobile’s 2G shutdown said it would begin on 9 February 2025. That was the last major US 2G network.

Outside the US

Many countries are retiring 2G and 3G on their own timetables, and some keep 2G for basic phones. What to do: look up your carrier’s network sunset page and confirm it supports these exact bands before you order.

Could it secretly support 4G?

Possibly, but nothing on the page says so. What to do: email support@g63com.com for the full band list, including any LTE bands and VoLTE, and keep the reply.

The features listed are plausible but unmeasured. A large display, triple camera, HD front camera, dual SIM, microSD, FM radio and a headphone jack are all common on low-cost Android phones. With no resolution, megapixels, battery size or Android version, you cannot judge picture quality, battery life or how long apps will keep working.

“Large Display Easy To Read”

No size or resolution is given. The photo shows a notched, full-screen design styled after recent iPhones, with an Android logo beside it.

“Triple Back Camera System”

Three lenses are visible. Budget phones often pair one main sensor with low-resolution depth or macro lenses; without figures, expect modest photos.

“Featuring FM Radio And 3.5mm Jack”

Both are genuinely useful and rarer on newer phones. FM radio usually needs wired headphones as the antenna.

Android version and updates

Our Xone Phone review explains how Chrome dropped support for older Android versions in 2025. Without a stated version, check Settings on arrival and return it inside 30 days if it is very old.

On 6 October 2026, one MaxPhone cost $139, with the five-pack at $449 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered a clear case for $4, a “Power Brick” charger for $9, a USB car adapter for $4 and a 3-year warranty for $24. Budget phones from established brands with 4G or 5G and stated update support can cost about the same or less.

MaxPhone price and bundles

PackageTotalPer phone1 MaxPhone$139$139.002 MaxPhones$249$124.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$329$109.674 MaxPhones$399$99.755 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$449$89.80

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. You can check today’s packages on the MaxPhone order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

Case and charger

The $4 case is clear with “an additional free screen protector layer”. The $9 Power Brick is described as an “original power adapter”, which suggests no charger in the box. A USB charger you already own will do.

Images: MaxPhone

Warranty

The 3-year warranty costs $24, about a sixth of the phone’s price. It does not fix network compatibility.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as drone720x.com.

MaxPhoneScore 2.2/10

Best for: People outside the US in countries where 2G or 3G networks still run

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

For US buyers, a budget 4G or 5G phone from a known brand wins easily. It works on current networks, lists its specs and gets stated security updates. Against the other phones sold through similar checkouts, MaxPhone’s network list is the weakest we have seen.

PhoneNetworks listedAndroid version statedPrice seenMaxPhone2G and 3GNo$139Xone Phone4G LTE claimedYes, old$199ZenPhone XS (card-sized keypad phone)Not statedNo (not a smartphone)$99Budget brand-name 4G/5G phone4G or 5GYes, with update policySimilar or less

MaxPhone vs the ZenPhone XS and TacticPhoneX

Our ZenPhone XS review covers a credit-card-sized backup phone, and our TacticPhoneX review a rugged phone sold for outdoor work. Check each one’s band list the same way.

Where a rival wins

Android Central reported that Samsung’s Galaxy A16 5G came to the US with a promise of long software support. A phone like that works on US networks today and for years.

If you live where MaxPhone’s bands still run, you can see today’s bundles on the MaxPhone offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

MaxPhoneScore 2.2/10

Why people buy it: Large screen, dual SIM with dual standby and a microSD slot

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

MaxPhone is a real phone from a named seller, and a handset should arrive if you order. The question is whether it will connect. Before buying, get the full band list in writing, check your carrier, switch from the five-pack and note the card statement name.

Get the bands in writing

What to do: email support@g63com.com for the full network band list and Android version, then compare it with your carrier’s supported bands.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $449 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one phone.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as drone720x.com, which does not match the product name. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. A phone that works but cannot find your network may not count as defective, so test it on day one.

How to buy MaxPhone the smart way

  1. Ask support for the full band list and Android version.
  2. Open the MaxPhone order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to one phone.
  4. Skip the charger if you own a USB charger; add the case if you want.
  5. Note the card statement name, drone720x.com.

MaxPhone scores 2.2 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.4, build durability 0.6, price competitiveness 0.3, usability 0.6 and owner satisfaction 0.3, each out of 2. It has dual SIM, FM radio and a headphone jack. The score falls on 2G and 3G-only bands that US carriers no longer run, no core specs, a charger sold separately and a price above brand-name budget phones.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.4 / 2″Packed With All Features” with no specsBuild durability0.6 / 2Unknown build and batteryPrice competitiveness0.3 / 2Above brand-name 4G phonesUsability0.6 / 2Networks limit calls and dataOwner satisfaction0.3 / 2Only promotional reviews foundTotal2.2 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer ratings for MaxPhone. The top-ranking “reviews” are syndicated promotional articles with order links, not independent owner feedback.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used MaxPhone. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with the FCC’s 3G guide, GSMArena’s 2G report and the pages that rank for MaxPhone. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Spend the first day proving it works on your network. Insert your SIM, make a call and send a text away from Wi-Fi, check Settings for the Android version and patch date, and test mobile data. If any of these fail, contact support for a return inside the 30-day window.

  1. Test calls off Wi-Fi. Turn Wi-Fi off, call and text.
  2. Check the network type. Settings shows whether it connects at 2G, 3G or not at all.
  3. Read the Android version. Settings, About phone.
  4. Update apps. Open Google Play and update everything.
  5. Add a microSD card. Storage size is not stated.
  6. Set a screen lock. Protect accounts on an unknown build.
  7. Keep the packaging. You may need it for a return.

Using FM radio

Plug in wired headphones; they usually act as the aerial.

Dual SIM

Choose which SIM handles calls and which handles data in Settings.

MaxPhoneScore 2.2/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about Wi-Fi calling, WhatsApp and unlocking. Messaging apps work on Wi-Fi if the Android version supports them, and the phone is sold unlocked by the look of the dual-SIM listing. Browse our tech gadget reviews for more.

Can I use WhatsApp on Wi-Fi?

Usually yes, if the app still supports its Android version.

Is it unlocked?

The page does not say. Dual-SIM listings like this are usually unlocked.

Does it support Wi-Fi calling?

Not stated. Carrier Wi-Fi calling usually needs VoLTE support.

Can I use it as a kid’s first phone?

Not in the US, where it may not call 911. Pick a 4G or 5G phone.

Will MaxPhone work in the US?

Probably not for calls or mobile data. The page lists only 2G GSM and 3G W-CDMA bands. The FCC says AT&T, T-Mobile and Verizon finished shutting down their 3G networks in 2022, and GSMArena reported T-Mobile’s 2G shutdown from February 2025. Wi-Fi would still work.

How much does MaxPhone cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one MaxPhone for $139, two for $249, three (two plus one free) for $329, four for $399 and five (three plus two free) for $449, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. A case cost $4, a charger $9 and a 3-year warranty $24.

Does MaxPhone have 4G?

The page does not list any 4G LTE bands. Its spec bullet names GSM 850/900/1800/1900 and W-CDMA 850/1900/2100 only. Ask the seller for the full band list in writing before ordering.

What are MaxPhone’s specs?

The page gives a large display, triple rear camera, HD front camera, dual SIM with dual standby, microSD, FM radio, a 3.5mm jack and the 2G and 3G bands. It gives no Android version, RAM, storage, processor, battery capacity or camera resolution.

Does MaxPhone come with a charger?

The checkout sells a ‘Power Brick’ original power adapter for $9 as an add-on, which suggests it is not in the box. Any USB charger you already own should work.

Can I call 911 on MaxPhone?

The FCC warns that older phones relying on 3G may be unable to make calls, including to 911, after the shutdowns. Do not rely on a 2G and 3G-only phone as your emergency phone in the US.

Is MaxPhone legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are 2G and 3G-only bands, no core specs, a charger sold separately and return postage at your cost.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Prices accurate as of October 6, 2026. Check the seller’s checkout for current pricing, promotions and terms.

What we checked: No hands-on use. Claims, product title, feature bullets including the network bands, photos, US dollar prices, bundles, add-ons and their images, warranty price, seller details and card statement name from the MaxPhone offer page our link opens (gadgetxaura.com) and the data in the page’s own code on 2026-10-06. The 30-day guarantee text was read in the same page code that day; the fuller refund and returns terms are as recorded from the site’s terms page on 2026-10-04. The FCC’s 3G phase-out guide, GSMArena’s report on T-Mobile’s 2G shutdown, Android Central’s Galaxy A16 5G report and the top-ranking MaxPhone pages were read on 2026-10-06.

In-Ear Sound Amplifier · Top10Gadgets

No if you have hearing loss. PicoBuds Pro is a tiny in-canal device with a volume wheel and a size 10 battery, sold in red and blue as a “hearing aid”. Its own instruction manual, shown in the box photo, is titled “Hearing Amplifier”, and the FDA says amplifiers are not intended to compensate for hearing loss. Noise reduction is a $14 add-on, and FDA-registered OTC hearing aids now cost about the same or less. PicoBuds Pro scores 3.2 out of 10, held back by how it is sold.

  • What it is: a small in-canal sound amplifier with a volume wheel.
  • Price: $79 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $197 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: discreet and simple, with common batteries.
  • Biggest drawback: marketed as a hearing aid but labelled an amplifier, with no fitting.
  • Our score: 3.2 out of 10.

Small amplifiers have a place for people with normal hearing in quiet settings. The pros reflect that. The cons are about the hearing aid marketing, paid extras and better alternatives.

What we like

  • Small in-canal design that is discreet in the ear
  • Simple volume wheel, with red and blue shells to tell right from left
  • Uses common size 10 batteries, one included per the page
  • The box image lists a case, wax guard tool, cleaning brush and three ear tips
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • Sold as a ‘hearing aid’, but the box’s own manual says ‘hearing amplifier’
  • The FDA says amplifiers are not intended to compensate for hearing loss
  • Noise reduction is a $14 add-on, and the hard case is $9 more
  • No fitting, frequency shaping or app, unlike OTC hearing aids
  • OTC hearing aids such as Audien’s models cost about the same or less with FDA status
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

PicoBuds Pro is a tiny shell that sits in the ear canal, with a microphone, an amplifier, a small speaker and a size 10 battery. A wheel on the outer face sets the volume, and a thin string helps pull it out. It makes all incoming sound louder. Unlike a hearing aid, it is not tuned to your hearing at different pitches.

The amplifiers and their fit in the ear. Image: PicoBuds

  1. Fit a battery and an ear tip

    Step 1: Open the battery door, insert a size 10 battery and choose the ear tip size that seals comfortably.

  2. Insert it into the ear canal

    Step 2: Push the device gently into the ear canal with the pull string facing out, red for the right ear and blue for the left.

  3. Set the volume

    Step 3: Turn the small wheel until sounds are clearer but not uncomfortably loud, and pull the string to remove it.

The page title calls it an “adjustable hearing amplifier device”, “hear aid dual amplifier”, “volume controlled hearing aid”, “quality hearing aid device” and “adjustable amplification hearing aid”. The six bullets promise a “non-invasive hearing aid device”, light weight, an “invisible nude color” front, easy adjustable amplification, silicone buds for insulation and long battery life with an A10 battery included.

The box contents

The hard case add-on image shows a black case, a manual titled “Hearing Amplifier Instruction Manual”, a wax guard tool, a cleaning brush, three ear tips, one red device and one size 10 battery.

One or two?

The image shows one device. If you want one for each ear, you need two, which the bundles reflect. Red usually marks the right ear and blue the left.

PicoBuds Pro suits adults with normal hearing who want a small boost in quiet settings, and anyone who understands it is an amplifier, not a treatment. People with hearing loss should look at OTC or prescription hearing aids. Our HearingAid Max review covers a behind-the-ear amplifier from the same checkout.

  • Adults with normal hearing who want a little boost in quiet settings, like lectures or TV
  • People who want a discreet amplifier while waiting for a hearing test
  • Anyone who understands it is an amplifier, not a hearing aid

Quiet listening

Lectures, sermons or quiet TV watching are where a simple amplifier helps most.

Before a hearing test

Some people use an amplifier while waiting for an appointment. Do not let it delay the test.

Who should skip it

Skip PicoBuds Pro if you have diagnosed or suspected hearing loss, ear pain, discharge, sudden or one-sided hearing loss, a perforated eardrum or past ear surgery, or if tiny batteries and controls are hard for you to handle.

  • Anyone with diagnosed or suspected hearing loss: an OTC or prescription hearing aid is designed for that
  • People with ear pain, discharge, sudden hearing loss or tinnitus in one ear, who need a doctor
  • Anyone with a perforated eardrum or ear surgery history
  • People who struggle with tiny batteries and controls

Its own manual says amplifier. The FDA’s guidance separates personal sound amplification products, for people without hearing impairment, from hearing aids, which are intended to compensate for hearing loss. Since 2022, OTC hearing aids for adults with perceived mild to moderate loss are a regulated category. We found no sign PicoBuds Pro has that status.

What the FDA says

The FDA’s guidance on hearing aids and personal sound amplification products explains that amplifiers are intended to amplify environmental sound for non-hearing-impaired consumers and are not intended to compensate for hearing impairment. Its OTC hearing aid page explains what to look for in a legally sold OTC aid.

What this means for you: if you have hearing loss, look for “OTC hearing aid” on the label.

Why fitting matters

Hearing loss usually affects some pitches more than others. Hearing aids shape sound to match; amplifiers turn everything up, which can make noise louder and speech no clearer.

Get a hearing check

Earwax, infections and other treatable problems can cause hearing loss. Sudden loss in one ear needs urgent medical care.

What to do: book a hearing test with a GP, audiologist or pharmacy service.

“Non-invasive”

The device sits inside the ear canal. Push it in gently, never force it, and stop if it causes pain.

On 6 October 2026, one PicoBuds Pro cost $79, with the five-pack at $197 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered a hard case for $9, smart noise reduction for $14, a USB car adapter for $4 and a 3-year warranty for $9. For both ears with noise reduction, the cost climbs well past $119.

PicoBuds Pro price and bundles

PackageTotalPer device1 PicoBuds Pro$79$79.002 PicoBuds Pro$119$59.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$137$45.674 PicoBuds Pro$179$44.755 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$197$39.40

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. Two devices cover both ears. You can check today’s packages on the PicoBuds Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

Hard case holder

For $9, “the original traveler set”. The image lists a black box among the contents, so ask whether a case comes as standard.

The $9 hard case add-on image, showing box contents. Image: PicoBuds

Smart noise reduction

For $14, “additional sound processing electronics for effective surrounding low frequency noise reduction”. The image shows icons rather than any technical detail.

The $14 smart noise reduction add-on image. Image: PicoBuds

Car adapter and warranty

A $4 USB car adapter has no use with a disposable-battery device; skip it. The 3-year warranty costs $9.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as drone720x.com.

PicoBuds ProScore 3.2/10

Best for: Adults with normal hearing who want a little boost in quiet settings, like lectures or TV

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

No. OTC hearing aids are designed and regulated for mild to moderate hearing loss, and some cost about the same. Audien’s Atom One and Atom Air, which we have reviewed, are sold as OTC hearing aids at prices close to PicoBuds Pro. Prescription aids from an audiologist suit more complex loss.

OptionRegulated for hearing lossFittingNoise handlingPricePicoBuds ProNo, amplifierVolume only$14 add-on$79 eachAudien Atom OneOTC hearing aidPresetsBasicSee our reviewAudien Atom AirOTC hearing aidPresetsBetterSee our reviewPrescription hearing aidYesAudiologistAdvancedHigher

PicoBuds Pro vs Audien Atom One

Our Audien Atom One review covers an OTC hearing aid at a budget price. Regulated status for the job is where a rival wins.

PicoBuds Pro vs Audien Atom Air

Our Audien Atom Air review covers a wireless OTC model with rechargeable batteries.

Other hearing products

Our Hears review covers a hearing product with an app.

If you want a simple amplifier for quiet settings, you can see today’s bundles on the PicoBuds Pro offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

PicoBuds ProScore 3.2/10

Why people buy it: Small in-canal design that is discreet in the ear

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

PicoBuds Pro is a real product from a named seller, and an amplifier should arrive if you order. Before buying, get a hearing check, decide whether you need a hearing aid, ask whether a case is included, switch from the five-pack and note the card statement name.

Get a hearing check

What to do: book a hearing test before relying on any device.

Ask what is included

What to do: email support@g63com.com and ask whether the case and spare batteries are included and whether the device is registered as a hearing aid anywhere. Keep the reply.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $197 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one or two devices.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as drone720x.com, a name unrelated to the product. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. In-ear devices may not be returnable once used.

How to buy PicoBuds Pro the smart way

  1. Get a hearing check first.
  2. Open the PicoBuds Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Choose one or two devices, not five.
  4. Leave the car adapter unticked; ask about the case before adding it.
  5. Note the card statement name, drone720x.com.

PicoBuds Pro scores 3.2 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.3, build durability 0.8, price competitiveness 0.6, usability 1.1 and owner satisfaction 0.4, each out of 2. It is a discreet, simple amplifier with common batteries. The score falls on “hearing aid” marketing for a device its own manual calls an amplifier, noise reduction sold extra, no fitting or app, and OTC hearing aids at similar prices.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.3 / 2″Hearing aid” for an amplifierBuild durability0.8 / 2Tiny shell; volume wheel can wearPrice competitiveness0.6 / 2Close to OTC hearing aidsUsability1.1 / 2Simple, but fiddly for some handsOwner satisfaction0.4 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal3.2 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for PicoBuds Pro by that name. Owners of similar in-canal amplifiers on large retail sites tend to like the small size, and complain about whistling feedback, background noise turned up with speech, tiny volume wheels and batteries that last only days.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used PicoBuds Pro. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with FDA hearing aid and amplifier guidance and the pages that rank for PicoBuds Pro. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Choose the ear tip that seals without pressure, insert the device gently with the string pointing back, and start at a low volume, turning up only until speech is clearer. Remove it at night, open the battery door to save power, clean wax from the tip regularly, and see a hearing professional if things do not improve.

  1. Pick the right tip. Snug, not tight.
  2. Right is red, left is blue. Check before inserting.
  3. Insert gently. Never force it.
  4. Start low. Raise volume slowly.
  5. If it whistles, reseat it. Or lower the volume.
  6. Clean wax weekly. Use the brush and tool.
  7. Open the battery door at night. Saves power.

Batteries

Size 10 zinc-air batteries start working once the tab is removed. Keep them away from children and pets.

Earwax

If wax builds up, see a nurse or pharmacist rather than pushing it deeper.

PicoBuds ProScore 3.2/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about tinnitus, phone calls and wearing them while sleeping. Amplifiers are not a tinnitus treatment, phone calls can whistle, and they should not be worn to sleep. Browse our hearing reviews for other options.

Can it help tinnitus?

Some people find added sound masks tinnitus. See a doctor, especially if tinnitus is in one ear.

Can I use the phone with it?

Holding a phone close can cause whistling. Use speakerphone.

Can I sleep in it?

No. Remove it at night.

Is it waterproof?

No. Remove it for showers and swimming.

Is PicoBuds Pro a hearing aid?

It is sold as one, but the instruction manual in the box image is titled ‘Hearing Amplifier’. In the US, OTC hearing aids are FDA-regulated devices for perceived mild to moderate hearing loss. We found no sign PicoBuds Pro has that status.

What is the difference between an amplifier and a hearing aid?

The FDA’s guidance says personal sound amplification products are for people without hearing impairment who want to amplify sounds, and are not intended to compensate for hearing loss. Hearing aids are designed and regulated for that purpose.

How much does PicoBuds Pro cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one PicoBuds Pro for $79, two for $119, three (two plus one free) for $137, four for $179 and five (three plus two free) for $197, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. A hard case cost $9, noise reduction $14 and a 3-year warranty $9.

What battery does it use?

Size 10 zinc-air hearing aid batteries, one of which is included according to the page. They are small and widely sold, and usually last several days of daily use.

Should I get a hearing test first?

Yes. Hearing loss can have treatable causes such as earwax, and sudden or one-sided loss needs urgent care. A hearing test also tells you whether an OTC hearing aid or a prescription device suits you.

Does it reduce background noise?

Only with the $14 smart noise reduction add-on, according to the checkout. Simple amplifiers boost all sounds, which can make noisy places harder, not easier.

Is PicoBuds Pro legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are ‘hearing aid’ marketing for an amplifier, noise reduction sold extra, no fitting or app and return postage at your cost.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

This content is for informational purposes and is not medical advice. Talk to a qualified professional before using any product that affects your health.

Prices accurate as of October 6, 2026. Check the seller’s checkout for current pricing, promotions and terms.

What we checked: No hands-on use. Claims, product title, feature bullets, photos, the box contents and manual title shown in an add-on image, US dollar prices, bundles, add-ons, warranty price, seller details and card statement name from the PicoBuds Pro offer page our link opens (gadgetxaura.com) and the data in the page’s own code on 2026-10-06. The 30-day guarantee text was read in the same page code that day; the fuller refund and returns terms are as recorded from the site’s terms page on 2026-10-04. The FDA’s OTC hearing aid page and its guidance on hearing aids and personal sound amplification products, and the top-ranking PicoBuds Pro pages were read on 2026-10-06.

Does It Work? · Top10Gadgets

No if you have rats, mice or bugs you need gone. PestOFF Pro is a plug-in box with two ultrasonic speakers that claims to drive away rats and insects and even stop rats breeding, and it is silent, simple and chemical-free. But Iowa State University Extension says no research supports claims that ultrasonic devices eliminate pests, the FTC has warned more than 60 sellers to back up such claims, and the add-ons sell features the photos already show. PestOFF Pro scores 3.3 out of 10, held back by the evidence and its claims.

  • What it is: a plug-in device with two speakers that emits ultrasonic tones meant to repel rodents and insects.
  • Price: $59 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $149 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: no poison, traps or mess.
  • Biggest drawback: ultrasonic repellers have no research showing they control pests.
  • Our score: 3.3 out of 10.

A device you plug in and forget is an attractive idea when you hear scratching in the walls. The pros are about convenience. The cons are about whether it does anything at all, and about claims that go far beyond what any repeller has shown.

What we like

  • Plug in and forget: no traps, poison or bait
  • Silent to most adults and uses little power
  • No chemicals around children and pets
  • Cheap compared with a professional pest call-out
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • Iowa State University Extension says there is no research to support claims that ultrasonic devices eliminate rodents or insects
  • The FTC has warned more than 60 sellers of ultrasonic repellers to back up their claims
  • ‘Stops rats reproduction’ has no evidence behind it
  • The main photo shows two speakers, yet a dual speaker upgrade costs $13
  • Pet rodents, rabbits and some pets can hear and be distressed by ultrasound
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

PestOFF Pro plugs into a wall socket and drives two small speakers that emit high-frequency sound, mostly above the range adults can hear. The theory is that rodents and insects, which hear higher frequencies, find the sound unpleasant and leave the area. The page says it uses a “double conversion system”, and an AI chip add-on promises varied tones to stop pests getting used to it.

The repeller as shown on the offer page, with two speakers. Image: PestOFF

  1. Plug it into a wall socket

    Step 1: Plug PestOFF Pro into a socket in the room where you have seen pests, ideally low down and with nothing blocking the speakers.

  2. It emits high-pitched sound

    Step 2: The speakers send out ultrasonic tones above what most adults can hear. The idea is that rodents and insects find the sound unpleasant and leave.

  3. Leave it running

    Step 3: It runs continuously. The page says it varies the sound, and the AI chip add-on promises more variation to stop pests getting used to it.

The page title calls it a “pest repelling ultrasound device, rats and bugs repellent ultrasound device, ready to use pest repellent device”. The six bullets promise immediate repelling action, stopping rats reproducing, multiple pest repellent, plug and play, a double conversion system and low power use. It gives no frequency range, sound level, coverage for the standard unit or test of any kind.

What the photo shows

The main photo shows a black oval unit with two round speaker grilles and a power button, plugged in front of a living room, with sound rings spreading towards a mouse and a cockroach on the rug. The page code describes a dual speaker upgrade as an add-on, though two speakers are already pictured.

Why sound struggles indoors

Ultrasound does not travel far and does not pass through walls, furniture or cupboards. It bounces off hard surfaces and is absorbed by soft ones. Rodents live behind walls, under floors and in cavities, exactly where a plug-in speaker’s sound does not reach.

Honestly, PestOFF Pro suits very few people. Someone who has already sealed entry points and set traps, and wants a chemical-free gadget as an extra that may do nothing, could try it. Anyone with an active infestation needs proven methods, and households with small pets should avoid it.

  • People who want a chemical-free extra alongside proven pest control, and accept it may do nothing
  • Buyers who have already sealed entry points and want to try a gadget
  • Nobody relying on it alone for a rodent problem

People with a single mouse sighting

One mouse in the kitchen is the moment many people buy a repeller. It is also the moment when a couple of snap traps and sealing the gap under the sink would solve the problem cheaply. A repeller can give a false sense of security while mice settle in.

Renters

Renters sometimes cannot make changes to a property. Report pests to your landlord, who is usually responsible for pest control and repairs. A repeller does not replace that.

Garages and sheds

Outbuildings have many gaps and plenty of shelter. Ultrasound loses strength quickly in open spaces full of clutter. Traps and tidying away food and bedding material work better.

Food businesses

Restaurants and warehouses appear in the add-on image. Food businesses are expected to have proper pest control, usually a contract with a licensed company, to meet hygiene rules. A plug-in repeller will not satisfy an inspector.

Allotment and garden owners

Rats in compost heaps and under sheds are a common problem. Ultrasound outdoors spreads and fades quickly, and gardens offer endless shelter. Covered compost bins, removing fallen fruit and bird food, and traps in tunnels are the usual advice.

People who dislike killing animals

Some buyers want a humane option. Live-catch traps are one, though you must check them often and release animals far enough away, where local rules allow. Proofing your home is the most humane step of all, because it keeps animals out in the first place.

Who should skip it

Skip PestOFF Pro if you have an active infestation, pet rodents or rabbits, a food business, or if you were hoping it would stop rats breeding.

  • Anyone with an active rat or mouse infestation, which needs traps, sealing and possibly a professional
  • Homes with pet rodents, rabbits, guinea pigs or other small pets that hear ultrasound
  • Restaurants and food businesses, which need professional pest control to meet hygiene rules
  • Anyone expecting it to stop rats breeding

The evidence says no. Iowa State University Extension states that there is no research to support claims that ultrasonic devices will eliminate rodent and insect pests. It reports that FTC complaints against sellers alleged rodents become accustomed to ultrasound and return to their nests and food, and that the FTC found ultrasound devices do not control insects. PestOFF Pro offers no test to suggest it is different.

What Iowa State University Extension says

The extension’s article Ultrasonic Pest Control: Buyer Beware summarises the FTC’s actions: between 1985 and 1997 the FTC brought cases against six companies over false claims, and in 2001 it sent warning letters to more than 60 manufacturers and retailers saying their claims needed competent and reliable scientific evidence. The article concludes that research does not support ultrasonic pest control.

What this means for you: if you have pests, spend the money on traps and sealing gaps first.

Rodents get used to it

Even when rodents react to a new sound, the effect fades. FTC complaints described any reaction as temporary at best, because rodents become accustomed to ultrasound and return to where they nest and feed. Food and shelter matter more to a mouse than an unpleasant noise.

The “AI chip”

For $4, the AI chip promises “seamless variations for hardcore repelling bugs and rats”. Varying the frequency is meant to stop habituation. There is no evidence on the page that it works, and calling a tone generator “artificially intelligent” is marketing.

“Stops rats reproduction”

This is the boldest claim on the page. Rats breed where they have food, water and shelter. We found no research showing that ultrasound stops breeding, and the page gives none.

Health risks of rodents

Rats and mice can carry diseases and contaminate food and surfaces with urine and droppings. That is why prompt, proven control matters, and why waiting weeks to see whether a repeller works carries a real cost.

Insects

The FTC’s position, as summarised by Iowa State, is that ultrasound devices do not control insects. Cockroaches, ants and spiders respond to food, moisture and shelter. Bait stations, sealing cracks and cleaning work.

The pages that rank for PestOFF Pro are promotional and describe pests leaving quickly, without citing any test. We found no independent evidence for this product.

On 6 October 2026, one PestOFF Pro cost $59, with the five-pack at $149 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered an AI chip for $4, a dual speakers upgrade for $13, a wide range mode for $7 and a 3-year warranty for $9. The main photo already shows two speakers, so the dual speaker upgrade is the one to question first.

PestOFF Pro price and bundles

PackageTotalPer unit1 PestOFF Pro$59$59.002 PestOFF Pro$89$44.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$109$36.334 PestOFF Pro$129$32.255 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$149$29.80

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. Sellers of plug-in repellers often push multi-packs for “one per room”. If the evidence does not support one, five will not help. You can check today’s packages on the PestOFF Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

Dual speakers for $13

The upgrade promises “two ultrasonic speakers for a more intense ultrasound”. Its image shows a white unit labelled “Pest Repeller” with two round speakers, the same layout as the black unit in the main photo. What to do: ask support how many speakers the standard unit has.

The $13 dual speakers upgrade image, which shows a white unit with two speakers. Image: PestOFF

Wide range mode for $7

For $7, the “wide range mode” promises around 200 square metres of coverage. Its image lists homes, restaurants, hotels, kitchens, warehouses and farms. The page gives no coverage for the standard unit. Ultrasound does not pass through walls, so a large figure on paper means little in a house of separate rooms.

The $7 wide range mode image, listing homes, restaurants, warehouses and kitchens. Image: PestOFF

Warranty

The 3-year warranty costs $9. The seller’s terms already cover defective goods for two years once you have a returns number. A repeller that powers on but does not repel would not be defective.

Electrical safety

The page shows no electrical safety marks such as UL, CE or UKCA, and does not say which plug types ship to which countries. A cheap plug-in device runs all day, every day. What to do: check the unit for safety marks when it arrives, and stop using it if it gets hot or the plug is loose in the socket.

Electricity

Plug-in repellers draw little power, so running costs are low. The cost that matters is the time pests spend settling in while you wait for a repeller to work.

The “regular price”

Add-ons are shown against crossed-out prices, with a countdown timer on the page. We found no evidence that PestOFF Pro sells at a higher regular price. Plug-in ultrasonic repellers of this shape are sold under many names.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as Matrixfze, written in capitals.

PestOFF ProScore 3.3/10

Best for: People who want a chemical-free extra alongside proven pest control, and accept it may do nothing

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Sealing entry points, removing food and shelter, and snap traps work; for a persistent problem, a licensed pest controller. These are the methods pest management experts recommend, and they cost little. Mice and rats get in through surprisingly small gaps, so finding and blocking them matters more than any device.

MethodWhat it doesEvidenceCostPestOFF ProUltrasonic soundNo research support, per Iowa State Extension$59Seal gaps and holesStops rodents getting inCore advice from pest expertsLowRemove food and clutterTakes away food and nesting sitesCore adviceFreeSnap trapsCatches rodents already insideWidely used and effectiveLowLicensed pest controllerInspection, proofing, treatmentProfessional standardVaries

PestOFF Pro vs sealing gaps

Steel wool, metal mesh and sealant around pipes, vents and gaps under doors stop rodents getting in. It is the single most effective step and the clearest case where an alternative wins.

PestOFF Pro vs snap traps

Snap traps placed along walls where you find droppings catch rodents quickly. Place them out of reach of children and pets, and check them daily.

PestOFF Pro vs Riddex

Our Riddex review covers a long-selling plug-in repeller that uses electromagnetic pulses through wiring. University studies found such devices ineffective, and the FTC settled with its then-maker in 2003. PestOFF Pro uses ultrasound instead and faces the same evidence problem.

Other gadgets with similar claims

Our BarXStop review covers an ultrasonic dog deterrent from the same checkout, and our Moskitron LED review and Mosquitron review look at insect light traps. Browse our household gadget reviews for more.

If you still want to try a repeller alongside proven methods, you can see today’s bundles on the PestOFF Pro offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

PestOFF ProScore 3.3/10

Why people buy it: Plug in and forget: no traps, poison or bait

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

PestOFF Pro is a real product from a named seller, and a repeller should arrive if you order. Before buying, understand that the evidence does not support ultrasonic repellers, ask how many speakers the standard unit has, switch from the five-pack, skip the add-ons and keep small pets away from it.

Deal with the pests first

What to do: seal entry points, set traps and remove food sources now. Do not wait to see if a repeller works while an infestation grows.

Protect small pets

What to do: if you keep hamsters, rats, mice, guinea pigs, gerbils or rabbits, do not use an ultrasonic repeller anywhere near them.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $149 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one unit, or none.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as Matrixfze. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: note the statement name, and read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost.

Delivery and support

The seller ships from overseas and gives no delivery estimate. What to do: save your order email, and if nothing arrives within three weeks, ask support for tracking.

How to buy PestOFF Pro the smart way

  1. Seal gaps and set traps first.
  2. Open the PestOFF Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to a single unit.
  4. Skip the AI chip, dual speakers and wide range add-ons.
  5. Note the card statement name, Matrixfze, and save your order email.
  6. Keep it away from small pets.

PestOFF Pro scores 3.3 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.2, build durability 0.9, price competitiveness 0.7, usability 1.0 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. It is simple and chemical-free. The score falls because research and the FTC do not support ultrasonic pest control, the breeding claim is unsupported, add-ons repeat features shown in the photos, and it can distress pet rodents.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.2 / 2Repelling and breeding claims unsupported; “AI chip” marketingBuild durability0.9 / 2Simple plug-in unit; no electrical safety marks shown on the pagePrice competitiveness0.7 / 2$59 for a device class with no evidence; traps cost lessUsability1.0 / 2Plug in and forget; risk to small petsOwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal3.3 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for PestOFF Pro by that name. Owners of similar plug-in ultrasonic repellers on large retail sites report mixed results, with common complaints that mice returned within days, pets reacted to the sound, and the units did nothing for cockroaches.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used PestOFF Pro. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with Iowa State University Extension’s article on ultrasonic pest control and the pages that rank for PestOFF Pro. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Find and seal how pests get in, remove what attracts them, trap what is already inside and call a professional if the problem persists. If you also use PestOFF Pro, place it low, unobstructed and away from pets, and judge it by droppings and catches, not by hope.

  1. Find entry points. Check around pipes, vents, doors and the base of walls.
  2. Seal gaps. Steel wool or metal mesh with sealant; rodents chew through plastic and foam.
  3. Remove food. Sealed containers, no food left out, bins with lids.
  4. Reduce clutter. Fewer hiding and nesting places.
  5. Set traps. Along walls where you see droppings, out of reach of pets and children.
  6. Monitor. Check traps daily and clean droppings with gloves.
  7. Call a professional. If signs continue after two weeks.

Where to look for signs

Check under sinks, behind appliances, inside cupboards with food, along skirting boards and in lofts. Droppings, gnawed packaging, grease marks along walls and nests of shredded paper are the usual signs.

Cleaning up droppings safely

Wear gloves, spray droppings with disinfectant and let it soak before wiping up. Do not sweep or vacuum dry droppings, which can spread dust.

If you use the repeller

Plug it into a socket low on the wall, facing open space, not behind furniture. Do not use extension leads. Unplug it if any pet seems agitated.

Signs it is not working

Fresh droppings, gnaw marks, scratching sounds at night or a musty smell all mean pests are still there. Switch to traps and sealing.

Insects

For cockroaches and ants, bait stations, cleaning up crumbs and sealing cracks work. Dampness attracts many insects, so fix leaks.

PestOFF ProScore 3.3/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about safety for people and pets, and whether different models work better. Most adults cannot hear ultrasound, pet rodents can and may be distressed, and there is no evidence that any plug-in ultrasonic model controls pests. Proofing and trapping remain the reliable methods.

Can humans hear ultrasonic repellers?

Most adults cannot. Some children and young people can hear high-pitched tones near the top of human hearing, and some people report headaches near these devices.

Do ultrasonic repellers work through walls?

No. Ultrasound is blocked by walls, doors, furniture and even curtains. Rodents living inside wall cavities or under floors are out of reach of a speaker plugged into the room.

Do they bother dogs and cats?

Dogs and cats can hear ultrasound. Many show no reaction; some seem bothered. Watch your pets after plugging one in.

Are some ultrasonic repellers better than others?

There is no evidence that any plug-in ultrasonic repeller controls pests. Different frequencies or “AI” variations do not change that.

How long should I wait to see results?

If you are using proven methods, you should see fewer signs within days to a couple of weeks. If you are relying only on a repeller and still see signs after a week, it is not working.

Does PestOFF Pro really repel rats?

There is no good evidence that it does. Iowa State University Extension says no research supports claims that ultrasonic devices eliminate rodent or insect pests. FTC complaints against earlier sellers alleged that rodents get used to ultrasound and return to nesting and feeding areas.

Can PestOFF Pro stop rats breeding?

There is no evidence on the page or in the research we read. ‘Stops rats reproduction’ is one of the bullets, with no study or explanation. Rodent populations are controlled by removing food and shelter, sealing entry points and trapping.

How much does PestOFF Pro cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one PestOFF Pro for $59, two for $89, three (two plus one free) for $109, four for $129 and five (three plus two free) for $149, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. An AI chip cost $4, dual speakers $13, wide range mode $7 and a 3-year warranty $9.

Is ultrasound safe for pets?

Dogs and cats can hear ultrasound, and pet rodents such as hamsters, rats, mice, guinea pigs and gerbils hear high frequencies very well. A device designed to bother rodents can distress pet rodents. Do not use one in a room with small pets.

What does the FTC say about ultrasonic pest repellers?

In 2001 the FTC sent warning letters to more than 60 makers and sellers of ultrasonic pest-control devices saying their efficacy claims must be backed by scientific evidence. Between 1985 and 1997 it brought cases against six companies over unsubstantiated claims.

What actually works against mice and rats?

Seal gaps and holes they use to get in, remove food and clutter, store food in sealed containers and use snap traps along walls where you see droppings. For a large or persistent infestation, call a licensed pest control professional.

Is PestOFF Pro legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are the lack of evidence for ultrasonic repellers, the breeding claim, add-ons that repeat what the photos show and return postage at your cost.

$199 Android Tablet · Top10Gadgets

Hard to recommend, because the page leaves out nearly everything a tablet buyer needs. ProTabletX is a $199 Android tablet styled like an iPad Pro, with dual SIM slots, FM radio, a headphone jack and USB-C. But there is no screen size, processor, memory, storage, battery, Android version or network band list, and the charger and cable are a $9 add-on. Samsung’s Galaxy Tab A9+ went on sale in the US from $220 with all of those published. ProTabletX scores 2.8 out of 10, held back by missing specs.

  • What it is: an Android tablet with dual SIM, FM radio, a 3.5mm jack and USB-C charging.
  • Price: $199 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $699 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: SIM slots and FM radio, rare on budget tablets.
  • Biggest drawback: no core specs, no network bands and no update information.
  • Our score: 2.8 out of 10.

The pros are a handful of real extras. The cons are what you need to know before spending $199 and cannot find.

What we like

  • Dual SIM slots for mobile data and calls, according to the page
  • Keeps FM radio and a 3.5mm headphone jack
  • USB-C charging
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • No screen size, resolution, processor, RAM, storage, battery or Android version on the page
  • No mobile network bands are listed, so SIM use in your country is unconfirmed
  • The “original power adapter and the USB-C charging cable” are a $9 add-on
  • Branded tablets such as the Galaxy Tab A9+ sell for about the same price with full specs published
  • The screen protector add-on image shows an iPad, not this tablet
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

ProTabletX is a slab Android tablet with a touchscreen, front and rear cameras, two SIM slots and a USB-C port. On Wi-Fi it runs apps from Google Play like any Android tablet, if Google services are included. With a SIM in, it can use mobile data on whichever networks it supports. The FM radio uses wired headphones as an aerial.

The tablet as shown on the offer page. Image: ProTabletX

  1. Charge it

    Step 1: Charge with a USB-C cable and charger; the page sells both as an add-on.

  2. Set up Android

    Step 2: Sign in with a Google account, then check the Android version, storage and security patch date in Settings.

  3. Add SIM cards if you need data

    Step 3: Insert one or two SIM cards for mobile data, after confirming the supported bands with the seller.

The page title calls it an “Android Smart Tablet”, “Entertainment Tablet”, “Dual-SIM Card Tablet” and “Affordable Android Tablet”. The six bullets promise an all-round tablet for entertainment and work, FM radio and a 3.5mm jack, dual SIM, an HD front camera, a “Calm-Colors Display Design For Avoiding Eyestrain” and fast USB-C charging.

The look

The photo shows a mint-green tablet with a square triple-camera bump and flat edges, closely styled after Apple’s iPad Pro, with an Android logo beside it.

What the page leaves out

Screen size and resolution, processor, RAM, storage and microSD support, battery capacity, rear camera resolution, weight, Android version, Google certification, network bands and charging wattage.

ProTabletX might suit someone who specifically wants SIM slots and FM radio on a tablet and accepts unknown performance. Our MaxPhone review covers a phone from the same checkout whose only listed bands were 2G and 3G, a reason to check bands here too.

  • Buyers who want a tablet with SIM slots and FM radio, and accept unknown specs
  • People wanting a basic screen for video and browsing on Wi-Fi
  • Anyone who values a headphone jack on a tablet

Wi-Fi video and browsing

For streaming and web on home Wi-Fi, a basic Android tablet can do the job.

FM radio fans

Radio without data is useful at home and when travelling.

Headphone users

A 3.5mm jack avoids adapters.

Who should skip it

Skip ProTabletX if you want known specs and Android updates, need dependable performance for school or work, want confirmed mobile data on a US carrier, or are comparing with branded budget tablets.

  • Anyone who wants known specs and years of Android updates
  • Students and workers who need dependable performance
  • US buyers who want confirmed mobile data on their carrier
  • Bargain hunters comparing with branded budget tablets

You are buying blind on the things that decide whether a tablet feels fast and lasts. Processor, RAM and storage decide speed and how many apps fit; the Android version decides app and security support; network bands decide whether the SIM slots work. The page gives none of them. Branded budget tablets list all of these, along with an update policy.

Android version

9to5Google reported in June 2025 that Chrome 139 requires Android 10 or later. An older version would lose browser updates. What to do: check Settings on day one and return it if the version is old.

Network bands

No bands are listed. Our Xone Phone and MaxPhone reviews show how much this matters in the US. What to do: email the seller for the full band list.

“Calm-Colors Display Design For Avoiding Eyestrain”

No blue-light mode, certification or display spec is given. Most Android tablets include a night light setting.

“Fast Charging Support Via USB Type-C Port”

No wattage is given, and the charger is sold separately.

On 6 October 2026, one ProTabletX cost $199, with the five-pack at $699 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered a screen protector for $4, a power brick with USB-C cable for $9, a USB car adapter for $4 and a 3-year warranty for $18. SamMobile reported the Samsung Galaxy Tab A9+ from $220 in the US.

ProTabletX price and bundles

PackageTotalPer tablet1 ProTabletX$199$199.002 ProTabletX$359$179.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$489$163.004 ProTabletX$599$149.755 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$699$139.80

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. You can check today’s packages on the ProTabletX order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

Power brick and cable

For $9, “the original power adapter and the USB-C charging cable”, implying neither comes in the box. The image shows a European two-pin plug. A USB-C charger and cable you own will work.

The $9 power brick and cable add-on. Image: ProTabletX

Screen protector

For $4, an “original screen protector”. The image shows a gold iPad with a home button, not this tablet. What to do: ask whether the protector is cut for ProTabletX.

The $4 screen protector add-on image, which shows an iPad. Image: ProTabletX

Warranty and car adapter

The 3-year warranty costs $18. A $4 USB car adapter charges in the car.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as Matrixfze, written in capitals.

ProTabletXScore 2.8/10

Best for: Buyers who want a tablet with SIM slots and FM radio, and accept unknown specs

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

No, on everything that can be compared. SamMobile reported the Galaxy Tab A9+ from $220 in the US, with 4GB of RAM and 64GB of storage, an 11-inch 1,920 by 1,200 90Hz screen, a Snapdragon 695 chip and a 7,040mAh battery that charges at 15W. ProTabletX is $20 cheaper with no figures at all.

TabletScreenChipUpdates statedPriceProTabletXNot statedNot statedNo$199 plus $9 chargerGalaxy Tab A9+ (Wi-Fi)11-inch, 90HzSnapdragon 695Samsung policyFrom $220

ProTabletX vs Galaxy Tab A9+

SamMobile’s report on the Galaxy Tab A9+ US launch gives the specs and prices. Known performance and updates are where a rival wins.

Choose ProTabletX if

You need SIM slots and FM radio on a tablet and the seller confirms bands and specs in writing.

Other Android devices from this checkout

Our Xone Phone review covers a phone running an old Android version, and our AndroidTV review a streaming box on Android 7.1.

If you still want the dual-SIM design, you can see today’s bundles on the ProTabletX offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

ProTabletXScore 2.8/10

Why people buy it: Dual SIM slots for mobile data and calls, according to the page

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

ProTabletX is a real tablet from a named seller, and it should arrive if you order. Before buying, get the specs and bands in writing, switch from the five-pack and note the card statement name, then check everything in Settings on arrival.

Get specs in writing

What to do: email support@g63com.com for screen size, chip, RAM, storage, battery, Android version and network bands. Keep the reply.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $699 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one tablet.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as Matrixfze. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. Check the specs on day one, while you can still return it.

How to buy ProTabletX the smart way

  1. Ask support for full specs and bands.
  2. Open the ProTabletX order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to one tablet.
  4. Skip the charger if you own a USB-C charger; confirm the protector fits before adding it.
  5. Note the card statement name, Matrixfze.

ProTabletX scores 2.8 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.4, build durability 0.6, price competitiveness 0.3, usability 1.0 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. It has SIM slots, FM radio, a jack and USB-C. The score falls on no core specs, no network bands, no Android version, a charger sold separately and a branded rival with full specs for about $20 more.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.4 / 2″For entertainment and work” with no specsBuild durability0.6 / 2Unknown build and batteryPrice competitiveness0.3 / 2Close to branded tablets with specsUsability1.0 / 2Android basics; performance unknownOwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal2.8 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for ProTabletX by that name. Buyers of unbranded dual-SIM Android tablets elsewhere often report slow performance, less storage or RAM than advertised, and old Android versions.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used ProTabletX. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with the Galaxy Tab A9+ launch report, the Chrome Android support report and the pages that rank for ProTabletX. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Use the first day to confirm what you bought. Open Settings, About tablet, and note the Android version, security patch date, RAM and storage; run a free benchmark app if you like; test a SIM away from Wi-Fi; and update every app. If anything falls short of what support told you, start a return inside 30 days.

  1. Read About tablet. Android version, patch date, RAM, storage.
  2. Check real storage. Settings, Storage, compared with what was promised.
  3. Test the SIM. Wi-Fi off, then browse and text.
  4. Update everything. System updates and Google Play.
  5. Turn on night light. For evening reading.
  6. Add a microSD card if supported. Storage size is unknown.
  7. Keep the box. For a possible return.

Battery care

Use a reputable USB-C charger; the page gives no wattage, so start with a standard one.

Security

Set a screen lock and avoid storing sensitive accounts if the patch date is very old.

ProTabletXScore 2.8/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about Google Play, calls and kids. Google Play depends on certification, voice calls over SIM vary, and children’s use benefits from parental controls. Browse our tech gadget reviews for more.

Does it have Google Play?

The page does not say whether it is Google-certified. Check Play Protect status in the Play Store settings.

Can it make phone calls?

Dual-SIM tablets sometimes support calls; the page does not say.

Is it good for kids?

Use Google Family Link and a case. A branded kids’ tablet may be simpler.

Does it support a stylus?

Not mentioned.

How much does ProTabletX cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one ProTabletX for $199, two for $359, three (two plus one free) for $489, four for $599 and five (three plus two free) for $699, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. A screen protector cost $4, a charger and cable $9 and a 3-year warranty $18.

What are ProTabletX’s specs?

The page lists only dual SIM, FM radio, a 3.5mm jack, an HD front camera, a ‘calm-colors display’ and USB-C fast charging. It gives no screen size, resolution, processor, RAM, storage, battery capacity, rear camera details or Android version.

Does ProTabletX come with a charger?

The checkout sells ‘the original power adapter and the USB-C charging cable’ as a $9 add-on, which suggests neither is in the box. The add-on photo shows a European two-pin plug. Any USB-C charger and cable should work.

Will the SIM slots work in the US?

Unknown. The page lists no 4G or 5G bands. Phones from similar checkouts have listed only 2G and 3G bands, which US carriers have switched off. Ask the seller for the full band list before relying on mobile data.

Is ProTabletX better than a Samsung Galaxy Tab A9+?

On published information, no. SamMobile reported the Galaxy Tab A9+ on sale in the US from $220 with an 11-inch 90Hz screen, a Snapdragon 695 chip and a 7,040mAh battery. ProTabletX costs $199 with none of those details stated.

Does it get Android updates?

The page does not mention the Android version or any update policy. Check Settings for the version and security patch date on arrival, and return it inside 30 days if it is old.

Is ProTabletX legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are no core specs or network bands, a charger sold separately, an iPad photo for the screen protector and return postage at your cost.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Prices accurate as of October 6, 2026. Check the seller’s checkout for current pricing, promotions and terms.

What we checked: No hands-on use. Claims, product title, feature bullets, photos, US dollar prices, bundles, add-ons and their images, warranty price, seller details and card statement name from the ProTabletX offer page our link opens (gadgetxaura.com) and the data in the page’s own code on 2026-10-06. The 30-day guarantee text was read in the same page code that day; the fuller refund and returns terms are as recorded from the site’s terms page on 2026-10-04. SamMobile’s report on the Galaxy Tab A9+ US launch, 9to5Google’s report on Chrome dropping older Android versions and the top-ranking ProTabletX pages were read on 2026-10-06.

Pocket Thermal Printer · Top10Gadgets

The main catch first: the printer in PrintX Pro’s photos carries a PeriPage logo and looks like the PeriPage A6, a pocket thermal printer that has sold for much less than $99. As a gadget it is fun: it prints notes, lists, labels and grainy black-and-white photos from your phone with no ink. But the checkout sells “the original” battery as an add-on, prints fade, and the page never mentions the paper’s cost or chemistry. PrintX Pro scores 3.4 out of 10, held back by price and the battery upsell.

  • What it is: a Bluetooth pocket thermal printer for 58 mm paper and stickers.
  • Price: $99 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $297 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: ink-free, quiet printing of notes and stickers from your phone.
  • Biggest drawback: a high price for an apparent PeriPage A6, with the battery sold separately.
  • Our score: 3.4 out of 10.

Pocket thermal printers are popular with students and journal keepers, and they genuinely work for small text and stickers. The pros reflect that. The cons are about price, the battery add-on and what thermal printing cannot do.

What we like

  • No ink or toner: thermal paper darkens with heat
  • Small and wireless, with phone apps for iOS and Android
  • Prints notes, lists, labels, QR codes and sticker paper up to 58 mm wide
  • Quiet and quick for short printouts, per reviews of the PeriPage A6
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • The product photos show a PeriPage logo; the PeriPage A6 has sold for far less elsewhere
  • The checkout sells ‘the original 1,000 mAh battery’ as a $7 add-on, while PeriPage A6 specs list a built-in battery
  • Black-and-white thermal prints are grainy for photos and fade over time
  • ‘Never ending, no ink consumption’ ignores the cost of thermal paper rolls
  • Many thermal papers use BPA or BPS developers; the page says nothing about the paper
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

PrintX Pro is a palm-sized white box with bear-ear corners, a lid for the paper roll and a slot where the print emerges. Instead of ink, a row of tiny heating elements in the print head darkens heat-sensitive thermal paper as it passes. Your phone sends the image over Bluetooth through an app; a USB connection works with Windows. Rolls come in plain paper and sticker versions about 57 to 58 mm wide.

The printer, app and supported systems. Image: PrintX

  1. Load a paper roll

    Step 1: Open the lid, drop in a roll of 57 to 58 mm thermal paper or sticker paper with the coated side facing the print head, and close it.

  2. Connect your phone

    Step 2: Install the app, switch on the printer and connect over Bluetooth. Windows users can connect by USB.

  3. Print

    Step 3: Choose a photo, note, list or label in the app and print. The heated print head darkens the paper to form the image.

The page title calls it a “portable Bluetooth thermal printer”, a “smartphone printer”, a “thermal label printer”, a “memories printer” and a “student printer”. The six bullets promise to “bring your digital memories to life”, print on stickers and common labels, “thermal technology never ending no ink consumption”, a “completely wireless fast connection”, printing “on large 58mm width labels”, and compatibility with iOS, Android and Windows.

The device in the main photo and in both add-on images is marked “PeriPage”, with “pocket thermal printer” on the front. A yktoo.com review of the PeriPage A6 describes the same design: a 1,000 mAh battery, 203 dpi, 57 mm paper and Bluetooth or USB connection.

Image quality

At 203 dots per inch in black only, text and simple graphics look crisp, but photos are dithered into dots. Reviewers of the PeriPage A6 called photo quality below par.

PrintX Pro suits students who print notes and study cards, crafters and journal keepers who like small black-and-white stickers, and anyone who wants quick labels from a phone. It does not suit anyone after colour photos or long-lasting prints. Our ThePhotoStick review covers a photo backup stick if keeping memories safe is the goal.

  • Students who print notes, to-do lists and study cards
  • Crafters and journal keepers who like small black-and-white stickers
  • Anyone who wants quick labels or receipts from a phone

Students

Short notes, formulas and to-do lists print quickly and stick into notebooks.

Journal keepers and crafters

Sticker rolls let you add small images and text to planners.

Home organisers

Quick labels for jars, boxes and cables, as long as 58 mm wide suits the job.

Who should skip it

Skip PrintX Pro if you want colour photos, prints that last for years, standard address labels or documents, or if you can buy a PeriPage A6 or similar for less.

  • Anyone who wants colour photos or prints that last for years
  • People who need standard-size labels or documents
  • Buyers who can get a PeriPage A6 or similar printer for much less

Fine for text, stickers and simple graphics, grainy for photos, and not permanent. Thermal prints fade with heat, light, humidity and contact with skin oils, and photos come out as black-and-white dot patterns. The page’s “bring your digital memories to life” suggests keepsake photos, which thermal paper is poorly suited to.

Fading

Thermal images are a chemical reaction in the paper’s coating. Over months, especially in sunlight, warm places or plastic sleeves, prints can fade. Some rolls are sold as long-life, which helps.

What this means for you: for keepsakes, scan or photograph the print, or use a photo printer.

“Never ending, no ink consumption”

No ink is true. But thermal paper rolls are a running cost, and sticker rolls cost more than plain ones.

What is in the paper

Many thermal papers use bisphenol A (BPA) or bisphenol S (BPS) as the developer. The Minnesota Pollution Control Agency’s page on BPA and BPS in thermal paper explains the concern, and the EU has restricted BPA in thermal paper since 2020.

What to do: buy rolls labelled BPA- and BPS-free, especially if children handle the prints.

Windows support

The page lists Windows. Reviewers of the PeriPage A6 noted that the Windows driver works only over USB.

On 6 October 2026, one PrintX Pro cost $99, with the five-pack at $297 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered “the original 1,000 mAh battery” for $7, a “high endurance thermal head” for $12, a fast USB car charger for $4 and a 3-year warranty for $9. Pocket thermal printers of this design have sold elsewhere for far less, including a deal of about $25 reported by AOL.

PrintX Pro price and bundles

PackageTotalPer printer1 PrintX Pro$99$99.002 PrintX Pro$159$79.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$197$65.674 PrintX Pro$249$62.255 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$297$59.40

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. You can check today’s packages on the PrintX Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

The battery add-on

For $7, “the original 1,000 mAh battery which can print up to three rolls with one single charge”. The image shows the printer connected to a phone and a laptop, not a battery. PeriPage A6 specs list a built-in 1,000 mAh battery, so it is unclear what the base order lacks. Ask before paying.

The $7 rechargeable battery add-on image. Image: PrintX

High endurance thermal head

For $12, a thermal head with a life span of “50km of printed paper”. The image shows the same printer printing text. Light users will never wear out a standard head.

The $12 high endurance thermal head add-on image. Image: PrintX

Car charger and warranty

A $4 USB car charger is optional; any USB charger works. The 3-year warranty costs $9, reasonable on a battery-powered gadget.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as panameedia.

PrintX ProScore 3.4/10

Best for: Students who print notes, to-do lists and study cards

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

No. If it is a PeriPage A6, buying that printer directly from a large retailer usually costs much less, with paper easy to find. For real photos, a Zink or dye-sublimation photo printer gives colour prints that last. For labels, a dedicated label maker uses standard label sizes.

OptionPrintsColourLastsPricePrintX ProNotes, stickers, photosNoFades$99PeriPage A6 from a retailerSameNoFadesOften much lessZink pocket photo printerSticky-back photosYesBetterMidLabel makerStandard labelsUsually noGoodLow to mid

PrintX Pro vs PeriPage A6

Same look, same specs, often a fraction of the price. That is the clearest case where a rival wins.

PrintX Pro vs a Zink photo printer

Zink printers produce small colour photos with sticky backs. Paper costs more per print, but results suit keepsakes.

Other computing gadgets we have reviewed

Our ThePhotoStick Omni review covers a photo backup stick for phones and computers, our Clickfree Ultra review a backup drive, and our Keyless PRO review a folding keyboard from this checkout.

If you want a pocket printer in one click and accept the price, you can see today’s bundles on the PrintX Pro offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

PrintX ProScore 3.4/10

Why people buy it: No ink or toner: thermal paper darkens with heat

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

PrintX Pro is a real product from a named seller, and a printer should arrive if you order. Before buying, ask whether it is a PeriPage A6 and whether the battery is built in, compare prices, switch from the five-pack and note the card statement name.

Ask about the model and battery

What to do: email support@g63com.com and ask whether the printer is a PeriPage A6, whether it works without the $7 battery add-on, and which app it uses. Keep the reply.

Compare prices

What to do: search a large retailer for “PeriPage A6” and compare.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $297 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one printer.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as panameedia. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost.

How to buy PrintX Pro the smart way

  1. Ask support about the model and battery.
  2. Open the PrintX Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to one printer.
  4. Skip the thermal head and car charger; add the battery only if support says it is needed.
  5. Note the card statement name, panameedia.

PrintX Pro scores 3.4 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.6, build durability 0.9, price competitiveness 0.3, usability 1.2 and owner satisfaction 0.4, each out of 2. The printer does what pocket thermal printers do, and it is easy to use. The score falls on a $99 price for what looks like a PeriPage A6, a battery sold as an add-on, “memories” and “never ending” claims that ignore fading and paper costs, and silence on paper chemistry.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.6 / 2″Memories” and “never ending” overstated; battery upsell unclearBuild durability0.9 / 2Simple design; battery and head lifespan unknownPrice competitiveness0.3 / 2Several times the PeriPage A6’s usual priceUsability1.2 / 2App printing is easy; Windows by USB onlyOwner satisfaction0.4 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal3.4 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for PrintX Pro by that name. Owners of PeriPage-style pocket printers on large retail sites tend to like the size and sticker printing, and complain about grainy photos, prints that fade, apps that ask for many permissions and paper jams with cheap rolls.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used PrintX Pro. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with a PeriPage A6 review, guidance on BPA and BPS in thermal paper and the pages that rank for PrintX Pro. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Charge it fully, load good-quality thermal paper with the coated side facing the print head, and use high-contrast images with the app’s brightness and darkness settings adjusted. Text, line art and QR codes print best. Keep prints out of sunlight and heat so they last longer, and buy BPA- and BPS-free rolls.

  1. Charge it before first use. Check the battery question first.
  2. Load paper the right way. Coated side to the head.
  3. Use high-contrast images. Dark subjects on light backgrounds.
  4. Adjust darkness in the app. Darker settings use more battery.
  5. Print text at larger sizes. Small fonts blur.
  6. Store prints away from heat and light. They fade.
  7. Choose BPA- and BPS-free rolls. Especially for children.

Paper jams

Use rolls of the right width and diameter, and do not pull the paper while printing.

App permissions

Pocket printer apps often request storage, camera and location access. Allow only what printing needs.

PrintX ProScore 3.4/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about paper, sticker rolls and app accounts. Most 57 to 58 mm thermal rolls fit, sticker rolls work if sized correctly, and some apps ask you to create an account. Browse our computing reviews for other gadgets.

Can I use any thermal paper?

Most 57 to 58 mm rolls with a 30 mm diameter fit the PeriPage A6 design. Check the size.

Does it print receipts?

Yes, it uses receipt-style paper, though it is not a point-of-sale printer.

Do I need an account for the app?

Some pocket printer apps ask for one. Check the app’s privacy policy.

Can kids use it?

Many children enjoy them. Use BPA- and BPS-free paper and supervise small parts.

Is PrintX Pro a PeriPage A6?

The printer in the offer page photos is marked PeriPage and matches the PeriPage A6 pocket thermal printer, which has sold online for well under $99. We cannot confirm what ships, so ask the seller whether it is a PeriPage A6.

How much does PrintX Pro cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one PrintX Pro for $99, two for $159, three (two plus one free) for $197, four for $249 and five (three plus two free) for $297, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. A battery cost $7, a thermal head $12 and a 3-year warranty $9.

Does PrintX Pro need ink?

No. It is a thermal printer, so the heated print head darkens special heat-sensitive paper. You do need to buy thermal paper or sticker rolls, which are an ongoing cost.

Can PrintX Pro print colour photos?

No. Thermal printing is black and white, and photos come out grainy. Prints also fade over time, especially in heat, light or contact with oils. For colour photos, a Zink or dye-sublimation photo printer is the better choice.

Is the battery included?

The checkout sells ‘the original 1,000 mAh battery’ as a $7 add-on that prints up to three rolls per charge. Specs for the PeriPage A6 list a built-in 1,000 mAh battery. Ask the seller whether the printer works without the add-on before ordering.

Is thermal paper safe?

Many thermal papers use BPA or BPS to develop the image. The EU has restricted BPA in thermal paper, and Minnesota’s pollution agency advises limiting handling. Look for paper labelled BPA- and BPS-free if you print often.

Is PrintX Pro legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are the price for an apparent PeriPage A6, a battery sold as an add-on, fading prints and return postage at your cost.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Prices accurate as of October 6, 2026. Check the seller’s checkout for current pricing, promotions and terms.

What we checked: No hands-on use. Claims, product title, feature bullets, photos, US dollar prices, bundles, add-ons and their images, warranty price, seller details and card statement name from the PrintX Pro offer page our link opens (gadgetxaura.com) and the data in the page’s own code on 2026-10-06. The 30-day guarantee text was read in the same page code that day; the fuller refund and returns terms are as recorded from the site’s terms page on 2026-10-04. A yktoo.com review of the PeriPage A6, an AOL deal report on a similar pocket printer at about $25, the Minnesota Pollution Control Agency’s page on BPA and BPS in thermal paper and the top-ranking PrintX Pro pages were read on 2026-10-06.

USB Anti-Theft Backpack · Top10Gadgets

Fine as a backpack, poor as a deal. BackXPack is a grey laptop backpack with a front pocket, mesh bottle pockets and padded straps, the kind of bag that suits a daily commute. But the “smart” and “anti-theft” features in the main photo, a side USB port and a combination lock, are $5 and $13 add-ons, the port needs your own power bank, and the page gives no laptop size. At $89, similar USB laptop backpacks cost far less elsewhere. BackXPack scores 3.6 out of 10, held back by price and paid extras.

  • What it is: a laptop backpack with optional USB pass-through port and zip lock.
  • Price: $89 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $267 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: a tidy, practical commuter bag.
  • Biggest drawback: the pictured USB port and lock cost extra, and the price is high.
  • Our score: 3.6 out of 10.

USB laptop backpacks are a popular, practical design. The pros reflect the bag itself. The cons are about how it is sold and priced.

What we like

  • Simple laptop backpack with several compartments and side mesh pockets
  • Water repellent fabric, according to the offer page
  • Padded, adjustable shoulder straps
  • Five colours, per the page
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • The USB port and combination lock shown on the bag in the main photo are $5 and $13 add-ons
  • The USB port is a pass-through: you supply and carry your own power bank
  • ‘Anti-theft’ depends on a zip lock that does not stop a slashed bag
  • No laptop size, capacity in litres or dimensions on the page
  • At $89, it costs several times similar USB laptop backpacks at large retailers
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

BackXPack is a soft laptop backpack with a padded rear compartment, a main compartment and a zipped front pocket. With the USB port add-on, a short cable runs from an inside pocket to a port on the side, so a power bank inside can charge your phone outside. With the lock add-on, a small combination lock holds the main zip pulls together.

The backpack, with the side ports and top lock visible. Image: BackXPack

  1. Pack the laptop against your back

    Step 1: Put the laptop in the padded rear compartment and heavier items low and close to your back.

  2. Connect a power bank, if you have the port

    Step 2: With the USB port add-on, plug your own power bank into the cable inside, then charge your phone from the port on the side.

  3. Lock the main zips

    Step 3: With the lock add-on, set your code and clip the main zip pulls into the combination lock when travelling.

The page title calls it a “premium backpack”, “anti-theft backpack”, “waterproof backpack”, “laptop backpack” and “smart backpack with charger”. The six bullets promise a comfortable adjustable design, use for “laptop, tablet, groceries, etc.”, several organising compartments, “water repellent special fabric materials”, a lightweight build and “five exclusive colors”.

What the page leaves out

There is no laptop size, capacity in litres, dimensions, weight or fabric name. The headphone port visible on the side is not mentioned.

“Smart backpack with charger”

There is no charger or battery in the bag. “Smart” here means a cable route for your own power bank, sold as an add-on.

BackXPack suits commuters and students who carry a laptop and a few essentials, and travellers who like a lockable main compartment. It is not the best choice for hikers or cyclists who need a waterproof pack, or for anyone after value. Our WildSurvive Pro review covers a survival kit if outdoor gear is what you need.

  • Commuters and students who carry a laptop and a few essentials
  • Travellers who like a lockable main compartment for hotels and hostels
  • Anyone who already owns a power bank and wants a tidy charging cable route

Commuters

A laptop, charger, lunch and bottle fit the typical layout of this design.

Students

Several compartments help separate books, laptop and stationery. The AAOS advises keeping loads light for children.

City travellers

A zip lock deters casual opening in hostels and on busy trains.

Who should skip it

Skip BackXPack if you want the best price, if you need a truly waterproof bag for cycling or hiking, or if you need to know your laptop fits before ordering.

  • Buyers who want the best value: similar backpacks cost much less
  • Hikers and cyclists who need a truly waterproof bag
  • Anyone who needs a confirmed laptop size before buying

Partly, and only with add-ons. The anti-theft feature is a $13 combination lock that keeps the main zips closed but cannot stop a cut bag. The fabric is described as water repellent, not waterproof, so heavy rain can get in. The “smart” USB port is a $5 cable for your own power bank.

“Anti-theft backpack”

Zip locks stop opportunistic hands. Thieves who cut fabric or take the whole bag are not stopped. Some dedicated anti-theft bags use cut-resistant fabric and hidden zips; the page claims neither.

What to do: keep passports and wallets in an inside pocket against your back.

“Waterproof” versus “water repellent”

The title says waterproof; the bullets say water repellent fabric. Water repellent fabric beads light rain, but zips and seams let water through in a downpour.

What to do: use a rain cover or keep electronics in a dry bag on wet days.

The USB port and flying

The FAA’s PackSafe guidance on lithium batteries says spare lithium batteries and power banks must travel in carry-on baggage only, and must be removed if a bag is checked at the gate.

Carrying comfort

The AAOS’s backpack injury prevention advice recommends using both straps, tightening them to keep the load close, packing heavy items low and central, and keeping loads light, particularly for children.

On 6 October 2026, one BackXPack cost $89, with the five-pack at $267 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered a built-in USB port for $5, an anti-theft combination lock for $13, a USB car adapter for $4 and a 3-year warranty for $9. With the port and lock shown in the main photo, the bag pictured costs $107.

BackXPack price and bundles

PackageTotalPer bag1 BackXPack$89$89.002 BackXPack$139$69.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$177$59.004 BackXPack$219$54.755 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$267$53.40

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. You can check today’s packages on the BackXPack order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

Built-in USB port

For $5, a port that lets “the connection of a power bank directly from BackXPack side USB interface without interfering with zips”. The image shows a phone charging from the side of the bag. A power bank is not included.

The $5 built-in USB port add-on. Image: BackXPack

Anti-theft combination lock

For $13, a lock “so no one can access” the main compartment. The image shows a small black three-digit lock clipping the zip pulls together.

The $13 anti-theft combination lock add-on. Image: BackXPack

Car adapter and warranty

A $4 USB car adapter has nothing to do with a backpack; skip it. A 3-year warranty for $9 on a fabric bag is optional.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as drone720x.com.

BackXPackScore 3.6/10

Best for: Commuters and students who carry a laptop and a few essentials

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

No. USB laptop backpacks of this exact style are sold widely by large retailers, usually with the port and often the lock included, and with stated laptop sizes. A branded commuter backpack costs more but adds warranties and better materials. BackXPack’s only edge is the bundle discount on multiples.

OptionUSB portLockLaptop size statedPriceBackXPack$5 extra$13 extraNo$89Retail USB laptop backpackUsually includedOften includedYesUsually much lessBranded commuter backpackVariesVariesYesHigher

BackXPack vs a retail USB backpack

Same look, the features included, sizes listed and easy returns. That is the clearest case where a rival wins.

Other accessories from this checkout

Our Y-Bra review covers a seamless bra and our Handsan Wrist review a sanitizer bracelet. For running gear, our RUNNR review looks at 2-in-1 shorts with a phone pocket.

If you like this backpack and want it through this checkout, you can see today’s bundles on the BackXPack offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

BackXPackScore 3.6/10

Why people buy it: Simple laptop backpack with several compartments and side mesh pockets

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

BackXPack is a real product from a named seller, and a backpack should arrive if you order. Before buying, ask for the laptop size and dimensions, confirm whether the port and lock are included, switch from the five-pack and note the card statement name.

Ask for the size

What to do: email support@g63com.com and ask for the laptop compartment size, dimensions, capacity and weight, and whether the USB port and lock come as standard. Keep the reply.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $267 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one bag.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as drone720x.com, a name unrelated to the product. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. Posting a backpack abroad can cost a lot.

How to buy BackXPack the smart way

  1. Ask support for the size and what is included.
  2. Open the BackXPack order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to one bag and pick your colour.
  4. Add the port and lock only if you want them; skip the car adapter.
  5. Note the card statement name, drone720x.com.

BackXPack scores 3.6 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.6, build durability 1.0, price competitiveness 0.3, usability 1.3 and owner satisfaction 0.4, each out of 2. The bag looks practical and well laid out. The score falls on a “waterproof” title with water repellent fabric, “smart” and “anti-theft” features sold as add-ons despite appearing in the photos, no size details and a price several times similar bags.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.6 / 2″Waterproof”, “smart” and “anti-theft” overstatedBuild durability1.0 / 2Common design; fabric and zips unnamedPrice competitiveness0.3 / 2Several times similar retail bagsUsability1.3 / 2Good layout and padded strapsOwner satisfaction0.4 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal3.6 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for BackXPack by that name. Owners of similar USB laptop backpacks on large retail sites tend to like the layout and value at lower prices, and complain about zips that fail, USB cables that loosen, straps that fray and rain soaking through.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used BackXPack. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with AAOS backpack advice, the FAA’s lithium battery guidance and the pages that rank for BackXPack. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Pack the laptop and heavy items closest to your back, use both straps and tighten them so the bag sits high, and keep valuables in an inside pocket. If you use the USB port, keep the power bank in an inside pocket and take it into the cabin when flying. Use a rain cover in heavy rain.

  1. Heavy items against your back. Laptop first.
  2. Use both straps. Tighten so it sits at the waist.
  3. Keep the load light. Especially for children.
  4. Valuables inside. Not in outer pockets.
  5. Lock the main zips when travelling. If you have the lock.
  6. Power bank in the cabin. Never in checked bags.
  7. Rain cover for downpours. Protect electronics.

Cleaning

Empty it, brush out crumbs and sponge it with mild soap. Air dry fully.

Charging cable care

Do not yank the external cable; unplug from the port gently.

BackXPackScore 3.6/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about airport security, washing and the headphone port. Laptops usually come out at security, most of these bags are hand-wash only, and the headphone port is a pass-through for wired headphones. Browse our apparel and accessories reviews for more.

Is it airport friendly?

You may need to remove the laptop at security. Some airports allow laptops to stay in bags.

Can I machine wash it?

Hand washing is safer for USB cables and coatings.

What is the headphone port?

A pass-through for wired headphones from a device inside the bag.

Can I use it as a carry-on?

Check the dimensions with your airline once you have them from the seller.

How much does BackXPack cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one BackXPack for $89, two for $139, three (two plus one free) for $177, four for $219 and five (three plus two free) for $267, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. A USB port cost $5, a combination lock $13 and a 3-year warranty $9.

Does BackXPack charge my phone?

No, not by itself. The $5 USB port add-on is a cable that runs from inside the bag to a port on the side. You plug your own power bank in inside and charge your phone from the outside port.

Is BackXPack waterproof?

The page title says waterproof, but the bullets say water repellent fabric. Water repellent fabric sheds light rain; zips, seams and heavy rain can still let water in. Use a rain cover or dry bag for electronics in a downpour.

Is BackXPack really anti-theft?

The combination lock, a $13 add-on, stops casual opening of the main zips. It does not stop someone cutting the fabric or taking the whole bag. Keep valuables in inside pockets and the bag in sight.

What size laptop fits?

The page does not say. Similar USB laptop backpacks commonly fit 15.6-inch laptops, but ask the seller for the compartment size before ordering.

Can I take a power bank on a plane in it?

Yes, in the cabin. The FAA says spare lithium batteries and power banks must go in carry-on baggage, not checked bags. If the bag is gate-checked, take the power bank out first.

Is BackXPack legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are the USB port and lock sold as extras despite appearing in the photos, no size details, a high price and return postage at your cost.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Prices accurate as of October 6, 2026. Check the seller’s checkout for current pricing, promotions and terms.

What we checked: No hands-on use. Claims, product title, feature bullets, photos, US dollar prices, bundles, add-ons and their images, warranty price, seller details and card statement name from the BackXPack offer page our link opens (gadgetxaura.com) and the data in the page’s own code on 2026-10-06. The 30-day guarantee text was read in the same page code that day; the fuller refund and returns terms are as recorded from the site’s terms page on 2026-10-04. The AAOS backpack safety release, the FAA PackSafe guidance on lithium batteries and the top-ranking BackXPack pages were read on 2026-10-06.

Shower Phone Box · Top10Gadgets

Fine for baths and getting ready, risky as “completely waterproof”. ShowerTime Max is a stick-on wall case that holds your phone behind a clear touch-through cover, so you can watch videos without a wet shelf. That is a nice convenience. But the page gives no waterproof rating, steam can still reach the phone, and Apple advises keeping iPhones out of showers altogether. The stronger adhesive and a sound vent are add-ons, and similar boxes cost much less. ShowerTime Max scores 3.6 out of 10, held back by price and its waterproof claim.

  • What it is: a wall-mounted phone case with a touch-through front for the bathroom.
  • Price: $49 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $135 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: a phone at eye level in the bathroom, away from puddles.
  • Biggest drawback: no waterproof rating, steam risk, and add-ons for adhesive and sound.
  • Our score: 3.6 out of 10.

Shower phone boxes are a popular, simple accessory. The pros reflect the convenience. The cons are about the waterproof claim, the add-ons and the price.

What we like

  • Holds a phone on the wall at eye level, with no drilling
  • A clear touch-through cover lets you scroll and tap without opening it
  • Keeps direct splashes off the phone better than a shelf
  • Hooks underneath can carry light items, per the page’s images
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • ‘Completely waterproof’ has no rating; steam can still condense inside a closed box
  • Apple advises against exposing iPhones to showers and steam rooms, and liquid damage is not covered by warranty
  • The stronger adhesive and the sound vent are $4 and $9 add-ons
  • No maximum phone size is given, despite ‘all smartphone sizes’
  • At $49, it costs several times similar shower phone boxes at large retailers
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

ShowerTime Max is a shallow plastic box with a clear front cover. An adhesive pad on the back sticks it to a smooth bathroom wall. You open the front, drop your phone into the tray and close it. The cover is thin enough for touchscreen taps and swipes. Buttons and hooks underneath appear in the images.

Touch-through use of the case. Image: ShowerTime

  1. Stick it to a smooth wall

    Step 1: Clean and dry a smooth tile, glass or mirror, peel the backing and press the adhesive pad firmly, then wait before loading it.

  2. Put your phone inside

    Step 2: Open the front, place the phone in the tray and close the clear cover.

  3. Use it through the cover

    Step 3: Tap and swipe through the cover to play music or videos while the case keeps splashes off.

The page title calls it a “waterproof shower phone holder”, “smartphone holder in the shower”, “touchscreen allowing shower phone holder” and “new waterproof shower time smartphone holder”. The six bullets promise a “punch-free” attachment, “touch-through technology for precise touchscreen”, “completely waterproof and safe for all smartphones”, a clear, anti-fog cover, attachment “to all shiny surfaces in the bathroom”, and compatibility with “all smartphone sizes”.

What the page leaves out

There is no IP rating, inside dimensions, weight limit for the hooks, or adhesive type. The main photo shows small buttons along the bottom edge, which the page does not explain.

Touch-through covers

Thin plastic lets capacitive touchscreens work, though wet fingers and fogging make taps less precise. Face unlock may not work through the cover.

ShowerTime Max suits people who watch videos or listen to podcasts in the bath or while getting ready, and renters who cannot drill. It is a poor fit for phones whose makers advise against showers and steam, for textured walls, and for very large phones until the size is confirmed. Our WaterBOOM 360 review covers a waterproof speaker if sound is what you are after.

  • People who watch videos or listen to podcasts in the bath or while getting ready
  • Renters who want a wall mount without drilling
  • Anyone who props their phone on a wet shelf and wants something safer

Bath-time viewers

A phone at eye level on the wall beats balancing it on the tub edge.

Getting ready

Recipes, news or videos while shaving or doing makeup, away from the sink.

Renters

Adhesive mounting avoids drilling tiles.

Who should skip it

Skip ShowerTime Max if your phone maker advises against showers and steam, if your walls are textured or painted, or if you have a very large or folding phone and cannot confirm the fit.

  • Anyone whose phone maker advises against showers and steam, including iPhone owners
  • People with textured, painted or rough walls where adhesive will not hold
  • Owners of very large phones until the seller confirms the size

It keeps splashes off, but “completely waterproof” is unproven, and steam is the bigger risk. The page gives no IP rating or test. A closed box in a hot shower can still let humid air in, where it condenses on a cooler phone. Apple advises avoiding showers and steam rooms with iPhones, and says liquid damage is not covered by warranty.

What Apple says

Apple’s support page on iPhone water resistance advises avoiding high-velocity water such as showering, saunas and steam rooms, and exposure to soap and lotions. It also says water resistance decreases with wear and that liquid damage is not covered under warranty.

What this means for you: use the case for baths and getting ready, not long hot showers.

“Clear-view and anti-fog properties”

No coating or test is named. Fogging on the cover is a common complaint with shower boxes.

“Safe for all smartphones”

Phones differ in water resistance. Older phones and those with worn seals are most at risk from humidity.

What to do: keep the bathroom ventilated and take the phone out promptly afterwards.

Charging

Never charge a phone in the bathroom from a mains socket or extension lead.

On 6 October 2026, one ShowerTime Max cost $49, with the five-pack at $135 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered an extra-strength adhesive for $4, a “playback valve” sound vent for $9, a USB car adapter for $4 and a 3-year warranty for $9. Similar shower phone boxes sell for much less at large retailers.

ShowerTime Max price and bundles

PackageTotalPer case1 ShowerTime Max$49$49.002 ShowerTime Max$69$34.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$98$32.674 ShowerTime Max$123$30.755 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$135$27.00

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. You can check today’s packages on the ShowerTime Max order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

For $4, “enhanced sticker attachment for tougher resistance and longevity”. The image shows the case holding two large water bottles from hooks under the heading “strong bearing capacity”. If the standard adhesive needs upgrading for a phone to stay up, this should be standard.

The $4 extra stick add-on image. Image: ShowerTime

Playback valve

For $9, “improved audio output from the hermetic protection”. The image shows a round valve on the back labelled “anti drenching sound hole”. Sound from a closed box is muffled, so this may help, though any opening is a path for water.

The $9 playback valve add-on image. Image: ShowerTime

Car adapter and warranty

A $4 USB car adapter has nothing to do with a wall case; skip it. A 3-year warranty for $9 is optional.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as Matrixfze.

ShowerTime MaxScore 3.6/10

Best for: People who watch videos or listen to podcasts in the bath or while getting ready

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

No. Similar wall-mounted shower phone boxes sell widely for much less, often listing their inside dimensions. If you mainly want music, a small waterproof Bluetooth speaker keeps the phone outside the bathroom entirely. A waterproof pouch is the cheapest option for occasional use.

OptionPhone in bathroomSoundWaterproofingCostShowerTime MaxYes, on wallMuffled; vent $9Unrated$49Retail shower phone boxYesMuffledUsually unratedUsually much lessWaterproof Bluetooth speakerNoClearOften ratedVariesWaterproof pouchYesMuffledOften ratedLow

ShowerTime Max vs a retail shower box

Same design, lower price and listed sizes. That is where a rival wins.

ShowerTime Max vs a speaker

Keeping the phone outside and streaming to a rated speaker avoids steam entirely, for audio at least.

Other phone accessories we have reviewed

Our SelfCam Pro review covers a selfie stick and tripod, our ZoomShot Pro review a phone zoom monocular, and our GoDonut review a phone grip and stand.

If you want a wall-mounted phone case for the bathroom, you can see today’s bundles on the ShowerTime Max offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

ShowerTime MaxScore 3.6/10

Why people buy it: Holds a phone on the wall at eye level, with no drilling

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

ShowerTime Max is a real product from a named seller, and a case should arrive if you order. Before buying, ask for the inside dimensions, check your wall surface, switch from the five-pack, consider the adhesive upgrade and note the card statement name.

Ask for the size

What to do: email support@g63com.com and ask for the maximum phone length, width and thickness, and whether a case can stay on. Keep the reply.

Check your wall

What to do: test that your tile or glass is smooth; adhesive will not hold well on grout lines or textured paint.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $135 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one case.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as Matrixfze. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. Once stuck to a wall, the adhesive may not be reusable.

How to buy ShowerTime Max the smart way

  1. Ask support for the inside dimensions.
  2. Open the ShowerTime Max order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to one case.
  4. Consider the $4 adhesive; skip the car adapter.
  5. Note the card statement name, Matrixfze.

ShowerTime Max scores 3.6 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.5, build durability 0.9, price competitiveness 0.4, usability 1.3 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. The wall case is a handy idea and easy to use. The score falls on “completely waterproof” and “anti-fog” claims without ratings, the steam risk to phones, adhesive and sound vent sold extra, no size details and a price several times similar boxes.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.5 / 2″Completely waterproof” and “anti-fog” unratedBuild durability0.9 / 2Plastic case; adhesive life unknownPrice competitiveness0.4 / 2Several times similar boxesUsability1.3 / 2Touch-through cover, no drillingOwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal3.6 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for ShowerTime Max by that name. Owners of similar shower phone boxes on large retail sites tend to like having their phone on the wall, and complain about fogging, muffled sound, adhesive that lets go after a few weeks and large phones that do not fit.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used ShowerTime Max. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with Apple’s water resistance guidance and the pages that rank for ShowerTime Max. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Mount it on smooth, clean, dry tile away from the direct spray, wait a day before loading it, and use it for baths, music and getting ready rather than long hot showers. Ventilate the bathroom, take the phone out promptly, and wipe any condensation off the phone and case.

  1. Clean and dry the wall. Alcohol wipe, then dry.
  2. Mount away from the spray. Not in the direct stream.
  3. Press firmly and wait. A day before loading it.
  4. Close the cover fully. Check the seal each time.
  5. Ventilate the room. Fan on or window open.
  6. Take the phone out promptly. Do not leave it in steam.
  7. Wipe away condensation. Inside the case too.

Removing it

Warm the adhesive with a hairdryer on low and peel slowly to avoid damaging tiles.

Cleaning

Wipe the cover with a soft cloth. Avoid abrasive cleaners that scratch the clear front.

ShowerTime MaxScore 3.6/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about Face ID, steam and kids’ videos at bath time. Face unlock may struggle through the cover, steam is the main risk, and a tablet stand outside the splash zone suits children’s bath time. Browse our phone accessory reviews and our best phone accessories guide for more.

Does Face ID work through it?

Often not reliably. Unlock before closing the cover.

Can I take calls?

Yes, on speaker, though sound is muffled.

Can it hold a tablet?

The page is about smartphones. Tablets are unlikely to fit.

Does it work on a mirror?

Smooth mirrors are fine for adhesion. Check it does not block the view.

Is ShowerTime Max waterproof?

The page says completely waterproof, but gives no IP rating or test. The front closes over the phone, which keeps splashes off. Steam can still get in and condense, so do not rely on it to protect a phone in a hot, steamy shower.

How much does ShowerTime Max cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one ShowerTime Max for $49, two for $69, three (two plus one free) for $98, four for $123 and five (three plus two free) for $135, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. Extra adhesive cost $4, a playback valve $9 and a 3-year warranty $9.

Can I use my iPhone in the shower in it?

Apple’s support page advises avoiding exposing iPhones to showers and steam rooms, and says liquid damage is not covered under warranty. A case reduces splashes but not steam. Using it for baths or while getting ready is lower risk.

Will it stick to my wall?

The page says it attaches to all shiny surfaces. Adhesive pads hold best on smooth, clean, dry tile, glass or mirror. Textured, painted or grouted surfaces may not hold, and the stronger adhesive is a $4 add-on.

Does sound come through the case?

Muffled sound is the main complaint about closed phone boxes. The checkout sells a $9 ‘playback valve’, a sound hole on the back, to improve audio. A small waterproof Bluetooth speaker is another option.

What size phones fit?

The page says it fits all smartphone sizes but gives no inside dimensions. Ask the seller for the maximum phone length and width, especially for large or folding phones.

Is ShowerTime Max legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are the unrated waterproof claim, adhesive and sound vent sold extra, no size details, the price and return postage at your cost.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Prices accurate as of October 6, 2026. Check the seller’s checkout for current pricing, promotions and terms.

What we checked: No hands-on use. Claims, product title, feature bullets, photos, US dollar prices, bundles, add-ons and their images, warranty price, seller details and card statement name from the ShowerTime Max offer page our link opens (gadgetxaura.com) and the data in the page’s own code on 2026-10-06. The 30-day guarantee text was read in the same page code that day; the fuller refund and returns terms are as recorded from the site’s terms page on 2026-10-04. Apple’s support page on iPhone splash, water and dust resistance and the top-ranking ShowerTime Max pages were read on 2026-10-06.

$49 Wireless Charger? · Top10Gadgets

Fine as a basic bedside pad, but you can buy a certified one for less. Winergy is a round white Qi wireless charging pad with a metal rim and a light ring, and it should top up most Qi phones overnight without fuss. But the page shows no Qi certification, it is powered by older micro USB, and the “smart light when battery full” listed as a feature is then sold as a $9 add-on. Wireless pads are also slower than a cable. Winergy scores 4.1 out of 10, held back by the missing certification and its price.

  • What it is: a 10W wireless charging pad for Qi phones, with a light ring and a micro USB input.
  • Price: $49 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $135 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: drop-and-charge convenience on a desk or bedside table.
  • Biggest drawback: no proof of Qi certification, and add-ons that repeat listed features.
  • Our score: 4.1 out of 10.

Wireless charging pads are simple, and Winergy is simple in the good sense. The cons are about what you cannot verify and what you are asked to pay extra for, which matter when certified rivals cost less.

What we like

  • Charges any Qi phone without plugging in, which saves wear on the charging port
  • Thin round pad with a metal rim that looks tidy on a desk or bedside table
  • A light ring shows when it is charging, according to the page
  • Works with iPhones from the iPhone 8 onwards and most recent Android flagships
  • Cheap to try at $49 for one

What we don’t

  • No Qi certification or Wireless Power Consortium listing shown, only ‘Qi technology compatible’
  • Powered by micro USB, an older connector than the USB-C most phones now use
  • The ‘smart light when battery full’ is listed as a feature and then sold as a $9 add-on
  • Pads like this charge more slowly than a cable and lose more energy as heat
  • At $49, it costs more than certified pads from established accessory brands
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

Winergy is an induction charger. A flat copper coil inside the pad creates a changing magnetic field when powered. A matching coil in a Qi-compatible phone picks up that field and turns it back into current to charge the battery. The two coils need to line up, which is why the phone has to sit near the centre of the pad. A light ring around the rim shows when it is charging.

The pad with its light ring on and a phone about to be placed. Image: Winergy

  1. Plug the pad into a USB adapter

    Step 1: Connect the pad to a USB wall adapter with its micro USB cable. For 10W, you need an adapter that supplies enough power, which the page does not specify.

  2. Lay your phone on top

    Step 2: Place a Qi-compatible phone face up in the centre of the pad. A coil in the pad and a coil in the phone line up and transfer power by magnetic induction.

  3. Watch the light

    Step 3: A light ring around the rim shows when the phone is charging. Lift the phone off when it is full or when you need it.

The page title calls it a “universal Qi mobile wireless charger, 10w fast wireless charger”. The six bullets list a 10W powerful charger, a smart light when the battery is full, Qi technology compatibility, a light and portable design, a standard micro USB connection and Android and iOS compatibility. The page gives no input power needed, no certification, no temperature protection details and no list of what is in the box.

Why the adapter matters

A wireless pad can only pass on the power it receives. To deliver 10W to a phone, after losses, it needs more than 10W from the wall adapter. The page does not say what adapter to use or whether one is included. Plugged into a laptop’s USB port or a basic phone charger, it may charge much more slowly than advertised.

Micro USB in 2026

The pad uses a micro USB input. Most current phones, chargers and accessories use USB-C. A micro USB pad means one more cable type in your drawer, and micro USB cables are being phased out of many shops.

Winergy suits someone who wants a simple pad on a bedside table or desk to top up a Qi phone while it sits there, especially if their phone’s charging port is loose or worn. It is not for people who need a fast charge or who want proof of safety testing.

  • People who want a simple bedside or desk pad to top up a Qi phone overnight
  • Anyone whose phone charging port is loose or worn
  • Buyers who prefer to drop a phone down rather than plug a cable in

Overnight chargers

Charging overnight is where wireless pads make most sense, because speed does not matter. You put the phone down, and it is full by morning. Many phones also slow charging near full to protect the battery.

Desk workers

A pad on a desk keeps the phone topped up through the day without a cable to plug in and unplug. Each time you pick the phone up, charging stops, so it is a top-up rather than a full charge.

Phones with worn ports

If your phone’s charging port is loose or full of lint, a wireless pad avoids it entirely. That can extend a phone’s useful life.

iPhone owners

iPhones from the iPhone 8 onwards support Qi. From the iPhone 12, Apple added MagSafe magnets that align the phone with compatible chargers, and newer Qi2 chargers use similar magnets. A flat pad like Winergy has no magnets, so you have to centre the phone yourself.

Gift buyers

A wireless pad is a common small gift. Check the recipient’s phone supports wireless charging first, as many budget phones do not.

Android users

Many mid-range and flagship Android phones support Qi, and some offer faster proprietary wireless charging on their own maker’s pads. On a third-party pad, they fall back to standard Qi speeds. Budget Android phones often lack wireless charging altogether, so check first.

Households with several phones

A pad on the kitchen counter that anyone can drop a phone on is handy. If two people want to charge at once, you need two pads, which is the one case where a two-pack makes sense.

Who should skip it

Skip Winergy if you need fast charging, want certified safety, have a phone without wireless charging, or own a recent iPhone and want a magnetic charger that aligns itself.

  • Anyone who needs fast charging; a USB-C cable and adapter are quicker
  • People who want proof of Qi certification and safety testing
  • iPhone 12 or later owners who want a magnetic charger that aligns itself
  • Phones without wireless charging, which most budget models lack

The page says “Qi technology compatible” but shows no certification, and real charging speed depends on your adapter and phone. The Wireless Power Consortium, which runs the Qi standard, says certified products are listed in its public database and only they may use the Qi logo. Certification covers interoperability and safety, including heat. The 10W figure is a maximum the pad claims; your phone may accept less.

What Qi certification means

The Wireless Power Consortium’s knowledge base on Qi certified products explains that certified products are issued an ID and included in its product database, and that only Qi Certified products can legally use the Qi logo. Testing checks that a charger works with Qi phones and handles things like foreign objects and heat safely.

What to do: search the product database for “Winergy” or ask the seller for the certification number. If neither turns up, treat it as uncertified.

“Compatible” is not “certified”

Many cheap pads say “Qi compatible”, meaning they follow the basic charging method. That does not mean they passed the tests. An uncertified pad may still work fine; you simply have no independent check.

Real-world speed

Wireless charging loses energy as heat between the coils, and phones throttle charging when they get warm. Misalignment slows it further. A typical wireless pad takes longer to fill a phone than a wired fast charger. For many people that is fine overnight and frustrating in a hurry.

Heat and battery health

Heat is the enemy of lithium batteries. A good pad manages temperature and stops charging if a coin or key is on it. The page lists no temperature protection or foreign object detection, which certification would test.

Foreign objects

Coins, keys and paper clips left on a wireless pad can heat up in the magnetic field. Certified pads detect foreign objects and stop charging. The page does not say whether Winergy does. Keep the pad clear of loose metal, especially on a bedside table where small items collect.

Charging through thick cases

Wallet cases, rugged cases with metal plates, pop-out grips and magnetic car mount plates all get in the way. If you use one of these, a wireless pad may not charge at all, or may run hot trying.

The light ring

The page lists a “smart light when battery full” as a standard feature. The checkout then sells “Smart-Lights” for $9 to “get notified from distance when battery is full”. It is not clear what the standard light does if the smart light is extra. What to do: ask support before paying for it.

On 6 October 2026, one Winergy cost $49, with the five-pack at $135 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered an aluminium body for $4, smart lights for $9, a car power supply for $7 and a 3-year warranty for $9. The main photo already shows a metal rim and a lit ring, so both of the first two add-ons need explaining.

Winergy price and bundles

PackageTotalPer pad1 Winergy$49$49.002 Winergy$69$34.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$98$32.674 Winergy$123$30.755 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$135$27.00

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. Two pads, one for the bedside and one for the desk, is the most anyone needs. You can check today’s packages on the Winergy order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

The aluminium body

For $4, the “Aluminum Body” promises a more fashionable and robust charger. Its image is a close-up of a white pad’s polished silver rim on grey fabric. The main photo shows the same silver rim. Ask what the standard pad is made of.

The metal rim, from the $4 aluminium body add-on image. Image: Winergy

Smart lights

The $9 smart lights image shows an iPhone on a black pad with a blue light ring, a different colour from the white Winergy. The feature list already includes a charging light.

The $9 smart lights add-on image, which shows a black pad. Image: Winergy

Car power supply and warranty

The $7 car power supply is a USB car adapter. A desk pad has little use in a car. The 3-year warranty costs $9. The seller’s terms already cover defective goods for two years once you have a returns number.

What a certified pad costs

Certified 10W and 15W pads from established accessory brands are widely sold for similar or less than $49, often with a USB-C input and a listed certification. If you buy any wireless pad, check for the certification number or a Qi2 listing.

The “regular price”

Add-ons are shown against crossed-out prices, and a countdown timer runs on the page. We found no evidence that Winergy sells at a higher regular price. Round white pads with a silver rim are a common factory design sold under many names.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as drone720x.com.

WinergyScore 4.1/10

Best for: People who want a simple bedside or desk pad to top up a Qi phone overnight

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

For most people, a certified Qi or Qi2 charger from a known brand is the better buy, and a USB-C cable is still the fastest way to charge. Winergy’s only advantage over a certified pad is the look, and only if it costs less. For charging on the move, a power bank beats any pad.

OptionSpeedCertificationInputPriceWinergyUp to 10W claimedNot shownMicro USB$49Certified Qi or Qi2 pad from a known brand10 to 15W, listedIn the WPC databaseUsually USB-CSimilar or lessUSB-C cable and fast adapterFastestVaries by brandUSB-CLowCordBrickCable organiser with chargerSee our reviewSee our reviewSee our reviewSnap-N-ChargeMagnetic tip power bankSee our reviewSee our reviewSee our review

Winergy vs a certified Qi2 charger

Qi2 chargers use magnets to snap the phone into the right position, which improves speed and reduces heat. They are listed in the Wireless Power Consortium database. If you have a recent iPhone or a Qi2 Android phone, a certified Qi2 charger is the clearest case where a rival wins.

Winergy vs a cable

A good USB-C cable and a fast adapter charge most phones in around an hour or two. A wireless pad takes longer. Keep a cable for the times you need a quick top-up.

Winergy vs a power bank

For charging away from home, a power bank does what a pad cannot. Our Snap-N-Charge review covers a small magnetic power bank, and our GoDonut review a well-rated charging gadget. Our CordBrick review looks at a charging organiser that scored highest in our phone accessories group.

Phone backup, not just charging

If your phone is full rather than flat, our MemorySafeX review covers a backup stick from the same checkout. Our guide to the best phone accessories ranks the ones that scored best.

If you like Winergy’s look and want a simple pad, you can see today’s bundles on the Winergy offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

WinergyScore 4.1/10

Why people buy it: Charges any Qi phone without plugging in, which saves wear on the charging port

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Winergy is a real product from a named seller, and a pad should arrive if you order. Before buying, check your phone supports Qi, ask for the certification number and whether an adapter is included, switch from the five-pack, skip the add-ons that repeat the photos and note the card statement name.

Check your phone

What to do: search your phone model plus “wireless charging”. If it does not support Qi, the pad will not work.

Ask about certification and the adapter

What to do: email support@g63com.com and ask for the Qi certification ID, the recommended adapter and what is in the box. Keep the reply.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $135 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one or two pads before you enter your details.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as drone720x.com. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: note the statement name, and read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. A pad that charges slowly may not count as defective.

Delivery and support

The seller ships from overseas and gives no delivery estimate. What to do: save your order email, and if nothing arrives within three weeks, ask support for tracking.

How to buy Winergy the smart way

  1. Confirm your phone supports Qi wireless charging.
  2. Ask support for the certification ID and the recommended adapter.
  3. Open the Winergy order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  4. Change the five-pack to one or two pads.
  5. Skip the aluminium body and smart lights unless support explains them; skip the car adapter.
  6. Note the card statement name, drone720x.com, and save your order email.

Winergy scores 4.1 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.7, build durability 1.0, price competitiveness 0.6, usability 1.3 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. It is a simple, tidy charging pad that should work with Qi phones. The score falls on missing Qi certification, a micro USB input, listed features sold back as add-ons, a price above certified rivals and no independent owner ratings.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.7 / 2″Qi compatible” without certification; smart light listed then soldBuild durability1.0 / 2Simple pad with a metal rim; heat protection not statedPrice competitiveness0.6 / 2$49, above certified pads from known brandsUsability1.3 / 2Drop-and-charge, light ring; needs centring and the right adapterOwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal4.1 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for Winergy by that name. Owners of similar uncertified round pads on large retail sites tend to like the look and convenience, and complain about slow charging, phones that stop charging if nudged off-centre and a bright light ring at night.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used Winergy. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with the Wireless Power Consortium’s guidance on Qi certified products and the pages that rank for Winergy. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Plug Winergy into a decent USB wall adapter, centre the phone on the pad, remove metal cases and cards, and keep it somewhere cool. Use it for overnight and desk top-ups, keep a USB-C cable for fast charges, and move the pad if the light ring disturbs your sleep.

  1. Use a wall adapter. A laptop port may not supply enough power.
  2. Centre the phone. Misalignment slows or stops charging.
  3. Remove metal and cards. Metal cases, rings and credit cards block charging and can heat up.
  4. Keep it cool. Away from radiators, direct sun and soft bedding.
  5. Watch the light. Check charging has started when you put the phone down.
  6. Keep a cable handy. For fast top-ups when you are in a hurry.
  7. Let the phone manage the battery. Optimised charging features slow charging near full.

If it will not charge

Check the cable and adapter, centre the phone, remove the case, and try a different adapter. If the light does not come on at all, contact support within the 30-day window.

Pairing it with the right adapter

For the claimed 10W, a USB adapter supplying at least the power the pad needs is required, and the page does not say how much that is. As a rule of thumb, a quick-charge adapter rated for more than 10W gives the pad headroom. A small old phone charger will work, slowly.

Placing it on a desk

Put the pad where you naturally set your phone down, so charging becomes automatic. Keep the cable out of the way so the pad does not slide off when you pick the phone up.

If the phone gets hot

Some warmth is normal. If the phone becomes hot to touch, remove it, check for metal between phone and pad, and try a thinner case. Repeated overheating is a reason to stop using the pad.

At night

A bright light ring can disturb sleep. Turn the pad away from you or cover the edge if there is no way to switch the light off.

Cleaning

Unplug it and wipe it with a dry cloth. Keep liquids away.

WinergyScore 4.1/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about whether wireless charging damages batteries, whether it works with cases and what Qi2 is. Wireless charging creates more heat than a cable, which good chargers manage; thin cases are usually fine; and Qi2 adds magnets for alignment and faster, cooler charging. Browse our phone accessory reviews for more.

Does wireless charging damage your battery?

Heat ages batteries. Wireless charging generates more heat than a cable, but phones and certified chargers manage temperature. Using a quality pad in a cool spot keeps the effect small.

What is Qi2?

Qi2 is the newer version of the Qi standard. It adds magnets that hold the phone in the right position and supports up to 15W on compatible phones. Certified Qi2 products are listed in the Wireless Power Consortium database.

Can I charge earbuds on it?

Earbud cases with wireless charging can usually charge on a Qi pad. Place the case in the centre.

Can I use the pad while it is in a car?

A flat pad does not hold the phone, so it slides in a moving car. For car charging, a mount with a built-in charger or a cable is safer and more practical.

Is wireless charging less efficient?

Yes. Some energy is lost as heat, so wireless charging uses more electricity than a cable for the same charge. The difference in cost is small for a phone.

Does Winergy work with my phone?

It should work with phones that support Qi wireless charging, which includes iPhones from the iPhone 8 onwards and many Android phones. Many budget Android phones do not have wireless charging at all. Check your phone’s specifications for Qi before buying.

Is Winergy Qi certified?

The page says ‘Qi technology compatible’ and shows no certification. The Wireless Power Consortium, which runs the Qi standard, lists certified products in a public database, and only certified products may use the Qi logo. Search the database for the product before relying on the claim.

How fast does Winergy charge?

The page claims 10W. Your phone may accept less over Qi, and actual speed depends on the adapter, phone alignment and heat. Wireless pads are generally slower than a wired fast charger. Expect a full charge to take a few hours rather than about an hour.

How much does Winergy cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one Winergy for $49, two for $69, three (two plus one free) for $98, four for $123 and five (three plus two free) for $135, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. Smart lights cost $9, an aluminium body $4 and a 3-year warranty $9.

Does Winergy come with a wall adapter?

The page lists a standard micro USB connection but does not say whether a wall adapter is included. Many wireless pads ship with only a cable. To get the claimed 10W, you need an adapter that can supply enough power, so ask the seller what is in the box.

Can Winergy charge through a phone case?

Most Qi pads charge through thin plastic or silicone cases up to a few millimetres thick. Metal cases, magnetic mounts, credit cards and thick wallet cases block or slow charging, and can cause heat. Remove anything metal between the phone and the pad.

Is Winergy legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are the missing Qi certification, a micro USB input, features listed as standard but sold as add-ons, the five-pack flagged as best seller and return postage at your cost.

Jaw Exerciser Ball · Top10Gadgets

No for most people. JawMaster is a silicone ball you bite against to work your chewing muscles, sold with promises of a “confident” jawline, “proven fast results” and help “recovering jaw damages”. There is no good evidence that jaw exercisers sculpt the jaw, bigger chewing muscles tend to widen the face, and dental researchers have warned that similar devices can strain the jaw joint. The recovery claim is the most concerning. JawMaster scores 2.9 out of 10, held back by its claims and safety concerns.

  • What it is: a silicone bite exerciser with clear tooth pads and an optional neck cord.
  • Price: $59 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $149 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: simple and cheap to make, with a choice of strengths.
  • Biggest drawback: jawline claims without evidence and real jaw joint risks.
  • Our score: 2.9 out of 10.

There is not much to a jaw exerciser, which is part of the problem: the price and claims are doing most of the work. The pros are modest. The cons are about safety and promises.

What we like

  • Simple silicone bite ball with no batteries or settings
  • Small and light, with an optional cord to wear it round the neck
  • A three-strength pack lets you choose the resistance
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • Dental researchers warned in the British Dental Journal that a similar device could strain the jaw joint
  • ‘Used also for recovering jaw damages’ is a risky claim: jaw injuries need a professional
  • ‘Proven fast results’ comes with no evidence
  • Building the chewing muscle tends to widen the lower face rather than sharpen it
  • The main photo shows three strengths and two cords, which cost extra
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

JawMaster is a chunky silicone block with a hexagonal hole through the middle and clear plastic pads on the top and bottom where your teeth rest. You put it in your mouth and bite down repeatedly against the silicone’s resistance, which works the masseter and other chewing muscles. Harder silicone means more resistance. A cord lets you wear it round your neck between sessions.

The exercisers in three colours with cords. Image: JawMaster

  1. Place it between your teeth

    Step 1: Put the exerciser in your mouth so your teeth rest on the clear pads at the top and bottom.

  2. Bite down and release

    Step 2: Close your jaw against the silicone, which resists, then open slowly. Repeat in short sets.

  3. Stop at any pain

    Step 3: If your jaw clicks, aches or locks, stop using it and see a dentist.

The page title calls it a “perfect jaw exerciser”, “best jaw line sculpting” device and “jaw exerciser for man and women”. The six bullets promise to “change your jaw line to a confident one”, “impressive face improvement you will love”, “proven fast results in a short usage time”, that it is “used also for recovering jaw damages”, that it is light and easy to use, and that it is “recommended to everyone regardless gender and age”.

Where the force goes

Your jaw hinges at the temporomandibular joint (TMJ), just in front of each ear, with a small disc cushioning it. Biting hard and repeatedly on a thick object holds the jaw open wider than normal chewing while loading that joint.

What the page leaves out

There is no resistance figure, size, material grade, routine or safety warning. The main photo already shows three colours, spare pads and two cords, but the strengths and cord are add-ons.

JawMaster is only reasonable for adults with healthy jaws and teeth who want to experiment and will use it sparingly at the lowest strength. It is not for anyone with jaw pain, clicking, locking, grinding, recent jaw injury or dental work, or anyone expecting a sharper jawline. Our MuscleRelax Pro review covers another muscle gadget from the same checkout.

  • Adults with healthy jaws who are curious and will use it sparingly
  • People who want a chewing workout and accept the limited evidence
  • Buyers who will check with a dentist first and stop at any jaw symptom

Curious adults with healthy jaws

If your jaw never clicks or aches and you want to try it, keep it brief and stop at any discomfort.

Who should skip it

Skip JawMaster if you have jaw pain, clicking or locking, a TMJ disorder, a recent jaw injury or surgery, if you grind or clench your teeth, or if you have crowns, bridges, veneers, braces or loose teeth. Skip it too if you want a slimmer face.

  • Anyone with jaw pain, clicking, locking, grinding or a TMJ disorder
  • Anyone recovering from a jaw injury, fracture or surgery
  • People with crowns, bridges, veneers, braces or loose teeth
  • Anyone hoping for a slimmer, sharper jaw

Not for everyone, and dental researchers have raised concerns. A letter in the British Dental Journal warned that repeated use of a similar jaw exerciser would likely put far more stress on the jaw joint and disc, potentially triggering problems from joint noises to dislocation. The US National Institute of Dental and Craniofacial Research advises people with jaw joint problems to avoid gum chewing and extreme jaw movements.

The British Dental Journal warning

As reported by DrBicuspid, UK researchers wrote to the British Dental Journal about Jawzrsize, a device of the same type. They warned that biting with the front teeth strains the jaw joint, compared the load to teeth grinding, and said users might later need treatment to reduce masseter activity.

What this means for you: if you notice clicking, aching or headaches, stop.

What US dental researchers advise

The US National Institute of Dental and Craniofacial Research’s leaflet TMD: less is often best recommends conservative care for jaw joint problems: soft foods, heat or cold, gentle stretching and avoiding gum chewing and extreme jaw movements. A resistance bite ball is the opposite of that advice.

“Used also for recovering jaw damages”

Jaw injuries, fractures and joint disorders need assessment and a recovery plan from a dentist, oral surgeon or physiotherapist. A general-purpose bite ball is not a rehabilitation device.

What to do: if you are recovering from a jaw problem, do not use JawMaster without your clinician’s approval.

Teeth

Biting hard on a block can stress crowns, veneers, bridges and teeth weakened by decay. Children and teenagers, whose jaws are still growing, should not use it.

There is no good evidence that it will, and the likely effect is the opposite of what most buyers want. Jaw definition depends mostly on bone structure, body fat and age. Exercise can enlarge the masseter, the main chewing muscle at the angle of the jaw, which tends to make the lower face wider and squarer rather than sharper.

“Proven fast results in a short usage time”

The page gives no study, before-and-after data or timeframe. We found no trials showing jaw exercisers improve facial appearance.

No device suits everyone. Children, older adults with worn joints and anyone with dental work are among those who should avoid it.

What actually changes jaw definition

Losing body fat can sharpen the jawline if fat is the issue. Posture affects how the jaw looks in photos. Structural changes need professional assessment.

On 6 October 2026, one JawMaster cost $59, with the five-pack at $149 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered a neck cord for $7, a three strengths pack for $14, a USB car adapter for $4 and a 3-year warranty for $9. The main photo shows three strengths and two cords, which you only get by paying extra.

JawMaster price and bundles

PackageTotalPer exerciser1 JawMaster$59$59.002 JawMaster$89$44.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$109$36.334 JawMaster$129$32.255 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$149$29.80

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. You can check today’s packages on the JawMaster order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

Three strengths pack

For $14, “the full pack with three different strengths”. The image matches the main product photo. If you buy, the softest strength is the safest place to start.

The $14 three strengths pack image. Image: JawMaster

Neck cord

For $7, a cord “for carrying the exerciser easily and accessing it often”. Using it often is exactly what dental researchers warn against.

The $7 neck cord add-on. Image: JawMaster

Car adapter and warranty

A $4 USB car adapter has nothing to do with a silicone exerciser; skip it. A 3-year warranty for $9 on a block of silicone is hard to justify.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as panameedia.

JawMasterScore 2.9/10

Best for: Adults with healthy jaws who are curious and will use it sparingly

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

No. Silicone jaw exercisers of the same design sell widely for much less, and none has evidence for jawline changes. For jaw pain or recovery, a dentist or physiotherapist can give gentle, guided exercises suited to your joint. For appearance, overall fat loss does more than chewing resistance.

OptionPurposeEvidenceCostJawMasterJawline, “recovery”None shown; safety warnings$59Generic silicone jaw exerciserSameSameOften much lessDentist or physio guided exercisesJaw pain and functionClinicalVariesSugar-free gumChewingNot advised for TMDVery low

JawMaster vs a generic jaw exerciser

Same design, same concerns, lower price. If you want to try one anyway, there is no reason to pay $59.

JawMaster vs professional care

For jaw pain, clicking or recovery, guided care is the only sensible route. That is where the alternative clearly wins.

Other face and mouth gadgets we have reviewed

Our uSmile Pro review covers a whitening kit, our ZenMind XP review an eye massager, and our NeckMassager review a pulse collar for the neck.

If you have a healthy jaw and still want to try it, you can see today’s bundles on the JawMaster offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

JawMasterScore 2.9/10

Why people buy it: Simple silicone bite ball with no batteries or settings

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

JawMaster is a real product from a named seller, and an exerciser should arrive if you order. Before buying, check whether your jaw and teeth are suitable, switch from the five-pack, choose the softest strength, and note the card statement name.

Check your jaw and teeth

What to do: if you have any jaw pain, clicking, grinding or dental work, ask your dentist before using any jaw exerciser.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $149 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one exerciser.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as panameedia. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. Used mouth products may not be returnable for hygiene reasons.

How to buy JawMaster the smart way

  1. Ask your dentist if you have any jaw or dental issues.
  2. Open the JawMaster order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to one exerciser.
  4. Leave the cord, car adapter and warranty unticked.
  5. Note the card statement name, panameedia.

JawMaster scores 2.9 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.2, build durability 0.9, price competitiveness 0.4, usability 1.0 and owner satisfaction 0.4, each out of 2. It is a simple silicone exerciser that does what it physically can. The score falls on “proven fast results” and jaw recovery claims without evidence, dental warnings about jaw joint strain, a likely widening rather than sharpening effect, and pictured accessories sold separately.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.2 / 2″Proven results” and “recovering jaw damages” unsupportedBuild durability0.9 / 2Silicone and plastic pads; grade unstatedPrice competitiveness0.4 / 2$59 for a widely sold designUsability1.0 / 2Simple, but no routine or warningsOwner satisfaction0.4 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal2.9 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for JawMaster by that name. Owners of similar silicone jaw exercisers on large retail sites report sore jaws and cheeks at first, and some complain of jaw clicking, headaches, tooth sensitivity and pads that wear through.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used JawMaster. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with reporting on the British Dental Journal letter, the National Institute of Dental and Craniofacial Research leaflet on TMD and the pages that rank for JawMaster. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Only use it if your jaw and teeth are healthy, start with the softest strength, keep sessions to a minute or two, and stop at the first click, ache or headache. Never use it to rehabilitate an injury without a clinician’s approval, and do not carry it around to use throughout the day.

  1. Check with your dentist first. Especially with dental work.
  2. Start with the softest strength. Never the hardest first.
  3. Bite with the back teeth if possible. Not just the front.
  4. Keep sessions short. A minute or two.
  5. Rest days between sessions. Do not use it daily at first.
  6. Stop at any symptom. Clicking, pain, headaches, sensitivity.
  7. Wash it after use. Warm soapy water, then dry.

Signs to stop and see a dentist

Jaw clicking or popping, pain in front of the ear, difficulty opening wide, a jaw that locks, new headaches or tooth sensitivity.

Hygiene

Keep it clean and dry, do not share it, and replace it if the pads crack.

JawMasterScore 2.9/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about double chins, face fat and mewing. Jaw exercisers do not burn face fat, a double chin usually reflects body fat, genetics or posture, and mewing claims lack evidence too. Browse our health gadget reviews for other options.

Will it get rid of a double chin?

There is no evidence that chewing exercise reduces chin fat. Spot reduction does not work.

Do face exercises work?

Evidence for facial exercise changing appearance is limited and mixed.

Is chewing gum a good alternative?

Gum works the same muscles, and the US dental research institute advises people with jaw problems to avoid it.

Can teenagers use it?

Their jaws and teeth are still developing. We would not recommend it.

Does JawMaster work?

It makes your chewing muscles work against resistance, and muscles can grow with use. But there is no good evidence that jaw exercisers sculpt the jawline, and a larger masseter muscle tends to widen the lower face. Dental researchers have warned about strain on the jaw joint.

Is JawMaster safe?

Not for everyone. A letter in the British Dental Journal warned that a similar jaw exerciser could place heavy stress on the jaw joint and disc, potentially triggering problems from clicking to dislocation. People with jaw pain, clicking or dental work should avoid it.

Can JawMaster help recover from a jaw injury?

The page says it is used for recovering jaw damages. Jaw injuries and disorders need assessment by a dentist or doctor. The US National Institute of Dental and Craniofacial Research advises people with jaw joint problems to avoid gum chewing and extreme jaw movements.

How much does JawMaster cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one JawMaster for $59, two for $89, three (two plus one free) for $109, four for $129 and five (three plus two free) for $149, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. A neck cord cost $7, a three strengths pack $14 and a 3-year warranty $9.

Will JawMaster give me a sharper jawline?

Unlikely. Jaw definition depends mostly on bone structure, body fat and age. Building the masseter, the main chewing muscle, makes the angle of the jaw bulkier rather than sharper.

How long should I use it?

The page gives no routine. If you try it despite the warnings, keep sessions very short, use the softest strength, and stop at the first sign of jaw pain, clicking or headaches.

Is JawMaster legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are unsupported results claims, a jaw recovery claim, dental safety warnings, add-ons pictured as standard and return postage at your cost.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

This content is for informational purposes and is not medical advice. Talk to a qualified professional before using any product that affects your health.

Prices accurate as of October 6, 2026. Check the seller’s checkout for current pricing, promotions and terms.

What we checked: No hands-on use. Claims, product title, feature bullets, photos, US dollar prices, bundles, add-ons and their images, warranty price, seller details and card statement name from the JawMaster offer page our link opens (gadgetxaura.com) and the data in the page’s own code on 2026-10-06. The 30-day guarantee text was read in the same page code that day; the fuller refund and returns terms are as recorded from the site’s terms page on 2026-10-04. DrBicuspid’s report on the British Dental Journal letter about a jaw training device, the National Institute of Dental and Craniofacial Research leaflet ‘TMD: less is often best’ and the top-ranking JawMaster pages were read on 2026-10-06.

Bulb Security Camera · Top10Gadgets

Only if you have an E27 socket, add night vision and can find out which app it uses. LiveGuard Pro is a 360° fisheye camera built into a light bulb that screws into a socket and streams to your phone, which makes it easy to fit without wiring. But night vision costs $5 extra, the app is not named, the socket is the European E27 size, no resolution is given and recording needs a $14 card. Wyze’s Bulb Cam launched at $49.98 with 2K video. LiveGuard Pro scores 3.8 out of 10, held back by missing basics.

  • What it is: a Wi-Fi security camera shaped like a light bulb, with a fisheye lens and microSD recording.
  • Price: $59 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $149 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: powered by a light socket, so no wiring or batteries.
  • Biggest drawback: night vision is an add-on, and the app and resolution are not stated.
  • Our score: 3.8 out of 10.

Light bulb cameras solve a real problem: getting power to a camera without wiring. The cons are about what this listing leaves out or charges extra for.

What we like

  • Screws into a light socket, so no wiring or batteries
  • Fisheye lens gives a wide 360° view of a room from the ceiling
  • Records to a microSD card, with no monthly fee mentioned
  • Live viewing through a phone app
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • Night vision, essential for a security camera, is a $5 add-on
  • The app is not named, so you cannot check its ratings, updates or privacy
  • Uses an E27 socket, the European size; US light fittings are E26
  • No resolution, frame rate or storage encryption stated
  • A microSD card costs $14 extra, and the camera needs one to record
  • Wyze’s Bulb Cam, from a known brand, launched at $49.98 with 2K video

LiveGuard Pro looks like a large light bulb with a camera lens at the bottom. You screw it into a ceiling or lamp socket, which powers it continuously as long as the switch stays on. A fisheye lens captures a full circle view from above. Over Wi-Fi, a companion app shows the live image and lets you flatten the fisheye view into panoramas. Recording goes to a microSD card.

The bulb camera and its fisheye live view. Image: LiveGuard

  1. Screw it into a socket

    Step 1: Turn off the power, screw the bulb camera into an E27 light socket and switch the light back on. The socket powers it constantly.

  2. Connect the app

    Step 2: Install the companion app, connect the camera to your Wi-Fi and view the fisheye image live on your phone.

  3. Record to a card

    Step 3: Insert a microSD card to record. The fisheye picture can be viewed as a circle or flattened into panoramic views in the app.

The page title lists “fish eye live monitor bulb camera, embedded bulb camera, live monitor 360° camera, direct stream live home monitor camera”. The bullets promise instant monitoring, use for watching elders, children and pets and for security, microSD recording, live streaming via the included app, mains power and a standard E27 socket. It gives no resolution, frame rate, app name, motion detection detail or encryption.

Fisheye views

A fisheye lens sees the whole room from the ceiling, which suits overview monitoring. The edges are distorted, and detail such as faces is harder to make out than with a narrower lens.

Does it light the room?

The page does not say whether it also works as a light. Many bulb cameras do not, so the socket you use may no longer light the room.

The box

The lamp holder add-on image shows the camera, a lamp holder, fixing screws, a box, a quality certificate and an English manual.

Box contents from the $7 lamp holder add-on image. Image: LiveGuard

LiveGuard Pro suits renters and anyone who wants a camera without drilling or wiring, and people who want to check on pets or a room while away. It suits buyers with E27 sockets, or who use the lamp holder add-on, and who will add night vision.

  • Renters who want a camera without drilling or wiring
  • People who want to check on pets or a room while away
  • Buyers with E27 sockets or who will use the lamp holder add-on

Renters

A camera in a light socket needs no drilling. Check your tenancy rules and your landlord’s view on cameras.

Pet owners

A ceiling view shows where pets are and what they are up to. Night vision matters if you check in the evening.

Checking on relatives

The page suggests monitoring elders and children. Always tell people they are on camera, and respect privacy.

Garages and storerooms

A socket in a garage or shed is a simple place for a camera, within Wi-Fi range.

Who should skip it

Skip LiveGuard Pro if you need night security without the add-on, have only E26 sockets, want a named app, or want 2K video from a known brand.

  • Anyone needing reliable night-time security without adding night vision
  • People in the US with E26 fittings, unless they confirm compatibility
  • Anyone who wants a named app with a clear privacy policy
  • People who want 2K video and motion zones from a known brand

Only with the night vision add-on, and even then the missing specs make it hard to judge. The page gives no resolution, frame rate or motion detection details. Without night vision, a camera sees little after dark, when much home security matters. The fisheye lens covers a room but makes faces small and distorted at the edges.

For $5, the night vision add-on promises infrared viewing. Its image shows a black and white view of a man waving in a home office. For a security camera, this should be standard.

The $5 night vision add-on image. Image: LiveGuard

What to do: add night vision if you buy it for security.

Resolution

“High definition” in the title is not a number. Wyze’s Bulb Cam, for comparison, is sold as 2K.

Motion detection and alerts

The page does not mention motion detection or alerts. Without them, you have to watch live or scroll through recordings. Ask the seller.

Storage

Recording needs a microSD card, sold as a $14 add-on for 32GB. Without a card, you can only watch live.

E27 sockets

The page lists a standard E27 socket. E27 is common in Europe; most US fittings are E26. E27 bulbs often physically fit E26 sockets, but check the voltage rating on the product before installing.

The page does not name the app, so you cannot check its ratings, updates or privacy policy before buying. A camera in your home streams video over the internet through that app. Cheap cameras with poorly maintained apps can be a privacy risk. Use a strong password, update firmware and keep cameras out of private spaces.

Why the app matters

Our Sight Bulb review found a similar bulb camera whose app averaged 2.7 stars and had not been updated for a long time. An app’s update history and privacy policy tell you a lot about the camera.

Securing a camera

Change the default password, use a strong unique one, put cameras on a separate guest network if your router allows, and turn off remote access if you do not need it.

Respecting others

Do not point cameras at neighbours’ homes or into private spaces. Laws on recording audio and video vary, so check local rules.

On 6 October 2026, one LiveGuard Pro cost $59, with the five-pack at $149 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered a lamp holder with mounting screws for $7, a 32GB microSD card for $14 and night vision for $5, plus a 3-year warranty for $9. With night vision and a card, one camera costs $78.

LiveGuard Pro price and bundles

PackageTotalPer camera1 LiveGuard Pro$59$59.002 LiveGuard Pro$89$44.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$109$36.334 LiveGuard Pro$129$32.255 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$149$29.80

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. Start with one camera to test the app. You can check today’s packages on the LiveGuard Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

The lamp holder

For $7, a lamp holder and screws let you mount the camera anywhere with a cable. Useful if you have no suitable socket.

The microSD card

For $14, a 32GB card. You can buy a card separately, often for less. Choose one rated for continuous recording.

Warranty

The 3-year warranty costs $9.

The “regular price”

Add-ons are shown against crossed-out prices, with a countdown timer on the page. We found no evidence that LiveGuard Pro sells at a higher regular price. White fisheye bulb cameras of this design are sold widely.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as Matrixfze, written in capitals.

LiveGuard ProScore 3.8/10

Best for: Renters who want a camera without drilling or wiring

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

No. Wyze’s Bulb Cam launched at $49.98 with 2K video, colour night vision and a US E26 base, from a known brand with a named app. Sight Bulb, which we reviewed, is a similar pan-tilt bulb camera. LiveGuard Pro’s fisheye view is its one distinctive feature.

CameraNight visionSocketAppPriceLiveGuard Pro$5 add-onE27Not named$59Wyze Bulb CamColour, built inE26Wyze app$49.98 at launchSight BulbSee our reviewSee our review2.7-star app in our review$39.95 in our reviewLiveGuard360Built in, per its pageE27Not named$59

LiveGuard Pro vs Wyze Bulb Cam

9to5Google reported the Wyze Bulb Cam’s launch at $49.98 with 2K video. A known brand with a named, updated app is the clearest case where a rival wins.

LiveGuard Pro vs Sight Bulb

Our Sight Bulb review covers a pan-tilt bulb camera with a weak app. LiveGuard Pro’s fisheye avoids moving parts but gives a distorted view.

Other smart home devices

Our Video DoorBell review and HomePolice24 review cover other security gadgets from offer pages, and our SmartLight review a smart bulb. Browse our smart home reviews for more.

If you want a fisheye bulb camera for an E27 socket, you can see today’s bundles on the LiveGuard Pro offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

LiveGuard ProScore 3.8/10

Why people buy it: Screws into a light socket, so no wiring or batteries

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

LiveGuard Pro is a real product from a named seller, and a camera should arrive if you order. Before buying, ask for the app name, resolution and US socket compatibility, add night vision, switch from the five-pack and plan for a microSD card.

Ask the key questions

What to do: email support@g63com.com and ask for the app’s name, the resolution, motion alerts, voltage rating and whether it works in E26 sockets. Look up the app’s ratings and privacy policy.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $149 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one camera.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as Matrixfze. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost.

How to buy LiveGuard Pro the smart way

  1. Ask for the app name, resolution and socket compatibility.
  2. Open the LiveGuard Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to one camera.
  4. Add night vision; buy a microSD card here or elsewhere.
  5. Note the card statement name, Matrixfze.
  6. Secure the app with a strong password on day one.

LiveGuard Pro scores 3.8 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.6, build durability 0.9, price competitiveness 0.7, usability 1.1 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. It is easy to fit and gives a whole-room view. The score falls on night vision sold separately, no app named, an E27 socket for US buyers, missing resolution and alerts, and a known-brand rival for less.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.6 / 2″HD” with no figure; security use without night visionBuild durability0.9 / 2Simple bulb housing; no water rating for outdoor socketsPrice competitiveness0.7 / 2$59 plus add-ons, against a known brand at $49.98Usability1.1 / 2Screw-in fitting; app unknownOwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal3.8 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for LiveGuard Pro by that name. Owners of similar fisheye bulb cameras on large retail sites like the easy fitting and wide view, and complain about clunky apps, Wi-Fi drop-outs, distorted images and poor night pictures without infrared.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used LiveGuard Pro. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with 9to5Google’s report on the Wyze Bulb Cam and the pages that rank for LiveGuard Pro. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Fit it in a central ceiling socket within good Wi-Fi range, keep the switch on, insert a recording-grade microSD card, secure the app and point it only at your own space. Check the picture at night if you added night vision, and update the firmware when the app offers it.

  1. Turn off the power. Before screwing it in.
  2. Choose a central socket. For the widest fisheye view.
  3. Check Wi-Fi strength. Weak signal means drop-outs.
  4. Insert a microSD card. Recording-grade for long use.
  5. Secure the app. Strong password, updates on.
  6. Keep the switch on. Tape or label it so others do not turn it off.
  7. Respect privacy. Tell household members and guests.

If the picture drops

Move your router closer or add a Wi-Fi extender, and check the 2.4 GHz band is enabled, as many cheap cameras need it.

Night viewing

With night vision, infrared light may reflect off nearby surfaces. Angle it away from close walls.

Cleaning

Turn off the power and wipe the lens with a soft cloth.

LiveGuard ProScore 3.8/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about whether they give light, whether they work outdoors and whether they record sound. Many do not light the room, most are not weatherproof, and audio features vary. Check each before buying.

Does it work as a light bulb too?

The page does not say. Assume it may not.

Can I use it outdoors?

The page gives no water rating. Use it indoors or under a fully covered porch.

Does it record sound?

The page does not mention audio. The sister product LiveGuard360 sells a voice recorder add-on.

What happens in a power cut?

It stops, because it is powered by the socket.

Does LiveGuard Pro have night vision?

Not as standard. Night vision is a $5 add-on described as infrared for enhanced night viewing. A security camera without night vision sees little in the dark, so add it if you buy the camera for security.

Will LiveGuard Pro fit my light socket?

The page says it fits a standard E27 socket. E27 is the common European size; most US fittings are E26. E27 bulbs often screw into E26 sockets, but check the voltage rating and the fit before installing, and ask the seller about US use.

How much does LiveGuard Pro cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one LiveGuard Pro for $59, two for $89, three (two plus one free) for $109, four for $129 and five (three plus two free) for $149, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. A lamp holder cost $7, a 32GB card $14 and night vision $5.

Does LiveGuard Pro need a subscription?

The page mentions recording to a microSD card and live streaming in an app, with no subscription. It does not say whether cloud storage exists or what it costs. Recording needs a card, which is a $14 add-on.

Is a cheap Wi-Fi camera safe for privacy?

It depends on the app and the maker’s security. The page does not name the app. Before installing any camera, check the app’s privacy policy, use a strong password, update firmware and avoid pointing it at private areas such as bathrooms or neighbours’ windows.

Is LiveGuard Pro better than Wyze Bulb Cam?

On published specs, no. Wyze’s Bulb Cam launched at $49.98 with 2K video, colour night vision and an E26 base for US sockets, from a known brand with a named app. LiveGuard Pro costs $59 before night vision and a card.

Is LiveGuard Pro legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are night vision sold separately, no app named, the E27 socket, missing specs and return postage at your cost.

Mini Massage Gun · Top10Gadgets

Fine for loosening tight muscles, but expensive and oversold. MuscleRelax Pro is a compact cordless massage gun with four heads, four speeds and USB-C charging, and massage guns can genuinely ease stiffness and improve range of motion for a short time. But the page claims it stops muscle pain, cramps and spasm and instantly improves circulation, which the evidence does not support, and it gives no power or battery figures for its $149 price. MuscleRelax Pro scores 3.9 out of 10, held back by claims and price.

  • What it is: a mini percussive massage gun with four heads, four intensities and a USB-C battery.
  • Price: $149 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $449 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: a small, portable way to loosen tight muscles before or after exercise.
  • Biggest drawback: overstated pain claims and a high price with no specs.
  • Our score: 3.9 out of 10.

Massage guns are one of the more evidence-backed gadgets in the recovery world, for limited outcomes. The pros reflect that. The cons are about claims, missing specs and value.

What we like

  • Small, cordless design that fits in a gym bag
  • Four interchangeable heads and four intensity settings
  • USB-C charging, the current standard
  • Massage guns can improve short-term range of motion and ease stiffness, per a 2023 review
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • ‘Stop muscle pain, cramps and spasm’ and ‘instantly improve blood circulation’ overstate the evidence
  • No stall force, amplitude, speed figures or battery life on the page
  • At $149, it costs more than many mini massage guns
  • An aluminium body and carry case are add-ons
  • Not for everyone: the review lists clotting disorders, pregnancy, epilepsy and pacemakers among cautions
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

MuscleRelax Pro is an L-shaped gun with a motor that drives a head rapidly back and forth. Pressed against a muscle, the head delivers short, fast taps, called percussive massage. You pick from four heads, a round ball for large muscles, a flat head, a fork for either side of the spine area (avoiding the spine itself) and a bullet tip, and four intensity levels shown by lights on the base.

The gun, its control panel and four heads. Image: MuscleRelax

  1. Fit a head and choose a speed

    Step 1: Push one of the four massage heads into the gun and press the button to cycle through four intensity settings.

  2. Glide over large muscles

    Step 2: Hold the head against a muscle such as the thigh or calf and move it slowly. The head taps rapidly into the muscle.

  3. Keep sessions short

    Step 3: A minute or two per muscle group is typical. Avoid bones, joints, the neck and the spine.

The page title lists “portable muscle massage, sport muscle massage, automatic muscle massage, vibration massager, fascia massage device, blood circulation massage, gym and sport massage gun”. The bullets promise a high-quality vibrating gun, instant improvement in blood circulation, an end to muscle pain, cramps and spasm after workouts, four intensity settings, a small portable design and USB-C fast charging. It gives no stall force, amplitude, percussions per minute, noise or battery life.

Specs that matter

Amplitude, how far the head travels, and stall force, how hard you can press before the motor stops, define how a massage gun feels. Mini guns usually have a shorter stroke than full-size ones. The page gives neither figure.

Mini size

Small guns are easier to carry and use one-handed. They often feel less powerful than full-size models, which some people prefer.

MuscleRelax Pro suits gym-goers and runners who want a quick warm-up or cool-down tool, and people with everyday tightness from sitting or exercise. It does not suit people with the medical cautions listed below.

  • Gym-goers and runners who want quick muscle warm-ups or cool-downs
  • People with everyday muscle tightness from sitting or exercise
  • Anyone who wants a small, travel-friendly massager

Gym-goers

A minute or two on the quads, glutes or calves before or after training can help muscles feel looser.

Runners

Calves and hamstrings tighten after runs. A small gun fits in a kit bag for race days.

Desk workers

Tight shoulders and upper back from sitting respond to gentle massage. Avoid the neck and spine.

Travellers

A compact gun can ease stiffness after long flights or drives.

Who should skip it

Skip MuscleRelax Pro if you have a clotting disorder, recent fracture, wound or bone condition, are pregnant, have epilepsy or a pacemaker, or have unexplained pain, numbness or swelling.

  • People with clotting disorders, recent fractures, wounds or bone conditions
  • Anyone pregnant, with epilepsy or a pacemaker, without medical advice
  • People with unexplained or severe pain, numbness or swelling
  • Buyers who want stated power figures and a long warranty from a known brand

They can improve short-term range of motion, flexibility and how recovered muscles feel, but they do not build strength, and “stop pain, cramps and spasm” overstates it. A 2023 systematic review found improvements in flexibility tests after two to three minutes of use and stiffness reductions comparable to manual therapy, with no benefit for strength, balance or explosive performance.

What the 2023 review found

The systematic review of massage guns in the Journal of Functional Morphology and Kinesiology concluded that massage guns can help short-term range of motion, flexibility and recovery-related outcomes, but are not recommended for strength, balance, acceleration, agility or explosive activities. Gains in flexibility tests were a few degrees.

What this means for you: use it to feel looser, not to fix injuries or boost performance.

“Instantly improve blood circulation”

Massage increases blood flow to the skin and muscle briefly. That is a normal response. It is not a treatment for circulation problems, and people with clotting disorders should avoid massage guns.

“Stop muscle pain, cramps and spasm”

Short-term relief of soreness is plausible. Stopping cramps or spasm is not established. Recurrent cramps can relate to hydration, medicines or medical conditions.

Cautions from the review

The review lists contraindications including recent wounds, fractures or bone conditions, deep-vein thrombosis or clotting disorders, diabetes or neuralgias, sensitive areas such as the face, neck and spine, use over 30 minutes, and conditions including pregnancy, fibromyalgia, epilepsy and pacemakers.

What to do: if any apply, ask a doctor or physiotherapist first.

On 6 October 2026, one MuscleRelax Pro cost $149, with the five-pack at $449 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered an aluminium alloy upgrade for $12, a carrying case for $19, a USB car charger for $4 and a 3-year warranty for $9. Without power or battery figures, it is hard to judge against the many mini guns on sale.

MuscleRelax Pro price and bundles

PackageTotalPer gun1 MuscleRelax Pro$149$149.002 MuscleRelax Pro$249$124.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$329$109.674 MuscleRelax Pro$399$99.755 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$449$89.80

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. One gun is enough for a household. You can check today’s packages on the MuscleRelax Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

Aluminium alloy upgrade

For $12, an “airspace aluminum body” for feel and durability. Its image, headed “Top aluminum alloy housing”, shows icons for heat dissipation and hardness. Ask what the standard body is made of.

The $12 aluminium alloy upgrade image. Image: MuscleRelax

Carrying case

For $19, a hard carbon-pattern case with foam cut-outs. Useful for travel.

The $19 carrying case add-on. Image: MuscleRelax

Warranty

The 3-year warranty costs $9, cheap for a $149 motorised device. Motors and batteries can fail, so it is worth considering.

The “regular price”

Add-ons are shown against crossed-out prices, with a countdown timer on the page. We found no evidence that MuscleRelax Pro sells at a higher regular price. L-shaped mini massage guns of this design are sold widely.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as panameedia.

MuscleRelax ProScore 3.9/10

Best for: Gym-goers and runners who want quick muscle warm-ups or cool-downs

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Not on price or published specs. Mini massage guns from established brands publish stall force, amplitude, speeds and battery life, and many cost less than $149. A foam roller is a cheap alternative for many of the same muscles. Physiotherapy is the right step for injuries.

OptionWhat it doesSpecs publishedPriceMuscleRelax ProPercussive massageNo$149Mini massage gun from a known brandPercussive massageUsuallyVaries, often lessFoam rollerSelf-massagen/aLowAir-C compression massagerAir compression for limbsSee our reviewSee our review

MuscleRelax Pro vs a known-brand mini gun

Established brands publish the specs that matter and offer warranties and support. That is the clearest case where a rival wins.

MuscleRelax Pro vs a foam roller

A foam roller costs little and works on legs, glutes and back. It takes more effort and lacks the targeted taps.

MuscleRelax Pro vs compression

Our Air-C Compression Massager review covers an air compression device that scored better in our health gadgets group.

Other massagers from this checkout

Our NeckMassager review covers an electrical pulse collar, and our ZenMind XP review an eye massager. Our BloodPressureX review looks at a monitor from the same seller. Browse our health gadget reviews for more.

If you want a compact massage gun, you can see today’s bundles on the MuscleRelax Pro offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

MuscleRelax ProScore 3.9/10

Why people buy it: Small, cordless design that fits in a gym bag

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

MuscleRelax Pro is a real product from a named seller, and a massage gun should arrive if you order. Before buying, check the medical cautions, ask for stall force and battery life, compare prices, switch from the five-pack and note the card statement name.

Check the cautions

What to do: read the review’s list of contraindications above and ask a doctor if any apply.

Ask for specs

What to do: email support@g63com.com and ask for stall force, amplitude, percussions per minute, noise and battery life. Keep the reply.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $449 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one gun.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as panameedia. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost.

How to buy MuscleRelax Pro the smart way

  1. Check the medical cautions.
  2. Ask support for specs and battery life.
  3. Open the MuscleRelax Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  4. Change the five-pack to one gun.
  5. Add the case if you travel; consider the warranty.
  6. Note the card statement name, panameedia.

MuscleRelax Pro scores 3.9 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.6, build durability 1.0, price competitiveness 0.4, usability 1.4 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. Massage guns have some evidence, and this one is compact and easy to use. The score falls on pain, cramp and circulation claims that go beyond the evidence, no power or battery figures, a high price and add-ons for an aluminium body and case.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.6 / 2″Stop pain, cramps and spasm” and “instantly” overstatedBuild durability1.0 / 2Compact motor and battery; body material unclearPrice competitiveness0.4 / 2$149 without specs, above many mini gunsUsability1.4 / 2One button, four heads, USB-COwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal3.9 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for MuscleRelax Pro by that name. Owners of mini massage guns on large retail sites tend to like the portability and complain about weaker power than full-size guns, noise at high speeds and batteries that fade.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used MuscleRelax Pro. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with the 2023 systematic review of massage guns and the pages that rank for MuscleRelax Pro. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Start on the lowest setting with the round head, glide slowly over large muscles for a minute or two each, and avoid the neck, spine, bones, joints and any injured area. Keep sessions short, stop if it hurts, and see a physiotherapist for pain that does not settle.

  1. Check the cautions first. Especially clotting, pregnancy and pacemakers.
  2. Start low. Lowest speed, round head.
  3. Large muscles only. Thighs, calves, glutes, shoulders.
  4. Keep moving. Do not hold it on one spot.
  5. One to two minutes per area. Studies used about two to three minutes.
  6. Avoid sensitive areas. Neck, spine, bones, joints, injuries.
  7. Stop if it hurts. Discomfort is fine; sharp pain is not.

Choosing a head

The round head suits big muscles, the flat head denser areas, the fork goes either side of the Achilles or along the edges of muscles (not on the spine), and the bullet is for small areas, used gently.

Before and after exercise

Brief use before exercise can feel like a warm-up. After exercise, gentle use can ease stiffness.

Charging

Use a USB-C charger. Do not leave it charging unattended for long periods.

Cleaning

Wipe the heads with a damp cloth. Keep the motor dry.

MuscleRelax ProScore 3.9/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about bruising, use on the neck and daily use. Pressing too hard or too long can bruise, the neck should be avoided, and daily short sessions are generally fine for healthy people. When in doubt, ask a physiotherapist.

Can massage guns cause bruising?

Yes, if used too hard or long, or by people on blood thinners. Use lower settings and short sessions.

Can I use it on my neck?

The review lists the neck as a sensitive area to avoid. Use gentle hand massage instead.

Can I use it every day?

Short daily sessions on healthy muscles are generally fine. Give sore areas rest.

Does it help cellulite?

There is no good evidence that massage guns reduce cellulite.

Do massage guns actually work?

For some things. A 2023 systematic review in the Journal of Functional Morphology and Kinesiology found massage guns can improve short-term range of motion, flexibility and recovery-related outcomes, but not strength, balance, acceleration, agility or explosive performance. Effects are modest and short-lived.

Can MuscleRelax Pro stop cramps and muscle pain?

The page says it stops muscle pain, cramps and spasm after workouts. The evidence supports short-term relief of stiffness for some people, not stopping pain or cramps. Persistent pain, cramps or spasm should be checked by a doctor or physiotherapist.

How much does MuscleRelax Pro cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one MuscleRelax Pro for $149, two for $249, three (two plus one free) for $329, four for $399 and five (three plus two free) for $449, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. An aluminium body cost $12, a case $19 and a 3-year warranty $9.

Who should not use a massage gun?

The 2023 review lists cautions including recent wounds, fractures or bone conditions, deep-vein thrombosis or clotting disorders, diabetes or neuralgias, the face, neck and spine, use over 30 minutes, pregnancy, fibromyalgia, epilepsy and pacemakers. Ask a doctor if any apply.

Where should I not use it?

Avoid the neck, head, spine, bones, joints, the front of the throat and any bruised, swollen or injured area. Use it on large muscles such as thighs, calves, glutes and shoulders.

How long should I use it for?

Studies in the review used around two to three minutes per area. Start short, on a low setting, and avoid long sessions; the review lists use over 30 minutes as a caution.

Is MuscleRelax Pro legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are overstated pain claims, no power figures, a high price, add-ons for an aluminium body and case, and return postage at your cost.

$49 Filtered Earplugs · Top10Gadgets

No for most people, mainly on price. NoiseBudsX are reusable silicone earplugs with a small filter, not electronic earbuds, and that design can soften loud music or a noisy office well. But the page promises they “instantly block out all environment noise”, which no earplug can do, and gives no noise reduction rating at all. Rated filtered earplugs from Loop cost about half as much. NoiseBudsX scores 3.3 out of 10, held back by overstated claims, no rating and a high price.

  • What it is: passive triple-flange silicone earplugs with a filter and a key-ring case.
  • Price: $49 for one pair on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $135 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: reusable, discreet plugs with no batteries.
  • Biggest drawback: no decibel rating and a price about twice that of rated rivals.
  • Our score: 3.3 out of 10.

Filtered earplugs are a genuinely useful product, and the design pictured is a common, sensible one. The pros reflect that. The cons are about how NoiseBudsX are described and priced.

What we like

  • Reusable flanged silicone earplugs with a filter, a sensible design for softening noise
  • No batteries, pairing or charging
  • Small and discreet in the ear
  • The main photo shows a key-ring case
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • They are passive earplugs, not electronic earbuds, which the name and page title blur
  • ‘Instantly block out all environment noise’ is impossible for any earplug
  • No noise reduction rating (NRR or SNR) is given, so you cannot judge protection
  • At $49, they cost about twice as much as rated filtered earplugs from Loop
  • A ‘high-noise filter’ and an aluminium case are sold as add-ons
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

NoiseBudsX are soft silicone plugs with three ridges, called flanges, that seal the ear canal. A small filter in the stem lets some sound through, which is meant to keep voices and music clearer than a solid plug while lowering the volume. There are no electronics: no speaker, microphone, battery or Bluetooth. The noise reduction comes entirely from the seal.

The earplugs, case and fit in the ear. Image: NoiseBudsX

  1. Choose the fit

    Step 1: Roll your ear gently up and back and push the flanged tip into the ear canal until it seals, with the stem pointing out.

  2. Let the seal and filter work

    Step 2: The silicone flanges block the ear canal, and a small filter lets some sound through so voices stay clearer than with foam plugs.

  3. Remove and store

    Step 3: Twist them out slowly to break the seal, wipe them clean and keep them in the case.

The page title calls them a “hearing protector”, “effective noise blocking technology” and “complete silence quality earbuds”. The six bullets promise to “instantly block out all environment noise”, help you concentrate on work or meditation, protect your ears at loud parties, “block out easily heavy machinery noises”, give an “invisible” ergonomic fit and suit “everyone, no limitations”.

Earbuds or earplugs?

“Earbuds” usually means wireless headphones. NoiseBudsX do not play sound. If you want music plus quiet, you need noise-cancelling earbuds, a different and pricier product. Our SpatialSound Edge review covers wireless earbuds sold through the same checkout.

Sizes

The page does not mention sizes. Many flanged plugs come in one size, which fits some ear canals poorly. A poor seal means much less noise reduction.

NoiseBudsX suit people who want to soften noise rather than block it: concert-goers, clubbers, travellers and open-office workers. They do not suit anyone who needs certified protection for work, shooting or power tools, and they are not headphones. Our ActivBeat 2.0 review covers sport earbuds if music is what you need.

  • Concert-goers and clubbers who want to soften volume while hearing the music
  • Light sleepers and open-office workers who want quieter surroundings
  • Travellers who want reusable earplugs for flights

Concert and club goers

Filtered plugs lower the volume while keeping music recognisable, which helps protect hearing at loud gigs.

Open-office workers

Plugs can take the edge off chatter, though they will not create silence.

Travellers

Reusable plugs can make flights and trains more restful.

Light sleepers

Some people sleep well with flanged plugs. Side sleepers may find the stems press on the ear.

Who should skip it

Skip NoiseBudsX if you need rated hearing protection for work, shooting or heavy tools, if you want something that plays music, or if you want to see a decibel rating before paying.

  • Anyone who needs certified hearing protection for machinery, shooting or work
  • People expecting electronic noise-cancelling earbuds that play music
  • Buyers who want a stated decibel rating before paying $49

No earplug blocks all noise. Well-fitted earplugs reduce sound by a number of decibels, and loud sounds still reach the inner ear through the bones of the skull. NoiseBudsX’s page gives no noise reduction rating (NRR in the US, SNR in Europe), so you cannot tell how much they reduce. Fit matters more than the label.

Why ratings matter

Hearing protectors sold for work carry an NRR or SNR measured in a lab. Real-world protection is usually lower: NIOSH recommends derating the NRR to estimate what users actually get, keeping only about 30% of the label value for pre-moulded plugs like these. With no label at all, you have nothing to start from.

What this means for you: for work or shooting, choose protection with a stated rating.

“Block out easily heavy machinery noises”

Noise from heavy machinery can damage hearing over time. Protection needs to be rated and fitted properly, and workplaces have rules for it.

What to do: at work, use the protection your employer provides or one with a stated NRR or SNR.

“Protect your ears from loud noise in parties”

Filtered earplugs are a good idea at loud events. Any reasonable plug that fits well will lower your exposure.

“Invisible earbuds”

The clear or smoky plugs are discreet, but the stems sit at the ear opening and are visible up close.

On 6 October 2026, one pair of NoiseBudsX cost $49, with the five-pack at $135 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered a “high-noise filter” upgrade for $7, an aluminium carrying case for $14, a USB car adapter for $4 and a 3-year warranty for $9. The main photo already shows a key-ring case, so ask what comes in the box before adding one.

NoiseBudsX price and bundles

PackageTotalPer pair1 NoiseBudsX$49$49.002 NoiseBudsX$69$34.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$98$32.674 NoiseBudsX$123$30.755 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$135$27.00

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. You can check today’s packages on the NoiseBudsX order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

High-noise filter

For $7, a “super silent high-noise filter upgrade”. The image shows smoky grey plugs with a filter visible in the base. No decibel figure is given for the standard or upgraded filter.

The $7 high-noise filter upgrade image. Image: NoiseBudsX

Aluminium carrying case

For $14, a grey aluminium case with a key ring. The main product photo already shows a black case of the same shape, so the add-on may only change the colour or material.

The $14 aluminium carrying case add-on. Image: NoiseBudsX

Car adapter and warranty

A $4 USB car adapter has nothing to do with earplugs; skip it. A 3-year warranty for $9 on silicone plugs is hard to justify.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as perfectchoicebase.com.

NoiseBudsXScore 3.3/10

Best for: Concert-goers and clubbers who want to soften volume while hearing the music

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

No. Loop Quiet 2 costs about half as much and states its noise reduction. Loop listed Quiet 2 at $24.95 in the US with a 24 dB SNR and several tip sizes. Foam earplugs cost a few cents a pair and often block more noise when rolled and fitted well. Musicians’ earplugs with flat filters suit concerts best.

OptionTypeRating statedSizesPriceNoiseBudsXFlanged, filteredNoNot stated$49Loop Quiet 2Silicone, sealed24 dB SNRSeveral$24.95Foam earplugsDisposable foamUsually NRR on packRoll to fitVery lowMusicians’ earplugsFlanged, flat filterUsuallyVariesVaries

NoiseBudsX vs Loop Quiet 2

Loop’s Quiet 2 page lists the price, the 24 dB rating and the ear tip sizes. That is the clearest case where a rival wins.

NoiseBudsX vs foam earplugs

Foam plugs are cheap and effective but disposable and can muffle voices. Filtered plugs sound more natural.

NoiseBudsX vs noise-cancelling earbuds

If you want to play music or podcasts, earbuds with active noise cancellation are the right category. Our SafeSleeve Air-Tube Headphones review covers wired earbuds, and our Talky AI Buds review covers translation earbuds.

If you prefer reusable filtered plugs and accept the price, you can see today’s bundles on the NoiseBudsX offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

NoiseBudsXScore 3.3/10

Why people buy it: Reusable flanged silicone earplugs with a filter, a sensible design for softening noise

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

NoiseBudsX are a real product from a named seller, and earplugs should arrive if you order. Before buying, ask for the noise rating and what is in the box, switch from the five-pack, skip the add-ons and note the card statement name.

Ask for the rating

What to do: email support@g63com.com and ask for the NRR or SNR, the tip sizes and whether the case is included. Keep the reply.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $135 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one pair.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as perfectchoicebase.com. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. Used earplugs may be hard to return for hygiene reasons.

How to buy NoiseBudsX the smart way

  1. Ask support for the rating and what is in the box.
  2. Open the NoiseBudsX order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to one pair.
  4. Leave the add-ons, car adapter and warranty unticked.
  5. Note the card statement name, perfectchoicebase.com.

NoiseBudsX scores 3.3 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.4, build durability 1.0, price competitiveness 0.3, usability 1.2 and owner satisfaction 0.4, each out of 2. The flanged, filtered design is sensible and reusable. The score falls on “earbuds” wording for earplugs, the impossible “block out all noise” claim, no rating, a price about twice a rated rival’s and add-ons for a filter and case.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.4 / 2″All environment noise” and “complete silence” impossibleBuild durability1.0 / 2Reusable silicone; filters can clogPrice competitiveness0.3 / 2About twice Loop Quiet 2, with no ratingUsability1.2 / 2Simple; fit depends on ear sizeOwner satisfaction0.4 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal3.3 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for NoiseBudsX by that name. Owners of similar flanged filtered earplugs on large retail sites tend to like the clearer sound at concerts, and complain about plugs that do not seal in small ears, discomfort when sleeping on the side and less quiet than foam.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used NoiseBudsX. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with Loop’s Quiet 2 page, NIOSH derating guidance and the pages that rank for NoiseBudsX. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Reach over your head, pull the top of your ear up and back, and push the plug in with a slight twist until it seals and your own voice sounds muffled. A good seal matters more than any filter. Clean the plugs after use, keep them in the case, and replace them if the silicone hardens or the filter clogs.

  1. Wash your hands. Clean hands, clean ears.
  2. Pull the ear up and back. This straightens the canal.
  3. Insert with a twist. Until the flanges seal.
  4. Check the seal. Your voice should sound deeper.
  5. Remove slowly. Twist to break the seal.
  6. Clean after use. Mild soap and water, then dry.
  7. Store in the case. Away from heat and lint.

If they will not seal

The single size may not suit your ears. Loop and others sell several tip sizes; foam plugs fit almost anyone.

Earwax and ear health

Do not push plugs in hard or share them. If your ears feel blocked or sore, stop and see a doctor or pharmacist.

NoiseBudsXScore 3.3/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about concerts, sleep and how long plugs last. Filtered plugs suit concerts best, foam is often better for sleep, and reusable silicone usually lasts months with care. Browse our audio reviews for headphones and earbuds.

Are filtered earplugs good for concerts?

Yes. They lower the volume while keeping music clearer than foam.

What earplugs are best for sleeping?

Soft foam or low-profile silicone, especially for side sleepers.

How long do reusable earplugs last?

Often several months. Replace them if they harden, crack or stop sealing.

Do earplugs cause ear infections?

They can if dirty or shared. Keep them clean and dry.

Are NoiseBudsX earbuds or earplugs?

Earplugs. The photos show passive triple-flange silicone plugs with a filter and no electronics, speaker or battery. They reduce noise by sealing the ear canal. They do not play music or use active noise cancellation.

Do NoiseBudsX block out all noise?

No. The page says they instantly block out all environment noise, but no earplug does. Even well-fitted plugs reduce sound by a number of decibels, and loud sounds still reach the inner ear through bone. The page gives no rating.

How much do NoiseBudsX cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one pair for $49, two for $69, three (two plus one free) for $98, four for $123 and five (three plus two free) for $135, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. A filter cost $7, a case $14 and a 3-year warranty $9.

Can I use NoiseBudsX around heavy machinery?

The page says they block heavy machinery noise but gives no noise reduction rating. For work, shooting or power tools, use hearing protection with a stated NRR or SNR rating and follow your employer’s rules.

Can I sleep in NoiseBudsX?

Possibly. Flanged plugs with a stem can press on the ear when you lie on your side. Soft foam plugs are often more comfortable for side sleepers.

What is a good alternative?

Loop Quiet 2 earplugs were listed at $24.95 in the US with a stated 24 dB SNR. Foam earplugs cost very little and often block more noise when fitted well. Musicians’ earplugs with flat filters suit concerts.

Are NoiseBudsX legit?

They are a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are ‘earbuds’ wording for earplugs, no rating, a high price, add-ons and return postage at your cost.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Prices accurate as of October 6, 2026. Check the seller’s checkout for current pricing, promotions and terms.

What we checked: No hands-on use. Claims, product title, feature bullets, photos, US dollar prices, bundles, add-ons and their images, warranty price, seller details and card statement name from the NoiseBudsX offer page our link opens (gadgetxaura.com) and the data in the page’s own code on 2026-10-06. The 30-day guarantee text was read in the same page code that day; the fuller refund and returns terms are as recorded from the site’s terms page on 2026-10-04. Loop’s Quiet 2 product page, Canadian Audiologist’s article on NIOSH NRR derating and the top-ranking NoiseBudsX pages were read on 2026-10-06.

Best Laptops for Cybersecurity Students, Ranked

A cybersecurity degree is a hands-on degree. Within your first semester or two, you will probably be running Kali Linux, a Windows target, and a deliberately vulnerable server side by side, all on one machine. That turns your laptop into something closer to a portable lab than a note-taking device. Choose the wrong one, and you tend to find out the night before a lab is due.

The stakes are worth getting right. The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics projects employment of information security analysts to grow 29% from 2024 to 2034, much faster than the average for all occupations, with a median annual wage of $124,910 in May 2024 (BLS Occupational Outlook Handbook). This guide covers what your coursework actually demands, the one spec that can sink an otherwise great laptop, our six picks for 2026, and how to plan your exit before you buy.

The short answer:

Buy an x86 (Intel or AMD) laptop with 32GB of RAM (16GB minimum, ideally in upgradeable SODIMM slots), a 1TB SSD, hardware virtualization enabled, and at least one USB-A port. Our top pick is the Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 7 (AMD). If money is tight, a pre-owned ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 (AMD) delivers most of the same lab-friendly hardware for less.

Quick picks: best laptops for cybersecurity students (October 2026)CategoryLaptopWhy it winsBest overallLenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 7 (AMD)x86, two DDR5 SODIMM slots (up to 96GB), Ethernet, Linux preload optionsBest budget (new)Lenovo ThinkPad E14 Gen 7 (Intel, non-Lunar Lake)Two SODIMM slots plus two M.2 slots for a dedicated VM driveBest for repairabilityFramework Laptop 13 ProModular, upgradeable, Linux-friendly; AMD option uses standard DDR5Best Linux-firstSystem76 Lemur Pro (2026)Ships with Pop!_OS and 32GB of memoryBest Mac (with caveats)Apple MacBook Air M5Great battery and build; runs ARM64 Kali, but not x64 VMsBest valuePre-owned Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 (AMD)Upgradeable to 64GB, Ethernet, lower cost, and no new e-waste

Why 2026 is an Unusual Year to Buy a Laptop

Memory prices have reshaped the laptop market this year. In June 2026, Apple raised the 13-inch MacBook Air from $1,099 to $1,299 and the MacBook Neo from $599 to $699, citing memory and storage costs (Tom’s Guide). Framework told customers its LPCAMM2 memory supplier doubled prices, and Engadget found the mid-tier Framework Laptop 13 Pro it reviewed selling for around $3,100 (Engadget).

For a cybersecurity student, that has two practical consequences. First, laptops with standard SODIMM slots are more valuable than ever, because you can buy with 16GB now and add memory later when prices ease. Second, a well-chosen pre-owned business laptop is a stronger value than usual. We dig into the market forces in our analysis of the 2026 memory crunch and the refurbished PC boom.

What a Cybersecurity Course Actually Asks of Your Laptop

Almost every hands-on security program runs on virtualization. Instead of attacking real networks, you build a small one inside your laptop: an attacker machine, one or more targets, and sometimes a monitoring box. Each virtual machine (VM) needs its own CPU cores, memory, and disk, all borrowed from the host. That is why a laptop that feels fast for browsing and essays can choke the moment a lab starts.

Published requirements for hands-on training make the pattern clear. The Virginia National Guard’s Cyber Fortress 2026 exercise, for example, requires a 64-bit Intel or AMD processor, Intel VT-x or AMD-V virtualization enabled in the BIOS, 16GB of RAM, 160GB of free storage, a USB 3.0 Type-A port, and local administrator access. It also states that Apple Silicon-based computers cannot be used for that course (Cyber Fortress 2026 FAQ). Your program may differ, so always read your school’s laptop requirements page first, but this is a realistic snapshot of what hands-on security training expects.

Recommended laptop specs for cybersecurity studentsSpecMinimumRecommendedWhy it mattersProcessor architecture64-bit x86 (Intel or AMD)64-bit x86 (Intel or AMD)Many lab images and Windows targets are x86-64 and will not run natively on ArmCPU cores6 cores8 cores / 16 threads or moreEach VM is assigned its own virtual CPUsMemory (RAM)16GB32GB, in upgradeable SODIMM slotsRunning three or more VMs at once is routineStorage512GB SSD with 160GB+ free1TB NVMe SSD; a second M.2 slot is a bonusEvery VM image consumes tens of gigabytesVirtualizationVT-x or AMD-V enabled in BIOSPlus IOMMU (VT-d or AMD-Vi)Required to run hypervisors at full speedPortsOne USB-A portUSB-A plus built-in Ethernet (RJ-45)USB Wi-Fi adapters for wireless labs; wired NIC for network labsOperating systemWindows 11 or Linux with admin rightsWindows 11 Pro/Education or a Linux preloadYou need to install hypervisors and drivers yourself

Illustration: how a 32GB laptop gets divided during a typical lab

Example allocation only. Your instructor’s lab guide sets the real numbers.

Host OS · 8GBKali VM · 8GBWindows VM · 8GBTarget · 4GBSpare · 4GB

In text form: about 8GB for the host operating system, 8GB for a Kali Linux attacker VM, 8GB for a Windows 11 target, 4GB for a vulnerable Linux server, and 4GB of headroom. On a 16GB laptop, you would have to shut one of those machines down, or starve all of them.

The One Caveat That Can Sink You: x86 vs. Arm

Apple Silicon MacBooks and Snapdragon-powered Windows laptops are excellent computers, with outstanding battery life. The catch is architecture. A hypervisor on an Arm laptop runs Arm virtual machines. Microsoft’s guidance for Windows on Arm devices focuses on creating Arm64 VMs (Microsoft Learn), and Oracle’s VirtualBox 7.1, which added Apple Silicon host support, runs Arm guests on those Macs (Oracle).

Some security tools adapt well. Kali Linux publishes an Apple silicon (ARM64) installer, and student clubs such as UMass Cybersecurity walk members through running it in the free UTM hypervisor (UMass Cybersecurity Kali/UTM guide). The problem is the same in a typical course: x64 Windows targets, instructor-built x86 VM images, and capture-the-flag boxes that ship only in x86. Those either will not run or must be emulated, which is dramatically slower than native virtualization. If you are weighing a Snapdragon laptop, our Intel Core Ultra 7 vs. Snapdragon X Elite comparison covers the broader trade-offs.

What runs where: lab compatibility by laptop typeLab taskx86 laptop (Intel/AMD)Apple silicon MacWindows on Arm (Snapdragon)Kali Linux VMYes (x64 build)Yes (ARM64 build)ARM64 build; setup varies by hypervisorx64 Windows 10/11 target VMYesNo (Windows on Arm only)No (Arm64 Windows only)Instructor-supplied x86 VM images (OVA)YesEmulation only, slow, or unsupportedEmulation only, slow, or unsupportedCourses that require x64 virtualizationMeets requirementDoes not meet requirementDoes not meet requirement

Rule of thumb

If your syllabus says “x64,” names VMware Workstation, or ships .ova lab images, buy x86. If you cannot find out before classes start, buy x86. It is the choice that never locks you out of a lab.

The Best Laptops for Cybersecurity Students in 2026

We prioritized what actually matters in a lab: x86 compatibility, upgradable RAM, ports for adapters and wired networking, Linux support, and a credible track record. Specifications come from manufacturers; performance and battery claims are attributed to the outlet that measured them. Because prices fluctuate weekly with memory costs, we list prices only where a source confirms them.

01 · Best overall

Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 7 (AMD)

The ThinkPad T14 has long been the default security-team laptop, and the Gen 7 AMD model is the most lab-friendly version yet. It pairs AMD Ryzen AI PRO 400 processors with two standard DDR5 SODIMM slots, which means you can start with 16GB and upgrade to 32GB or more yourself instead of paying today’s premium upfront. Minor repairs, like replacing the battery, USB-C ports, or keyboard, can also be fairly easily done by users. 

What matters for labs:

  • Up to 8 cores and 16 threads (Ryzen AI 7 PRO 450), per Lenovo PSREF
  • Two DDR5-5600 SODIMM slots; up to 96GB on Ryzen AI 400 models (64GB on Ryzen PRO 200 models)
  • Gigabit Ethernet (RJ-45), two USB-A, two Thunderbolt 4, and HDMI 2.1
  • Fedora and Ubuntu Linux preload options; 60Wh or 75Wh battery
  • Lenovo claims up to 18.93 hours (MobileMark 30) in its best-case configuration; starts at 2.82 lb

Watch out for: the lower-cost Ryzen PRO 200 (Hawk Point) configurations cap memory at 64GB and use older processors. Pricing varies widely by configuration, so price it out on Lenovo’s site with 16GB and add memory later.

Selling an older ThinkPad to fund the upgrade? Get a quote on Gadget Salvation’s ThinkPad buyback page.

02 · Best budget (new)

Lenovo ThinkPad E14 Gen 7 (Intel)

The E series is Lenovo’s entry ThinkPad line, and the right E14 Gen 7 configuration hides a feature most pricier laptops lack: two M.2 SSD slots. That lets you dedicate a second drive to virtual machines or a Linux dual boot. The Arrow Lake, Raptor Lake, and Meteor Lake versions also have two DDR5 SODIMM slots rated for up to 64GB (Lenovo PSREF).

What matters for labs:

  • Two DDR5 SODIMM slots on Arrow Lake, Raptor Lake, and Meteor Lake models
  • Two M.2 slots (one 2242, one 2280); Lenovo ships one SSD and leaves the second slot free
  • Gigabit Ethernet (RJ-45), two USB-A, Thunderbolt 4, and HDMI 2.1
  • Ubuntu preload offered on Raptor Lake models; starts at 2.95 lb
  • Lenovo claims up to 12.28 hours (MobileMark 30) with a Core Ultra 5 225U

Watch out for: avoid the Lunar Lake (Core Ultra 200V) configurations. Lenovo’s spec sheet lists their 16GB or 32GB of memory as soldered and not upgradable, with only one M.2 slot. Also, the base display is a dim 300-nit panel; the optional 2.8K 120Hz screen is a worthwhile upgrade if your budget allows.

03 · Best for repairability

Framework Laptop 13 Pro

Framework’s 2026 redesign keeps the company’s signature promise: nearly every part can be replaced or upgraded, and Engadget confirmed that the 13 Pro’s mainboard can drop into an original 2021 Framework Laptop 13 chassis.

Engadget scored it 8.9 out of 10, measured 16 hours and 5 minutes in its battery rundown, and found it nearly silent under everyday loads (Engadget). Framework also offers an option for preloaded Ubuntu (Framework). For security students, the key detail is memory: the AMD Ryzen AI 300 configuration uses standard DDR5 SODIMMs, while the Intel Panther Lake version requires newer LPCAMM2 modules.

What matters for labs:

  • Four swappable expansion-card ports, including Ethernet, HDMI, and USB-A options
  • AMD configuration accepts standard DDR5 SODIMMs you can buy yourself
  • Intel configuration uses removable LPCAMM2 memory (upgradeable, but currently expensive)
  • 74Wh battery; launched at $1,199 (DIY Edition) and $1,499 (prebuilt)

Watch out for: price. Framework’s LPCAMM2 supplier doubled its prices before launch, and Engadget found the Core Ultra 5 model with 16GB selling for $1,600 and its tested 32GB unit for around $3,100. The AMD/DDR5 route is the better value for lab work.

Curious how Framework’s modular approach holds up? Read our take on whether Framework is a true DIY laptop.

04 · Best Linux-first

System76 Lemur Pro (2026)

If you want Linux as your daily driver rather than a VM, System76 builds its laptops around its own Pop!_OS and COSMIC desktop. The 2026 Lemur Pro moves to Intel’s Core Ultra Series 3 (Panther Lake) processors, comes in 14-inch and 16-inch sizes, and ships with 32GB of memory and up to 4TB of storage, with pricing starting at $1,999 (System76).

What matters for labs:

  • Intel Core Ultra X7 358H option; x86, so x64 VMs run natively
  • 32GB of memory and up to 4TB of storage, per System76
  • System76 claims up to 18 hours of battery life
  • Linux drivers and firmware supported by the same company that builds the hardware

Watch out for: we could not find an independent U.S. review with measured battery results yet, and System76’s announcement does not say whether memory is user-upgradeable. Confirm both in the configurator before buying. It is also the most expensive starting price on this list.

Weighing Linux against Windows for your daily driver? Start with our Ubuntu vs. Windows breakdown. Already own a System76? Gadget Salvation buys System76 laptops.

05 · Best Mac (with caveats)

Apple MacBook Air M5

If your program confirms that Arm is fine, or you are on a track that leans on macOS and iOS work, the MacBook Air M5 is a superb student laptop. Tom’s Hardware measured 15 hours and 28 minutes of battery life, notes that every model now starts with 16GB of memory and a 512GB SSD, and weighed it at 2.7 pounds (Tom’s Hardware). Kali’s ARM64 build runs in UTM, and VMware Fusion is now free for all users (VMware).

What matters for labs:

  • 16GB unified memory standard; 24GB and 32GB available at purchase
  • Runs ARM64 Linux VMs well, including Kali
  • $1,299 starting retail price

Watch out for: memory and storage are soldered, so you cannot upgrade later; buy 24GB or more if your budget allows. It will not run x64 Windows VMs or x86-only lab images natively. And skip the MacBook Neo for lab work: its 8GB of memory is not configurable.

Trading up from an older Air? See current MacBook Air buyback offers.

06 · Best value

Pre-owned Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 (AMD)

The previous-generation T14 G6 is a near-perfect lab notebook at a lower price. It has Ryzen AI PRO 300 processors with up to 8 cores, two DDR5 SODIMM slots rated for up to 64GB, Gigabit Ethernet, two USB-A ports, two Thunderbolt 4 ports, and Fedora or Ubuntu preload options (Lenovo PSREF). Business laptops like this regularly cycle out of corporate fleets, which keeps supply healthy on the secondhand market.

What matters for labs:

  • Two DDR5-5600 SODIMM slots, up to 64GB
  • Gigabit Ethernet, two USB-A, two Thunderbolt 4, HDMI 2.1
  • MIL-STD-810H tested; Lenovo claims up to 15.5 hours (MobileMark 25)

Watch out for: corporate leftovers. Before you pay, confirm there is no BIOS supervisor password, that the laptop has been released from any company device management, and that battery health is reasonable. Buy from a seller who documents data erasure.

The U.S. EPA specifically suggests upgrading a computer’s hardware instead of buying a brand-new product (EPA). A used T14 with a memory upgrade is that advice in action.

Do You Need a Gaming Laptop or a Dedicated GPU?

Probably not. Networking, Linux administration, digital forensics, and most penetration testing coursework run on the CPU. A dedicated NVIDIA GPU mainly speeds up password-cracking exercises and machine learning projects, and many programs provide lab or cloud resources for those. If your track clearly calls for GPU work, a budget RTX gaming laptop such as the Lenovo LOQ is a good value option, if you can deal with weight and battery life trade-offs.

Side-by-Side Comparison

Lab-relevant specs for our six picks (sources noted; manufacturer battery figures are claims, not tests)LaptopArchitectureUpgradeable RAMMax RAMEthernetBatteryThinkPad T14 Gen 7 (AMD)x86 (AMD)Yes, 2× DDR5 SODIMM96GBBuilt-in RJ-45Up to 18.93 hr (Lenovo claim)ThinkPad E14 Gen 7 (Intel, non-Lunar Lake)x86 (Intel)Yes, 2× DDR5 SODIMM64GBBuilt-in RJ-45Up to 12.28 hr (Lenovo claim)Framework Laptop 13 Prox86 (Intel or AMD)Yes (DDR5 on AMD, LPCAMM2 on Intel)Varies by configurationExpansion card16 hr 5 min (Engadget test)System76 Lemur Pro (2026)x86 (Intel)Not confirmed32GB (as announced)Not confirmedUp to 18 hr (System76 claim)MacBook Air M5Arm (Apple silicon)No, soldered32GB at purchaseNo15 hr 28 min (Tom’s Hardware test)ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 (AMD), pre-ownedx86 (AMD)Yes, 2× DDR5 SODIMM64GBBuilt-in RJ-45Up to 15.5 hr (Lenovo claim)

Your Lab Software is (Mostly) Free

You do not need to budget for hypervisors. Broadcom made VMware Workstation and VMware Fusion free for commercial, educational, and personal users starting November 11, 2024 (VMware). VirtualBox remains free and now supports Apple silicon hosts (Oracle), UTM is free on the Mac, and Windows 11 Pro and Education editions include Hyper-V. Kali Linux itself is free. Spend the money you save on memory.

Before You Buy: A 7-Point Checklist

  • Read your program’s official laptop requirements page, and email the department if it is vague.
  • Confirm the processor is x86 (Intel or AMD) if any course uses x64 VMs or .ova images.
  • Get 32GB of RAM, or 16GB with a free SODIMM slot you can fill later.
  • Choose at least a 1TB SSD; a second M.2 slot is a bonus for a dedicated VM drive.
  • Make sure you have USB-A (or an adapter) for USB Wi-Fi adapters, and built-in Ethernet  (or a dongle).
  • Check that you can enter the BIOS and enable VT-x or AMD-V virtualization.
  • Price out a pre-owned business laptop before committing to new, especially in this memory market.

Resale Value: Plan Your Exit Before You Buy

Your first security laptop probably will not be your last. You may outgrow it when your track demands a GPU, or graduate into a job that issues its own hardware. Mainstream, well-documented business lines such as ThinkPads and MacBooks tend to resell more easily than obscure models, because the next buyer knows exactly what they are getting, and upgradeable memory gives that buyer room to grow. When it is time to sell, Gadget Salvation prices laptops against live resale-market data, quotes each device case by case, and locks your offer for 30 days. Keep the box if you can, and always send the original charger, because we will reduce the offer by a few dollars when it is missing. Get a laptop quote from Gadget Salvation.

As a security student, you will appreciate the data side of it, too. We wipe storage drives with BitRaser, as outlined on its data erasure protocols page. If the drive is defective and cannot be wiped, we’ll manually destroy and recycle it.

But do your own due diligence first: back up, sign out of your accounts, and remove the laptop from Find My or your Microsoft account. NIST’s current media sanitization guidance, SP 800-88 Revision 2 (published September 2025), recognizes cryptographic erase as a sanitization technique for encrypted media (NIST), so keeping BitLocker or FileVault enabled from day one makes your eventual wipe far more trustworthy.

Why reselling electronics matters

Every laptop that gets a second owner is one fewer new laptop that needs to be manufactured. The U.S. EPA notes that electronics are made from metals, plastics, and glass that all require energy to mine and manufacture, and cites a U.S. Geological Survey estimate that recycling one million laptops saves energy equivalent to the electricity used by more than 3,500 U.S. homes in a year (EPA). Reuse goes further than recycling, because the device keeps working. That is the idea behind Gadget Salvation’s mission to extend the life of electronics and cut e-waste. Read more in 6 reasons why electronics reselling matters.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the best laptop for cybersecurity students in 2026?

For most students, the Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 7 with an AMD Ryzen AI PRO 400 processor is the safest pick: it is an x86 laptop, so it runs x64 virtual machines natively; it has two DDR5 SODIMM slots that Lenovo rates for up to 96GB, and it includes built-in Ethernet and two USB-A ports. On a tighter budget, an earlier 6th-generation ThinkPad T14 release can do the trick.

How much RAM do I need for a cybersecurity degree?

Treat 16GB as the floor and 32GB as the target. Hands-on labs usually run an attacker VM, a Windows target, and a vulnerable server at the same time, and each one needs its own slice of memory. If you can only afford 16GB now, buy a laptop with SODIMM slots so you can upgrade to 32GB later.

Can I use a MacBook for cybersecurity classes?

Often, but check your syllabus first. Apple Silicon Macs run ARM virtual machines, so Kali Linux’s ARM64 build works well in UTM or VMware Fusion. What they cannot do is run x64 Windows virtual machines or x86-only lab images natively. If your program requires x64 virtualization, buy an Intel or AMD laptop instead.

Should I buy a Snapdragon (Windows on Arm) laptop for cybersecurity?

Not as your primary lab computer if your coursework uses x64 images. Microsoft’s virtualization guidance for Arm-based PCs centers on Arm64 virtual machines, so x86 lab images and x64 Windows targets will not run natively. Snapdragon laptops are excellent for battery life and general use, but an x86 laptop is the lower-risk choice for labs.

Do cybersecurity students need a laptop with a dedicated GPU?

Most do not. Introductory networking, Linux, forensics, and penetration testing coursework runs on the CPU. A dedicated NVIDIA GPU helps mainly with password-cracking exercises and machine learning work, and many programs provide lab or cloud resources for those tasks. Buy a GPU only if your track clearly calls for one.

Is a used or refurbished laptop OK for cybersecurity school?

Yes, and in 2026 it is often the smartest buy. A recent business-class x86 laptop such as a ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 (AMD) has two SODIMM slots, Ethernet, and Linux support. Before buying a used computer, confirm the following: – there is no BIOS supervisor password,  – that the laptop is released from any corporate device management, and  – that the battery health is acceptable.

How do I sell my old laptop securely before upgrading?

Back up your files, sign out of and remove the device from your accounts, and then reset the operating system. Include the original charger, unless you specify on your quotation form that it is missing.  Sources:

  • U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics — Occupational Outlook Handbook: Information Security Analysts — 29% projected job growth for 2024–2034 and $124,910 median annual wage (May 2024)
  • Virginia National Guard — Cyber Fortress 2026 Frequently Asked Questions — x64 CPU, VT-x/AMD-V, 16GB RAM, 160GB storage, USB-A, and admin-rights requirements; Apple silicon not supported for that course
  • Lenovo — PSREF: ThinkPad T14 Gen 7 (AMD) — processor options, two SODIMM slots up to 96GB, ports, battery claims, weight, Linux preload options
  • Lenovo — PSREF: ThinkPad E14 Gen 7 (Intel) — SODIMM vs. soldered memory by platform, dual M.2 slots, ports, battery claims, Ubuntu availability
  • Lenovo — PSREF: ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 (AMD) — two SODIMM slots up to 64GB, ports, battery claim, MIL-STD-810H, Linux preload options
  • iFixit — Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 7 device page — 10/10 repairability score, replaceable keyboard and USB-C ports, tool-free battery
  • Tom’s Hardware — Apple MacBook Air (13-inch, M5) review — 16GB base memory, soldered RAM and SSD, 15:28 battery result, 2.7-pound weight
  • Tom’s Guide — Apple price hikes are official — MacBook Air increase from $1,099 to $1,299 and MacBook Neo from $599 to $699
  • Engadget — Framework Laptop 13 Pro review — 8.9/10 score, 16:05 battery result, DDR5 on AMD vs. LPCAMM2 on Intel, LPCAMM2 price doubling, current pricing
  • Framework — Framework Laptop 13 Pro and highlights from the Next Gen event — launch pricing of $1,199 DIY and $1,499 prebuilt
  • Tom’s Hardware — Framework Laptop 13 (AMD Ryzen AI 300 Series) review — expansion card options including Ethernet and HDMI
  • System76 — Say hello to Lemur Pro — Panther Lake processors, 32GB memory, up to 4TB storage, 18-hour battery claim, $1,999 starting price
  • MacRumors — MacBook Neo reviews roundup — non-configurable 8GB of memory
  • Microsoft Learn — Windows on Arm ISO and virtual machines — Arm64 virtual machines on Windows on Arm devices
  • Oracle — Oracle VirtualBox 7.1: 4 things to know — Apple silicon host support with Arm guests
  • VMware by Broadcom — VMware Fusion and Workstation are now free for all users — free for commercial, educational, and personal use since November 11, 2024
  • UMass Cybersecurity Club — Kali Linux UTM installation guide — ARM64 Kali Linux on Apple silicon via UTM
  • U.S. Environmental Protection Agency — Electronics Donation and Recycling — USGS laptop recycling energy estimate; recommendation to upgrade hardware instead of buying new
  • NIST — SP 800-88 Rev. 2, Guidelines for Media Sanitization — September 2025 publication; cryptographic erase as a sanitization technique

Last reviewed October 7, 2026. Prices, configurations, and availability change frequently during the 2026 memory shortage; confirm current details with each manufacturer before buying.

Best Laptops for Cybersecurity Students, Ranked

A cybersecurity degree is a hands-on degree. Within your first semester or two, you will probably be running Kali Linux, a Windows target, and a deliberately vulnerable server side by side, all on one machine. That turns your laptop into something closer to a portable lab than a note-taking device. Choose the wrong one, and you tend to find out the night before a lab is due.

The stakes are worth getting right. The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics projects employment of information security analysts to grow 29% from 2024 to 2034, much faster than the average for all occupations, with a median annual wage of $124,910 in May 2024 (BLS Occupational Outlook Handbook). This guide covers what your coursework actually demands, the one spec that can sink an otherwise great laptop, our six picks for 2026, and how to plan your exit before you buy.

The short answer:

Buy an x86 (Intel or AMD) laptop with 32GB of RAM (16GB minimum, ideally in upgradeable SODIMM slots), a 1TB SSD, hardware virtualization enabled, and at least one USB-A port. Our top pick is the Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 7 (AMD). If money is tight, a pre-owned ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 (AMD) delivers most of the same lab-friendly hardware for less.

Quick picks: best laptops for cybersecurity students (October 2026)CategoryLaptopWhy it winsBest overallLenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 7 (AMD)x86, two DDR5 SODIMM slots (up to 96GB), Ethernet, Linux preload optionsBest budget (new)Lenovo ThinkPad E14 Gen 7 (Intel, non-Lunar Lake)Two SODIMM slots plus two M.2 slots for a dedicated VM driveBest for repairabilityFramework Laptop 13 ProModular, upgradeable, Linux-friendly; AMD option uses standard DDR5Best Linux-firstSystem76 Lemur Pro (2026)Ships with Pop!_OS and 32GB of memoryBest Mac (with caveats)Apple MacBook Air M5Great battery and build; runs ARM64 Kali, but not x64 VMsBest valuePre-owned Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 (AMD)Upgradeable to 64GB, Ethernet, lower cost, and no new e-waste

Why 2026 is an Unusual Year to Buy a Laptop

Memory prices have reshaped the laptop market this year. In June 2026, Apple raised the 13-inch MacBook Air from $1,099 to $1,299 and the MacBook Neo from $599 to $699, citing memory and storage costs (Tom’s Guide). Framework told customers its LPCAMM2 memory supplier doubled prices, and Engadget found the mid-tier Framework Laptop 13 Pro it reviewed selling for around $3,100 (Engadget).

For a cybersecurity student, that has two practical consequences. First, laptops with standard SODIMM slots are more valuable than ever, because you can buy with 16GB now and add memory later when prices ease. Second, a well-chosen pre-owned business laptop is a stronger value than usual. We dig into the market forces in our analysis of the 2026 memory crunch and the refurbished PC boom.

What a Cybersecurity Course Actually Asks of Your Laptop

Almost every hands-on security program runs on virtualization. Instead of attacking real networks, you build a small one inside your laptop: an attacker machine, one or more targets, and sometimes a monitoring box. Each virtual machine (VM) needs its own CPU cores, memory, and disk, all borrowed from the host. That is why a laptop that feels fast for browsing and essays can choke the moment a lab starts.

Published requirements for hands-on training make the pattern clear. The Virginia National Guard’s Cyber Fortress 2026 exercise, for example, requires a 64-bit Intel or AMD processor, Intel VT-x or AMD-V virtualization enabled in the BIOS, 16GB of RAM, 160GB of free storage, a USB 3.0 Type-A port, and local administrator access. It also states that Apple Silicon-based computers cannot be used for that course (Cyber Fortress 2026 FAQ). Your program may differ, so always read your school’s laptop requirements page first, but this is a realistic snapshot of what hands-on security training expects.

Recommended laptop specs for cybersecurity studentsSpecMinimumRecommendedWhy it mattersProcessor architecture64-bit x86 (Intel or AMD)64-bit x86 (Intel or AMD)Many lab images and Windows targets are x86-64 and will not run natively on ArmCPU cores6 cores8 cores / 16 threads or moreEach VM is assigned its own virtual CPUsMemory (RAM)16GB32GB, in upgradeable SODIMM slotsRunning three or more VMs at once is routineStorage512GB SSD with 160GB+ free1TB NVMe SSD; a second M.2 slot is a bonusEvery VM image consumes tens of gigabytesVirtualizationVT-x or AMD-V enabled in BIOSPlus IOMMU (VT-d or AMD-Vi)Required to run hypervisors at full speedPortsOne USB-A portUSB-A plus built-in Ethernet (RJ-45)USB Wi-Fi adapters for wireless labs; wired NIC for network labsOperating systemWindows 11 or Linux with admin rightsWindows 11 Pro/Education or a Linux preloadYou need to install hypervisors and drivers yourself

Illustration: how a 32GB laptop gets divided during a typical lab

Example allocation only. Your instructor’s lab guide sets the real numbers.

Host OS · 8GBKali VM · 8GBWindows VM · 8GBTarget · 4GBSpare · 4GB

In text form: about 8GB for the host operating system, 8GB for a Kali Linux attacker VM, 8GB for a Windows 11 target, 4GB for a vulnerable Linux server, and 4GB of headroom. On a 16GB laptop, you would have to shut one of those machines down, or starve all of them.

The One Caveat That Can Sink You: x86 vs. Arm

Apple Silicon MacBooks and Snapdragon-powered Windows laptops are excellent computers, with outstanding battery life. The catch is architecture. A hypervisor on an Arm laptop runs Arm virtual machines. Microsoft’s guidance for Windows on Arm devices focuses on creating Arm64 VMs (Microsoft Learn), and Oracle’s VirtualBox 7.1, which added Apple Silicon host support, runs Arm guests on those Macs (Oracle).

Some security tools adapt well. Kali Linux publishes an Apple silicon (ARM64) installer, and student clubs such as UMass Cybersecurity walk members through running it in the free UTM hypervisor (UMass Cybersecurity Kali/UTM guide). The problem is the same in a typical course: x64 Windows targets, instructor-built x86 VM images, and capture-the-flag boxes that ship only in x86. Those either will not run or must be emulated, which is dramatically slower than native virtualization. If you are weighing a Snapdragon laptop, our Intel Core Ultra 7 vs. Snapdragon X Elite comparison covers the broader trade-offs.

What runs where: lab compatibility by laptop typeLab taskx86 laptop (Intel/AMD)Apple silicon MacWindows on Arm (Snapdragon)Kali Linux VMYes (x64 build)Yes (ARM64 build)ARM64 build; setup varies by hypervisorx64 Windows 10/11 target VMYesNo (Windows on Arm only)No (Arm64 Windows only)Instructor-supplied x86 VM images (OVA)YesEmulation only, slow, or unsupportedEmulation only, slow, or unsupportedCourses that require x64 virtualizationMeets requirementDoes not meet requirementDoes not meet requirement

Rule of thumb

If your syllabus says “x64,” names VMware Workstation, or ships .ova lab images, buy x86. If you cannot find out before classes start, buy x86. It is the choice that never locks you out of a lab.

The Best Laptops for Cybersecurity Students in 2026

We prioritized what actually matters in a lab: x86 compatibility, upgradable RAM, ports for adapters and wired networking, Linux support, and a credible track record. Specifications come from manufacturers; performance and battery claims are attributed to the outlet that measured them. Because prices fluctuate weekly with memory costs, we list prices only where a source confirms them.

01 · Best overall

Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 7 (AMD)

The ThinkPad T14 has long been the default security-team laptop, and the Gen 7 AMD model is the most lab-friendly version yet. It pairs AMD Ryzen AI PRO 400 processors with two standard DDR5 SODIMM slots, which means you can start with 16GB and upgrade to 32GB or more yourself instead of paying today’s premium upfront. Minor repairs, like replacing the battery, USB-C ports, or keyboard, can also be fairly easily done by users. 

What matters for labs:

  • Up to 8 cores and 16 threads (Ryzen AI 7 PRO 450), per Lenovo PSREF
  • Two DDR5-5600 SODIMM slots; up to 96GB on Ryzen AI 400 models (64GB on Ryzen PRO 200 models)
  • Gigabit Ethernet (RJ-45), two USB-A, two Thunderbolt 4, and HDMI 2.1
  • Fedora and Ubuntu Linux preload options; 60Wh or 75Wh battery
  • Lenovo claims up to 18.93 hours (MobileMark 30) in its best-case configuration; starts at 2.82 lb

Watch out for: the lower-cost Ryzen PRO 200 (Hawk Point) configurations cap memory at 64GB and use older processors. Pricing varies widely by configuration, so price it out on Lenovo’s site with 16GB and add memory later.

Selling an older ThinkPad to fund the upgrade? Get a quote on Gadget Salvation’s ThinkPad buyback page.

02 · Best budget (new)

Lenovo ThinkPad E14 Gen 7 (Intel)

The E series is Lenovo’s entry ThinkPad line, and the right E14 Gen 7 configuration hides a feature most pricier laptops lack: two M.2 SSD slots. That lets you dedicate a second drive to virtual machines or a Linux dual boot. The Arrow Lake, Raptor Lake, and Meteor Lake versions also have two DDR5 SODIMM slots rated for up to 64GB (Lenovo PSREF).

What matters for labs:

  • Two DDR5 SODIMM slots on Arrow Lake, Raptor Lake, and Meteor Lake models
  • Two M.2 slots (one 2242, one 2280); Lenovo ships one SSD and leaves the second slot free
  • Gigabit Ethernet (RJ-45), two USB-A, Thunderbolt 4, and HDMI 2.1
  • Ubuntu preload offered on Raptor Lake models; starts at 2.95 lb
  • Lenovo claims up to 12.28 hours (MobileMark 30) with a Core Ultra 5 225U

Watch out for: avoid the Lunar Lake (Core Ultra 200V) configurations. Lenovo’s spec sheet lists their 16GB or 32GB of memory as soldered and not upgradable, with only one M.2 slot. Also, the base display is a dim 300-nit panel; the optional 2.8K 120Hz screen is a worthwhile upgrade if your budget allows.

03 · Best for repairability

Framework Laptop 13 Pro

Framework’s 2026 redesign keeps the company’s signature promise: nearly every part can be replaced or upgraded, and Engadget confirmed that the 13 Pro’s mainboard can drop into an original 2021 Framework Laptop 13 chassis.

Engadget scored it 8.9 out of 10, measured 16 hours and 5 minutes in its battery rundown, and found it nearly silent under everyday loads (Engadget). Framework also offers an option for preloaded Ubuntu (Framework). For security students, the key detail is memory: the AMD Ryzen AI 300 configuration uses standard DDR5 SODIMMs, while the Intel Panther Lake version requires newer LPCAMM2 modules.

What matters for labs:

  • Four swappable expansion-card ports, including Ethernet, HDMI, and USB-A options
  • AMD configuration accepts standard DDR5 SODIMMs you can buy yourself
  • Intel configuration uses removable LPCAMM2 memory (upgradeable, but currently expensive)
  • 74Wh battery; launched at $1,199 (DIY Edition) and $1,499 (prebuilt)

Watch out for: price. Framework’s LPCAMM2 supplier doubled its prices before launch, and Engadget found the Core Ultra 5 model with 16GB selling for $1,600 and its tested 32GB unit for around $3,100. The AMD/DDR5 route is the better value for lab work.

Curious how Framework’s modular approach holds up? Read our take on whether Framework is a true DIY laptop.

04 · Best Linux-first

System76 Lemur Pro (2026)

If you want Linux as your daily driver rather than a VM, System76 builds its laptops around its own Pop!_OS and COSMIC desktop. The 2026 Lemur Pro moves to Intel’s Core Ultra Series 3 (Panther Lake) processors, comes in 14-inch and 16-inch sizes, and ships with 32GB of memory and up to 4TB of storage, with pricing starting at $1,999 (System76).

What matters for labs:

  • Intel Core Ultra X7 358H option; x86, so x64 VMs run natively
  • 32GB of memory and up to 4TB of storage, per System76
  • System76 claims up to 18 hours of battery life
  • Linux drivers and firmware supported by the same company that builds the hardware

Watch out for: we could not find an independent U.S. review with measured battery results yet, and System76’s announcement does not say whether memory is user-upgradeable. Confirm both in the configurator before buying. It is also the most expensive starting price on this list.

Weighing Linux against Windows for your daily driver? Start with our Ubuntu vs. Windows breakdown. Already own a System76? Gadget Salvation buys System76 laptops.

05 · Best Mac (with caveats)

Apple MacBook Air M5

If your program confirms that Arm is fine, or you are on a track that leans on macOS and iOS work, the MacBook Air M5 is a superb student laptop. Tom’s Hardware measured 15 hours and 28 minutes of battery life, notes that every model now starts with 16GB of memory and a 512GB SSD, and weighed it at 2.7 pounds (Tom’s Hardware). Kali’s ARM64 build runs in UTM, and VMware Fusion is now free for all users (VMware).

What matters for labs:

  • 16GB unified memory standard; 24GB and 32GB available at purchase
  • Runs ARM64 Linux VMs well, including Kali
  • $1,299 starting retail price

Watch out for: memory and storage are soldered, so you cannot upgrade later; buy 24GB or more if your budget allows. It will not run x64 Windows VMs or x86-only lab images natively. And skip the MacBook Neo for lab work: its 8GB of memory is not configurable.

Trading up from an older Air? See current MacBook Air buyback offers.

06 · Best value

Pre-owned Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 (AMD)

The previous-generation T14 G6 is a near-perfect lab notebook at a lower price. It has Ryzen AI PRO 300 processors with up to 8 cores, two DDR5 SODIMM slots rated for up to 64GB, Gigabit Ethernet, two USB-A ports, two Thunderbolt 4 ports, and Fedora or Ubuntu preload options (Lenovo PSREF). Business laptops like this regularly cycle out of corporate fleets, which keeps supply healthy on the secondhand market.

What matters for labs:

  • Two DDR5-5600 SODIMM slots, up to 64GB
  • Gigabit Ethernet, two USB-A, two Thunderbolt 4, HDMI 2.1
  • MIL-STD-810H tested; Lenovo claims up to 15.5 hours (MobileMark 25)

Watch out for: corporate leftovers. Before you pay, confirm there is no BIOS supervisor password, that the laptop has been released from any company device management, and that battery health is reasonable. Buy from a seller who documents data erasure.

The U.S. EPA specifically suggests upgrading a computer’s hardware instead of buying a brand-new product (EPA). A used T14 with a memory upgrade is that advice in action.

Do You Need a Gaming Laptop or a Dedicated GPU?

Probably not. Networking, Linux administration, digital forensics, and most penetration testing coursework run on the CPU. A dedicated NVIDIA GPU mainly speeds up password-cracking exercises and machine learning projects, and many programs provide lab or cloud resources for those. If your track clearly calls for GPU work, a budget RTX gaming laptop such as the Lenovo LOQ is a good value option, if you can deal with weight and battery life trade-offs.

Side-by-Side Comparison

Lab-relevant specs for our six picks (sources noted; manufacturer battery figures are claims, not tests)LaptopArchitectureUpgradeable RAMMax RAMEthernetBatteryThinkPad T14 Gen 7 (AMD)x86 (AMD)Yes, 2× DDR5 SODIMM96GBBuilt-in RJ-45Up to 18.93 hr (Lenovo claim)ThinkPad E14 Gen 7 (Intel, non-Lunar Lake)x86 (Intel)Yes, 2× DDR5 SODIMM64GBBuilt-in RJ-45Up to 12.28 hr (Lenovo claim)Framework Laptop 13 Prox86 (Intel or AMD)Yes (DDR5 on AMD, LPCAMM2 on Intel)Varies by configurationExpansion card16 hr 5 min (Engadget test)System76 Lemur Pro (2026)x86 (Intel)Not confirmed32GB (as announced)Not confirmedUp to 18 hr (System76 claim)MacBook Air M5Arm (Apple silicon)No, soldered32GB at purchaseNo15 hr 28 min (Tom’s Hardware test)ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 (AMD), pre-ownedx86 (AMD)Yes, 2× DDR5 SODIMM64GBBuilt-in RJ-45Up to 15.5 hr (Lenovo claim)

Your Lab Software is (Mostly) Free

You do not need to budget for hypervisors. Broadcom made VMware Workstation and VMware Fusion free for commercial, educational, and personal users starting November 11, 2024 (VMware). VirtualBox remains free and now supports Apple silicon hosts (Oracle), UTM is free on the Mac, and Windows 11 Pro and Education editions include Hyper-V. Kali Linux itself is free. Spend the money you save on memory.

Before You Buy: A 7-Point Checklist

  • Read your program’s official laptop requirements page, and email the department if it is vague.
  • Confirm the processor is x86 (Intel or AMD) if any course uses x64 VMs or .ova images.
  • Get 32GB of RAM, or 16GB with a free SODIMM slot you can fill later.
  • Choose at least a 1TB SSD; a second M.2 slot is a bonus for a dedicated VM drive.
  • Make sure you have USB-A (or an adapter) for USB Wi-Fi adapters, and built-in Ethernet  (or a dongle).
  • Check that you can enter the BIOS and enable VT-x or AMD-V virtualization.
  • Price out a pre-owned business laptop before committing to new, especially in this memory market.

Resale Value: Plan Your Exit Before You Buy

Your first security laptop probably will not be your last. You may outgrow it when your track demands a GPU, or graduate into a job that issues its own hardware. Mainstream, well-documented business lines such as ThinkPads and MacBooks tend to resell more easily than obscure models, because the next buyer knows exactly what they are getting, and upgradeable memory gives that buyer room to grow. When it is time to sell, Gadget Salvation prices laptops against live resale-market data, quotes each device case by case, and locks your offer for 30 days. Keep the box if you can, and always send the original charger, because we will reduce the offer by a few dollars when it is missing. Get a laptop quote from Gadget Salvation.

As a security student, you will appreciate the data side of it, too. We wipe storage drives with BitRaser, as outlined on its data erasure protocols page. If the drive is defective and cannot be wiped, we’ll manually destroy and recycle it.

But do your own due diligence first: back up, sign out of your accounts, and remove the laptop from Find My or your Microsoft account. NIST’s current media sanitization guidance, SP 800-88 Revision 2 (published September 2025), recognizes cryptographic erase as a sanitization technique for encrypted media (NIST), so keeping BitLocker or FileVault enabled from day one makes your eventual wipe far more trustworthy.

Why reselling electronics matters

Every laptop that gets a second owner is one fewer new laptop that needs to be manufactured. The U.S. EPA notes that electronics are made from metals, plastics, and glass that all require energy to mine and manufacture, and cites a U.S. Geological Survey estimate that recycling one million laptops saves energy equivalent to the electricity used by more than 3,500 U.S. homes in a year (EPA). Reuse goes further than recycling, because the device keeps working. That is the idea behind Gadget Salvation’s mission to extend the life of electronics and cut e-waste. Read more in 6 reasons why electronics reselling matters.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the best laptop for cybersecurity students in 2026?

For most students, the Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 7 with an AMD Ryzen AI PRO 400 processor is the safest pick: it is an x86 laptop, so it runs x64 virtual machines natively; it has two DDR5 SODIMM slots that Lenovo rates for up to 96GB, and it includes built-in Ethernet and two USB-A ports. On a tighter budget, an earlier 6th-generation ThinkPad T14 release can do the trick.

How much RAM do I need for a cybersecurity degree?

Treat 16GB as the floor and 32GB as the target. Hands-on labs usually run an attacker VM, a Windows target, and a vulnerable server at the same time, and each one needs its own slice of memory. If you can only afford 16GB now, buy a laptop with SODIMM slots so you can upgrade to 32GB later.

Can I use a MacBook for cybersecurity classes?

Often, but check your syllabus first. Apple Silicon Macs run ARM virtual machines, so Kali Linux’s ARM64 build works well in UTM or VMware Fusion. What they cannot do is run x64 Windows virtual machines or x86-only lab images natively. If your program requires x64 virtualization, buy an Intel or AMD laptop instead.

Should I buy a Snapdragon (Windows on Arm) laptop for cybersecurity?

Not as your primary lab computer if your coursework uses x64 images. Microsoft’s virtualization guidance for Arm-based PCs centers on Arm64 virtual machines, so x86 lab images and x64 Windows targets will not run natively. Snapdragon laptops are excellent for battery life and general use, but an x86 laptop is the lower-risk choice for labs.

Do cybersecurity students need a laptop with a dedicated GPU?

Most do not. Introductory networking, Linux, forensics, and penetration testing coursework runs on the CPU. A dedicated NVIDIA GPU helps mainly with password-cracking exercises and machine learning work, and many programs provide lab or cloud resources for those tasks. Buy a GPU only if your track clearly calls for one.

Is a used or refurbished laptop OK for cybersecurity school?

Yes, and in 2026 it is often the smartest buy. A recent business-class x86 laptop such as a ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 (AMD) has two SODIMM slots, Ethernet, and Linux support. Before buying a used computer, confirm the following: – there is no BIOS supervisor password,  – that the laptop is released from any corporate device management, and  – that the battery health is acceptable.

How do I sell my old laptop securely before upgrading?

Back up your files, sign out of and remove the device from your accounts, and then reset the operating system. Include the original charger, unless you specify on your quotation form that it is missing.  Sources:

  • U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics — Occupational Outlook Handbook: Information Security Analysts — 29% projected job growth for 2024–2034 and $124,910 median annual wage (May 2024)
  • Virginia National Guard — Cyber Fortress 2026 Frequently Asked Questions — x64 CPU, VT-x/AMD-V, 16GB RAM, 160GB storage, USB-A, and admin-rights requirements; Apple silicon not supported for that course
  • Lenovo — PSREF: ThinkPad T14 Gen 7 (AMD) — processor options, two SODIMM slots up to 96GB, ports, battery claims, weight, Linux preload options
  • Lenovo — PSREF: ThinkPad E14 Gen 7 (Intel) — SODIMM vs. soldered memory by platform, dual M.2 slots, ports, battery claims, Ubuntu availability
  • Lenovo — PSREF: ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 (AMD) — two SODIMM slots up to 64GB, ports, battery claim, MIL-STD-810H, Linux preload options
  • iFixit — Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 7 device page — 10/10 repairability score, replaceable keyboard and USB-C ports, tool-free battery
  • Tom’s Hardware — Apple MacBook Air (13-inch, M5) review — 16GB base memory, soldered RAM and SSD, 15:28 battery result, 2.7-pound weight
  • Tom’s Guide — Apple price hikes are official — MacBook Air increase from $1,099 to $1,299 and MacBook Neo from $599 to $699
  • Engadget — Framework Laptop 13 Pro review — 8.9/10 score, 16:05 battery result, DDR5 on AMD vs. LPCAMM2 on Intel, LPCAMM2 price doubling, current pricing
  • Framework — Framework Laptop 13 Pro and highlights from the Next Gen event — launch pricing of $1,199 DIY and $1,499 prebuilt
  • Tom’s Hardware — Framework Laptop 13 (AMD Ryzen AI 300 Series) review — expansion card options including Ethernet and HDMI
  • System76 — Say hello to Lemur Pro — Panther Lake processors, 32GB memory, up to 4TB storage, 18-hour battery claim, $1,999 starting price
  • MacRumors — MacBook Neo reviews roundup — non-configurable 8GB of memory
  • Microsoft Learn — Windows on Arm ISO and virtual machines — Arm64 virtual machines on Windows on Arm devices
  • Oracle — Oracle VirtualBox 7.1: 4 things to know — Apple silicon host support with Arm guests
  • VMware by Broadcom — VMware Fusion and Workstation are now free for all users — free for commercial, educational, and personal use since November 11, 2024
  • UMass Cybersecurity Club — Kali Linux UTM installation guide — ARM64 Kali Linux on Apple silicon via UTM
  • U.S. Environmental Protection Agency — Electronics Donation and Recycling — USGS laptop recycling energy estimate; recommendation to upgrade hardware instead of buying new
  • NIST — SP 800-88 Rev. 2, Guidelines for Media Sanitization — September 2025 publication; cryptographic erase as a sanitization technique

Last reviewed October 7, 2026. Prices, configurations, and availability change frequently during the 2026 memory shortage; confirm current details with each manufacturer before buying.

Rose Bear Gift · Top10Gadgets

Yes as a showy romantic keepsake, if you check the size and find it at a fair price. Roseal CuteBear is a teddy bear covered in red foam roses with a black ribbon, and it makes a dramatic Valentine’s or anniversary gift that never wilts. But the page gives no height, “made of red roses” means foam roses, the clear gift box in the photos costs $9 extra, and similar rose bears are sold widely, often for less. Roseal CuteBear scores 4.2 out of 10, held back by missing size details and value.

  • What it is: a decorative teddy bear covered in more than 200 small red foam roses, with a ribbon.
  • Price: $49 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $135 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: a striking gift that lasts far longer than real flowers.
  • Biggest drawback: no size on the page, and the box and higher-detail roses are add-ons.
  • Our score: 4.2 out of 10.

A rose bear is a gift of looks and sentiment, and it does that job. The cons are about what you are actually buying: how big it is, what the roses are made of, and what costs extra to make it gift-ready.

What we like

  • Eye-catching red bear made of small artificial roses, popular for Valentine’s Day and anniversaries
  • Foam roses do not wilt, drop petals or need water
  • No assembly: it arrives as a finished bear
  • Lasts for years as a keepsake if kept out of direct sun
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • The page gives no height or size, which varies widely between rose bears
  • ‘Made from more than 200 roses’ means foam roses, though the title says ‘made of red roses’
  • The clear gift box shown in photos is a $9 add-on
  • ‘Extra high definition’ roses are a $7 add-on, implying the standard roses are less detailed
  • Foam rose bears of this design are sold widely, often for less
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

There is no technology here. Roseal CuteBear is a foam bear shape covered with small artificial roses, each made of thin coloured foam curled into a rose shape and glued in place. A black satin ribbon is tied around the neck. It arrives finished, ready to give or display. The foam keeps its shape and colour, which is the point: it looks like a bear made of flowers, without the flowers dying.

The red rose bear with its black ribbon. Image: Roseal

  1. Order and choose the extras

    Step 1: Pick the number of bears and decide whether to add the clear gift box and the higher-detail roses. Allow time for delivery from overseas.

  2. It arrives ready made

    Step 2: The bear is covered in small foam roses glued over a foam body, with a black ribbon at the neck. There is nothing to assemble.

  3. Display it as a keepsake

    Step 3: Place it on a shelf or in its box away from direct sunlight and dust, so the colour stays bright and the roses stay clean.

The page title calls it a “rose bear romantic gift, teddy bear made of roses, perfect romantic cute bear gift”. The six bullets promise impressive quality and colour, a fantastic gift for a girlfriend, an adorable design, a gift appreciated worldwide, long-lasting resistant materials and more than 200 roses. It gives no height, weight, colour options or care advice.

Foam, not real roses

The title says “made of red roses” and a bullet says “made from more than 200 roses”. The $7 add-on describes “precise 3D modelling with quality foam for making the roses look same as original”. So these are foam roses. That is fine, and it is why they last, but it should be clear before you buy.

Size matters

Rose bears are made in many sizes, from small bears that fit on a desk to large bears that sit on the floor. Prices vary a lot with size. Without a height on the page, you cannot tell which one you are paying for.

Roseal CuteBear suits someone buying for a partner who loves showy romantic gifts, or anyone who wants a flower gift that lasts. It is a decorative object, so it suits people with a shelf or dressing table to display it.

  • Partners looking for a showy Valentine’s Day or anniversary gift
  • People who want flowers that last instead of a bouquet that wilts in a week
  • Gift buyers who like a dramatic photo-friendly present

Valentine’s Day and anniversaries

This is the classic use. A red rose bear makes an impression and photographs well. Order early: overseas delivery and the February rush do not mix.

Birthdays

Rose bears come in other colours from other sellers, but this listing shows red. For a birthday, a colour the person likes may land better than romantic red.

Long-distance gifts

A bear that does not wilt can be posted and still look the same on arrival, unlike flowers, as long as it is well packed. The gift box add-on protects it.

Teenagers

Some teenagers love rose bears as room decorations. Small sizes are easier to fit in a bedroom.

Who should skip it

Skip Roseal CuteBear if you need a specific size, want real preserved roses, prefer practical gifts or need it delivered within days.

  • Anyone who needs a specific size for a shelf or display
  • Buyers who want real preserved roses rather than foam
  • People who want a gift with a practical use
  • Anyone ordering at the last minute, given overseas delivery

It is made of small foam roses glued over a bear-shaped base, and foam roses do not wilt, so it keeps its shape for years. Sunlight fades the red, dust collects between the petals and squeezing can crush roses, so it lasts best in a box or out of direct sun. The page gives no care advice, and calls its materials “long life time resistant”.

Foam roses

Foam roses are made from thin coloured foam shaped into petals. They are light and soft, and look convincing at a distance. Close up, the texture is matte rather than silky like real petals.

Close-up of the foam roses, from the extra high definition add-on. Image: Roseal

Fading

Red dyes fade under sunlight over months. A bear on a sunny windowsill will lose its colour faster than one on a shaded shelf.

Dust

The many small petals catch dust. A soft brush or a hair dryer on a cool setting can clear it without damaging the foam.

Crushing

Foam roses can be crushed by squeezing or by heavy packaging. Some sellers say their bears spring back after a hug. Quality varies between makers, and the page does not say how firmly the roses are attached.

Smell

Foam roses have no natural scent. Some people like to add a few drops of rose oil nearby; do not put oil directly on the foam, which can stain it.

For $7, this add-on promises “precise 3D modelling with quality foam for making the roses look same as original”. Its image shows a close-up of packed red foam roses with curled petals. It suggests the standard roses are simpler. Ask what the difference is before paying.

On 6 October 2026, one Roseal CuteBear cost $49, with the five-pack at $135 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered extra high definition roses for $7, a clear gift box for $9, a USB car adapter for $4 and a 3-year warranty for $9. With the box, which the photos make look standard, one bear costs $58.

Roseal CuteBear price and bundles

PackageTotalPer bear1 Roseal CuteBear$49$49.002 Roseal CuteBear$69$34.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$98$32.674 Roseal CuteBear$123$30.755 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$135$27.00

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. Most people need one bear. You can check today’s packages on the Roseal CuteBear order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

The clear gift box

For $9, the transparent box with a black lid, black base and “Happy everyday” ribbon makes the bear “untouchable”. It protects against dust and crushing, and looks like a gift on arrival. If you are giving the bear, it is the add-on worth having.

The $9 clear gift box add-on. Image: Roseal

The car adapter and warranty

The $4 car adapter has nothing to do with a gift bear; skip it. The 3-year warranty costs $9. The seller’s terms cover defective goods for two years once you have a returns number. A bear that arrives crushed is worth reporting straight away.

The “regular price”

Add-ons are shown against crossed-out prices, with a countdown timer on the page. We found no evidence that the Roseal CuteBear sells at a higher regular price. Foam rose bears of this design are sold by many retailers and marketplace sellers in many sizes.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as panameedia, so a surprise gift does not reveal itself on a shared statement.

Roseal CuteBearScore 4.2/10

Best for: Partners looking for a showy Valentine’s Day or anniversary gift

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

It lasts longer than flowers, but a sized rose bear from a local retailer, or a different keepsake, may suit your recipient better. Real roses smell and feel special for a week; preserved roses last for months to years; foam rose bears last years with care. Compare size and price across sellers, because the same design is widely available.

GiftLastsFeelPriceRoseal CuteBearYears with careFoam roses, no scent$49, box $9 extraBouquet of real rosesAbout a weekReal scent and petalsVariesPreserved real rosesMonths to yearsReal petals, little scentUsually moreJewellery or keepsakeYearsPersonalVaries

Rose bear vs real roses

Real roses are fragrant and traditional but short-lived. The bear is about lasting impact and display. Some recipients prefer the classic bouquet.

Rose bear vs jewellery

For a lasting romantic gift, our Voss+Agin lab-grown diamond studs review covers earrings that scored well. They cost more but are something to wear, not just display.

Rose bear vs a keepsake of memories

Our Artkive review covers a service that turns children’s artwork into a book, and our Memorygram review a personalised legacy book. Both are more personal than a foam bear.

Rose bear vs a comfort gift

Our Blissy silk pillowcase review covers a popular gift for someone who values comfort. Our holiday gift guide lists our top gift picks. Browse all our gift reviews for more ideas.

If a rose bear is exactly what your recipient would love, you can see today’s bundles on the Roseal CuteBear offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

Roseal CuteBearScore 4.2/10

Why people buy it: Eye-catching red bear made of small artificial roses, popular for Valentine’s Day and anniversaries

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

The Roseal CuteBear is a real product from a named seller, and a bear should arrive if you order. Before buying, ask for the size, order early for a special date, add the gift box if you are giving it, switch from the five-pack and note the card statement name.

Ask for the size

What to do: email support@g63com.com and ask for the height in centimetres and how it is packed. Keep the reply, so you can show it if the bear arrives smaller than expected.

Order early

The seller ships from overseas and gives no delivery estimate on the page. What to do: order several weeks before the date. If it has not arrived within three weeks, ask for tracking.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $135 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one bear before you enter your details.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as panameedia. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. A crushed bear counts as damaged; photograph it on arrival.

How to buy the Roseal CuteBear the smart way

  1. Ask support for the height and packing.
  2. Open the Roseal CuteBear order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to one bear.
  4. Add the gift box if you are giving it; skip the car adapter.
  5. Order at least several weeks before the date.
  6. Photograph the bear and packaging when it arrives.

The Roseal CuteBear scores 4.2 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.6, build durability 0.9, price competitiveness 0.8, usability 1.4 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. It is a striking, long-lasting decorative gift. The score falls on a missing size, “made of roses” wording for foam, the gift box and higher-detail roses sold separately, a widely available design and no independent ratings.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.6 / 2″Made of roses” for foam; no size; “long lifetime” plausibleBuild durability0.9 / 2Foam does not wilt; can crush, fade and gather dustPrice competitiveness0.8 / 2$49, or $58 with the box, for a widely sold designUsability1.4 / 2Ready to give; no assemblyOwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal4.2 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for the Roseal CuteBear by that name. Owners of foam rose bears on large retail sites tend to love the look and the reaction from recipients, and complain about bears smaller than expected, crushed roses after shipping and some loose roses.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has handled the Roseal CuteBear. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with the pages that rank for the product. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Give it in its box, display it out of direct sunlight, dust it gently and keep it away from damp and heat. A shaded shelf or dressing table keeps the colour bright for years. Pair it with a handwritten card, because a personal note often means more than the gift itself.

  1. Check it on arrival. Look for crushed or loose roses and report them quickly.
  2. Fix loose roses. A dab of craft glue reattaches a stray rose.
  3. Present it in the box. It protects the bear and looks finished.
  4. Add a card. A short handwritten note makes it personal.
  5. Display out of direct sun. Shade keeps the red from fading.
  6. Dust gently. A soft brush or cool hair dryer.
  7. Keep it dry. Damp can stain foam and loosen glue.

Photographing it

Rose bears look best in soft natural light against a plain background. A photo of the moment it is given often outlasts the bear.

Moving or storing it

Keep it in its box when moving house, with soft padding around it. Do not stack anything on top.

If roses fall off

Use a small amount of clear craft glue or a hot glue gun on a low setting, and hold the rose in place for a minute.

Roseal CuteBearScore 4.2/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about whether they are real roses, whether they smell and how long they last. Most rose bears, including this one, are foam; they do not smell; and they last for years if kept out of sun and dust. Size varies widely between sellers, so always check the height.

Are rose bears made of real roses?

Most are foam. Some sellers use preserved real roses, which cost more and feel softer. This listing’s add-on description points to foam.

Can I get a different colour?

The listing shows red only. Other sellers offer pink, white, blue and mixed colours.

Is a rose bear safe for children?

It is a decoration, not a toy. Small foam roses can come off and are a choking risk for young children.

Can I clean it with water?

No. Water can stain foam and weaken the glue. Use a dry brush or cool air.

What is the Roseal CuteBear made of?

Small artificial foam roses attached over a bear-shaped base, with a ribbon at the neck. The page says it is made from more than 200 roses, and its ‘extra high definition’ add-on refers to quality foam, so the roses are foam, not real or preserved flowers.

How big is the Roseal CuteBear?

The page does not say. Rose bears of this kind are commonly sold in several heights, from small desk sizes to large display bears, and sellers price them very differently. Ask the seller for the height in centimetres before ordering.

How much does the Roseal CuteBear cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one bear for $49, two for $69, three (two plus one free) for $98, four for $123 and five (three plus two free) for $135, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. The gift box cost $9, HD roses $7 and a 3-year warranty $9.

Does the rose bear last forever?

Foam roses do not wilt, so the bear keeps its shape for years. Sunlight can fade the red, dust settles between the roses, and squeezing can crush them. Keeping it in a box or out of direct sun helps it last.

Does the Roseal CuteBear come in a box?

Not as standard. The clear gift box with a black lid and ribbon shown in photos is a $9 add-on. Without it, ask the seller how the bear is packed for shipping, since a crushed bear arrives looking poor.

Is a rose bear a good gift?

For people who love showy romantic gifts, yes. It lasts longer than flowers and photographs well. Some people find them kitsch or have little room for a large ornament, so think about the recipient’s taste and space.

Is Roseal CuteBear legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are the missing size, the ‘made of roses’ wording for foam flowers, the gift box sold separately, the five-pack flagged as best seller and return postage at your cost.

Tony Fadell on why the first wave of AI gadgets failed — and what comes next

When Tony Fadell takes the stage at the inaugural MIT Future Fest, he projects a slide with three images of once-hyped AI devices that have already been discontinued: the Rabbit R1, the Humane Ai pin, and the Limitless pendant.

“These were kind of the ‘Gen 1’ AI products, and because of my background, these companies called me and asked me to help them,” Fadell said. “I didn’t.”

It’s no surprise that these companies want Fadell’s advice. He’s credited as the “father of the iPod,” a co-creator of the iPhone, and the founder of Nest, the smart thermostat company acquired by Google.

“You have to really understand what you’re trying to do, what pain you’re trying to solve,” he said. “In each of these cases, each one of them didn’t meet any kind of need — it was just interesting technology for geeks, and you’re like, ‘Okay, that’s neat, but it doesn’t really apply to my life.’”

These early AI devices promised the convenience of having a personal assistant, but didn’t actually work that well. Even if they did, most people have never had an assistant and know how they would use — or grow to trust — a personal robot helper.

“It’s less than 0.01% of the world population that has ever had a human [assistant] do anything, and so when [companies] say, ‘Oh, we want an assistant,’ that’s a bunch of people who have assistants saying it,” he said. “Most consumers don’t even know what an assistant is.”

Fadell goes on to explain to those of us in the 99.99% that hiring a trustworthy personal assistant isn’t as straightforward as pulling the most promising resume out of a pile of applications.

“It took me a couple of years first to understand how best to utilize [an assistant], and then to trust them with the most sensitive data, and have them be an agent where they’re setting up meetings with people and working with my bank,” he said. “I understand we have this vision of the future, but there’s a lot of steps to get the general consumer and even the general business on this path.”

It’s hard to talk about the struggles of building trust in your personal assistant without sounding a bit entitled, but Fadell has a point. When you hire a human assistant, you’re not giving them your bank account login on day one. We’re heading into a world where anyone can have a personal AI assistant, but these tools are only valuable if we can trust them to be completely secure.

At this point, establishing trust with an AI assistant seems even harder than relying on a human. Meta recently launched Muse, its all-purpose AI assistant, but users have reason to be wary. A security researcher quickly found a serious vulnerability in Muse after launch, and a recent 404 Media report states that some Meta employees discovered security issues that prompted multiple teams to embark upon a “mad dash” to fix these problems before launch, working overtime.

“Trust and safety are going to be paramount with anything that we turn over to some kind of intelligence,” Fadell said. “The only company I could see right now — maybe one other — is Apple who could do this. Apple has all the hardware, they have all the chips, they have all the pieces, but they don’t have all the AI stuff.”

Even if it’s not Apple that ultimately produces the stickiest AI agent, Fadell predicts that a successful agent will have to operate on-device only, both for the sake of privacy and to keep the tech lightweight.

“When you’re hearing all of these things about, ‘Oh, data centers are going to conquer the world,’ … I don’t believe it,” he said. “I’ve seen this before. I’ve seen this play out in the internet days and what have you. We have so much power on the device now, and even more compute, and they’re still battery operated.”

By keeping sensitive data on-device, rather than transmitting it through the cloud, Apple has garnered trust from users to share their biometric data through features like Face ID. As Fadell notes, Apple seems to have more goodwill with consumers than its competitors when it comes to privacy, but unlike other top tech companies, Apple doesn’t have a world-class AI model of its own — the new Siri AI runs on custom-built versions of Google’s Gemini.

While Apple lags in proprietary AI, it is leaps ahead in hardware. Fadell theorizes that companies like Meta and OpenAI are turning their attention toward gadgets because they don’t have billions of devices in circulation like Apple does.

“It’s because they don’t have access to the sensors on your phone. They’re like, ‘Oh, we’ll need video,’ and you have to check, ‘Yes, I’ll give you video.’ Then they say, ‘Well, we need audio.’ Check. ‘We need your GPS location.’ Check. And before you know it, it becomes a list of 20 things or more than you have then allowed them to have,” he said. “So what do they do? They go and make a device with all that stuff in it without a screen… and then they just Bluetooth or Wi-Fi into your phone and then back up to the web, or into a 5G network, so they can get all the sensor data.”

Given his history creating the iPhone and iPod, it might seem like Fadell is still looking at his former employer through rose-colored glasses. While he may give Apple credit where due, he hasn’t been shy to call Apple out when he thinks they’re messing up.

When an audience member asks about the luck involved in finding product-market fit, Fadell points out that it’s more difficult for startups to manufacture that luck, since a failed product can spell the end of the company.

“Because it’s a startup, you get one shot,” he quipped. “It’s not like Apple with the Vision Pro.”

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

DroneX Review (2026): Worth $99? · Top10Gadgets

Mostly no. DroneX is worth buying only if you want a simple indoor toy drone and are happy to pay well above what similar ones cost. By the offer page’s own figures it has a 480p camera, about 8 minutes of flight and 70 metres of range, which is toy-drone territory, not “professional-quality footage”. At $99 for one, with a five-pack preselected and several add-ons, it costs more than double what similar folding pocket drones have sold for. It scores 3.0 out of 10, held back by the gap between marketing and specs, the price and the refund terms.

  • A folding pocket drone flown from a phone app over Wi-Fi, weighing 85 g according to the seller.
  • Seller’s specs: 480p camera, 8 minutes per battery, 70 m range.
  • $99 for one on 3 October 2026 (US), down to $57 each in a five-pack, which the checkout preselects. Optional $24 warranty and $9 to $25 add-ons.
  • Sold by G Com Pte Ltd, Singapore. Refunds need a returns number, and return postage is on you.
  • Best trait: small, light and simple to fly indoors.
  • Biggest drawback: you pay a camera-drone price for what the specs describe as a toy.
  • Our score: 3.0 out of 10, the lowest on the site so far.

There are a few real positives: a pocket-sized drone that needs no controller is fun, and its weight keeps it under the US registration threshold. The cons are about honesty and value more than the toy itself.

What we like

  • Small and light at 85 g, according to the seller, and folds to pocket size
  • Flown from a phone app, so there is no separate controller to carry
  • Battery and charger included, and the add-on list offers spare propellers
  • Under 250 g, so recreational flyers in the US do not need to register it with the FAA

What we don’t

  • 480p camera, 8 minutes of flight and 70 m range, by the seller’s own figures, which do not support “professional-quality footage”
  • $99 for one, while similar folding pocket drones have sold for about $40
  • The checkout preselects five drones for $285, and offers a warranty, camera upgrade and other add-ons
  • Refund terms focus on defective items, need a returns number, and leave return postage to you
  • Seller is G Com Pte Ltd in Singapore, with no independent rating profile we could find
  • Light phone-controlled drones struggle in wind and over Wi-Fi range

DroneX works like most phone-controlled mini drones: no separate controller, no GPS, and a camera that streams to your phone.

  1. Unfold and switch on

    Step 1: The four arms fold out from a flat body about the size of a phone. A small removable battery powers the motors, camera and Wi-Fi.

  2. Connect your phone

    Step 2: The drone creates its own Wi-Fi network. You join it from your phone and open the companion app, which shows the camera’s live view with on-screen sticks for flying.

  3. Fly for a few minutes

    Step 3: Drones of this type usually hold their height automatically and offer a beginner-friendly headless mode. Expect around 8 minutes per battery and a range limited by the phone’s Wi-Fi link.

The offer page gives only five headline facts: 480p resolution, 8 minutes of running time, battery and charger included, 70 m range and 85 g. It does not name a model number, list a battery capacity or say which app it uses.

DroneX suits someone who wants a light, pocket-sized drone to fly around a living room, a hall or a calm garden, and who sees it as a toy. It can be a fun first taste of flying a quadcopter from a phone.

It does not suit anyone who wants aerial photos or video worth keeping, who plans to fly outdoors in normal breezes, or who expects anything close to the “professional-quality footage” in the headline.

Why DroneX appeals

Drone footage looks spectacular, and big-brand camera drones cost hundreds of dollars. A drone that folds into a pocket, weighs less than a phone and costs $99 sounds like an easy way in. The page adds a 50% discount, free delivery and a countdown timer, which make it feel like a limited chance.

The folding design is genuinely appealing. It is small enough to carry anywhere, and phone control means one less gadget to charge and pack.

Who gets the most value

The people most likely to be happy are those who would enjoy a short indoor flight now and then, and who would not mind if the camera were only good for a live view. Children may enjoy it with an adult, though light plastic propellers spinning near faces need supervision.

As a gift

As a gift, a pocket drone is fun if the recipient knows it is a toy. If they are expecting aerial photography, they are likely to be disappointed. A similar-looking drone bought from a toy retailer with a simple returns process is often a safer gift.

  • Someone who wants a simple indoor toy drone to play with and accepts a high price for it
  • A gift buyer who understands it is a toy, not a camera drone
  • People curious about phone-controlled flying before spending more

Who should skip it

  • Anyone wanting usable aerial photos or video, or anything close to professional footage
  • People who want to fly outdoors in a breeze or more than a few dozen metres away
  • Budget buyers, since similar pocket drones and better beginner drones cost less or give much more
  • Anyone uneasy about overseas sellers, preselected bundles and refund terms that put return postage on you

The page says the package includes the drone, a battery and a charger. Its pictures show a black folding drone with teal front propellers and the words “Wi-Fi” and “Drone” printed on top, a phone running a flight app with on-screen sticks, and a box labelled “Drone720X”.

  • The drone, its box labelled Drone720X, and phone control

  • The $25 car charger add-on

Images: DroneX offer page

The specs, as the seller states them

SpecDroneX (offer page)Camera480pFlight time8 minutesRange70 mWeight85 gControlPhone app over Wi-Fi (shown in images)In the boxDrone, battery, chargerFoldingYesGPS, return-to-homeNot mentionedModel number, app name, battery capacityNot stated

What 480p means

480p is standard-definition video, roughly 640 by 480 pixels, the resolution of old DVD-era television. Most phones record at 4K, about 27 times as many pixels. On a modern screen, 480p video looks soft and blocky. It is enough to see where the drone is pointing, not enough for footage you would share at full size.

The headline promises “professional-quality footage”. Professional drone footage today is usually shot in 4K or higher on stabilised cameras. A 480p camera on a light pocket drone, with no mention of stabilisation, is a different thing entirely.

A design that matches a generic pocket drone

The drone in the photos has the same flat, folding “pocket selfie drone” shape that has been sold for years under many names, including JY018 and JJRC Elfie, by many sellers. Listings for that design describe about 86 g, 6 to 8 minutes of flight, a 0.3 megapixel camera option and a phone-control range of about 30 to 80 metres. Those figures closely match DroneX’s 85 g, 8 minutes, 480p and 70 m.

We cannot confirm that DroneX is one of these models; the seller does not give a model number, and its terms say pictures are “for illustration purpose only”. But the match matters for value, because similar drones have sold for much less.

DroneX price and bundles

On 3 October 2026, with the United States selected, the offer page our link opens showed:

PackageTotalPer drone1 DroneX$99$992 DroneX$144$72Buy 2, get 1 free (3)$192$644 DroneX$236$59Buy 3, get 2 free (5)$285$57

The page shows a “was” price of $198 for one, which makes the $99 a “50% discount”. We did not see DroneX sold at $198 anywhere. The same page showed rupee prices when viewed from India, at the same exchange-rate-adjusted amounts.

What this means for you: $99 is the real price for one drone. The checkout selected the five-pack for $285 when we loaded it, so check which option is selected before you pay.

The add-ons

The checkout offers a three-year warranty for $24. The page’s own data lists three more add-ons:

Add-onPrice”Was”720p high resolution camera upgrade$25$89Extra propeller blades set$9$29Fast car charger$25$59

The camera upgrade is described as a higher-definition optical lens, which tells you the standard camera is not 720p. Its picture shows a gimbal camera of a kind a pocket drone does not carry. The propeller picture shows long, slim propellers for a bigger drone, not the small propellers in the drone’s own photos. Treat add-on images as illustrations, and ask the seller what you would actually receive.

Is $99 good value?

No. A hands-on first look at the JJRC Elfie, a folding pocket drone of the same design, priced it at $40. Well-known beginner drones such as the Ryze Tello sold for around $99 with a 720p camera, about 13 minutes of flight and a sturdier build, until DJI discontinued the Tello in the US in 2024. At $99, DroneX costs about the same as a better-specified beginner drone and more than double what similar pocket drones have sold for.

Even the five-pack price of $57 each is above what similar single drones have sold for.

Who sells it

The impressum lists G Com Pte Ltd, with an address at 137 Market Street in Singapore, a company registration number, an email address and a Singapore phone number, and names a company representative. The page footer says “G Com Pte Ltd – Hong Kong”. The terms say the agreement is governed by the company’s laws, and the cancellation phone line is open from 12:00 to 16:00 GMT+2, Monday to Friday.

The site’s footer also links to an affiliate programme, which is how offer pages like this one are promoted.

What name appears on your card

When we viewed the page with the United States selected, it said purchases would appear on card statements as “drone720x.com”. From India, the page named a different company. The page’s own code mentions a third name.

What this means for you: note the name shown at checkout, so you recognise the charge, and keep your confirmation email.

DroneXScore 3.0/10

Best for: Someone who wants a simple indoor toy drone to play with and accepts a high price for it

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

DroneX should behave like other folding pocket drones of the same design: stable and fun indoors, limited outdoors. A hands-on look at the near-identical JJRC Elfie found it hovered smoothly and was well made for a sub-$50 drone, with a decent camera nowhere near action-camera quality. By the seller’s own figures, expect about 8 minutes of flight, 70 metres of range and 480p video.

Nobody on our team has flown DroneX. This section is based on the seller’s specs, a hands-on look at a drone of the same design, and how drones of this size and type generally behave.

What a hands-on look at a similar drone found

A first-impressions review on RC Newb of the JJRC Elfie, a folding pocket drone with the same layout, found it took off and hovered smoothly and was well made for a sub-$50 quadcopter. The reviewer described the 720p camera as decent but nowhere near action-camera quality, found the phone app cluttered, and expected the light frame to struggle outdoors.

That is a fair picture of what to expect from this kind of drone: fun and stable indoors, limited outdoors, and a camera for live view rather than keepsake footage.

Flying indoors

Indoors, small phone-controlled drones are at their best. Altitude hold, which drones of this type commonly have, keeps the drone at a steady height so you only steer. A living room or hall gives you calm air and a short Wi-Fi distance. Bumping into walls is common at first; light drones usually survive it, though propellers can chip.

Flying outdoors

An 85 g drone is easily pushed around by a breeze. Without GPS position hold, it drifts with the wind, and you have to correct constantly on a phone screen with no physical sticks. In a light wind it can drift out of Wi-Fi range quickly, and when the link drops, cheap drones may land, hover or drift depending on their software.

Our advice: treat it as an indoor or dead-calm-day drone, and keep it close.

Range in practice

The page says 70 m. Phone Wi-Fi links are easily disrupted by other networks, walls and your body between phone and drone. At 70 m, a drone this small is also a dot in the sky, hard to see and harder to judge. In practice, expect to fly much closer.

Flight time in practice

Eight minutes is the seller’s figure. Hovering, cold weather, wind and a battery that has been charged many times all shorten it. Many owners of small drones buy spare batteries; the page does not offer one as an add-on.

The camera in practice

At 480p, with Wi-Fi streaming to your phone, expect a soft, sometimes jerky live view. Video and photos saved by drones like this are often saved to the phone at streaming quality. Fine for fun, not for anything you want to print or post at full size.

Phone control

On-screen sticks take practice. Your thumbs cover part of the live view, there is no feel to the controls, and incoming calls or notifications can interrupt the app. Some apps for drones of this type also offer tilt-to-steer modes; they are fun but less precise.

Noise and indoor manners

Small quadcopters make a high-pitched buzz that carries through a home and can upset pets. Indoors, the downdraft also blows light objects around. Fly in a room you have cleared, close doors to keep pets out, and keep flights short if others are nearby.

DroneX’s biggest claim is contradicted by its own page. “Professional-quality footage” does not fit the 480p camera the seller lists, which is standard definition. The “50% discount” is measured against a $198 price we did not see used, “free delivery” sits beside terms that charge by weight and method, and countdown timers, a prize wheel and “just bought” pop-ups are sales pressure.

Foldable and lightweight, yes. “Professional-quality footage” is contradicted by the same page’s 480p spec. This is the biggest gap in the listing.

“50% discount”

The discount is calculated from a $198 “was” price that we did not see used anywhere. The add-ons have similar “was” prices about three times their selling prices.

“Free delivery on every order today”

The order page promises free delivery. The terms say delivery costs depend on weight and method and are shown on the payment page, and that remote areas can cost more. The guarantee also refunds “less S&H”.

The countdown and the wheel

The page shows a 30-minute countdown and, when you try to leave, a “spin the wheel” pop-up promising a discount you can claim for 10 minutes, with “75% of discounts claimed”. These are pressure tactics, not evidence of a limited offer.

“Just bought” notifications

The page shows notices of recent purchases. When we loaded it, the notice read “undefined near undefined, undefined just bought”, which suggests it is generated by a template rather than a live record of real orders.

Images

The terms say all pictures are for illustration only and the actual product may vary. The add-on images show parts from different drones.

Claims scorecard

ClaimOur readFoldable, lightweight, 85 gPlausible; matches similar drones480p, 8 minutes, 70 mPlausible; matches similar dronesProfessional-quality footageContradicted by its own 480p spec50% discount from $198Reference price not seen in useFree deliveryTerms say costs shown at payment; refunds less S&HCountdown, wheel, “just bought”Pressure tactics; notice was brokenAdd-on imagesShow parts from other drones

Usually not. Similar folding pocket drones have sold for around $40 with 480p to 720p cameras and 6 to 8 minutes of flight. The Ryze Tello cost about the same as DroneX, around $99, and offered a 720p camera and about 13 minutes of flight, but it was discontinued in the US in 2024. The DJI Neo, its closest current equivalent, has often sold for $149 to $169 in 2026 with 4K video and GPS. For outdoor flying and footage worth keeping, a budget GPS drone with a proper controller is a far better first drone.

OptionTypical priceCameraFlight timeBest forDroneX$99480pAbout 8 minIndoor toy, if bought knowinglySimilar folding pocket droneAround $40480p to 720p6 to 8 minThe same toy for lessRyze TelloDiscontinued in 2024720pAbout 13 minLearning to fly, if found usedDJI NeoOften $149 to $1694KAbout 18 minA first camera drone with GPSGPS mini drone (Holy Stone, Potensic)Often $100 to $2502K to 4K15 to 30 minOutdoor photos on a budgetBig-brand sub-250 g camera droneSeveral hundred dollars4K30 min or moreSerious photos and video

Prices are typical ranges from retailer listings and reviews, not quotes, and change often.

DroneX vs a similar pocket drone from a toy retailer

If you want exactly this kind of drone, a similar folding pocket drone from a mainstream toy or electronics retailer is likely to cost less, arrive faster, and come with a simple returns process. Check the specs: a 720p camera is common at similar prices.

DroneX vs Ryze Tello

The Tello was a well-known beginner drone at about the same price as one DroneX, with a better camera, longer flight time and electronic image stabilisation. DJI discontinued it in the US in January 2024, so you will mostly find it used. The nearest current option is the DJI Neo, which costs more but adds 4K video and GPS return-to-home.

DroneX vs a budget GPS drone

If you want photos or video outdoors, GPS matters. Budget GPS drones from brands like Holy Stone and Potensic hold their position in wind, return home when the signal drops, and shoot much sharper video. They cost more, but they do what DroneX’s headline promises far better.

DroneX vs a big-brand camera drone

Sub-250 g camera drones from leading brands shoot sharp, stabilised 4K video for half an hour or more. They cost several hundred dollars, and they are what “professional-quality footage” usually means in an advert.

DroneX vs a drone with a physical controller

Many toy and beginner drones at similar prices come with a small handheld controller, and some also stream video to a phone clipped on top. Physical sticks are much easier to learn on than a touchscreen, because you can feel how far you have pushed them and keep your eyes on the drone. If you are buying a first drone to learn on, a controller is worth looking for.

DroneX vs other tech we have reviewed

If you are shopping for small gadgets, our tech and gadgets hub covers more, such as the CordBrick cable holder, the Clickfree phone backup drive and the Anything Speaker. Our drones section will grow as we review more. For a camera you carry rather than fly, see our iSpyPen Pro X review.

If, knowing all this, you still want a pocket drone from this seller, the DroneX order page (opens DroneX in a new tab) lists the single and multi-pack offers.

DroneXScore 3.0/10

Why people buy it: Small and light at 85 g, according to the seller, and folds to pocket size

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

DroneX is sold by G Com Pte Ltd in Singapore, and we found no independent rating profile for the seller. Before buying, check the selected bundle, because the five-pack for $285 was preselected, and decline warranty, camera and membership add-ons you do not want. Refunds focus on defective items, need a returns number and leave return postage to you. Check local drone rules too.

  • The $9 spare propeller add-on image, which shows a larger drone’s propellers

  • The $25 camera upgrade add-on image, which shows a gimbal camera unlike the drone’s

Images: DroneX offer page

The camera is standard definition

By the seller’s own spec, the camera is 480p.

What to do: buy DroneX only if you are happy with a live view and casual clips. If you want footage worth keeping, look at a 2K or 4K drone.

Check the selected bundle

When we loaded the page, the five-pack for $285 was preselected.

What to do: click the single-drone option if you only want one, and check the total before you enter card details.

Add-ons and the warranty

The $24 warranty was not preselected when we checked, but several add-ons are offered.

What to do: decline anything you did not set out to buy. Ask the seller exactly what the camera upgrade and propellers are before paying for them, since their images show parts from other drones.

Membership offers

The page’s code contains a message for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership: free access for 30 days, after which a fee of $9 may apply. We did not see it on the order form before payment, but it may appear later in checkout or after you order. The terms say refunds do not cover memberships or subscriptions.

What to do: read every screen after you click to pay, untick any membership or trial, and check your card statement for unexpected charges in the following months.

Refunds and returns

The page promises a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms describe refunds for defective or damaged products, require you to request a returns authorisation number by email or phone before sending anything back, and say return postage is at your cost.

What to do: inspect the drone when it arrives and test it the same week. If you need to return it, request a returns number in writing, keep a copy, and use tracked postage. Returning a small parcel overseas can cost a large share of the price.

The seller is overseas

The company lists a Singapore address, and support phone hours are four hours a day, 12:00 to 16:00 GMT+2, on weekdays.

What to do: use email for anything important, so you have a written record.

Card statement name

The page says charges appear under a name like “drone720x.com”, not DroneX.

What to do: note the name at checkout and check your statement.

Spare parts

Small drones crash, and propellers, propeller guards and batteries are the parts that wear out. The page offers a propeller add-on, but its image shows propellers from a larger drone, and no spare battery is offered.

What to do: before you buy, ask the seller which spare parts and batteries are available and what they cost. For a generic design, compatible parts may be easier to find if you know the exact model.

Safety

Propellers on small drones can cut skin and hurt eyes, and lithium batteries need care.

What to do: keep fingers, faces and pets away from spinning propellers, fly away from people, charge the battery on a hard surface while you are present, and stop using a swollen or damaged battery.

Drone rules for a small camera drone like DroneX

At 85 g with a camera, DroneX falls into the lightest category of drones, but the rules still apply. They change, so check your aviation authority’s current guidance.

Drone rules in the United States

According to the FAA’s guidance for recreational flyers, recreational drones under 250 g do not need to be registered. Every recreational flyer must still pass the free online Recreational UAS Safety Test and carry proof of passing it. You must keep the drone in sight, stay at or below 400 feet, give way to manned aircraft, and only fly in controlled airspace with authorisation.

Drone rules in the United Kingdom

From 1 January 2026, the UK lowered its threshold: anyone flying a drone of 100 g or more outdoors needs a Flyer ID from a free online theory test, and a drone with a camera in that weight class also needs an Operator ID, which is a paid annual registration, displayed on the drone. At 85 g, DroneX is just below the 100 g line by the seller’s figure, but the rules for camera drones and privacy still matter. Check the Civil Aviation Authority’s drone registration service for what applies to you.

Drone rules in the European Union

Under EASA rules, you must register as a drone operator if your drone has a camera, even under 250 g, unless it is certified as a toy under the EU Toy Safety Directive. EASA’s registration requirements explain the exceptions. Check the box and manual for a toy certification before assuming you are exempt.

Drone rules everywhere

Whatever the local rules, do not fly over people, near airports, over private property without permission, or where you might capture people without their consent. Parks often have their own bylaws.

Does DroneX need Remote ID?

In the US, Remote ID broadcasting is required for drones that must be registered. A drone under 250 g flown purely for recreation does not need to be registered, so it does not need Remote ID either. If you fly for any business purpose, different rules apply, including registration.

How to buy DroneX the smart way

  1. Decide whether a 480p toy drone is what you want, then open the DroneX offer page (opens DroneX in a new tab).
  2. Select the single drone unless you really want several; the page preselects five.
  3. Skip the warranty and add-ons unless you have a clear reason to buy them.
  4. Check the total, including any delivery cost, before you pay.
  5. Read every screen after payment and decline memberships or trials.
  6. Note the card statement name and keep your confirmation email.
  7. Test the drone within days of arrival, and request a returns number in writing if anything is wrong.

DroneX scores 3.0 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.4, build durability 0.8, price competitiveness 0.3, usability 1.0 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. We found no Trustpilot profile for the seller, and search results are dominated by sponsored articles whose specs do not match the offer page. Complaints about similar online drone sellers describe cheap toys sold as camera drones.

Independent ratings

We found no Trustpilot profile for the seller’s site or its support domain. A ProductReview.com.au listing exists for “DroneX Pro”, but it blocked our access, so we could not read it. Search results for DroneX are dominated by sponsored articles on news sites and review pages with buy buttons, many of which describe higher-spec “DroneX Pro” models.

What the category’s complaints look like

Trustpilot reviews of other online drone sellers show recurring complaints: drones advertised as professional camera drones turning out to be cheap toys, short flight times, fake or unhelpful tracking, and slow or no responses to refund requests. These are not reviews of DroneX, but they are the problems to watch for with any overseas drone offer page.

What the advertorials say

Many articles about “DroneX Pro” rate it highly and quote features such as 720p cameras, 12 MP photos and long ranges. Some carry promotional labels, and most link straight to order pages. Their specs do not match the 480p, 8-minute, 70 m figures on the page our link opens.

How to read drone reviews online

Look for reviews that name the exact model, show unedited sample footage, and say how long the drone actually flew. Be wary of articles where every buy button goes to the same offer page, where ratings from several platforms are listed without links, or where the specs differ from the order page. The order page’s own spec list is the best guide to what you will receive.

What we would test with a DroneX in hand

If we test it ourselves, we will check the exact model and app, measure flight time from a full charge, test range and Wi-Fi stability indoors and outdoors, record sample video, check stability in a light breeze, and go through the full checkout and returns process. We will update this review with the results.

How we scored DroneX

Every score on the site follows the five criteria on our how we test page.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.4 / 2″Professional-quality footage” contradicted by its own 480p spec; reference price, broken purchase notices, mismatched add-on imagesBuild durability0.8 / 2Light plastic toy-class design; spares offered; no model or parts informationPrice competitiveness0.3 / 2$99 for a drone matching designs sold around $40; better beginner drones at the same priceUsability1.0 / 2Simple phone control and pocket size; short flights, Wi-Fi range, poor in windOwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings found; category complaints about offer-page dronesTotal3.0 / 10

The score would rise with honest marketing that matches the specs, a price in line with similar drones, a named model and app, and a simpler returns process.

What we did, and did not, do

We read the offer page, its order form and its code, its impressum and its terms, the FAA, UK and EASA rules, a hands-on look at a similar drone and existing DroneX Pro coverage, all on 3 October 2026. Nobody on our team has flown DroneX, and no figures here come from our own testing.

Charge the battery fully on a hard surface and never leave it charging unattended. Install the app the instructions name and connect your phone to the drone’s Wi-Fi. Start indoors in a large, clear room with people and pets out of the way, calibrate on a flat surface, and use altitude hold and headless mode while you practise take-off, hover and landing.

  1. Charge the battery fully on a hard surface, and do not leave it charging unattended.
  2. Install the app the instructions name, then connect your phone to the drone’s Wi-Fi network.
  3. Start indoors in a large, clear room, with pets and people out of the way.
  4. Use altitude hold and headless mode, if the app offers them, while you learn.
  5. Keep the drone within a few metres at first, and land before the battery runs low.
  6. Only fly outdoors on a calm day, in an open space, and keep it close and in sight.
  7. Check the local rules before any outdoor flight.

Calibrating before you fly

Many small drones need a quick calibration on a flat surface before take-off, often by a button in the app. If the drone drifts badly in a still room, land, place it on a level floor and calibrate again.

Learning the controls

Practise take-off, hover and landing until they feel natural. Then try slow movements forward and back, then turns. On-screen sticks have no feel, so small, gentle movements work best.

Protecting the propellers

Fly away from walls and furniture until you are confident. If a propeller chips or bends, replace it, because damaged propellers cause vibration and drift. Note which propellers spin which way; they are usually marked.

Getting the most from the battery

Let the battery cool after a flight before recharging it, and store it about half charged if you will not fly for a while. A second battery, if you can find a compatible one, doubles your flying time.

Better video from a small drone

Fly slowly and smoothly, keep the sun behind you, and film in bright light, which helps small cameras most. Do not expect sharp detail at 480p.

If the drone loses connection

Stay calm and keep your phone close to the drone’s last position. Many cheap drones land slowly when the signal drops; others drift. That is another reason to keep it close and over soft, open ground.

DroneXScore 3.0/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about value and rules. Cheap drones are often worth it as toys but rarely as cameras: under about $100, expect short flights, Wi-Fi range and low-resolution video. A small drone with altitude hold is a good way to learn indoors, while a sub-250 g GPS drone with a proper controller is a better first drone for filming. Adverts often use footage from better drones.

Are cheap drones worth it?

As toys, often yes. As cameras, rarely. Under about $100, expect short flights, Wi-Fi range and low-resolution video. If you want photos and video, spending more on a GPS drone makes a big difference.

What is a good first drone?

A small, inexpensive drone with altitude hold is a good way to learn the basics indoors. If you want to fly outdoors and film, a sub-250 g GPS drone with a proper controller is a better first drone than a phone-controlled toy.

Adverts often use footage shot on much more expensive drones, or stock video. Always compare the advert with the specs in the listing, especially camera resolution, flight time and range.

What is the difference between 480p, 720p, 1080p and 4K?

They describe video resolution. 480p is standard definition, 720p and 1080p are HD, and 4K has about four times as many pixels as 1080p. For drone footage you want to keep, 2.7K or 4K is the usual minimum today.

Do small drones need a licence?

In the US, recreational flyers need to pass the FAA’s free Recreational UAS Safety Test, whatever the weight. In the UK, a Flyer ID is needed for drones of 100 g or more, and an Operator ID for camera drones of that weight. In the EU, camera drones generally need operator registration unless they are certified toys.

How long do drone batteries last?

Small drone batteries usually last a few hundred charge cycles before flight time drops noticeably. Heat, deep discharge and storing them fully charged shorten their life.

Can you fly a drone in the rain?

Not a small consumer drone like this. Water can damage the motors, electronics and battery. Fly only in dry weather.

It depends on the park and the country. Many parks have their own rules, and some ban drones. Check before you fly, and stay away from people.

Why does my mini drone drift?

Light drones drift with air currents, and without GPS they have nothing to hold their position. Calibrating on a level surface helps, but some drift is normal, especially outdoors.

Can kids fly DroneX?

Many toy drones are marketed to children, but the seller does not give an age rating. Spinning propellers can injure fingers and eyes, so children should fly with an adult and in a clear space.

What is DroneX?

DroneX is a small folding quadcopter sold through an international offer page run by G Com Pte Ltd. The page lists a 480p camera, 8 minutes of flight time, 70 m range and a weight of 85 g, and you fly it from a phone app over Wi-Fi.

How much does DroneX cost?

On 3 October 2026, with the United States selected, the offer page showed $99 for one, $144 for two, $192 for three, $236 for four and $285 for five. A three-year warranty was offered for $24, and add-ons included a 720p camera upgrade for $25, spare propellers for $9 and a car charger for $25. The five-pack was preselected.

Is DroneX good for photos and video?

Not really. The seller’s own spec is 480p, below even basic HD. Expect a live view on your phone and casual clips, not footage you would want to share at full size. A 2K or 4K drone suits footage worth keeping.

How long does DroneX fly?

The offer page says 8 minutes per battery. Pocket drones of this type usually manage 6 to 8 minutes, and less in wind or with aggressive flying. Buy a spare battery if you want longer sessions, and let the motors cool between flights.

Do I need to register DroneX?

In the US, a recreational drone under 250 g does not need FAA registration, but you must pass the FAA’s free Recreational UAS Safety Test. In the UK, since 1 January 2026 a drone of 100 g or more with a camera needs a Flyer ID and an Operator ID. In the EU, a camera drone under 250 g needs operator registration unless it is certified as a toy.

Is DroneX legit?

The seller lists a Singapore company, address, email and phone number, and you should receive a drone. The concerns are the gap between the marketing and the 480p specs, the price compared with similar drones, the preselected multi-pack and the refund terms.

Is DroneX the same as DroneX Pro?

Not necessarily. Many older articles describe a “DroneX Pro” with a 720p camera and other specs. The DroneX on the offer page our link opens lists 480p, 8 minutes and 70 m. Judge the product by the specs on the page you buy from.

Can I get a refund on DroneX?

The page promises a guarantee with a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms say you must request a returns number by email or phone first, that return postage is at your cost, and that refunds do not cover memberships or subscriptions.

DroneX Pro Review (2026): Worth $99? · Top10Gadgets

Only if you want a small folding toy drone to learn on and you do not mind paying about double what the same design has sold for. DroneX Pro folds into a pocket, has three speed modes and a controller that holds your phone, which makes it a friendly first drone indoors. But a German drone site found it identical to the Eachine E58, the page lists no camera, flight time or range, and the add-on images show parts from far larger drones. DroneX Pro scores 3.4 out of 10, held back by price, vague specs and refund terms.

  • What it is: a folding pocket drone with a phone-holding controller, Wi-Fi camera view and three speed modes.
  • Price: $99 for one on 4 October 2026, with a five-pack for $285 preselected. Delivery was listed as free.
  • Best trait: small, light and simple enough for a beginner to learn on.
  • Biggest drawback: identified as a rebranded Eachine E58 that sold for roughly half the price, with toy-grade video.
  • Our score: 3.4 out of 10.

The pros are real for a beginner toy. The cons are about honesty, value and what “shoot like a pro” really means at this size.

What we like

  • Folds small enough for a jacket pocket and comes with a handheld controller that holds your phone
  • Light enough, at about 100 g for the E58 design it matches, to be forgiving for beginners indoors
  • Three speed modes let you start slowly and speed up as you learn
  • A cheap way to find out whether you enjoy flying before spending on a GPS drone
  • Free delivery, and the seller names a registered company with a Singapore address

What we don’t

  • A German drone site found DroneX Pro identical to the Eachine E58, which sold for about half the price
  • The page states no camera resolution, flight time, range or weight
  • The $24 ‘720P camera’ add-on is pictured with a gimbal camera from a much larger drone
  • Tests of the E58 found washed-out, low-contrast video and a practical range of about 50 to 60 m
  • No GPS, so it drifts in wind and will not return home on its own
  • Refunds need a returns number first, and you pay return postage to an overseas seller

DroneX Pro is a small quadcopter: four motors spin four propellers, and a flight controller adjusts their speeds to climb, turn and move. A handheld controller sends your stick movements by radio, while the camera streams video to your phone over the drone’s own Wi-Fi network.

  1. Charge and unfold

    Step 1: Charge the flight battery, unfold the four arms and fit the battery. Attach your phone to the controller and install the app shown on the offer page.

  2. Connect and take off

    Step 2: Connect your phone to the drone’s Wi-Fi to see the camera view, pair the controller and use one-key take-off to lift off to a low hover.

  3. Fly, film and land

    Step 3: Steer with the two sticks, switch speed modes as you gain confidence, and record photos or video to your phone. Land before the battery runs low, after a few minutes of flight.

DroneX Pro suits a beginner, or an older child with an adult nearby, who wants to learn the basics of flying in a hall, garden or calm park. It is a toy with a camera, not a camera drone. If you understand that, it can be fun.

  • Beginners and older children who want an inexpensive-feeling folding drone to learn on indoors and in calm weather
  • People who want to try flying before buying a GPS camera drone
  • Buyers who value one order with free delivery over finding the original model for less

Why DroneX Pro appeals

The page sells a dream that drone adverts have sold for years: a pocket drone that lets you “see the world and shoot like a pro”. The photos show a sleek, dark folding drone that looks, at a glance, like the expensive models that film holidays and weddings. The title even promises “professional-quality footage”.

The folding design is genuinely clever at this size. Arms swing in, and the whole thing fits in a coat pocket. A proper controller, rather than only phone controls, makes flying easier to learn, and three speed modes let a nervous beginner start slowly.

Who gets the most value

You get the most from DroneX Pro if you treat it as a flying toy and a way to learn. Practising take-offs, hovering, turning and landing on a small, light drone builds the skills you need before spending hundreds on a GPS camera drone. If you crash, which every beginner does, a small light drone usually survives.

Families can enjoy it together in a large room or a quiet park on a still day. A few minutes of flight per battery, then a recharge, is normal for toys of this size.

Older children and teenagers

Many people buy drones like this for teenagers. They can be a great introduction to flying and photography. Supervise younger children, explain the rules about where you can fly, and keep propellers away from faces. Our Sparkcopter review covers the same design sold under another name, with more on drones for young flyers.

People who want real aerial photos

If you want sharp video of holidays, landscapes or property, DroneX Pro is the wrong tool. A sub-250 g GPS drone from an established brand costs more but holds position, returns home on its own and records stabilised video. Starting with a toy is fine, but do not expect it to do that job.

Who should skip it

Skip DroneX Pro if you want real aerial footage, need to fly in wind, or would rather pay less for the same design under its original name.

  • Anyone expecting professional-quality photos or video
  • People who want to fly outdoors in wind, which a light non-GPS drone handles poorly
  • Price-conscious buyers, since the same design has sold for much less under its original name
  • Young children without adult supervision, because spinning propellers can cut skin and eyes

A German drone site, drohnen.de, tested DroneX Pro in 2019 and described it as identical to the Eachine E58, a budget folding drone that then sold for about €39 to €50, against €99 for DroneX Pro. The photos on today’s offer page show the same design. We cannot confirm the exact parts inside the current version, but the evidence points to a well-known toy drone sold under a new name at a higher price.

The $24 720P High Resolution Camera add-on image, which shows a large drone’s gimbal camera. Image: DroneX

What drohnen.de found

In its DroneX Pro test, drohnen.de called DroneX Pro and the Eachine E58 identical and described the DroneX Pro name as a marketing strategy to sell the same budget drone for more. The site listed a flight time of 7 to 9 minutes, a practical range of about 50 to 60 m against an advertised 80 to 100 m, a weight of about 100 g and a 500 mAh battery. It rated the drone 68% overall: fine for children and beginners, short of serious features.

What the Eachine E58 is

The E58 is one of the most widely copied folding toy drones, styled to look like a famous premium folding drone at a fraction of the size and price. A T3 review of the Eachine E58 Pro called it decent value but not the easiest to fly. Listings for the E58 describe a 720p camera, a 6-axis gyro, headless mode, one-key take-off and landing, 360-degree flips and Wi-Fi control from an app.

Why the E58 looks like a premium drone

The E58’s folding arms, dark grey body and front camera echo the look of a famous premium folding camera drone that cost many times more. That resemblance is deliberate, and it is a big part of why the design has been rebranded so often. In photos, without a sense of scale, a 100 g toy and a 900 g camera drone can look alike. In the hand, the difference is obvious: the toy is smaller than a smartphone when folded and feels light and hollow.

What “precision flight performance technology” means

The phrase does not refer to any specific system. On a drone of this class, flight control comes from a small gyroscope and accelerometer that keep it level, and usually a barometer for altitude hold. There is no GPS, optical flow or obstacle sensing listed for the E58. “Precision” in this context means it can hover in still air with some help from the pilot, which is normal for toy drones.

The design keeps coming back under new names

The same folding drone has appeared under many names over the years. Our DroneX review covers another version from the same seller, and this batch includes the Drone Ultra and Sparkcopter pages, which use the same photos and bullet points. When several brand names share one design, the cheapest version of the design is usually the best value.

What the offer page says

The visible page lists six bullets: precision flight performance technology, ultra-wide camera angle, see the world and shoot like a pro, finely tuned control at your command, three speed modes, and portable to follow you on travels. The headline promises a “brilliant foldable lightweight drone for professional-quality footage”.

There is no camera resolution, flight time, range, weight or battery capacity. Those are the numbers that tell you what a drone can do, and every specialist retailer lists them.

The add-on images

The page’s code offers a “720P High Resolution Camera” for $24, shown reduced from $89. Its image shows a silver camera on a three-axis gimbal of the kind fitted to much larger drones, not the small fixed camera of a pocket drone. The “Protection Travel Case” add-on, for $29, is pictured holding a larger grey folding drone. In our view, both images give a misleading idea of what you would receive.

The 720P camera add-on also tells you something about the base model: if a 720p camera is an upgrade, the standard camera is probably lower resolution, as it was on the original DroneX, which listed 480p.

The offer page gives no figures, so the best guide is testing of the matching Eachine E58: about 7 to 9 minutes of flight, a practical range of 50 to 60 m and washed-out, low-contrast images. The standard camera is likely below 720p, since 720p is sold as an add-on. That is normal for a toy drone of this size and price, and far from the “professional-quality footage” the page promises.

Camera and video

Drohnen.de described E58 photos as washed out, low in contrast and poor in quality. Small toy drones have tiny sensors, cheap fixed lenses and no gimbal, so every vibration and gust shows in the video. Footage is recorded to your phone over Wi-Fi, which can drop frames when the signal weakens.

Expect clips that are fun to share with friends on a phone screen, especially of your own garden from above. Do not expect sharp, steady footage on a television.

Flight time

Seven to nine minutes is typical for a 500 mAh battery in a drone this size. Flight time falls in wind, in cold weather and with aggressive flying. Charging takes about an hour, according to E58 listings. Most owners buy extra batteries, which are inexpensive for this design, to make a session last longer.

Range

The practical range drohnen.de measured, about 50 to 60 m, is short. The video link over Wi-Fi often fails before the controller loses contact. When video drops, you are flying blind unless you can see the drone. Keep it close and always in direct sight.

Why the camera points where the drone points

A pocket drone’s camera is fixed to the body. When the drone tilts forward to fly, the camera tilts too, and when it rocks in wind, the picture rocks with it. Larger camera drones use a motorised gimbal to keep the camera level whatever the drone does. That difference alone explains much of the gap between toy footage and the smooth shots in drone adverts.

No GPS

DroneX Pro, like the E58, has no GPS. It cannot hold position on its own outdoors, it drifts in wind, and it has no automatic return home. Altitude hold, where included, keeps it at a set height using a barometer, but it will still drift sideways. Indoors and in still air that is manageable. On a breezy day it can blow away.

Speed modes and headless mode

Three speed modes let you limit how fast the drone responds. Start in the slowest. Headless mode, a feature listed for the E58, makes the drone move relative to you rather than to its nose, which helps beginners who lose track of which way it is facing. It is a useful crutch while learning.

Weight

Drohnen.de gave the E58’s weight as about 100 g, and other E58 listings give 96 to 99 g. The page gives no weight for DroneX Pro. Weight matters for the rules, which change at 100 g in the UK and 250 g in the US.

On 4 October 2026, with the United States selected, one DroneX Pro cost $99, shown as half of $198, with free delivery. The five-pack for $285 was preselected. A 3-year warranty cost $24, and add-ons included a $24 camera, $9 spare propellers and a $29 case. Drohnen.de priced the matching Eachine E58 at €39 to €50 when DroneX Pro sold for €99.

  • The $9 Extra Propeller Blades Set add-on

  • The $29 Protection Travel Case add-on image, shown holding a larger drone

Images: DroneX

DroneX Pro price and bundles

PackageTotalPer drone1 DroneX Pro$99$99.002 DroneX Pro$144$72.00Buy 2, get 1 free (3)$192$64.004 DroneX Pro$236$59.00Buy 3, get 2 free (5), preselected$285$57.00

One drone is enough for almost everyone. Spare batteries and propellers are a better use of money than more drones. You can check today’s packages on the DroneX Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

The add-ons

  • 720P High Resolution Camera: $24 (from $89). Pictured as a large drone’s gimbal camera. Ask exactly what you would receive before paying.
  • Extra Propeller Blades Set: $9 (from $29). Spare propellers are genuinely useful, because they break in crashes.
  • DroneX Pro Protection Travel Case: $29 (from $79). Pictured holding a different, larger drone. A small padded pouch protects a pocket drone well enough.

Spare parts and repairs

Because the E58 design is so common, spare propellers, arms, motors and batteries are widely sold for it. That is one advantage of a cloned design: when something breaks, a replacement is usually easy to find. Check that parts are listed as compatible with the E58 or its folding design before ordering, and keep a small screwdriver set for swapping arms.

Spare batteries

The page does not offer spare batteries, which are the single most useful extra for a toy drone. What to do: ask support whether spare batteries are available and what they cost, or check whether E58-compatible batteries fit.

The “regular price”

The page shows $198 crossed out next to $99 and a countdown. We found no evidence of DroneX Pro selling at $198. Compare the $99 with what the same design costs under its original name.

Who sells it

The order page and impressum name G Com Pte Ltd, at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with a company registration number, email and phone number. The footer says “G Com Pte Ltd – Hong Kong”. We found no independent rating profile for the store. With the United States selected, the order page said charges would appear as panameedia.

DroneX ProScore 3.4/10

Best for: Beginners and older children who want an inexpensive-feeling folding drone to learn on indoors and in calm weather

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

No. For learning, the Ryze Tello has long been a well-reviewed small drone with better flight stability, and drohnen.de suggested it and the Parrot Mambo as better value. The Tello was discontinued in the US in 2024, so look for it used. For real photos, a sub-250 g GPS drone is in a different class. DroneX Pro’s only advantages are the fold-up size and the offer page’s convenience. The same E58 design under its own name costs less.

DroneGPSCameraFlight timeBest forDroneX ProNoNot stated; 720p sold as add-onNot stated; E58 about 7-9 minIndoor and calm-weather funEachine E58No720p listedAbout 7-9 minThe same toy, usually for lessRyze Tello (discontinued 2024)No, vision positioning720pAbout 13 minLearning and coding indoorsGPS mini drone (sub-250 g)Yes2.7K to 4K20-30 min or moreHoliday and landscape footage

DroneX Pro vs the Eachine E58

They appear to be the same design. Buying the E58 under its own name from a retailer with easy returns usually costs less, and spare parts are easy to find. This is the clearest case where a rival wins.

DroneX Pro vs the Ryze Tello

The Tello uses a downward camera and sensors to hold its position indoors far better than a basic toy, which makes it easier for beginners. It can also be programmed with simple coding apps, popular with children learning to code. It does not fold, and its range is short, but it flies more steadily. DJI discontinued it in the US in January 2024, so you will mostly find it used.

DroneX Pro vs a GPS mini drone

GPS drones hold their position outdoors, return home automatically if the signal drops and record stabilised video. Sub-250 g models from established brands avoid US registration for recreational use. They cost several times more, but they are what “professional-quality footage” actually means.

DroneX Pro vs the original DroneX

Our DroneX review covers the seller’s earlier version, which listed a 480p camera, about 8 minutes of flight and 70 m of range for $99. DroneX Pro uses the same price and very similar marketing, with even fewer specs on the page.

Other drones on this site

The Tactic AIR Drone from the same seller has a dual camera and optical flow positioning, at the same $99. Browse all our drone reviews to compare.

If you still prefer DroneX Pro, check the current packages on the DroneX Pro offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and choose a single drone.

DroneX ProScore 3.4/10

Why people buy it: Folds small enough for a jacket pocket and comes with a handheld controller that holds your phone

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

In the US, a recreational drone under 250 g does not need FAA registration, but every recreational flyer must pass the free online safety test. In the UK, camera drones of 100 g or more need a Flyer ID and Operator ID, so DroneX Pro’s exact weight matters. In the EU, camera drones generally need operator registration. Everywhere, keep it in sight, low and away from people, roads and airports.

United States

The FAA’s guidance for recreational flyers says drones under 250 g flown purely for fun do not need registration. All recreational flyers must pass the free Recreational UAS Safety Test and carry proof. You must fly within visual line of sight, stay below 400 feet, give way to manned aircraft and follow local airspace rules. Flying over people, at night or near airports has extra restrictions.

United Kingdom

From 1 January 2026, anyone flying a drone of 100 g or more outdoors needs a Flyer ID from a free online theory test, and a drone of that weight with a camera also needs an Operator ID, which you get through the Civil Aviation Authority’s registration service. E58 listings put the design at 96 to 100 g, right at the threshold. What to do: weigh your drone with its battery on a kitchen scale and check the current CAA rules.

European Union

Under EASA rules, you generally need to register as an operator if your drone has a camera, even under 250 g, unless it is certified as a toy. EASA’s registration requirements explain the details and exceptions. Registration is with your country’s aviation authority.

Where to fly

Large gardens, quiet parks where drones are allowed, open fields with the landowner’s permission and big indoor spaces such as halls are ideal. Avoid crowds, roads, busy beaches, wildlife and anywhere near airports or helipads. Many parks have their own drone rules, so check signs or the council website.

Flying abroad

Drone rules differ by country, and some countries restrict drones heavily or require permits even for small ones. If you plan to take DroneX Pro on holiday, check the aviation authority’s rules for your destination, and pack the battery in hand luggage, as airlines usually require for lithium batteries.

Some tourist sites, national parks and historic buildings ban drones entirely, whatever their size. Look for signs, check the site’s website, and if in doubt, keep the drone in its pouch. A few minutes of flight is never worth a fine or a confiscated drone. If you want aerial holiday shots, check the rules before you pack, not after you arrive, because some countries also restrict bringing drones in at all.

Privacy

Even a small camera drone can intrude on neighbours. Do not fly over other people’s gardens, film people without permission or hover near windows. Respecting privacy also keeps drone flying welcome in your area.

DroneX Pro is a real product from a named seller, and a drone should arrive if you order. Before buying, know that it matches a cheaper toy design, change the preselected five-pack, ask what the camera add-on really is, check the drone rules where you live, and know that refunds need a returns number and that return postage is yours to pay. Each point below ends with one action.

Expect toy performance

What to do: treat the “professional-quality footage” line as marketing, and compare DroneX Pro with the E58 and other beginner drones before deciding.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $285 was preselected. What to do: change it to one drone before entering your details.

Ask about the camera add-on

What to do: email support to ask what the $24 camera add-on is, whether it fits DroneX Pro, and what resolution the standard camera has. Keep the reply.

Membership offers

The page code contains text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership, free for 30 days and then “a small fee of $9 may apply”. We did not see it on the order page with the United States selected. What to do: read every checkbox and post-purchase page.

Refunds and returns

The page code promises a 30-day guarantee with a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms focus on defective or damaged products, which may be returned within two years once you have a returns number. Return postage is at your cost and is not reimbursed. Shipping lithium batteries back overseas can be awkward and costly.

What to do: test the drone indoors on the day it arrives, and contact support straight away if anything fails.

Battery safety

Small lithium polymer batteries can swell or catch fire if damaged, overcharged or punctured. What to do: charge only with the supplied cable, never leave charging batteries unattended, stop using a swollen battery and store batteries in a cool, dry place.

How to buy DroneX Pro the smart way

  1. Compare the price with the Eachine E58 and other beginner drones.
  2. Open the DroneX Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the preselected five-pack to one drone.
  4. Add spare propellers if you want them; skip the camera add-on until support explains it.
  5. Note the card statement name, panameedia, and save your order email.
  6. Check your weight-based registration rules before flying outdoors.

DroneX Pro scores 3.4 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.4, build durability 0.9, price competitiveness 0.4, usability 1.1 and owner satisfaction 0.6, each out of 2. It works as a beginner toy, and drohnen.de rated the matching E58 68% for children and beginners. But “professional-quality footage” is far from the truth, specs are missing, add-on images mislead and the price is about double the original design’s.

What owners and testers say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store. Drohnen.de’s testing of DroneX Pro gave a fair picture: fun for beginners and children, poor image quality, short range and flight time, and no GPS or smart features. Owners of E58-style drones commonly report that they are fun to learn on, that propellers and arms break in crashes, that video lags and that the drone drifts outdoors.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.4 / 2″Professional-quality footage” and “shoot like a pro” are far from tested performance; add-on images misleadBuild durability0.9 / 2Light toy build survives small crashes; arms and propellers breakPrice competitiveness0.4 / 2About double what the identical E58 sold forUsability1.1 / 2Controller, speed modes and headless mode help beginners; no GPSOwner satisfaction0.6 / 2Fun as a toy, disappointing as a camera, per testers and owners of the designTotal3.4 / 10

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has flown DroneX Pro. We read the offer page our link opens with the United States selected, its code and the seller’s terms on 4 October 2026, along with drohnen.de’s DroneX Pro test, a T3 review of the Eachine E58 Pro, FAA, UK CAA and EASA rules and the top-ranking DroneX Pro pages.

Start indoors or on a still day in an open space, in the slowest speed mode, and practise hovering and landing before anything else. Keep the drone low and in sight, land as soon as the battery warning starts, let batteries cool before recharging and carry spare propellers. These habits make a toy drone more fun and help it last.

  1. Charge fully before the first flight. Use the supplied cable and stay nearby while it charges.
  2. Check the propellers. Make sure each is fitted on the correct motor, usually marked A and B, and spins freely.
  3. Calibrate on a flat surface. Follow the leaflet’s gyro calibration step before take-off.
  4. Start in the slowest mode. Practise take-off, hover and landing until they feel easy.
  5. Use headless mode while learning. It keeps controls relative to you, not the drone’s nose.
  6. Stay low and close. A metre or two of height is plenty while you learn.
  7. Land at the first battery warning. Pushing past it risks a sudden drop.

Headless mode explained

Normally, pushing the right stick forward moves the drone in the direction its nose points. When the drone turns to face you, forward on the stick brings it towards you, which confuses beginners. Headless mode fixes the direction relative to where the drone was when you switched it on. Forward on the stick always moves it away from you, wherever the nose points. Use it while learning, then practise without it, because flying by nose direction is the skill you will need on larger drones.

Learning the controls

The left stick usually controls height and rotation, the right stick moves forward, backward and sideways. Practise one movement at a time: up and down, then turning, then moving forward and back. Then combine them. Ten minutes of careful practice a day builds skill quickly.

Filming with a small drone

Fly slowly and smoothly, because jerky movements show in the video. Film in good light, with the sun behind you. Short clips are easier to share and look better than long recordings with drops in signal. Keep your expectations in line with the camera.

Battery care

Let the battery cool for 10 to 15 minutes after flying before charging. Store batteries partly charged if you will not fly for weeks. Replace any battery that swells, smells or gets very hot.

After a crash

Switch off the drone and controller, check the propellers and arms for cracks, and replace damaged propellers before flying again. A bent or chipped propeller causes vibration and drifting. Keep a spare set in your bag.

Flying with friends

Two small drones on the same Wi-Fi channel can interfere with each other, and two pilots in one space can collide. If friends bring drones, take turns, or fly at opposite ends of a large field. Agree a simple call, such as “landing”, so everyone knows when a drone is coming down.

Recording your progress

A short note after each session, with the date, battery count and what you practised, shows how quickly you improve. Many beginners find that after five or six sessions, hovering and simple turns feel natural, which is the point to try a figure-of-eight or gentle outdoor flights on a calm day.

Flying in wind

Light drones struggle in even moderate wind. If the drone drifts and you cannot hold it, land immediately. Never fly over water or roads on a windy day.

Other questions about cheap folding drones

Most questions are about flight time, camera quality, range and whether a cheap drone is worth it. Expect about 7 to 10 minutes per battery, video fine for a phone screen, a range of tens of metres rather than hundreds, and good value only as a learning toy. The answers below cover what buyers most often ask when choosing between toy drones and camera drones.

Why do cheap drones fly for such a short time?

Small drones carry small batteries, and lifting anything takes a lot of energy. A 500 mAh battery powering four motors lasts only a few minutes. Bigger drones fly longer because they carry much larger batteries and use more efficient motors.

Can I add a better camera to a toy drone?

Not in a meaningful way. The frame, motors and battery are designed for a tiny camera. Adding weight shortens flight time and makes it harder to fly. If you want better video, buy a drone designed for it.

Do toy drones work with any phone?

Most use a free app on iPhone and Android. Check that the app is still available in your phone’s app store before buying, because apps for older toy drones are sometimes removed.

Why does the video lag?

Video is streamed over Wi-Fi from the drone to your phone. Wi-Fi in toy drones is low-powered and easily disrupted by distance, obstacles and other networks. Lag gets worse as the drone flies further away.

Are propeller guards worth using?

Yes, especially indoors and for beginners. Guards protect the propellers and the people and furniture around them. They add a little weight and catch the wind, so some people remove them outdoors once they are confident.

What is the best age for a first drone?

Many toy drones are labelled for ages 14 and up. Younger children can fly with an adult’s help in a safe space. The right age depends on the child’s coordination and how well they follow safety rules.

Can I fly in my garden?

Usually yes, if you stay within your own space, avoid flying over neighbours and keep away from people. Rules on gardens near airports or in restricted airspace still apply.

Is it worth buying a drone with GPS for my first drone?

If you mainly want to film outdoors, yes. GPS makes flying much easier because the drone holds position and returns home. If you want to learn to fly by hand, a cheap non-GPS drone teaches more skill, though it is more frustrating outdoors.

DroneX ProScore 3.4/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Is DroneX Pro the same as the Eachine E58?

A German drone site, drohnen.de, tested DroneX Pro in 2019 and called it identical to the Eachine E58, a budget folding drone. The photos on the current offer page show the same design. We cannot confirm the exact parts in today’s version, but expect E58-level performance.

How long does DroneX Pro fly?

The offer page does not say. Tests of the matching Eachine E58 found about 7 to 9 minutes per battery. Spare batteries are common for this design, and many owners buy two or three to extend a session.

How good is the DroneX Pro camera?

The page does not give a resolution, and sells a 720P camera as a $24 add-on. Drohnen.de described the E58’s photos as washed out, low in contrast and poor quality. Expect video that is fine for fun clips on a phone, not professional footage.

How much does DroneX Pro cost?

With the United States selected on 4 October 2026, the offer page listed one DroneX Pro for $99, two for $144, three for $192, four for $236 and five for $285. The five-pack was preselected. Delivery was listed as free, and a 3-year warranty add-on cost $24.

Do I need to register DroneX Pro?

In the US, a recreational drone under 250 g does not need FAA registration, but you must pass the free Recreational UAS Safety Test. In the UK, camera drones of 100 g or more need IDs, so check the weight. EU rules generally require operator registration for camera drones.

What is the range of DroneX Pro?

The page does not state it. Drohnen.de measured a practical range of about 50 to 60 m for the E58, against an advertised 80 to 100 m. Wi-Fi video often breaks up before control is lost, so keep it close and in sight.

Is DroneX Pro good for kids?

It can be a fun first drone for older children with an adult supervising, especially indoors or in a calm, open space. Propellers can injure fingers and eyes, so use propeller guards if included, and keep it away from faces, pets and people.

Sparkcopter Drone Review (2026): Worth It? · Top10Gadgets

Yes, as a practice toy, if you know what you are buying and are happy to pay a premium. Sparkcopter is a small folding drone with a phone controller and three speed modes, a friendly way to learn basic flying indoors or on still days. It is not a DJI Spark, and its page shares every photo and bullet with the seller’s DroneX Pro and Drone Ultra, matching a budget design tested as the Eachine E58. No camera, flight time or range figures are given. Sparkcopter scores 3.3 out of 10, held back by price, missing specs and refund terms.

  • What it is: a pocket-sized folding drone with a controller, Wi-Fi camera view and three speed modes.
  • Price: $99 for one on 4 October 2026, with a five-pack for $297 preselected. Delivery was listed as free.
  • Best trait: a light, simple drone to learn basic control on.
  • Biggest drawback: the same budget design sells under several names, and the name borrows from a DJI drone it has nothing to do with.
  • Our score: 3.3 out of 10.

The pros are about learning to fly. The cons are about the name, the missing numbers and the price.

What we like

  • Folds down small and comes with a controller that holds your phone for a live view
  • Three speed modes help beginners start slowly
  • Light and forgiving, so small crashes rarely end the fun
  • A sensible way to find out whether drone flying is for you before spending more
  • Free delivery, and the seller names a registered company with a Singapore address

What we don’t

  • Not connected to DJI’s Spark, despite the similar name
  • Same photos and bullets as the seller’s DroneX Pro and Drone Ultra, matching a design that sold for much less as the Eachine E58
  • No camera resolution, flight time, range or weight on the page
  • No GPS, so it drifts outdoors and has no automatic return
  • Add-on images show a large drone’s camera and a different drone in the case
  • Refunds need a returns number first, and you pay return postage to an overseas seller

Sparkcopter flies on four propellers driven by small electric motors, with a gyroscope and flight controller keeping it level. The controller sends your stick inputs by radio, while the camera streams to your phone over the drone’s own Wi-Fi.

  1. Charge, unfold and connect

    Step 1: Charge the flight battery, unfold the arms, attach your phone to the controller and connect the phone to the drone’s Wi-Fi to see the camera view.

  2. Take off and hover

    Step 2: Use one-key take-off or the sticks to lift off to a low hover. A gyroscope keeps the drone level while you get used to the controls.

  3. Fly short, careful sessions

    Step 3: Practise in the slowest speed mode, film short clips to your phone, and land as soon as the low battery warning starts.

Sparkcopter suits a first-time flyer, or a teenager with an adult around, who wants to practise take-offs, hovering and simple manoeuvres without risking an expensive drone. It is not a camera drone in any serious sense.

  • First-time flyers who want a small, inexpensive-feeling drone to practise on
  • Teenagers learning to fly, with an adult around
  • Buyers who like this offer page and accept the price premium

Why Sparkcopter appeals

The name does a lot of work. DJI, the best-known drone maker, sold a small drone called the Spark, and “Sparkcopter” sounds like a relative. The page adds the familiar promise of “professional-quality footage” and “see the world and shoot like a pro”, next to a photo of a sleek, dark folding drone.

The practical appeal is real, though. A drone that folds into a pocket and comes with physical control sticks is far easier to learn on than a phone-only toy, and three speed modes let you start gently.

Who gets the most value

Learners get the most from Sparkcopter. Flying a light, non-GPS drone teaches you to control it by hand, which is the core skill of drone flying. Pilots who learn on a toy usually handle a GPS drone more calmly when automation fails or the signal drops.

Teenagers

Teens often enjoy a small drone as a first gadget for filming and flying with friends. Agree the rules first: where they can fly, how high, and never near people, roads or airports. Our DroneX Pro review covers the same design under another name, with more on its history and testing.

Content creators

If you want drone shots for social media, the camera on a toy of this type will disappoint. Phone cameras now outperform tiny drone cameras by a wide margin. A sub-250 g GPS drone with a stabilised camera is the minimum for footage you would want to post.

Who should skip it

Skip Sparkcopter if you expected a DJI product, want usable aerial video or plan to fly outdoors in anything but calm air.

  • Anyone who thinks Sparkcopter is related to DJI’s Spark or performs like it
  • People who want good aerial photos or video
  • Pilots who plan to fly outdoors in wind or over long distances
  • Shoppers who can buy the same design under its original name for less

No. DJI’s Spark was a small, GPS-equipped camera drone that DJI has since discontinued, while Sparkcopter is sold by G Com Pte Ltd and matches a budget folding design tested as the Eachine E58. The Sparkcopter page uses the same photos and bullets as the seller’s DroneX Pro and Drone Ultra pages. The similar name is the only link to DJI that we could find.

The $24 720P Camera Upgrade add-on image. Image: Sparkcopter

What the DJI Spark was

DJI’s Spark was a compact drone launched in the late 2010s, with GPS, obstacle sensing, a stabilised camera and gesture control. It was aimed at people who wanted a small but capable camera drone. It is no longer sold new by DJI. None of its features, such as GPS and a stabilised camera, appears on the Sparkcopter page.

Why the name matters

Drone buyers often search by brand. A name that sounds close to a well-known product can catch people who half-remember it, and adverts can borrow some of its reputation without making any direct claim. Sparkcopter’s page never says it is made by DJI, but the name invites the association. If you saw “Spark” in an advert and assumed DJI, it is worth pausing before you order.

Features the DJI Spark had that Sparkcopter does not list

The Spark was built around GPS positioning, a two-axis mechanical gimbal, downward vision sensors, obstacle sensing at the front and intelligent flight modes such as gesture launch. None of these appears in Sparkcopter’s bullets. The only overlap is a small, portable body and a phone app. That gap is why price comparisons between the two make little sense.

Three names, one design

On 4 October 2026, the Sparkcopter, DroneX Pro and Drone Ultra pages showed the same black folding drone with yellow motor rings, the same controller with a phone, the same headline and these six bullets: precision flight performance technology, ultra-wide camera angle, see the world and shoot like a pro, finely tuned control at your command, three speed modes, and portable to follow you on travels.

Our Drone Ultra review compares the three pages’ prices side by side.

What the design really is

A German drone site, drohnen.de, tested DroneX Pro and found it identical to the Eachine E58, then about €39 to €50, compared with €99 for DroneX Pro. It measured 7 to 9 minutes of flight, a practical range of 50 to 60 m and a weight of about 100 g, and described the photos as washed out and low in contrast. It rated the drone 68%, fine for children and beginners.

Prices across the three pages

On the day we checked, one drone cost $99 on all three pages. Bundles differed: two Sparkcopters cost $159, the same as two Drone Ultras, against $144 on the DroneX Pro page. If you are set on buying this design from this seller and want more than one, compare all three pages first.

The original DroneX

The same seller also sells the original DroneX, covered in our DroneX review, with a 480p camera, about 8 minutes of flight and 70 m of range at $99. The family resemblance is strong.

Add-on images from other drones

The page code offers a 720P camera upgrade pictured with a large drone’s gimbal camera, propellers that look longer than a pocket drone’s, and a case pictured with a different, larger folding drone inside. In our view, these images do not show what fits Sparkcopter.

Expect toy-level performance: about 7 to 9 minutes per battery, a practical range of tens of metres, a camera likely below 720p and no GPS, based on testing of the matching E58. In still air, with some practice, it hovers and flies well enough to be fun. Outdoors in wind, it drifts and can be carried away. Video is fine for a quick look on a phone, not for keeping.

Flight time and charging

A small 500 mAh battery gives a few minutes of flight. Charging takes about an hour. Spare batteries make a real difference, as does flying gently rather than at top speed.

Range and signal

Drohnen.de’s measured practical range for the E58 was 50 to 60 m. The video feed to your phone uses Wi-Fi and usually fails before the controller’s radio link. Keep the drone close enough to see clearly with your own eyes.

Camera

A 720P camera is sold as an add-on, which suggests the standard camera is lower. Tiny sensors, a fixed lens and no stabilisation mean shaky, soft footage that records to your phone over Wi-Fi.

What the camera is good for

Despite its limits, the camera has uses. It lets you see what the drone sees, which makes flying more immersive, and it can capture fun clips of a garden party or a dog running around. Children love seeing their house from above. Just treat the footage as a souvenir rather than something to edit into a polished video.

Indoor flying

Indoors, light toy drones are at their best. With no wind, a gyroscope and altitude hold are enough to keep the drone steady. A large room, a hall or a gym is an ideal place to practise.

Outdoor flying

Outdoors, the lack of GPS matters. The drone cannot fight wind to hold its position, so even a light breeze pushes it sideways. On calm days in an open space, outdoor flights can be fun. On breezy days, leave it at home.

Altitude hold

E58-type drones usually include altitude hold, which uses a pressure sensor to keep the drone at a steady height when you centre the throttle stick. It makes hovering much easier for beginners, because you only need to correct sideways drift. It is not perfect: draughts indoors and temperature changes outdoors can make the height wander slowly.

Lights

Many drones of this design have LED lights on the arms, which help you see which way the drone is facing. Front and rear lights in different colours make orientation easier, especially at a distance. If yours has them, learn which colour is the front before your first outdoor flight.

Tricks

E58-type drones usually include one-key take-off and landing, headless mode and 360-degree flips. Flips are a favourite with younger pilots and a good way to learn that the drone recovers quickly when you let go of the sticks.

On 4 October 2026, with the United States selected, one Sparkcopter cost $99, shown as half of $198, with free delivery. The five-pack for $297 was preselected. A 3-year warranty cost $24, and add-ons included a $24 camera upgrade, $9 propellers and a $29 case. Drohnen.de priced the matching E58 at €39 to €50 when DroneX Pro was €99.

  • The $29 Protection Travel Case add-on image, shown with a different drone inside

  • The $9 Extra Propeller Blades Set add-on image

Images: Sparkcopter

Sparkcopter price and bundles

PackageTotalPer drone1 Sparkcopter$99$99.002 Sparkcopter$159$79.50Buy 2, get 1 free (3)$197$65.674 Sparkcopter$249$62.25Buy 3, get 2 free (5), preselected$297$59.40

One drone is enough for most people. You can check today’s packages on the Sparkcopter order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

The add-ons

  • 720P Camera Upgrade: $24 (from $89). Ask what you would actually receive and whether it fits.
  • Extra Propeller Blades Set: $9 (from $29). Useful, if they fit this drone.
  • Sparkcopter Protection Travel Case: $29 (from $79). A padded pouch protects a pocket drone well enough.

Reading the bundle prices

The five-pack works out at $59.40 per drone, which sounds like a saving. It only makes sense if you genuinely want five drones, for example for a club or a group of children. For a single learner, the extra drones add cost without benefit, while spare batteries and propellers would be far more useful.

Spare batteries

No spare battery is offered, though it is the most useful extra for a toy drone. What to do: ask support whether spare batteries are sold, and what they cost.

The “regular price”

The page shows $198 crossed out next to $99 with a countdown. We found no evidence of Sparkcopter selling at $198.

Who sells it

The order page and impressum name G Com Pte Ltd, at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with a company registration number, email and phone number. The footer says “G Com Pte Ltd – Hong Kong”. We found no independent rating profile for the store. With the United States selected, the order page said charges would appear as drone720x.com.

SparkcopterScore 3.3/10

Best for: First-time flyers who want a small, inexpensive-feeling drone to practise on

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

No, except for the fold-up size. For learning indoors, the Ryze Tello holds its position better thanks to vision sensors, and drohnen.de recommended it and the Parrot Mambo as better value. The Tello was discontinued in the US in 2024, so look for it used. For filming, a sub-250 g GPS drone is in a different league. The matching Eachine E58 costs less under its own name. Sparkcopter’s main advantage is buying from this page.

DroneGPSStabilised cameraFoldsBest forSparkcopterNoNoYesPractice and funEachine E58NoNoYesThe same toy, often cheaperRyze Tello (discontinued 2024)No, vision sensorsElectronic onlyNoSteady indoor learningTactic AIR DroneNo, optical flowNoYesSteadier toy hover, dual cameraSub-250 g GPS droneYesYesUsuallyReal aerial video

Who should spend more

If you know you want aerial photos and you are comfortable learning on a more capable drone, spending more upfront saves money in the end. A toy that disappoints after a few weeks, followed by a GPS drone, costs more than buying the GPS drone first. The toy route makes most sense for children, for people unsure whether they will enjoy flying, and for practising manual control.

Sparkcopter vs the Eachine E58

Buying the original design from a retailer with simple returns usually costs less, with easy access to spare parts. If you like the design, this is the clear winner.

Sparkcopter vs the Ryze Tello

The Tello’s downward sensors keep it steady indoors, which helps nervous beginners. It is widely used for simple coding lessons too. It does not fold, and its battery life is also short, but it is easier to fly. DJI discontinued it in the US in January 2024, so you will mostly find it used.

Sparkcopter vs the Tactic AIR Drone

The seller’s Tactic AIR Drone has optical flow positioning and a second, downward camera, which should make it steadier in a hover. It costs the same $99 for one.

What makes a good beginner drone

Look for a light, inexpensive drone with propeller guards, altitude hold, several speed modes and readily available spare parts. A physical controller is easier than phone-only controls. For outdoor flying, optical flow or GPS makes life easier. And always look for clear specifications: flight time, weight, camera resolution and range. Sparkcopter’s page misses that last test.

Learning on a simulator

Some pilots practise on drone simulator apps or computer programs before flying real drones. Simulators let you crash as often as you like at no cost, and teach the stick movements. They are no substitute for real flying, but they can shorten the learning curve.

Sparkcopter vs a GPS drone

A sub-250 g GPS drone holds position outdoors, returns home if the signal drops and records smooth video. It costs several times more, but it is what Sparkcopter’s marketing describes. Browse our drone reviews to compare more options.

If you still prefer Sparkcopter, check today’s packages on the Sparkcopter offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and choose one drone.

SparkcopterScore 3.3/10

Why people buy it: Folds down small and comes with a controller that holds your phone for a live view

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Not a licence as such, but most countries have rules. In the US, recreational flyers must pass the FAA’s free safety test, and drones under 250 g need no registration. In the UK, camera drones of 100 g or more need a Flyer ID and Operator ID. In the EU, camera drones generally require operator registration. Everywhere, keep it in sight, low, and away from people and airports.

United States

The FAA’s guidance for recreational flyers explains the free Recreational UAS Safety Test, which every recreational flyer must pass and carry proof of. Drones under 250 g flown purely for fun do not need registration. Fly below 400 feet, within sight, and follow airspace restrictions.

United Kingdom

From 1 January 2026, anyone flying a drone of 100 g or more outdoors needs a Flyer ID, and a camera drone of that weight also needs an Operator ID from the Civil Aviation Authority. The E58 design is listed at 96 to 100 g, so weigh your drone with its battery to check.

European Union

Camera drones generally require operator registration under EASA rules unless certified as toys. EASA’s registration requirements explain the exceptions.

Flying at the beach or in the mountains

Beaches and hilltops are tempting for drone video, but they are usually windy, and sand and salt spray damage motors. Light toy drones struggle in coastal and mountain winds. If you try, pick a calm moment, stay low and close, and land at the first sign of drift. Many beaches and nature reserves also restrict drones to protect wildlife.

Flying near home

Flying in your own garden is usually fine if you stay within your boundary, keep low and avoid neighbours. If your home is near an airport, a hospital helipad or a military site, check the airspace rules first, because restrictions can apply even to tiny drones.

Respecting privacy

Do not fly over neighbours’ gardens, film people without permission or hover near windows. Even a small camera drone can make people uncomfortable, and respecting privacy keeps drone flying welcome.

Flying in parks

Many parks restrict or ban drones. Check signs and local council or park authority rules before flying.

Sparkcopter is a real product from a named seller, and a drone should arrive if you order. Before buying, know it is not a DJI product, compare it with its twins and the original design, change the preselected five-pack, and know that refunds need a returns number and that return postage is yours to pay. Each point below ends with one action.

Read the product title carefully

Offer pages often use long titles packed with appealing words. Sparkcopter’s says “brilliant foldable lightweight drone for a professional-quality footage”. What to do: look for the specification numbers instead of the adjectives, and if there are none, assume the most basic version of the design.

Do not buy it as a DJI drone

What to do: if you want a DJI drone, buy from DJI or an authorised retailer.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $297 was preselected. What to do: change it to one drone before entering your details.

Membership offers

The page code contains text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership, free for 30 days and then “a small fee of $9 may apply”. We did not see it on the order page with the United States selected. What to do: read every checkbox and post-purchase page.

Refunds and returns

The page code promises a 30-day guarantee with a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms focus on defective or damaged products, which may be returned within two years once you have a returns number. Return postage is at your cost and is not reimbursed.

What to do: test the drone indoors on the day it arrives, and contact support straight away if anything fails.

Battery safety

What to do: charge the battery only with the supplied cable, while someone is nearby, on a hard surface, and stop using it if it swells.

App permissions

Toy drone apps may ask for access to your camera, photos, storage and location. Camera and storage access are needed to save footage, and location is sometimes needed for Wi-Fi connections on Android. What to do: grant only what the app needs to work, and be cautious with apps that ask for contacts or other unrelated permissions.

Buying as a gift

If Sparkcopter is a gift, the recipient may not know it is not a DJI product. What to do: be clear about what it is, include a spare battery if available, and charge it before giving it, so the first flight can happen straight away.

How to buy Sparkcopter the smart way

  1. Compare the price with the same design under other names.
  2. Open the Sparkcopter order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the preselected five-pack to one drone.
  4. Ask about spare batteries; skip the camera add-on until support explains it.
  5. Note the card statement name, drone720x.com, and save your order email.
  6. Check the rules where you live before flying outdoors.

Sparkcopter scores 3.3 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.4, build durability 0.9, price competitiveness 0.3, usability 1.1 and owner satisfaction 0.6, each out of 2. It works as a beginner toy, which testers of the matching design rated fairly. But the name invites confusion with DJI, the “professional-quality footage” claim is unrealistic, specs are missing and the price is about double the original design’s.

What owners and testers say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no independent reviews for Sparkcopter by name. Several top-ranking pages are sponsored articles. Drohnen.de’s testing of the matching E58 found it fun for beginners but weak in image quality, range and flight time. Owners of E58-style drones often praise the size and the controller, and complain about short flights, laggy video, drifting and broken propellers.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.4 / 2″Professional-quality footage” is unrealistic for this design; add-on images mislead; name echoes DJIBuild durability0.9 / 2Light toy build; propellers and hinges are weak pointsPrice competitiveness0.3 / 2About double the original design’s priceUsability1.1 / 2Controller and speed modes help beginners; no GPSOwner satisfaction0.6 / 2Fun as a toy, limited as a cameraTotal3.3 / 10

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has flown Sparkcopter. We read the Sparkcopter, DroneX Pro and Drone Ultra offer pages with the United States selected, their code and the seller’s terms on 4 October 2026, along with drohnen.de’s test, FAA, UK CAA and EASA rules and the top-ranking Sparkcopter pages.

Learn indoors first, in the slowest mode with propeller guards, until you can hover, turn and land on a target. Then move outdoors on a calm day in an open space, keep the drone low and close, and land at the first battery warning. Short, focused sessions build skill faster than long, aimless ones, and keep the drone in one piece.

  1. Set up a practice area. A large room or hall, cleared of breakables, with pets out.
  2. Fit guards and check propellers. Each propeller must sit on the correct motor.
  3. Calibrate on a flat surface. Follow the leaflet’s gyro calibration before take-off.
  4. Practise one control at a time. Height, then rotation, then forward and back, then sideways.
  5. Land on a target. A cushion or mat makes a good landing pad and a clear goal.
  6. Go outdoors only on calm days. Choose an open space away from people, roads and trees.
  7. Land at the first warning. Low battery means lost power soon after.

Choosing the right weather

Calm, dry days with light cloud are ideal: no wind, no glare and soft light for video. Avoid rain, strong sun low in the sky, which can blind you to where the drone is, and any wind you can feel on your face. Early mornings and evenings are often the calmest times of day.

Charging between flights

Toy drone batteries get warm in flight. Wait 10 to 15 minutes before recharging, charge on a hard surface away from anything flammable, and do not leave charging batteries unattended. If a battery comes back hot, swollen or smelling odd, retire it.

Keeping a spare set of propellers on you

Propellers are the part that breaks most often. Carry a spare set and the small tool or screwdriver that came with the drone. Swapping a cracked propeller in the field takes a minute and saves the rest of the session.

Practice games

Set up two chairs and fly between them, or try landing on a book from a hover. Count how many smooth landings you can make in a row. Games like these build precision quickly and keep practice fun for teenagers.

Flying around trees and buildings

Trees and buildings block Wi-Fi and create swirling air near their edges. Keep well clear, especially at first. A drone stuck in a tree is a common end to a toy drone’s life, and climbing to retrieve it is riskier than the drone is worth.

Losing sight of the drone

If you lose sight of the drone, let go of the sticks so it hovers, if it has altitude hold, and look around carefully. If it has a one-key return or landing button, use landing rather than flying blind. Toy drones do not return home on their own.

Your first video

Wait until you can fly smoothly. Then fly slowly in a straight line in good light, with the sun behind you, and keep clips short. Jerky movements and wind show up badly on small cameras.

Looking after the drone

Wipe off dust and grass after outdoor flights, check the arms and hinges, and replace chipped propellers. Store it folded in a pouch, with the battery removed and partly charged.

Setting up the app

Install the app the leaflet names, switch on the drone, join its Wi-Fi network from your phone’s settings, then open the app. Some phones try to leave networks without internet; turn that setting off for the drone’s network. If the video still does not appear, close and reopen the app with the drone switched on.

Taking photos versus video

Most toy drone apps take photos and video by tapping an icon. Photos are often sharper than video frames because the camera can use its full resolution for a single shot. If you want a still of your house from above, take a photo while hovering steadily, rather than grabbing a frame from a video.

Practice drills for steady improvement

Try these in order, moving on only when each feels easy. Hover at waist height for a full minute without touching anything. Rotate a full circle on the spot. Fly forward three metres, stop and hover, then fly back. Fly a slow square, keeping the nose pointing forward. Fly the same square with the nose always pointing towards the centre. The last drill is hard, and mastering it means you are ready for most beginner drones.

Flying in a sports hall or gym

Large indoor spaces are ideal for toy drones: no wind, high ceilings and lots of room. Some drone clubs hire halls in winter for exactly this reason. Ask before flying in a shared space, keep away from lights and other people, and bring guards.

Sharing the drone with friends

If friends want a go, hand over the controller only once the drone has landed, and give a quick briefing: which stick does what, the slowest mode, and the land button. Stand beside a new pilot so you can take over. Most crashes happen in the first few seconds of a new pilot’s turn, when they push the sticks too hard.

Cleaning after outdoor flights

Grass, dust and sand collect around the motors. After outdoor sessions, switch the drone off, remove the battery and gently brush the motors and propellers with a soft, dry brush. Do not use water. A clean drone runs cooler and flies more smoothly. Check the propellers for nicks while you clean, and swap any that are chipped, because a damaged blade makes the drone vibrate, drift and drain its battery faster. Store the spares in a small bag or box so they do not bend in transit.

When something goes wrong

If it drifts on take-off, land and recalibrate. If it wobbles, check the propellers. If the video drops, fly closer and check your phone is still on the drone’s Wi-Fi. If it flies away in wind, follow it on foot while you can still see it, and never chase it into a road.

Other questions about toy drones

Most questions are about battery life, cameras, age suitability and how toy drones compare with camera drones. Expect several minutes per battery, video for fun rather than keeping, teenage and older pilots or supervised younger ones, and a big jump in price and capability for GPS camera drones. The answers below cover what buyers most often ask.

What age is a toy drone suitable for?

Many are labelled 14 and up, mainly because of propeller and battery safety. Younger children can fly with an adult’s help in a safe space.

Can a toy drone fly in the rain?

No. Water can damage the electronics and battery. Land and dry it if you are caught in a shower.

Can I use a toy drone at night?

Some have lights, but flying at night makes it hard to see the drone, and rules in many countries restrict night flying. Daylight is safer while learning.

How high can a toy drone fly?

Physically, perhaps tens of metres before the signal weakens. Legally, the US limit is 400 feet, but a light toy drone is hard to see and control long before that. Keep it low.

What happens if the battery dies in flight?

The drone loses power and falls. Many toys warn you with flashing lights or the controller beeping. Land as soon as you see the warning.

Can I buy replacement parts?

For widely copied designs like the E58, propellers, arms and batteries are commonly sold. Check fit before buying, because similar-looking drones can differ.

Are toy drones safe around pets?

Pets may chase or attack a buzzing drone, and propellers can hurt them. Keep pets out of the room or garden while flying.

SparkcopterScore 3.3/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Is Sparkcopter made by DJI?

No. DJI made a small drone called the Spark, which it has since discontinued. Sparkcopter is sold by G Com Pte Ltd and uses the same photos and bullet points as the seller’s DroneX Pro and Drone Ultra pages. It matches a budget folding design tested as the Eachine E58, not any DJI drone.

Is Sparkcopter the same as DroneX Pro?

The Sparkcopter, DroneX Pro and Drone Ultra offer pages share the same product photo, headline and six bullets. A German drone site tested DroneX Pro as identical to the Eachine E58. We cannot inspect current parts, but expect the same toy performance from each name.

How long does Sparkcopter fly?

The page does not say. Testing of the matching Eachine E58 found about 7 to 9 minutes per battery and about an hour to recharge. Wind, cold and fast flying shorten that. Spare batteries are the best way to extend a session.

How much does Sparkcopter cost?

With the United States selected on 4 October 2026, the offer page listed one Sparkcopter for $99, two for $159, three for $197, four for $249 and five for $297. The five-pack was preselected. Delivery was listed as free, and a 3-year warranty add-on cost $24.

Does Sparkcopter have GPS?

The page does not mention GPS, and the matching E58 design has none. Without GPS, the drone cannot hold its position outdoors or return home automatically, so it drifts in wind. Indoors and in still air it is much easier to control.

Do I need to register Sparkcopter?

In the US, recreational drones under 250 g do not need FAA registration, but you must pass the free Recreational UAS Safety Test. In the UK, camera drones of 100 g or more need IDs from the CAA. In the EU, camera drones generally require operator registration.

Is Sparkcopter a good first drone?

It can be a fun way to learn the basic controls indoors or on still days, and small crashes are rarely costly. If you mainly want to film outdoors, a sub-250 g GPS drone from an established brand is a better first purchase, though it costs more.

Is DroneX Pro Legit or a Scam? (2026) · Top10Gadgets

DroneX Pro is legit in the narrow sense that matters most: a named company sells it, and a real drone arrives when you order. It is not legit in the sense most buyers mean, which is “is it what the advert says?” The page promises “professional-quality footage”. What you get, according to the only independent test we found, is a well-known toy drone sold under a new name at about twice its usual price. This article covers who sells it, where the name came from, what the page leaves out, and how to buy without overpaying. For how it flies, read our full DroneX Pro review.

The DroneX Pro order page names G Com Pte Ltd, 137 Market Street, Singapore, with a company registration number, an email address and a phone number. The footer says “G Com Pte Ltd – Hong Kong”, which is a small inconsistency rather than a red flag. The same company sells a long list of gadgets through near-identical pages, including AndroidTV, HealthWatch and several other drones.

What you will not find is an independent rating for the store. We looked for a Trustpilot profile for the site our link opens, gadgetxaura.com, and found none. That means there is no large body of buyer reviews to tell you how deliveries and refunds go in practice.

One practical detail: with the United States selected, the order page said the charge would appear on your card as panameedia. If you do not know that, an unfamiliar name on your statement can look like fraud.

In 2019, the German drone site drohnen.de tested DroneX Pro and called it identical to the Eachine E58, a budget folding drone that then sold for about €39 to €50, against €99 for DroneX Pro. It described the DroneX Pro name as a marketing strategy to sell the same drone for more. The offer page today shows the same folding design.

That is the heart of the “scam” question. Rebranding a cheap design and selling it at a premium is legal, and common. But it means the price you pay reflects the advertising, not the drone. The same design keeps coming back under new names, including the original DroneX and the Sparkcopter, with the same photos and bullet points.

A drone page normally lists camera resolution, flight time, range, weight and battery size. The DroneX Pro page lists none of them. Drohnen.de measured the matching E58 at 7 to 9 minutes of flight and a practical range of about 50 to 60 m, and described its photos as washed out and low in contrast.

The add-ons raise more questions. A “720P High Resolution Camera” is sold for $24, pictured as a gimbal camera from a much larger drone, which suggests the standard camera is below 720p. The $29 travel case is pictured holding a different, larger drone. In our view, both images give a misleading idea of what arrives.

What you seeWhat it means$99, shown as half of $198We found no evidence it has sold at $198Five-pack for $285, preselectedChange it to one drone before payingCountdown timerSales pressure; the offer is not ending”Gadget Discount Club” text in the page codeFree for 30 days, then “a small fee of $9 may apply”; read every checkbox30-day guarantee “less shipping and handling”Terms focus on faulty items; returns number needed; you pay return postage

None of this is hidden if you read carefully, but the page is built so that you do not.

  1. Price the E58 first. If the same design is cheaper under its own name from a retailer with easy returns, buy that.
  2. Change the bundle. One drone is enough; spare propellers are more useful than more drones.
  3. Skip the camera add-on until support tells you in writing what it is and whether it fits.
  4. Note the card name, panameedia, and save your order email.
  5. Test it indoors on the day it arrives and contact support at once if anything fails, because refunds are aimed at faulty units.
  6. Check your local rules. In the UK, camera drones of 100 g or more need an Operator ID, and the E58 weighs about that.

DroneX Pro is not a scam: it is a real toy drone from a named seller. But it is sold with claims it cannot meet, missing specifications, misleading add-on images and refund terms that favour the seller, at about twice what the same design has cost elsewhere. That is why it scores 3.4 out of 10. If you want a first drone to learn on, compare it with the Eachine E58, a used Ryze Tello (discontinued in the US in 2024) or the DJI Neo before deciding, and see all our drone reviews. If you still want DroneX Pro, our full review covers how to order one unit and what to check on arrival.

Same as DroneX Pro? · Top10Gadgets

It depends on whether you have already found the same drone for less. Drone Ultra is a pocket-sized folding toy with a phone controller and three speed modes, which makes it a reasonable first drone for practising indoors or in calm weather. But its page shares every photo and bullet with the seller’s DroneX Pro and Sparkcopter, matching a budget design tested as the Eachine E58, and it lists no camera, flight time or range. Drone Ultra scores 3.3 out of 10, held back by price, missing specs and refund terms.

  • What it is: a small folding quadcopter with a phone-holding controller, live camera view and three speed modes.
  • Price: $99 for one on 4 October 2026, with a five-pack for $297 preselected. Delivery was listed as free.
  • Best trait: a light, forgiving drone for learning the basics.
  • Biggest drawback: the same design is sold under several names, and for less under its original one.
  • Our score: 3.3 out of 10.

The pros come from the design itself: small, light, simple. The cons come from how it is sold.

What we like

  • Small folding body that fits in a coat pocket, with a controller that holds your phone
  • Three speed modes, so a beginner can start slowly
  • Light design that usually survives the small crashes every beginner has
  • A low-stakes way to learn flying skills before buying a GPS camera drone
  • Free delivery, and the seller names a registered company with a Singapore address

What we don’t

  • Same photos and bullet points as the seller’s DroneX Pro and Sparkcopter, matching a design that sold for much less as the Eachine E58
  • No camera resolution, flight time, range or weight on the page
  • Add-on images show a large drone’s camera and a different drone in the case
  • No GPS, so it drifts outdoors and cannot return home on its own
  • Bundle prices are higher than the DroneX Pro page for the same number of drones
  • Refunds need a returns number first, and you pay return postage to an overseas seller

Like any quadcopter, Drone Ultra balances on four spinning propellers. A small flight controller with a gyroscope keeps it level, and changes motor speeds to climb, turn and move. Your phone shows the camera’s view over the drone’s own Wi-Fi network.

  1. Prepare the drone

    Step 1: Charge the battery, unfold the arms, check each propeller is fitted on the right motor and attach your phone to the controller.

  2. Connect your phone

    Step 2: Join the drone’s Wi-Fi network on your phone, open the app shown on the offer page to see the live camera view, and pair the controller.

  3. Learn in short flights

    Step 3: Take off to a low hover, practise in the slowest speed mode and land when the battery warning starts, usually after several minutes.

Drone Ultra suits someone who wants a simple flying toy: a beginner learning the controls, a parent buying for an older child, or anyone curious about drones who wants to start small. It is not for people who want aerial photography.

  • Beginners who want an easy, light drone to practise on indoors and in calm weather
  • Families looking for a supervised flying toy for older children
  • Buyers who prefer this offer page and accept paying more than the design costs elsewhere

Why Drone Ultra appeals

Drone adverts show sweeping shots over mountains and beaches, and the Drone Ultra page promises the same: “see the world and shoot like a pro”, “ultra-wide camera angle” and a headline about “professional-quality footage”. The drone in the photo looks like a scaled-down premium folding drone, which makes the promise feel believable.

The folding arms and phone-holding controller are genuinely handy. A drone that fits in a jacket pocket is easy to take on a walk, and physical sticks are much easier to learn on than touch controls on a phone screen.

Who gets the most value

The people who get the most from Drone Ultra treat it as a toy and a trainer. Learning to hover, turn and land a light, non-GPS drone builds real flying skill. Those skills transfer to bigger drones, and crashing a light toy is much cheaper than crashing a camera drone.

Families

For a family, a drone like this can be a fun shared activity in a large room or a quiet park on a still day. Plan sessions around short battery life: a few minutes of flying, then a recharge. Supervise children closely, and agree simple rules about where and how high to fly.

People who want aerial photos

If you want sharp holiday video or photos of your house from above, a GPS camera drone is the right tool. Drone Ultra’s camera, judged by tests of the matching design, is fine for fun clips on a phone screen, but not for footage you would want to keep.

Who should skip it

Skip Drone Ultra if you want proper aerial photography, plan to fly outdoors in wind, or have already seen the same design for less.

  • Anyone who wants good photos or video from the air
  • People who plan to fly mainly outdoors in wind
  • Shoppers who have already found the same design under another name for less
  • Young children flying alone, because spinning propellers can injure

The evidence says yes. The Drone Ultra, DroneX Pro and Sparkcopter offer pages, all run by G Com Pte Ltd, use the same product photo, the same headline about professional-quality footage and the same six bullet points. A German drone site, drohnen.de, tested DroneX Pro in 2019 and found it identical to the Eachine E58, then sold for about €39 to €50. We cannot inspect current parts, but expect the same toy.

The $24 720P Camera Upgrade add-on image. Image: Drone Ultra

Three pages, one design

On 4 October 2026, the three pages showed the same black folding drone with yellow motor rings beside the same controller and phone, and listed the same bullets: precision flight performance technology, ultra-wide camera angle, see the world and shoot like a pro, finely tuned control at your command, three speed modes, and portable to follow you on travels. Only the name and some prices differ.

Our DroneX Pro review goes deeper into the drohnen.de test and the E58’s history, and our Sparkcopter review covers the third name in the set.

What the original design is

The Eachine E58 is a widely copied budget folding drone. According to drohnen.de’s test, it flies for about 7 to 9 minutes, reaches a practical range of 50 to 60 m and weighs about 100 g, with a 500 mAh battery and a 2-megapixel camera that produced washed-out, low-contrast images. The site rated it 68%: fine for beginners and children, short of serious features.

Why the same drone has different names

Selling one design under several names lets a seller run different adverts and pages, each looking like a distinct product. For buyers, it means reviews of one name rarely mention the others, and price comparisons are harder. The best defence is to compare photos and specs, and to buy the cheapest version of a design if it suits you.

How to tell clone drones apart

When you see several drones that look alike, compare four things: the product photo, the controller, the listed battery capacity and the app. If the photos are identical, the controller has the same shape and buttons, and the app is the same, you are almost certainly looking at the same drone. Small cosmetic changes, such as a different logo sticker or colour stripe, rarely change how it flies.

Specification sheets are the second clue. Two “different” drones with the same weight, battery capacity, flight time and range figures usually share a factory. The Drone Ultra page gives no specifications at all, which makes this comparison harder and, in our view, is a reason for caution in itself.

Why reviews of one name do not mention the others

Search results for “Drone Ultra review” mostly return sponsored articles about Drone Ultra alone. Few mention DroneX Pro, Sparkcopter or the E58. That separation makes it hard for buyers to realise they are comparing the same toy. Independent drone sites, such as the German one that tested DroneX Pro, are more likely to point out the shared design.

Do the prices match?

Not quite. With the United States selected, one Drone Ultra cost $99, the same as DroneX Pro. But Drone Ultra’s bundles cost more: two for $159 against $144 for DroneX Pro, and five for $297 against $285. If you are set on buying from this seller, the DroneX Pro page was cheaper for multiples on the day we checked.

The add-ons tell the same story

All three pages offer a 720P camera, spare propellers and a travel case. On the Drone Ultra page, the camera add-on is pictured with the lens of a large drone’s gimbal camera, the propellers look longer than a pocket drone’s, and the case holds a different, larger folding drone. In our view, none of those images shows what fits Drone Ultra.

Expect a toy’s performance: about 7 to 9 minutes of flight, a practical range of tens of metres, a camera that is likely below 720p, and no GPS. Those figures come from testing of the matching Eachine E58, because the Drone Ultra page gives none. In still air and with practice, it hovers and flies well enough to be fun. In wind, it drifts and can be blown away.

Flight time

A 500 mAh battery powering four motors lasts only a few minutes. Expect 7 to 9 minutes in calm conditions, less in cold weather, wind or with fast flying. Charging takes about an hour. A spare battery or two doubles or triples a session.

The controller’s radio link usually reaches further than the Wi-Fi video link to your phone. Drohnen.de measured a practical range of 50 to 60 m for the E58. When the video freezes, you lose your view from the drone, so you must be able to see it directly.

Camera

The page sells a 720P camera upgrade, which implies the standard camera is lower resolution. The original DroneX from the same seller listed 480p. Video records to your phone over Wi-Fi and can drop frames. Without a gimbal, every vibration shows. Expect fun, rough footage.

Stability

A gyroscope keeps the drone level, and E58-style drones usually include altitude hold, which uses a barometer to keep a steady height. Neither stops sideways drift. Indoors, that drift is manageable. Outdoors, a light breeze is enough to carry the drone away if you are not watching.

Tricks and modes

Listings for this design mention one-key take-off and landing, headless mode, which makes controls work relative to you rather than the drone’s nose, and 360-degree flips. These are fun extras that help beginners and entertain children.

What wind does to a 100 g drone

A drone weighing around 100 g has very little mass to resist a gust. Without GPS to measure and correct its drift, it relies on the pilot to push back against the wind. In a light breeze, a beginner can manage. In anything stronger, the drone may move faster downwind than it can fly back, which is how many toy drones are lost. A simple rule: if you can feel the wind on your face or see branches moving, keep it indoors.

Cold weather

Lithium batteries deliver less power in the cold, so flight time drops and the drone may feel sluggish. Keep batteries in an inside pocket until you fly, and expect shorter sessions in winter. Never charge a battery that is still cold from outside; let it warm to room temperature first.

Durability

Light plastic drones survive many small knocks because they carry little momentum. Propellers and arm hinges are the usual casualties. Spare propellers are inexpensive and worth keeping in your bag.

On 4 October 2026, with the United States selected, one Drone Ultra cost $99, shown as half of $198, with free delivery, and the five-pack for $297 was preselected. That matches DroneX Pro’s single price but costs more in bundles. Drohnen.de priced the matching E58 at €39 to €50 when DroneX Pro was €99. A 3-year warranty cost $24, and add-ons included a $24 camera, $9 propellers and a $29 case.

  • The $29 Protection Travel Case add-on image, shown holding a different drone

  • The $9 Extra Propeller Blades Set add-on image

Images: Drone Ultra

Drone Ultra price and bundles

PackageDrone UltraDroneX ProSparkcopter1 drone$99$99$992 drones$159$144$159Buy 2, get 1 free (3)$197$192$1974 drones$249$236$249Buy 3, get 2 free (5), preselected$297$285$297

One drone is enough for most people. You can check today’s Drone Ultra packages on the Drone Ultra order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

The add-ons

  • 720P Camera Upgrade: $24 (from $89). Pictured as the lens of a large drone’s gimbal camera.
  • Extra Propeller Blades Set: $9 (from $29). Spare propellers are worth having; check they fit this design.
  • Drone Ultra Protection Travel Case: $29 (from $79). Pictured holding a different drone. A padded pouch is enough for a pocket drone.

What you are paying for

At $99, most of the price is not the drone itself. Drohnen.de priced the matching E58 at roughly half that. The rest covers the offer page, free international delivery and the seller’s margin. If you value buying from this page, that may be acceptable. If you simply want the toy, the same design under its original name, from a retailer with straightforward returns, is better value.

What is missing: spare batteries

The single most useful extra for a toy drone is a spare battery, and none is offered. What to do: ask support whether spare batteries are sold, or whether E58-type batteries fit.

The “regular price”

The page shows $198 crossed out next to $99 and a 30-minute countdown. We found no evidence of Drone Ultra selling at $198.

Who sells it

The order page and impressum name G Com Pte Ltd, at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with a company registration number, email and phone number. The footer says “G Com Pte Ltd – Hong Kong”. We found no independent rating profile for the store. With the United States selected, the order page said charges would appear as drone720x.com.

Drone UltraScore 3.3/10

Best for: Beginners who want an easy, light drone to practise on indoors and in calm weather

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

If you want good aerial video, a sub-250 g GPS drone from an established brand is the step up, because it holds position, returns home and records stabilised footage. If you only want a toy to learn on, the same E58 design under its own name, or a steadier indoor drone such as the Ryze Tello, which drohnen.de suggested as better value, does the job, though the Tello was discontinued in the US in 2024 and is now mostly sold used. Drone Ultra wins only on the convenience of this page.

DroneGPSHolds position indoorsCameraTypical useDrone UltraNoGyro and altitude holdNot statedToy, learningEachine E58NoGyro and altitude hold720p listedSame toy, often cheaperRyze Tello (discontinued 2024)NoVision positioning720pIndoor learning, codingTactic AIR DroneNoOptical flowDual camera; 4K sold as add-onToy with steadier hoverSub-250 g GPS droneYesYes2.7K to 4K, stabilisedHoliday and landscape video

Matching the drone to the flyer

For a child under about 12, an indoor drone with guards and altitude hold, flown with an adult, is the best fit. For a teenager who wants to learn properly, a toy like Drone Ultra or a Tello, followed by a GPS drone later, makes sense. For an adult who mainly wants holiday video, skipping the toy and saving for a GPS camera drone often works out better, because the toy’s camera will not satisfy them for long.

Drone Ultra vs the Eachine E58

The same design under its original name, bought from a retailer with straightforward returns, usually costs less. Spare parts for the E58 are easy to find. This is where a rival clearly wins.

Drone Ultra vs the Ryze Tello

The Tello uses a downward-facing camera and sensors to hold its position indoors far better than a basic toy. It is popular for learning and for simple coding projects. It does not fold, but it is easier for a nervous beginner to control. DJI discontinued it in the US in January 2024, so you will mostly find it used.

Drone Ultra vs the Tactic AIR Drone

From the same seller, the Tactic AIR Drone adds optical flow positioning for a steadier hover and a second camera. It costs the same $99 for one, though its 4K camera is sold as an add-on too.

Drone Ultra vs a GPS mini drone

GPS drones from established brands hold position outdoors, return home automatically if the signal drops and record stabilised 2.7K or 4K video. Sub-250 g models avoid FAA registration for recreational flying. They cost several times more, but they are the drones that actually shoot “like a pro”. You can compare more options in our drone reviews.

What to look for in any first drone

A good first drone is light, inexpensive to repair, easy to find parts for and simple to control. Look for a physical controller, several speed modes, propeller guards, altitude hold and spare batteries that are easy to buy. If you plan to fly outdoors, optical flow or GPS makes a big difference. Avoid drones that hide their specifications, because flight time, weight and camera resolution are the numbers that tell you what you will actually get.

When to move on from a toy drone

Many pilots outgrow a toy after a few weeks. Signs you are ready for more: you can hover without thinking, fly a square without drifting, land on a target, and you find yourself wishing for longer flights and better video. At that point, a GPS drone from an established brand is the natural next step, and the skills from the toy will make it easier to fly.

Drone Ultra vs the original DroneX

Our DroneX review covers the seller’s earlier drone, with a 480p camera, about 8 minutes of flight and 70 m of range for $99. Drone Ultra appears to be a very similar toy.

If you still want Drone Ultra, check today’s packages on the Drone Ultra offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and order one.

Drone UltraScore 3.3/10

Why people buy it: Small folding body that fits in a coat pocket, with a controller that holds your phone

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Drone Ultra is safe enough for older children with an adult supervising, if you keep propellers away from faces, use guards indoors and charge batteries carefully. Legally, recreational drones under 250 g do not need FAA registration in the US, but flyers must pass a free test. The UK requires IDs for camera drones of 100 g or more, and EU rules generally require operator registration for camera drones.

Propeller safety

Small propellers spin fast enough to cut skin and injure eyes. What to do: fit propeller guards for indoor flying, never fly near faces, pets or babies, and always switch the drone off before picking it up or changing propellers.

Battery safety

Lithium polymer batteries can swell or catch fire if damaged or overcharged. What to do: charge only with the supplied cable, on a hard surface, while an adult is nearby, and stop using any battery that swells or smells.

Choosing a safe place to fly

A large room cleared of fragile objects, a big garden or a quiet open park on a still day is ideal. Avoid people, roads, water, trees near power lines and any area near an airport or helipad.

Teaching children the rules

Children understand rules better when they know the reasons. Explain that propellers can cut, that drones must stay away from people and animals, and that some places are off limits because of aircraft or privacy. Set clear boundaries, such as “only in the garden” or “only below the roof line”, and fly together until they show they can follow them.

Flying indoors at home

Clear a large room, close doors and windows, move fragile items and keep pets out. Fit propeller guards, stay low and avoid ceiling fans and lights. Indoor flying is where light toy drones do best, and it is the safest place for children to learn.

United States

The FAA’s guidance for recreational flyers says drones under 250 g flown for fun do not need registration, but all recreational flyers must pass the free Recreational UAS Safety Test and carry proof. Fly below 400 feet, keep the drone in sight and follow local airspace rules.

United Kingdom

Since 1 January 2026, anyone flying a drone of 100 g or more outdoors needs a Flyer ID, and a camera drone of that weight also needs an Operator ID from the Civil Aviation Authority. The matching E58 design is listed at 96 to 100 g, right at the threshold. What to do: weigh the drone with its battery before flying outdoors in the UK.

Insurance and liability

If a drone injures someone or damages property, you may be responsible. Some home insurance policies cover small drones flown for fun, and some exclude them. Drone clubs and model aircraft associations often include liability insurance with membership. Check your policy before flying in public places, especially with children.

European Union

EASA’s registration requirements generally require operators of camera drones to register, even under 250 g, unless the drone is certified as a toy. Check with your national aviation authority.

Drone Ultra is a real product from a named seller, and a drone should arrive if you order. Before buying, compare it with its twins and the original design, change the preselected five-pack, ask what the add-ons really are, and know that refunds need a returns number and that return postage is yours to pay. Each point below ends with one thing to do.

Compare the three names

What to do: if you are set on buying from this seller, compare the Drone Ultra, DroneX Pro and Sparkcopter pages, which showed different bundle prices for the same design on the day we checked.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $297 was preselected. What to do: change it to one drone before entering your details.

Membership offers

The page code contains text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership, free for 30 days and then “a small fee of $9 may apply”. We did not see it on the order page with the United States selected. What to do: read every checkbox and post-purchase page.

Check the app before ordering

The page shows app store badges but does not name the app. What to do: ask support for the app’s exact name, then check it is available in your phone’s app store and read its recent reviews before you buy.

Refunds and returns

The page code promises a 30-day guarantee with a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms focus on defective or damaged products, which may be returned within two years once you have a returns number. Return postage is at your cost and is not reimbursed.

What to do: test the drone indoors on the day it arrives and contact support immediately if anything is wrong.

Warranty add-on

The 3-year warranty costs $24, about a quarter of the drone’s price. For a toy whose most likely failures are broken propellers and arms after crashes, which warranties often exclude, it is hard to see good value. What to do: ask support what the warranty covers before adding it, and keep the confirmation if you do.

How to buy Drone Ultra the smart way

  1. Compare prices for the same design under other names.
  2. Open the Drone Ultra order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the preselected five-pack to a single drone.
  4. Ask support about spare batteries and what the camera add-on is before adding it.
  5. Note the card statement name, drone720x.com, and save your order email.
  6. Check the drone rules where you live before flying outdoors.

Drone Ultra scores 3.3 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.4, build durability 0.9, price competitiveness 0.3, usability 1.1 and owner satisfaction 0.6, each out of 2. It flies like the toy it is, which testers found fine for beginners. But it shares its page with two other names, makes “professional footage” claims a toy cannot meet, lists no specs and costs more in bundles than its own twin.

What owners and testers say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no independent reviews for Drone Ultra by name. Testing of the matching E58 by drohnen.de found it fun for beginners but limited in image quality, range and flight time. Owners of E58-style drones commonly praise the fold-up size and price, and complain about short flights, laggy video, drifting outdoors and broken propellers.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.4 / 2″Professional-quality footage” is far from tested performance; add-on images misleadBuild durability0.9 / 2Light toy build; propellers and hinges are weak pointsPrice competitiveness0.3 / 2Same single price as its twin, higher bundle prices, about double the original designUsability1.1 / 2Controller and speed modes help beginners; no GPSOwner satisfaction0.6 / 2Fun as a toy, limited as a camera, per testers and owners of the designTotal3.3 / 10

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has flown Drone Ultra. We read the Drone Ultra, DroneX Pro and Sparkcopter offer pages with the United States selected, their code and the seller’s terms on 4 October 2026, along with drohnen.de’s test, Eachine E58 specifications, FAA, UK CAA and EASA rules and the top-ranking Drone Ultra pages.

Spend the first few sessions indoors or on a still day, in the slowest mode, practising one control at a time. By the end of the week, aim to take off, hover, fly a slow square and land on a target. Charge batteries carefully, carry spare propellers, and film only once you can fly smoothly. Treating it as a learning tool gets far more out of a toy drone.

  1. Day one: unbox and charge. Check every part, charge the battery and read the leaflet’s calibration step.
  2. Day two: take-off and hover. Practise lifting off to knee height, hovering and landing gently, in the slowest mode.
  3. Day three: turning. Rotate on the spot left and right while hovering, without drifting.
  4. Day four: forward and back. Fly a few metres forward and back in a straight line.
  5. Day five: a square. Fly a slow square around a room or garden, landing where you started.
  6. Day six: try headless mode and speed two. Notice how each changes the controls.
  7. Day seven: first video. Film a slow pass over the garden, in good light, and watch it back.

Practising safely indoors

Clear a large room of fragile items, close doors, keep pets out and fit propeller guards. Fly at waist height so a crash does not drop far. Indoor flying is where light toy drones shine.

Taking it outside

Choose a calm day and an open space with no people nearby. Start close and low, and keep the drone between you and open ground. If it starts drifting, land rather than chase it.

Battery routine

Let batteries cool before charging, never charge overnight unattended, and store them partly charged if you will not fly for a while. Label spare batteries so you rotate them evenly.

Making flying a family activity

Turn practice into games: time who can land closest to a target, fly a slalom between cushions, or film a short clip of the garden and watch it together afterwards. Rotate turns at each battery change, so everyone gets a go and batteries get a rest between flights.

Keep a simple logbook of who flew, for how long and what they practised. Children often enjoy seeing their progress written down, and it helps you notice when a battery is starting to give shorter flights than it used to, which is a sign it needs replacing. Old batteries are best recycled at an electronics or battery collection point, never in household rubbish, because damaged lithium cells can start fires in bins and collection lorries. Tape over the terminals before you drop them off.

Building towards outdoor flying

Once you can fly a square indoors without touching anything, try a calm evening outdoors in an open field. Start at the same low height you used indoors, and gradually widen your circuits. Outdoors, the drone will feel faster and drift more, so be ready to land early. Many pilots find their first outdoor session humbling; it gets easier quickly.

Choosing a practice space outdoors

A large, flat field with short grass and no trees, fences, power lines or people nearby is ideal. Mark a landing spot with a jacket or bag. Stand with the wind at your back, so a drifting drone moves away from you rather than towards you, and keep it within about 20 or 30 metres while you learn.

Keeping sessions short and fun

Three or four batteries of a few minutes each, with breaks between, keeps attention sharp and gives batteries time to cool before charging. Short, focused sessions with a clear goal, such as five clean landings, build skill faster than long sessions of aimless flying.

Common questions in the first week

Why does it drift when I let go of the sticks? Without GPS or optical flow, small air currents and imperfect calibration move the drone. Recalibrate on a flat surface, and practise small corrections rather than big stick movements.

Why does it flip when I take off? Usually a propeller is on the wrong motor or upside down. Check the A and B markings and the direction of each blade.

Why does it suddenly descend? Low battery. Most toy drones lower themselves automatically when the battery is nearly empty. Land, swap batteries and let the used one cool.

Why can I not see the video? Your phone may have left the drone’s Wi-Fi network for your home Wi-Fi. Reconnect to the drone’s network in your phone settings, and turn off any setting that switches away from networks without internet.

Keeping the app working

Toy drone apps are sometimes updated, renamed or removed from app stores. Once you find the app that works with your drone, avoid uninstalling it, and note its name in case you need to reinstall. If the app disappears, the controller still flies the drone; you lose only the camera view.

Storing the drone

Fold the arms, remove the battery and store it in a padded pouch or box away from heat and sunlight. Charge the battery to about half if it will sit unused for weeks. Before the next flight, check the propellers and arms for cracks that may have appeared during storage.

Fixing common problems

If it drifts on take-off, land and recalibrate on a flat surface. If it wobbles, check for chipped or wrongly placed propellers. If the video freezes, fly closer and check your phone is still connected to the drone’s Wi-Fi.

Drone UltraScore 3.3/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Is Drone Ultra the same as DroneX Pro?

The Drone Ultra and DroneX Pro offer pages, both run by G Com Pte Ltd, use the same product photo, headline and six bullet points. A German drone site tested DroneX Pro as an identical Eachine E58. We cannot inspect today’s parts, but the evidence suggests the same budget design under different names.

How long does Drone Ultra fly?

The page does not say. Testing of the matching Eachine E58 found about 7 to 9 minutes per battery, with roughly an hour to recharge. Flight time drops in wind, cold weather and with fast flying. Spare batteries make a session last longer.

Is the Drone Ultra camera good?

The page gives no resolution, and sells a 720P camera upgrade for $24, which suggests the standard camera is lower. Tests of the matching E58 described washed-out, low-contrast images. It is fine for fun clips on a phone, not for sharp holiday footage.

How much does Drone Ultra cost?

With the United States selected on 4 October 2026, the offer page listed one Drone Ultra for $99, two for $159, three for $197, four for $249 and five for $297. The five-pack was preselected. Delivery was listed as free, and a 3-year warranty add-on cost $24.

Do I need to register Drone Ultra?

In the US, recreational drones under 250 g do not need FAA registration, but you must pass the free Recreational UAS Safety Test. In the UK, camera drones of 100 g or more need a Flyer ID and Operator ID. In the EU, camera drones generally need operator registration.

Is Drone Ultra safe for children?

It can be, with an adult supervising. Propellers spin fast enough to cut fingers and injure eyes, and lithium batteries need careful charging. Fly in open spaces away from faces and pets, use propeller guards if available, and charge batteries only while someone is nearby.

Can Drone Ultra fly in wind?

Only in very light wind. Small drones without GPS cannot hold their position outdoors and are easily pushed around by gusts. On a breezy day, fly indoors or not at all, and never over water or roads.

Is Glamory Legit? The Subscription Catch (2026) · Top10Gadgets

Glamory sends a real product, so it is not a scam in the sense of taking money for nothing. But we do not recommend buying it through the offer our review followed, and the reason is the checkout, not the serum. Every bundle came with automatic monthly refills, Trustpilot withheld the company’s score after removing fake reviews, and most of the reviews that remain are from people describing charges they did not expect and refunds they struggled to get. If you are deciding whether to buy, this article tells you what to look for. If you have already ordered, skip to the section on cancelling. Our full Glamory review covers the product and the skin science.

1. Every bundle came with a subscription. On 3 October 2026, the checkout offered three options, and each one renewed automatically every 30 days. The preselected option was six treatments for $108, renewing at $108 a month. Over a year, that is about $1,300 unless you cancel. The checkout did say that by paying you agree to future charges and that you can skip, pause or cancel, but the subscription was not optional.

2. The subscription sends more than the brand tells you to use. Glamory’s own instructions say to use the system once every two weeks, about two treatments a month. The preselected plan sends six a month.

3. Trustpilot flagged the company. On 3 October 2026, Trustpilot did not show a TrustScore for tryglamory.com because the company had breached its guidelines, and Trustpilot said it had removed fake reviews. Of the 179 reviews left, 82% were one-star and 5% five-star. The complaints were about unresponsive support, unwanted recurring charges, difficulty cancelling and refunds taking 25 or more business days. The glowing on-page testimonials and “4.8/5 from 15,356 users” are the seller’s own figures and cannot be checked.

The product exists and the idea behind it is not made up. Each MicroLift treatment is a serum vial with a 0.5 mm microneedle head, using mainstream ingredients such as niacinamide and hyaluronic acid. Microneedling done in clinics, with sterile single-use cartridges, has evidence for acne scars and fine wrinkles.

What is not supported is the leap from that to Glamory’s claims: “erase years of aging in just 5 minutes”, “300%” better absorption with no source, “dermatologist approved” with no dermatologist named, and “the same results as professional treatments”. The FDA says microneedling products that reach living skin and are marketed for wrinkles or collagen are medical devices. We found no FDA clearance for Glamory. The FDA also advises a new needle cartridge for every session, while Glamory’s page says to replace the head after 6 to 8 uses.

  1. Change the preselected six-pack to the single option.
  2. Read every line about automatic refills before paying, and screenshot it.
  3. Save the contact, refund and terms pages as screenshots or PDFs.
  4. Cancel the refills in writing straight after ordering if you only want one delivery.
  5. Pay by credit card, so you can dispute a charge if you need to.
  6. Do not use it on acne, rosacea, eczema, cold sores or broken skin, or if you are pregnant, and ask a dermatologist if you are unsure.

Act quickly, before the next 30-day charge.

  1. Find your order confirmation and note the order date. The next charge is likely 30 days later.
  2. Email the company asking it to cancel all future automatic refills, quoting your order number. Email gives you a record that a phone call does not.
  3. Keep the reply. If you get no reply, send the request again and keep both.
  4. Ask for a refund in writing if you want one. The page offers a 30-day money-back guarantee within the first 30 days of using the system.
  5. Watch your card statement for the next two months.
  6. Contact your card issuer if you are charged after cancelling, with your emails and screenshots ready.

Glamory is a real product sold in a way we cannot recommend. A checkout that turns every purchase into a monthly subscription, instructions that undercut the size of that subscription, hygiene advice that conflicts with the FDA, and a Trustpilot page flagged for fake reviews add up to a score of 2.7 out of 10. If you want what Glamory’s serum offers, a plain niacinamide or hyaluronic acid serum gives you it without needles or refills. If you want microneedling, a dermatologist with sterile single-use equipment is the safer route. For an at-home skin device with more behind it, see our PMD Personal Microderm review, and browse more in our health gadgets category.

Are Talky AI Buds Legit? Read This First (2026) · Top10Gadgets

Talky AI Buds are a real product, so in the strict sense they are not a scam. They are ear-hook Bluetooth earbuds that pair with a free translation app and offer four conversation modes, and they work as music earbuds too. The reason people search “are Talky AI Buds legit” is the way they are sold: through an article that looks like an independent test of nine translators, with no author, no published results and accuracy figures that have no source, ending in a guarantee that turns out to cover only unopened boxes. This piece explains each part. For how the earbuds themselves stack up, see our Talky AI Buds review.

The link most people follow lands on a page styled like a consumer review. It says it compared nine translation devices, crowns Talky the winner, and links to a checkout. It is an advertorial: a sales page written to look like editorial.

That matters because of what is missing. A real comparison names the devices it tested, uses the same phrases in the same languages, measures the delay and has native speakers rate the accuracy. The page does none of that in a way you can check. Its accuracy percentages have no stated method or source. We could not find any independent test of Talky AI Buds on an established tech site.

None of this makes the earbuds bad. It means the page gives you no reliable evidence that they are good, and you should treat its rankings as advertising.

The pages name WuzuTech as the operator, with support at support@wuzutech.com and a US phone line, (866) 479-1629. Having a phone number is better than many offer-page sellers manage. But the terms we read on 5 October 2026 gave no company address, and we found no independent rating profile for the seller. You would be buying from a company you know very little about.

The checkout advertises a 90-day 100% money-back guarantee. WuzuTech’s returns policy, last updated in May 2026, starts the same way, then adds the conditions that matter:

  • Returns should arrive sealed, unopened and in original condition.
  • Opened or partially used items cannot be accepted, “for safety reasons”.
  • Return costs are not refunded.
  • Refunds can take up to 10 business days.

You cannot judge translation earbuds without opening the box, pairing them and trying a conversation. A sealed-only policy means the 90 days mainly protects people who change their mind before opening. If the translation disappoints after you have tried it, you may have no refund unless the earbuds are faulty.

On 5 October 2026, one pair cost $89.99, falling to $59.99 a pair in a five-pack. The checkout showed crossed-out prices of $178.98 a pair to claim savings of 50% to 66%, and the advertorial promised express delivery by a set date if you ordered that day. Both are common urgency tactics. Most travellers need one pair, because the Free Talk mode already shares the earbuds between two people.

To be fair to the product, the features listed are standard for translator earbuds and sensible. Free Talk mode lets two people each wear one earbud for a back-and-forth conversation. Listening mode translates nearby speech, which suits tours and meetings. Speaker mode plays the translation from your phone for someone without an earbud. They use Bluetooth 5.3 and charge by USB-C, and the case gives up to 18 hours in total, according to the product page. They are also cheaper than Timekettle’s M3, and they work with Android as well as iPhone, unlike Apple’s Live Translation. The doubt is not about whether they exist or pair, but about how well they translate, and nobody independent has measured that.

  1. Email support@wuzutech.com and ask whether opened earbuds can be returned within 90 days. Keep the reply.
  2. Find the translation app in your app store and read its recent reviews and language list.
  3. Ask which languages work offline, if you travel somewhere with poor signal.
  4. Pay by credit card, which gives you chargeback rights in many countries if goods are not as described.
  5. Screenshot the guarantee, the product page and the advertorial claims before ordering.
  6. Decide before you open the box, since opening it may end your chance of a refund.

Talky AI Buds are legit as a product and questionable as a purchase. They are real earbuds with standard translator features at a lower price than branded rivals, sold by a company that names itself and answers the phone. But they reach you through an advertorial dressed as a test, with accuracy claims nobody has verified and a “risk-free” guarantee that refuses opened returns. That is why they score 3.9 out of 10. If you already own compatible AirPods, try Live Translation first. Otherwise, get WuzuTech’s answer on opened returns in writing before buying. Our audio category and full Talky review compare the alternatives.

Apple is reportedly partnering with LG to launch a smart lock, thermostat, and doorbell

Apple is working on a new ecosystem of smart home devices via a partnership with LG, Bloomberg has reported.

The new devices — which include a smart lock, a thermostat, and a doorbell — are designed to integrate with the company’s smart home hub, another upcoming product that will reportedly launch on October 13. That hub is expected to include a 6-inch square display that can be placed on a countertop or mounted on a wall.

The two companies are also working on a slate of security cameras, including models for indoor and outdoor, was well as a floodlight. The LG devices are expected to be announced, if not formally released, next week, too. TechCrunch reached out to Apple for more information.

Interestingly, the devices will reportedly carry the LG brand — despite being developed by both companies.

The new products could aptly be read as a swipe at Amazon’s smart home offerings, which currently include a variety of similar products, including its Ring home security cameras.

Apple has sought to push into new territory with its recent hardware releases. One of those new territories is an expanded smart home presence.

RadiationStopper Pro Review (2026): Scam? · Top10Gadgets

No. RadiationStopper Pro is a round holographic sticker labelled “Quantum Shield” that claims to block radiation from phones and other devices and says it may prevent headaches and improve sleep. The FTC has said there is no scientific proof that phone radiation shields significantly reduce exposure, and that partial shields may make a phone emit more. The FDA says nearly 30 years of evidence has not linked phone radio waves to health problems. At $49, it is an expensive sticker. RadiationStopper Pro scores 2.8 out of 10, held back by claims the evidence contradicts.

  • What it is: an adhesive holographic sticker sold to block radiation from phones, tablets and TVs.
  • Price: $49 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $135 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: harmless and easy to apply.
  • Biggest drawback: the FTC says shields like this have no scientific proof, and partial shields may increase emissions.
  • Our score: 2.8 out of 10.

There is not much to weigh. The sticker is harmless and simple. The cons are about what it is sold to do, which regulators have specifically warned against.

What we like

  • Thin and easy to stick on a phone, tablet or other device
  • Harmless in itself: it is a decorative sticker
  • The page hedges its health claims with ‘may’
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • The FTC says there is no scientific proof that phone radiation shields significantly reduce exposure
  • The FTC warns that shields covering part of a phone can make it draw more power and possibly emit more
  • The FDA says nearly 30 years of evidence has not linked phone radio waves to health problems
  • ‘May prevent headaches’ and ‘may improve sleep’ have no evidence on the page
  • At $49 for a sticker, it is expensive, and multi-packs are pushed hard
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

RadiationStopper Pro is a round sticker with a holographic rim, a black centre and a dotted star pattern, labelled “Quantum Shield” and “Quantum Science”. You peel off the backing and stick it on the back of a phone, tablet, TV or other device. There is no electronics and nothing to switch on. The page calls it “just put and forget” and “not serviceable, just stick and works”.

The offer page’s image of the sticker on a phone. Image: RadiationStopper

  1. Stick it on your device

    Step 1: Peel the backing and press the round sticker onto the back of your phone, tablet or another electronic device.

  2. Leave it in place

    Step 2: The page describes it as ‘just put and forget’ and ‘not serviceable, just stick and works’. There is nothing to switch on.

  3. That is all it does

    Step 3: The page claims it blocks radiation and may help headaches and sleep. It offers no explanation of how a sticker could do this, and no test.

The page title lists “radiation shield sticker, radiation blocker, GSM radiation blocker, frequency radiation blocker, high frequency radiation stopper, quantum radiation shield”. The six bullets promise an effective put-and-forget sticker, that it may prevent headaches from radiation, may improve normal night-time sleep, works on all devices, is safe in all environments and needs no servicing. It gives no test, mechanism or measurement.

The advert image

The main image shows the back of a man’s head with a red brain drawing and blue lightning running from his phone into it, beside an iPhone with the sticker on its back. The picture suggests phones harm the brain and the sticker stops it. Neither idea is supported by the evidence below.

What a phone actually emits

Phones send and receive radio waves to talk to mast antennas. These are non-ionising, meaning they do not have enough energy to break chemical bonds or damage DNA the way X-rays can. The antenna is built into the phone’s body, not a single spot where a sticker could cover it.

On the evidence, RadiationStopper Pro is not for anyone seeking health protection. If you like the look of a holographic sticker as decoration, it is a sticker. If you want to reduce exposure to phone radio waves, the FTC’s free tips do more.

  • Nobody looking for health protection, according to the evidence
  • People who simply like the holographic look as a phone decoration
  • Anyone who wants to reduce exposure is better served by the FTC’s free tips

People worried about phone radiation

The worry is understandable, and the advert plays on it. The FDA’s position is that the evidence has not linked phone radio waves to health problems. If you still want to reduce exposure, use speakerphone or earphones and keep calls shorter.

Parents

Parents often worry about children and phones. Screen time, sleep and online safety are bigger, evidence-backed concerns. A sticker does nothing for any of them.

People with headaches

Headaches have many causes: dehydration, eye strain, poor sleep, tension, caffeine, illness. Long screen use can cause eye strain and posture-related tension. A sticker does not address any of these. Frequent or severe headaches need a doctor.

People with poor sleep

Using a phone in bed delays sleep, mainly through bright light and alertness, not radio waves. Putting the phone away before bed, or charging it outside the bedroom, helps many people. That is free.

Who should skip it

Skip RadiationStopper Pro if you want health protection, have headaches or sleep problems, or would rather keep $49.

  • Anyone worried about phone radiation and health
  • People with headaches or sleep problems, who should see a doctor
  • Anyone who would rather keep $49

No evidence says it does, and the FTC has specifically warned about shields like it. In 2011 the FTC said there is no scientific proof that so-called shields significantly reduce exposure from phone emissions, that products blocking only part of the phone are ineffective because the entire phone emits, and that they may make the phone draw more power and possibly emit more radiation. The page offers no test.

What the FTC said

The FTC’s June 2011 press release on cell phone radiation scams warned that “there is no scientific proof that so-called shields significantly reduce exposure”. It explained that shields covering only part of a phone are totally ineffective because the whole phone emits electromagnetic waves, and that by interfering with the signal, a shield may cause the phone to work harder.

What this means for you: if a sticker did block signals, your phone would boost its power to compensate. That is the opposite of what you are paying for.

Why a sticker cannot work as described

A phone’s antennas run around the frame and inside the body. To communicate, it must send radio waves out. Blocking them would stop calls and data. Covering a small circle on the back does neither: the phone works normally, and its emissions continue from everywhere else.

“Quantum” science

The sticker is labelled Quantum Shield and Quantum Science. The word quantum appears often on products with no scientific basis. The page does not explain what is quantum about it, and there is no known physics by which a holographic sticker blocks or neutralises radio waves.

“May prevent headaches”

Hedging with “may” does not make the claim supported. The page offers no study linking the sticker to fewer headaches. If a phone gives you headaches, eye strain from small text and long screen time is a more likely cause.

“May improve sleep”

There is no evidence on the page for this either. Sleep experts commonly advise keeping phones out of the bedroom or switching off before bed, because of light and stimulation, not radio waves.

The pages that rank for RadiationStopper Pro are promotional and repeat the claims without evidence. We found no independent test of this sticker.

The FDA says the weight of nearly 30 years of scientific evidence has not linked radio frequency energy from phones to health problems such as cancer. Phones emit non-ionising radio waves, far weaker in energy than the ionising radiation in X-rays. Research continues, and agencies keep monitoring it. For anyone still concerned, simple habits reduce exposure for free.

What the FDA says

The FDA’s page Do cell phones pose a health hazard? states that the weight of nearly 30 years of scientific evidence has not linked exposure to radio frequency energy from phones to health problems. The agency says it continues to monitor research and public health data.

Ionising versus non-ionising

Ionising radiation, such as X-rays and some radioactive materials, has enough energy to damage DNA. Radio waves from phones are non-ionising and have far less energy. The word “radiation” covers both, which is part of why the topic causes worry.

SAR

Phones sold in the US must meet limits on the specific absorption rate, or SAR, which measures how much radio frequency energy the body absorbs. The FTC suggests checking a phone’s SAR if you are concerned.

Free ways to reduce exposure

The FTC suggests using an earpiece or speakerphone, texting rather than calling, keeping calls short and waiting for a good signal, because phones use more power when the signal is weak. These steps cost nothing.

On 6 October 2026, one RadiationStopper Pro sticker cost $49, with the five-pack at $135 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered an ultra-thin version for $4, a curved reflection design for $7, a USB car charger adapter for $5 and a 3-year warranty for $9. For a sticker with no supported benefit, any spend is hard to justify.

RadiationStopper Pro price and bundles

PackageTotalPer sticker1 RadiationStopper Pro$49$49.002 RadiationStopper Pro$69$34.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$98$32.674 RadiationStopper Pro$123$30.755 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$135$27.00

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. The multi-packs suggest one per device for the whole family. If you are tempted, read the FTC’s advice first. The offer itself is on the RadiationStopper Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

The add-ons

The ultra-thin version, for $4, is described as case friendly. The reflection design, for $7, is a curved holographic version; its image shows the round sticker labelled Quantum Shield. The car charger adapter is unrelated.

The sticker, labelled Quantum Shield, from the reflection design add-on. Image: RadiationStopper

A 3-year warranty on a sticker

The 3-year warranty costs $9. It is hard to see what could fail on a sticker in a way a warranty would cover.

The “regular price”

Add-ons are shown against crossed-out prices, with a countdown timer on the page. We found no evidence that RadiationStopper Pro sells at a higher regular price. Holographic “anti-radiation” stickers like this are sold widely under many names.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as perfectchoicebase.com.

RadiationStopper ProScore 2.8/10

Best for: Nobody looking for health protection, according to the evidence

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

The FTC’s free tips: speakerphone or an earpiece, texting, shorter calls and waiting for a good signal. They actually reduce how much radio energy reaches your head, which a sticker does not. For headaches and sleep, the right steps are screen breaks, good sleep habits and a doctor for persistent symptoms.

OptionEffect on exposureEvidenceCostRadiationStopper ProNone shown; may increase phone power, per the FTCNone$49Speakerphone or earpieceKeeps the phone away from your headFTC tipFree or lowTexting instead of callingPhone away from headFTC tipFreeGood signalPhone uses less powerFTC tipFreePhone out of the bedroomBetter sleep habitsCommon sleep adviceFree

RadiationStopper Pro vs speakerphone

Distance matters most. Holding a phone away from your head on speaker or using wired or wireless earphones reduces exposure far more than anything stuck on the phone. This is the clearest case where a free alternative wins.

RadiationStopper Pro vs other health gadgets

Other gadgets from the same checkout make claims of their own. Our BloodPressureX review covers a cuff monitor with no validation, and our HealthWatch review a watch that claims to measure blood pressure without a cuff. Our NeckMassager review and ZenMind XP review look at massagers. Browse our health gadget reviews for more.

If you still want the sticker as a decoration, it is on the RadiationStopper Pro offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab), but we would keep the money.

RadiationStopper ProScore 2.8/10

Why people buy it: Thin and easy to stick on a phone, tablet or other device

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

RadiationStopper Pro is a real product from a named seller, and a sticker should arrive if you order, but the product’s core claim is one the FTC has warned against. If you buy anyway, switch from the five-pack, skip the add-ons and warranty, note the card statement name and keep in mind that return postage is yours to pay.

Think about what you are buying

What to do: read the FTC and FDA pages linked above before spending money. If health is your concern, the free tips are what work.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $135 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one sticker, or none.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as perfectchoicebase.com. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. A sticker that sticks is not defective, even if it does nothing.

Delivery and support

The seller ships from overseas and gives no delivery estimate. What to do: save your order email, and if nothing arrives within three weeks, ask support for tracking.

How to buy RadiationStopper Pro the smart way

  1. Read the FTC’s advice on phone radiation shields.
  2. Decide whether you want a decorative sticker at all.
  3. Open the RadiationStopper Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  4. Change the five-pack to one sticker.
  5. Skip the add-ons and the warranty.
  6. Note the card statement name, perfectchoicebase.com.

RadiationStopper Pro scores 2.8 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.1, build durability 0.8, price competitiveness 0.2, usability 1.2 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. It is a harmless, easy-to-apply sticker. The score falls because its central claim contradicts what the FTC has said about phone shields, its health claims have no evidence, and $49 is a high price for a sticker with no supported benefit.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.1 / 2Radiation blocking, headache and sleep claims unsupported; FTC warns against shieldsBuild durability0.8 / 2A sticker; it should stay stuckPrice competitiveness0.2 / 2$49 for a sticker with no shown benefitUsability1.2 / 2Peel and stickOwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal2.8 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for RadiationStopper Pro by that name. Reviews of similar anti-radiation stickers on large retail sites range from buyers who say they feel better to others who say nothing changed. Personal impressions cannot show whether a sticker affects radio emissions; measurements can, and testers have found shields do not reduce exposure.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used RadiationStopper Pro. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with the FTC’s 2011 press release on phone radiation scams, the FDA’s page on cell phones and health and the pages that rank for the product. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Use speakerphone or earphones for long calls, text when you can, keep calls short, and avoid making calls on a weak signal. These steps, from the FTC, reduce exposure for free. For sleep and headaches, charge the phone outside the bedroom, take screen breaks and see a doctor if symptoms persist.

  1. Use speakerphone or earphones. Distance is the biggest factor.
  2. Text instead of calling. The phone stays away from your head.
  3. Keep calls short. Less time, less exposure.
  4. Wait for a good signal. Phones work harder with weak signals.
  5. Check SAR when buying. If it matters to you, compare phones.
  6. Charge the phone outside the bedroom. Better sleep habits.
  7. Take screen breaks. Rest your eyes every 20 minutes or so.

If you have headaches

Look at screen time, posture, hydration, sleep and caffeine. See a doctor if headaches are frequent, severe or come with other symptoms.

If you sleep badly

Keep a regular bedtime, dim screens and lights in the evening and keep the bedroom cool and dark. A doctor can help with persistent insomnia.

Children and phones

Set screen time limits, keep phones out of bedrooms at night and teach children to use speakerphone or earphones for long calls.

If you already bought the sticker

It will not harm you. Keep using the free tips above, which are what make a difference.

RadiationStopper ProScore 2.8/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about stickers, phone cases, EMF meters and 5G. The FTC has warned about shield stickers, cases that block signals make phones work harder, cheap EMF meters are often misused to sell products, and 5G uses non-ionising radio waves like earlier networks. Check claims against the FDA and FTC before buying.

Do anti-radiation phone cases work?

A case that genuinely blocks signals would interfere with the phone, making it boost power. The FTC’s warning about shields applies to partial blocking products.

Is 5G more dangerous?

5G uses radio waves, which are non-ionising, like earlier mobile networks. Health agencies continue to monitor research on all of them.

What about laptops and Wi-Fi routers?

They also emit low-power radio waves. Keeping a laptop on a desk rather than your lap reduces heat and exposure if you are concerned.

Why do these products sell?

They tap into a real worry and use words like quantum and frequency that sound scientific. Asking for test results usually reveals there are none.

Does RadiationStopper Pro block phone radiation?

There is no evidence that it does. The FTC says there is no scientific proof that so-called shields significantly reduce exposure, that products blocking only part of the phone are ineffective because the whole phone emits, and that they may make the phone draw more power and possibly emit more.

Is phone radiation harmful?

According to the FDA, the weight of nearly 30 years of scientific evidence has not linked radio frequency energy from phones to health problems such as cancer. Phones emit non-ionising radio waves, which have far less energy than X-rays. Research continues, and the FDA monitors it.

Can a sticker stop headaches or improve sleep?

The page says ‘may prevent headaches from radiation’ and ‘may improve normal night time sleep’ with no evidence. Headaches and poor sleep have many causes, and a sticker does not treat them. Putting the phone away an hour before bed is a free step that helps many people sleep.

How much does RadiationStopper Pro cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one sticker for $49, two for $69, three (two plus one free) for $98, four for $123 and five (three plus two free) for $135, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. Ultra-thin and reflection versions cost $4 and $7 extra.

How can I reduce my exposure to phone radio waves?

The FTC suggests using an earpiece or speakerphone, texting rather than calling, keeping calls short, waiting for a good signal, since phones work harder with weak signals, and checking a phone’s SAR before buying. All of these are free or cheap.

What is a ‘quantum shield’?

The sticker is labelled ‘Quantum Shield’ and ‘Quantum Science’. The word quantum is common in products with no scientific backing. The page gives no explanation of how the sticker works, and quantum physics does not make a sticker block radio waves.

Is RadiationStopper Pro legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number, so a sticker should arrive. The product itself makes claims the FTC has said shields like it cannot support. We do not recommend it.

Pulse Massager Test · Top10Gadgets

Only if you are healthy, curious about electrical pulse massage and accept that it may do little for pain. NeckMassager is a U-shaped collar that sends electrical pulses through two metal pads into the back of your neck, with several modes and intensities, powered by two AAA batteries. Some people find it relaxing. But a Cochrane review found only very low quality, inconsistent evidence for TENS in neck pain, the page lists no safety warnings at all, and “neck blood stimulation” has nothing behind it. NeckMassager scores 3.9 out of 10, held back by weak evidence and missing warnings.

  • What it is: a collar with two metal pads that deliver electrical pulses to the back of the neck, with several modes and intensities.
  • Price: $59 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $149 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: light, hands-free and cheap, with no charging needed.
  • Biggest drawback: weak evidence for neck pain and no safety warnings on the page.
  • Our score: 3.9 out of 10.

Neck collars like this are popular because they are easy to wear while you read or watch TV. The pros are about convenience and price. The cons are about evidence and safety, which matter more for a device that puts electricity through your neck.

What we like

  • Light, hands-free collar that rests on the shoulders
  • Several modes and intensity levels to find a comfortable setting
  • Runs on two AAA batteries, so no charging
  • Some people find gentle electrical pulses relaxing after desk work
  • Cheaper than most branded TENS and neck massagers

What we don’t

  • A Cochrane review found only very low quality, inconsistent evidence for TENS in neck pain
  • The page lists no warnings, though TENS makers warn against use with pacemakers, epilepsy and in pregnancy
  • ‘Neck blood stimulation’ is not a recognised benefit, and the page gives no evidence for it
  • The box in the photo reads KL-5830, a generic model sold under many names
  • The EMS shoulder pads and larger metal pads are add-ons
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

NeckMassager is a curved plastic collar with flexible arms that rest on your shoulders. Two round metal pads on the inside sit against the back of your neck. When switched on, the device sends small electrical pulses between the pads, through the skin. Depending on the mode, you feel tingling, tapping or kneading sensations as the pulses stimulate nerves and make muscles twitch. Buttons on the collar change the mode and strength.

Worn around the back of the neck, with the box labelled KL-5830. Image: NeckMassager

  1. Fit it around your neck

    Step 1: Gently open the flexible arms and rest the collar on your shoulders so the two metal pads sit on the back of your neck, not on the front or sides.

  2. Choose a mode and intensity

    Step 2: Press the buttons to switch on, choose one of the working modes and raise the intensity slowly until you feel a comfortable tingling or tapping.

  3. Relax for a short session

    Step 3: Electrical pulses pass through the skin into the nerves and muscles under the pads. Keep sessions short and switch off before removing it.

The page title calls it a “neck massaging device, neck relaxation, neck blood stimulation relaxing device”. The six bullets promise instant relaxation, a comfortable fit, adjustable gentle arms, different working modes, variable care intensity and power from two AAA batteries. It gives no pulse frequency, current, number of modes or levels, session timer, battery life or warnings.

A generic design

The box beside the collar in the main photo is labelled KL-5830. That is a model number used for this U-shaped pulse massager by many sellers under many names. The NeckMassager page does not mention it or the manufacturer, which makes it harder to find a manual or compare prices.

TENS, EMS and “magnetic therapy”

TENS stands for transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation, where pulses aim to reduce pain signals. EMS, electrical muscle stimulation, makes muscles contract. Devices like this often combine both kinds of pulse patterns. Some listings for this design also mention magnets or heat; the NeckMassager page does not.

NeckMassager suits a healthy adult with everyday neck tension from desk work who wants to try electrical pulse massage cheaply, or someone who has used TENS before and knows they like it. It is not a treatment for injury, nerve pain or persistent neck pain, and several groups of people should not use it at all.

  • Healthy adults with everyday neck tension from desk work who want a gadget to try
  • People who have used TENS before and know they like the sensation
  • Buyers on a budget who accept there is little evidence for neck pain relief

Desk workers

Hours at a screen with the head forward strain the muscles at the back of the neck. A short session with a pulse massager can feel relaxing at the end of the day. Regular breaks, moving the screen to eye level and simple neck stretches tackle the cause.

People who already use TENS

If a physiotherapist has shown you TENS before and it helped, a cheap neck collar may give a similar sensation in a convenient shape. Branded TENS units with separate pads give more control over placement and settings.

Older adults

Neck stiffness becomes more common with age, and so do conditions that rule out TENS, such as heart rhythm problems and pacemakers. Check with a doctor first.

Gift buyers

Neck massagers are popular gifts. Because of the contraindications, ask the person discreetly about pacemakers, epilepsy and pregnancy, or choose a non-electrical gift such as a heat pad.

Drivers and commuters

A hands-free collar might seem ideal for a commute, but TENS makers advise against using electrical stimulation while driving. On a train or bus as a passenger, it is less of a concern, though the sensation can be distracting and the buttons easy to knock.

People with a stiff neck after sleeping awkwardly

A sore neck after a bad night usually eases within days with gentle movement and warmth. A pulse massager may feel soothing, but heat and keeping the neck moving are the usual advice.

Who should skip it

Skip NeckMassager if you have a pacemaker or other implant, epilepsy, a heart rhythm problem, are pregnant, have broken skin on the neck, or have new, severe or unexplained neck pain or arm symptoms.

  • Anyone with a pacemaker, implanted defibrillator or other implanted electronic device
  • People with epilepsy, heart rhythm problems, or who are pregnant
  • Anyone with new, severe or unexplained neck pain, numbness or weakness in the arms
  • People with broken skin, rashes or reduced sensation on the neck

The evidence for electrical stimulation in neck pain is weak. A Cochrane review of electrotherapy for neck pain, updated in 2013, found only very low quality evidence that TENS gave inconsistent results, and concluded that the evidence was lacking, limited or conflicting. Some people do find the pulses pleasant or briefly soothing. There is no evidence on the page for “neck blood stimulation” or any lasting effect.

What the Cochrane review found

The Cochrane review of electrotherapy for neck pain by Kroeling and colleagues looked at TENS and other electrical treatments for neck disorders. It rated the evidence for TENS as very low quality and inconsistent, citing small trials, unclear methods and varied results, and could draw no definite conclusions about whether electrotherapy helps neck pain.

What this means for you: NeckMassager might feel nice. Do not count on it to fix neck pain, and do not let it delay seeing a professional if pain persists.

Why it can feel good

Electrical pulses create tingling that can distract from discomfort, a bit like rubbing a bumped elbow. Twitching muscles may also feel loosened afterwards. These effects are real sensations, but short-lived.

“Neck blood stimulation”

The page title promises blood stimulation. Muscle contractions and warmth can briefly increase blood flow to the skin and muscle under the pads. That is not a health benefit with evidence behind it for neck pain, and the page offers none.

Placebo and expectation

Pain studies often find that any treatment people expect to help gives some relief, especially in the short term. That is part of why small, unblinded trials of gadgets look better than larger, careful ones. It does not make the relief you feel fake, but it does mean a cheaper or simpler option may help just as much.

What does help persistent neck pain

For common neck pain, staying active, gentle exercises, posture changes at a desk and, where needed, physiotherapy have better support than electrical gadgets. Pain that spreads into the arm, comes with numbness or weakness, follows an injury or wakes you at night needs a doctor.

The pages that rank for NeckMassager are promotional and describe relief without citing evidence. We found no independent test of this device.

For many healthy adults, low-level pulses on the back of the neck are low risk, but the page gives no warnings, and TENS makers list clear exceptions. TensCare, which makes TENS devices, says not to use TENS with epilepsy, in the first six months of pregnancy, near the heart with a pacemaker or heart rhythm problem, on the carotid arteries at the front of the neck, or on broken or numb skin.

What TENS makers warn

TensCare’s guide on when not to use TENS lists epilepsy, the first six months of pregnancy or on the abdomen at any time in pregnancy, driving or operating machinery, acute feverish or infectious illness, near heart monitors, and undiagnosed pain. For placement, it warns against use over or near the heart with a pacemaker or rhythm problem, on the carotid arteries in the front of the neck, over the eyes, across the front of the head, near tumours, and on broken, irritated or numb skin.

What to do: if any of these apply to you, do not use NeckMassager without a doctor’s advice.

Keep it on the back of the neck

The carotid arteries and the nerves that help control heart rate and blood pressure run down the front and sides of the neck. Stimulation there can affect heart rhythm and blood pressure. The collar is designed to sit at the back. Never rotate it forwards.

The EMS pads add-on

The $4 EMS pads plug into the collar so you can stick pads on your shoulders or back. Keep them off the chest and the front of the neck. TENS makers warn that current across the chest can affect heart rhythm.

Skin care

Electrical pads can redden or irritate skin, especially on dry or freshly shaved skin. Check the skin after each session and skip a day if it is sore.

Older devices and wear

Metal pads can tarnish and lose good contact over time, and cheap buttons can stick. If the sensation changes suddenly, becomes uneven or jolts, stop using the device and contact support.

Children

The page gives no age guidance. TENS makers advise against use on the heads of children under 12. Keep the device away from children.

On 6 October 2026, one NeckMassager cost $59, with the five-pack at $149 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered EMS shoulder pads for $4, a large neck pads upgrade for $9, a USB car adapter for $7 and a 3-year warranty for $9. The device runs on AAA batteries, so the car adapter is of doubtful use.

NeckMassager price and bundles

PackageTotalPer collar1 NeckMassager$59$59.002 NeckMassager$89$44.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$109$36.334 NeckMassager$129$32.255 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$149$29.80

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. A massager is personal, so one is enough. You can check today’s packages on the NeckMassager order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

EMS pads

The $4 add-on image is headed “Configuring multi-energy electrode pads” and shows two white pads wired to the collar and stuck on a woman’s upper back. It says the upper electrodes can massage the neck while pads reach the back, waist and legs. Keep pads away from the chest.

The $4 EMS pads add-on connects shoulder pads to the collar. Image: NeckMassager

Larger neck pads

The $9 “Large Neck Pads Upgrade” promises “large stainless steel neck pads” for better contact and comfort. Its image shows two round metal pads inside the collar under the heading “Double ring veneer with large contact area”. The main photo already shows two round pads, so ask what the upgrade changes.

The $9 larger stainless steel neck pads upgrade. Image: NeckMassager

USB car adapter

The $7 car adapter is described as a fast charge car power adapter. The collar runs on two AAA batteries, so it may not need one. Skip it.

Running costs

AAA batteries are cheap, but daily use will drain them. Rechargeable AAA batteries are a sensible choice if you use it often.

The “regular price”

The large pads add-on is shown against a crossed-out $39, and a countdown timer runs on the page. We found no evidence that NeckMassager sells at a higher regular price. The KL-5830 design is sold widely under many names.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as Matrixfze, written in capitals.

NeckMassagerScore 3.9/10

Best for: Healthy adults with everyday neck tension from desk work who want a gadget to try

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

For control and clear instructions, a branded TENS unit with separate pads is better; for simple comfort, a heat pad is cheaper and safer for more people. Branded TENS units come with manuals, warnings and adjustable settings, and you place the pads where a physiotherapist suggests. NeckMassager’s appeal is that it is hands-free and cheap.

OptionHow it worksEvidence for neck painWho can use itPriceNeckMassagerPulses through two metal pads at the back of the neckVery low quality, inconsistent for TENSNot with pacemakers, epilepsy, pregnancy$59Branded TENS unitPulses through adhesive pads you placeSame evidence, but clearer instructionsSame exclusions, listed in the manualVariesHeat pad or wrapWarmth on the musclesOften used for comfortMost people, with care on skinLowExercise and physiotherapyStrengthening and mobilityBetter support for persistent neck painMost peopleVaries

NeckMassager vs a branded TENS unit

A branded TENS unit gives you separate adhesive pads, a manual with warnings and placement diagrams, and finer control over frequency and intensity. It is the clearer, safer choice if you want TENS. That is where a rival wins.

NeckMassager vs heat

A microwavable wheat bag or an electric heat pad on the neck and shoulders is soothing, cheap and suitable for more people. Do not fall asleep on an electric heat pad, and check the temperature on sensitive skin.

NeckMassager vs other gadgets

Our Air-C Compression Massager review covers an air compression device that scored higher, and our TheraICE Headache Relief Hat review looks at hot and cold therapy for the head and neck. For eye strain, our ZenMind XP review covers an eye massager from the same checkout, and our guide to the best health gadgets ranks the ones that scored best.

If you are healthy and want to try a pulse collar, you can see today’s bundles on the NeckMassager offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

NeckMassagerScore 3.9/10

Why people buy it: Light, hands-free collar that rests on the shoulders

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

NeckMassager is a real product from a named seller, and a collar should arrive if you order. Before buying, check that none of the TENS exclusions apply to you, ask for the manual and safety warnings, switch from the five-pack, note the card statement name and keep in mind that return postage is yours to pay.

Check the exclusions first

What to do: read the TensCare list above. If you have a pacemaker, epilepsy, a heart rhythm problem or are pregnant, do not buy it without a doctor’s approval.

Ask for the manual

What to do: email support@g63com.com and ask for the user manual, the safety warnings and the maximum output. A device that puts current through your body should come with them.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $149 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one collar before you enter your details.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as Matrixfze. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: note the statement name, and read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. A massager that works but does not ease your neck may not count as defective.

Delivery and support

The seller ships from overseas and gives no delivery estimate. What to do: save your order email, and if nothing arrives within three weeks, ask support for tracking.

How to buy NeckMassager the smart way

  1. Check the TENS exclusions and ask your doctor if any apply.
  2. Open the NeckMassager order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to a single collar.
  4. Skip the car adapter, since it runs on AAA batteries.
  5. Note the card statement name, Matrixfze, and save your order email.
  6. Ask support for the manual and keep it.

NeckMassager scores 3.9 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.6, build durability 0.8, price competitiveness 1.0, usability 1.0 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. It is cheap, light and simple, and some people enjoy the sensation. The score falls on weak evidence for neck pain, no safety warnings for a device that sends current through the neck, an unsupported blood stimulation claim, a generic design under a new name and no independent ratings.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.6 / 2″Instant relaxation” plausible; blood stimulation unsupported; no warningsBuild durability0.8 / 2Plastic collar with flexible arms; generic designPrice competitiveness1.0 / 2$59 is modest, though the design is sold widelyUsability1.0 / 2Hands-free and battery-powered; fit varies with neck sizeOwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal3.9 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for NeckMassager by that name. Owners of the KL-5830 style collar on large retail sites tend to like the tingling and the price, and complain that some modes feel sharp, the pads need moisture to work well, and the collar does not fit larger necks comfortably.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used NeckMassager. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with TensCare’s guidance on when not to use TENS, the Cochrane review of electrotherapy for neck pain and the pages that rank for NeckMassager. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Fit the collar so the pads sit on the back of your neck, start at the lowest intensity, keep sessions to around 15 minutes and switch it off before taking it on or off. Never move the pads to the front or sides of the neck, never use it while driving, and stop if you feel dizzy, sharp pain or palpitations. Pair it with posture changes and stretches for longer-lasting relief.

  1. Check the exclusions. Pacemaker, epilepsy, pregnancy, heart rhythm problems: do not use.
  2. Clean, dry skin. Remove lotion and oil; some users find slightly damp skin conducts better.
  3. Pads at the back only. Never on the front or sides of the neck.
  4. Start at the lowest level. Raise it slowly to a comfortable tingle.
  5. Keep sessions short. Around 15 minutes is typical for TENS.
  6. Switch off before removing. Avoid jolts as the pads lose contact.
  7. Do not use while driving. Or operating machinery, as TENS makers advise.

Desk posture habits

Raise your screen so the top is at eye level, keep your shoulders relaxed, and take a short break every half an hour. Gentle neck turns and shoulder rolls through the day do more for desk neck than any gadget.

If it feels sharp or stings

Lower the intensity, check the pads are in full contact with the skin and that the skin is not dry. Stinging can mean poor contact. If it persists, stop.

Sizing and fit

The flexible arms open to fit around most necks, but very large or very slim necks may not get even pad contact. If one pad feels stronger than the other, adjust the collar so it sits centrally, or the device may not be right for your neck.

Batteries

Remove the batteries if you will not use it for a few weeks, to avoid leaks. Rechargeable AAA cells save money with daily use.

Cleaning

Wipe the metal pads with a damp cloth after use and dry them. Do not use alcohol on the plastic if the manual advises against it.

When to see a doctor

See a doctor if neck pain lasts more than a few weeks, follows an injury, spreads into the arms with numbness or weakness, or comes with fever, headache or weight loss.

NeckMassagerScore 3.9/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about whether they are safe for sleep, whether they help headaches and how long to use them. Do not sleep with one on, tension headaches may ease with relaxation but there is no good evidence it treats them, and about 15 minutes at a time is typical. Browse our health gadget reviews for other devices we have checked.

Can I fall asleep wearing it?

No. Switch it off and remove it before sleep. Long unattended sessions can irritate skin.

Does it help tension headaches?

Relaxing tight neck muscles may help some people feel better. Frequent or severe headaches, or headaches with other symptoms, need a doctor.

Can I use it in the shower?

No. It is an electrical device with no water rating. Keep it dry.

Does it work through hair?

The pads need contact with skin. Long hair at the nape can get in the way, so tie it up.

Does NeckMassager work for neck pain?

The evidence is weak. A Cochrane review of electrotherapy for neck pain found only very low quality evidence that TENS gives inconsistent results, and could draw no firm conclusions. Some people find the pulses pleasant or briefly soothing. Exercise, posture changes and physiotherapy have better support for persistent neck pain.

Is NeckMassager safe?

For many healthy adults, low-level pulses on the back of the neck are low risk, but there are clear exceptions. TENS makers such as TensCare warn against use with epilepsy, near a pacemaker or heart rhythm problem, in the first six months of pregnancy, on the front of the neck over the carotid arteries and on broken skin.

How much does NeckMassager cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one NeckMassager for $59, two for $89, three (two plus one free) for $109, four for $129 and five (three plus two free) for $149, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. EMS pads cost $4, larger metal pads $9 and a 3-year warranty $9.

What is the KL-5830 neck massager?

KL-5830 is the model number printed on the box in NeckMassager’s photo. It is a common design of U-shaped electric pulse neck massager sold by many sellers under different names. The NeckMassager page does not mention the model number or the manufacturer.

Is it TENS or EMS?

Both terms describe electrical pulses through skin pads. TENS usually targets nerves for pain relief, EMS targets muscles to make them contract. The NeckMassager page does not say which settings it uses, and its add-on pads are called EMS pads.

Can I use NeckMassager every day?

Many TENS devices are used daily for short sessions, around 15 minutes. Check your skin under the pads after each session, stop if it is red or sore, and see a doctor if your neck pain lasts more than a few weeks or comes with other symptoms.

Is NeckMassager legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are the weak evidence, no safety warnings on the page, a ‘blood stimulation’ claim with no support, a generic model sold under a new name and return postage at your cost.

Does EMS Stop Snoring? · Top10Gadgets

It depends on why you snore, and for most people there are better-proven options first. SleepLab is a small chin patch that listens for snoring and sends a mild electrical pulse to the muscles under your jaw. It is easy to wear and puts nothing in your mouth, which some snorers will value. But we found no published study of chin-worn stimulation devices for snoring, the add-on images carry another brand’s name, and at $149 it costs more than an FDA-cleared mouthpiece with real evidence. SleepLab scores 3.6 out of 10, held back by the missing evidence and its price.

  • What it is: a rechargeable Bluetooth unit that sticks under your chin and pulses the muscles there when it detects snoring.
  • Price: $149 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $449 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: nothing in your mouth or nose, and one button to start.
  • Biggest drawback: no published evidence that chin EMS reduces snoring, and the dock image is branded Snore Circle.
  • Our score: 3.6 out of 10.

SleepLab’s strengths are comfort and convenience compared with mouthguards and chin straps. Its weaknesses are evidence and value: the one stimulation device with regulatory backing for snoring works differently, and proven devices cost less.

What we like

  • Nothing goes in your mouth or nose, which suits people who cannot tolerate mouthguards
  • A single power button and a magnetic patch make it quick to put on
  • A phone app for Android and iOS is advertised for settings and snoring records
  • Rechargeable, with no ongoing cost beyond adhesive patches
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • We found no published study of chin-worn EMS devices like this for snoring
  • At $149 for one, it costs more than an FDA-cleared mouthpiece that has real evidence
  • The add-on dock image shows the Snore Circle brand, so SleepLab appears to be a rebadged device
  • Adhesive patches run out, and a pack of 10 costs $14 at checkout
  • Snoring can be a sign of sleep apnoea, which a consumer gadget cannot rule out
  • Refunds need a returns number, and return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

SleepLab is an EMS device, short for electrical muscle stimulation. You clip the oval unit to a conductive gel patch and stick it to the soft area under your chin. According to the offer page, it detects when stimulation is needed, which sellers of this design describe as listening for snoring through a built-in microphone, and then sends a short, mild pulse. The pulse is meant to tighten the muscles around the airway or prompt you to shift position, without waking you.

The SleepLab unit on its patch, with the phone app. Image: SleepLab

  1. Stick the patch under your chin

    Step 1: Clip the small oval unit onto a fresh conductive gel patch and press it to the soft area under your chin before you go to sleep.

  2. It listens for snoring

    Step 2: According to the maker, a built-in sensor detects when you snore and only then triggers stimulation, so it stays quiet when you are not snoring.

  3. A mild pulse prompts your muscles

    Step 3: The unit sends a small electrical pulse to the muscles under the chin. The idea is that this nudges you to change position or tighten the airway without fully waking you.

The page lists six features: smart detection, EMS stimulation, a magnetic attachment, one power button, a lightweight non-invasive design and an app for Android and iOS. It does not give the pulse strength, battery life, the number of intensity levels or any test result. Pages that rank for SleepLab mention dozens of sensitivity levels and up to 15 hours of battery, but those pages are promotional and name no source, so we have not relied on those figures.

SleepLab suits a person whose snoring has been checked by a doctor, who has tried the simple fixes, and who cannot get on with a mouthguard or nasal device. It also suits someone who wants an app to record snoring, as long as they treat the pulse feature as an experiment rather than a treatment.

  • Simple snorers who cannot tolerate a mouthguard, chin strap or nasal device
  • People who have already ruled out sleep apnoea with a doctor and want to try something new
  • Gadget-minded sleepers who like tracking their snoring in an app

People who cannot tolerate a mouthguard

Mouthpieces that hold the jaw forward have the best evidence of any over-the-counter snoring device, but some people cannot use them: dentures, sensitive teeth, jaw pain or a strong gag reflex all get in the way. For them, a device that sits outside the mouth is appealing. SleepLab is one of the few that does.

Partners at the end of their tether

Many snoring gadgets are bought by the partner who is kept awake. If that is you, a device that only pulses when it hears snoring sounds ideal. The catch is that it relies on the snorer wearing it every night and on the pulse working, and neither is guaranteed. Earplugs for the listener, which the NHS also suggests, cost a few dollars and work on any night.

App and data fans

A phone app that logs when snoring happens and how often can be useful in its own right. It can show whether alcohol, a late meal or sleeping on your back makes a difference. You can get similar records from free snore-recording apps without buying any hardware, so try one of those first if the data is what interests you.

Travellers

The unit is small and rechargeable, so it packs easily. If you snore more in hotel beds or after long flights, you might take it along. A side-sleeping pillow or a rolled towel behind your back does a similar job for positional snoring and weighs nothing.

Light sleepers

If you wake easily, a device that fires a pulse every time you snore may wake you several times a night. That can leave you more tired than the snoring did. The settings in the app may help, but light sleepers should start at the lowest level and watch how they feel during the day.

Who should skip it

Skip SleepLab if you have any sign of sleep apnoea, an implanted electronic device, or skin that reacts to adhesive patches, or if you want the option with the strongest evidence for your money.

  • Anyone with signs of sleep apnoea, such as gasping, pauses in breathing or heavy daytime sleepiness
  • People with a pacemaker, implanted defibrillator or other implanted electronic device
  • Buyers who want the option with the best evidence, which is a fitted or adjustable mouthpiece
  • Anyone with sensitive skin under the chin or a beard that stops patches sticking

We found no published study showing that chin-worn EMS devices like SleepLab reduce snoring. The only muscle stimulation device with FDA authorisation for snoring, eXciteOSA, works differently: you wear a mouthpiece on your tongue for 20 minutes a day while awake, to train the muscles over six weeks. In its trial, snoring above 40 decibels fell by more than 20% in 87 of 115 people. SleepLab borrows the idea but not the method or the testing.

How eXciteOSA differs

According to the FDA authorisation announcement reported by BioSpace, eXciteOSA is a prescription device for adults with snoring or mild sleep apnoea. A mouthpiece with four electrodes sits around the tongue, and stimulation builds tongue muscle tone during the day. It is used daily for six weeks, then weekly. The FDA reviewed it through the De Novo pathway and set special controls for labelling and performance testing.

SleepLab differs on every point that matters: it is worn on the chin, it runs during sleep, it is not prescribed, and it has no published trial.

What a chin pulse can and cannot reach

Snoring comes from tissues vibrating in the throat, the soft palate, the tongue and the nose as you breathe. The muscles under the chin help position the tongue and jaw, so stimulating them is not absurd. But a surface pulse through the skin under the chin is a blunt tool compared with electrodes placed on the tongue, and it has no way to steady the soft palate or open a blocked nose.

Does the pulse just wake you up?

The likeliest effect of any pulse that arrives when you snore is a brief arousal: you stir, shift position or close your mouth, and the snoring stops for a while. That is the same principle behind snore wristbands and positional buzzers. It can quieten a night, but it works by disturbing sleep slightly, and some people get used to it and stop responding.

What owners of this design report

We found no independent reviews of SleepLab under that name. Pages that rank for it are sponsored articles, and several appear on a hijacked university faculty subdomain alongside headlines claiming a celebrity endorsement, which we found no evidence for. Owners of similar chin EMS units on large retail sites report mixed results: some say snoring eases on some nights, others feel nothing or wake from the pulse, and patches that lose stickiness after a few uses are a common complaint.

What the app can tell you

The app is advertised as a way to see your snoring records and change settings. Snore-logging apps use the phone or device microphone to count loud breathing sounds and plot them through the night. That data can be genuinely useful for spotting patterns, such as more snoring after a late drink or on your back. It cannot tell you whether you have sleep apnoea, because it does not measure your oxygen level or the pauses in your breathing.

The unknowns on the spec sheet

The offer page gives no pulse frequency, maximum current, battery life, charging time for the standard cable or water resistance. It also does not say whether the app needs an account, what data it collects or where that data is stored. For a device that records sound in your bedroom all night, the privacy question deserves an answer. What to do: read the app’s privacy policy in the app store before you install it, and decline microphone access to anything you do not need.

Why the missing evidence matters

Snoring devices are easy to sell because snoring varies from night to night. A quiet night after you buy a gadget feels like proof, even when it is chance. A proper study compares the device with no device or a sham over many nights. Until a chin EMS device has been tested that way, any result you see is hard to separate from ordinary night-to-night change.

What this means for you: if you try SleepLab, record a week of snoring before you start and a week with the device, using the same app or a free recorder, so you can see whether anything really changed.

For evidence, a mandibular advancement mouthpiece beats SleepLab, and a snore wristband is its closest cousin. Mouthpieces that hold the lower jaw forward are recommended by sleep specialists and offered by the NHS, and FDA-cleared versions cost less than $149. Wristbands that buzz or pulse when you snore use the same “nudge” idea as SleepLab on the wrist instead of the chin, with the same lack of testing.

OptionHow it worksEvidencePriceSleepLabChin EMS pulse when snoring is detectedNo published study$149SnoreRXAdjustable mouthpiece holding the jaw forwardFDA-cleared; mouthpieces have good evidence$59.99Sleep Connection wristbandWrist pulse when snoring is detectedNo published study$64.99eXciteOSADaytime tongue stimulation, prescriptionFDA De Novo authorisation, trial of 115 peoplePrescriptionSide-sleeping and lifestyle changesRemoves common causesRecommended by the NHSFree

SleepLab vs SnoreRX

Our SnoreRX review covers an FDA-cleared boil-and-bite mouthpiece with a dial that sets how far your jaw moves forward. Devices like this hold the airway open all night instead of reacting after snoring starts. They can cause jaw ache and drooling at first, but they are the clearest case where a rival wins on evidence and price.

SleepLab vs the Sleep Connection wristband

The Sleep Connection wristband listens for snoring and pulses your wrist. SleepLab does the same at your chin. Both rely on a mild jolt to make you shift. Neither has a published trial. If you want this kind of nudge device, the wristband is cheaper and puts no adhesive on your skin. Our Sleepzee, Sleep Connection and Hale comparison weighs a wristband against a mouthpiece and a breathing trainer on evidence, comfort and cost.

SleepLab vs nasal devices and sprays

If your snoring starts in the nose, a nasal dilator or strip may help, while SleepLab cannot reach the nose at all. Our SilentSnore review covers a nasal clip, and our SnoreStop review an oral spray whose evidence is thin. For a blocked nose, a pharmacist can suggest a saline rinse or a short course of a decongestant.

SleepLab vs a chin strap

A chin strap keeps your mouth closed, which helps some mouth breathers. It costs a few dollars, has no electronics and needs no patches. It does nothing for snoring that comes from the throat with the mouth shut, and neither, as far as the evidence shows, does SleepLab.

If you still want to try a chin EMS device, check today’s packages on the SleepLab offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and choose a single unit.

SleepLabScore 3.6/10

Best for: Simple snorers who cannot tolerate a mouthguard, chin strap or nasal device

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

If SleepLab helps anyone, it is most likely a back sleeper whose snoring is mild and comes from the throat, and who stirs easily. A pulse that prompts a shift onto your side mimics positional therapy. It cannot help snoring caused by a blocked nose, and it should never be used to quieten snoring that comes with pauses in breathing, which points to sleep apnoea and needs a doctor.

Back sleepers

When you lie on your back, gravity pulls the tongue and soft palate towards the back of the throat, narrowing the airway. That is why the NHS suggests sleeping on your side, even sewing a tennis ball into the back of your nightwear. A device that pulses when you snore may make you roll over, which is the same goal reached by a different route. If that is your pattern, a side-sleeping pillow or a positional trainer is cheaper and does not depend on a patch staying stuck.

Mouth breathers

If you snore with your mouth open, the jaw drops and the tongue falls back. A pulse to the chin muscles might briefly close the mouth, but a chin strap does that all night for a few dollars. Mouth breathing is often a sign of a blocked nose, so treating the nose is the first step.

Nose snorers

A blocked or narrow nose makes you breathe harder, which pulls the soft tissues of the throat together and makes them vibrate. Colds, hay fever, a deviated septum and nasal polyps all cause it. SleepLab works under the chin and cannot open the nose. A saline rinse, a nasal strip or a pharmacist’s advice will do more.

Snorers after alcohol

Alcohol relaxes the throat muscles, and many people only snore heavily after drinking. A device that pulses the muscles may not overcome that relaxation. Stopping alcohol for a few hours before bed is free and often makes a clear difference on its own.

Snorers with excess weight

Fat around the neck narrows the airway. The NHS lists losing weight as one of the first self-help steps. No gadget changes the shape of the airway the way weight loss can, and that is worth knowing before you spend $149.

People with sleep apnoea

Loud snoring with pauses, gasps and daytime exhaustion can be obstructive sleep apnoea, in which the airway closes repeatedly during the night. It is linked to high blood pressure and other health problems when left untreated. SleepLab makes no claim to treat it, and quietening the snoring could delay a diagnosis. A sleep study is the only way to know.

On 6 October 2026, one SleepLab cost $149, and the five-pack at $449 was flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered a charging dock for $19, ten spare patches for $14, a car power supply for $9 and a 3-year warranty for $24. Patches are the running cost: each one only stays sticky for a limited number of nights, so budget for refills if you use it every night.

SleepLab price and bundles

PackageTotalPer unit1 SleepLab$149$149.002 SleepLab$249$124.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$329$109.674 SleepLab$399$99.755 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$449$89.80

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. A snoring device is personal, so one unit is the sensible start. You can check today’s packages on the SleepLab order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

Patches

The $14 add-on is “10X Hypoallergenic Conductive Patches”, described as magnetic and comfortable. Gel patches lose stickiness with skin oil, stubble and washing. If one patch lasts a few nights, ten last a few weeks, and the yearly cost can approach the price of the device. The page does not say how many patches come in the box or how long each lasts.

The patch goes on the soft area under the chin. Image: SleepLab

What to do: ask support how many patches are included and where to buy refills after the sale, before you order.

The charging dock and the Snore Circle name

The $19 “Fast-Charge Docking Station” promises a full charge in under 30 minutes. Its image shows the same oval unit, printed with the name Snore Circle, sitting in a round black dock. Snore Circle is a brand of chin EMS device sold through other retailers. SleepLab’s page does not mention it, so SleepLab appears to be the same hardware under a new name.

The $19 charging dock add-on image, with Snore Circle printed on the unit. Image: SleepLab

What the first year might cost

Here is a rough illustration rather than a quote, because the page does not state patch life. One unit at $149, plus a $14 pack of ten patches every month if each patch lasts about three nights, comes to $317 over a year. If patches last a week, the yearly total falls to around $205. Either way, the running cost is a large part of the bill, and you should ask the seller how long a patch lasts before you order.

Car power supply and warranty

The $9 car power supply is a USB car charger. Skip it if you already own one. The 3-year warranty costs $24. The seller’s terms already cover defective goods for two years once you have a returns number, so the extra year is what you are paying for.

The “regular price”

The page shows add-ons with higher crossed-out prices and a countdown timer. We found no evidence that SleepLab sells for more anywhere else. Rebadged devices are often sold under several names at different prices, so the crossed-out figure tells you little about value.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as Matrixfze.

SleepLabScore 3.6/10

Why people buy it: Nothing goes in your mouth or nose, which suits people who cannot tolerate mouthguards

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

For a healthy adult, a low-level chin pulse is unlikely to cause harm, but there are real cautions. Electrical stimulation is not for people with pacemakers or other implanted electronics, patches can irritate skin, and the biggest risk is treating snoring caused by sleep apnoea with a gadget. Check the bundle, the patch supply, the card statement name and the refund terms before you pay.

Rule out sleep apnoea first

The NHS snoring page says to see a GP if you have daytime sleepiness, breathing that stops and starts, or gasping and choking in your sleep, because these can be signs of sleep apnoea, which can be serious if not treated. A gadget that makes snoring quieter can hide the main clue that something is wrong.

What to do: if a partner has noticed pauses or gasping, or you wake unrefreshed, see a doctor before buying any snoring device.

Implanted devices and other conditions

Electrical stimulation devices usually warn against use with a pacemaker, implanted defibrillator or other implanted electronics, and over broken or irritated skin. The SleepLab page lists no warnings at all. What to do: if you have any implant, a heart condition, epilepsy or are pregnant, ask your doctor before using it.

Skin and beards

Adhesive gel patches can redden skin, and stubble or a beard stops them sticking well. What to do: patch test on your forearm for a night, shave the area if you can, and stop if your skin becomes sore.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $449 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one unit before you enter your details.

Card statement name and memberships

Charges appear as Matrixfze. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” that is free for 30 days and then billed monthly. What to do: note the statement name, and read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. A device that works but does not stop your snoring may not count as defective. Used patches may also not be returnable.

What to do: try it for the first two weeks, keep the box and an unused patch, and contact support well inside 30 days if it does not help.

Delivery and support

The seller ships from overseas, and the page gives no delivery estimate for SleepLab. Support is by email at support@g63com.com or the Singapore phone number listed. What to do: keep your confirmation email and note the order date. If nothing arrives within three weeks, email support with your order number and ask for tracking.

If a refund goes wrong

Keep every email, the tracking number for anything you send back and photos of the item before you post it. If the seller does not respond within a reasonable time, your card issuer can explain how to dispute the charge. That paper trail is what they will ask for, so start it on the day you order.

How to buy SleepLab the smart way

  1. Open the SleepLab order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  2. Change the five-pack to a single unit.
  3. Add the patch pack only once you know how many come in the box.
  4. Skip the car charger and dock unless you need them.
  5. Note the card statement name, Matrixfze, and save your order email.
  6. Record a week of snoring before the device arrives, so you have a baseline.

SleepLab scores 3.6 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.5, build durability 1.0, price competitiveness 0.5, usability 1.1 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. The device is simple to wear and the app is a plus, but there is no evidence that chin EMS stops snoring, the product appears to be a rebadged Snore Circle, it costs more than a proven mouthpiece and we found no independent owner ratings for the store.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.5 / 2Sold as an anti-snoring device with no published evidence for chin EMSBuild durability1.0 / 2Sealed rechargeable unit; battery and patch life not statedPrice competitiveness0.5 / 2$149 plus patches, more than an FDA-cleared mouthpieceUsability1.1 / 2One button and a magnetic patch; patches lose grip, beards get in the wayOwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings; owners of similar units report mixed resultsTotal3.6 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for SleepLab by that name. The ranking pages are promotional. Owners of similar chin EMS units elsewhere report that some nights seem quieter, that the pulse sometimes wakes them, and that patches stop sticking sooner than expected.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used SleepLab. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with the NHS page on snoring, coverage of the FDA’s authorisation of eXciteOSA and the pages that rank for SleepLab. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Start with the simple fixes, then wear SleepLab on clean, dry skin under the chin at a low setting, and judge it over two weeks against a recorded baseline. Change patches as soon as they lose grip, charge it daily, and keep a free snore recorder running so you can see whether it changes anything. If your partner still hears gasping or pauses, stop and see a doctor.

  1. Fix the basics first. Sleep on your side, avoid alcohol in the evening and treat a blocked nose. These help many snorers on their own.
  2. Record a baseline. Run a free snoring app for a week without the device.
  3. Prepare the skin. Wash and dry the area under your chin. Shave if stubble stops the patch sticking.
  4. Start low. Use the lowest setting the app allows and raise it only if you feel nothing.
  5. Place it centrally. Stick the patch on the soft area under the chin, not on the jawbone.
  6. Charge it every day. A flat unit does nothing, so make charging part of your routine.
  7. Judge it after two weeks. Compare the app’s records with your baseline before deciding.

Positioning tips

The patch should sit flat, in the soft space behind the chin bone. If it lifts at the edges, it will not conduct well and may give a sharper pulse. Press it down for a few seconds after attaching the unit.

Caring for the patches

Peel patches off slowly, stick them back on their backing sheet and store them sealed, away from heat. Some gel patches can be refreshed with a drop of water on the gel side. Replace a patch when it no longer holds.

If the pulse wakes you

Lower the intensity or the sensitivity in the app. If any setting strong enough to feel also wakes you, the device is trading snoring for broken sleep, and a positional aid or mouthpiece may suit you better.

Combining it with side sleeping

If you mainly snore on your back, pair SleepLab with a side-sleeping aid such as a body pillow behind you. You will then learn whether the device adds anything. If the pillow alone fixes the snoring, you can return the device inside the window and keep the cheaper fix.

Cleaning and charging the unit

Wipe the unit’s contacts with a dry cloth each morning so gel residue does not build up. Do not submerge it, because the page gives no water rating. Charge it during the day on the supplied cable, not overnight in the bed, and keep it away from heat sources.

If nothing changes

Two weeks is enough to tell. If your recordings look the same, contact support inside the 30-day window and ask for a returns number. Then consider a mouthpiece or a conversation with your doctor.

SleepLabScore 3.6/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about whether the pulse hurts, whether it suits sleep apnoea, and why snoring stops on some nights and not others. The pulse is usually described as a tingle, sleep apnoea needs a doctor, and snoring varies naturally with alcohol, tiredness, position and a blocked nose. That variation is why a baseline recording matters before you judge any device.

Does the pulse hurt?

EMS at the levels used in consumer devices usually feels like tingling or a twitch. Higher settings can be uncomfortable. If you feel stinging or burning, the patch is probably not making good contact or your skin is irritated, so stop and check.

Can I use it with a CPAP machine?

There is no reason to add it. If you use CPAP for sleep apnoea, your machine already keeps your airway open. Talk to your sleep clinic before adding any other device.

Why does my snoring change night to night?

Alcohol, sleeping pills, a cold, hay fever, tiredness and sleeping on your back all make snoring worse. A good night after a new gadget may just be a night without those triggers. That is why the NHS lists lifestyle changes first and why a recorded baseline helps. Our sleep product reviews and our guide to the best sleep products cover other options with better evidence.

Can two people share one SleepLab?

You could, but patches should not be shared for hygiene reasons, and each person would need their own sensitivity settings. If both partners snore, the honest answer is that both should start with the free steps, and anyone with signs of sleep apnoea should see a doctor rather than share a gadget.

Is SleepLab suitable for children?

No. Snoring in children has different causes, most often large tonsils or adenoids, and should be checked by a doctor. The page gives no age guidance, and electrical stimulation devices are not designed for children.

How long before I know if it works?

Give it two weeks of nightly use at a comfortable setting, with a snore recorder running. Snoring varies enough from night to night that a few quiet nights prove little. Two weeks also leaves time to send it back inside the 30-day guarantee if it does nothing for you.

Will it help if I grind my teeth?

SleepLab is not sold for teeth grinding, and a pulse to the jaw muscles is not a treatment for it. A dentist can fit a night guard if grinding is a problem. Some people who grind also snore, and a dentist can advise whether a mouthpiece could help with both.

Is this a medical device?

The offer page makes no claim of FDA clearance or CE medical marking for SleepLab, and we found none. Treat it as a consumer gadget.

Does SleepLab really stop snoring?

There is no published evidence that it does. SleepLab pulses the muscles under your chin when it detects snoring, but we found no study of chin-worn EMS devices for snoring. The only stimulation device with FDA authorisation for snoring, eXciteOSA, works on the tongue while you are awake and is used daily for weeks.

How much does SleepLab cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one SleepLab for $149, two for $249, three (two plus one free) for $329, four for $399 and five (three plus two free) for $449, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. Ten spare patches cost $14, a dock $19 and a 3-year warranty $24.

Is SleepLab the same as Snore Circle?

It appears to be the same device or a close copy. The image for SleepLab’s charging dock add-on shows an identical oval unit printed with the Snore Circle name. The offer page does not mention Snore Circle or say who makes SleepLab, so we cannot confirm the relationship.

Is SleepLab safe?

Low-level muscle stimulation is generally low risk for healthy adults, but electrical stimulation devices are not suitable for people with pacemakers or other implanted electronics, and patches can irritate skin. The bigger risk is using it to mask snoring caused by sleep apnoea, which needs a medical assessment.

Can SleepLab treat sleep apnoea?

No. SleepLab makes no clearance claim for sleep apnoea, and snoring with gasping, pauses in breathing or heavy daytime tiredness should be checked by a doctor. Sleep apnoea is diagnosed with a sleep study and treated with options such as CPAP or a fitted mouthpiece.

What works better than SleepLab for snoring?

For simple snoring, the NHS suggests losing excess weight, sleeping on your side, cutting alcohol and stopping smoking. A mandibular advancement mouthpiece has the strongest evidence of the devices sold to the public, and FDA-cleared versions cost less than one SleepLab.

Is SleepLab legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are the lack of evidence, the apparent rebadging of another brand’s device, the multi-pack flagged as best seller and refund terms that leave return postage to you.

Car Scratch Pen · Top10Gadgets

Probably not, unless your scratch is barely there. ScratchUndo Pro is a clear coat pen, and the one pictured carries a “Clear Coat Applicator” label like the Fix It Pro style of pen that Consumer Reports and TV testers found useless on scratches you can feel. Clear filler can hide the faintest scuffs in the top layer. It cannot restore colour or fill deeper damage, despite “any paint, any color” and “proven fast results”. ScratchUndo Pro scores 2.8 out of 10, held back by its claims and test record.

  • What it is: a pen that fills scratches with clear coat liquid.
  • Price: $39 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $99 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: no colour matching, and it may hide very light scuffs.
  • Biggest drawback: testers found this style of pen fails on scratches deep enough to feel.
  • Our score: 2.8 out of 10.

Scratch pens appeal because they promise a cheap fix in minutes. The pros are what a clear filler can genuinely do. The cons reflect what independent testers found and what the page promises.

What we like

  • Colourless, so there is no paint colour to match
  • Can fill very light clear coat scuffs, according to independent testers
  • Small and simple, with spare tips offered
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • The pen pictured is labelled ‘Clear Coat Applicator’, a design Consumer Reports and TV testers found ineffective on deeper scratches
  • ‘Restore immediately’, ‘proven fast results’ and ‘any paint, any color’ overstate what clear coat filler can do
  • Wide tips can leave visible residue that looks worse than the scratch
  • A polishing compound or detailer usually does more for light scratches
  • At $39 for one, it costs more than the same style of pen at large retailers
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

Car paint is layered: bare metal, primer, a colour coat and a clear coat on top. ScratchUndo Pro holds a clear liquid that you dab into a scratch through a felt tip. As it dries, it fills the groove, so light reflects more evenly and the scratch looks less obvious. It adds no colour, so it can only disguise damage that stays within the clear top layer.

The pen, its tips and the page’s before and after images. Image: ScratchUndo

  1. Clean the scratch

    Step 1: Wash and dry the area so no dirt or wax sits in the scratch.

  2. Prime and apply the pen

    Step 2: Press the tip to start the flow, then run it along the scratch to fill it with clear coat liquid.

  3. Wipe the excess and let it cure

    Step 3: Wipe off any liquid outside the scratch straight away and let the rest dry, out of the rain.

The page title calls it an “effective car scratch remover pen”, a “scratch eraser pen” and a “color neutral car scratch remover”. The six bullets promise to “restore immediately car paint scratches”, an “effective colorless scratch remover pen”, “proven fast results in first application”, use “on any paint and any color”, a safe way to “restore paint shine”, and safety “on all spots, plastic and metallic”.

The pen in the photos

The product photo and the add-on images show a red and yellow pen labelled “Clear Coat Applicator”, with felt tips. The same look has been sold for years as Fix It Pro and under other names. We could not confirm who makes this one.

The before and after photos

The page shows a red car door with a pale scratch, then without it. Photos like this cannot show how deep the scratch was or how it was lit.

ScratchUndo Pro is only worth trying on very faint clear coat scuffs, the kind your fingernail glides over, by someone who accepts the result may be marginal. It is not for scratches you can feel, scratches showing white, grey or metal, or anyone selling a car. Our WashUpGo review covers a cordless pressure washer for cleaning before any repair.

  • Drivers with very faint clear coat scuffs who want a cheap first try
  • People who accept the result may be barely visible or no better
  • Anyone comfortable wiping excess quickly and neatly

Drivers with faint scuffs

Light marks from bushes, bags or fingernails around door handles sit in the clear coat. A filler may hide them for a while.

People willing to experiment

If you go in expecting little and keep the area small, the downside is limited.

Who should skip it

Skip ScratchUndo Pro if your fingernail catches in the scratch, if you can see primer or metal, if you want a body shop finish, or if you would rather try polishing compound first.

  • Anyone with scratches they can feel with a fingernail
  • Drivers with scratches showing primer, white or bare metal
  • People who want a body shop finish or are selling a car
  • Buyers who would rather try polishing compound first

Only the lightest ones, based on tests of pens like it. Consumer Reports found scratch repair pens will not help on any scratch deep enough to feel with a fingernail or that shows primer or metal, and that wide tips can leave residue more noticeable than the scratch. A TV “Does it Work?” test of Fix It Pro named it the worst product it tried that year.

What Consumer Reports found

Consumer Reports’ scratch repair pen review tested several pens, including Fix It Pro, on scratches of different depths. Its advice was to skip these quick fixes for minor abrasions and try a cleaning polish instead.

What this means for you: do the fingernail test before you buy anything.

What a body repair firm found

ChipsAway, a UK paint repair company, published a review of the Simoniz Fix It Pro pen, the best-known pen of this style. It said the pen might improve the look of shallow scratches, with inconsistent and temporary results, and would not help deeper ones much. A paint repairer has a reason to favour professional repair, but the finding matches Consumer Reports.

The TV test

KFVS12’s Does it Work? segment on Fix It Pro found it filled light clear coat scratches but did nothing for scratches into the paint, and called it the worst product it tested in 2010.

“Can be used on any paint and any color”

Clear liquid suits any colour only because it adds no colour. It cannot fix a scratch that has removed colour.

What to do: for scratches showing white, grey or metal, use colour-matched touch-up paint or a body shop.

On 6 October 2026, one ScratchUndo Pro cost $39, with the five-pack at $99 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered extra tips for $7, a “liquid shine” for deeper scratches for $14, a USB car adapter for $4 and a 3-year warranty for $9. Pens of this style sell for less at large retailers.

ScratchUndo Pro price and bundles

PackageTotalPer pen1 ScratchUndo Pro$39$39.002 ScratchUndo Pro$59$29.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$79$26.334 ScratchUndo Pro$89$22.255 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$99$19.80

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. You can check today’s packages on the ScratchUndo Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

For $7, replacement tips “for heavy scratches”. The image shows the pen with two yellow felt tips, which the main photo suggests come in the box anyway.

The $7 extra tips add-on. Image: ScratchUndo

Liquid shine

For $14, a “specialized liquid for deeper scratches”. The image shows the same pen leaking clear liquid onto plastic film. No product, ingredient or instructions are shown, and clear liquid cannot fix deeper scratches.

The $14 liquid shine add-on image. Image: ScratchUndo

Car adapter and warranty

A $4 USB car adapter has nothing to do with a scratch pen; skip it. A 3-year warranty for $9 on a pen is hard to justify.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as Matrixfze.

ScratchUndo ProScore 2.8/10

Best for: Drivers with very faint clear coat scuffs who want a cheap first try

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

No. For light clear coat scratches, a scratch or polishing compound usually does more, and for deeper scratches, colour-matched touch-up paint is the right tool. Compound levels the clear coat so the scratch disappears rather than being filled. Touch-up paint restores missing colour. A body shop or mobile repairer handles the rest.

OptionFixesColour matchSkill neededCostScratchUndo ProFaint clear coat scuffs at bestNot neededLow$39Scratch or polishing compoundLight clear coat scratchesNot neededLow to mediumLowTouch-up paint penScratches into colourNeededMediumLowMobile or body shop repairMost scratchesDone for youNoneHigher

ScratchUndo Pro vs polishing compound

Compound removes a whisker of clear coat around a light scratch so it vanishes. That is the clearest case where a rival wins, and it is what Consumer Reports suggested.

ScratchUndo Pro vs touch-up paint

Touch-up paint, matched to your car’s paint code, fills chips and scratches into the colour. It takes patience but can look good.

Other car gadgets we have reviewed

Our ClearView review covers a windscreen product, our SmartCar review a plug-in gadget with fuel claims, and our TireHero review a portable tyre inflator.

If you want to try a clear coat pen on a faint scuff anyway, you can see today’s bundles on the ScratchUndo Pro offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

ScratchUndo ProScore 2.8/10

Why people buy it: Colourless, so there is no paint colour to match

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

ScratchUndo Pro is a real product from a named seller, and a pen should arrive if you order. Before buying, do the fingernail test, consider compound first, switch from the five-pack, skip the add-ons and note the card statement name.

Do the fingernail test

What to do: run a fingernail across the scratch. If it catches, or you see white, grey or metal, a clear pen will not fix it.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $99 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one pen.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as Matrixfze. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. A pen that simply does not work well may not count as defective.

How to buy ScratchUndo Pro the smart way

  1. Do the fingernail test first.
  2. Open the ScratchUndo Pro order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to one pen.
  4. Leave the add-ons, car adapter and warranty unticked.
  5. Note the card statement name, Matrixfze.

ScratchUndo Pro scores 2.8 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.2, build durability 0.8, price competitiveness 0.4, usability 1.0 and owner satisfaction 0.4, each out of 2. A clear filler can disguise the faintest scuffs. The score falls on “restore immediately”, “proven” and “any paint” claims, a pen design with poor independent test results, a vague “liquid shine” add-on and a price above the same style of pen elsewhere.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.2 / 2″Restore immediately” and “proven” not borne out by testsBuild durability0.8 / 2Filler can wash out or yellow over timePrice competitiveness0.4 / 2Above similar pens; compound costs lessUsability1.0 / 2Simple, but residue is easy to leaveOwner satisfaction0.4 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal2.8 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for ScratchUndo Pro by that name. Owners of Fix It Pro style pens on review sites report that faint marks look slightly better, deeper scratches look the same, the liquid leaves a shiny smear if not wiped quickly, and results fade after a few washes.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used ScratchUndo Pro. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with Consumer Reports, ChipsAway and KFVS12 tests of similar pens and the pages that rank for ScratchUndo Pro. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Pick a faint scratch your fingernail glides over, wash and dry the area, apply the liquid only inside the scratch, and wipe away any excess immediately. Work in the shade, keep it dry while it cures, and test on a hidden spot first. If the scratch still shows, try polishing compound rather than more layers.

  1. Do the fingernail test. Only faint scuffs.
  2. Wash and dry the panel. Remove wax and dirt.
  3. Test on a hidden spot. Check the finish.
  4. Prime the tip. Press until liquid flows.
  5. Stay inside the scratch. Use light strokes.
  6. Wipe excess at once. A soft cloth, before it dries.
  7. Keep it dry while it cures. No washing for a day or two.

If it looks worse

Gentle polishing compound can remove residue from the surrounding paint. Work slowly and by hand.

Plastic bumpers and trim

The page says it is safe on plastic. Test first, because some textured trim shows residue badly.

ScratchUndo ProScore 2.8/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about how long a fix lasts, keyed cars and toothpaste. Clear filler can wash out over time, keyed scratches usually need paint, and toothpaste is a mild abrasive with mixed results. Browse our car gadget reviews for other options.

How long does a scratch pen fix last?

Often until the next few washes or a season of weather. Polishing removes the scratch rather than filling it.

Will it fix a keyed car?

Usually not. Keyed scratches tend to go through to the colour or primer.

Does toothpaste work on scratches?

It is a mild abrasive and can soften the faintest marks, but a proper compound is more predictable.

Will it affect my car’s resale value?

A visible smear can look worse than the scratch. For a car you are selling, consider a professional repair.

Does ScratchUndo Pro work?

Only on the faintest scuffs, if this pen performs like the clear coat pens it resembles. Consumer Reports found scratch pens of this type will not help on any scratch deep enough to feel with a fingernail or showing primer or metal, and can leave visible residue.

How much does ScratchUndo Pro cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one ScratchUndo Pro for $39, two for $59, three (two plus one free) for $79, four for $89 and five (three plus two free) for $99, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. Extra tips cost $7, liquid shine $14 and a 3-year warranty $9.

Is ScratchUndo Pro the same as Fix It Pro?

The pen pictured is labelled ‘Clear Coat Applicator’ and looks like the Fix It Pro style of pen sold under several names. We cannot confirm the maker. Fix It Pro was tested by Consumer Reports and TV consumer segments, with poor results on deeper scratches.

Does it work on any colour?

The page says any paint and any colour, because the liquid is clear. A clear filler can only hide scratches in the clear top layer. If a scratch reaches the colour coat or primer, you need matching touch-up paint.

How do I know if my scratch is too deep?

Run a fingernail across it. If your nail glides over, it is likely in the clear coat and may polish out. If it catches, or you see white, grey or metal, it has gone deeper and needs touch-up paint or a body shop.

What works better for light scratches?

A scratch or polishing compound applied by hand or with a machine polisher removes light clear coat scratches by levelling the surface. For deeper scratches, colour-matched touch-up paint or a professional repair works better.

Is ScratchUndo Pro legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are ‘proven’ and ‘any scratch’ claims, a pen design with poor test results, a high price and return postage at your cost.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Prices accurate as of October 6, 2026. Check the seller’s checkout for current pricing, promotions and terms.

What we checked: No hands-on use. Claims, product title, feature bullets, photos, US dollar prices, bundles, add-ons and their images, warranty price, seller details and card statement name from the ScratchUndo Pro offer page our link opens (gadgetxaura.com) and the data in the page’s own code on 2026-10-06. The 30-day guarantee text was read in the same page code that day; the fuller refund and returns terms are as recorded from the site’s terms page on 2026-10-04. Consumer Reports’ scratch repair pen tests, ChipsAway’s review of the Simoniz Fix It Pro, KFVS12’s ‘Does it Work?’ segment and the top-ranking ScratchUndo Pro pages were read on 2026-10-06.

SpatialSound Edge Review (2026): Worth $99? · Top10Gadgets

Only if you love the novelty and find it cheaper elsewhere. SpatialSound Edge is a metal Bluetooth speaker that vibrates the table or cabinet it stands on, turning the furniture into part of the speaker. On hollow wood that can sound surprisingly big, and it is a fun gadget to experiment with. But “award winning” names no award, “360° sound” and “deep bass” depend on your furniture, the add-on photos show a speaker branded Adin, and the Anything Speaker does the same trick for $39.95. SpatialSound Edge scores 3.8 out of 10, held back by price and unsupported claims.

  • What it is: a cylindrical Bluetooth speaker that sends vibrations into the surface below it, so the surface radiates sound.
  • Price: $99 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $297 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: a fun, unusual way to get room-filling sound from a wooden desk or cabinet.
  • Biggest drawback: sound varies hugely with the surface, and rivals cost far less.
  • Our score: 3.8 out of 10.

Vibration speakers are genuinely different, and that is their appeal. The cons come from the claims around the novelty, and from what you are paying for it compared with nearly identical alternatives.

What we like

  • Turns a table, desk or cabinet into part of the speaker, which is fun to experiment with
  • Solid-looking cylindrical metal body with a built-in battery
  • Works with any Bluetooth phone, tablet or laptop, and has a wired input in the photos
  • Different from ordinary speakers, so it makes an unusual gift
  • The seller names a registered company with an address, email and phone number

What we don’t

  • ‘Award winning’ with no award, year or organisation named
  • Sound depends heavily on the surface: hollow wood helps, carpet or a soft sofa kills it
  • ‘360° surrounding sound’ and ‘deep bass’ are hard claims for a single small driver
  • The remote control and FM radio add-on images show a speaker branded Adin
  • At $99, it costs more than double the Anything Speaker, which does the same trick
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

A normal speaker uses a cone to push air. A vibration speaker, also called a resonance or conduction speaker, uses a driver that shakes a contact pad in its base. When the speaker stands on a surface, the vibrations pass into that surface, which then vibrates and radiates sound like a large, flat speaker cone. A wooden desk, a cupboard door or a hollow table can sound much bigger than the small cylinder could on its own.

The speaker with icons for the devices it connects to. Image: SpatialSound

  1. Stand it on a hard surface

    Step 1: Place the speaker upright on a table, desk, shelf or cabinet. A driver in the base sends vibrations into whatever it stands on.

  2. Pair your phone

    Step 2: Switch it on, pair it with your phone over Bluetooth, and play music, a podcast or a film’s audio.

  3. Move it to change the sound

    Step 3: The surface acts like a soundboard, so the sound changes as you move it. Hollow wooden furniture tends to be fuller; solid stone and soft surfaces are weaker.

The page title calls it a “Conduction Speaker, Bluetooth Vibration Speaker, High Power 20w Vibration Speaker on Desk, Glass, Pavement, etc., Powerful Conduction Speaker with Remote Controller.” The six bullets promise 360° surrounding sound, turning any surface into a speaker, enhanced deep bass technology, full portability with a built-in battery, a stable Bluetooth connection and iOS and Android compatibility. The page gives no battery life, frequency range, Bluetooth version, weight or test of the 20W figure.

What the photos show

The main photo shows a black cylinder with silver rings, a row of buttons and ports on the side labelled for mode, volume, track and line input, and icons for the devices it can play from: a car, a game player, a tablet, a laptop, a desktop, a smartphone and an MP3 player. The remote control and FM radio add-on images show a matching black cylinder printed with the brand name Adin. The offer page does not mention Adin, so SpatialSound Edge appears to be that design under a new name.

Buttons and inputs

The side of the speaker in the main photo carries labels for a mode switch, volume and track controls, a line-in socket and an infrared receiver for a remote. That suggests you can play from a cable or a memory card as well as Bluetooth, though the page does not list these inputs among its features. Check what arrives in the box.

“Conduction” speaker

“Conduction” here means the sound is conducted into a surface, not into your skull as with bone conduction headphones. The terms get mixed up in marketing, but the principle is simple: the speaker needs something solid to shake.

SpatialSound Edge suits gadget fans who enjoy trying a speaker on different surfaces, and desk users who want a compact speaker that uses a wooden desk to fill a small room. It is a novelty with a real effect, so it suits people who value fun over accuracy.

  • Gadget fans who enjoy experimenting with how different surfaces sound
  • Desk users who want a compact speaker that fills a small room via a wooden desk
  • Gift buyers looking for something unusual

Desk and office users

A hollow wooden desk can make a vibration speaker sound larger than its size suggests, and the speaker itself takes up little space. For background music while working, that can be pleasant. For video calls, a dedicated speakerphone or headset is clearer.

Party hosts

Standing the speaker on a large wooden table can spread sound around a room, which is a good party trick. The volume is limited by the surface and the driver, so for a large gathering a conventional speaker with a stated output will be louder and more predictable.

Gift buyers

The look and the surprise of a table suddenly playing music make vibration speakers popular gifts. If you give one, the cheaper versions of the same idea make the gift less of a risk.

People who like tinkering

Trying the speaker on a cupboard, a cardboard box, a window or a guitar body is half the fun. Each sounds different. If that experimentation appeals, the product delivers something you cannot get from a normal speaker.

Small flats and bedrooms

In a small room, a vibration speaker on a bedside table or chest of drawers can fill the space without much volume. Furniture against a shared wall passes vibration into the wall, though, so think about where you place it if you have neighbours close by.

Kitchens

Kitchen worktops are often stone or composite, which vibrate poorly. A wooden chopping board or a cupboard door makes a better base. Keep the speaker away from water and grease, as the page gives no water rating.

Who should skip it

Skip SpatialSound Edge if you care about accurate sound, want strong bass on any surface, plan to use it outdoors or on soft furniture, or want the best value for a vibration speaker.

  • Listeners who care about accurate sound or strong, clean bass
  • Anyone planning to use it outdoors on grass or on soft furniture
  • Buyers who want the best value; similar vibration speakers cost far less

It depends almost entirely on what you stand it on. A vibration speaker turns the surface into the speaker, so a large hollow wooden cabinet can sound broad and fairly full, while stone, metal, glass and soft furniture sound thin. “360° surrounding sound” describes how a vibrating surface radiates in many directions, not true surround sound. The page gives no frequency range or test of the “deep bass”.

Why surfaces sound so different

Light, rigid, hollow surfaces vibrate easily and radiate sound well: wooden desks, cupboard doors and tables with a hollow underside. Heavy, dense surfaces such as stone worktops vibrate less. Soft surfaces such as sofas, beds and carpet absorb the vibrations and make little sound. Glass windows can be loud but harsh.

What “360°” means here

When a whole tabletop vibrates, sound comes off it in many directions, so people around the table hear it fairly evenly. That is a genuine effect. It is not surround sound in the home cinema sense, which uses several speakers in different positions.

Bass and the surface

Bass needs a large vibrating area. A large table can produce more bass than a small speaker cone of the same size, which is why vibration speakers can surprise people. But the surface also has its own resonances, so some notes boom while others disappear. That uneven sound is the trade-off.

The 20W claim

The title claims 20W. Power ratings on budget speakers are often peak figures rather than continuous output, and the page does not say which. Even a true 20W figure tells you little about loudness through a table, which depends on the surface. We have not counted it as a measure of performance.

“Award winning”

The headline says award winning. The page names no award, year or organisation. The pages that rank for SpatialSound Edge do not name one either, and our search found awards for other products with “Edge” in the name, not this speaker. What to do: ask the seller which award it won; if they cannot say, ignore the claim.

Vocals versus music

Speech tends to sound clear through a wooden surface, because voices sit in the middle of the frequency range. Music with deep bass and sharp highs shows the limits more, with some notes booming and cymbals softened. For podcasts and radio, a vibration speaker can be surprisingly pleasant.

Battery life

The page says it has a built-in battery but gives no hours. Vibration drivers use more power at high volume, so expect battery life to drop sharply when you turn it up. Ask the seller for a figure before buying.

Noise for neighbours

Vibration speakers shake furniture, and that vibration can carry through floors and walls more than airborne sound. In a flat, a speaker on a shared wall or a wooden floor can travel further than you expect. Keep the volume down at night.

The pages that rank for SpatialSound Edge are affiliate articles describing it as innovative and citing reviews from many platforms without links. We could not verify those claims and have not relied on them.

On 6 October 2026, one SpatialSound Edge cost $99, with the five-pack at $297 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered an FM radio add-on for $9, a remote controller for $14, a USB car charger for $7 and a 3-year warranty for $24. The page title already mentions a remote controller, so ask whether it is included before adding it.

SpatialSound Edge price and bundles

PackageTotalPer speaker1 SpatialSound Edge$99$99.002 SpatialSound Edge$159$79.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$197$65.674 SpatialSound Edge$249$62.255 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$297$59.40

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. One speaker is plenty for a novelty. You can check today’s packages on the SpatialSound Edge order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

The remote controller

The $14 remote controller image shows a small white remote with power, mode, mute, track, EQ, volume, number and scan buttons beside a black speaker printed with the Adin name. The page title describes the speaker as coming “with Remote Controller”, yet the remote is sold separately. What to do: ask support whether a remote is in the box.

The $14 remote control add-on image, showing an Adin-branded speaker. Image: SpatialSound

FM radio

For $9, the FM radio add-on lets you listen to radio on the speaker. Its image shows a telescopic aerial plugged into the top of the Adin-branded speaker. The main photo already shows buttons labelled for different modes, which on similar speakers often include radio. Ask what the add-on changes.

The $9 FM radio add-on image, with a plug-in aerial. Image: SpatialSound

USB car charger

The $7 car charger is a USB car adapter. If you already have one, skip it.

With the remote and FM radio, one SpatialSound Edge comes to $122, or $146 with the warranty. That is several times the price of the Anything Speaker. If the remote turns out to be included, you save $14, which is why asking first matters.

Warranty

The 3-year warranty costs $24, about a quarter of the price. The seller’s terms already cover defective goods for two years once you have a returns number.

The “regular price”

Add-ons are shown against crossed-out prices, and the page carries a countdown timer. We found no evidence that SpatialSound Edge sells at a higher regular price. Cylindrical vibration speakers of this design are sold under several names.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as panameedia.

SpatialSound EdgeScore 3.8/10

Best for: Gadget fans who enjoy experimenting with how different surfaces sound

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

For the vibration trick, Anything Speaker does the same job for $39.95, so it is the better value. SpatialSound Edge has a larger metal body and a claimed 20W, but no independent measurements back that up. For consistent sound wherever you put it, a conventional Bluetooth speaker from a known brand beats both.

SpeakerTypeClaimsPriceSpatialSound EdgeVibration, stands on surfaces20W, 360° sound, deep bass, “award winning”$99Anything SpeakerVibration, sticks to surfaces”300% louder” claims we found overstated$39.95 in our reviewWaterBOOM 360Conventional shower speakerWaterproof claim with no rating$49Conventional Bluetooth speaker from a known brandCone driversPublished battery and water ratingsVaries

SpatialSound Edge vs Anything Speaker

Our Anything Speaker review covers a pocket vibration speaker that turns a table or window into the speaker. We found it fun and genuinely different, with louder claims that oversold it, and scored it 5.4. SpatialSound Edge does the same thing with a bigger body at more than twice the price. That is the clearest case where a rival wins.

SpatialSound Edge vs buying the original brand

If SpatialSound Edge is an Adin speaker under another name, as the add-on photos suggest, the original may be sold by other retailers with a manual, local returns and a known model number. Search for the brand name and compare the price and return terms before you order.

SpatialSound Edge vs a conventional speaker

A good conventional Bluetooth speaker sounds the same on a table, a shelf or a picnic blanket, and brands publish battery life, water ratings and sometimes frequency response. If you want music rather than a trick, that predictability matters.

SpatialSound Edge vs the WaterBOOM 360

Our WaterBOOM 360 review covers a cheap round speaker from the same checkout. It is a conventional speaker for the shower, with no water rating, at $49.

SpatialSound Edge vs headphones

For personal listening, headphones avoid disturbing anyone else, and noise-cancelling pairs block background noise. Our ActivBeat 2.0 review covers over-ear ANC headphones from the same seller. Browse our audio reviews for more.

If you want a vibration speaker with a bigger body, you can see today’s bundles on the SpatialSound Edge offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

SpatialSound EdgeScore 3.8/10

Why people buy it: Turns a table, desk or cabinet into part of the speaker, which is fun to experiment with

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

SpatialSound Edge is a real product from a named seller, and a speaker should arrive if you order. Before buying, ask which award it won and whether a remote is included, switch from the five-pack, note the card statement name and remember that return postage is yours to pay.

Ask about the award and the remote

What to do: email support@g63com.com and ask which award the speaker won, whether a remote and a line-in cable come in the box, and what the battery life is. Keep the reply.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $297 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one speaker before you enter your details.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as panameedia. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: note the statement name, and read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. A speaker that works but sounds thin on your furniture may not count as defective.

What to do: try it on several surfaces in the first week, and contact support at once if it fails.

Delivery and support

The seller ships from overseas and gives no delivery estimate. What to do: save your order email, and if nothing arrives within three weeks, ask support for tracking.

How to buy SpatialSound Edge the smart way

  1. Ask support about the award, the remote and the battery life.
  2. Open the SpatialSound Edge order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to a single speaker.
  4. Add the remote only if one is not included; skip the car charger.
  5. Note the card statement name, panameedia, and save your order email.
  6. Test it on wood, glass and a cupboard door in the first week.

SpatialSound Edge scores 3.8 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.5, build durability 1.1, price competitiveness 0.6, usability 1.1 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. The vibration effect is real and the metal body looks solid. The score falls for an unnamed award, 360° and bass claims that depend on your furniture, a remote mentioned in the title but sold separately, add-on images showing another brand and a price more than double a near-identical rival.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.5 / 2″Award winning” unnamed; 360° and deep bass depend on the surfaceBuild durability1.1 / 2Metal cylinder body; battery life and driver durability not statedPrice competitiveness0.6 / 2$99 against a $39.95 vibration speaker doing the same jobUsability1.1 / 2Bluetooth and buttons; sound varies with placementOwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings; ranking pages are promotionalTotal3.8 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for SpatialSound Edge by that name. Owners of similar cylindrical vibration speakers on large retail sites tend to enjoy the effect on wooden furniture and complain that it sounds weak on other surfaces, that it buzzes at high volume and that it creeps across smooth tables as it vibrates.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used SpatialSound Edge. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with our earlier Anything Speaker review and the pages that rank for SpatialSound Edge. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Stand SpatialSound Edge on a hollow wooden surface, away from walls you share with neighbours, keep the volume below the point where it buzzes, and move it around until you find the best spot. A cupboard door, a wooden desk or a large table usually sounds best. Avoid soft furniture, and keep it away from the edge, since vibration can make it creep.

  1. Try several surfaces. Desk, table, cupboard, shelf: each sounds different.
  2. Hollow beats solid. Furniture with a cavity underneath tends to sound fuller.
  3. Keep it upright and stable. The base must sit flat to pass vibrations.
  4. Avoid the edge. Vibration can walk the speaker across smooth surfaces.
  5. Turn it down if it buzzes. Buzzing means the surface or speaker is overdriven.
  6. Use line-in for TVs. A cable avoids Bluetooth delay with video.
  7. Charge it after use. Keep the battery topped up rather than running it flat.

Finding the sweet spot

Place the speaker in the middle of a table first, then try nearer the corners. The middle of a panel usually vibrates most freely, while corners and legs are stiffer. On a cupboard, the side panel or top often sounds better than the door. Spend five minutes moving it around; the difference can be large.

Pairing it with a laptop

For desk use, pairing over Bluetooth or plugging in with a line-in cable both work. A cable avoids Bluetooth delay when watching video and means you do not need to charge the speaker as often if a USB power cable can run alongside.

Protecting furniture

Vibration over long periods can loosen items on shelves and, rarely, mark soft finishes. Put a thin coaster under the base if you are worried about scratches, though it may soften the sound a little.

Cleaning

Wipe the metal body with a dry or slightly damp cloth. Keep the contact pad on the base free of dust and grit, which can reduce the transfer of vibration and scratch furniture.

Storing it

Store it upright in a dry place. If you will not use it for a while, charge it to about half first, as lithium batteries left flat for months can lose capacity.

Avoiding rattles

Objects resting on the same surface can rattle in time with the music. Clear the table or move the speaker to a spot with nothing loose nearby.

Glass and windows

Glass can sound loud but harsh. Do not stand the speaker on thin or cracked glass, and never at full volume on glass shelves.

Using it with a TV

Bluetooth adds a slight delay that can make speech look out of sync with lips. The line-in socket shown in the photos avoids this. Check what cable comes in the box.

If it will not pair

Turn Bluetooth off and on, forget the speaker in your phone’s settings, charge it fully and try again. If it still will not connect, contact support inside the 30-day window.

SpatialSound EdgeScore 3.8/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about whether they damage furniture, how loud they get and whether they work on glass or walls. They rarely damage sturdy furniture at sensible volumes, loudness depends on the surface, and glass and hollow walls can work but sound harsher. A cupboard or wooden desk is usually the sweet spot.

Can vibration speakers damage furniture?

At normal volumes on sturdy furniture, damage is unlikely. Fragile items, loose joints and thin glass are at more risk. Keep the volume moderate and check for rattles.

Do they work on walls?

Some vibration speakers stick to surfaces with a pad, so they can be used on walls or windows. SpatialSound Edge is shown standing upright, so it is designed for horizontal surfaces.

How loud are vibration speakers?

On a good surface, loud enough for a room. Loudness and quality vary so much with the surface that comparing figures between products is not very useful.

Can two vibration speakers play in stereo?

Some vibration speakers can pair two units as left and right channels. The SpatialSound Edge page does not mention stereo pairing. If you want stereo, ask the seller before buying two.

Do vibration speakers work outdoors?

Only on a solid surface such as a wooden picnic table or a deck. On grass, sand or a blanket, there is nothing to vibrate, and the sound is very weak. A conventional outdoor speaker with a water rating is a better choice outside.

What is the difference between vibration and bone conduction?

Bone conduction headphones pass vibration through the bones of your skull to your inner ear. Vibration speakers pass it into furniture, which then makes sound in the air. They share the idea of vibration, but they are different products for different jobs.

Are vibration speakers good for parties?

As a talking point, yes. For dancing in a large room, a conventional speaker with a stated output and good bass is more reliable.

How does a vibration speaker work?

Instead of pushing air with a cone, a vibration speaker shakes the surface it stands on. A wooden table or cabinet then vibrates and radiates sound, acting like a large soundboard. Results vary with the material: hollow wood can sound fuller, while soft or heavy surfaces absorb the vibrations.

Is SpatialSound Edge really award winning?

The page calls it award winning but names no award, organisation or year, and we found none. Pages that rank for the product do not name one either. Treat the phrase as marketing until the seller can say which award it won.

How much does SpatialSound Edge cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one SpatialSound Edge for $99, two for $159, three (two plus one free) for $197, four for $249 and five (three plus two free) for $297, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. A remote cost $14, FM radio $9 and a 3-year warranty $24.

Does SpatialSound Edge have good bass?

Vibration speakers can sound surprisingly full on the right surface, because a large table radiates more low sound than a tiny speaker could. But bass depends on the furniture, not just the speaker. On a hollow wooden cabinet it may impress; on stone, glass or a sofa it will be thin.

Is SpatialSound Edge better than Anything Speaker?

It does the same basic trick, turning a surface into a speaker, for more than double the price. Anything Speaker cost $39.95 when we reviewed it. SpatialSound Edge has a bigger metal body and claims 20W, but there are no independent measurements of either.

Can you use SpatialSound Edge as a normal speaker?

Most vibration speakers of this design also make some sound when held in the air, but much less. They are designed to stand on a surface. If you want a speaker that sounds the same everywhere, a conventional Bluetooth speaker is the better choice.

Is SpatialSound Edge legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are the unnamed award, the 360° and bass claims, add-on photos showing another brand, the five-pack flagged as best seller and return postage at your cost.

Do Chin Straps Work? · Top10Gadgets

Only if you snore with your mouth open and have ruled out sleep apnoea, and even then a cheaper strap does the same. Snore Strap is a neoprene chin strap that holds your mouth closed so you breathe through your nose, and for a mouth-breathing snorer it is a simple thing to try. But a 2014 sleep study found a chin strap alone did not improve snoring, the “jaw dislocation” claim has no support, and $49 is a lot for a strap of this kind. Snore Strap scores 3.7 out of 10, held back by weak evidence and price.

  • What it is: a black and blue neoprene strap that goes under the chin and over the head to keep the mouth closed during sleep.
  • Price: $49 for one on 6 October 2026, with a five-pack for $135 flagged as the best seller.
  • Best trait: simple, drug-free and easy to try.
  • Biggest drawback: chin straps alone did not improve snoring in a sleep study, and the price is high.
  • Our score: 3.7 out of 10.

A chin strap is one of the simplest snoring aids there is. Its strengths are simplicity and comfort. Its weaknesses are evidence and value, plus a medical claim about the jaw that it cannot back up.

What we like

  • Simple, drug-free and nothing goes in your mouth or nose
  • Soft neoprene with an adjustable fastening
  • May help people who snore only with their mouth open
  • Some CPAP users wear chin straps to stop air escaping through the mouth
  • Easy to try for a few nights

What we don’t

  • A 2014 sleep study found a chin strap alone did not improve snoring or sleep apnoea
  • ‘Supports with jaw dislocation problem’ is a medical claim with no evidence on the page
  • At $49, it costs several times more than similar neoprene chin straps
  • Hypoallergenic treatment and extra jaw support are sold as add-ons
  • Can feel hot, and may be uncomfortable for people with a blocked nose
  • Return postage to an overseas seller is yours to pay

Snore Strap is a band of soft neoprene with a wide cradle for the chin and two straps that go up past the ears and over the top of the head, held by a hook-and-loop fastening. When it is on, it holds the lower jaw up so the mouth stays closed. The idea is that you then breathe through your nose, and snoring caused by an open mouth, where the jaw drops and the tongue falls back, eases.

The strap worn while sleeping. Image: Snore Strap

  1. Fit it under your chin

    Step 1: Place the wide part of the strap under your chin and bring the straps up and over the top of your head, with your ears through the openings.

  2. Adjust the tension

    Step 2: Tighten the fastening so your mouth stays gently closed. It should be snug, not tight enough to clench your teeth.

  3. Breathe through your nose

    Step 3: With your mouth held closed, you breathe through your nose, which can reduce snoring that comes from mouth breathing.

The page title lists “stop snoring, natural snoring stopper, non-invasive snore stopper, anti snoring aid”. The six bullets promise a comfortable, effective way to stop snoring, better sleep for you and your partner, waking refreshed without fatigue, easy daily use, support with jaw dislocation problems and safe, high-quality materials. It gives no sizes, material details, care instructions or evidence.

Who it might help

Snoring happens when tissues in the throat, mouth or nose vibrate. If your snoring stops when your mouth is closed, for example when a partner nudges your jaw up, a chin strap might help. If you snore with your mouth shut, the noise comes from somewhere a strap cannot reach.

What it cannot do

A chin strap does not open a blocked nose, does not hold the airway open the way a mouthpiece that moves the jaw forward does, and does not treat sleep apnoea. If your nose is blocked, holding the mouth closed can make breathing harder.

Snore Strap could suit a person whose snoring is clearly linked to sleeping with the mouth open, who has no signs of sleep apnoea and a clear nose, and who wants something simple to try. CPAP users whose clinic suggests a chin strap to stop mouth leaks are another group, though that is for the clinic to decide.

  • People whose partner says they snore only with their mouth open
  • CPAP users whose clinic has suggested a chin strap to stop mouth leaks
  • Anyone who wants a cheap, simple thing to try after ruling out sleep apnoea

Mouth breathers

If you wake with a dry mouth and your partner says you snore with your mouth open, a strap is a reasonable experiment. Record a few nights of snoring with a free app first, then a few nights with the strap, and compare.

CPAP users

People on CPAP with a nasal mask sometimes lose air through the mouth, which dries the mouth and reduces the treatment’s effect. A chin strap can help in that situation. Ask your sleep clinic, which may suggest a different mask instead.

Partners of snorers

Partners often buy snoring aids. A strap only helps if the snorer agrees to wear it and if the snoring is mouth-related. Earplugs for the partner, which the NHS also suggests, help on every night regardless.

Travellers

A strap packs flat and weighs almost nothing. If you snore more when tired or after a long flight, it is easy to take along.

People with beards

A thick beard can make the strap slip and feel scratchy against neoprene. Some bearded users find fabric straps more comfortable. Adjust the fit so the chin cradle sits under the beard, not on it.

Older adults

Snoring often gets worse with age as throat muscles relax. Sleep apnoea also becomes more common, which makes a check with a doctor more important before relying on any gadget.

Who should skip it

Skip Snore Strap if you have any sign of sleep apnoea, a blocked nose, jaw pain or jaw locking, or if you want the snoring aid with the best evidence.

  • Anyone with signs of sleep apnoea: pauses in breathing, gasping or heavy daytime sleepiness
  • People with a blocked nose, who need to breathe through the mouth
  • Anyone with jaw pain, jaw locking or dislocation, who needs a dentist or doctor
  • Buyers who want the option with the best evidence for snoring

The best evidence says chin straps alone do not. A 2014 study in the Journal of Clinical Sleep Medicine tested a chinstrap on 26 adults with sleep apnoea during sleep studies and concluded that a chinstrap alone is not an effective treatment: it did not improve sleep-disordered breathing and was ineffective in improving snoring. Some mouth breathers may still notice a difference, but expect modest results at best.

What the study found

The 2014 study by Bhat and colleagues, published in the Journal of Clinical Sleep Medicine, used a split-night sleep study: patients wore only a chinstrap for the first part of the night, then had CPAP. The authors concluded that a chinstrap alone did not improve breathing during sleep, including in REM sleep or on the back, and did not improve snoring.

What this means for you: a chin strap is a low-cost experiment, not a solution with evidence behind it.

Why it might help some people

Closing the mouth encourages nose breathing and stops the jaw falling open, which can reduce one type of snoring. People differ, and some report quieter nights. The study involved people with sleep apnoea, so results may differ in simple snorers, but the evidence still does not support strong claims.

“Wake up refreshed without fatigue”

Waking tired can have many causes, including sleep apnoea, poor sleep habits, stress and illness. A chin strap is not shown to fix any of them. If you are often exhausted despite a full night in bed, see a doctor.

“Supports with jaw dislocation problem”

This is a medical claim about the temporomandibular joint, where the jaw meets the skull. Jaw locking or dislocation needs assessment by a dentist or doctor. The page offers no evidence that a snoring strap helps, and the $9 “extra anti jaw dislocation” add-on adds reinforcement with no explanation of what it does.

Different kinds of snorers

Mouth snorers, nose snorers, back sleepers and people with sleep apnoea all snore for different reasons. A simple test: try to make a snoring noise with your mouth closed. If you cannot, your snoring may be mouth-related, and a strap is worth a try. If you can, the noise is coming from further back, where a strap will not help.

Placebo nights

Snoring varies from night to night. A quiet night after a new gadget can be chance, especially after a sober, well-rested day. Recording several nights with and without the strap is the only fair test.

What the NHS suggests

The NHS snoring page lists self-help steps: lose weight if overweight, sleep on your side, avoid smoking and too much alcohol, and do not use sleeping pills. It mentions devices such as mandibular advancement devices, chin straps and nasal dilators among options, and says to see a GP if you have daytime sleepiness, breathing that stops and starts, or gasping.

On 6 October 2026, one Snore Strap cost $49, with the five-pack at $135 flagged as the best seller. The checkout offered an antiperspirant, anti-allergy hypoallergenic treatment for $4, extra jaw support for $9, a SenseSleep pillow for $39 and a 3-year warranty for $9. Neoprene chin straps of this design are widely sold for much less.

Snore Strap price and bundles

PackageTotalPer strap1 Snore Strap$49$49.002 Snore Strap$69$34.503 (buy 2, get 1 free)$98$32.674 Snore Strap$123$30.755 (buy 3, get 2 free), best seller$135$27.00

Prices are in US dollars as listed on 6 October 2026. One strap is enough to test. You can check today’s packages on the Snore Strap order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

Hypoallergenic treatment

For $4, the strap gets an “antiperspirant” and “anti-allergy hypoallergenic” treatment against dust mites and skin irritation. The image shows two green badges for anti-bacterial and anti-dust mite. If you react to neoprene, a fabric strap or a different approach may suit you better than a treated one.

For $9, “extra anti jaw dislocation” adds reinforcement. The image shows the strap on its own, black with blue edging and two ear openings. There is no description of how it differs.

The strap, from the extra jaw support add-on image. Image: Snore Strap

The SenseSleep pillow

For $39, shown as reduced from $99, the checkout adds a SenseSleep pillow, a mesh-covered adjustable pillow. Our SenseSleep review found its height layers, pillowcase and anti-allergy treatment sold as add-ons and no foam certification named, and scored it 3.7. A side-sleeping pillow can help positional snoring; this one is not the obvious choice.

The SenseSleep pillow offered at checkout for $39. Image: Snore Strap

Warranty

The 3-year warranty costs $9. The seller’s terms already cover defective goods for two years once you have a returns number. A neoprene strap rarely fails in a way a warranty would cover.

The “regular price”

Add-ons are shown against crossed-out prices, with a countdown timer on the page. We found no evidence that Snore Strap sells at a higher regular price. Black neoprene chin straps with blue piping are sold by many sellers.

Who sells it

The order page names G Com Pte Ltd at 137 Market Street in Singapore, with the email support@g63com.com and a phone number. The footer gives the country as Hong Kong. The page code says charges appear on your card statement as Matrixfze, written in capitals.

Snore StrapScore 3.7/10

Best for: People whose partner says they snore only with their mouth open

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

No: a mandibular advancement mouthpiece has the best evidence of the devices sold to the public, and simple lifestyle changes come first. A chin strap is cheaper and less intrusive than a mouthpiece, which is its one advantage. For nose-related snoring, a nasal dilator or treating congestion helps more than a strap.

OptionHow it worksEvidencePriceSnore StrapHolds the mouth closedChinstrap alone ineffective in a 2014 sleep study$49SnoreRXAdjustable mouthpiece holding the jaw forwardFDA-cleared; mouthpieces have good evidence$59.99SleepLabChin EMS pulse when snoring is detectedNo published study$149SilentSnoreNasal clipMixed evidence for nasal dilators$49Side sleeping and lifestyle changesRemoves common triggersNHS self-help adviceFree

Snore Strap vs SnoreRX

Our SnoreRX review covers an FDA-cleared mouthpiece that moves the lower jaw forward to keep the airway open. It takes getting used to and can cause jaw ache at first, but it is the clearest case where a rival wins on evidence.

Snore Strap vs SleepLab

Our SleepLab review covers a chin EMS device from the same checkout at $149. Both work at the chin, and neither has good evidence. The strap is far cheaper and has no electronics.

Snore Strap vs a nasal clip

Our SilentSnore review covers a nasal dilator for nose-related snoring. If your nose is blocked, a strap that closes the mouth can make things worse; opening the nose is the better first step.

Snore Strap vs side sleeping

If you snore mainly on your back, a pillow behind you or a positional aid can help. That costs little and has a clear rationale. Our guide to the best sleep products ranks the sleep products that scored best.

If you snore with your mouth open and want to try a strap, you can see today’s bundles on the Snore Strap offer page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab).

Snore StrapScore 3.7/10

Why people buy it: Simple, drug-free and nothing goes in your mouth or nose

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Snore Strap is a real product from a named seller, and a strap should arrive if you order. Before buying, rule out sleep apnoea, make sure your nose is clear, ignore the jaw dislocation claim, switch from the five-pack, skip the pillow and note the card statement name.

Rule out sleep apnoea

What to do: if you or a partner notice pauses in breathing, gasping or choking, or you are very sleepy in the day, see a doctor before trying any snoring aid. The NHS says sleep apnoea can be serious if not treated.

Check your nose

What to do: if you often have a blocked nose, treat that first. Do not wear a strap that keeps your mouth closed when you cannot breathe easily through your nose.

Check the selected bundle

The five-pack for $135 is flagged as the best seller in the page code. What to do: change the order to one strap before you enter your details.

Card statement name and memberships

The charge appears as Matrixfze. Pages on this checkout have also carried text for a “Gadget Discount Club” membership that is free for 30 days and then billed. What to do: note the statement name, and read every checkbox and post-payment page.

Refunds and returns

The page code offers a 30-day guarantee for a full refund or replacement, less shipping and handling. The terms we recorded on 4 October 2026 focus on defective goods, which can be returned within two years once you have a returns number, with return postage at your cost. A worn strap may be hard to return for hygiene reasons.

Delivery and support

The seller ships from overseas and gives no delivery estimate. What to do: save your order email, and if nothing arrives within three weeks, ask support for tracking.

How to buy Snore Strap the smart way

  1. Rule out sleep apnoea and a blocked nose.
  2. Open the Snore Strap order page (opens G Com Pte Ltd in a new tab) and select your country.
  3. Change the five-pack to one strap.
  4. Skip the pillow and jaw add-ons.
  5. Note the card statement name, Matrixfze, and save your order email.
  6. Record your snoring for a week before and after.

Snore Strap scores 3.7 out of 10: claim accuracy 0.4, build durability 1.0, price competitiveness 0.5, usability 1.3 and owner satisfaction 0.5, each out of 2. It is a simple, comfortable strap that may help some mouth breathers. The score falls on a sleep study that found chin straps alone ineffective, an unsupported jaw dislocation claim, a high price for a common strap, add-ons for basic features and no independent ratings.

How the score breaks down

We use the five criteria on our how we test page, each out of 2.

CriterionScoreWhyClaim accuracy0.4 / 2″Stop snoring” and jaw dislocation claims not supportedBuild durability1.0 / 2Neoprene and hook-and-loop wear over monthsPrice competitiveness0.5 / 2$49 for a strap widely sold for lessUsability1.3 / 2Simple to put on and adjustOwner satisfaction0.5 / 2No independent ratings for this listingTotal3.7 / 10

What owners say

We found no Trustpilot profile for the gadgetxaura.com store and no retailer reviews for Snore Strap by that name. Owners of similar neoprene chin straps on large retail sites report mixed results: some mouth breathers say snoring is quieter, others say it slips off in the night, feels hot or does nothing.

What we did, and did not, do

Nobody on our team has used Snore Strap. We read the offer page our link opens and its page code on 6 October 2026, along with the 2014 chinstrap study, the NHS snoring page and the pages that rank for Snore Strap. The refund and returns terms are as we recorded them from the site’s terms page on 4 October 2026.

Wear Snore Strap only with a clear nose, adjust it so your mouth stays gently closed without clenching, and judge it over a week of recorded nights. Combine it with side sleeping and cutting evening alcohol. Wash it regularly, and stop if you find breathing harder or wake with jaw ache.

  1. Check your nose is clear. Treat congestion first.
  2. Fit it snugly. Mouth gently closed, teeth not clenched.
  3. Keep ears comfortable. Ears go through the openings, straps above them.
  4. Sleep on your side. It helps more than any strap for many snorers.
  5. Skip evening alcohol. Alcohol relaxes the throat and worsens snoring.
  6. Record a week. Compare with a week without the strap.
  7. Stop if it hurts. Jaw ache or difficulty breathing means take it off.

Washing it

Hand wash in cool water with mild soap, rinse and air dry. Avoid the tumble dryer, which damages neoprene and the fastening.

If it slips off

Adjust the top strap so it sits on the crown of your head, not the back. Some people find it stays better with hair tied back.

If it feels hot

Neoprene holds heat. A cooler bedroom helps. Fabric chin straps are another option if neoprene feels too warm.

Pairing it with a mouthpiece

Some people use a chin strap with a mouthpiece so the mouth stays closed over it. If you try this, check with your dentist that the combination is comfortable and does not strain your jaw.

When to stop

If snoring is no quieter after a week or two, the strap is not the answer for you. Try a different approach or talk to a doctor or dentist about a mouthpiece.

Snore StrapScore 3.7/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Most questions are about mouth taping, sleep apnoea and comfort. Mouth taping is a popular alternative with limited evidence and some risks, chin straps do not treat sleep apnoea, and comfort depends on fit and a clear nose. For most snorers, side sleeping and less alcohol are the first things to try. Browse our sleep product reviews for more.

Is mouth taping better than a chin strap?

Both aim to keep the mouth closed, and evidence for both is limited. Tape can irritate lips and skin and is unsafe with a blocked nose. Ask a doctor before trying either if you have breathing problems.

Can a chin strap treat sleep apnoea?

No. The 2014 study found a chinstrap alone did not improve sleep-disordered breathing. Sleep apnoea needs medical assessment and treatment.

Can I wear it with glasses or a CPAP mask?

You will need to take glasses off for sleep anyway. With a CPAP mask, ask your clinic how to wear a strap with your mask type.

Does it fit everyone?

The page lists no sizes. Adjustable straps fit most adult heads, but very large or small heads may find it slips or pinches.

Does Snore Strap work?

It may help a little if you snore only with your mouth open, but evidence for chin straps alone is poor. A 2014 study in the Journal of Clinical Sleep Medicine found a chinstrap alone did not improve sleep-disordered breathing or snoring in 26 adults. A fitted mouthpiece has better evidence.

Can a chin strap help jaw dislocation?

The page says it supports jaw dislocation problems, but gives no evidence. Jaw locking or dislocation is a medical issue for a dentist or doctor, who may suggest specific splints or treatment. Do not rely on a snoring strap for it.

How much does Snore Strap cost?

On 6 October 2026, the offer page listed one Snore Strap for $49, two for $69, three (two plus one free) for $98, four for $123 and five (three plus two free) for $135, with the five-pack flagged as the best seller. Add-ons cost $4 to $39, and a 3-year warranty costs $9.

Are chin straps safe?

For most people, yes, if your nose is clear. If you cannot breathe easily through your nose, holding your mouth closed can make breathing harder. Do not use a chin strap if you have sleep apnoea that has not been assessed, a blocked nose or are unwell with a cold.

Should I use a chin strap with CPAP?

Some people on CPAP use a chin strap to stop air escaping through the mouth with a nasal mask. That is a decision for your sleep clinic, which may suggest a full face mask instead. A chin strap is not a substitute for CPAP.

What works better than a chin strap for snoring?

The NHS suggests losing excess weight, sleeping on your side, cutting alcohol and stopping smoking. Mandibular advancement devices, which hold the jaw forward, have the best evidence of devices sold to the public. See a doctor if snoring comes with pauses or gasping.

Is Snore Strap legit?

It is a real product sold by G Com Pte Ltd, which lists a Singapore address, email and phone number. The concerns are the weak evidence for chin straps, the jaw dislocation claim, a high price for a simple strap, add-ons for basic features and return postage at your cost.

Aerless Vacuum Bags Review (2026): Worth It? · Top10Gadgets

Yes, if bulky clothes are what fill your suitcase and you have weight allowance to spare. The Aerless Vacuum Kit pairs reusable 27-litre nylon bags with a pocket-sized rechargeable pump, so you can vacuum pack in a hotel room, not just at home, and owners describe the bags as thick and the seals as reliable. It scores 6.3 out of 10. The space saving is real but closer to the brand’s own “up to 60 percent” than the advert’s “three times”; compression does nothing for weight; and the written return terms are stricter than the “hassle-free” banner.

What is an Aerless vacuum kit? It is a travel packing kit: reusable 27-litre nylon vacuum bags with a zip and a one-way valve, plus a pocket-sized USB-C pump that sucks the air out. You fill a bag with clothes, zip it, pump it flat in under a minute, and pump it again for the trip home. No vacuum cleaner is needed.

  • A travel vacuum kit: 27-litre nylon bags with a one-way valve, plus a small USB-C rechargeable pump.
  • $69 for the pump and one bag, $89 with two, $129 with four and $159 with six on the offer page our link opens, with free shipping.
  • Best trait: vacuum packing anywhere, with no vacuum cleaner, in seconds per bag.
  • Biggest drawback: it saves space, not weight, and the “3X more” headline oversells it.
  • Our score: 6.3 out of 10, with the lowest marks for claim accuracy.

The kit itself is sensible. Vacuum bags have always worked; what put people off was needing a vacuum cleaner to pack for the trip home. A pocket pump solves that. The weak points are the claims around the product rather than the product: the space multiplier, the “pays for itself” maths and the return terms.

What we like

  • Pocket-sized, USB-C rechargeable pump compresses a bag anywhere, with no vacuum cleaner needed
  • Bags also work with a home vacuum cleaner for maximum compression
  • Owners describe thick, durable nylon and zips that hold the seal for the trip
  • 27-litre bags sized to fit backpacks, carry-ons and large cases
  • 100-day return window, longer than most travel gear

What we don’t

  • ‘Pack 3X more’ is the headline; the brand’s own product page says up to 60 percent
  • Compression saves space, not weight, so it will not get an overweight bag through as carry-on
  • Written return terms need unused items in the original packaging and charge a handling fee
  • Compressed bags are hard and flat, and delicate fabrics such as linen crease
  • One in five Trustpilot reviews is one-star, mostly about delivery, damaged parcels and refunds

Vacuum packing is simple physics. Clothes are mostly air; take the air out and they take up less room.

  1. Pack and zip the bag

    Step 1: You fill a 27-litre nylon bag with folded clothes, then close its double-track zip all the way with the slider; the seal has to be complete or air leaks back in.

  2. Pump the air out

    Step 2: The small rechargeable pump sits over the valve and draws the air out in seconds, or you can use the hose of a home vacuum cleaner for a harder squeeze.

  3. The valve holds the vacuum

    Step 3: A one-way valve keeps the air out once the pump is removed, so the bag stays flat in your suitcase until you open the zip at your destination.

Aerless suits you if your suitcase fills up long before it gets heavy. That usually means bulky clothes: down jackets, fleeces, sweaters, ski layers or a winter coat you need at the other end. It also suits travellers who move between hotels and want to repack quickly, and anyone who likes to seal worn clothes away from clean ones on the way home.

  • Travellers who run out of room before they run out of weight allowance
  • Anyone packing bulky clothes such as puffer jackets, sweaters or ski layers
  • People who want to keep worn clothes sealed away from clean ones on the way home
  • Hotel and hostel travellers without a vacuum cleaner to hand

Who should skip it

  • Anyone whose carry-on is already near its airline weight limit
  • Travellers packing mostly linen, silk or tailored clothes that crease
  • People who want an easy refund after trying the bags on a trip

The old problem with vacuum bags was the trip home. You could flatten everything with the vacuum cleaner before you left, but once you opened the bags in a hotel, there was no way to squeeze them down again. The Aerless pump is small enough to live in a jacket pocket and charges over USB-C, so the bags work in both directions.

The bags are well specified for travel. Each is 12 by 19 by 4 inches when full, about 27 litres, which is sized to fit standard luggage: Aerless suggests two for an 18-inch backpack, four for a 20-inch carry-on and eight for a 28-inch case. They are made of nylon the brand describes as anti-rip and waterproof, and they close with a zip track rather than a fold-over seal.

There is a tidiness benefit too. A sealed bag keeps clothes together, keeps a damp swimsuit or muddy boots away from everything else, and stops the smell of worn clothes spreading through your case on the way home.

Who gets the most from it

The travellers who gain most are the ones whose clothes are mostly air. Winter trips, ski holidays, hiking trips with fleece and down layers, and visits to cold places in summer clothes all fill a case with bulky, compressible items. For them, a vacuum bag can turn a checked case into a carry-on, or free up room for gifts on the way home.

Families gain too. Children’s clothes are small but numerous, and grouping each child’s outfits into one flat bag keeps a shared case organised. Backpackers who move every day or two benefit from the pump, because they repack constantly, and a bag that compresses in seconds saves time and temper.

The people who gain least are light packers who already travel with a small bag of thin clothes, and business travellers with suits and shirts that crease. For them, packing cubes or careful folding are better tools.

The emotional appeal, and why to check the maths

Much of the appeal of vacuum packing is the before-and-after moment: a fat bag of jumpers flattened to a slab. It is satisfying, and the sales page leans on it. The useful question is less “how flat does it go” and more “what does that let me do”: fit everything in a smaller bag, avoid a checked bag, or bring more home. If the answer is none of those, the kit is a nice-to-have rather than a must.

Aerless Vacuum KitScore 6.3/10

Best for: Travellers who run out of room before they run out of weight allowance

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Every Aerless kit includes one rechargeable pump; the difference is the number of bags. On 3 October 2026 the offer page listed one bag for $69, two for $89, four for $129 and six for $159, all with free shipping. Each nylon bag holds about 27 litres. The four-bag kit suits a week with a carry-on and has the best price per bag.

Every kit includes one pump; the difference is the number of bags. The images below are Aerless’s own.

Images: Aerless
SpecAerless Vacuum Kit, as sold on 3 October 2026Bag size12 x 19 x 4 in (30 x 48 x 10 cm), about 27 litresBag materialNylon, described as anti-rip, waterproof and odour-proofCapacityAbout 15 clothing items per bag, per AerlessPumpHandheld, USB-C rechargeable; works on the bags’ valveBattery claim15+ trips per charge; capacity not publishedAlso works withA home vacuum cleanerColoursGrey or orange on the brand storeDelivery4 to 10 business days in the US, per the brand FAQReturns100 days from delivery; written terms below

The offer page our link opens listed four kits, all with free shipping:

KitWhat’s includedPrice”Retail” shownVacuum Kit1 pump, 1 bag$69$1282 Vacuum Bag Kit1 pump, 2 bags$89$1874 Vacuum Bag Kit1 pump, 4 bags, 1 luggage tag$129$3546 Vacuum Bag Kit1 pump, 6 bags, 2 luggage tags$159$521

The aerless.com store charged the same for the kits on the same day, and also sells extra bags at $39 each, $69 for two or $119 for four, and the pump on its own for $39. The “retail” figures are reference prices; we have not seen the kits sold at them. A kit with one bag is $69, but the second and third bags cost just $20 each inside the bigger kits, which is why the four-bag kit is the sensible starting point for a carry-on.

Which kit to buy

Your tripSuggested kitWhyWeekend away with a backpack2-bag kit, $89Aerless suggests two bags for an 18-inch backpackA week with a carry-on4-bag kit, $129Four bags for a 20-inch carry-on, and the best price per bagTwo weeks or a ski trip with a large case6-bag kit, $159, plus extra bags if neededAerless suggests eight for a 28-inch caseTwo travellers sharing a case6-bag kitOne pump is enough for bothJust trying it1-bag kit, $69, or the 2-bag kitLowest outlay, but the most expensive per bag

You only ever need one pump, so for larger needs it is cheaper to buy the six-bag kit and add bags than to buy two kits.

Is the price fair?

Roll-up bags cost about $15 to $30 for a set and household vacuum bags about $20 to $40, so Aerless is the premium option. What the extra money buys is the pump, luggage-sized bags with zips, and the ability to compress again away from home. At $129 for four bags and a pump, the four-bag kit is roughly $25 to $30 per bag once you value the pump at its $39 standalone price, which is reasonable for sturdy travel bags. The one-bag kit at $69 is poor value by comparison.

The pump: what we know and what we do not

Aerless says the pump is handheld, charges over USB-C, and lasts more than 15 trips’ worth of packing on a charge. It does not publish the battery capacity, the airflow, or how long a single bag takes in seconds on its own pages beyond “in seconds”. Its FAQ advises pausing between bags so the motor does not overheat. Some Trustpilot reviewers found the pump weaker than they hoped and used a home vacuum cleaner at home, which still works with the bags. In short, treat the pump as a convenient travel tool rather than a match for a household vacuum.

The bags: material, zip and valve

The bags are nylon, which Aerless describes as anti-rip, waterproof and odour-proof, and they close with a double-track zip operated by a slider rather than a fold-over seal. A one-way valve on the face of the bag lets the pump or a vacuum hose draw air out and stops it coming back in.

The weak points of any vacuum bag are the zip, which must be fully closed along its length, and the valve, which can let air back in if grit gets under its seal. Owners on Trustpilot mostly praise the bags’ thickness, and the main bag-related complaint is damage in transit rather than failure in use.

How to buy Aerless the smart way

  1. Decide how many bags your luggage needs. Aerless’s own guide is two for a backpack, four for a carry-on and eight for a large case.
  2. Open the Aerless offer page (opens Aerless in a new tab) and pick the kit that matches; for a carry-on, that is the four-bag kit at $129.
  3. Check the total before paying. Shipping was free on all four kits on 3 October 2026.
  4. When the parcel arrives, inspect every bag for cuts straight away. Missing or damaged items must be reported within 14 days of delivery, per the brand FAQ.
  5. Try one bag at home first and keep the rest, and the packaging, untouched until you are sure; the written return terms ask for unused items.

Less than the headline and more than nothing. The offer page says “pack 3X more”, and that a single bag holds “15+ extra items”. Aerless’s own store page is more careful: it says the bags “save up to 60% space”, and its product diagram shows a full bag about 10 inches thick pressed down to about 2 inches. Both cannot be the general rule, and the store’s figure is the safer one to plan around.

Aerless’s own figures: 15 items, 60% more space. Image: Aerless

How much you gain depends on what you pack. Down jackets, fleeces and chunky knits are mostly trapped air and collapse dramatically. T-shirts lose a fair amount. Jeans, shirts and anything dense lose little. A case of winter clothes might really hold twice as much; a case of summer clothes will gain much less.

There is also a shape trade-off. A compressed bag is hard and flat, which owners say makes it awkward to fit around shoes and wash bags. Plan to pack the vacuum bags first and fit softer items around them.

Space saving by type of clothing

ClothingHow much it compressesNotesDown and synthetic puffer jacketsA lotMostly trapped air; the biggest winFleeces and chunky knitwearA lotBulky but light; ideal for vacuum bagsHoodies and sweatshirtsModerate to a lotThick cotton compresses wellT-shirts and base layersModerateWorthwhile in quantityJeans and trousersLittleDense fabric; little air to removeShirts and dressesLittle, and they creaseBetter folded loose or in cubesUnderwear and socksLittle to moderateOften better used to fill gaps

This is why “three times more” can be close to true for a bag of fleeces and far from true for a bag of jeans.

What Aerless’s own diagram shows

Aerless’s product diagram shows a full bag about 10 inches thick compressed to about 2 inches, holding about 15 items. That is a fivefold reduction in thickness for that bag, but it describes a bag packed with compressible clothes, and it ignores the shape problem: a hard 2-inch slab does not always use the space in a case as efficiently as soft clothes that fill corners. Its store page’s “up to 60 percent space saved” is a more realistic planning figure for a mixed case.

Packing order in the suitcase

Lay the compressed bags flat in the bottom of the case first, like books. Put shoes, wash bags and other hard items along the sides and in the gaps, and fill remaining space with soft, uncompressed items such as underwear and socks. Keep the pump, chargers and liquids in your carry-on, not in the case.

When compression is not worth it

For a short summer trip with T-shirts, shorts and a pair of sandals, vacuum bags add effort for little gain. Thin clothes rolled or folded into packing cubes take nearly as little room and come out less creased. Save the bags for trips with bulky layers, or for bringing extra home.

Aerless Vacuum KitScore 6.3/10

Why people buy it: Pocket-sized, USB-C rechargeable pump compresses a bag anywhere, with no vacuum cleaner needed

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Yes, but compression saves space, not weight, so Aerless will not get an overweight bag past airline limits. The pump runs on a lithium battery and belongs in your hand luggage, under FAA rules. TSA allows vacuum-sealed clothes bags but says they are “allowed but not encouraged”, because security may open one, so a charged pump in your carry-on lets you compress it again.

Compression does not make clothes lighter. This is the catch in “pays for itself on the very first trip”. You save a checked-bag fee only if your packed carry-on still meets the airline’s size and weight limits. Most large US airlines limit carry-on size rather than weight, but many airlines elsewhere cap cabin bags at around 7 to 10 kilograms, and a densely vacuum-packed bag reaches that quickly. Weigh your bag at home; our explainer on whether vacuum bags make luggage lighter works through the numbers by airline.

The pump goes in your hand luggage. It runs on a rechargeable lithium battery, and the FAA’s rules say devices with lithium batteries should travel in the cabin, not in checked bags. Aerless says the pump is “TSA-approved”; the TSA does not certify gadgets like this, so read that as “allowed in carry-on under the battery rules”. The orange “Cargo Aircraft Only” sticker some buyers find on the parcel is a shipping label for batteries, according to the brand’s FAQ.

Security can open a vacuum bag. TSA allows vacuum-sealed clothes bags in carry-on and checked luggage but says they are “allowed but not encouraged”, because a bag that alarms may be opened, and an opened bag expands. A charged pump in your carry-on lets you compress it again at the gate; our guide to vacuum bags at TSA security covers how to pack so that rarely happens. If you check the case instead, a Travel Sentry lock keeps it closed after inspection; our KeySmart SmartLock review looks at one with an Apple Find My tracker built in.

Repack before the trip home. The point of the pump is that you can compress the bags again at your destination. Charge it before you leave; Aerless recommends 3 to 4 hours before first use.

Weight: a quick self-check

Before you rely on vacuum packing to avoid a checked bag, do this at home: pack your carry-on as you would for the trip, compressed bags included, and weigh it on a bathroom scale (weigh yourself holding it, then subtract your own weight). Compare that with your airline’s cabin allowance. If you are over, compression has done its job on space but not solved the problem; you need to take less, wear your heaviest items, or check the bag.

Bags at altitude

Bags can look slightly puffier during a flight, because cabin pressure is lower than on the ground, and settle back when you land. That is normal and does not mean the seal has failed. If a bag has puffed up noticeably after landing, re-pump it at your hotel.

Checked bags and overweight fees

Vacuum packing can make it easier to fit more into a checked case, which makes it easier to go over the checked-bag weight limit, often around 23 kilograms (50 pounds) for economy. Overweight fees can be larger than a second-bag fee. If you are bringing extra home, weigh the case before you leave for the airport.

Aerless is a real brand with a Trustpilot score of 3.9 from 464 reviews, but its written return terms are stricter than the “hassle-free” banner: the 100-day policy asks for unused items in their original packaging. Some claims, including a Red Dot Design Award, could not be verified. Order well before your trip, keep the packaging, and pay with a card that offers buyer protection.

None of these rule Aerless out. Each one changes how you should buy it.

The return terms are stricter than the banner. The offer page promises a 100-day money-back guarantee and “hassle-free” returns, and the FAQ says “no questions asked”. The written refund policy gives 100 days from delivery but asks for items to be unused, unworn and in their original packaging, says returns are subject to a handling fee, and warns that signs of use can affect a full refund. Returns start on the brand’s returns portal, and the return label expires after 20 days. Keep the box.

Several claims cannot be checked. The page says Aerless has “1,000,000+ happy customers”, “50,000+ 5-star reviews” and a Red Dot Design Award, and shows quotes attributed to People and Forbes. We could not find an Aerless entry among Red Dot award winners in a search, and the largest independent review profile we found, on Trustpilot, has 464 reviews. The “lifetime warranty” is a Limited Lifetime Warranty in section 21 of Aerless’s terms: it covers factory defects for the original buyer and excludes wear and tear, misuse and cosmetic damage, and Aerless chooses whether to repair, replace or give store credit.

Who you are buying from. The seller named in Aerless’s terms is Aerless LLC, 228 East 45th Street, New York, under New York law, so the “American company” line holds up, although its Trustpilot profile lists the Netherlands. Support is by email only. Our article Is Aerless legit? covers the company, the complaints and how to buy safely.

Delicate fabrics crease. Aerless says the bags prevent wrinkles. Owners say linen and similar fabrics crush. Keep tailored clothes and anything that creases easily out of the vacuum bags.

Hotel rooms and noise. The pump is a small motor, so it makes a short burst of noise for each bag. In a shared hostel room or late at night, pump your bags before others are asleep, or compress them at reception or in a common area.

Order well before your trip. The brand’s FAQ gives 4 to 10 business days for US delivery, and some Trustpilot reviewers say their parcel arrived after the trip they bought it for. Order at least two weeks ahead, and do not count on it arriving for a trip next weekend.

Check the parcel as soon as it arrives. The brand’s FAQ asks for missing or damaged items to be reported within 14 days of delivery, and one reviewer’s parcel arrived cut open with two bags damaged. Open the box, count the bags, and inflate-test one if you can, within the first few days.

Know what the warranty covers. The limited lifetime warranty covers factory defects for the original buyer, not wear and tear, misuse or cosmetic damage, and Aerless decides whether to repair, replace or give store credit. A bag punctured by a buckle on your trip will not be covered; a valve that never sealed should be.

Owners are mostly positive but sharply split. Its Trustpilot profile showed a TrustScore of 3.9 from 464 reviews on 3 October 2026, with 66 percent five-star and 20 percent one-star, and few in between. Trustpilot noted the company had not invited reviews recently, had replied to 65 percent of negative reviews, and pays for a Trustpilot subscription.

You can read the reviews on the Trustpilot profile for aerless.com.

The praise is about the product: thick, durable bags, a pump that works, and real gains with bulky clothes. One reviewer compressed a puffer coat and base layers small enough to carry in a backpack for a trip to Iceland.

The complaints are mostly about getting the product and getting money back: parcels arriving after the trip they were bought for, a parcel cut open in transit with two of four bags damaged, refunds taking weeks, replies that felt automated, and one reviewer who said a 50 percent return fee appeared only after the return was agreed. A smaller group says the pump was too weak and they used a home vacuum cleaner instead.

What the split reviews mean for you

The pattern, two-thirds five-star and one in five one-star with few in between, usually means a product that works well for most people, sold by a company whose delivery and returns let a minority down badly. That matches what the reviews say. You can reduce your risk from the second group: order early, check the parcel on arrival, keep the packaging, and start any return well inside the window.

What does Reddit say about Aerless?

Very little, so far. When we searched on 6 October 2026, Aerless itself barely came up on Reddit; the threads that rank for it are on r/onebag and are about its rivals, one asking whether the new Yoyovac vacuum bag is worth it and another asking Ekster owners how they rate theirs. Those are the same questions this review tries to answer: does a pump-and-bag kit save enough space to justify its price and the extra weight in your carry-on? Reddit’s one-bag travellers tend to pack light, thin clothes, which is exactly where vacuum bags help least, so read their scepticism in that light. The owner feedback with real volume is on Trustpilot, summarised above.

How we researched this review

Nobody on our team has used an Aerless kit yet, and this review does not claim otherwise. Every score on the site follows the five criteria on our how we test page. For this review we read the offer page our link opens, the aerless.com store product pages, refund policy and FAQ, and the Trustpilot profile, all on 3 October 2026. When we searched for Aerless reviews, the results were almost entirely Trustpilot pages and shop listings; no independent hands-on test ranked.

What we would test with a kit in hand

If we test Aerless ourselves, these are the questions we would answer: how much a typical carry-on of mixed winter and summer clothes actually gains; how many bags the pump compresses on one charge; how long bags stay flat over a two-week trip; how easy the zip is to close after repeated use; and how a return goes in practice. We will update this review with the results.

Reading the sales page claims

The sales page combines claims we could check, such as the bag size and prices, with ones we could not, such as the customer count, review count and award. A useful rule for any offer page: trust the specifications and the written policies, and treat round numbers of happy customers and press logos as marketing until you can see the source.

Aerless wins when you want maximum compression on both legs of a trip, because its pump works in a hotel room. Roll-up compression bags cost about $15 to $30 for a set and need no charging, but never get as flat. Compression packing cubes save less space but keep clothes organised and are kinder to creasable fabrics. Home vacuum storage bags need a vacuum cleaner to reseal.

OptionHow it compressesWorks away from homeTypical priceAerless Vacuum KitRechargeable pump on a valveYes$69 for one bag; $129 for fourEkster TravelPack Vacuum KitRechargeable pump on a valveYes$79 for one bag; $149 for fourRoll-up compression bagsYou roll the air out by handYesAbout $15 to $30 for a setCompression packing cubesA second zip squeezes the cubeYesAbout $30 to $60 for a setHome vacuum storage bagsHousehold vacuum cleanerNoAbout $20 to $40 for a set

Roll-up bags are the cheap alternative and save a useful amount of space, but they never get as flat as a pumped bag. Compression packing cubes save less space but keep clothes organised and are kinder to creasable fabric. Aerless wins when you want maximum compression on both legs of a trip; our comparison of vacuum bags, compression cubes and rolling covers what an independent test found. Our travel section will compare more of these as we review them.

Aerless vs Ekster: which is better?

They are near-identical on paper. Ekster’s TravelPack bag is listed at the same 12 by 19 by 4 inches, also in anti-rip nylon with a zip and valve, and its pump is also a small USB-C unit. The differences are in the buying: on 6 October 2026 Aerless was cheaper ($129 for four bags and a pump, against Ekster’s $149), while Ekster is the better-known brand, sells through retailers such as Luggage Pros as well as its own site, and showed a higher review score on its own page (4.5 from 842 reviews) and on Trustpilot. If price matters most, Aerless; if you want an easier return and a retailer to complain to, Ekster.

Two other names come up in the same searches. Yoyovac is a newer, larger bag (43.2 litres, sold in Japan through crowdfunding) with a stronger pump claim; it is not widely sold in the US yet. And plenty of cheap pump-and-bag sets sell on marketplaces for less; they work, but the bags are usually thinner and the pumps weaker.

Aerless vs roll-up compression bags

Roll-up bags have a one-way valve at the bottom; you roll the bag from the top to push the air out. They cost far less, need no charging and work anywhere. They do not get as flat as a pumped bag, rolling takes effort with bulky items, and some people find them hard to reseal on the way home. If you travel occasionally and want a cheap test of whether compression helps, try roll-up bags first.

Aerless vs compression packing cubes

Compression cubes are fabric packing cubes with a second zip around the middle that squeezes them smaller. They save less space than vacuum bags but keep clothes organised, breathe, crease less, and never lose their seal. Many travellers use cubes for everyday clothes and one or two vacuum bags for bulky items.

That combination is often the best of both: cubes for things you need to reach every day, and vacuum bags for bulky layers you only need at the destination or on cold days.

Aerless vs home vacuum storage bags

Household vacuum storage bags are cheap and compress very well with a vacuum cleaner, but they are usually too large for luggage and you cannot re-compress them away from home. Aerless’s bags are sized for luggage and its pump solves the return-trip problem; you can still use a home vacuum with them for the hardest squeeze before you leave.

Aerless vs packing less

The cheapest compression is leaving things at home. Planning outfits that mix and match, wearing your bulkiest coat and shoes on the plane, and doing laundry mid-trip all cut what you carry. Vacuum bags are most useful when you genuinely need bulky clothes, not as a way to bring everything.

Charge the pump fully, which takes 3 to 4 hours, before your first trip. Fold or roll clothes neatly, because creases set in once the air comes out, and leave a little room at the top so the zip closes without strain. Run the slider along both tracks, hold the pump firmly over the valve until the bag is flat, and pack the hard bags first.

Compressed bags in a suitcase. Image: Aerless

The short version is below; our step-by-step guide to using Aerless vacuum bags covers packing, stacking and fixes for bags that leak.

  1. Charge the pump fully, 3 to 4 hours, before your first trip.
  2. Fold or roll clothes neatly before they go in; creases set in when the air comes out.
  3. Leave a little room at the top so the zip closes without strain, then run the slider all the way along both tracks.
  4. Hold the pump firmly over the valve and keep its air inlet clear; pause briefly between bags so the motor does not overheat.
  5. Use bulky clothes in the vacuum bags and keep dense or delicate items loose around them.
  6. Weigh the packed bag before you leave, and pack the pump in your carry-on.
  7. The first time you unzip a compressed bag, pull the zip ring upward rather than sideways; Aerless says the seal is stiff at first.

What not to pack in a vacuum bag

Vacuum bags suit soft, dry clothes. Keep these out:

  • Liquids and toiletries. A leak spreads through everything in a sealed bag, and liquids follow their own security rules anyway.
  • Electronics, batteries and the pump itself. Keep them loose in your carry-on, where battery rules want them and where security can see them.
  • Damp or sweaty clothes for more than a day. Sealing in moisture invites mildew and smells; dry them first, or keep them separate.
  • Sharp or hard objects. Buckles, hangers and shoe heels can puncture the nylon when the bag is compressed around them.
  • Leather, suede and tailored clothes. Compression leaves creases that are hard to remove; linen and silk crease too.
  • Down jackets for long storage. A trip is fine, but outdoor brands generally advise against storing down compressed for months, because it can lose some loft. Unpack them at home.

Fixing a bag that will not stay flat

  • Check the zip first. Run the slider along both tracks again, pressing the zip closed with your fingers along its whole length; a gap of a few millimetres lets air back in.
  • Clean the valve. Lint or grit under the valve seal is a common cause of slow leaks; wipe it and press it down firmly.
  • Do not overfill. A bag stuffed to the top strains the zip and leaks; leave room so it closes easily.
  • Look for punctures. Hold a compressed bag near your ear and listen, or check for a spot that puffs first. Sharp items inside are the usual cause.
  • Re-pump if needed. Bags can be compressed again at any time, which is the point of carrying the pump.

Caring for the bags and pump

Empty the bags and let them air after a trip, especially if they held worn clothes. Turn them inside out if they smell, and leave them open overnight. Wipe the inside with a damp cloth if needed and dry fully before storing, so no moisture is sealed in. Store the bags flat or loosely rolled, not folded sharply at the zip. Keep the pump’s air inlet clear of lint, charge it before each trip, and store it partly charged rather than empty for long periods.

Using Aerless at home

The bags also work for storing out-of-season clothes and spare bedding at home, especially with a household vacuum. For long-term storage, keep down and wool out of compression or release them every few months, and make sure everything is clean and dry first. Bulky winter gear such as fleece throws compresses well too; our Chair Blanket review covers an outdoor chair cover that packs into its own bag.

Packing for the trip home

The trip home is where the pump earns its place. Use one bag as a laundry bag for worn clothes, compress it to keep smells in and save room for anything you bought, and keep a clean outfit loose for the journey. If you bought bulky souvenirs or gifts, compressing your clothes harder can make room, but weigh the case before you leave for the airport.

A sample winter carry-on

A typical approach for a week in the cold: wear your heaviest coat and boots on the plane; put two fleeces or sweaters in one bag, base layers and T-shirts in a second, a spare jacket or extra knitwear in a third, and use the fourth for worn clothes on the way home. Jeans, shoes and toiletries go loose around the bags. This uses Aerless’s own suggestion of four bags for a 20-inch carry-on and puts the most compressible items in the bags.

Travelling with children

Pack one bag per child, labelled with a luggage tag or marker, so you can find a full change of clothes without unpacking the whole case. Keep a spare outfit for each child loose and easy to reach, since a compressed bag is slow to open in a hurry at the airport.

Compressed bags are also handy for nappies and spare bedding for a travel cot, which are bulky but light. Keep anything you may need at short notice, such as a spare top for spills, out of the vacuum bags and in an outer pocket.

Aerless Vacuum KitScore 6.3/10

Before you buy: Check the final price, shipping and return terms at checkout.

We may earn a commission if you buy through our links.

Is Aerless worth it?

It is worth it if bulky clothes are what fill your bag and you have spare weight allowance, because the pump makes vacuum packing easy anywhere and owners describe sturdy bags. It is less worth it if your bag is already heavy, since compression saves space, not weight, or if you need a no-questions refund, because the written return terms require unused items.

Does Aerless really let you pack 3X more?

Not as a rule. The offer page says three times more, but Aerless’s own product page says up to 60 percent space saved, and its diagram shows a full bag about 10 inches thick pressed to about 2. How much you gain depends on the clothes: puffer jackets and knits shrink a lot, while jeans and shirts shrink much less.

Can you take the Aerless pump on a plane?

Yes, in your carry-on. The pump is a small battery-powered device, and under FAA rules devices with lithium batteries belong in the cabin rather than in checked luggage. Aerless calls it TSA-approved, but the TSA does not certify gadgets like this; the battery rules are what apply. Pack it in your hand luggage and keep it switched off.

Do Aerless bags wrinkle clothes?

Some, depending on the fabric. Aerless says controlled pressure prevents creasing, but owners note that compressed bags pack hard and that delicate fabrics such as linen crush. Rolling or folding clothes neatly before you pump helps, and hanging creased items in a steamy bathroom on arrival usually relaxes them.

How long do Aerless bags stay compressed?

As long as the zip and valve stay sealed; Aerless does not publish a figure. Owners describe bags staying flat for whole trips. A bag that slowly fills with air usually has a zip not closed along its full length or grit in the valve. Bags can look slightly puffier at altitude and settle on landing, and you can re-pump them at any time.

How long does the Aerless pump battery last?

Aerless says one charge lasts for more than 15 trips’ worth of packing and recommends charging for 3 to 4 hours before first use. It does not publish the battery capacity. Its FAQ also advises a short pause between bags so the motor does not overheat, and a home vacuum cleaner works with the bags if the pump runs flat.

Which is better, Aerless or Ekster?

They are very similar: both use 12 by 19 by 4 inch nylon bags with a zip and valve and a small USB-C pump. On 6 October 2026 Aerless was cheaper, at $129 for four bags and a pump against Ekster’s $149. Ekster has more reviews, a higher rating and sells through retailers as well as its own site.

Can you reuse Aerless vacuum bags?

Yes. They are reusable nylon bags with a zip, not single-use plastic, and you can compress and open them as often as you like. On a long trip of several months, the zip and valve are the parts that wear: keep grit out of the valve, close the zip along its full length, and keep sharp objects out of the bag.

Laptop Trade-In vs. Best Buy vs. Apple: Terms Compared (2026)

All three cover shipping, but the payout form, the quote window, and whether you can cancel are very different. A side-by-side comparison from each company’s own published terms.

The biggest difference between laptop trade-in programs is not the number on the
quote — it is what you are paid with, and what you give up to get it. Gadget
Salvation pays cash. Best Buy pays a gift card. Apple pays purchase credit or an
Apple Gift Card, and does not list Windows laptops at all. None of the three charges
you to ship the laptop in, so the terms that actually separate them are the quote
window, who is responsible for erasing your data, and whether you can change your
mind.

The three programs side by side

The Best Buy and Apple columns come from each company’s own published terms as of
October 2026.

Gadget Salvation
Best Buy
Apple

What you receive
Cash: check, PayPal, Venmo, or Zelle
“Payment is by Best Buy gift card”
Purchase credit or an Apple Gift Card

How long the quote holds
30 days
14 days to arrive, or the estimate may be revised or withdrawn
14 days from kit delivery, or the quote may be revised

Inbound shipping
Free prepaid UPS label
Free prepaid label, or walk into a store
Free prepaid kit, or drop-off instructions

If the offer changes at inspection
Accept it, or have the laptop returned free
An updated quote is issued
You are contacted to accept or decline

Can you cancel?
Any time, no questions asked
Not addressed in the terms
No — “final and cannot be cancelled” unless you decline a revised quote

If the laptop is worth nothing
Recycled responsibly at no cost to you
May be recycled without compensation; to get it back, you supply a prepaid return label
Free recycling

Data erasure
NIST-compliant wipe, drives reformatted during inspection
“your sole responsibility to remove all personal data”
“You are responsible”; neither vendor nor Apple is liable

To qualify
No account needed
18 or older (19 in Alabama and Nebraska) with state-issued ID
Age of majority, not a reseller, and the owner

Apple does not take Windows laptops

Start with eligibility, because it removes Apple from the running for most laptops.
Apple’s program lists Mac, iPhone, iPad, and Apple Watch, plus Samsung and Google
smartphones. A Dell, HP, Lenovo, ASUS, Acer, or MSI laptop is not listed. If you are
holding a ThinkPad or an XPS, Apple is not an option and the real comparison is
between a retailer gift card and cash.

When store credit is the better deal

Credit wins in one clear scenario: you are buying a replacement from that same
retailer, and the trade-in value comes straight off the purchase. At Best Buy you can
carry the laptop in, get an in-person appraisal, and walk out with credit the same
day, with nothing to ship and nothing to wait for. If a new Mac is already in your
cart, Apple credit applies to it directly.

When cash is the better deal

Cash wins everywhere else, and for three reasons beyond flexibility. The quote window
is 30 days rather than 14. Erasing the drive is handled for you, to NIST standards,
instead of being your liability. And the sale stays cancellable until you accept
payment — where Apple’s terms make the trade “final and cannot be cancelled” unless
you decline a revised quote. Details of the process are in our guide to
how a laptop trade-in works.

Frequently asked questions

Is Best Buy’s laptop trade-in better than selling for cash?

Only if you are buying from Best Buy anyway, because the payout is a gift card rather
than money. Under Best Buy’s published terms, erasing your data is your
responsibility, the estimate can be revised or withdrawn if the laptop does not arrive
within 14 days, and a laptop with no trade-in value may be recycled without
compensation unless you supply a prepaid return label.

Is Apple’s trade-in better than selling a Mac for cash?

Only if you are buying Apple hardware, because the payout is purchase credit or an
Apple Gift Card. Under Apple’s terms the trade is “final and cannot be cancelled”
unless you decline a revised quote, erasing your data is your responsibility, and the
quote can be revised if the device does not arrive within 14 days of kit delivery or
still has Find My enabled.

Can I trade in a Windows laptop at Apple?

No. Apple’s trade-in program lists Mac, iPhone, iPad, and Apple Watch, along with
Samsung and Google smartphones. Windows laptops from Dell, HP, Lenovo, and others are
not listed, so they cannot be traded in for Apple credit.

Which laptop trade-in pays the most?

None of the three publishes a payout table, so the only way to compare dollars is to
get a quote from each for your exact model and condition. Compare the form of payment
as well as the figure: a gift card worth slightly more than a cash offer is worth less
if you were not planning to shop there.

Get an instant cash quote for your laptop — free, no account needed,
and valid for 30 days.

Comparison figures are taken from the Best Buy Trade-In Terms and
Conditions,
the Apple Trade In terms, and
Apple’s Trade In page, and were accurate as of
October 2026. Retailer programs change; check the current terms before deciding.

6 Reasons to Switch From a Samsung Galaxy to an iPhone

Galaxy phones are excellent. That is exactly why this decision deserves real numbers instead of brand loyalty — so here are six specific, documented reasons US owners make the jump, plus the honest cases where you should stay put.

Let us get one thing out of the way first: the Galaxy S26 is a phenomenal smartphone. Samsung makes gorgeous displays, its zoom cameras still embarrass most of the competition, and One UI has quietly become one of the most customizable interfaces on any phone. Nobody really switches from a Galaxy due to a subpar product complaint.

People do switch for other reasons. For example, they want to see some iOS features on Android. Or they already own a Mac or an Apple Watch, so tightening the Apple ecosystem by getting an iPhone is the next logical step.

We sourced online reports, Apple’s documentation, and our own data to narrow down the main reasons users switch from Galaxy to iPhone. 

The short version

Six reasons US Galaxy owners move to iPhone, in one screen:

  • Update timing. iOS 27 reached every eligible iPhone on one day; One UI 9 is reaching Galaxy flagships in waves from September into October.
  • Resale value. iPhone 17 models held roughly 87–89% of launch price after about ten months; Galaxy S26 models held 66–68% after about four.
  • Ecosystem. An Apple Watch, a Mac handoff, or an AirDrop transfer all assume an iPhone is in your pocket.
  • Privacy defaults. Cross-app tracking requires permission on iOS, and you can turn the prompt off entirely.
  • Messaging. 87% of US teens own an iPhone, so in most American households the group chat is already there.
  • An easy exit. You can go from Android to iOS and vice versa in one step, and your used Galaxy is worth real money today, but not so much next year.

Reason #1: Software Rollout Takes Too Long

This is the reason most Galaxy owners feel before they can articulate it. Apple released iOS 27 on September 14, 2026, and it arrived that day on every compatible iPhone going back to the 2019 iPhone 11 models. One tap, one afternoon, and everybody is up to date.

Samsung’s equivalent release went out very differently. One UI 9, built on Android 17, went stable on July 22, 2026, but only for the Galaxy Z Fold 8 and Z Flip 8. The Galaxy S26 flagship line — a phone that went on sale in March 2026 — didn’t start receiving it until September 16. Samsung’s published roadmap puts the Galaxy S25 series and last year’s foldables on September 28, with older flagships such as the Galaxy S23 FE waiting until October. If you bought a Galaxy S24 in 2024, you’ll watch a version number arrive on other people’s phones for roughly a quarter of the year before it reaches yours.

Credit where it is due: on length of support, Samsung has caught up and, in some respects, passed Apple. Since the Galaxy S24, Samsung has promised seven generations of Android upgrades and seven years of security patches on its flagships, which carries the Galaxy S26 into 2033. Apple publishes no fixed lifespan, but in practice iPhones see roughly five to seven years of major iOS upgrades and seven to eight years of security updates, with some models patched a decade after launch.

The honest read: Samsung wins the promise, Apple wins the delivery. If you care about how many years your phone is covered, it is a tie. If you care about being current the week a feature ships, iPhone is not close.

Reason #2: Your Galaxy Depreciates Too Fast

A phone’s value does not equate to its store tag. It is the retail price minus whatever you can get back when you are done with it. And that second number is where the Galaxy line has historically struggled.   Using average sale prices from the US marketplace Swappa in mid-July 2026, BGR calculated retained value for 256 GB models of both lineups. The Galaxy S26 was holding 68.0% of its launch price, the S26 Plus 65.8% and the S26 Ultra 67.3% — after roughly four months on sale. The iPhone 17, launched a full year earlier in September 2025, was holding at 87.5%, the 17 Pro at 86.6% and the 17 Pro Max at 89.5%. The iPhone Air was the outlier at 71.0%, which is worth knowing if that is the model you had your eye on.

Read that again, because the age difference cuts against Samsung twice: the Galaxy phones were younger and had still shed more than 30% of their value, while three of the four iPhones had shed less than 15% in more than twice the time.

The trend line is more interesting than the snapshot, though. SellCell’s depreciation tracking shows iPhone value retention getting worse generation over generation — five-month depreciation climbed from 24.7% on the iPhone 13 to 35.4% on the iPhone 16 — while the Galaxy S line improved from 51.9% on the S22 to 46.6% on the S25. Samsung is closing this gap every year. It has not closed it yet.

What this means for your Galaxy

Faster depreciation is an argument for selling sooner, not for holding on. The months between deciding to switch and actually listing the phone are the most expensive months of its life. At Gadget Salvation, we price every device against the most current resale market data and quote case by case, and your offer is locked before you ship — so a slow week in the market after you hit send is our problem, not yours.

Get a number for your Samsung Galaxy before you buy, so you are shopping with the real figure in hand. And when the iPhone you are about to buy eventually has its own turn, we buy those too.

Timing matters more than most people expect. Our guide to when to sell a phone walks through the launch-cycle windows that move prices most.

Reason #3: The Rest of Your Gear is a Part of an Ecosystem

If there is no Apple hardware anywhere in your life, skip this one — it is worth nothing to you. But if there is a MacBook on your desk or an iPad on your couch, it may be worth more than the other five reasons combined.

Apple groups these behaviors under Continuity, and they are the kind of thing you stop noticing within a week and then cannot live without. Handoff lets you start an email on the phone and finish it on the Mac by clicking one icon in the Dock. Universal Clipboard means text or an image copied on one device pastes on another with no intermediate step at all. AirDrop moves a 400 MB video between two devices in seconds with no app, no account, and no upload. Continuity Camera turns the phone in your pocket into the webcam for your laptop.

The Apple Watch remains the industry benchmark for consumer health hardware, featuring FDA-cleared ECG readings, advanced sleep architecture tracking, and irregular rhythm notifications that integrate seamlessly with the iPhone Health app. But it does not work with Android at all. Per Apple’s setup documentation, pairing an Apple Watch Series 12 or Ultra 4 requires an iPhone 11 or later running iOS 27. For a lot of switchers, the watch is the actual trigger, and the phone is the purchase that makes it possible.

The counterweight is real, and you should hear it: this integration is also a fence. Every additional Apple device makes leaving more expensive, which is the mechanism working as designed. We have written about whether the Apple ecosystem is worth the long-term commitment, and the answer genuinely depends on how much of it you already own.

Reason #4: Taking Control of In-App Tracking

Since iOS 14.5, an app on an iPhone cannot follow you across other companies’ apps and websites without putting a box on your screen and asking. Apple calls it App Tracking Transparency, and the consequence of tapping “Ask App Not to Track” is concrete rather than cosmetic: the developer loses access to your device’s advertising identifier and is not permitted to track you using other identifying information such as your email address instead.

You can also skip the prompts entirely. Turning off “Allow Apps to Request to Track” in Privacy & Security settings treats every future request as a refusal, and Settings keeps a running list of which apps have asked so you can revoke permission later.

Be precise about what this is and is not. Android has its own privacy dashboard, permission controls, and ad-ID reset, and this setting does nothing about what an app collects inside itself or about what Apple and Google each do with their own data. What it changes is the default: on iOS, cross-company tracking starts switched off and has to earn its way in.

Reason #5: iPhone Has the Group Chat

 This reason is purely practical, and it is the one that actually decides things in American households. Piper Sandler’s fall 2025 Taking Stock With Teens survey, which polled 10,969 US teenagers, found 87% of them own an iPhone. That is not a preference; at that concentration it is the default social infrastructure of a whole age bracket, and it shapes which platform families, sports teams and group projects organize around.

Here is the fair part, and it is a genuine improvement: this gap has narrowed. iPhones now support RCS alongside SMS and MMS, so texting an Android user gets you read receipts, typing indicators, and higher-resolution photos instead of the compressed mess MMS used to deliver. Cross-platform texting in 2026 is a much smaller annoyance than it was in 2022.

What has not changed is the small stuff that adds up: mixed group threads still mark your Android contacts differently, and iMessage-specific features behave inconsistently across the divide. If you are the only green bubble in every chat you are in, you already know exactly how much that is worth to you.

Reason #6: The Switch Itself Stopped Being a Project

 The fear of losing eight years of photos and text history keeps more people on a platform than any feature does. That fear is now mostly obsolete.

Apple’s Move to iOS process runs during the new phone’s setup and moves contacts, message history, SMS messages, camera photos and videos, photo albums, files and folders, accessibility settings, display settings, web bookmarks, mail accounts, Voice Memos, call history and calendars. It also moves WhatsApp messages and media, which for a lot of people is the single most irreplaceable thing on the device. Free apps available on both stores are matched and re-downloaded automatically. You can run it over Wi-Fi or plug the two phones together with a USB-C cable for a faster transfer.

If your Galaxy runs a compatible version of Android 17, you do not even install the app: choose “Transfer without App” during setup, scan a QR code with the Galaxy, pick your data, and move your eSIM across in the same flow.

What does not come with you: music, books, and PDFs have to be moved manually, and any app you paid for on Google Play has to be bought again on the App Store. Price that second one out before you commit: for a heavy Android gamer, it can be the most expensive argument against the switch.

Side by Side, without the Marketing

Two tables, one per argument. The first is the whole comparison at a glance. The second is the resale math, because that is the number most people underestimate by several hundred dollars.

iPhone vs. Samsung Galaxy: where the difference shows upFactoriPhoneSamsung GalaxyLatest OS arrivaliOS 27 shipped to every eligible model on September 14, 2026, back to the 2019 iPhone 11.One UI 9 went stable July 22, 2026; Galaxy S26 on September 16, Galaxy S25 on September 28, older flagships in October.Stated support windowNo published lifespan; in practice about 5–7 years of major iOS upgrades and 7–8 years of security updates.Seven generations of Android upgrades and seven years of security updates on flagships from the Galaxy S24 onward.Retained value, 256 GBiPhone 17 87.5%, 17 Pro 86.6%, 17 Pro Max 89.5%, iPhone Air 71% Galaxy S26 68.0%, S26 Plus 65.8%, S26 Ultra 67.3% (Swappa averages, mid-July 2026).Smartwatch pairingApple Watch requires an iPhone; Series 12 and Ultra 4 need an iPhone 11 or later on iOS 27.Galaxy Watch pairs with Android phones, and Wear OS gives you a wider choice of brands.Cross-app trackingOff by default. Apps must show a prompt, and the whole prompt system can be switched off.Managed through Android privacy settings, permission controls, and a resettable advertising ID.Moving your data inMove to iOS carries messages, photos, call history, WhatsApp, and more; Android 17 can transfer data and eSIM with no app.Paid Google Play apps do not transfer; music, books and PDFs move manually.

4 Reasons to Keep the Galaxy 

We buy and resell both iOS and Android smartphones, so there’s no agenda to push you toward either platform. If switching makes your daily experience worse, it’s a bad switch, no matter what the data says. If any of the following applies to you, stick with what you already use.

You Use the Zoom Lens

If you shoot your kid’s games from the bleachers or photograph wildlife, the Ultra’s long telephoto reach is a hardware advantage that no amount of computational processing replaces. Switching would be a downgrade in the one thing you actually use the camera for.

You Have Customized Your Phone Into a Tool

Good Lock modules, custom launchers, sideloaded apps, deep automation, DeX on an external display — iOS has loosened up but it does not go this far. If your Galaxy does things you built yourself, iOS will feel like a smaller room.

You Want a Folding Phone (Although, Apple Now Has One)

Yes, yes, the iPhone Duo is hitting the stores as we write this. But Samsung has been in the foldable game for years, polishing the Z Fold and Z Flip lineup and working through the issues Apple is only about to encounter.

Your Galaxy is Less Than 2 Years Old and Working Fine

Nothing here is worth eating a fresh round of depreciation on a phone with five good years of updates left in it. The resale argument is a reason to switch well when you switch, not a reason to switch today.

Still weighing it? Our breakdown of iOS and Android alternatives covers what each platform gives up, and our Galaxy S26 upgrade analysis makes the case for staying in Samsung’s lineup.

Don’t Let Your Galaxy Die in a Drawer

The most common ending for a switched-from phone is a junk drawer, where it quietly loses the rest of its value over eighteen months and then gets thrown out. That is the one outcome that is bad for everybody.

The EPA is direct about the hierarchy: preventing waste comes before recycling, and passing a still-working device on for reuse extends its life and keeps it out of the waste stream longer. The agency also cites a US Geological Survey estimate that every million cell phones recycled recovers about 35,000 pounds of copper, 772 pounds of silver, 75 pounds of gold, and 33 pounds of palladium. A working Galaxy S24 is not waste. It is somebody’s next phone.

5 Things to Do, in This Order

  1. Finish the transfer first. Do not reset anything until the new iPhone is set up and you have confirmed your photos, messages, and WhatsApp history actually made it across.
  2. Get a quote while you still have both phones. Prices move with the market and with the calendar; a number you got last spring is not a number you have today.
  3. Sign out of your Google and Samsung accounts. This is the step people skip, and it is the expensive one. Factory Reset Protection leaves a wiped phone locked to your old account, which makes it unsellable until you release it.
  4. Remove the SIM or move the eSIM. If you transferred your eSIM during iPhone setup, confirm the line is live on the new phone before the reset.
  5. Factory reset from Settings. Then ship it. Our step-by-step guide to wiping a phone before selling it covers the exact menus, and our data erasure protocols explain what happens to anything left behind once a device reaches us.

Before you buy the iPhone

Find out what the Galaxy is worth

Pick your model, answer a few questions about its condition, and get a quote priced against current resale market data. Your offer is locked before you ship, shipping is on us, and you get paid once we confirm the condition — no listings, no lowball messages, no meeting a stranger in a parking lot.

Value my Galaxy See how it works

Not ready to part with it yet? Compare your options first in where to sell a used phone.

The Verdict

Making the switch from a Galaxy to an iPhone isn’t just about changing user interfaces. It is an investment in slower gadget depreciation, tighter privacy controls, refined app performance, and hassle-free long-term support. While Galaxy phones offer deep customizability, the iPhone wins the long game of real-world usability and total value retention. And finally, when you are ready to sell your used smartphone, be it an iPhone, Galaxy, or some other brand entirely, Gadget Salvation will be here, ready to quote you in seconds and pay within 1 day of delivery!

Hearing tech startup Legato launches its AI hearing glasses

Hearing tech startup Legato announced on Thursday that its flagship AI-based hearing glasses are now available for purchase. The glasses, called Legato Frames, integrate the company’s patented hearing-assistance technology into the arms of eyewear frames. Starting at $999, Legato Frames are designed for adults with up to moderate levels of hearing loss.

The glasses stem from the startup’s goal of making hearing care more accessible by addressing the cost, comfort, and stigma associated with traditional hearing aids.

Unlike traditional hearing aids, which often use directional microphones to focus on sounds coming from a particular direction and can struggle in noisy environments, Legato takes a different approach. Its AI-powered system distinguishes voices from background noise and amplifies voices while reducing unwanted sounds.

While the frames have an open-ear design, sound isn’t broadcast to people around you. The frames feature a dual-speaker system that directs sound toward the wearer while canceling sound that escapes, reducing sound by 99% just a few inches away from the ear.

Image Credits:Legato

All processing happens directly on the glasses, with no cameras or recording, the company says.

The glasses weigh 34 grams with lenses and offer 10-12 hours of battery life. Legato Frames are available in three styles and support prescription lenses and Bluetooth streaming for music and calls.

The official launch of the glasses comes a few weeks after the startup emerged from stealth with $12 million in funding from Neotribe Ventures, Listen, and Village Global.

Legato was founded in 2024 by Mehul Trivedi and Steve Romine, who bring deep experience in wearables and hearing care from Bose, where Trivedi led the creation of Bose Frames and Romine ran the hearing aids division. After their time at Bose, Trivedi joined EssilorLuxottica, where he led smart eyewear efforts and worked on the Meta Ray-Ban smart glasses, while Romine went on to serve as COO of hearing care company Audicus. The pair then joined forces to explore the intersection of hearing technology and smart eyewear.

Legato Frames can be purchased on the startup’s website or through select eye care providers in the U.S., where they are eligible for coverage by vision insurance.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

The new Kindle ditches the raised bezel in a push toward a smaller, lighter e-reader

Amazon is giving the Kindle its most significant physical redesign in years, introducing a refreshed lineup of e-readers built around a deceptively simple idea: getting rid of the raised bezel.

The redesigned Kindle unveiled Thursday replaces the traditional raised bezel surrounding the display with a flush-front design, creating a cleaner, more seamless look. But bezels also give readers a place to rest their fingers without accidentally touching the screen and triggering a page turn or another touchscreen command. Amazon says it has designed around that problem.

At a press briefing, Kevin Keith, Amazon’s vice president of devices, said the company is using “Cap” (capacitive) touch technology and haptics to create what he describes as a “dead zone.” As a reader grips the Kindle, the device detects where a finger is resting and adjusts the touch-sensitive area accordingly.

“When you’re gripping the Kindle, wherever you put your thumb, it will self-detect a dead zone in the Cap touch. It will just readjust, and it’ll know that the finger is there,” Keith said.

Image Credits:Amazon

Alongside the bezel-free redesign, the standard six-inch Kindle is now 6.8 millimeters thick and weighs 140 grams, making it both thinner and lighter than its predecessor. Amazon is positioning it as the most pocket-friendly Kindle in the lineup.

Amazon said the new display is also 30% faster at page turns than the previous generation. The lineup also introduces new colors, including Ube, Alpine Sky, Seaglass Green, Graphite, and Fig.

The new Kindle starts at $149.99 and is available in Ube and Graphite. For the first time, Amazon is also offering an aluminum-backed version, with 32GB of storage and color options, including Alpine Sky and Seaglass Green.

Image Credits:TechCrunch

The redesign extends to the Kindle Paperwhite, which is also thinner and lighter than the previous generation.

Amazon describes the Paperwhite as having the largest display in the Kindle lineup, along with the highest contrast ratio. The company says the combination is designed to deliver “deep blacks and crisp text, and images that pop off the screen, whether you’re reading in bright sunlight or under the covers at night.”

The standard Paperwhite comes with 16GB of storage and costs $199.99 in Graphite. A 32GB Signature Edition costs $249.99 and is available in Graphite and Seaglass Green.

The Kindle Colorsoft, which Amazon introduced in 2024 as its first Kindle with a color display, also adopts the thinner, lighter, flush-front design used across the refreshed lineup. The standard Colorsoft has 16GB of storage and starts at $289.99 in Graphite. A 32GB Signature Edition is available in Graphite and Fig for $319.99.

Image Credits:Amazon

The new Kindle and its aluminum version are available starting today in the U.S., Canada, Mexico, Brazil, the U.K., Germany, France, Italy, Spain, Ireland, the Netherlands, Belgium, Sweden, Poland, Japan, Saudi Arabia, the UAE, Egypt, and Australia.

The new Kindle Paperwhite and Kindle Colorsoft are available for preorder across the same regions.

Amazon is also continuing to offer its Kids lineup. The Kids Kindle is currently available for purchase, whereas the Kids Kindle Colorsoft is available for preorder in the U.S., Canada, the U.K., Germany, and Japan.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Amazon introduces Kindle Click, a $35 remote for turning pages

Alongside a redesigned Kindle lineup that features slimmer designs, zero bezels, and a lighter feel, Amazon announced a range of new accessories on Thursday. And one of them, a $34.99 remote called the Kindle Click, caught our eye.

The Kindle Click is a compact Bluetooth remote designed to let readers turn pages without touching their Kindle. The idea is simple, but it could solve a surprisingly common annoyance for e-reader owners who have to reach over and tap the screen every time they want to move to the next page.

The small remote is designed for situations where touching the Kindle isn’t convenient. Amazon specifically positions it for reading under the covers, on a treadmill, or with a Kindle resting on a tray table during a flight. Instead of reaching for the e-reader, readers can simply press a button on the remote to turn the page.

The new accessory is compatible with all new Kindle devices, as well as Kindle models released in 2024 and later.

For years, Kindle owners have largely relied on third-party accessories, many of which use a clip-on mechanism that physically touches the display rather than communicating directly with the Kindle.

The Kindle Click puts Amazon into a category that competitors have already started exploring. Rakuten Kobo, for instance, launched its $29.99 Kobo Remote last year. There’s also the BOOX Tappy, a $29.99 wireless page turner designed for BOOX ePaper devices.

While Amazon’s Kindle Click is priced higher than these competing accessories, the company is likely betting that Kindle owners will pay for an official accessory designed specifically for the lineup. This new Kindle lineup, one of the most significant physical redesigns in years, has a display that Amazon says is 30% faster at page turns than the previous generation.

Amazon also announced other accessories as part of the new Kindle family, including a magnetic cover with physical page-turn buttons and a charging dock stand for the Kindle Paperwhite Signature Edition and Colorsoft Signature Edition.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Amazon’s new Fire TV Stick 4K comes with an actually good remote

As part of its fall hardware refresh, Amazon on Wednesday introduced the next version of its Fire TV Stick 4K, which is now slimmer and faster and can be directly charged via a TV’s USB port.

But the real news is that the device comes with an actually good remote control. No more blue Alexa button and a home button you can feel in the dark, a button for adding favorites, and a new shape that makes it more comfortable to hold in the hand.

It may seem funny that a remote control is the best part about the new streamer, which Amazon claims is 20% to 40% faster than leading competitors. But true TV connoisseurs know that a bad remote can ruin what would otherwise be a great watching experience. Amazon’s older voice remote wasn’t terrible, but it had plenty of room for improvement.

The new one features a different shape and curvature that make it easy to hold and point at the TV. Its buttons and layout have also been redesigned with an eye toward how people often use their remote controls: in a dark room.

If you’ve spent any time with remote controls, you know that you can sometimes struggle to find and mash the right button when you can’t see the device well, especially if the icons on the buttons don’t make much sense.

Image Credits:Amazon

That was the case with the older remote, which featured a prominent, blue Alexa voice button at the top center. That button has now been replaced with a more subtle black microphone button at the top right, which also has a slight dish at the top, so you can find it by feel.

The new remote’s home button can also be found with touch only, as it has a metallic finish (and an orangish-reddish hue) that makes it feel distinct. The power button at the top left is recessed, which helps you avoid accidentally turning off the device, and the D-pad is flatter, which makes it easier to roll your thumb around. Lastly, the center of the D-pad now has a more tactile click.

And, in response to user feedback, there’s finally a Favorites button you can program to launch a preferred app or even enable an oft-used option, like toggling Closed Captions or Dialog Boost.

New (L) and old (R) remotes.Image Credits:TechCrunch

The new remote control will come with the Fire TV Stick 4K but is also being sold separately for those who just want an upgrade.

The 4K Stick itself has 8GB of internal storage, a quad-core 1.7 GHz processor, and support for Wi-Fi 6, Bluetooth 5.3, and Bluetooth Low Energy. It also supports HDR10, HDR10+, HLG, H.265, H.264, VP9, and AV1 video formats, and can output at 2160 p, 1080 p, and 720 p resolutions at up to 60 frames per second.

The 4K Stick joins the full lineup, which also includes an HD Stick, a 4K “Max” Stick (faster, more storage), and the Fire TV Cube.

The Fire TV 4K Stick is priced at $59.99 but will launch at a discounted price of $29.99. It’s initially available in the U.S., Canada, Japan, Mexico, United Kingdom, Ireland, Germany, France, Italy, Spain, Switzerland, Australia, and New Zealand.

The remote will ship in late October and costs $14.99 in the U.S.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Google launches Fitbit Air in India, though its high price might deter the masses

Google on Wednesday launched the screen-less Fitbit Air fitness tracker in India, but is pricing at ₹13,999 (roughly $146), ostensibly positioning it as a premium device. Comparatively, the device costs $99 in the U.S.

Unveiled in May, the Fitbit Air features health and fitness tracking, like 24/7 heart rate monitoring, heart rhythm monitoring with A-fib (atrial fibrillation) alerts, blood oxygen level, resting heart rate, heart rate variability, sleep stages, and duration.

The device’s screen-less form is a bid to tap into the growing popularity of screen-less devices as people shy away from screens, opting for distraction-free health gadgets like Whoop’s fitness bands and Oura’s rings — though the new Fitbit is more pocket-friendly.

The health tracking space now has screen-less devices from Garmin, Fitbit founders’ new company, Luffu Link, as well as from Indian startups like Noise and Urban, which have been trying to undercut their Western rivals on price.

Research firm IDC noted in its global wearables report that despite a declining number of wristband shipments, screen-less trackers are carving out a niche. India currently accounts for only 5% of the screenless wearable market, per Counterpoint Research, and a wearable priced like a premium device might not make a dent in overall numbers, despite having a big name like Fitbit or Google behind it.

The Fitbit Air is available for purchase on the Google Store and retail partners, including Flipkart, Croma, Reliance Digital and Vijay Sales, from October 2. Google is also offering a free, three-month Google Health premium membership with the new band.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Your rig was built to win. Your sale should be too

Gaming laptops · Trade-in guide

A tuned GPU, a high-refresh display, a cooling system engineered for marathon sessions: a high-end gaming laptop is a serious piece of hardware. So when it’s time to upgrade, how you sell it matters. Handing a $3,000 machine to a stranger from a marketplace listing, or swapping it for store credit, rarely gets you what the hardware is worth. Here’s why gamers moving on from premium laptops choose Gadget Salvation, and what makes these machines different to sell in the first place.

The high-end gaming laptops gamers are trading in

The top of the gaming laptop market is expensive in 2026. Tom’s Hardware names the Razer Blade 18 (2026) its best gaming laptop overall and notes it starts at $3,999.99. Tom’s Guide ranks the ASUS ROG Zephyrus G14 as its top recommendation and lists the Razer Blade 16 (2026) at $3,599 to start. When new flagships cost that much, even a machine that is a generation or two old still carries real value on the used market.

Popular high-end gaming laptops and where to get a quoteModelWhy gamers buy itSell itRazer Blade 18 (2026)Tom’s Hardware’s best overall pick; tested with an RTX 5090 Laptop GPURazer quoteRazer Blade 16 (2026)Thin flagship with a 16-inch OLED; a Tom’s Guide Computing Awards pickRazer quoteASUS ROG Zephyrus G14Lightweight 14-inch with an OLED display; Tom’s Guide’s top pickROG quoteASUS ROG Strix SCAR 1818-inch Mini-LED flagship reviewed by Tom’s HardwareROG quoteAlienware 16 Area-51Tom’s Hardware’s best desktop replacement; tested with an RTX 5080Alienware quoteLenovo Legion Pro 7Lenovo’s high-performance Legion Pro lineLegion quote

Still deciding whether to upgrade? Our breakdowns of the Razer Blade 18 and the ROG Strix SCAR 18 walk through what each generation changed.

Why gaming laptops lose value on their own clock

In a gaming laptop, the CPU and GPU are soldered to the board, as Tom’s Hardware points out. The graphics chip you bought is the one you’ll sell, so the GPU generation anchors your laptop’s value. Every launch reprices the model before it. Tom’s Hardware found the 2026 Blade 18 costs $500 more than its predecessor but adds little performance, and it suggests buyers look for last year’s model on sale instead. Great for shoppers. For sellers, it means your machine is always being compared with discounted inventory. The practical takeaway: sell while your GPU is still current, not after the next generation lands.

The hidden costs of selling it yourself

Marketplace fees. For most categories, eBay charges a final value fee of 13.6% on the total sale up to $7,500, plus $0.40 per order. On a $2,000 laptop, that’s more than $272 before sales tax is added to the fee base, and before you pay to pack and ship an 18-inch machine.

Scam risk. Local listings skip the fees but add a different risk. The FTC warns that scammers posing as buyers send fake payment-app notifications, or overpay with a fake check and ask for the difference back. A deposited check can appear in your balance quickly and still be flagged as fake weeks later. An FTC data analysis found fake check scams carried a median reported loss of nearly $2,000, and people in their twenties were more than twice as likely as those 30 and older to report losing money. That’s the price range, and the audience, of a typical high-end gaming laptop sale.

Store credit. Retail trade-in programs like Best Buy’s pay you in a Best Buy eGift Card. That works if your next laptop comes from the same store, but it locks your money into one retailer. For a side-by-side look at each route, read our guide to peer-to-peer marketplaces vs. online trade-in services.

Resale value: how Gadget Salvation prices your gaming laptop

Gadget Salvation prices gaming laptops against the live resale market, pulling current sale data from eBay, Amazon, and Facebook Marketplace, and quotes each device case by case. That matters for gaming hardware, where two laptops with the same name can be very different machines: the quote reflects your model, configuration, and condition, not a one-size-fits-all number. Your offer is valid for 30 days and locked before you ship. If the laptop matches the condition you selected, that’s what you’re paid. If inspection finds a difference, you get a revised offer and can accept it or have the laptop sent back free. Start with an instant gaming laptop quote.

A process built for expensive hardware

01 · Quote

Pick your model and configuration, answer a few condition questions, and get an offer in seconds.

02 · Ship free

Print the prepaid UPS label, pack the laptop with plenty of padding, and include your charger. Gaming power bricks are large and proprietary, and a missing charger reduces the quote by a few dollars.

03 · Wiped

Every drive is erased to NIST 800-88 standards, with a certificate available on request. See our data erasure protocols.

04 · Get paid

Payment goes out within one to two business days of receipt and inspection, by PayPal, Venmo, Zelle, Cash App, or check.

Want the full prep checklist first? Our step-by-step guide to selling a gaming laptop covers backups, resets, and packing, and How It Works explains each stage.

Why it matters beyond your wallet

The EPA says preventing waste beats any disposal option, recycling included, and that reusing working electronics keeps them out of the waste stream longer. Even at end of life, the agency notes that recycling one million laptops saves energy equal to the electricity used by more than 3,500 U.S. homes in a year. A gaming laptop that still has years of play left shouldn’t sit in a drawer. Traded in, it can become someone else’s first real rig. That’s the idea behind our case for why electronics reselling matters.

Ready for your next rig?

Free shipping, a locked offer, and payment within two business days of inspection.

Get my gaming laptop quote

Sources

  • Tom’s Hardware — Best Gaming Laptops 2026: Tested and reviewed — model rankings, Razer Blade 18 starting price and year-over-year change, Alienware 16 Area-51 test configuration, soldered CPUs and GPUs
  • Tom’s Guide — The best gaming laptops to buy in 2026 — ROG Zephyrus G14 top recommendation
  • Tom’s Guide — Tom’s Guide Computing Awards 2026 — Razer Blade 16 (2026) starting price
  • eBay — Selling fees — 13.6% final value fee on most categories and $0.40 per-order fee
  • Federal Trade Commission — Selling stuff online? Here’s how to avoid a scam — fake payment and fake check overpayment tactics
  • Federal Trade Commission — New FTC Data Spotlight: Fake Check Scams Cause Big Losses — median loss and age data
  • Best Buy — Trade-In — payment by Best Buy eGift Card
  • U.S. EPA — Electronics Basic Information, Research, and Initiatives — waste prevention and reuse
  • U.S. EPA — Electronics Donation and Recycling — laptop recycling energy savings

Last reviewed September 28, 2026. Prices, fees, and rankings change; check each source for current figures.

Oura shelves its $2.2B IPO citing ‘uncertainty’ in the market

Smart ring maker Oura has postponed its up to $2.2 billion IPO indefinitely, citing “uncertainty in the IPO market.”

The company, which had filed to offer 55 million shares at a range of $40 to $44 each in the IPO, did not provide additional details. The IPO would have valued Oura at up to $15 billion at the mid-point of that range.

“Our mission is to empower people to live healthier, longer, and an IPO is just one step in our journey. We aim to deliver an extraordinary IPO for our employees and investors and we have the luxury of choosing our moment. In the meantime, we will execute against the opportunities ahead,” the company’s CEO Tom Hale said in a statement.

Indeed, Oura seems to be doing well. The company said that its latest product, the Oura Ring 5, has been received well in the market, and it now has 5.7 million paying members, up from 5 million at the end of June. The company expects overall revenue to increase 90% in its 2026 financial year compared to a year earlier, when it had revenue of $907.9 million.

The postponement of the IPO, however, will delay some of the company’s plans for proceeds that would have been generated from the IPO, as well as those of its shareholders.

Forerunner Ventures, an early investor in Oura, was slated to sell all of its 9.3% stake in the IPO, which would have net it about $1.20 billion (assuming the shares listed at the $42 mid-point). Oura, meanwhile, intended to use most of the IPO proceeds it to pay off tax obligations related to employee share grants that would have vested at the listing.

Any shareholders looking for liquidity will also have to wait now.

Last day to grab your exhibit table at Disrupt 2026 is Oct. 2

This is the last week and your final opportunity to book your TechCrunch Disrupt 2026 exhibit table. Book your exhibit table by this Friday, October 2, at 11:59 p.m. PT. After that, all exhibit table bookings close for good. If you missed the original deadline, this is your final opportunity to put your startup on the Expo Hall floor, the center of the event.

Disrupt takes place October 13–15 at Moscone West in San Francisco, bringing together 10,000+ founders, investors, operators, and tech leaders looking for the next breakthroughs and startups to back, products to use, and companies to partner with. This is your chance to demo your breakthrough in the heart of the global startup ecosystem. Book your table now before your competitor does.

Image Credits:Eric Slomonson, The Photo Group

Spotlight your brand at the heart of the global startup ecosystem

The Expo Hall gives your startup three days to get in front of the people who can move your business forward. Put your product on display, start conversations, and make your company one of the startups tech leaders remember.

With an exhibit table, you can:

  • Demo your product to potential investors, partners, and decision-makers
  • Meet VCs actively looking for their next startup to add to their portfolio
  • Capture leads through the Disrupt mobile app and invaluable conversations
  • Start customer and partnership conversations face-to-face
  • Build global visibility alongside hundreds of other startups

Your exhibit package includes a 6′ × 30″ branded table for all three days, 10 team passes, lead-generation tools, website and app branding, press-list access, Silver Tier sponsor branding, and more. On-site branding is included when you book by Sept. 30. Founders can also access deal flow opportunities, such as investor-founder meetings in a quieter space in the Deal Flow Café.

The opportunity is here. The deadline is October 2. Don’t wait until the Expo Hall is full to wish you’d secured your spot.

Image Credits:Slava Brazer Photography

This is the final window to get on the floor

Exhibit tables are open until October 2 at 11:59 p.m. PT. Tables are limited and first come, first served. Get your startup in early, get noticed, and make the most of the Disrupt experience while the opportunity is still yours. Book your exhibit table now.

Not exhibiting? Don’t miss Disrupt.

You can still get in the room at TechCrunch Disrupt 2026 on October 13–15. Hear from 250+ top-tier tech leaders across 200+ sessions on six industry stages, roundtables, and breakouts that give you practical insights for building, funding, and scaling, and use AI-powered matchmaking and interactive sessions to make more relevant connections. Explore 300+ startups and witness Startup Battlefield 200, the ultimate pitch competition, to discover potential products, partners, and investment opportunities. Get your Disrupt ticket and be part of the conversations shaping what comes next.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Next five VCs judging Startup Battlefield 200 at Disrupt 2026 | TechCrunch

Thousands of applications. Multiple rounds of review. Hundreds of hours spent evaluating startups from around the world. Now comes the part everyone has been waiting for.

Startup Battlefield 200 is almost here, and with today’s announcement, the judging panel is nearly complete. In just a couple of weeks, 200 carefully selected startups will gather at TechCrunch Disrupt 2026 to exhibit, meet investors, and compete for one of the most coveted opportunities in the startup world. Only a select group will advance to the live competition, where they’ll pitch in front of thousands of founders, investors, media, and customers and face questions from some of the sharpest minds in technology.

Image Credits:Kimberly White / Getty Images

Today’s judges bring decades of experience building companies, backing founders, and spotting transformative ideas before they become obvious. They’ll help decide which startups continue their journey toward the Startup Battlefield finals and, ultimately, who has a chance to lift this year’s trophy. If you want to see tomorrow’s industry leaders before the rest of the world does, there’s no better place to be than TechCrunch Disrupt.

The only way to be front and center at the Disrupt Stage and witness the ultimate pitch competition of the year is to register for TechCrunch Disrupt. Grab your pass and bring your co-founder, partner, or peer for 50% off. Bringing a community of four or more? Save up to 30% on passes.

Meet the next wave of Startup Battlefield judges

Get to know all 20 judges revealed so far by visiting the Disrupt agenda. Stay tuned for the final announcement, where we’ll unveil the five judges who will evaluate the finalists and determine who takes home the $100,000 equity-free prize and coveted Disrupt Cup.

Image Credits:TechCrunch

Caleb Appleton, Partner, Bison Ventures

Caleb Appleton is a partner at Bison Ventures, where he invests in physical AI across techbio, robotics, and real-world intelligence. A biomedical engineer by training, his investments include Cobot, Vivodyne, Passkey, Sleuth, Inner Logic, Cosmon, and Grid Aero. Previously, Appleton invested in frontier technologies at Innovation Endeavors and spent several years as an operator at TuneIn, giving him experience spanning early-stage science, venture investing, and scaling a technology business.

Sara Deshpande, General Partner, Maven Ventures

Sara Deshpande is a general partner at Maven Ventures, where she invests in seed-stage companies built around emerging consumer behaviors and trends. She focuses on consumer software spanning digital health and consumer applications of AI. Deshpande joined Maven as its first employee in 2014 and has spent a decade in venture capital. She received her MBA from Stanford, where she now teaches a course on startups and entrepreneurship.

Aatish Nayak, Partner, Kleiner Perkins

Aatish Nayak joined Kleiner Perkins as a partner in May 2026, where he focuses on partnering with AI native founders with deep vertical expertise across all domains.
 
Prior to joining Kleiner Perkins, Narak was the first PM and VP of Product at Harvey, where he helped build the early product, design, marketing, analytics, and support teams. Before that, he was an early product leader at Scale AI working on data infrastructure for ecommerce, early NLP (GPT-2), and autonomous vehicles. And before that, he was at Shield AI working on the core knowledge stack for robotic defense systems that save lives.
 
Jason Risch, Partner, Greylock

Jason Risch is a partner at Greylock, where he invests in enterprise security, AI and ML infrastructure, data platforms, and developer tools. His portfolio includes Onehouse, a cloud-native managed lakehouse platform, and Baseten, an ML model serving toolkit for data science teams. Before joining Greylock, Risch worked in business operations at Opendoor, as a management consultant at McKinsey’s Bay Area practice, and as a startup builder at the AI Fund. He studied Mathematical and Computational Science at Stanford University.

Mark Xu, Partner, Index Ventures

Mark Xu is a partner at Index Ventures, where he invests across stages in cybersecurity, infrastructure, and AI. He has backed companies building at the frontier of AI, including Fireworks, Parallel, 7AI, Simile, and Flapping Airplanes, and previously worked as a growth investor at Lightspeed, supporting companies including Wiz, Glean, and Grafana. Xu looks for deeply technical founders who combine domain expertise with hustle and an obsession with their customers.

Grab your Disrupt pass and don’t miss Startup Battlefield

TechCrunch Disrupt 2026 is happening October 13-15 at San Francisco’s Moscone West, bringing 10,000+ tech leaders, VCs, and founders together to meet the next generation of breakout startups, connect with leaders who could change their startup’s trajectory, and get a front-row seat to where the industry is headed.

Register now to save up to $100 before Disrupt doors open, and bring your co-founder, colleague, or peer with a second pass for 50% off. Experience all that Disrupt has to offer together, from six industry stages, roundtables, and breakout sessions to the startups and connections shaping what’s next in tech.

Image Credits:Noam Galai / Getty Images

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Sennheiser Momentum 5 review: Great sound, incredible battery life, and few compromises

There are a lot of $300-$400 headphones on the market right now, and most of them blur together. I spent the last few weeks with the Sennheiser Momentum 5 to determine if this pair actually stands out, testing everything from sound quality and noise cancellation to comfort and battery life. 

At $399.99, the Momentum 5 sit right in the middle of the premium headphone market. That puts them up against the pricier Sony WH-1000XM6 and Apple AirPods Max 2, while offering a more affordable option for anyone looking for high-end headphones.

Starting with sound, vocals sound natural and the bass is strong without taking over. The headphones allow you to start noticing little things in music, like a background harmony or a guitar string that cheaper headphones often tend to miss. If I had to describe the sound in one word, it’d be balanced.  

The headphones support Dolby Atmos, which essentially means that music or movies sound like they’re coming from all around you instead of just left and right. 

Image Credits:Sennheiser /

With this generation, Sennheiser doubled the microphone count to eight to improve the active noise cancellation (ANC). Voices and nearby chatter, which are usually the kind of sounds that can cut through weaker ANC, are noticeably quieter. Sennheiser claims this pair is up to three times more effective than the previous generation at blocking this type of noise.

Of course, it’s not quite at the level of blocking out everything like a plane’s engine, but it does the job effectively without making your ears feel weirdly pressurized as can be the case with some ANC headphones. 

As for comfort, the headphones aren’t as premium-feeling as Apple or Sony headphones that I’ve tried in the past, but given that the Momentum 5 cost less than its competitors, it’s a trade-off that’s hard to complain about. 

The battery life is genuinely impressive. It’s rated for up to 57 hours, and that figure held up in my testing. For context, that’s roughly twice the battery life of the Sony WH-1000XM6 and nearly three times that of the AirPods Max 2. 

And when the battery does run out, a 10-minute charge gets you up to seven hours of playback, while a full charge takes about two hours. 

Image Credits:Sennheiser /

A notable difference that the Momentum 5 offers that its competitors don’t is a user-replaceable cell, which means you can swap out the battery once it degrades instead of having to buy a whole new pair.

What I wasn’t expecting, but found surprisingly useful, was how thin the carrying case is. I’ve never really been able to fit a pair of headphones into my medium-sized purses, but the Momentum 5 fit perfectly. It’s also a big plus when traveling, since the case doesn’t take up much space in your luggage.

With the headphones’ companion app, Smart Control Plus, you can adjust a bunch of different settings. There’s an 8-band EQ that lets you tune the sound yourself or choose from one of Sennheiser’s presets. The app also lets you adjust the level of ANC rather than just switching it on or off, and there’s an anti-wind mode you can access there too. The “Sound Personalization” feature walks you through a listening test and creates a sound profile tailored to your hearing preferences. 

The app gives you a decent amount of control over the Momentum 5, and I found it pretty easy to navigate as most of the settings are quite straightforward. 

Overall, the Sennheiser Momentum 5 is a solid option at this price. They offer great sound, the battery life is excellent, and the downsides are pretty minor. They’re heavier than the Sony WH-1000XM6, and aren’t as comfortable as some Sony or Apple options, but at $399.99, they’re cheaper than both while still delivering where it matters.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Levoit’s new air purifier is for the pet odors that have taken over your apartment

Someone recently had to sit me down, hold my hands, and tell me something no pet owner ever wants to hear: my apartment smelled like wet dog. Horrifying. 

With all the nonstop fur and dander that seem to appear everywhere no matter what, the intervention was probably necessary. So when Levoit launched its Vital Pet Pro Air Purifier, I was curious to see whether it could actually make a noticeable difference. 

Designed specifically for pet-friendly households, the $189.99 machine takes a more targeted approach than a conventional air purifier, combining a three-stage filtration system with features designed around one of the biggest problems pet owners face: fur everywhere. (And the occasional “wet dog” smell.) 

The three-stage filtration system consists of a washable pre-filter, a main filter, and an activated carbon filter. The pre-filter catches larger debris such as pet hair, while the main filter targets smaller particles and dander. The carbon filter is designed to tackle odors, with 140 grams of activated carbon packed into it.

Another one of the purifier’s key design features is its U-shaped air inlet, which Levoit says is designed to capture airborne pet hair and particles while improving airflow and helping prevent the filter from becoming clogged.

Image Credits:Levoit

After testing the purifier for a little over a week, I found it impressively effective at collecting fur and trapping the kind of debris that would normally end up floating around the apartment or settling onto furniture.

When it comes to tackling pet odors, Levoit says that the Vital Pet Pro can remove up to 70% of odors within an hour. I can’t really do a specific test to verify that claim, but the difference was easy enough to notice. After the purifier had been running, the room smelled considerably fresher.

I also appreciated the automatic cleaning technology, which removes accumulated hair and debris from the pre-filter and collects it in a removable tray. It’s a very practical feature, especially if the alternative is constantly pulling apart the purifier to clean out a layer of fur.

Additionally, the companion app offers different modes designed to make the purifier more hands-off. Auto Plus Mode monitors changes in air quality and adjusts the purifier’s performance in real time.

Pet Mode is designed specifically around the way pet-related particles can build up throughout the day. It alternates between running the fan at its highest speed for 15 minutes to capture particulates in the pre-filter and then switching to a lower speed for 60 minutes to maintain air quality while reducing noise and energy use.

Image Credits:Levoit

Also, rather than displaying a numerical air-quality reading, the Vital Pet Pro uses a simple color system. Red indicates bad air quality, orange means moderate, green means good, and cyan means very good. I actually preferred this since you can quickly glance at the purifier and immediately get a sense of whether the air is improving without having to interpret a number.

I’ll also point out that the Vital Pet Pro is a little larger than I expected, so make sure you have enough floor space before bringing one home.

Noise is another consideration. At its highest setting, the fan is definitely audible. Once the purifier settles into a lower setting, however, it’s quiet enough to leave running overnight without disrupting my sleep. For light sleepers, Sleep Mode makes the purifier run even more quietly.

The air purifier is available to purchase from Levoit’s website, Amazon, Chewy, and other retailers.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Meadow lets you leave your smartphone at home without sacrificing the essentials

I held my breath as I walked into the concert venue and showed the bouncer a ticket barcode on a three-inch, square screen.

“If it doesn’t go through, I can try something else,” I said quickly, worried that the barcode wouldn’t work. But just as Meadow founder Shreyas Narlanka promised me, the code I scanned onto the startup’s minimalist phone earlier that day worked fine.

“Cool phone,” the bouncer said, ushering me inside.

I’d done it. With Meadow’s bare-bones smartphone, I had called an Uber, streamed Apple Music during the ride, and entered the show. Not once did I need to touch my iPhone, which I only brought with me as a backup in case the ticket scan didn’t work.

“With so many dumb phones, the Brick, and everything, the messaging is like, ‘Slow down, focus on your work’ or whatever,” Narlanka says, explaining why his company chose to build a minimal phone. “But the reason we’re different is because we’re all about getting outside and unplugging and having a sick social life.”

Image Credits:Meadow

Go online, and you’ll see a growing mass of content and comments from people across the world feeling suffocated by being constantly connected via their smartphones and social media feeds. That’s resulting in a new device category that promises a reprieve. Some of these devices, like the Light Phone, require users to completely give up their smartphone and switch to a simpler device. Others, like the Wisephone, offer a modern touchscreen device with a minimal UI and a few apps. Still others are embracing more tactile form factors, like the Commodore Callback, which is a flip-phone with a touchscreen.

Meadow, meanwhile, is taking the middle road, intending to simply supplement your existing device. It runs Android, and so supports apps like Maps, Strava, Uber, Apple Music, and Spotify. It also has native apps for utilities like the camera, voice memos, notes, camera, text, calling, location sharing, and ticket scanning. It also supports Bluetooth, and you can connect 3.5mm headphones to it using a USB-C-to-3.5mm adapter.

“I knew there were going to be times where I needed my phone,” Narlanka said. “I didn’t want a full replacement.”

You can’t make calls and send texts with your usual phone number, though — you’ll have to set up a new plan through a subscription plan with Meadow, which gives you a separate number to use while you’re on the go.

Narlanka recommends his customers take advantage of the iPhone’s “driving” focus feature, which by default tells your top contacts that you’re on the road — instead, he says, you can customize the text to say you’re out with the Meadow. This way, you might miss the latest chatter in your group chats, but if anyone needs to contact you urgently, they’ll still be able to reach you.

“We’re not Luddites that are going to be like, ‘Streaming’s bad, and this is bad,’” he said. “It’s just we don’t want social media, browsing and that kind of stuff.”

This sentiment has become an increasingly common one. People talk about reducing their screen time as something that’s universally assumed to be good for you, like eating vegetables or flossing. Even ADÉLA, the artist whose concert I attended, used her manager’s phone to publish a celebration post after her debut album hit No. 4 on the Billboard charts.

“I have deleted social media because i want to stay sane!” the 22-year-old pop star wrote on Instagram.

Image Credits:Photos taken on Meadow by TechCrunch

Her fans don’t feel the same way — I saw several people recording the entire show on their iPhones. (There’s nothing wrong with snapping a few photos or a short video for Instagram, but an entire show?)

Speaking of cameras, the one on the Meadow worked well when out and about during the day, but the pictures weren’t great when I tried using it to take photos at the concert.

The camera app also works differently from your usual smartphone fare: You can take as many photos and videos as you want, but you can only see your photos once you get home and use the Meadow app from your main smartphone. And instead of a front-facing camera, Meadow has a tiny mirror beside the camera lens so that you can make sure you’re in the frame of your selfies.

The screen brightness and battery weren’t an issue when taking the Meadow around — if anything, the display can sometimes be a bit too bright in low-lit areas, but that meant it was always very visible outdoors.

In your hand, the small, square device feels a bit unfamiliar, though it does feel functional enough. This isn’t a device that Meadow wants you to use constantly, so it’s not a problem that it feels less comfortable than an iPhone.

Image Credits:Meadow

Meadow is still new; it’s only shipped its first bulk batch to preorder customers so far. I ran into some small issues, too, like a glitch that showed my Uber ride had not ended for a while after I left the car (for a second I worried I had accidentally ordered a second Uber). Narlanka tells me, though, that this bug has been fixed now.

Overall, if you can handle the discomfort of managing a second phone number, Meadow works well as a device that helps you disconnect without leaving you fully off the grid.

Though Narlanka is only 25-years-old, Meadow isn’t his first startup. He dropped out of UC San Diego in 2020 when his last company, Scoutapp AI, started gaining traction. The inventory management platform for online businesses ended up being acquired by fashion resale platform StockX.

Meadow is Narlanka’s first attempt at making hardware, though his previous success has earned him backing from investors. The company raised funding in December 2024, led by Alana Goyal of basecase capital. Angel investors Terrence Rohan, Discord’s founding CMO Eros Resmini, Vercel founder Guillermo Rauch, and Diagram founder Jordan Singer also participated.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Meta’s Muse Charm looks like a Tamagotchi, but it’s tapping into a much newer trend

Is Meta’s just-announced Muse Charm a playful device that will make AI more approachable to everyday consumers, or will it be yet another flop in a long list of AI hardware gadgets that didn’t take off, like the Ai Pin, Rabbit, or Friend pendant? Reactions, so far, have been mixed. What the Charm is, however, is on-trend.

Like it or not, the form factor could potentially appeal to Gen Z consumers who, in this post-Labubu era, have already been into various dangling items from keychains and bags. It’s all part of a broader kitschy, retro-inspired shift in their approach to fashion and technology.

Already, Gen Z has created a market for things that dangle, with everything from lip glosses to hand sanitizers to sunblocks to fragrances and more turned into bag charms, primarily targeted at women.

Hailey Bieber’s viral Rhode lip case, which stuck the lip gloss onto a phone case, had a big influence on this idea that beauty products could also be fashion accessories, as did its other beauty-focused bag charms. (The brand saw $212 million in annual net sales from a lineup of roughly 10 products, Vogue noted last year, as the company announced its billion-dollar exit to Elf Beauty.)

Then there was the Labubu craze, which saw sales of the so-ugly-it’s-cute fuzzy monster bag charm explode, growing Pop Mart’s (the Chinese retailer behind the product) revenue to $1.8 billion in 2024, a 7x jump from 2019. While demand for the Labubu itself has since faded, the concept of the decorative bag charm has not. One analyst firm estimates the global bag charm market will grow to over $1 billion by 2030.

Image Credits:LILLIAN SUWANRUMPHA / Contributor / Getty Images

Today, bag charms can be characters, bedazzled beauty products, or other whimsical designs or objects, like Coach’s coveted cherry charms, a Gen Z favorite. They’ve proven popular because they’re a means of expressing your personality, just as humans have done for ages through their fashion choices, makeup, and jewelry.

Similarly, Meta’s Muse is a customizable character; you design your own avatar, which makes the AI agent a reflection of you, too.

And, as many have pointed out, Muse Charm’s form factor recalls a Tamagotchi, the pocket-sized digital virtual pet that became a major toy fad in the late 90s and again in the mid-2000s.

However, the Tamagotchi is not the most current reference. It seems the Muse Charm is actually a twist on what some young people are already doing with their Apple Watch. Often meant as a way to repurpose an older device, the concept of the Apple Watch keychain or charm has been growing in popularity, fueled by TikTok videos showing different ways to use the watch when not on your wrist.

On retailers like Amazon and Walmart, and marketplaces like eBay and Etsy, there are thousands of Apple Watch keychains, straps, pendants, lanyards, clips, and bag charm cases now available in nearly every style you can think of. As you might expect, these keychain watches are often being adopted by younger women as a fashion accessory first, rather than a piece of technology.

This all then intersects with the broader retro-tech trend, which has seen older tech like digital cameras, flip phones, iPods, CDs, cassette tapes, home phones, and wired earbuds making a quiet comeback.

This vibe shift in tech comes as young people describe the addictive, algorithm-driven feeds and “soulness” nature of technology as making them feel more disconnected, which has also fed into this trend of wanting tech they can touch and feel. (One startup, Clicks, is even bringing back the physical phone keyboard in a BlackBerry-inspired device, for instance.)

For Gen Z, these physical objects help them feel more connected with the technology they’re using and offer a sense of control over a world where technology has become so deeply integrated into our lives that it no longer feels like a choice to use it.

Young women, again, have been at the forefront of this trend, with some even crafting their own portable, mini computers, “cyberdecks,” which they fit inside clamshell purses or custom cases, and bedazzle with jewels, flowers, stickers, pearls, and other items to make them feel more personal.

Image Credits:CC / Bimbo Tech (opens in a new window)

That brings us back to the Muse Charm. While it’s clearly designed with the tech-as-fashion-accessory trend in mind, that doesn’t mean it will be a hit.

Meta has abused consumer trust over the years to such an extent that it may never fully recover.

Image Credits:Meta

To name just a few examples: The tech giant had to settle with the FTC over charges that it deceived consumers by making users’ private information public without their consent, and has been penalized by the FTC for numerous privacy-related violations. In 2023, the FTC charged Meta with violating a privacy order that was filed after the 2019 settlement. It’s also been repeatedly hauled before Congress over its harms to minors, has lost or settled multiple lawsuits over the same topics, and has seen various whistleblowers outing its abuses.

These careless privacy practices could ultimately see Meta lose the battle to be the consumer AI of choice… unless, of course, consumers decide that the “devil you know” is better than the one you don’t. (Especially when the latter are those warning AI could put an end to the human race.)

Meta’s end game, after all, is highly-targeted, highly-personalized ads. If that’s the privacy tradeoff in gaining access to free AI — Meta said it will monetize Muse by taking a small fee from transactions — consumers could be willing to take the risk.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Does the Online Offer Hold Up?

The question we get more than any other is some version of this: “The calculator said $400. Is that what I’m actually going to get?“

It’s a fair question. Every buyback site, including ours, prices a gadget based on the user’s description. Then a technician opens the box and gives it a physical inspection. When the two evaluations differ, the offer changes. Sellers are right to wonder how often that happens, by how much, and what they can do about it.

Using recent inspection records from 4,824 devices, Gadget Salvation answers all three questions. Here is how online offers are calculated, what our technicians check for upon arrival, and what you can do before shipping to make sure your final payout matches your initial quote.

How an Online Quote Is Built

Before looking at the inspection data, it helps to understand how the calculator derives an initial estimate. The system starts with a base value for your exact laptop brand and model, then factors in four variables:

  • Configuration. Processor, graphics card, memory, and storage, which vary within a model. Each option adds a fixed dollar amount to the base.
  • Cosmetic condition. Brand New, Flawless, Good, Fair, or Poor. Each tier applies a preset percentage to the price. So, “Good” trims the base offer, and “Fair” reduces it further.
  • Functionality. Fully Functional vs. Defective: deducts value based on selected hardware issues.
  • Accessories. Whether the original charger is included. Answering No reduces the offer by a set percentage on most models.

The Formula: Fixed adjustments are added first, percentage deductions are applied second, and the final total is rounded up to the nearest dollar. That final number is your online offer. Once the shipment arrives, a technician verifies each of these points against the physical gadget before approving the payout or issuing a test results report and an adjusted offer.

The Headline Numbers

17%

of devices had the offer reduced after inspection (820 of 4,824)

9%

median reduction when a quote was cut

$39

average dollar reduction, on an average quote of $416

94%

of sellers who received a revised offer accepted it

Two things stand out. First, a reduction is the exception, not the rule. More than eight in ten devices were paid the amount the calculator showed, or more. Second, when a reduction does happen, it is usually moderate. Half of all reductions were 9% or less, and the average was $39 on an average quote of $416.

The 169 increased offers deserve a mention too. These are devices that arrived in better shape than described, or with more memory or storage than the seller selected. When a technician finds a better machine than the one that was quoted, the offer goes up. It is not common, but it is part of the same process, and it’s why we ask sellers to describe their device rather than guess low to be safe.

What happened to the offer on 4,824 inspected devices Paid as quoted 79% Paid more than quoted 4% (169 devices) Paid less than quoted 17% (820 devices)

What a Typical Price Adjustment Looks Like

Percentages are abstract, so here is the same picture in dollars. The average quote across all inspected devices was $416. For devices revised downward, the average reduction was $39, bringing the quote to $377. At the median reduction of 9%, a $416 quote becomes $379.

The difference between the median and the average tells you something about the shape of the reductions. Most are small: a worn keyboard, a missing charger, a battery that has lost capacity. A minority are large, and those pull the average above the median. The large ones are almost always cases where the gadget that arrived was not the one that was quoted: a locked BIOS the seller could not clear, a laptop with a broken screen behind a “Fully Functional” online description, or a lower-spec unit than the one selected. A device quoted as working but won’t boot upon arrival has very little resale value, and the revised offer reflects that.

Reasons for Reductions

Every revised offer comes with a detailed inspection report sent to the seller before any payment is processed. Listed in order of frequency, these are the findings our technicians record most often:

  1. Cosmetic wear beyond the selected tier: Scratches, dents, worn or discolored palmrests, and shiny keys on a device described as “Flawless” or “Good”. This is the most common finding by a wide margin.
  2. Missing charger or accessories: The calculator asked, the seller answered “Yes”, and the box arrived without it.
  3. Screen defects: Pressure marks, bright spots, dead pixels, and cloudy patches that are easy to miss under normal room lighting.
  4. Battery health: A battery that no longer holds at least 2 hours of continuous charge or reports low capacity (less than 60% of original capacity for laptops and less than 80% for phones).
  5. Wrong model or lower specs than selected: A previous-generation processor, less RAM, or smaller storage than the option chosen online.
  6. Ports, fans, and thermal issues: Non-functional USB/charging ports, noisy or non-spinning fans, CPU thermal throttling.
  7. Keyboard or trackpad defects: Unresponsive keys, a non-clicking trackpad, or missing keycaps.
  8. Physical damage: Cracked corners, broken hinges, and chipped bezels.
  9. BIOS password, Windows activation problems, or account locks: A firmware password, a Windows or Apple account still attached, or activation lock.
  10. Will not power on: Less frequent, but this finding causes the largest price drop from the initial quote.

Pro Tip: Three of the top five issues above can be checked in under two minutes, and the second one is 100% avoidable. If you cannot locate the charger, simply select “No” on the calculator, and the system will apply a small deduction upfront, preventing a surprise revision later.

Low Estimates Have Less Room for Surprises

There is one more pattern worth understanding. A missing charger, a worn keyboard, or a weak battery costs roughly the same to remedy whether the laptop is worth $150 or $800. 

This is why an honest description matters most on budget devices. On a high-value laptop, a minor oversight results in a small price revision. On an entry-level one, it can lead to a dramatic reduction. If you are selling an older or low-spec gadget, take an extra minute to verify its condition carefully and ensure every included accessory makes it into the shipping box.

What Happens After a Revised Offer?

When an inspected value differs from your online quote, you receive an email detailing the technician’s findings alongside the updated offer. Nothing is paid until you approve it. You have two choices:

  • Accept the revised offer and collect your payout immediately.

  • Decline the offer and have your gadget shipped back to you, free of charge.

In practice, 94% of sellers who receive a revised offer accept it. To us, that is the most important statistic in this article. It shows that when a technician explains what was found and breaks down the math transparently, most sellers agree the adjusted price is fair.

For the small minority who decline, it is usually because the model was misidentified in our buyback database, resulting in a significantly lower resale value than the model originally selected, or because the gadget turned out to be too old to qualify for an offer. In cases where an offer can’t be made, we do offer free eco-friendly recycling, though you can always choose to have it shipped back to you.

How to Get the Full Amount You Were Quoted

Everything above points to the same practical observation: An accurate online description yields an accurate payout. In fact, 83% of sellers receive the full amount they were quoted (or more). 

Here is how to ensure you are one of them:

  1. Confirm the exact model and configuration. Check the processor, memory, and storage in the system settings rather than relying on memory. Mismatched specs are among our top five inspection findings.
  2. Inspect the body under bright light. Tilt the lid under direct lighting. Check the corners, palmrest, bottom case, and hinges. If you see any dent or scratch, it is not Flawless. If the keys’ finish is worn through, it is not Good.
  3. Check the screen on a white background in a dim room. Open a blank document, turn the brightness up, and look for cloudy patches, bright spots, or lines—defects that are easy to miss under ambient light.
  4. Check your battery health. On a Mac, open the battery health panel in System Information. On Windows, run the built-in battery report. A battery well below its design capacity is a recurring cause for a reduction.
  5. Tick every issue that applies. If the device has a specific fault, select it in the issues checklist. A quote that already accounts for a bad battery won’t be further revised upon arrival.
  6. Be honest about the charger. If you cannot find the original power adapter, answer “No” to the “Will the charger be included?” question. The calculator will apply the deduction upfront, ensuring the inspection goes smoothly.
  7. Remove every lock. Sign out of your Apple ID or Microsoft account, clear any BIOS or firmware password, turn off Find My, and reset the computer to factory settings. A locked device can lose a lot of the buyback value, but resolving this is 100% within your control.

Why We Publish This

Sellers deserve to know the odds before they ship their gadget to us. A buyback quote is only useful if it is reliable, and reliability depends on two things: an honest description from the seller and a fair, explained inspection from us. The figures above represent our side of that bargain. Eight in ten devices are paid in full, the typical revision is modest, and almost everyone who receives an adjusted offer agrees with it once they know why.

We will continue to update these figures as our buyback database grows and testing procedures expand. And if our revision rates move in either direction, we will publish those numbers, too.

Frequently Asked Questions:

How often does Gadget Salvation change the offer after inspection?

The offer was reduced on 17% of inspected devices, 820 of 4,824. Approximately 4% (or 169 gadgets) received a higher valuation offer than quoted. The remaining 79% were paid exactly the amount the calculator showed.

How much is the offer typically reduced?

The median reduction was 9% of the quote, and the average was $39 on an average quote of $416. Most reductions are the result of one condition tier or one missing accessory. Large reductions are rare and almost always involve a non-working device described as functional, a locked device, or a lower-spec/older model than the one quoted.

Do I have to accept a revised offer?

No. You can decline and have the device returned at no cost. Among sellers who received a revised offer, 94% accepted it.

Can the offer go up after inspection?

Yes. Around 4% of inspected devices received a higher offer than quoted, usually because the device had more memory or storage than the seller selected, or was in better cosmetic condition than described.

Which condition tier should I choose?

The one that matches the device. Flawless means you would have to look closely to tell it from new. Good means light, visible wear with nothing cracked, dented, or missing. Fair means visible damage. If you are torn between two tiers, choose the lower one and describe the specific issues in the checklist; a quote that anticipates a problem is not revised for it.

What is the most common reason for a reduced offer?

Cosmetic wear beyond the selected tier, followed by a missing charger or accessory, and then screen defects such as pressure marks and bright spots. Together, those three account for the majority of revisions, and all three can be checked in a few minutes before you ship.

Meta introduces camera-free AI glasses

Confirming earlier reports, Meta announced its first pair of camera-free AI glasses, the clunkily named Ray-Ban Meta Audio, at its Connect 2026 conference on Wednesday. Designed to combat criticism around the more malicious use cases for AI glasses, which saw them nicknamed “pervert glasses” by some, the new devices will be audio-only, offering the ability to listen to music and podcasts, take calls, translate speech, and communicate with Meta’s AI assistant, Muse.

The glasses are designed by Meta’s partner in its AI hardware efforts, EssilorLuxottica, and will start at $349.

While Meta today offers a range of AI glasses in a variety of styles, colors, and capabilities, the audio-only glasses could help the brand recover from some of the reputational damage after critics pointed out how people, often men, were using AI glasses to record videos without subjects’ consent. Meta attempted to mitigate this issue with an update that would disable the camera if the LED light that indicated the glasses were recording was ever tampered with. However, the creepiness factor remained.

This latest device could prove to be more popular for that reason, while also providing an answer to something like Apple’s Siri-powered AirPods.

“Once you get used to high quality audio, it’s just a thing that you want all the time, right?” Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg said during a keynote Wednesday, adding that the company after working on the idea realized it could design a whole new category of glasses around audio glasses.

Image Credits:Meta/Screenshot /

Because they don’t have to house cameras, the glasses are slimmer than Meta’s other models and weigh only 43 grams. They also have adjustable temple tips, swappable nose pads, overextension hinges, and battery life of up to 12 hours on a single charge, Meta claims. With the included charging case, that battery life extends to up to 48 hours.

They’ll also come in a variety of colors and options — 23 color and lens combinations in total — and in two new styles, a retro-inspired “Clubmaster” Ray-Ban style and “Burbank,” described as more of a “classic, timeless, rectangle shape.” Like other Meta glasses, you can order them with your optical prescription as well, if needed.

The glasses will be available for preorder on October 13, the company noted.

Alongside the glasses, Meta announced its next-generation AI glasses (the ones with cameras), the Ray-Ban Meta (Gen 3). In addition to the Ray-Ban Meta Wayfarer, there will also be two new styles, the Aviator and Zena — the latter offering more of a cat-eye frame shape. These will have a 12 MP camera that supports 3K Ultra HD video, a six-mic array, and up to nine hours of battery life.

The glasses Meta launched with EssilorLuxottica will also see an expanded lineup of styles and colors as well as a new partnership with singer Lisa, which follows the company’s earlier brand partnership with Kylie Jenner. The glasses will also be roll out to more countries globally, Meta said.

All of Meta’s AI glasses will, of course, feature access to its newer personal AI assistant, Muse.

The company also teased other coming updates, including support for Dolby Atmos Capture, a feature that picks the best photo from multiple frames, an option to choose landscape or portrait modes, hearing enhancements for those with hearing loss, more detailed responses, different audio modes, customizable controls, and something called “private processing” that Meta claims will prevent the company from seeing your data.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Eight Sleep’s new Pod 6 comes in smaller and solo sizes, starting at $1,999

Sleep tech company Eight Sleep on Wednesday launched its new Pod 6 device in a smaller size than previous editions to fit more bed frames, along with solo sizes for one-person use. The company said that the device can be used to adjust the temperature on either side 20% faster than the previous-generation gadget.

Because the new pod has a 50% smaller footprint, it can fit most bed frames. The company claims the device has 9x more sensors, enabling it to understand granular temperature controls for each user even if they are sleeping close together. Plus, it can ignore data from a pet or a kid sleeping on the bed with two users.

The Pod 6 is available starting today in over 37 countries, starting at $1,999 for solo sizes and at $2,699 for standard sizes. Solo sizes can fit a Twin bed and one side of Queen, King, and California King beds. Standard sizes will be available in Queen, King, and California King. Plus, it can work with existing add-ons like a blanket, pillow cover, and base.

Beyond new sleep products, the company is pursuing Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approval to transition its Eight Sleep Pod into a regulated medical device for sleep apnea in the U.S.

Earlier this year, the company raised $50 million from Tether at a $1.5 billion valuation. Eight Sleep also took steps to expand its international footprint by launching its product in China, Qatar, Bahrain, Kuwait, and Singapore in the last year, with China becoming one of the fastest-growing regions.

The company’s CEO Matteo Franceschetti told TechCrunch that international markets contribute over 30% of revenue. He mentioned that the sleep tech company plans to expand into other regions of Asia and Latin America. Franceschetti noted that the company is keeping a keen eye on the component crunch in the electronics sector, but didn’t say whether it will impact pricing.

“We definitely see the market changing a little bit because AI companies are requesting a lot of different components. We are adjusting our supply chain [to counter that]. It’s definitely something that we need to watch out for, particularly as our devices become more and more, I would say, compute-heavy and intelligent to be able to provide AI features to our users,” he said.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

5 days left to save up to $200 on your Disrupt 2026 ticket

With five days left to save up to $200 on your TechCrunch Disrupt 2026 pass, each day we will list a reason why you should join 10,000+ founders, investors, and operators at San Francisco’s Moscone West on October 13-15.

Grab your ticket savings before prices go up on September 25 at 11:59 p.m. PT. Plus, get a second of the same ticket type at 50% off. Register now.

Reason No. 1: Discovery

Part of the value of Disrupt has always been finding breakouts early. The startup you haven’t heard of yet. The technology moving from experiment to real product. The founder attacking a problem in a way you hadn’t considered. Or an emerging category that suddenly looks much bigger once you see several companies building around it.

Startup Battlefield 200 puts 200 TechCrunch-selected early-stage companies in one place, giving you three days to see what a new generation of founders thinks is worth building, and what investors are looking to add to their portfolio.

See where investors are placing their bets

Early-stage startups can be useful signals. Look across enough of them, and you start to see where founders are finding opportunity, which technologies are becoming accessible, which old problems are being attacked in new ways, and where completely new markets might be taking shape.

At Disrupt, all 200 Startup Battlefield startups exhibit, so you can go beyond the company description. Meet the founders. See the product. Ask why they’re building it. Find out who they’re building it for. Understand what they think the rest of the market is missing.

For investors, that can mean new deal flow and emerging categories to watch. For founders, it’s a chance to see what other early-stage teams are building and how they’re approaching the market. For operators and tech leaders, it can mean discovering a future supplier, partner, or solution before it reaches the wider market.

Sometimes discovery is about finding a company. Sometimes it’s about spotting the pattern behind several of them.

Watch 20 startups put their ideas to the test on the global stage

From the top 200 companies, 20 will take the Disrupt Stage to pitch live in front of leading investors and the TechCrunch community. One will ultimately take home the Disrupt Cup and $100,000 in equity-free funding. Explore all the Startup Battlefield onstage sessions on the Disrupt agenda.

Image Credits:Kimberly White / Getty Images

But the value of watching goes beyond who wins — you get to see emerging companies explain why their problem matters, why their approach is different, and why they believe they can build something much bigger. Then you hear the questions investors ask in return.

For anyone building, backing, or evaluating startups, it’s a fast way to understand what turns an interesting idea into a company people want to pay attention to.

Don’t miss this intense pitch competition and the opportunity to see who’s making waves next in the tech industry. Register now to save up to $200, and bring your colleague, co-founder, or partner with you at 50% off their ticket.

Discover them before anyone else does

Startup Battlefield alumni include companies that went on to become familiar names across the technology industry, including Dropbox, Discord, Cloudflare, Fitbit, Mint, and Trello, with a collective total fundraising of $32 billion since this program started.

Nobody knows which members of the 2026 class will follow that path. Discovery is most valuable before the answer is obvious.

Image Credits:TechCrunch

Meet these 200 hand-picked startups. Talk to companies outside your usual sector. Watch the finalists pitch on the Disrupt Stage. Look for the technologies, business models, and problems that keep appearing.

You might find your next investment, partner, or product. You might spot an emerging market before it reaches your everyday feed. Or you might simply find one startup that changes how you think about what comes next.

5 days left to save up to $200 on your Disrupt pass

Current TechCrunch Disrupt 2026 ticket savings end September 25 at 11:59 p.m. PT. Register now to save up to $200 on your pass and save 50% on a second pass. Or bring a group of four or more to save up to 30%.

Five days to save. A multitude of reasons to join 10,000+ tech leaders in San Francisco. Learn more about all of Disrupt’s activations and the reason it’s been the startup epicenter for at least 15 years. Grab your ticket before prices go up.

Image Credits:Kimberly White / Getty Images

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Laptop Accessories: All the Must-Haves

So you finally bought your dream laptop, congrats! Now it’s time to accessorize and make it uniquely suited for you. Here is a quick…

Updated September 21, 2026 · By James Foleck · Originally published April 8, 2021

The short answer

Most people need three laptop accessories: a padded sleeve or case, a second USB-C charger that matches the laptop’s wattage, and an external mouse. If the laptop is your main computer, add a stand with a full-size keyboard, or an external monitor.

Everything else on this list — docks, power banks, cooling pads, locks — solves one specific problem. Buy it if you have that problem, and skip it if you don’t.

A laptop is built as a compromise: a keyboard fused to a screen, a handful of ports, a battery sized to keep the weight down. The right laptop accessories undo the compromises that affect how you work. The wrong ones add weight to your bag and do very little.

Good laptop accessories also do something less obvious: they protect the laptop itself. Scuffed lids, cracked displays and batteries worn down by heat are the things that move a used laptop’s value when you eventually sell or trade it in. That’s why this guide points out the resale angle wherever it applies.

Laptop accessories, ranked by how many people actually need themAccessoryPriorityWho it’s forCheck before you buySleeve or padded caseEveryoneAnyone who carries the laptopA fit matched to your exact screen size, and padding along the bottom edgeSpare USB-C chargerEveryoneAnyone whose laptop charges over USB-CWattage equal to or higher than the adapter that came in the boxExternal mouseMost peopleAnyone working longer than a quick sessionBluetooth or a USB receiver, and which port the receiver will occupyLaptop stand and keyboardMost peopleAnyone using a laptop as their main computerA stand tall enough to put the top of the screen at or slightly below eye levelExternal monitorMost peopleDesk-based work and multitaskingWhich ports on your laptop can drive a display, and at what resolutionUSB-C hub or dockSituationalLaptops with few ports and several peripheralsWhether your laptop supports USB4 or ThunderboltHeadsetSituationalCalls, gaming and travelWired versus Bluetooth, and microphone qualityPower bankSituationalLong days away from an outletUSB-C Power Delivery output wattage, and the watt-hour rating if you flySecurity lockSituationalShared offices, libraries and cafésYour laptop’s slot type: standard, Nano or WedgeCooling padSituationalGaming laptops under sustained loadFans that line up with your laptop’s intake vents

:::html

Protective cases and sleeves: the accessory that pays you back

Cosmetic condition is one of the first things a buyer checks on a used laptop, and dents, scratches and screen damage all show up in the offer. Our breakdown of the factors that determine a laptop’s resale value goes through them in detail. Of all the laptop accessories on this list, a case is the cheapest protection against most of them.

Sleeve, hard shell, or bag?

  • Padded sleeve. Slides into any backpack or tote and absorbs bumps. The best all-rounder for most people.
  • Snap-on hard shell. Guards the lid and base against scratches during daily use, but adds bulk and can trap grit between the shell and the chassis. Pop it off and clean underneath now and then.
  • Laptop bag or backpack with its own compartment. Adds room for a charger, mouse and cables. Look for a padded compartment that keeps the laptop from resting on the bottom of the bag.

One more caution: according to Apple, charging a device inside certain styles of cases can generate excess heat that affects battery capacity. If your laptop gets hot while it charges in a shell, take the shell off first. For the bigger picture on charging habits, see our explainer on whether keeping your laptop plugged in ruins the battery.

Stand, keyboard, mouse and monitor: turning a laptop into a workstation

Because a laptop’s screen and keyboard are joined, there’s no position where both are right at the same time. Put the keyboard at a comfortable height and the screen is too low, so you end up looking down at it all day.

The Occupational Safety and Health Administration’s workstation guidance is specific. It recommends placing a monitor so the top of the screen is at or slightly below eye level, at a viewing distance of 20 to 40 inches, with the center of the screen 15 to 20 degrees below eye level. It also advises that when laptops are used as primary work computers for intensive keyboard work, auxiliary full-size keyboards and monitors should be provided.

Laptop stand and external keyboard

This is the cheapest way to hit those numbers. A stand raises the laptop’s own screen toward eye level, and a separate keyboard brings your hands back down to a comfortable height. The pairing folds flat, so it works in a home office and when you travel.

Mouse

A touchpad is fine for quick tasks. For long sessions, spreadsheets, design work or gaming, a mouse is more precise and easier on your wrist. A Bluetooth mouse keeps your ports free. A mouse with a USB receiver takes up a port but skips the pairing step. Gamers usually prefer a wired or dedicated low-latency wireless mouse.

External monitor

A second screen is the biggest productivity upgrade on this list if you work at a desk. Before you buy one, check which of your laptop’s ports can output video (HDMI, or a USB-C port with DisplayPort support) and the highest resolution and refresh rate they support. If you need a second screen on the move, our look at dual-screen laptops and what remote workers think of them covers the built-in alternative.

USB-C hubs vs. docking stations: which one do you need?

Thin laptops keep losing ports. Plenty of current models have two USB-C ports and nothing else, and one of them is taken whenever you’re charging. A hub or dock gives you the rest back. The two terms get used interchangeably, but they aren’t the same product.

USB-C hubs, USB4/Thunderbolt 4 docks and Thunderbolt 5 docks comparedTypeBandwidthLaptop chargingBest forPortable USB-C hubLimited to what the laptop’s USB-C port supports, shared across every device on the hubVaries; many pass through power from your chargerTravel: an extra USB-A port, HDMI and an SD card readerUSB4 or Thunderbolt 4 dock40 GbpsVaries by model; check it against your laptop’s adapterA one-cable desk setup with displays, Ethernet and peripheralsThunderbolt 5 dock80 Gbps, or up to 120 Gbps for videoThe Thunderbolt 5 spec calls for at least 140 WHigh-resolution displays, fast external storage and creative workloads

Bandwidth figures are interface maximums. Tom’s Hardware reports that Thunderbolt 5 supports 80 Gbps transfers and up to 120 Gbps for video; the 140 W charging floor is from Tom’s Guide. What you actually get depends on the port on your laptop.

For most people, the middle row is the sweet spot. PCWorld’s dock reviewer notes that laptops with AMD Ryzen chips use USB4 rather than Thunderbolt 4, and the two are essentially interchangeable, and that Thunderbolt 5 docks are currently better suited to Macs driving higher-resolution displays.

How to choose

  • Check your laptop’s port first. A lightning-bolt icon beside the port, or “USB4” or “Thunderbolt” on the spec sheet, means a full dock will work at full speed. A plain USB-C port calls for a hub.
  • Match the charging wattage. If the dock will also charge your laptop, its power output should meet or exceed the adapter your laptop shipped with.
  • Count your displays. Multi-monitor support varies by dock and by laptop, and it’s the spec that most often disappoints.
  • Don’t overlook cable length. A tethered cable that’s too short dictates where the laptop has to sit on your desk.

Chargers and power banks: reading the wattage correctly

USB-C laptops negotiate power with the charger through a standard called USB Power Delivery, so the number to compare is watts, not volts. According to the USB Implementers Forum, USB Power Delivery was limited to 100 W, using 20 V on cables rated at 5 A, until revision 3.1 raised the ceiling to 240 W.

  • Spare charger. Match or exceed the wattage of the adapter that came with your laptop. A lower-wattage charger may still work, but it charges slowly and may not keep up with the laptop under heavy load.
  • Cables matter above 100 W. Laptops that draw more than 100 W over USB-C need a charger and a cable rated for the higher power range. The packaging will say 240 W.
  • Power bank. Look for a USB-C Power Delivery output rated close to your laptop’s adapter. A bank designed around phones will charge a laptop slowly, if it charges it at all.

Flying with a power bank

Federal Aviation Administration rules apply to every spare lithium-ion battery, including power banks. The FAA says spare lithium batteries and power banks must be carried on and cannot be checked, and sets limits by watt-hour rating:

FAA limits for spare lithium-ion batteries and power banks on passenger flightsBattery ratingCarry-on bagChecked bagApproval100 Wh or lessAllowedNot allowedNone needed101 to 160 WhAllowed, up to two spares per personNot allowedAirline approval requiredOver 160 WhNot allowedNot allowedForbidden on passenger aircraft

Airlines can set stricter limits than the FAA, including on how many power banks each passenger may bring. Check with your carrier before you fly.

If your power bank lists only milliamp-hours, ABC News explains the conversion: divide the mAh figure by 1,000 and multiply by the battery voltage, usually 3.7 volts. A 20,000 mAh bank works out to about 74 Wh, and a 26,800 mAh bank to about 99 Wh. Both are under the 100 Wh line.

Do laptop cooling pads work?

Yes, but not the way their marketing suggests. When Laptop Mag tested 12 cooling pads across three laptops, the pads lowered temperatures, but in a demanding game the frame-rate gains never amounted to a full additional frame per second. The pads also added noise, measuring between 48 and 55 decibels.

PCWorld reaches a similar conclusion. It recommends cleaning dust out of an older laptop first, then trying pads while monitoring temperatures with a free tool such as HWiNFO, because results vary from one laptop and pad design to the next.

When a cooling pad makes sense

  • You play or render on a gaming laptop for hours at a time, and the underside gets uncomfortably hot.
  • The pad’s fans line up with the laptop’s intake vents. A pad that blows air at solid plastic does very little.
  • You want a better typing angle. Many pads double as a stand.

Free fixes come first: work on a hard, flat surface instead of a bed or couch, keep the vents clear, and clean out the dust. If a fan has become loud, our guide to fixing a noisy laptop fan walks through the causes.

Headsets and headphones: wired or wireless?

Built-in laptop speakers and microphones are designed around size, not sound quality, so a headset is worth having for video calls, travel and gaming. The choice comes down to how you connect it.

  • Bluetooth. No cable, and the same pair works with your phone. It needs charging, and it adds a small audio delay that you can notice in fast-paced games.
  • Wired (3.5 mm or USB-C). Nothing to charge or pair, and no wireless delay. Many phones no longer have a 3.5 mm jack, so if you want one pair for everything, check both devices’ ports.
  • Gaming headsets with a USB dongle. Wireless freedom with lower latency than standard Bluetooth, at the cost of one USB port.

If calls are your main use, compare microphones first. The people on the other end hear your mic, not your headphones.

Laptop security: physical locks and software tracking

A cable lock won’t stop a determined thief, but it does stop the opportunistic grab in a library, coworking space or café. The catch is that lock slots are no longer universal. Kensington, which introduced the security slot in the early 1990s, now describes three common slot standards:

Laptop security slot types and where you’ll find themSlot typeWhat it isCommonly found onStandard K-SlotThe original Kensington slot, used with a T-bar lockMany business laptops, docking stations and monitorsNano slotAbout 70% smaller than the standard slot, built for ultra-thin devicesNewer thin laptops from brands including HP, Lenovo and ASUSWedge slotA slim slot that needs a lock labeled “Wedge” or “N17”Most Dell laptops

Some ultra-thin laptops have no slot at all. Check your laptop’s sides for a small opening marked with a padlock icon, or look up the model’s spec sheet. Universal locks that fit all three slot types are available.

Turn on tracking today, not after it’s gone

The most effective anti-theft accessory is free, and it has to be set up before you need it. Microsoft says Windows’ Find my device feature needs to be turned on before you can use it, and requires signing in with a Microsoft account that has administrator rights. On a Mac, Apple notes that adding your Mac to Find My automatically turns on Activation Lock.

Remember to reverse this before you sell. A laptop that is still tied to your account can’t be reset by its next owner. Our guide to protecting your privacy when selling a laptop covers the full sign-out checklist.

Resale value: how accessories protect what your laptop is worth

Laptop accessories themselves are rarely where the money is. Their value is in what they prevent: a scratched lid, a cracked display, a keyboard worn shiny, a battery aged early by heat. Those are exactly the things that separate a top-condition quote from an average one.

When it’s time to upgrade, Gadget Salvation buys used laptops directly, including MacBooks. There’s no listing to write and no buyer to negotiate with. Each quote is priced to live market data and made case by case, and the offer is locked before you ship. You can follow the whole process on our how it works page. If you still have the original charger, keep it with the laptop, and before you send anything, follow our guide to cleaning and resetting your laptop before selling.

Why this matters beyond your wallet

The US Environmental Protection Agency advises people to consider upgrading a computer’s hardware or software instead of buying a brand-new product. A new charger, a dock or a monitor that makes an older laptop comfortable to use is that advice in practice.

When a laptop does reach the end of its time with you, keeping it in service beats sending it to scrap. The EPA cites a US Geological Survey estimate that recycling one million laptops saves energy equivalent to the electricity used by more than 3,500 US homes in a year. Reselling a working machine goes a step further, because the energy and materials already spent building it keep doing useful work.

Frequently asked questions

What laptop accessories do I actually need?

Most people need three: a padded sleeve or case, a spare USB-C charger that matches the laptop’s original wattage, and an external mouse. If the laptop is your main computer, add a stand with a full-size keyboard or an external monitor. OSHA’s workstation guidance recommends auxiliary keyboards and monitors when a laptop is used for intensive work. Docks, power banks, cooling pads and locks each solve a specific problem and are optional.

Is a USB-C hub the same as a docking station?

No. A USB-C hub is a small, usually portable adapter that shares one USB-C port’s bandwidth across extra ports such as USB-A, HDMI and an SD card reader. A docking station connects over USB4 or Thunderbolt at 40 Gbps or faster, typically charges the laptop, and is built to run displays, Ethernet and peripherals through a single cable at a desk.

What wattage charger or power bank does my laptop need?

Match or exceed the wattage of the adapter that came with your laptop, and look for USB-C Power Delivery support. According to the USB Implementers Forum, USB Power Delivery covers up to 100 W at 20 V, and revision 3.1 extends it to 240 W. Laptops that draw more than 100 W need a charger and cable rated for the higher range.

Can I take a laptop power bank on a plane?

Yes, in your carry-on bag only. The FAA prohibits spare lithium batteries and power banks in checked baggage. Power banks rated at 100 Wh or less need no approval, those between 101 and 160 Wh need airline approval and are limited to two spares per person, and anything over 160 Wh is forbidden. Airlines can set stricter limits, so check with your carrier.

Do laptop cooling pads really work?

They lower temperatures, but they are not a meaningful performance upgrade. In Laptop Mag’s test of 12 cooling pads, gaming frame-rate gains never reached a full additional frame per second. PCWorld recommends cleaning dust out of the laptop first and checking temperatures with a monitoring tool before and after adding a pad.

Is it safe to use a webcam cover or keyboard cover on a MacBook?

Only if you remove it before closing the lid. Apple says the clearance between a Mac notebook’s display and keyboard is engineered to tight tolerances, and that camera covers, palm rest covers and keyboard covers can damage the display if they are left on when it is closed. Apple advises removing any camera cover thicker than 0.1 mm, about the thickness of printer paper, before closing the laptop.

Do accessories help my laptop’s resale value?

Indirectly. The accessories themselves are rarely worth much, but a case, a sleeve and sensible charging habits prevent the scratches, screen damage and heat-related battery wear that lower a used laptop’s value. Gadget Salvation quotes each laptop case by case against live market data, so a laptop in better condition receives a better offer.

Sources

  • OSHA — Computer Workstations eTool: Monitors — Recommended monitor height, 20 to 40 inch viewing distance, and 15 to 20 degree downward viewing angle.
  • OSHA — Computer Workstations eTool: Additional Information — Guidance to provide auxiliary full-size keyboards and monitors when laptops are primary work computers.
  • Apple — Using a camera cover, palm rest, or keyboard cover on a Mac notebook — Tight display clearance and the instruction to remove covers before closing the display.
  • Apple — Don’t close your MacBook, MacBook Air, or MacBook Pro with a cover over the camera — The 0.1 mm camera-cover thickness guideline.
  • Apple — Maximizing Battery Life and Lifespan — Ideal temperature range, the 95°F damage threshold, heat from charging in cases, and 50% storage charge.
  • USB Implementers Forum — USB Charger (USB Power Delivery) — The previous 100 W / 20 V / 5 A limit and the 240 W ceiling in USB PD revision 3.1.
  • Tom’s Hardware — Thunderbolt coverage — Thunderbolt 5 bandwidth: 80 Gbps transfers and up to 120 Gbps for video.
  • Tom’s Guide — Thunderbolt 5 vs Thunderbolt 4: Everything you need to know — The Thunderbolt 5 minimum of 140 W charging power.
  • PCWorld — Best Thunderbolt docks 2026 — USB4 and Thunderbolt 4 interchangeability on Ryzen laptops, and Thunderbolt 5 docks’ suitability for Macs.
  • Federal Aviation Administration — Airline Passengers and Batteries — Carry-on-only rule and watt-hour limits for spare lithium batteries and power banks.
  • ABC News — One Tech Tip: What to know about flying with lithium ion portable battery chargers — The mAh-to-watt-hour conversion method.
  • Laptop Mag — Does anybody really need a laptop cooling pad? — Test of 12 pads: sub-one-frame gaming gains and 48 to 55 dB noise levels.
  • PCWorld — Are laptop cooling pads worth it? Yes, but it’s complicated — Clean dust first; monitor temperatures with HWiNFO when testing pads.
  • Kensington — Types of Laptop Locks: K-Slot, Nano and Wedge Explained — Security slot types, sizes and the brands that use each.
  • Microsoft Support — Find and lock a lost Windows device — Find my device must be enabled in advance with an administrator Microsoft account.
  • Apple Support — Set up Find My on Mac — Activation Lock turns on automatically when a Mac is added to Find My.
  • US Environmental Protection Agency — Electronics Donation and Recycling — Upgrade-before-replace guidance and the USGS energy-equivalence estimate for recycling laptops.

Last reviewed September 21, 2026. Connector standards, airline battery rules and product specifications change; check current guidance before you buy or fly.

Oura’s $2.2B IPO is mostly a payday for existing shareholders

Smart ring maker Oura is looking to raise as much as $2.2 billion in its upcoming IPO, but it looks like its current investors will be the ones making money in the process.

According to the company’s updated IPO filing, Oura and its shareholders are together offering 50 million shares at a price range of $40 to $44 each. But most of the IPO’s proceeds will go to shareholders, who are offering 36.5 million shares, or almost two-thirds of the total.

If the company lists at $42 per share, the midpoint of the price range, that would result in proceeds of about $1.53 billion for the shareholders and $567 million for the company, before fees and expenses.

The bulk of that will go to Forerunner Ventures, the company’s second-largest shareholder. The venture firm plans to sell its entire 9.3% stake of about 28.7 million shares for about $1.20 billion (assuming the shares list at $42) before underwriting fees and taxes. Forerunner’s shares account for nearly 80% of the shares being sold by existing shareholders in the deal.

Forerunner first invested in Oura in the company’s 2020 $28 million Series B round, according to PitchBook.

Meanwhile, Oura doesn’t look to be treating this IPO as a fundraising event. At the $42 midpoint, the company expects net proceeds of $532.6 million, and plans to use about $526.4 million to pay off accumulated tax obligations related to employee share grants that will vest at the time of the IPO.

That would leave the company with roughly $6.2 million for general corporate purposes, according to the filing.

In a way, this is kind of a flex by Oura, which is essentially using this IPO to give its early backers an exit. It’s also fulfilling tax obligations without turning to debt, as companies sometimes do, or touching its cash, which sat at about $372 million at the end of June.

The offering comes as Oura is growing quickly, with subscriptions becoming a larger source of revenue. The membership business is seemingly a very profitable endeavor for Oura, with an 89% gross margin. Membership revenue more than doubled to $240.5 million in the period, accounting for about 20% of the company’s sales. Hardware still made up most of the company’s revenue, at $974 million.

Oura now expects to finish the fiscal year ending September 30 with about 5.7 million paying members, which would nearly double the number from a year earlier.

Oura could end up with a market cap of $14.1 billion if it lists at the top of the proposed price range.

The company was valued at approximately $11 billion in October 2025, when it raised $900 million in a round that was led by Fidelity and saw participation from ICONIQ, Whale Rock, and Atreides. It had raised $200 million at a $5.2 billion valuation less than a year earlier. The company has raised about $2.06 billion to date, according to PitchBook.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Google’s $899 Googlebook is a bet that you’ll buy a new laptop for Gemini

After first unveiling its new AI-powered laptop, dubbed Googlebook, in May, Google on Monday said the new device is now available for pre-order for $899.

Meant to offer a step up from traditional Chromebooks, Googlebooks run on Android OS with a desktop version of the Chrome browser and other familiar ChromeOS elements. However, the real pull for the new devices is that they’ll prominently feature Gemini’s latest capabilities in a new format: the laptop.

Google is trying to offer a laptop with unique features like an AI-powered cursor, vibe-coded widgets, and support for AI-enhanced dictation. The latter is a feature called Rambler, which cleans up messy, rambling brain dumps into readable text.

The move is a bet that AI, specifically Google’s Gemini, could be enough of a draw to get people to buy a new laptop that bakes in AI instead of running them via desktop apps you install or access through the browser. In addition, the devices could eventually replace Chromebooks, bringing millions of former Chromebook customers to Gemini AI.

On the Googlebook, Google is trying to reinvent the “point-and-click” experience of desktop computing to now include an AI element: the cursor serves as a conduit to Gemini. The company suggests various ways this could be used, like highlighting content on a webpage for Gemini to work with, asking Gemini to see if an email you’ve hovered your cursor over is suspicious, or selecting images and then asking Gemini to visualize them together.

Image Credits:Google

In practice, this feature isn’t very different from Android’s “Circle to Search,” which allows smartphone owners to use gestures like circling, highlighting, or tapping to connect with Google Search, which of course, also includes AI. While it’s a clever way to take advantage of the ways people use their phones, Circle to Search on its own didn’t inspire a mass exodus to Android.

Similarly, Magic Cursor, as the AI pointer is called, won’t likely be a main selling point for the Googlebook, especially now that we have AI agents that can take over your computer and browser to do tasks for you.

Google’s Rambler, however, may be one of the best of the AI features in this upgrade, as it meets a surprisingly useful need. However, this, too, isn’t enough reason to buy a new device, as it feels more like a feature that’s nice to have than a necessity.

Image Credits:Google

Vibe-coding widgets are a minor addition, as well. Other Googlebook features, like Gemini Spark and Gemini Live, also don’t require special, new hardware.

What’s more interesting about the Googlebook is how it’s seemingly part of Google’s longer-term plan to capture a large part of the K-12 market that currently relies on Chromebooks, and push them towards the company’s Gemini AI. There are somewhere around 50 million Chromebooks in schools, used by students and educators, Google has said.

In May, the company told TechCrunch that its current Chromebooks would continue to be supported, though many would become eligible to transition to the new Googlebook experience in the future.

Image Credits:Google

The $899 device will include 12 months of Google AI Pro, which gives you 5TB of cloud storage, Gemini Advanced tools, and 3 months of YouTube Premium, Adobe Photoshop and more. The devices will receive regular updates for up to 10 years, Google said.

Googlebook pre-orders are open now on the Google Store, Best Buy, and other retailers. Devices will hit shelves on October 4 in the U.S., and October 5 in Canada, the U.K., Ireland, France, Germany, and Australia.

Flagship devices in the new range are being built by Acer, ASUS, Dell, HP and Lenovo, with materials like aluminum, magnesium alloy and carbon fiber. They feature up to 2.8K OLED displays, haptic glass trackpads, and backlit keyboards. Under the hood, they’ll run on processors from Intel and Qualcomm paired with dedicated NPUs. Google says the device will offer up to 14 hours of battery life.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

How AI Is Reshaping Used Electronics Resale

Three forces are acting on the secondhand market at once, and they don’t all push the same direction.

Ask what AI is doing to electronics resale, and the usual answer is “better pricing algorithms.” That’s true, but it’s the least interesting part of the story.
The bigger shift is that AI is acting on used tech from three directions at once: as a demand shock in the components market, as an inspection technology on the warehouse floor, and as a new layer between buyers and listings. Those forces don’t agree with each other. One is quietly adjusting what your three-year-old laptop is worth. One is streamlining the listing process. And one is rewriting who decides what a shopper sees.
Here is how each one works, and what it means if you are the person with an old gadget sitting in a drawer.

AI is Making Your Old Laptop More Valuable for This One Component

The most direct effect AI has had on resale value now has less to do with the brand and release year. It is memory.

AI accelerators need high-bandwidth memory, and it is manufactured on the same wafers as the DDR5 and NAND that go into laptops, phones, and consoles. The three companies that make nearly all the world’s DRAM have been steering capacity toward the higher-margin product. J.P. Morgan Global Research estimates DRAM prices will have climbed more than 400% from the start of 2024 through the end of 2026, and IDC projected 2026 DRAM supply growth at roughly 16% year over year, below what the market needs.

The mechanism matters more than any single figure: AI demand is raising the cost of new hardware, and the resale floor is rising underneath it. That is a change in the shape of depreciation, not a marketing line.

As a result, new hardware costs more. And when prices go up, many turn to pre-owned alternatives. Assurant reports that consumer interest in buying a certified pre-owned device rose from 17% in 2024 to 25% in 2026. Drawing on Counterpoint data, the same analysis notes refurbished smartphone sales grew 6% year over year in the second half of 2025 and are projected to rise around 11% in 2026, while new shipments are expected to decline.

A Camera Now Can Grade the Condition

Used electronics have always had an honest disclosure problem. The seller is presumed to know relevant details about the device they are selling. And the buyer expects those details to be disclosed. That’s where the disconnect often takes place. Economists call this the “lemons problem”, and it’s why secondhand markets have historically priced everything as though it might be the worst version of itself. The discount buyers demand is not really about wear. It is about uncertainty.

AI-assisted grading attacks that directly. Computer vision systems photograph a gadget and rate its cosmetic condition against a trained standard, not a technician’s subjective judgment alone. Automated diagnostic rigs run functional tests for screen dead zones, camera lens haze, touch response, audio distortion, and battery health, then attach the evidence to the grade.

The scale is real. Assurant, a U.S. company that grades trade-ins and returns on behalf of carriers and retailers, says it processed 13.5 million devices globally in 2025 through a recovery network reaching 1,500 downstream partners across 33 countries, using AI-assisted diagnostics.

Two consequences follow:

1 – Grades get more consistent. The classic trade-in dispute — you said Good, they are calling it Fair — comes from two humans applying a fuzzy standard on different days. A model applying a fixed standard with photographic evidence attached narrows that gap considerably.

2 – The demand for reconditioned tech grows. Of the 162.8 million refurbished smartphones sold worldwide in the second half of 2025, Counterpoint data cited by Assurant shows 52.9 million changed hands with no mechanical work performed: wiped, cleaned, reboxed, sold. The other 109.8 million were repaired first. Dependable grading is precisely what makes that no-repair channel safe to operate at volume.

If you want the underlying variables grading systems actually score, we broke them down in our “How much your laptop is worth and the factors that determine resale value” blog post.

The third force gets the least attention from sellers, but it may matter most in the coming years.

eBay has rolled out a conversational AI shopping agent to a share of U.S. customers, surfacing inline on the page to help with product discovery rather than waiting for a keyword search, Retail Dive reported. In its own 2026 outlook, eBay leadership described a shift from transactional to agentic commerce, with AI handling verification and other nuanced steps of a transaction from beginning to end.

But here is the complication: Platforms want to control the agents. eBay moved to restrict third-party “buy-for-me” bots from transacting on its marketplace, following a similar tightening at Amazon, as covered by EMARKETER. In other words, marketplaces are betting on AI-driven search discovery, as long as it’s their agents doing the searching.

The NPU is Splitting the Used Market in Two

A fourth effect emerges from the first three: the divide between pre- and post-AI-release pre-owned technology.

This divide hurts the resale value of computers and smartphones released before 2024. Models without AI capabilities depreciate faster than they normally would over the same period. At the same time, memory crunch slows this rapid resale value decline. 

Here is the whole picture overview:

Four AI forces and which way each one pushes used device valueForceHow it worksDirection on used valueWhat to do about itMemory demand from AI data centersHBM production crowds out the consumer DRAM and NAND that new devices need, raising new prices UpwardLifts the floorStop assuming last year’s depreciation curve still applies to your deviceAI grading and automated diagnosticsVision models and test rigs score condition against a fixed standard and attach evidence UpwardShrinks the uncertainty discountPhotograph and document real condition before shipping; accuracy now paysAgentic discovery and AI searchConversational agents mediate what buyers see; platforms are restricting outside agents IndirectShifts where demand landsChoose the channel by where buyer traffic actually is, not by habitThe NPU capability lineA hard boundary between NPU-equipped machines and everything older DownwardPremium pre-NPU models give up ground fasterIf your machine sits just below the line, selling sooner beats waiting

What Does All of This Mean for the Resale Value of Your Tech?

Essentially, the practical read is this: Used gadgets most exposed to the downside are consumer-grade models that sit one generation below a capability line (pre-AI tech) and are being held rather than sold. 

The cause for wasted value, though, is often not depreciation but inertia. Counterpoint counted 494 million pre-owned smartphones globally in the second half of 2025 and found that only 178 million of them were actually resold. The remaining 316 million went into drawers or became spares, so no materials returned to circulation.

That gap is worth closing, and it is why the reselling side of the market matters as much as the recycling side. At Gadget Salvation, we calculate buyback offers against current resale market data rather than a fixed depreciation schedule. The secondary market moves constantly—that is the whole point of this article—and a valuation built on last year’s trends gets old before you finish reading it. The variables are the same ones AI grading systems evaluate: model, configuration, functional condition, cosmetic condition, and live demand for that specific gadget. The offer is locked for 30 days, so any market shift between your checkout and our receiving the shipment is our headache, not yours. Extending the life of a working device is the whole point. Every used laptop, smartphone, or tablet that gets a second owner is one that doesn’t need to be manufactured and doesn’t become e-waste.

An Algorithmic Offer is Still an Algorithm

One thing is worth noting: automated pricing is under active scrutiny in the United States. The Federal Trade Commission has sought public comment on a proposed enforcement policy statement covering personalized pricing — the practice of using a consumer’s own data to estimate what they will pay — and several states have moved on disclosure requirements or outright restrictions, as Wiley summarizes.

Most of that activity targets consumer-facing retail rather than buyback, and the two are genuinely different: a trade-in quote is an offer made to you, not a price extracted from you. But the underlying principle travels. An automated valuation is a set of assumptions someone chose, expressed as a number. A model generating it doesn’t make an offer fair, and it doesn’t make it unfair either. It makes it worth checking.

Frankly, no platform in the recommerce category volunteers its valuation model, and ours is no exception. Pricing logic is competitive information, and logic that tracks a market moving this fast would be out of date the moment it was published as a fixed statement anyway. So do not evaluate a platform on whether it shows you the arithmetic. Evaluate it on whether it stands behind the number it gave you.

Three questions to ask any buyback company:

  • What specifically does each condition grade mean, in plain language?
  • What can prompt a price revision after inspection?
  • If the offer is revised downward and I reject it, do I get the device back at no cost?

Conclusion

AI is changing the electronics resale space in several ways. Rebuilding discovery around agents and reshaping demand for older tech are just a few of the more obvious ones. It has also drawn a spec line that is widening the gap between the top and bottom of the used market further.

One thing doesn’t change: a depreciating gadget that stays in a drawer is worth nothing to you and nothing to the planet. That part is still entirely manual.

Sources:

  • J.P. Morgan Global Research — The AI-Driven Memory Shortage: DRAM Prices, Inflation and Market Risks — Estimates that DRAM prices rise more than 400% from the start of 2024 through the end of 2026.
  • IDC — Global Memory Shortage Crisis: Market Analysis and the Potential Impact on the Smartphone and PC Markets in 2026 — 2026 DRAM supply growth of roughly 16% year over year.
  • Consumer Reports — With AI Data Centers Scooping up RAM, Laptop Prices Could Spike in 2026 — The chain from open-ended hyperscaler memory orders through to higher retail laptop prices.
  • Tom’s Hardware — Memory price surge begins to cool as consumers hit affordability limit — Contract prices still climbing through the third quarter of 2026 at a slowing rate, citing TrendForce.
  • Assurant — DRAM demand is shifting the smartphone supply conversation — Certified pre-owned consumer interest rising from 17% in 2024 to 25% in 2026; refurbished smartphone sales up 6% year over year in H2 2025 and projected to rise roughly 11% in 2026; the 15% to 20% seasonal decline in pre-owned pricing; 13.5 million devices processed in 2025 across 1,500 downstream partners in 33 countries; AI-assisted diagnostics in grading.
  • Retail Dive — eBay’s conversational AI shopping agent rollout — Staged release of eBay’s shopping agent to a portion of U.S. customers, surfacing inline for product discovery.
  • eBay Inc. — AI Trends to Watch In 2026 — The shift from transactional to agentic commerce, and AI helping shoppers discover pre-owned alternatives.
  • EMARKETER — eBay joins Amazon in tightening control over AI shopping agents — Both marketplaces restricting third-party “buy-for-me” agents from transacting.
  • IDC, via AMD-commissioned white paper — The Rise of AI PCs in the Commercial Market — The IDC definition of an AI PC as CPU, GPU, and NPU on one physical processor, and Microsoft’s Copilot+ threshold of 40 TOPS.
  • Gartner — Gartner Forecasts Worldwide Shipments of AI PCs to Account for 43% of All PCs in 2025 — AI PCs at 43% of PC shipments and AI laptops at 51% of the laptop market in 2025, and the projection that AI laptops become the only option for large businesses in 2026.
  • Wiley — Algorithmic Pricing Attracts Widespread Scrutiny as FTC Seeks Comment on Personalized Pricing Policy Statement — The FTC comment period on personalized pricing and related state-level disclosure requirements and restrictions.

I tried Tovala’s smart oven for two weeks — here’s whether it beats takeout

I tried Tovala’s smart oven for two weeks to see if it could actually make dinner as easy as the company promises. It won’t replace the quality of a good home-cooked meal, and some dishes turned out better than others, but it’s hard to beat the convenience on days when you absolutely don’t want to cook.

This was exactly the challenge that Tovala co-founder and CEO David Rabie aimed to address. 

“The idea originated from my own struggles in business school. I was often busy and sought a solution as convenient as takeout or frozen meals, yet still wanted the experience of a genuine home-cooked dish,” Rabie told TechCrunch via email.

“One afternoon, I was making a meal using several different appliances and realized that I was mostly just pressing buttons,” he said. “That’s what led to the idea for an end-to-end system: fresh, mostly prepped meals paired with a connected oven that could cook them automatically. The challenge became figuring out how to remove all that friction without sacrificing the experience of eating food that was actually cooked fresh at home.”

The idea is pretty simple: Tovala sends you meals with the ingredients already portioned out, and its smart oven handles the cooking.

Instead of chopping vegetables, measuring ingredients, figuring out cooking temperatures, and standing over a stove, you mostly just unwrap everything, follow simple instructions like adding packets of seasoning, put everything in the provided trays, scan a QR code using the companion app, and let the oven do the rest. 

The countertop-sized oven follows the cooking instructions automatically, switching temperatures and cooking modes throughout the process. It can bake, broil, air fry, toast, and reheat. The regular oven costs $299, while the Smart Oven Pro costs $349 and adds a steam function.

Image Credits:Tovala

As for the meal-delivery side, there are more than 45 meals to choose from each week. For instance, steak and garlic mashed potatoes, salmon with vegetables, butternut squash soup, pasta dishes, and more. 

There are also plenty of options when it comes to how much food you want delivered. Meal plans include 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, or 16 meals per week. You can skip deliveries, pause your plan, or cancel if you don’t need meals that week. 

The meals aren’t exactly cheap, though. Single-serving meals start at $13.99, and two-serving meals start at around $8.99 per serving — $17.98 total — plus a $10.99 shipping fee. The company also recently launched family-sized meals, starting at $35.96. Unlike meal-delivery rivals like HelloFresh, Tovala is essentially betting that you’re willing to pay for the added convenience of having most of the cooking handled for you. 

Taste and quality were the parts I was most skeptical about going in. I’m not a professional chef by any means, but I’ve recently gotten much more interested in cooking. Once you start learning how to properly sear meat, roast vegetables, and build flavor yourself, it’s hard not to be suspicious of a machine that promises to do all of that for you.

The biggest downside for me was the texture of the meats and how they cooked in the oven. I like a steak with a nice crust, so I finished mine in a steel pan for some extra browning. The steak was much better afterward, but that obviously defeats the point of a process that’s supposed to be mostly hands-off.

Not every dish had that problem, though. One of my favorites was the pineapple shrimp stir-fry. The rice was well cooked, and the sauce had plenty of flavor. It wasn’t necessarily something I’d rave about compared with a great restaurant meal, but it was easy, satisfying, and required very little effort.

Image Credits:Tovala

What I appreciated most, however, was the grocery-food feature that gives the oven some use beyond cooking Tovala-branded meals. The oven can recognize certain grocery-store products, so instead of guessing how long your frozen waffles need to toast, you can scan the barcode and let the oven automatically select the appropriate settings.

That’s what makes Tovala feel more like a genuinely smart oven, not just a machine built to cook its own meal kits. Even if you stop ordering Tovala meals, you can still use the oven with compatible grocery products.

Overall, if your alternative to cooking is ordering takeout because you’re too tired to cook, Tovala makes a pretty compelling case for itself.

Tovala is available on the company’s website and Amazon. It ships to most U.S. states, but it doesn’t currently ship to Alaska or Hawaii.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

How Fortell is using AI (and $163M) to crack a hearing aid monopoly 

“Why do I have to beg my grandparents to put on their hearing aids, but no one has ever needed to ask me to put on my glasses?” 

That’s the question that drove Matthew de Jonge to spend six years building Fortell, an AI hearing aid startup that recently raised $163 million from the likes of Founders Fund, Thrive Capital, and Valor Equity Partners CEO Antonio Gracias. The buzzy startup aims to build hearing aids that understand the sounds around you in real time, figure out what’s important and turn down the rest — instead of turning everything up at the same time, as most hearing aids do.  

On this episode of TechCrunch’s Equity Equity podcast, Rebecca Bellan is joined by de Jonge to break down what it takes to disrupt a decades-old industry where five companies make 97% of the products, insurance won’t cover the cost, and innovation has been slow to arrive. 

Subscribe to Equity on YouTube, Apple Podcasts, Overcast, Spotify and all the casts. You also can follow Equity on X and Threads, at @EquityPod. 

Your AI agents can now control your Google Home devices

Smart home owners will soon be able to control their devices connected to Google Home via an AI agent. On Tuesday, Google rolled out early access to its Model Context Protocol (MCP) server for its Google Home ecosystem, which will allow any AI agent that supports MCP — like Claude, Hermes, OpenClaw, ChatGPT, and Google Antigravity — to securely work with their smart home devices and access their event history.

This update will allow people to use natural language instructions to do things like review their camera summaries, monitor smart home activity, control their connected devices, and build their own custom smart home dashboards.

To get the connection set up, users will need to create a Google Cloud project and configure it to use Home MCP. They will then provide the MCP configuration details to their agent of choice and ask it to set it up. The agent will then ask them to sign in and grant permissions. (A setup guide will also be offered in the Google Home Developer Center.)

The system will support any device in the Google Home ecosystem, including Google Nest doorbells and thermostats and “Works with Google Home” (or Matter) devices, like light bulbs.

Google already supports MCP in other areas of its business, including in its Google Cloud and data platforms, developer tools, and Google Workspace, for instance. Support for Google Home is targeted more directly at consumers who are experimenting with AI agents designed to handle everyday tasks.

The company said access to the MCP will roll out starting today and continuing over the coming weeks to subscribers who pay for Google Home Premium Advanced in the U.S. This is the more expensive, $20-per-month subscription tier that provides features like longer event-based video history, descriptive notifications and detailed alerts, tools to search video history, daily summaries, and more.

Google wouldn’t comment on if or when the MCP would roll out more broadly, such as to other subscription tiers or markets.

Google is also soliciting feedback from early adopters during this period by way of its Smart Home for Developers Community, it says.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Here are the VCs judging in Startup Battlefield 200 Disrupt 2026

A great pitch doesn’t win Startup Battlefield 200. A great company does.

That’s why the VCs sitting in the judges’ seats matter so much. They aren’t looking for polished presentations or clever demos — they’re looking for founders solving real problems with businesses that can endure. Every question they ask is designed to uncover what slides and rehearsed answers can’t: conviction, clarity, execution, and whether this company has the potential to become the next category leader.

For more than 15 years, Startup Battlefield has helped launch companies that went on to define entire markets, and every year a new group of founders earns the chance to join that legacy.

Image Credits:Kimberly White / Getty Images

Today, we’re introducing the next wave of judges who’ll take their seats at TechCrunch Disrupt 2026, happening on October 13-15 at Moscone West in San Francisco. They’ll spend each day evaluating ambitious startups across industries, asking the tough questions founders hope for — and sometimes fear. If you want to understand how experienced investors really evaluate early-stage companies, there’s no better place to watch than Startup Battlefield, live on the Disrupt Stage.

Be sure to snag savings of up to $200 on your Disrupt 2026 ticket before rates increase on September 25 at 11:59 p.m. PT. Register here.

Meet the next five VCs judging Startup Battlefield 200

Now, without further ado, meet the next five judges joining this year’s Startup Battlefield, the ultimate startup pitch competition.

Image Credits:TechCrunch

Aditi Maliwal, General Partner, Upfront Ventures

Aditi Maliwal is a general partner at Upfront Ventures, where she invests at the pre-seed and seed stages in fintech, enterprise SaaS, AI applications, and developer tools. Her portfolio includes Clair, Writer, Arcade, and General Translation. Maliwal previously held roles at Google and Deutsche Bank and led the Series A investment in Chime during her tenure at a prior firm. She is Upfront’s first San Francisco-based partner.

Michael Palank, General Partner, MaC Ventures

Michael Palank is a general partner at MaC Ventures, a majority Black-owned venture firm that backs seed-stage consumer and enterprise companies through a culturally driven investment thesis, with a focus on AI, fintech, healthcare, media, entertainment, and aerospace and defense. Before transitioning to venture, Palank worked in Hollywood talent representation at William Morris and Overbrook Entertainment, Will Smith’s production company.

Nell Daly, Co-founder and Managing Partner, Revenge Capital

Nell Daly is the co-founder and managing partner of Revenge Capital, an evergreen sector-agnostic fund focused on backing overlooked founders — including women, BIPOC, LGBTQIA+, disabled, and neurodiverse entrepreneurs — across the United States and United Kingdom. Before launching the fund, Daly worked as a psychotherapist, a background she draws on directly in her founder-first investment approach.

Grace Ge, Partner, Amplify Partners

Grace Ge is a partner at Amplify Partners, where she invests in AI, developer tooling, data infrastructure, and modern SaaS — with a particular focus on the layer between foundation models and enterprise applications. Her portfolio includes Pinecone, Eppo, Vivun, Orb, and Avoca. Amplify’s broader portfolio includes Datadog, Fastly, Temporal, dbt, and Modal. Ge was named to the Forbes 30 Under 30 list for Venture Capital.

Crystal Huang, General Partner, Google Ventures

Crystal Huang is a general partner at GV, where she focuses on enterprise SaaS, AI infrastructure, and fintech — with a particular lens on product-led and developer-led go-to-market strategies. Her portfolio companies include Typeface, Pecan AI, Sardine, Cacheflow, PostHog, Roboflow, and Sift. Before joining GV, Huang was an investor at NEA and GGV Capital and worked in technology mergers and acquisitions at Blackstone.

Get to know all the VC judges on the Disrupt agenda.

Don’t miss Disrupt and Startup Battlefield 200

TechCrunch Disrupt 2026 is happening October 13-15 in San Francisco, bringing 10,000+ tech leaders, VCs, and founders together to meet the next generation of breakout startups, connect with the leaders who could change their startup’s trajectory, and get a front-row seat to where the industry is headed. Save up to $200 on your ticket before rates increase on September 25. Save even more when you register as a group.

Image Credits:TechCrunch

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

macOS 27: new Siri takes on AI productivity apps

The two most noticeable things about macOS 27 Golden Gate are the newly updated Siri AI and the design changes that make windows and icons more consistent. Siri AI offers the same features and capabilities as on iOS 27, but the Mac gives it access to different context — and new ways to be useful.

Over the last few years, apps and browsers have tried to learn more about your work and what you want to use AI assistants for, so they can better answer your questions or perform tasks. Today, many top web browsers, excluding Safari, come with a sidebar-based AI assistant that can look at one or multiple open tabs to provide contextual answers. Apps like Highlight, Caddy, and Littlebird can also look at your current window, then use that information as context for your queries.

The new Siri is similar. You can invoke Siri anywhere on your screen, allowing it to answer questions about what it sees, summarize information, or provide you with more details. For instance, if you are looking at an item you want to purchase, you could ask Siri to show you alternative options too.

Instead of having Siri look at the whole page, you can also select a part of the page via Apple’s new Visual Intelligence features. If you press Command + Shift + Space, you can add the currently focused window to your context for the AI.

To select a specific part, press Command + Shift + 6 to bring up a crosshair selection tool. After this, you can directly ask a question or perform an image search. Based on your selection, you will also get shortcuts like “Select,” “Add to Contact,” and “Look up Location.”

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Apple has also improved Spotlight Search on Mac. You can directly ask Siri questions within Spotlight to get answers from the web, and now you can also select Applications, Files, Actions, and Clipboard to search within that particular area of context. Plus, Spotlight now allows you to run Shortcuts or look up your recent search history.

Since Siri has access to your files, emails, and messages, you can search for a variety of things that you couldn’t before. In tests, I pulled up membership IDs without opening my files, asked for details about an upcoming trip, and looked up the embargo date for an upcoming news story in the works. While I don’t find Spotlight as advanced as the highly extensible Mac productivity tool Raycast, it’s still much better than before.

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Siri can also now help you with reviewing documents or performing writing tasks. Since the desktop is one of the better surfaces for writing long text, I found it to be more useful here than on the iPhone. You can do things like select a block of text and ask Siri to proofread it, improve it, or rewrite it. You can also ask Siri to draft something for you within any text box.

Safari, meanwhile, has added AI-powered page tracking, which is useful for keeping an eye on things like price drops, privacy policy changes, or new blog posts on pages when there is no RSS support. Plus, Safari can automatically organize tabs based on topics, which is handy.

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

One small but neat new feature is that when you download a file or rename it, the system suggests a name based on context in the Finder or when you’re saving the document.

Apart from Siri, macOS 27 Golden Gate brings design changes with new Liquid Glass icons, an adjustable slider for the Liquid Glass design, and a better way to “diffuse” content when you move windows around.

The company said that app windows have a more consistent corner radius. Sidebars now stretch edge to edge and have new colorful icons. The new operating system update also better highlights active windows.

The OS update additionally adds features like enhanced child safety controls, shared cross-platform photo albums, and an updated eraser, better search in email, app resizing for iPhone mirroring, and quick suggestions for adding events to the calendar.

Starting today, macOS 27 Golden Gate is available for MacBook Air and MacBook Pro 2020 version with Apple Silicon or later, iMac with Apple Silicon (2021 or later), Mac Mini (2020 or later), Mac Studio (2022 or later), Mac Pro (2023 or later), and MacBook Neo. Go to System Settings > General > Software Update to get the latest version.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Choosing the Best Lightweight Gaming Laptop in 2026

We compare under-four-pound gaming laptops by measured weight, actual GPU wattage, and tested battery life, using our own testing data alongside published US lab results, and explain what the weight class costs you at resale.

The short answer:

A lightweight gaming laptop has a discrete GPU and weighs under four pounds. In 2026, that means a 14-inch chassis, an OLED panel, and a graphics chip running at a fraction of the wattage it gets in a chunkier model.

The number that determines how a lightweight gaming laptop actually performs isn’t the GPU name on the box. It is total graphics power: the wattage the manufacturer allows that GPU to draw. NVIDIA lets an RTX 5070 Laptop GPU be configured anywhere from 50W to 100W, so two laptops with identical GPU stickers on the palmrest can differ by roughly a factor of two in power budget. Thin chassis sit at the bottom of that band.

The thin-and-light gaming category stopped being a compromise category somewhere around 2024. Those laptops now weigh less than many business ultrabooks, and several models perform rather well at 1440p. But the marketing hasn’t caught up with the engineering, and that gap is where buyers lose money.

This guide works through the metrics that matter, using published results from US testing labs rather than manufacturer claims: what these machines actually weigh, what their GPUs are actually allowed to draw, how long they actually run on battery, and what the weight class costs you in upgradeability and resale.

If you are replacing an older computer, read this alongside our breakdown of how mobile graphics cards are ranked — the two topics are inseparable in a thin chassis.

What Constitutes a Lightweight Gaming Laptop?

No certifying body defines the term, so it is worth anchoring it to measured weights rather than marketing nuances. The practical dividing line is four pounds: below it, you carry the notebook without thinking about it; above it, you have to plan around it.

At the far end of the range, Tom’s Hardware measured the Alienware 16 Area-51 at 7.49 pounds and 1.12 inches thick, and its reviewer noted difficulty fitting it into a backpack. That is more than double the weight of the lightest models mentioned in this guide.

Gaming laptop weight classes and what each one buys youClassWeightTypical screenWhat you getWhat you give upUltraportable gamingUnder 3.5 lb14 inFits any bag; runs cool and quiet; usable as a daily driverLowest GPU wattage band; soldered RAM is commonLight gaming3.5–4.5 lb14–16 inBest balance of frame rate and portability in 2026Fan noise under sustained load; premium pricingMainstream gaming4.5–6 lb15–16 inMid-band GPU wattage; usually slotted RAM and two SSD baysNot something you carry dailyDesktop replacementOver 6 lb16–18 inTop of every GPU’s wattage band; largest cooling systemsPortability, in every practical sense

Screen size and weight are correlated but not interchangeable. A slim 16-inch laptop can weigh less than a thick 15-inch one, and it will usually have a better-fed GPU than a 14-inch model at the same price. If you want the extreme end of the thinness spectrum specifically, our roundup of the thinnest gaming laptops covers that separately.

Why Do Two Laptops with the Same GPU Perform Differently?

A laptop GPU is not a fixed product. It is a chip plus a power budget, and the manufacturer chooses the budget. NVIDIA publishes a configurable range for each mobile GPU, and the ranges are wide.

NVIDIA RTX 50-series laptop GPU configurable power ranges, as published at launchGPUCUDA coresMemoryBus widthTGP rangeRTX 5070 Laptop GPU4,6088 GB GDDR7128-bit50–100 WRTX 5070 Ti Laptop GPU5,88812 GB GDDR7192-bit60–115 WRTX 5080 Laptop GPU7,68016 GB GDDR7256-bit80–150 WRTX 5090 Laptop GPU10,49624 GB GDDR7256-bit95–150 W

Specifications as reported by Tom’s Hardware from NVIDIA’s launch materials. TGP figures exclude Dynamic Boost headroom, which some chassis add on top.

Read the bottom row of that table against the top one. An RTX 5070 Laptop GPU at 50W and an RTX 5070 Laptop GPU at 100W share the same name and price tier in most listings. They are not the same product. As Tom’s Hardware put it when the range was announced, total graphics power is paramount for GPU performance, and manufacturers set it per form factor and chassis.

What to do about it:

  • Find the stated maximum graphics power before you buy. Manufacturers publish it on spec pages; reputable reviews list it. A listing that will not state it is telling you something.
  • Compare reviews of the specific model, not the GPU. A benchmark chart for an RTX 5070 in a 16-inch chassis does not predict the same chip in a 14-inch one.
  • Weigh VRAM as heavily as wattage. The RTX 5070 Laptop GPU ships with 8 GB on a 128-bit bus; the 5070 Ti moves to 12 GB on a 192-bit bus. At 1440p with ray tracing, that gap shows up.

NVIDIA’s Blackwell-generation Max-Q changes — advanced power gating, low-latency sleep, voltage-optimized GDDR7 — are aimed squarely at this category, with the company claiming up to 40% longer battery life. Those gains apply to idle and light load, not to sustained gaming.

Lightweight Gaming Laptops Compared

Every weight below is a reviewer’s figure from a US publication, not a manufacturer minimum. Manufacturer weights typically describe the lightest configuration sold, which is rarely the one with the fastest GPU. Razer has confirmed, for instance, that the RTX 5070 build of the Blade 14 is thicker than the RTX 5060 build of the same laptop.

Sub-4-pound gaming laptops, with a desktop-replacement reference pointModelWeightThicknessGPU as reviewedDisplayReviewed byAsus TUF Gaming A143.22 lb0.78 inRTX 4060 at 100 W14 in, 2560 × 1600, 165 Hz IPS-levelTom’s HardwareAsus ROG Zephyrus G14 (2025)3.3 lb~0.64 inUp to RTX 5070 Ti (60–115 W band)14 in OLED, 2880 × 1800, 120 HzPCWorldAcer Predator Triton 14 AI3.5 lb0.71 inRTX 507014.5 in OLED, 2880 × 1800, 120 Hz touchTom’s HardwareRazer Blade 14 (2025)3.59 lb0.62–0.64 inRTX 507014 in OLED, 2880 × 1800, 120 HzTom’s Guide, PCWorldHP Omen Transcend 143.7 lb0.7 inRTX 4060 at 65 W14 in OLED, 2880 × 1800, 120 HzLaptop Mag, PCWorldAlienware 16 Area-51 (reference)7.49 lb1.12 inRTX 508016 in, 2560 × 1600, 240 HzTom’s Hardware

Configurations vary by SKU. Where a review did not publish a sustained GPU wattage, this table cites NVIDIA’s configurable range rather than assuming a value.

Two things stand out. First, the spread across the entire lightweight class is under half a pound—from 3.22 lb to 3.7 lb—while GPU capability across that same spread is not remotely uniform. Second, OLED at 2880 × 1800 has become the category default, which is good for image quality and bad for the GPU, because it is a demanding panel to drive.

The Asus TUF Gaming A14 is the interesting outlier. Tom’s Hardware called it barely bigger or heavier than an ultrabook and noted its 100 W RTX 4060 plays games at moderate settings — a previous-generation GPU near the top of its power band, rather than a current-generation one near the bottom. We looked at that machine on its own terms in our Asus TUF Gaming A14 review.

A note on pricing: we have deliberately left prices out of the table. Laptop pricing through 2026 has been unusually unstable, and any figure quoted here would be wrong within weeks. Our analysis of the 2026 laptop price surge and memory crisis explains why, and it matters if you are timing a purchase.

How Long Do Lightweight Gaming Laptops Last on Battery?

Weight does not determine battery life. Platform efficiency does. Three measured results make the point better than any generalization:

Measured battery runtimes, non-gaming workloadsModelWeightMeasured runtimeTest methodSourceAsus TUF Gaming A143.22 lb10 hr 4 minWeb browsing, streaming, and browser graphics testsTom’s HardwareHP Omen Transcend 143.7 lb4 hr 10 minLaptop Mag continuous web browsing testLaptop MagAlienware 16 Area-517.49 lb4 hr 10 minWeb browsing, streaming and browser graphics testsTom’s Hardware

Battery tests are not directly comparable across publications; each lab uses its own workload and brightness target. Rows are grouped by source method above.

A 3.22-pound Asus reached ten hours on Tom’s Hardware’s test while a 3.7-pound HP managed four hours and ten minutes on Laptop Mag’s. The heaviest computer on the list posted the same four hours and ten minutes as the light HP. The variable doing the work is the processor platform and the panel, not the mass.

Gaming on battery is a different question

Expect one to two hours, and expect reduced performance while you get it. Most gaming laptops cut the GPU’s power allocation when unplugged, which means a machine advertising 100 W of graphics power may deliver a fraction of that on battery. Plan to game plugged in; treat the battery figure as a spec for everything else you do with the laptop. If battery life is the deciding factor, measuring your current laptop’s real battery life first will tell you whether an upgrade actually solves your problem.

The practical read: an efficient CPU with switchable graphics gets you a machine that works as an all-day notebook and a competent evening gaming rig. That dual-use case, not raw frame rate, is the honest argument for the whole category.

How to Choose a Lightweight Gaming Laptop?

Start from how you will use the computer on a Tuesday, not from the benchmark you want to win. The category rewards buyers who are honest about the split between gaming and everything else.

Matching a use case to a lightweight gaming laptop configurationIf this is youTarget configurationPrioritizeWatch out forYou commute daily and game a few evenings a weekSub-3.5 lb, 14 in, efficient CPUBattery life and weight over peak frame rateCheck the measured runtime, not the battery capacityYou want 1440p at high settings on a portable machine3.5–4 lb with RTX 5070 Ti or better12 GB VRAM and the upper half of the TGP bandConfirm the stated maximum graphics power in writingYou mostly play esports titlesSub-3.5 lb, high refresh, modest GPURefresh rate and input latencyA 165 Hz IPS panel often beats a 120 Hz OLED hereYou want maximum performance per dollarSlim 16 in, 4.5–5.5 lbCooling headroom and slotted RAMYou are paying a real premium for every half-pound savedYou edit video or render as well as game14–16 in OLED, 32 GB RAMColor coverage and sustained CPU performanceLunar Lake-class chips trade multi-core power for efficiency

The upgradeability trade

Thin chassis solder things down. RAM is frequently non-replaceable in 14-inch gaming laptops, which makes the memory decision permanent at purchase. Storage is usually the exception — most models keep at least one accessible M.2 slot. Tom’s Hardware notes that CPUs and GPUs are soldered in every gaming laptop regardless of size, so the practical question is whether you can change the RAM and SSD later.

Buy the memory you will need in three years, because you won’t add it in year two. For most people in 2026, that means 32GB rather than 16GB, particularly if the machine doubles as a work laptop.

Resale Value: What a Lightweight Gaming Laptop is Worth Later?

The same engineering decisions that make a lightweight gaming laptop appealing also shape its secondhand value. Because RAM is usually soldered, the configuration you buy is the configuration a future buyer inherits. For example, 32GB and 16GB versions of the same laptop carry a meaningful price difference at purchase. On the resale market, however, that price difference is largely negated. It is diluted by the overall condition of a used computer: aluminum unibody chassis and OLED panels show wear more visibly than the plastic and IPS combinations common in heavier models. Whatever appeal larger RAM might have can be negated by screen surface wear or chassis discoloration.

Three factors move the resale price more than anything else:

  • Configuration, especially CPU and GPU tier. 
  • Cosmetic condition, particularly the display, palmrest (keyboard included), and the lid. 
  • And timing: GPU generations turn over roughly annually, and value drops fastest in the weeks after a successor is announced rather than gradually across the year.

Taking all of this into consideration makes navigating the used electronics resale space a bit challenging. If you feel discouraged by the complexity of hands-on reselling management and would rather get rid of your old gaming rig quickly, we don’t blame you. Even we get frustrated at times, having been in the buyback and resale space for over 16 years.

So, we’d like to offer a solution: Gadget Salvation pays for used gaming laptops directly rather than listing them on your behalf, so you get a locked offer and a prepaid shipping label instead of a listing, a negotiation, and marketplace fees. That matters the most because high-value 14-inch notebooks are exactly the listings that often attract chargeback fraud on peer-to-peer marketplaces. You can see the process end to end on our How It Works page, or go straight to a model—Razer, Asus ROG, and MSI all have dedicated pages. If you haven’t sold electronics online before, our step-by-step guide to selling a gaming laptop walks you through preparation and data wiping.

Before you sell, back up, sign out of every account, and run a factory reset. A laptop that arrives clean and unlocked is inspected and paid for faster.

The Bottom Line 

The lightweight gaming laptops category has stopped being a compromise, but it is still a negotiation. You are trading GPU wattage for weight, upgrade paths for thinness, and a real price premium for every half-pound saved against a slim 16-inch notebook. Those are sensible trades when you make them deliberately. Or expensive ones when you make them because a listing showed a familiar GPU sticker, hyped up on Discord, and you stopped there. Find the stated wattage, read a review of the exact model rather than the chip, and buy the memory you will still want in three years. Then, when the need to upgrade eventually arises, remember that the gadget you are replacing is worth the most while it still works: check what it is worth before it becomes junk in your drawer.

Sources:

Every measurement in this article comes from a published US review or a primary source. Where a figure wasn’t published, we said so rather than estimate.

  • Tom’s Hardware — Best Gaming Laptops 2026 — Measured weights, thickness, display measurements, and battery results for the Acer Predator Triton 14 AI, Asus TUF Gaming A14, and Alienware 16 Area-51.
  • Tom’s Hardware — NVIDIA RTX 50-series laptop GPUs — Core counts, memory configurations, and configurable TGP ranges for the RTX 5070, 5070 Ti, 5080, and 5090 Laptop GPUs.
  • PCWorld — HP Omen Transcend 14 review — 65 W RTX 4060 configuration and the observation that identically named GPUs at higher wattage deliver higher performance.
  • PCWorld — Razer Blade 14 review — Ryzen AI 9 365 and RTX 5070 configuration details for the 2025 Blade 14.
  • Tom’s Guide — Razer Blade 14 design and dimensions — 3.59 lb weight, 0.62–0.64 in thickness, 72 Wh battery, and confirmation that the RTX 5070 build is thicker than the RTX 5060 build.
  • Laptop Mag — HP Omen Transcend 14 review — Measured 3.7 lb weight and 4:10 battery result.
  • PCWorld — Asus ROG Zephyrus G14 review — 3.3 lb measured weight for the 2025 Zephyrus G14.
  • US Environmental Protection Agency — Electronics Donation and Recycling — Energy-equivalence figure for recycling one million laptops.

Last reviewed 2026-09-10. Laptop configurations and pricing change frequently; measured figures reflect the review units tested by each publication.

What It Means for Users, the Market, and the Future of Personal Computing

HP’s most recent computer lineup rehaul marks one of the most significant identity shifts the company has made in years. After decades of releasing consumer and business laptops under familiar Pavilion, Envy, Spectre, Omen, and EliteBook names, HP has consolidated and refreshed its models with a cleaner naming structure, a more unified design language, and a renewed focus on premium build quality. The move isn’t just cosmetic: it signals HP’s intent to compete more aggressively with the likes of Apple, Dell’s XPS line, and Lenovo’s ThinkPad and Yoga families.

A New Identity for a New Era

The rebrand centers on simplifying the product stack. HP has historically offered a wide range of overlapping laptop families, which often confused buyers trying to understand the differences between Pavilion vs. Envy or EliteBook vs. ProBook. By 2026, HP has streamlined these into clearer tiers that emphasize purpose rather than legacy branding. The new lineup leans heavily into minimalist aesthetics, recycled materials, and modular components that support easier repairs and upgrades, an increasingly important factor for both consumers and regulators.

This shift also aligns with broader industry trends: sustainability, longevity, and transparent performance tiers. HP’s new naming system makes it easier to understand what you’re getting, and the refreshed designs feel more cohesive across price points. For long‑time HP users, the rebrand is a welcome modernization that finally brings consistency to the company’s hardware identity.

Resale Value of Pre‑Rebrand HP Laptops in 2026

With the rebrand in full swing, many owners of older HP models are wondering how their current devices hold up in the resale market. The good news is that HP’s legacy lines—especially Specter, EliteBook, and Omen—continue to retain decent buyback value today. Premium aluminum builds, quality processors (like Intel’s 11th–13th gen and AMD Ryzen 5000–7000 series), and solid displays keep these notebooks desirable for secondhand buyers looking for reliable used hardware at a lower cost.

Average resale ranges, depending on condition, specs, and age:

  • HP Spectre x360 (2020–2023 models): $145–$350
  • HP EliteBook (800 series, 2020–2024): $165–$365
  • HP Omen gaming laptops (2021–2024): $300–$560
  • HP Envy (2020–2024): $120–$300
  • HP Pavilion: $70–$190

These values indicate that there is still demand for HP’s pre‑rebrand hardware, even as the company pivots toward a new identity. Laptops with OLED screens, more RAM/SSD storage, or dedicated GPUs tend to sell faster and for more money.

Where to Sell an Old (Pre-Rebrand) HP?

If you’re looking to sell an old HP laptop, platforms that specialize in electronics recommerce can make the process smoother and more sustainable. For example, buyback companies like Gadget Salvation and others offer instant quotes, free shipping, and a reuse‑first model that keeps aging technology out of landfills. For anyone in the US trying to declutter responsibly, it’s a practical way to turn unwanted gadgets into cash while supporting circular economy practices.

Why HP Rebrand Matters

The recent rebrand isn’t just about redesigned logos or sleeker chassis. It’s HP acknowledging that the future of laptops demands clarity, sustainability, and premium experiences across the board. By unifying its product identity, HP is positioning itself as a more focused competitor in a crowded market—one where consumers increasingly expect long‑lasting computers, transparent upgrade paths, and environmentally conscious design.

For current HP owners, the rebrand also invites evaluation of whether it’s time to upgrade or to resell older hardware while it has value. And with recommerce platforms making responsible trade‑ins easier than ever, the transition to HP’s new generation of laptops can be both smooth and eco‑friendly.

HP Laptop Rebrand FAQ:

1. What is this HP’s laptop rebrand all about?

HP’s recent rebrand simplifies its laptop lineup (phased out Pavilion, Envy, Spectre in favor of OmniBooks), modernizes the design language, and emphasizes sustainability and clearer performance tiers. Instead of juggling many overlapping sub‑brands, HP now focuses on more unified naming and consistent aesthetics across consumer and business devices.

2. Does the rebrand affect older HP models like Spectre, Envy, or EliteBook?

At this time, your existing Spectre, Envy, Omen, Pavilion, or EliteBook laptop remains fully usable and supported. The rebrand mainly impacts new product naming and design going forward. However, paired with new AI chip technology, it may influence resale demand as buyers compare legacy models with the latest offerings.

3. How is the resale value of older HP laptops in 2026?

Premium lines like HP Spectre or Omen generally retain higher resale value, especially if they have recent Intel or AMD processors, decent RAM/SSD storage size, and good cosmetic condition. Mid‑range Envy and entry-level Pavilion models still sell but at much lower price points, making them attractive to budget‑conscious buyers and repair shops.

4. Where can I sell my used HP laptop sustainably?

You can use recommerce platforms that prioritize reuse and responsible recycling. Gadget Salvation is one notable option. It offers instant quotes, free shipping, and a process designed to keep electronics in circulation longer instead of sending them to landfills.

5. Is it worth upgrading to a rebranded HP laptop if mine still works?

If your current HP laptop still meets your performance needs, there is absolutely no need to upgrade. However, the new lineup offers improved efficiency, updated AI processors, and more sustainable materials. Many users choose to resell their older tech while it still holds some value and then move to a rebranded model for a longer‑term investment.

What Is the Most Popular Laptop of 2026 to Date?

In 2026, the laptop landscape has shifted quickly — AI‑powered devices, Copilot+ PCs, OLED-everything, and ultra‑efficient processors have flooded the market. But despite fierce competition from ASUS, Lenovo, Dell, and Microsoft, one device has surged ahead in popularity: the Apple MacBook Neo (2026).

With a starting price of $799, a lightweight design, and Apple’s new A18 Pro chip with built‑in Apple Intelligence, the Neo has quickly become the go‑to laptop for students, creators, remote workers, and everyday users who want premium performance without the premium price tag.

1. A Premium Apple Experience at a Mid‑Range Price

Historically, most Apple laptops have started at or above $1,000, but the Neo breaks that trend. At $799, it’s one of the most affordable MacBooks ever released, instantly widening its audience.

This price point has made it especially popular among:

  • Students upgrading from older Intel MacBooks
  • Creatives who want Apple Intelligence features without buying a Pro model
  • Everyday users who want reliability and long battery life

2. Apple Intelligence Built In

2026 is the year AI laptops went mainstream — and Apple Intelligence is a major driver of that shift.

The Neo includes:

  • On‑device AI processing via the A18 Pro
  • Smart writing tools
  • Photo cleanup and enhancement
  • Natural language search
  • Automated organization features

These capabilities make the Neo feel faster and smarter than traditional mid‑range laptops.

3. 16 Hours of Battery Life

Battery life is still one of the biggest deciding factors for laptop buyers, and the Neo delivers up to 16 hours on a single charge. That’s significantly higher than many Windows laptops in the same price bracket.

4. Lightweight, Portable, and Durable

With a 13‑inch Retina display and a compact frame, the Neo is built for mobility. It’s ideal for commuters, travelers, and students who need a device that won’t weigh down their bag.

While the Neo is the most popular, several other laptops are trending this year — especially in the AI‑PC and OLED categories.

Here’s a quick comparison:

Laptop
Price
Key Strength
Best For

Apple MacBook Neo (2026)
$799
Best value, Apple Intelligence, long battery life
Students, everyday users

ASUS ZenBook S 14 (2026)
$1,899
3K OLED, Intel Ultra 9, Copilot+ PC
Professionals, designers

Lenovo Yoga 7i (2026)
$1,649
2‑in‑1 OLED versatility
Hybrid tablet/laptop users

Microsoft Surface Pro 11th Edition
$1,499
Ultra‑portable 2‑in‑1
Travelers, digital note‑takers

Dell XPS 16 (2026)
$3,655
High‑end performance
Creators, power users

Laptop Resale Value: Why the MacBook Neo is Expected to Have Great Long‑Term ROI

While it is too early to discuss Neo’s resale value, given its dominance in 2026 laptop sales, users expect an exceptional resale price. Apple computers have historically retained 15–30% more value after two years, and early trade‑in data show the Neo following the same trend. Its durable build, long battery life, and Apple Intelligence support make it a safe long‑term investment for buyers who plan to resell or trade up later. For eco‑conscious consumers, this matters: a higher resale value means fewer devices prematurely entering the waste stream and more laptops staying in circulation through second‑life markets.

Final Thoughts: Why the MacBook Neo Leads 2026

The MacBook Neo isn’t the most powerful laptop of the year, but it is the most balanced. Apple found the sweet spot between price, performance, battery life, and AI features, creating a device that appeals to nearly everyone (even PC users).

In a year dominated by expensive AI‑powered computers, the Neo stands out as the affordable, reliable, and intelligent choice — and that’s exactly why it’s the most popular laptop of 2026 so far.

FAQ:

1. Why is the MacBook Neo the most popular laptop of 2026?

Because it delivers premium Apple performance, long battery life, and built‑in Apple Intelligence at an accessible $799 price point, making it appealing to students, creators, and everyday users.

2. Is the MacBook Neo good for professional work?

Yes. While it’s not a “Pro‑tier” device, the A18 Pro chip handles multitasking, productivity apps, light creative work, and AI‑powered workflows smoothly.

3. How does the MacBook Neo compare to Windows Copilot+ laptops?

Copilot+ PCs often offer stronger raw performance and OLED displays, but the Neo wins on battery life, ecosystem stability, and price. It’s the best value laptop of 2026 for most users.

4. What is the resale value of the MacBook Neo?

Based on the resale data of earlier Apple models, the Neo is expected to retain 15–30% more value than similarly priced Windows notebooks after two years, making it a strong long‑term investment for resale or trade‑up cycles.

5. Is the MacBook Neo a good choice for eco‑conscious buyers?

Absolutely. Its durability, long lifespan, and high resale value help keep laptops in circulation longer, reducing e‑waste and supporting more sustainable tech ownership.

What’s the Best Way to Sell a Used iPhone in 2026 & Does It Still Beat the Galaxy in Resale Value

Short answer: Sell your used iPhone on a peer-to-peer marketplace (Swappa/eBay) for the highest cash, use Apple or carrier trade‑in for speed and convenience, and time the sale just before the next iPhone launch to capture peak value.

In 2026, iPhones still generally retain higher resale percentages than Galaxy S flagships, though Samsung’s trade‑in promos can beat Apple for Galaxy‑to‑Galaxy upgrades.

Quick decision guide

  • Goal: Max cash → peer marketplaces; fast credit toward new phone → Apple/carrier trade‑in; lowest hassle → buyback services.
  • Key considerations: model, storage, battery health, cosmetic condition, timing relative to new launches.
  • Decision points: Do you want cash now or maximum net? Are you upgrading within the same brand (Samsung often gives bigger in‑brand credits)?
  • Timing tip: sell 60–90 days before the next Apple or Samsung keynote for peak private‑sale prices.

Resale comparison: iPhone vs Galaxy S (2026)

Attribute
iPhone (2026)
Galaxy S (2026)

Typical private‑sale retention after 2 years
~55–85% of original for recent Pro models.
~35–75%; more variable by carrier and model.

OEM trade‑in ceiling (US, 2026 examples)
Apple updated top iPhone trade‑in figures (e.g., iPhone 16 Pro Max up to $685–$695).
Samsung often offers larger in‑brand credits for Galaxy-to-Galaxy upgrades; aggressive promos can beat open‑market cash for trade‑ins.

Best channel for max cash
Peer marketplaces (Swappa, eBay).
Samsung trade‑in for upgrade credit; peer marketplaces for cash.

Why iPhones usually hold value better: strong demand for used iPhones, unlocked resale appeal, and consistent trade‑in pricing from Apple. Price aggregators and resale trackers show iPhones typically yield higher median resale prices on eBay/Swappa. Bottom line: Apple still leads the iPhone vs Galaxy S everlasting stand-off, even on the secondhand markets.

Why Timing Matters More Now?

Apple’s release cycle has become increasingly unpredictable. The introduction of the iPhone 17e in March 2026 created a new mid‑year depreciation dip, meaning sellers now face two major value drops per year instead of one.

Key timing insights:

  • Sell before announcements, not after. iPhones lose 15%–40% of value around launch windows.
  • Mid‑year releases (like the 17e) now create secondary depreciation waves.
  • Even older models like the iPhone 15 have shown accelerated depreciation—55.57% in the first year, compared to 40% for the iPhone 13.

Takeaway: If you’re planning to upgrade in 2026, list your iPhone at least 4–6 weeks before expected next model announcements.

Best Ways to Sell a Used iPhone in 2026

1. Sell for Cash (Higher Payout)

Selling directly to buyers consistently yields higher payouts than trade‑ins.

Pros:

  • More negotiation power
  • Cash instead of store credit
  • Higher offers for well‑maintained smartphones

Cons:

  • Requires more effort
  • Potential safety concerns when meeting buyers

Related: Where to Sell a Used iPhone for Cash in Chicago?

2. Trade-In Programs (Fastest, But Lower Value)

Trade-ins through Apple, carriers, or retailers offer convenience but lower payouts. Stores set fixed prices and often reduce offers after inspection.

Best for: People prioritizing speed over maximum value.

3. Online Marketplaces (High Value, More Work)

Platforms like eBay or Facebook Marketplace allow you to set competitive prices and reach more buyers. But, depending on the iPhone model, it might take time, negotiations, and multiple price reductions before it sells. High-end electronics like iPhones also attract scammers.

4. Dedicated Electronics Resale Sites (Balanced Option)

Sites like CashYourLaptop.com offer instant quotes, free shipping, and quick payouts—ideal for sellers who want a balance of convenience and value.

How to Prepare Your iPhone for Sale (To Boost Value)

Buyers pay more for electronics that look clean, function well, and come with accessories.

Key preparation steps:

  • Clean the phone thoroughly with Windex or isopropyl alcohol.
  • Back it up. Sign out of iCloud and email accounts, turn off “Find My”, remove passcodes and Face ID, and only then factory reset.
  • See if you still have the original box, and don’t forget to include the cable.
  • Provide battery health screenshots (if listing on marketplaces). Battery health at 80% or less is considered limited capacity and will affect the final price.

Final Takeaway

Selling your used iPhone in 2026 is all about timing, preparation, and picking the right platform. If you list your cell before Apple’s next announcement and opt for cash‑focused resale channels, you’ll consistently earn more. And yes—iPhones still beat Samsung Galaxy phones in resale value, thanks to slower depreciation and stronger buyer demand.

Fastest Way to Sell a Used Dell Laptop Online

Selling a used Dell laptop doesn’t have to be slow or stressful. If your priority is speed, not squeezing out every last dollar, the fastest route is using a professional buyback service. Here is how you leverage its speed and convenience.

🏎️Why Buyback Services Are the Fastest Option

Buyback platforms streamline the entire process:

  • Instant online offer based on your Dell model and condition
  • Prepaid shipping label so you don’t waste time on logistics
  • Fast payment processing: often within 1 to 2 business days of receiving your device
  • No haggling, no meeting strangers, no risk of scams

Compared to marketplaces, where you must create listings, answer questions, negotiate, and generally wait for the right buyer, buyback sites eliminate those delays. Marketplace sales can be fast only if you price aggressively, but they also require more effort and can carry greater risk.

🔧Step 1: Prepare Your Dell Laptop Quickly

Even when speed is the priority, a few quick steps help you avoid issues and secure your payout:

  • Back up your data using cloud storage or an external drive
  • Sign out of accounts (Microsoft, Adobe, Steam) to avoid activation problems
  • Wipe your drive—a factory reset or full disk erase protects your privacy
  • Check your specs (model, RAM, storage, CPU) for valuation accuracy
  • Clean the laptop for a better chance of selling at a higher price

These steps take 15–30 minutes and can meaningfully speed up the sale.

⚡Step 2: Get an Instant Quote

Most buyback sites ask a few simple questions:

  • Dell model (Inspiron 16 7620, XPS 13 9315, Latitude 5440, Alienware m15 R5, etc.)
  • Condition (Good, Fair, Poor, or Defective)
  • Specs (CPU, GPU, RAM, storage)

Used Dell laptop inventory is abundant on eBay and other secondhand marketplaces, so most models devalue quickly, which will be reflected in your buyback offer. However, if you have a business‑class version (such as Precision or XPS), it retains its resale value well and often gets competitive quotes.

📦Step 3: Ship It the Same Day

The logistics math is simple: The faster you hand over your Dell computer to the carrier, the faster you get paid.

Online buyback services provide:

  • Prepaid shipping label
  • Tracking information
  • Delivery and status updates

Just pack your laptop securely, drop it off, and you’re done. No messaging buyers, no meeting strangers, no worrying about scams.

💵Step 4: Get Paid Fast

Once the laptop arrives and passes inspection, payment is typically issued within 24 to 48 hours. Some services offer:

  • Bank transfer
  • PayPal
  • Check
  • Visa gift card

This is the fastest legitimate way to turn your Dell laptop into cash.

🥇Fastest Selling Options Ranked

Method
Speed
Effort
Risk
Best For

Buyback services
Fastest
Very low
Very low
Quick, safe cash

Local marketplace (FB/Craigslist)
Fast if priced low
Low
Medium–High
Local buyers, no shipping

eBay
Medium
Medium
Medium
Higher payouts

Trade‑in (manufacturer)
Fast
Low
Low
Store credit

Buyback services win for pure speed.

📌Conclusion

To sell an old Dell laptop fast, use an instant‑quote buyback service (like Cash Your Laptop), which offers quick estimates, prepaid shipping, and quick payouts. Selling online is almost always faster than marketplaces like eBay or Facebook, which require listing, negotiating, and waiting for a buyer.

Can a 16‑Inch Dell Laptop Replace a Desktop?

For most everyday users, students, remote workers, creators, and casual gamers, a modern 16‑inch Dell laptop delivers enough performance to serve as a substitute for a traditional desktop. The larger screen size (16:10 aspect ratio on most models), improved thermals, and availability of high‑end CPUs/GPUs make these notebooks capable of handling productivity, multitasking, and even moderate gaming or creative workloads.

Where desktops still win is in extreme performance (high‑end GPUs, multi‑drive setups) and long‑term upgradability. But for the average consumer, the convenience of portability, desktop‑like power and relative affordability make a 16‑inch Dell a practical PC replacement.

Cheapest vs. Most Expensive 16‑Inch Dell Models (2026)

Dell’s 16‑inch lineup spans budget-friendly consumer laptops all the way to workstation‑class models. Here’s how the extremes compare:

Cheapest 16‑inch Dell Models (Good for Average Consumers)

Based on Dell’s current listings, the most affordable 16‑inch options include:

  • Dell 16 Laptop (Model DC16251)
    • Starting at: $1,229.99
    • Intel Core processors, sleek aluminum chassis, FHD webcam, immersive 16:10 screen.
    • Ideal for everyday productivity, streaming, office work.
    • Strong value for average users needing reliability without premium pricing.
  • Dell Pro 16 Laptop (Model PC16250)
    • Starting at: $929.00
    • Up to Intel Core Ultra processors, durable chassis, numeric keypad.
    • Great for students and office users who want a professional feel at a lower price.

These models deliver excellent day‑to‑day performance and are the best “desktop replacement” choices for budget‑conscious buyers.

Most Expensive 16‑inch Dell Models (Overkill for an Average User)

At the high end, Dell offers workstation‑class and gaming‑class 16‑inch models:

  • Dell Pro Max 16 Laptop
    • Price: Up to $4,962.57
    • Intel Core Ultra 9 vPro Enterprise, NVIDIA RTX PRO 2000 Blackwell GPU, 32GB RAM.
    • Built for engineering, 3D modeling, AI workloads — far beyond average consumer needs.
  • Alienware 16X Aurora Gaming Laptop
    • Price: $3,379.99
    • Intel Core Ultra 9, RTX 5070 Ti, 32GB RAM, 240Hz OLED display.
    • A powerhouse for gamers and creators, but unnecessary for basic productivity.

These laptops are exceptional, but only worth the investment if you need workstation‑level performance or high‑end gaming.

Related: Gaming Laptop vs Mobile Workstation: Which One Fits Your Workflow?

Which One Is the Best Buy for You?

For most people, the Dell 16 Laptop or Dell Pro 16 Laptop offers the best balance of price, performance, and longevity. They’re powerful enough to replace a desktop for everyday tasks, yet affordable enough to avoid workstation‑level pricing.

If you want a bit more future‑proofing without overspending, the Dell 16 Plus Laptop (Intel or AMD version) is a sweet spot:

  • Strong mid‑range performance
  • Better display options (QHD+, Mini LED)
  • Copilot+ AI PC features
  • Excellent battery life

Alternatively, you can look for a 1-3-year-old pre-owned Dell XPS or Precision 16-inch model on second-hand marketplaces like eBay and pay 50-80% less! While there is always a risk shopping used, eBay typically has great buyer protections. So, with a little time and luck, it’s possible to find a high-end Core i- or Ultra-powered Dell notebook at a fraction of the price.

Dell Resale Value by Model Line

Dell’s resale value varies significantly by product family. Here’s how each line performs in the secondhand market:

1. Dell XPS: Best Consumer Resale Value

  • Holds 55–65% of value after one year.
  • Premium build and strong demand keep prices high.
  • XPS 15/17 models often fetch more than comparable 13-inch ones.

2. Alienware: Highest Resale in Dell Gaming Category

  • Gaming models retain a significant portion of value due to powerful hardware components (mainly CPU + GPU).
  • High‑spec Alienware laptops can be resold at relatively high prices (even if non-working) but take longer to find a buyer, which, in turn, triggers price reductions.

3. Latitude & Precision: Abundant Proposition + Strong Demand

  • Retain 35–45% of value after one year.
  • While there is abundant inventory of Latitudes on secondhand markets, small business owners actively seek these models for their offices. The line is also very popular among individual buyers.
  • Newer Precision workstation models retain value and are highly sought after.

4. Inspiron: Lowest Resale Value

  • Entry‑level consumer line, which has now been discontinued.
  • Typical resale price: $20–$250, depending on release year, specs, and condition.
  • Used Inspiron 16 Plus laptops with discrete GPUs can still reach $250+.
  • Average laptop resale value in 2026: $170 per unit, up 14.1% YoY.

Final Recommendation

For an average consumer replacing a desktop:

  • Best Budget Choice: Dell Pro 16 Laptop — affordable, durable, great for productivity.
  • Best All‑Around Choice: Dell 16 Plus Laptop — excellent mid‑range performance, strong resale value, great display options.
  • Avoid Unless Needed: Alienware or Pro Max 16 — too expensive and overpowered for everyday use.

The good news is that you can always sell your 16-inch Dell laptop when it’s time for your next upgrade. There is a steady resale market for used Dell notebooks with larger display options, so you should be able to recover some value, even if it no longer works as intended.

Should You Buy AMD or Intel?

Choosing between the AMD and Intel versions of the Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 is a more practical decision than one might think. Both configurations share the same legendary ThinkPad build quality, MIL‑SPEC durability, and comfortable backlit keyboard, but their internal hardware differs significantly. After reviewing multiple benchmark sources, the differences are significant enough that your choice should be intentional rather than arbitrary.

This guide breaks down which ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 version is faster, performs better on real workloads, offers better battery life, retains higher resale value, and is generally in higher demand.

Related: Lenovo ThinkPad T14s 2‑in‑1 Laptop: Is the Convertible Version Better?

Performance: AMD Is Faster and Significantly So

If raw CPU performance matters to you, the AMD model is the clear winner.

  • 11% faster overall CPU performance than Intel’s Lunar Lake version.
  • 30% faster multicore performance, ideal for coding, compiling, rendering, VMs, and heavy multitasking.

This is not a small difference, but a meaningful productivity boost for engineers, analysts, and power users.

Verdict: ➡️ Choose AMD if you care about speed, multitasking, or professional workloads.

Graphics & Battery Life: Intel Wins Big

Intel’s Lunar Lake version counters with two major advantages:

1. Graphics Performance

This matters if you:

  • Edit videos
  • Run GPU‑accelerated AI workloads
  • Play games casually
  • Use graphics‑heavy apps

2. Battery Life

  • Intel delivers 40% longer battery life than the AMD model, a massive difference for mobile professionals.

Verdict: ➡️ Choose Intel if you prioritize battery life, graphics performance, or mobility.

Upgradeability: AMD Is the Only Future‑Proof Option

This is a major deciding factor for IT departments and long‑term buyers.

  • Intel model: Soldered RAM — cannot be upgraded.
  • AMD model: Two SO‑DIMM slots, upgradeable up to 64GB of RAM.

If you plan to keep your laptop for 4–6 years, or run memory‑heavy workloads, AMD is the smarter investment.

Verdict: ➡️ Choose AMD if you want upgradeable RAM and long-term flexibility.

Connectivity: Intel Has the Better Wi‑Fi

  • Intel model uses Intel Wi‑Fi, widely considered superior.
  • AMD model uses MediaTek Wi‑Fi, which some users find less reliable.

This is relatively a minor factor, but still worth noting for enterprise buyers.

Resale Value: Intel Holds Slightly Higher Value (But AMD Has Strong Demand Among Power Users)

ThinkPad resale value is influenced by:

  • Battery life
  • Upgradeability
  • Performance
  • Enterprise demand
  • IT fleet purchasing patterns

Based on ThinkPad resale patterns and the performance/battery differences:

  • Intel models have historically been more popular among secondhand buyers and thus retain slightly higher resale values. This is also true for businesses, because they prefer longer battery life and Intel networking.
  • AMD models retain strong interest among a specific niche of buyers: developers and power users. This consumer group favors AMD-based Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 for its significantly better multicore performance and upgradeability.
  • Enterprise demand: Higher for Intel (battery life + Wi‑Fi + IT standardization).
  • Developer / technical user demand: Higher for AMD (performance + RAM slots).

Verdict: ➡️ Intel resells slightly better overall, but AMD has stronger demand in technical resale markets.

Which Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 Should You Buy?

Here’s the final breakdown:

Choose AMD if you want:

  • Faster CPU performance
  • Better multicore workloads
  • Upgradeable RAM (up to 64GB)
  • Long-term flexibility
  • Better value for developers, engineers, analysts

Choose Intel if you want:

  • Longer battery life
  • Better graphics performance
  • Superior Wi‑Fi
  • Higher resale value
  • Better mobility experience

Final Recommendation

For most power users, developers, analysts, and multitaskers, the ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 with an AMD processor is the better buy. It’s faster, more upgradeable, and more future‑proof.

For travelers, students, video editors, and users alike, the Intel-based Lenovo ThinkPad T14 Gen 6 laptop is the better choice thanks to its exceptional battery life and stronger graphics.

Both AMD and Intel variations are excellent computers, but they serve different needs.

The 2026 Dell XPS 13 DX13260 Laptop Review

The Dell XPS 13 DX13260 marks the official return of the XPS brand after a brief retirement in 2025. Reviewers consistently praise its 2.2lb aluminum chassis, 120Hz 2560×1440 display, Intel Core 5 320 (Wildcat Lake) processor, and Wi‑Fi 7 support. This laptop is designed for portability and everyday productivity rather than heavy creative workloads or gaming.

Notebookcheck gives it a 90% rating, highlighting its premium feel and student‑friendly pricing. Tom’s Hardware calls it “an excellent Windows‑based answer to the MacBook Neo,” especially at its $699–$899 price range. Let’s see if the new XPS 13 truly lives up to consumer expectations.

🔧Key Specifications

  • Display: 13.4″ IPS, 2560×1440, 120Hz, glossy
  • CPU: Intel Core 5 320 (6 cores: 2P + 4E, up to 4.6GHz turbo)
  • GPU: Intel Graphics 2 Xe3 integrated
  • RAM: 8GB or 16GB LPDDR5X (7467 MHz)
  • Storage: 512GB SSD (PCIe)
  • Weight: 2.2 lbs
  • Battery: 52Wh, up to ~15 hours (real‑world testing)
  • Connectivity: Wi‑Fi 7, Bluetooth 6.0, 2× USB‑C (PD)
  • Build: Aluminum chassis, backlit keyboard, IR webcam

🎨Design & Build Quality

The DX13260 embraces a minimalist, refined aesthetic. The rounded aluminum edges, slim mirrored XPS logo, and lightweight frame make it feel more premium than its price suggests. Users (Windows users, to be fair) even say the new XPS looks and feels much better in the hands than the Apple MacBook Neo laptop, thanks to its balanced weight and smooth finish.

Pros:

  • Ultra‑light 1kg design
  • Premium aluminum build
  • Excellent portability
  • Backlit chiclet keyboard with improved tactile feel
  • Restored function row and physical trackpad (after 2025’s controversial haptic design)

Cons:

  • Limited ports (only USB‑C)
  • No headphone jack
  • Glossy display prone to reflections

📺Display Quality

The 13.4″ 120Hz panel is one of the standout features:

  • 2560×1440 resolution
  • 120Hz adaptive refresh rate (30–120Hz)
  • 500 nits brightness
  • 100% sRGB, 98% DCI‑P3
  • Matte and glossy options depending on configuration

Scrolling and animations feel noticeably smoother than traditional 60Hz ultrabooks, making it ideal for productivity, reading, and web browsing.

🔋Battery Life

Battery life is one of the laptop’s strongest attributes:

This makes it ideal for students, commuters, and travelers.

🔊Audio & Webcam

  • Speakers: 2 tweeters + 2 woofers (Dolby Atmos), surprisingly loud (~85.9 dB)
  • Webcam: 1080p IR camera
  • Microphones: Dual array

Great for video calls, though not exceptional.

🔌Ports & Connectivity

The DX13260 keeps things minimal:

  • 2× USB‑C (Thunderbolt/PD)
  • Wi‑Fi 7 + Bluetooth 6.0
  • No headphone jack
  • No USB‑A

You’ll likely need a USB‑C hub or docking station (Dell’s WD19S is a popular option), but that’s what you always give up when purchasing an ultrabook.

🧊 Thermals & Noise

  • Dual‑fan active cooling
  • Max noise ~40.7 dB under load
  • Stays cool during everyday use

💰Pricing & Configurations

Typical pricing based on current listings:

  • 8GB RAM / 512GB SSD: ~$649–$699
  • 16GB RAM / 512GB SSD: ~$899

📊Comparison Table: Key Specs at a Glance

Since the DX13260 is Dell’s response to Apple’s MacBook Neo, let’s see how they actually compare:

Feature
Dell XPS 13 DX13260
MacBook Neo (2026)

Weight
2.2 lbs
2.7 lbs

Display
13.4″ 2560×1440, 120Hz
13″ Retina‑class, 60Hz

CPU
Intel Core 5 320
Apple M3‑Neo

RAM
8GB / 16GB
8GB

Battery Life
Up to 15 hours
12–14 hours

Ports
2× USB‑C
2× USB‑C

Price
$699–$899
$699–$999

💸 Resale Value of Older XPS Models & How to Slow Depreciation

Older Dell XPS 13 models—especially the 2020–2024 generations—continue to hold resale value, largely because the XPS line has a strong reputation for durability, premium materials, and long software support. Models with 16GB RAM and higher‑resolution displays typically retain 10–20% more value than base configurations. To mitigate depreciation, owners should keep the laptop in good physical condition, store it in a protective sleeve, avoid battery‑draining habits that reduce long‑term health, and retain the original box and charger, which can increase resale value by up to $40. When the time comes, the fastest and most hassle‑free way to sell a used Dell XPS laptop is to use a dedicated buyback service. These platforms offer instant quotes, prepaid shipping, and quick payouts without the delays or risks of marketplace listings. For those who prioritize speed and convenience, professional buyback sites consistently outperform eBay, Facebook Marketplace, or local classifieds.

📝Final Verdict

The Dell XPS 13 (2026) DX13260 is one of the best ultraportables in its class. It’s not a performance powerhouse, but it nails the essentials:

✔ Best For

  • Students
  • Business travelers
  • Everyday productivity
  • Users who want a premium laptop at a mid‑range price

✘ Not Ideal For

  • Gaming
  • Heavy video editing
  • Users who need many ports

⭐ Overall Rating: 8.7/10

A refined, premium‑feeling Windows laptop that delivers excellent value and portability.

ASUS ROG Strix SCAR 18 vs Alienware 18 Area-51: Which Wins in 2026?

Two 18-inch laptops share the same Intel Core Ultra 9 275HX and the same GeForce RTX 5090 Laptop GPU at the same 175 W power ceiling. On a spec sheet, they look interchangeable. In measured testing, they are not, and the gap runs in the opposite direction from what most buyers expect.

First, a naming correction that matters if you are shopping today. The Alienware m18 no longer exists as a current product. Dell retired the line and replaced it with the Alienware 18 Area-51, which Notebookcheck describes as the direct successor to last year’s m18 R2, swapping Raptor Lake-HX and Ada Lovelace for Arrow Lake-HX and Blackwell. If you own an m18, the resale section below is for you. If you are buying, the Area-51 is the machine you are actually choosing between.

This comparison uses measured data from Notebookcheck’s review of the ASUS ROG Strix SCAR 18 G835LX and its review of the Alienware 18 Area-51, both run on the same test bench with the same methodology. Where a claim cannot be measured, we say so instead of guessing. Our earlier introduction to the 2025 ROG Strix SCAR 18 covers what ASUS changed in this generation.

The short version

Buy the Alienware 18 Area-51 if

You want the fastest frames this GPU can produce, and the machine mostly lives on a desk. It won every native benchmark run in this comparison, runs cooler under load, and does it while costing less than a comparably equipped SCAR 18. You pay for that with 9.2 lb of laptop and a display that tops out at 496 nits with no HDR.

Buy the ROG Strix SCAR 18 if

The screen matters as much as the frame counter, or the laptop has to move. Its mini LED panel measures 747 nits average with a 7,640:1 contrast ratio — roughly six times the Alienware’s — and it saves you almost two pounds in the bag. It also leads on multi-core CPU work, which matters if you compile, render, or stream.

Buy neither, yet, if

You already own an RTX 4090 machine. Notebookcheck found the RTX 5090 Laptop’s native advantage over the 4090 to be small at 1440p; the real generational gain comes from DLSS 4 multi-frame generation, which not every game supports.

Native frame rates: same GPU, different results

Ultra or High presets with upscaling and frame generation switched off, so the numbers reflect raw silicon rather than DLSS reconstruction. The Alienware finishes ahead in all nine runs.

ROG Strix SCAR 18Alienware 18 Area-51

062.5125187.5250Cyberpunk 2077 · 1080p154.9166.5Cyberpunk 2077 · 1440p106.8120.5Cyberpunk 2077 · 4K52.155.0Baldur’s Gate 3 · 1080p193.7236.5Baldur’s Gate 3 · 1440p145.6174.8Baldur’s Gate 3 · 4K82.894.0Alan Wake 2 · 1080p116.4133.2Alan Wake 2 · 1440p82.488.1Alan Wake 2 · 4K46.049.3frames per secondSource: Notebookcheck measured review data, Asus ROG Strix SCAR 18 G835LX (published April 2, 2025) and Alienware 18 Area-51 (published July 2, 2025). Both units: Intel Core Ultra 9 275HX + GeForce RTX 5090 Laptop at 175 W TGP. Cyberpunk 2077 run on the Ultra preset with FSR off; Baldur’s Gate 3 on Ultra with TAA; Alan Wake 2 on the High preset.

Which one is actually faster?

Source: dell.com

The Alienware, and not by a rounding error. Across nine native benchmark runs — three games at three resolutions, upscaling off — the Alienware 18 Area-51 finished ahead every single time. The largest margin was Baldur’s Gate 3 at 1080p, where it produced 236.5 fps against the SCAR’s 193.7. The narrowest gap was Cyberpunk 2077 at 4K, a 5% difference no one would notice.

The mechanism is straightforward and has nothing to do with brand engineering culture. Both laptops declare the same 175 W GPU ceiling, but a declared ceiling is only a permission slip. Frame rates depend on how long a chassis can hold the GPU at that ceiling before heat forces it down. The Alienware is thicker at the rear, heavier, and carries a larger cooling deck, and Notebookcheck measured it running games 5 to 15% faster than the average RTX 5090 laptop in its database. Size buys sustained power. That is the whole trick.

This reverses a common assumption, including one we have repeated in the past: that ASUS pushes its GPUs harder and Alienware trades frames for a quieter, cooler machine. On the current generation, the Alienware is faster and cooler. Notebookcheck lists loud fans while gaming among the SCAR 18’s drawbacks, measuring 53.7 dB(A) in Turbo mode, while it praises the Alienware for low operating temperatures and relatively quiet fans in Performance mode. The old trade-off no longer describes these two machines.

Where the SCAR 18 does win

Source: rog.asus.com

Processor work. The SCAR 18 runs a higher sustained CPU power limit — 150 W against the Alienware’s 140 W — and it shows up in every pure CPU test: 39,001 points in Cinebench R23 multi-core against 38,431, and a wider 21,668 to 19,869 lead in Geekbench 6.7. If your machine spends its evenings encoding video or compiling rather than rendering frames, that number matters more.

The Alienware takes PCMark 10 back, from 9,497 to 8,623, but that is a mixed-system benchmark, and the result is mostly storage. Alienware fits PCIe 5.0 SSD slots; ASUS still ships PCIe 4.0 drives in a RAID 0 pair, which Notebookcheck criticized directly. RAID 0 also means that if either drive fails, the array fails.

Synthetic graphics scores

Both laptops ship the same 175 W RTX 5090 Laptop GPU, so these gaps come down to how much sustained power each chassis can actually feed and cool.

ROG Strix SCAR 18Alienware 18 Area-51

0137502750041250550003DMark Time Spy · graphics24,59925,7633DMark Time Spy · overall23,13024,0133DMark Fire Strike · graphics48,86350,7723DMark Steel Nomad5,8836,329pointsSource: Notebookcheck measured review data, Asus ROG Strix SCAR 18 G835LX (published April 2, 2025) and Alienware 18 Area-51 (published July 2, 2025). Both units: Intel Core Ultra 9 275HX + GeForce RTX 5090 Laptop at 175 W TGP. SCAR 18 figures recorded in Turbo mode; Alienware figures in Performance and Overdrive modes. Steel Nomad and Time Spy run at 1440p; Fire Strike at 1080p.

Processor and system benchmarks

Identical Core Ultra 9 275HX in both machines. The SCAR 18 runs a higher sustained CPU power limit and leads the pure CPU tests; the Alienware’s PCIe 5.0 storage pulls the system score back in front.

ROG Strix SCAR 18Alienware 18 Area-51

010000200003000040000Cinebench R23 · multi-core39,00138,431Cinebench R23 · single-core2,2522,192Geekbench 6.7 · multi-core21,66819,869Geekbench 6.7 · single-core3,1583,057PCMark 10 · overall8,6239,497pointsSource: Notebookcheck measured review data, Asus ROG Strix SCAR 18 G835LX (published April 2, 2025) and Alienware 18 Area-51 (published July 2, 2025). Both units: Intel Core Ultra 9 275HX + GeForce RTX 5090 Laptop at 175 W TGP. SCAR 18 CPU limits: 175 W short burst, 150 W sustained. Alienware 18 CPU limits: 182 W short burst, 140 W sustained. PCMark 10 is a mixed system workload, not a CPU test.Specifications side by sideComponentROG Strix SCAR 18 (G835LX)Alienware 18 Area-51ProcessorIntel Core Ultra 9 275HX · 24 cores, 24 threadsIntel Core Ultra 9 275HX · 24 cores, 24 threadsCPU power limits175 W short burst / 150 W sustained182 W short burst / 140 W sustainedGraphicsGeForce RTX 5090 Laptop · 24 GB GDDR7 · 175 W TGPGeForce RTX 5090 Laptop · 24 GB GDDR7 · 175 W TGPMemory (as tested)64 GB DDR5-5600 · two SO-DIMM slots64 GB DDR5-6400 dual channelStorage (as tested)2 × 2 TB PCIe 4.0 in RAID 0 · no PCIe 5.0 slotPCIe 5.0 NVMe · up to three M.2 slots, two of them PCIe 5.0Display18-inch 2560 × 1600 mini LED · 240 Hz · HDR18-inch 2560 × 1600 IPS · 300 Hz · no HDR, no 4K optionPorts of note2 × Thunderbolt 5, HDMI 2.1, 2.5 Gb Ethernet · nothing on the rear2 × Thunderbolt 5, HDMI 2.1, 5 Gb Ethernet, SD reader · most ports on the rearKeyboardMembrane chiclet, per-key RGBLow-profile Cherry MX mechanical, per-key RGBBattery90 Wh96 WhWeight7.29 lb (3.31 kg) · 2.17 lb power supply9.21 lb (4.18 kg) · 2.31 lb power supplyWarranty (US)24 months12 months limitedNotebookcheck score88%86%

Configurations as reviewed by Notebookcheck. Both manufacturers ship other memory, storage, and GPU tiers; the RTX 5080 and RTX 5070 Ti versions of each machine will not match these results. Notebookcheck estimates roughly 10–15% lower graphics performance for an RTX 5080 and 30–45% lower for an RTX 5070 Ti.

Which is better value?

On the figures published at review time, the Alienware. Dell listed the RTX 5090 Alienware 18 Area-51 at roughly $4,400 direct, with RTX 5080 configurations around $3,500 and RTX 5070 Ti models starting near $3,300. The SCAR 18 as reviewed — RTX 5090, 64 GB of memory, 4 TB of storage — came in around $6,200, though ASUS’s 2025 Strix Scar line started closer to $2,700 for lower-tier configurations.

Those two numbers don’t describe the same machine, which is exactly the trap in most price comparisons. A fair reading is narrower: at matched RTX 5090 configurations, the Alienware cost less and ran faster. At lower GPU tiers, the picture depends entirely on which specific SKUs are discounted the week you buy. Gaming laptop pricing moves constantly, so treat every figure here as a starting point for your own check rather than a current quote.

Two different display philosophies

The SCAR 18 spends its display budget on a mini LED panel with true blacks and HDR headroom. The Alienware spends it on refresh rate. Neither choice is wrong; they serve different players.

ROG Strix SCAR 18Alienware 18 Area-51

Peak brightness747 nits496 nitsContrast ratio7,640:11,250:1Panel refresh rate240 Hz300 HzDCI-P3 color coverage99%96.1%each row scaled to its own leader — higher is better throughoutSources: Notebookcheck measured display data for both units. SCAR 18: 18-inch 2560×1600 mini LED at 240 Hz, 747 cd/m² average brightness in SDR, 7,640:1 contrast, HDR peak around 1,450 nits. Alienware 18: 18-inch 2560×1600 IPS at 300 Hz, 496 cd/m² average, 1,250:1 contrast, no HDR and no 4K option. Bars are scaled per row because the units differ.

The display is the real fork in the road

This is where the two designs genuinely disagree, and where the answer depends on you rather than on a benchmark. ASUS fitted a mini LED panel: 747 cd/m² average brightness, a 7,640:1 contrast ratio, 99% DCI-P3 coverage, factory color profiles accurate enough to edit against, and HDR peaking around 1,450 nits. Dell fitted a 300 Hz IPS panel: 496 cd/m², 1,250:1 contrast, no HDR support, and no 4K option at all, which Notebookcheck called baffling at this price.

So: 60 more hertz, or six times the contrast. If you play competitive shooters and your frame rates live in the hundreds, the extra refresh headroom is real, and you will use it. If you watch films, edit photos, or simply want black to look black in a dark room, the mini LED is not a close call. Our look at the Alienware 18 Area-51’s display configurations goes deeper into that decision.

Source: rog.asus.com

Which one lasts longer?

Longevity on a gaming laptop comes down to three things you can actually check: how hot the components run over years, whether you can open the machine, and whether the parts inside are standard.

On heat, the Alienware has the structural advantage — more volume, more cooling surface, lower measured temperatures. For access, the SCAR 18 is easier to open: ASUS redesigned the base plate to release with a slider instead of screws, exposing both M.2 slots, both SO-DIMM slots, and the fans without a screwdriver. The Alienware needs eight Phillips screws, which is hardly a barrier, and rewards the effort with three SSD slots instead of two.

Both use standard M.2 storage. Neither is a sealed appliance. In practice, the thing that ends a gaming laptop’s useful life is usually a tired battery or a fan full of dust, and both of those are maintenance problems rather than design flaws. If you want to know where your current machine stands, our guide on measuring your laptop’s battery life walks through the checks.

What happened to the Alienware m18

The m18 R2 was the last of the line: an Intel Core i9-14900HX paired with up to an RTX 4090 Laptop GPU behind a 165 Hz IPS panel. It was a strong machine, and it still is — in Notebookcheck’s testing, it stayed within about 12% of the RTX 5090 laptops at 1440p in several titles, a smaller gap than a generation number implies. Dell replaced it in 2025 with the Area-51 rebrand and a full redesign inside and out.

The practical consequence for owners is that m18 and m18 R2 units are now previous-generation hardware in a market that just got a new flagship, which is the moment resale value starts moving. Our earlier write-up on the Alienware m18 covers what that machine was built to do.

Noise, heat, and running away from the wallMeasurementROG Strix SCAR 18 (G835LX)Alienware 18 Area-51Fan noise, quiet profile34.8 dB(A) maximum while gamingNot published in the same format; reviewed as relatively quiet in Performance modeFan noise, balanced profile49 dB(A)Not published in the same formatFan noise, maximum53.7 dB(A) · headphones recommendedNot published in the same formatSurface temperature under load45.6 °C top, 46 °C undersideReviewed as generally low even while gaming, helped by the larger cooling deckWeb browsing on battery5 hours 32 minutes at 150 cd/m²Not published in the same format; reviewed as shortGaming on battery44 minutesNot published in the same format; reviewed as shortPower draw under full load161 W sustained, 431 W peak · 380 W adapterReviewed as very high across all settings

The SCAR 18 figures are Notebookcheck’s published measurements. Comparable acoustic and battery figures for the Alienware 18 Area-51 were not available in the same published format at the time of writing, so its column reports the reviewer’s stated findings rather than numbers. Do not read the blanks as a win for either machine.

What is your current machine worth?

Whichever of these you buy, something is being replaced — and an 18-inch gaming laptop sitting unused in a closet is the single worst thing you can do with it financially and environmentally. Gaming hardware depreciates fastest in its first year and keeps sliding after that, so the difference between selling in October and selling next spring is real money.

We will not publish a brand-versus-brand resale ranking here, because it is not something we can measure honestly. What we can tell you is what actually moves the number on a quote, in rough order of weight:

  • GPU tier. An RTX 5090 unit and an RTX 5070 Ti unit of the same model are different products to a buyer.
  • Cosmetic and functional condition, especially the screen, the hinge, and the keyboard deck.
  • Battery health and cycle count, which on a gaming laptop is often worse than owners expect.
  • Memory and storage as configured, since buyers pay a premium to skip these upgrades.
  • Whether the original power adapter survived. On an 18-inch machine, this is a 380 W brick that is expensive and annoying to replace.

Gadget Salvation buys gaming laptops directly from both brands, so you are not listing, negotiating, or shipping to a stranger. You get a quote in about a minute, ship free, and get paid once we inspect the device — and the machine goes back into circulation instead of a landfill, which is the whole reason we do this. Start with our gaming laptop trade-in page, or go straight to the Alienware and ASUS ROG brand pages.

Not sure selling is the right call? Our guide to trading in, reselling, or donating an old laptop lays out the trade-offs, and our breakdown of average resale value by condition will give you a rough idea of where a well-kept machine lands.

Frequently asked questions

Is the ASUS ROG Strix SCAR 18 or the Alienware 18 Area-51 better for competitive gaming?

The Alienware, on two counts. It produced higher native frame rates in every game Notebookcheck measured, and its 300 Hz panel gives those frames somewhere to go, against 240 Hz on the SCAR 18. The SCAR’s mini LED display is better in almost every other respect, but refresh rate matters most in competitive shooters.

Why does the Alienware run faster with the same RTX 5090?

Because a 175 W rating describes what a GPU is allowed to draw, not what a chassis can supply. The Alienware 18 is thicker and heavier, with a larger rear cooling deck, so it sustains power closer to that ceiling for longer. Notebookcheck measured it running 5 to 15% faster than the average RTX 5090 laptop in its database.

Does the Alienware m18 still exist?

No. Dell retired the m18 line and replaced it with the Alienware 18 Area-51, which succeeds the m18 R2 with Arrow Lake-HX processors and Blackwell graphics in a completely new chassis. If you are shopping new, the Area-51 is the current 18-inch Alienware.

Is it worth upgrading from an RTX 4090 laptop to an RTX 5090 laptop?

For most people, no. Notebookcheck found the RTX 5090 Laptop’s native advantage over the RTX 4090 Laptop to be relatively small, particularly at 1440p. The meaningful gain comes from DLSS 4 multi-frame generation, which not every game supports. The upgrade makes far more sense from an RTX 3000-series machine.

Can you upgrade the memory and storage in either laptop?

Both take standard M.2 2280 SSDs, and the Alienware offers three slots to the SCAR’s two. The SCAR 18 has two accessible SO-DIMM memory slots and a base plate that releases with a slider rather than screws. Confirm the memory layout on the exact Alienware configuration you are considering before buying, since this varies by SKU.

Which one should I buy if I have to carry it?

The SCAR 18. It weighs 7.29 lb against the Alienware’s 9.21 lb, and once you add power supplies, the gap is 9.46 lb versus 11.52 lb. That said, neither is a portable machine in any ordinary sense, and both run under an hour of gaming on battery.

What can I get for my old gaming laptop?

It depends mostly on GPU tier, condition, battery health, and whether you still have the original charger — not on the badge. Gadget Salvation gives you a quote in about a minute, covers shipping, and pays after inspection, so you can compare a real number against the cost of your next machine before you commit.

Apple launches iPhone 18 Pro with upgraded camera

Apple launched its latest Pro phones, the iPhone 18 Pro and the iPhone 18 Pro Max, today at its fall Surprise and Shine iPhone event. While the design of the phones remains the same as the earlier model, the upgraded cameras are the highlight of the new devices.

The new Pro series camera features a 48-megapixel camera with variable aperture, made with six thin blades. This system will likely improve low-light photograph quality and speed. There are also new pro controls in the camera software, including white balance, shutter speed, aperture, and histogram. And new photographic styles with texture and grain controls might be the answer to the new “looks” feature on the Pixel 11 series for a more retro style.

The new camera can record 4K videos in Dolby HDR Vision and can apply cinematic effects after shooting the footage.

The new Pro devices also have a smaller dynamic island on the front of the device, which now allows you to track three live activities instead of two.

Both phones are powered by Apple’s latest A20 Pro silicon and feature a newly designed vapor chamber for improved cooling. The company has also improved the battery with a better design. Apple said the iPhone 18 Pro supports video playback of 36 hours, and the 18 Pro Max has 45 hours of playback capacity.

The company showed off the new Siri AI with contextual on-screen intelligence. It said the new Siri AI will support English in beta at launch with the iOS 27 rollout this month, with French, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, and Spanish support coming in October.

The new devices will also get the iPhone handoff feature with iOS 27 that allows you to use two iPhones with one eSIM and switch back and forth between them.

The company is debuting a striking new burgundy color, replacing the orange from the previous lineup.

The iPhone 18 Pro costs $1,199, and the 18 Pro Max costs $1,299, which is $100 more than last year’s devices. People can preorder the devices on Saturday, and the devices will be available on September 18.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Apple shows off AirPods 5 with improved active noise cancellation

Apple on Wednesday unveiled the latest generation of its wireless earbuds, the AirPods 5, introducing several upgrades like improved audio, stronger active noise cancellation, and expanded Siri and Apple Intelligence features.

One of the main upgrades is active noise cancellation. Apple says AirPods 5 can reduce background noise by 50% more than the previous generation, making them “the industry’s best” active noise cancellation, according to the company.

“We’re thrilled that with AirPods 5, active noise cancelation is now standard across our entire AirPods lineup. AirPods 5 are a great example of how we take the innovations from our most advanced products and bring them to the rest of the lineup, making them accessible to even more people,” CEO John Ternus said during the event.

Image Credits:Apple

Apple has also added volume control to the stem, a feature previously available only with the AirPods Pro. Users can swipe up or down on the stem to change the volume without reaching for their iPhone.

As with other models with the H2 chip, AirPods 5 also offer hands-free Siri and Apple Intelligence features. Users can interact with Siri without picking up their phone, whether they want to ask a question, find information, perform an action, or get directions.

The updated Siri, which Apple says will roll out in beta with iOS 27, is designed to better understand personal context. It can use information from messages, emails, photos, and other apps to provide more relevant responses and complete tasks. For example, Siri could find a restaurant mentioned in an email or play a song a friend recommended in a message.

Transparency mode in AirPods 5 has also been improved, allowing users to hear nearby voices and sounds more naturally. Adaptive Audio can automatically balance noise cancellation and Transparency mode, depending on the surrounding environment. Conversation Awareness, meanwhile, can lower the media volume when the user begins speaking.

Additionally, battery life received an upgrade, with AirPods 5 offering up to five hours of listening with active noise cancellation on a single charge. The charging case brings total listening time to up to 22 hours with active noise cancellation enabled. 

AirPods 5 start at $129, while the version with a Wireless Charging Case costs $149. Pre-orders begin today, with the earbuds arriving September 18.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Everything Apple announced at its fall iPhone event, from the foldable iPhone Duo to an always-listening Apple Watch

Apple on Wednesday unveiled its latest iPhones and Apple Watches at its first fall event under newly appointed CEO John Ternus. The main event was the tech giant’s highly anticipated first foldable phone, the iPhone Duo. Apple also announced its iPhone 18 Pro lineup, along with new AirPods, and more.

We’ve compiled all of the announcements from today’s “Surprise and Sunshine” event.

iPhone Duo

Image Credits:Apple /

Apple’s first foldable, the iPhone Duo, features a 7.6-inch Retina display when unfolded, while its outer display measures 5.4 inches. The company said that the new device was “Inspired by the versatility of iPad.”  The inner display features an “under-display” camera that gives users an all-screen feel.

Apple says the iPhone Duo delivers up to 31 hours of video playback on its inner display and up to 44 hours on its outer display.

The phone features a 48-megapixel fusion main camera and a 48-megapixel ultrawide camera with 2x optical zoom. As with other foldable phones, users can take rear-camera selfies and look at previews on the outer display.

The Duo’s hinge is made from Grade 5 aluminum and comprises more than 100 specially engineered components designed to ensure smooth opening and closing.

The iPhone Duo starts at $1,999 with 256GB of storage and is available in two colors. Pre-orders for Apple’s new foldable open October 16, with the device hitting stores on October 23.

iPhone 18 Pro and iPhone 18 Pro Max

Image Credits:Apple /

The new iPhone 18 Pro lineup retains the same design as its predecessors, but its biggest upgrade comes in the form of enhanced cameras.

The new Pro series camera features a 48-megapixel sensor with a variable aperture controlled by six thin blades. This system is expected to improve low-light photography while also increasing shooting speed. The camera software also introduces new Pro controls, including white balance, shutter speed, aperture, and a histogram. In addition, new “Photographic Styles” offer greater customization with texture and grain controls.

The new camera can record 4K video in Dolby HDR Vision and apply cinematic effects after shooting the footage.

The iPhone 18 Pro starts at $1,199, while the iPhone 18 Pro Max starts at $1,299, which is $100 more than last year’s models. Pre-orders will open Saturday, with both devices officially available on September 18.

Apple Watch Series 12 and Apple Watch Ultra 4

Image Credits:Apple

A new “Sound Recognition” feature can listen for sounds such as sirens, alarms, doorbells, and a baby crying, providing helpful alerts for people who are hard of hearing. The Apple Watch Series 12 and Apple Watch Ultra 4 aren’t getting a major hardware makeover, but they are getting some significant software updates.

Apple is taking aim at the growing wave of AI-powered wearables with new “Audio Intelligence” features that can rewind moments and help users remember details from their everyday conversations.

The smartwatches are introducing a “Live Rewind” feature that shows the previous 15 seconds of a conversation as a text snippet, and a “Siri Recap” feature that’s designed to help you remember key moments from daily conversations, like takeaways from a team meeting or a parent-teacher conference.

A new “Sound Recognition” feature can listen for sounds such as sirens, alarms, doorbells, and a baby crying to provide alerts for people who are hard of hearing.

The Apple Watch Series 12 starts at $399, while the Apple Watch Ultra 4 costs $499. Pre-orders open today, with availability in stores beginning September 18.

AirPods 5

Image Credits:Apple

The latest generation of Apple’s wireless earbuds, the AirPods 5, introduces several upgrades, including improved audio quality, stronger active noise cancellation, and expanded Siri and Apple Intelligence features.

Apple says AirPods 5 can reduce background noise by 50% more than the previous generation. They also feature volume control on the stem, which was previously only available on Apple’s more expensive AirPods Pro.

Transparency mode on AirPods 5 has also been improved to allow users to hear nearby voices and ambient sounds more naturally.

The AirPods 5 offer up to five hours of listening with active noise cancellation on a single charge. The charging case brings total listening time to up to 22 hours.

AirPods 5 start at $129, while the version with a Wireless Charging Case costs $149. Pre-orders begin today, with the earbuds set to arrive on September 18.

Revamped Health App

Image Credits:Apple

Apple announced a redesigned Apple Health app that takes advantage of Apple Intelligence to make better sense of your health data. 

The updates introduce a new Insights tab with a summary of the most timely health information, along with personalized guidance, assessments, a new “Readiness” score, and a calculation of your “Health Age.” The updates also introduce a new Longevity tab that uses metrics from your Apple Watch and iPhone to assess your overall health across factors such as sleep, movement, heart health, and more.

The revamped Health app rolls out later this year, starting in U.S. English.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Apple unveils Watch Series 12 and Watch Ultra 4 with an AI upgrade that can recap your day

Apple on Wednesday unveiled the Apple Watch Series 12 and Apple Watch Ultra 4 at its iPhone launch event in Cupertino. While the smartwatches aren’t getting a major hardware makeover, they are getting some significant software updates.

Most notably, Apple is taking aim at the growing wave of AI wearables with new “Audio Intelligence” features that let you rewind moments and remember details from daily conversations.

The smartwatches are launching with “Live Rewind,” a feature Apple describes as letting you go back up to 15 seconds. A double press of the Digital Crown shows the previous 15 seconds of a conversation as a text snippet. You can ask Siri about the content of that transcript, or save it to the new Siri app to revisit later.

Image Credits:Apple /

There’s a “Siri Recap” feature that’s designed to help you remember key moments from daily conversations. It uses ambient listening to take high-level notes of your conversations, like takeaways from a team meeting or a parent-teacher conference. When Siri Recap is turned on, after a conversation, Apple Intelligence automatically generates a title and key points in the new Siri app.

A new “Sound Recognition” feature will be able to listen for sounds like sirens, alarms, doorbells, a baby crying, and more for people who are hard of hearing.

Apple says these audio intelligence features do not create or store audio recordings.

Both of the new smartwatches feature a new health-sensing system with an increased electrode surface area for better skin contact during ECG readings. For improved optical sensing, redesigned photodiodes are arranged in a ring to capture light more efficiently. There are also more power-efficient green LEDs that enable accurate heart-rate measurements throughout the day, even during motion.

The new health sensing system delivers higher-frequency continuous heart rate data, which is a key indicator of your overall health. Background heart rate readings are now taken every five seconds all day long, even while you’re on the go. That’s 60 times more frequent than before.

Image Credits:Apple /

The smartwatches are taking a page from smart rings with new readiness scores that analyze your recent activity, vitals, and sleep each morning, distilling it all into a single score that indicates how prepared your body is to take on the day.

There’s also a new “Health Age” feature that lets users see how their key health metrics compare with their actual age, based on data from their watch, including VO2 max, sleep, and more.

The Apple Watch Series 12 starts at $399, while the Apple Watch Ultra 4 costs $499.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Apple’s revamped Health app will calculate your ‘health age’ and readiness score

Alongside the new Apple Watch Series 12 and Ultra 4, Apple on Wednesday introduced a redesigned Apple Health app that takes advantage of Apple Intelligence to make better sense of your health data. The changes deliver a new Insights tab that includes a summary of the most timely information, plus personalized guidance, assessments, a new “readiness” score, and a computation of your “Health Age.”

The latter is a way to understand how your various health metrics compare with your actual age and uses data like your VO2 max, sleep, and more, including biomarkers from your blood.

Image Credits:Apple

The additions also include a new longevity tab, which uses metrics from your Apple watch and iPhone to assess your health across sleep, movement, heart health, and other factors. Your lab results can be incorporated into this guidance, and Apple announced a team-up with Quest for a 50-biomarker panel for $119, giving users quick access to data that can only come from lab tests.

Image Credits:Apple

With Apple Intelligence, Apple’s Health app has been improved to make sense of other health data, too, which comes into play in features like the readiness score and the Insights tab. For instance, the app could suggest that a user incorporate more intervals into their morning run to improve their cardio health. The app will also go deeper in areas like fitness and heart health as well, Apple said

The Health app also allows users to take in-depth assessments of how well their bodies are moving, which can help people who are aging or recovering from an injury. A trainer can even demonstrate certain moves for you to try as you take the assessment, which Apple claims is like having a coach right there with you.

The updated Health app rolls out later this year, starting in U.S. English.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Apple unveils its first foldable, the iPhone Duo

Apple today introduced its first foldable device, named the iPhone Duo, at its “Surprise and Shine” iPhone event held in Cupertino. The phone is the first marquee device launched under the company’s new CEO, John Ternus.

The company said that the new device was “Inspired by the versatility of iPad” and also showed how people can use it unfolded in a vertical mode.

Unlike early iterations of foldables, which looked like vertical slabs, Apple adopted a wider form factor that could aid in a better aspect ratio while watching videos when the device is unfolded.

Rivals like Samsung and Xiaomi have already launched their version of wide foldables before the Apple launch, give the iPhone Duo can spur demand for the form factor.

According to analytics firm Counterpoint, foldables contribute to less than 2% of shipments in the overall smartphone market. However, Apple’s new phone could be an instant hit, as the analytics firm said the Duo could garner up to 25% market share by the end of the year.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

a very good laptop wearing the wrong graphics badge

Gigabyte built a genuinely likable 16-inch creator machine — accurate screen, all-day battery, memory slots you can actually reach — and then throttled its RTX 5070 to 85 watts. Here is what that trade costs you, measured.

The short version

The AERO X16 is the best-behaved laptop in its price bracket and the slowest RTX 5070 in it. Buy it if you want a quiet, well-built, upgradeable 16-inch machine that edits sRGB video, compiles code and runs a full workday off the charger. Skip it if the graphics card in the spec sheet is the reason you are shopping.

What Gigabyte actually built

The AERO line has been around since 2016, and it has always aimed at the same awkward middle ground: enough graphics power to game on, restrained enough to open in a meeting without apologizing. The AERO X16 is the clearest expression of that idea Gigabyte has shipped. No lightbar, no engraved venting, no oversized logo. The lid carries a small reflective mark, and the bottom bezel says AERO. That is the entire visual argument.

Underneath sits AMD’s Ryzen AI 7 350, an eight-core Krackan Point part combining four full Zen 5 cores with four density-optimized Zen 5c cores, paired with an NVIDIA GeForce RTX 5070 Laptop GPU and 8 GB of GDDR7. Because of the AMD silicon and its 50-TOPS neural processor, the machine qualifies as a Copilot+ PC, which brings on-device features like live captions and webcam studio effects. Whether you care about that is a separate question, and one we have picked apart in our look at whether a Copilot+ PC is worth buying in 2026.

Gigabyte AERO X16 — as-tested configurationComponentSpecificationProcessorAMD Ryzen AI 7 350 — 8 cores / 16 threads (4× Zen 5 up to 5.0 GHz, 4× Zen 5c), Krackan Point, 70 W sustainedGraphicsNVIDIA GeForce RTX 5070 Laptop, 8 GB GDDR7, 85 W maximum graphics power including 15 W Dynamic Boost; MUX switch with OptimusMemory32 GB DDR5-5600 dual-channel, two SO-DIMM slots, 64 GB maximumStorage1 TB PCIe 4.0 SSD (Kingston OM8PGP41024Q), two M.2 2280 slotsDisplay16-inch 16:10 IPS, 2560 × 1600, 165 Hz, matte, no PWM dimmingPortsUSB4 Type-C (DisplayPort 1.4, 100 W Power Delivery), 2× USB-A 3.2 Gen 1, 1× USB-A 2.0, HDMI 2.1, Gigabit Ethernet, 3.5 mm comboWirelessRealtek RTL8852CE Wi-Fi 6E, Bluetooth 5.2Camera1080p with infrared for Windows Hello; no privacy shutterBattery76 Wh, 150 W barrel-connector adapter, fast chargingDimensions355 × 251 × 16.7–19.9 mm (13.98 × 9.88 × 0.78 in)Weight1.97 kg (4.34 lb)Operating systemWindows 11 Home, Copilot+ PCConfiguration verified against Notebookcheck and Tom’s Hardware review units. Retail configurations also ship with the RTX 5050 or RTX 5060 and the Ryzen AI 9 HX 370.Source: Gigabyte.com

The 85-watt problem

Every review of this laptop eventually comes down to the same number, so let us start there. A laptop graphics chip is not a fixed product. NVIDIA sells the silicon, and each manufacturer chooses how much power to feed it. The RTX 5070 Laptop GPU is configurable across roughly 50 W to 100 W of base total graphics power, and Dynamic Boost can shift up to another 15 W across from the processor when the CPU is not busy. That puts the ceiling at 115 W.

Gigabyte set the AERO X16 to 85 W maximum graphics power. Notebookcheck’s measurements confirm that figure already includes the 15 W of Dynamic Boost, which means the base budget is closer to 70 W — roughly 30% below what the chip is rated to take.

How much power each RTX 5070 Laptop GPU is allowed to drawMachineMaximum graphics powerAERO X1685 W

This is not a defect. It is a design decision, and in a chassis that is 19.9 mm thick and weighs under two kilograms, it is defensible. Power has to go somewhere, and somewhere means heat, fan noise, and a thicker deck. Gigabyte chose portability. The problem is that the box still says RTX 5070, and buyers reasonably read that badge as a performance promise. Reviewing the machine for PC Gamer, Zak Storey found the AERO X16 delivered an average performance improvement of just 5.7% over Gigabyte’s own cheaper Gaming A16 with an RTX 5060 — a machine sitting one rung down the ladder for about $100 less. If you want a broader primer on why two laptops with identical GPU names can perform nothing alike, our guide to choosing a laptop graphics card covers the mechanics in detail.

Gaming performance, measured

Source: Gigabyte.com

Tom’s Hardware tested the AERO X16 against three sensibly chosen rivals: the Acer Predator Triton 14 AI at 110 W, the Framework Laptop 16 at 100 W, and the budget-focused MSI Katana 17 HX at 115 W. Every one of them runs the same RTX 5070 with more power available. Here is 1080p, which is where the CPU and GPU are both relatively unconstrained.

Average frames per second at 1920 × 1080Title & presetAERO X16
RTX 5070 85 WPredator Triton 14 AI
RTX 5070 110 WFramework Laptop 16
RTX 5070 100 WKatana 17 HX
RTX 5070 115 WShadow of the Tomb Raider
Highest109

Source: Tom’s Hardware measured results, March 2026. The Acer renders 2880 × 1800, roughly 27% more pixels than the other two, so its deficit overstates the silicon gap. Bars are scaled to 83 fps.

Read that as a pattern rather than a series of individual losses. The AERO X16 beats the Acer consistently, and consistently trails the Framework and the MSI. The gap to the Framework — 15 W of extra GPU power and nothing else meaningfully different in the graphics stack — runs between 17% and 20% depending on the title. That is close to a linear return on wattage, which tells you the chip is power-limited rather than thermally or architecturally constrained.

Native resolution is the more honest test, because 2560 × 1600 is what you will actually be looking at.

Average frames per second at each laptop’s native resolutionTitle & presetAERO X16
2560 × 1600Predator Triton 14 AI
2880 × 1800Framework Laptop 16
2560 × 1600Shadow of the Tomb Raider64

Cyberpunk 2077 at the Ray Tracing Ultra preset is unplayable at native resolution on every machine here, which says more about the preset than the laptops. Everything else lands in usable territory: Far Cry 6 at 70 fps and Borderlands 3 at 61 fps are perfectly good numbers for a 165 Hz panel, and DLSS 4 upscaling — where the AERO X16’s Blackwell tensor hardware genuinely helps — buys back headroom in supported titles.

The bigger long-term concern is not wattage but memory. Eight gigabytes of VRAM was already tight when this generation launched, and newer titles at 1600p with high-resolution texture packs will run into it before the GPU itself runs out of steam. Notebookcheck flagged this at review time, and it has aged into the machine’s most consequential limitation.

Sustained load and thermals

Where the AERO X16 redeems itself is consistency. Across fifteen consecutive loops of the Metro Exodus stress test, Tom’s Hardware recorded an average of 80.86 fps with a standard deviation of just 0.22 fps between runs. That is a remarkably flat line. The processor held an average of 2.76 GHz and the GPU averaged 1,928 MHz throughout, with internal temperatures settling at 58 °C on the CPU and 68 °C on the GPU.

Surface temperatures stayed civil too: 71 °F at the touchpad, 95 °F between the G and H keys, and 114 °F on the underside toward the rear vent. Notebookcheck was less charitable about acoustics, listing loud fans under gaming load as a genuine drawback, so expect the cooling system to make itself heard even if the chassis stays comfortable. The upside of a conservative power limit is that nothing here throttles — you get the same frame rate in hour three that you got in minute one.

Processor and everyday work

This is where the machine stops apologizing. The Ryzen AI 7 350 runs a 70 W sustained power limit, and Gigabyte lets it hold that limit indefinitely. Notebookcheck’s Cinebench R15 multi-core loop showed no measurable decay across runs, and unplugging the laptop cost only about 6% of multi-core performance — a far smaller battery penalty than most gaming laptops impose.

Geekbench 6 multi-core scoreBenchmarkAERO X16
Ryzen AI 7 350Framework 16
Ryzen AI 7 350Katana 17 HX
Core i7-14650HXTriton 14 AI
Core Ultra 9 288VGeekbench 6
multi-core14,074

In practical terms: the AERO X16 posted the highest Geekbench 6 single-core score in its comparison group at 2,916 points and led multi-core at 14,074, ahead of the Core i7-14650HX in the MSI and, more surprisingly, ahead of the identically specified Framework Laptop 16. It transcoded a 4K clip to 1080p in HandBrake in 3 minutes 54 seconds, roughly 24 seconds faster than the Framework and more than two minutes quicker than the Acer.

Storage is the weak link. The 1 TB Kingston OM8PGP41024Q is a PCIe 4.0 drive that PC Gamer called the slowest it had tested to date, at close to half the throughput of the drive in Gigabyte’s own cheaper Gaming A16. Tom’s Hardware measured 1,480 MB/s on a 25 GB file transfer — mid-pack rather than catastrophic, but well short of the Framework’s 1,725 MB/s. Given the second empty M.2 2280 slot, this is a fixable complaint, which is more than can be said for most laptop shortcomings.

The display

Gigabyte fitted a matte 16-inch IPS panel at 2560 × 1600 and 165 Hz. Reviewers disagreed sharply, and the disagreement is instructive. Tom’s Hardware measured 369 nits and 78.5% DCI-P3 coverage on its unit and called the panel the minimum acceptable for the class. Notebookcheck measured 403 nits and 96.1% sRGB on its unit and rated the same panel highly. PC Gamer described it as crisp and color-accurate.

Both sets of numbers can be true — panel supply varies between production runs, and Gigabyte’s own spec sheet notes that display components may differ between units. What every reviewer agrees on is the shape of the compromise: this is an accurate sRGB screen with a matte finish, not a wide-gamut showpiece.

Measured display performanceMetricMeasuredWhat it meansPeak brightness403 cd/m²Even for an indoor panel, this is adequate rather than generous; the matte coating does more for outdoor legibility than the backlight does.Brightness uniformity97%Unusually even. Panel lottery aside, there is no visible hot-spotting.Contrast ratio1,234:1Typical for IPS. Black scenes look dark grey next to an OLED.sRGB coverage96.1%Enough for web, video, and photo work in sRGB.DCI-P3 coverage68.7%Not enough for color-critical grading in P3.Adobe RGB coverage71.2%Print work will clip.Colour accuracyΔE 1.3 averageAccurate out of the box, which is rare and genuinely useful.GreyscaleΔE 1.8Slight blue cast, correctable with calibration.Response time5.6 ms black-to-whiteFast enough that ghosting is not a factor at 165 Hz.PWM flickerNone detectedMatters if you are sensitive to backlight flicker.All figures measured by Notebookcheck with an X-Rite i1Pro 3 and Calman Ultimate on panel MNG007DA5-1.

If your work lives in sRGB — web, YouTube delivery, most photography workflows — the out-of-the-box ΔE of 1.3 is genuinely excellent and better than plenty of laptops that cost more. If you grade in DCI-P3 or print from Adobe RGB, look elsewhere. And if you have spent time with an OLED panel recently, the 1,234:1 contrast ratio will feel flat no matter what the color measurements say. The absence of PWM dimming is worth noting for anyone who gets headaches from flickering backlights.

Build, ports and the parts you can replace

Reviewers split on materials — Tom’s Hardware describes an aluminum exterior, Notebookcheck a plastic construction — but both rate the result as sturdy, with tight panel gaps and a lid that opens one-handed. The dark grey finish shows fingerprints; a lunar white option does not.

Port selection is complete and oddly dated. You get USB4 with DisplayPort and 100 W Power Delivery, HDMI 2.1, Gigabit Ethernet, two USB-A 3.2 Gen 1 ports, and a headphone jack. You also get a USB-A 2.0 port and a Realtek Wi-Fi 6E card in a machine that lists above $1,500, which is difficult to defend in 2026. The barrel-connector power input is a further reminder that this design was finalized a while ago. Placement is the other irritation: nearly every port sits toward the front of each side, so cables end up in the path of your mouse hand.

Serviceability is the compensation, and it is substantial. Ten identical Phillips screws release the bottom panel, revealing two SO-DIMM slots supporting up to 64 GB, two M.2 2280 drive bays, a socketed M.2 2230 wireless card, and a removable battery. That combination is close to extinct in thin 16-inch laptops, and it is the single strongest argument for this machine over a sealed competitor. A slow SSD and an aging Wi-Fi card are both afternoon projects rather than permanent conditions. We have looked at the broader Gigabyte range and how it holds up in our assessment of Gigabyte laptops.

Keyboard, touchpad, speakers and webcam

The keyboard is a highlight: 1.7 mm of travel, a defined actuation point and enough cushioning that long typing sessions do not punish your fingertips. Tom’s Hardware’s reviewer hit 126 words per minute at 99% accuracy, close to a personal best. The touchpad is large at 13.3 × 9 cm, slightly recessed, and glides well, though its mechanical click is loud. Backlighting is single-zone RGB with three brightness levels — unremarkable for a gaming laptop, forgivable for a creator machine.

Audio is the low point. Two 2 W speakers produce muddy, bass-light sound with poor instrument separation, and the Dolby Atmos presets do not rescue it. Volume is barely adequate for a quiet room. The 1080p webcam is similarly average, with soft detail in anything less than good lighting, though noise reduction is well tuned and the infrared sensor handles Windows Hello reliably. There is no privacy shutter.

Battery life

The 76 Wh battery, combined with the efficient AMD platform and a modest GPU power limit, produces the machine’s most persuasive number.

Battery runtime on Tom’s Hardware’s mixed-workload testMachineRuntimeAERO X169 h 13 m

Nine hours and thirteen minutes of mixed browsing, streaming, and light OpenGL work at 150 nits is a genuine workday, and roughly an hour more than either the Framework Laptop 16 or the Acer Predator Triton 14 AI managed on the same test. Notebookcheck independently recorded a little over eight hours. Set expectations properly, though: PC Gamer measured 109 minutes on a substantially heavier load, and gaming unplugged will land somewhere in that region. This is a laptop that lasts all day doing laptop things, not a laptop that games all day.

Who should buy it

Buy the AERO X16 if the graphics card is a bonus rather than the point. It is quiet under normal use, it types beautifully, it holds an accurate sRGB image, it survives a full workday unplugged, and you can open it with a screwdriver and improve it. For a developer, a student, an sRGB video editor, or anyone who games in the evenings without needing maximum frame rates, that package is coherent and hard to fault at current street prices, which have drifted well below the original $1,899 asking price of the top configuration.

Do not buy it at full retail if you are shopping on frames per second. Cheaper machines with higher-wattage versions of the same GPU will beat it, sometimes decisively, and Gigabyte’s own less expensive models come uncomfortably close. The 8 GB frame buffer also means this configuration will age faster than a 12 GB alternative. If maximum gaming throughput is the goal, our roundup of gaming laptops under $1,000 is a better starting point.

Resale value

Two things drive what an AERO X16 will be worth in a year. The first is the 8 GB frame buffer: as games and creative applications push past that ceiling, demand on the secondhand market softens faster than it does for 12 GB and 16 GB machines. The second is the upgrade path, which works in your favor — a unit with the RAM filled out and a faster drive fitted presents better to a buyer than a stock one, and both upgrades are cheap. Keep the original box, the 150 W adapter, and any receipts, because complete listings consistently clear higher than bare ones.

The practical lesson is the same one that applies to every discrete-GPU laptop: depreciation is steepest in the first eighteen months, and waiting for the next NVIDIA generation to launch before selling costs you real money. If you are weighing an upgrade, Gadget Salvation buys Gigabyte laptops directly — you answer a few questions about condition, get a locked quote, ship with a prepaid label, and get paid once the unit is inspected, with no listings, no lowball messages, and no meeting strangers in parking lots. We also handle the full gaming laptop category. For a deeper look at what moves the number, see our breakdown of the factors that determine laptop resale value and our step-by-step guide to selling a gaming laptop.

Verdict

Gigabyte got almost everything right and then set one number too low. The AERO X16 is well made, quiet, accurate, repairable, and unusually long-lived off the charger. Its RTX 5070 runs at 85 watts, and no amount of engineering elsewhere hides what that costs in frame rates against rivals running the same chip 15 to 30 watts harder.

Judge it as a creator laptop that games, and it is a strong recommendation at street prices. Judge it as a gaming laptop, and it is beaten by machines that cost less — including one of Gigabyte’s own.

Frequently asked questions

Is the Gigabyte AERO X16 good for gaming?

Yes, with a caveat about resolution. At 1920 × 1080 it clears 60 fps comfortably in everything short of heavy ray tracing, and at its native 2560 × 1600 it holds playable frame rates in most titles with settings turned down a notch. What it will not do is match other RTX 5070 laptops, because its GPU runs at a lower power limit than theirs. If frame rates per dollar are your only metric, thicker machines beat it.

Why is the RTX 5070 in the AERO X16 slower than in other laptops?

Because laptop GPUs are sold as a chip plus a power budget, and manufacturers choose the budget. The RTX 5070 Laptop can be configured from about 50 W to 100 W of base graphics power, with up to 15 W more shifted from the CPU by Dynamic Boost. Gigabyte set the AERO X16 to 85 W total. Competing machines run 100 W, 110 W and 115 W. Same silicon, less power, fewer frames.

Can you upgrade the RAM and storage in the AERO X16?

Yes, and this is one of its real strengths. Behind ten identical Phillips screws you get two SO-DIMM memory slots supporting up to 64 GB, two M.2 2280 drive bays, a replaceable M.2 2230 wireless card and a removable battery. Very few thin 16-inch machines are this open.

How is the battery life?

Strong for a machine with a discrete GPU. On Tom’s Hardware’s mixed test of web browsing, streaming and OpenGL work at 150 nits, it ran 9 hours 13 minutes — about an hour longer than the Framework Laptop 16 and the Acer Predator Triton 14 AI. Gaming unplugged is a different story and will drain it in around two hours.

Is the display good enough for photo and video editing?

For sRGB work, yes. It covers 96.1% of sRGB and arrives calibrated to an average ΔE of 1.3, which is better than most laptops in this class manage. For anything mastered in DCI-P3 or Adobe RGB, no — coverage sits near 69% and 71% respectively, so saturated colours will clip.

What is the AERO X16 worth on the used market?

It depends on configuration, cosmetic condition and how much of the original warranty is left. Gaming laptops with 8 GB of video memory have been depreciating faster than 12 GB and 16 GB machines as game requirements climb, so selling sooner protects more value. The fastest way to find out what yours is worth today is to run it through the Gadget Salvation quote tool, which returns a locked price before you ship anything.

Sources

  • Charles Jefferies, “Gigabyte Aero X16 Review”, Tom’s Hardware, March 26, 2026 — gaming, productivity, battery, thermal and display measurements.
  • Zak Storey, “Gigabyte Aero X16”, PC Gamer, November 7, 2025 — RTX 5070 versus RTX 5060 comparison and storage testing.
  • Andreas Osthoff, “Gigabyte Aero X16 Review”, Notebookcheck, May 26, 2025 — calibrated display measurements, sustained CPU load testing, and full specifications.
  • GeForce RTX 50 Series Laptops, NVIDIA — RTX 5070 Laptop GPU configurable power range and Dynamic Boost.

Oura is going public, but these smart ring companies are coming for its crown

The smart ring market is getting crowded, and Oura isn’t waiting around to see what happens next: it officially filed to go public on September 3. The Finnish company’s revenue nearly doubled to $1.21 billion for the nine months ended June 30.

And the company is killing it right now. The Finnish company’s revenue nearly doubled to $1.21 billion for the nine months ended June 30. Oura said it sold 3.6 million rings over the past year, and that it has around 5 million paid members. The company’s move to go public follows the recent launch of the Oura Ring 5, its slimmest and lightest ring yet.

But while Oura has largely dominated the smart ring market for years, rivals are emerging from all corners to dethrone it, each betting on a different angle. For example, French company Circular announced this week that its upcoming ring will allow users to tap to pay with their ring, while Chinese company RingConn debuted a ring this year that added haptic vibrations. 

Indian company Ultrahuman separately announced this week that it raised $70 million with backing from Qualcomm’s venture arm as it looks to build a ring that it says will be able to run software directly on the device and eventually power everything from AI interactions to games.

The race to beat Oura isn’t just about enhanced health and sleep tracking anymore. It’s now about seeing which company can cram the most smartphone-like features into a two-gram titanium band before someone ends up shipping a ring that lets you doomscroll TikTok or answer calls or do your taxes on. I mean, we’re already seeing smart rings with screens, like the Pebble Halo, although it’s currently only available in India, as well as rings that promise touchpads, like the Dreame Ring.

The irony is that the initial appeal with smart rings was that they made technology and health tracking feel less intrusive than devices like smartwatches and smartphones, given you can step away from a screen while still keeping tabs on your health. With the way things are headed in the smart ring industry, though, we may just end up slipping mini smartphones down our fingers.

All of this is to say that the smart ring market is getting increasingly confusing, so we’ve rounded up the most notable contenders vying for Oura’s crown. 

Ultrahuman

Image Credits:Ultrahuman

Earlier this year, Ultrahuman unveiled its third-generation smart ring, the $479 Ring Pro, which is set to begin shipping in the U.S. in mid-September. Ultrahuman’s U.S. business was disrupted in October 2025 after the U.S. International Trade Commission ruled in Oura’s favor in a patent dispute. The ruling prevented the company from importing new ring inventory into the country, so Ultrahuman developed the Ring Pro with a redesigned form factor in order to circumvent Oura’s patent.

The Ring Pro features a redesigned heart-rate sensing system aimed at improving signal quality during sleep, along with a new dual-core processor that enables more accurate data collection and greater on-device processing. As noted earlier, Ultrahuman looks to be more ambitious with future rings as it aims to go beyond sleep and health tracking. 

Circular

Image Credits:Circular /

Circular’s upcoming Ring 3 series, which consists of a Pro model and a Slim option, is expected to launch early next year. Both of the smart rings will feature an integrated NFC chip for contactless payments and on-finger vibrations that can be used for silent wake-up alarms, reminders, vital health alerts, and more. 

The Ring 3 Pro features a slimmer design than its predecessor and comes with FDA-cleared ECG for AFib detection, blood pressure trend tracking, glucose tracking, advanced sleep analysis, and comprehensive biometric monitoring.

Pricing for the upcoming rings is not yet available. 

RingConn

Image Credits:RingConn

The RingConn Gen 3, which launched in May and starts at $349, features vascular health insights that use sensor data from the ring to assess changes in vascular strain over time after calibration with externally measured blood pressure values.

It also tracks heart rate, blood oxygen saturation, sleep, activity, and stress, among other metrics. Additionally, it features vibration alerts for health changes, sedentary reminders, and low battery. Unlike Circular, which leans on haptics to make its ring more communicative, RingConn mostly sticks to vibration as a health-alert mechanism.

Samsung

Image Credits:Samsung

Samsung became the first major tech giant to launch a smart ring in 2024. The Galaxy Ring, which costs $399, is arguably the strongest contender for anyone already invested in Samsung’s ecosystem of devices. 

Compared with other smart rings on the market, the Galaxy Ring is relatively basic when it comes to advanced health and sleep tracking. It lacks features such as sleep apnea detection, which are offered by RingConn, Oura, and Ultrahuman, as well as AFib detection, which is available on Circular and RingConn smart rings. 

Dreame

Image Credits:Dreame /

Dreame, a relatively new entrant to the smart ring market, unveiled a ring earlier this year with haptic alerts for alarms, calls, messages, and more, along with a small touchpad that lets you do things like skip a song or snap a photo on your phone. It’s also said to offer heart rate tracking, blood oxygen monitoring, heart rate variability insights, sleep analysis, and more.

Pricing and availability have yet to be announced.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

AMD vs Intel and Resale Value

A look at how HyperX OMEN’s AMD and Intel configurations differ, how the line stacks up against Acer, ASUS, and Dell rivals, and what it’s likely worth after three years.

The HP HyperX OMEN gaming laptop line represents a premium tier of gaming performance, built to handle heavy multitasking and high-refresh-rate gaming. HyperX itself started as a memory and peripherals brand, selling keyboards, headsets, and RAM modules before HP bought the gaming division. That heritage shows up mostly in bundled accessories and marketing language rather than a separate chip platform. The laptop underneath is still an OMEN: an HP gaming chassis with NVIDIA GPU options, a choice of AMD or Intel CPUs, and HP’s usual OMEN Gaming Hub software for fan curves and overclocking.

If you’re considering this model, the meaningful decision isn’t the HyperX branding on the box. It’s the CPU platform and GPU tier inside, which is where AMD and Intel configurations actually diverge.

AMD vs Intel: Which HyperX OMEN Configuration Should You Buy?

Pick AMD if you want more cores for the money and better battery efficiency; pick Intel if you want the highest single-core clock speeds for competitive, frame-rate-sensitive titles. Both platforms pair with the same tier of NVIDIA RTX graphics in a given price bracket, so the CPU choice mostly changes how the laptop behaves outside pure gaming.

A few practical differences worth knowing:

  • AMD Ryzen HX-series chips in OMEN configurations tend to run cooler under sustained multi-core load, which matters for streaming or video export alongside gaming.
  • Intel Core H-series chips historically had the edge in single-thread performance, which most esports titles rely on.
  • Thunderbolt support has traditionally been an Intel-platform feature. If you need a Thunderbolt dock or an external GPU enclosure, check the spec sheet before buying an AMD configuration.
  • RAM and SSD upgrade paths are usually similar across both chip options within the same chassis generation, since HP reuses the motherboard layout.

AMD vs. Intel Architectures

Feature / MetricAMD Ryzen Versions (e.g., Ryzen 7 / 9)Intel Core Versions (e.g., Core i7 / i9 HX)Primary StrengthSuperior power efficiency & lower heat outputPeak single-core clocks & higher raw frame ratesBattery Life6–8 hours (light productivity)3–5 hoursConnectivityUSB4 standardNative Thunderbolt 4 integrationIdeal UserGamers needing portability & battery lifeCompetitive esports players & video editors

If you’re still deciding between chip families more broadly, our guide to Intel Core i processors in 2026 covers where Intel still wins outside gaming-specific workloads.

How Does OMEN Compare to Acer Nitro, ASUS TUF, Dell G-series, and Alienware?

OMEN sits in the middle of the gaming laptop market: pricier than Acer’s Nitro line, roughly level with ASUS TUF and Dell’s G-series, and below Alienware. Each rival makes a different trade-off:

  • Acer Nitro V 15 / Nitro V 16 — the budget end. Lighter plastic chassis, lower-refresh panels on base configurations, and the smallest price tag in this group.
  • ASUS TUF Gaming A15 / A16 / A17 — MIL-STD durability testing and a chunkier chassis, at a price close to OMEN’s own mid-tier configurations.
  • Dell G15 / G16 7630 — similar cooling philosophy to OMEN, with Dell’s support and spec documentation as a plus for buyers who like a paper trail.
  • Alienware 16X Aurora — the premium tier. Better build quality, more distinctive design, and generally stronger resale value than any laptop in this comparison.

Screen size is one area where the ASUS TUF lineup makes the size-versus-portability trade-off explicit, and OMEN buyers face a similar choice between a 15.6-inch and a larger 16- or 17-inch chassis.

Screen size across the ASUS TUF Gaming lineup

TUF Gaming A15
15.6 in

TUF Gaming A16
16 in

TUF Gaming A17
17.3 in

OMEN’s own lineup mirrors this spread, offering the same rough choice between a compact 15/16-inch model for portability and a larger chassis for a bigger panel and more room for cooling. If you’re weighing OMEN against a specific rival line, our comparison of Acer Predator Helios and Lenovo Legion walks through a similar mid-tier matchup in more depth.

What Will the HyperX OMEN Gaming Laptop Be Worth After Three Years?

It depends most on the GPU tier, physical condition, and whether the battery still holds a usable charge. Gaming laptops depreciate faster than plain productivity laptops for a few reasons: GPU driver support windows are finite, cooling systems accumulate dust and thermal paste degrades, and hinges and keyboards see heavier daily use. A three-year-old OMEN with a mid-range RTX GPU, no cracked panel, and a battery that still holds a reasonable charge will fetch noticeably more than one with a scuffed lid, a dead backlight zone, or a swollen battery:

  • Year 1: Based on the resale data we have gathered over the years, most gaming laptop brands see an initial steep drop of roughly 35-40% of their retail purchase price.

  • Years 2 & 3: The depreciation curve begins to slow down, losing about 25-30% annually.

  • The 3-Year Mark: After three years of regular use, an HP OMEN gaming laptop will retain approximately 30-40% of its original value.

Top Reselling Options & Platforms

When you are ready to upgrade, there are a few primary avenues for the secondary market:

  • Direct-to-Buyer Platforms: Marketplaces like eBay or Reddit’s hardware swap communities often yield the highest gross return. However, you’ll need to manage shipping, pay seller fees, and navigate potential return fraud. eBay sellers will also have to cover an approx. 13% fee, which is significant, if you are reselling a mint-condition, fully working HyperX laptop.

  • Dedicated Trade-in Services: Utilizing a specialized, trusted electronics resale brand like Gadget Salvation provides a much faster turnaround. This approach lets you secure a guaranteed payout without the headache of negotiating with individual buyers, aligning with circular economy principles.

  • Facebook Marketplace / OfferUp: Ideal for immediate local cash transactions without shipping costs or seller fees.

  • Retailer Trade-In (Best Buy / Micro Center): Zero effort option for instant gift cards, though payouts are roughly 25% lower than direct marketplace sales.

If you’re deciding what to do with an aging gaming laptop, our guide to trading in, reselling, or donating an old laptop breaks down the decision in more detail. When you’re ready to get a quote, you can sell a gaming laptop directly instead of letting it sit in a drawer and lose value.

Is the HyperX OMEN Gaming Laptop Worth Buying Now?

Yes, if you want a mid-tier gaming laptop with a real choice between AMD and Intel platforms and don’t need Alienware-level build quality. It’s a reasonable middle ground between Acer Nitro’s budget positioning and Alienware’s premium pricing. Decide on the chip platform based on what you actually do outside games—heavier multitasking favors AMD, while esports-focused single-thread performance and Thunderbolt needs favor Intel. If you’re also weighing whether an AI-capable NPU matters for your next laptop, our 2026 AI laptop buying guide is worth a read before you commit.

Frequently Asked Questions:

Does the HyperX OMEN laptop actually use HyperX memory?

Not necessarily. The HyperX name on an OMEN laptop mainly reflects HP’s acquisition of the HyperX peripherals brand and shows up in bundled accessories and marketing, not always in the RAM modules themselves. Check the individual spec sheet for the actual memory brand and speed before assuming a HyperX label inside the chassis.

Can I upgrade the RAM and SSD in an OMEN laptop?

Most OMEN models have accessible RAM slots and at least one M.2 SSD slot behind a rear panel. This is true across both AMD and Intel configurations within the same chassis generation, since HP typically reuses the same board layout. Always confirm slot count and maximum supported capacity for your specific model year before buying upgrade parts.

Is AMD or Intel better for gaming specifically?

Neither has a decisive edge for gaming alone, since both pair with the same GPU tiers. Intel configurations have historically had a slight single-core clock advantage, which helps in esports titles that are less GPU-bound, while AMD tends to run cooler under mixed workloads like streaming while gaming.

Should I sell my old OMEN before buying a new one?

If it still powers on and has functional hardware components, yes, selling it recovers some value you’d otherwise lose to further depreciation. Wipe your data, check the battery health, and get a quote before you assume it’s worthless just because you’ve had it for years. 

How to Assess Laptop Condition for an Accurate Quote

A buyback quote isn’t a negotiation. It’s a lookup. You select a condition category, the pricing engine returns the number tied to that category, and an inspector later confirms whether you selected correctly. Nearly every gap between the quote on screen and the money in your account is the gap between the category you picked and the category your laptop actually belongs to.

There are six of them: fully functional, defective hardware, defective screen, defective keyboard, defective battery, and defective or missing storage. The good news is that almost all of them map to something you can confirm yourself, in about five minutes, with the laptop open in front of you.

The categories aren’t a ranking. A laptop can land in three of them at once.

Why the category matters more than the description

When you write “the fan is loud and the battery is kind of shot” into a quote form, that sentence doesn’t set your price. It gets read, translated into categories, and priced from those. Skipping that translation yourself is where quotes go wrong in both directions: understate the damage and the offer gets revised after inspection, overstate it and you leave money on the table for a laptop that was fine.

Select every category that applies rather than the single worst one. A cracked screen and a battery that won’t hold a charge are two separate line items, and an accurate quote depends on both being reported.

Run the five-minute pass first

Work through the laptop in a fixed order so you don’t miss anything. Each step below maps to a category you may need to select.

  1. Power. Charge it, unplug it, and leave it running for a few minutes. A laptop that dies the instant the cable comes out has a battery problem, not a mystery.
  2. Screen. Open a plain white image full-screen in a dim room, then a plain black one.
  3. Keyboard. Open a text editor and press every key, modifiers included.
  4. Ports and radios. Wi-Fi, webcam, every USB port, HDMI, and the charging jack.
  5. Heat. Ten minutes of real load, then listen to the fans at idle.
  6. Storage. Confirm the drive appears in the BIOS or UEFI menu, not just in the operating system.

What counts as defective hardware

This is the catch-all. Component failures that aren’t the screen, keyboard, battery, or storage land here:

  • A fan that’s dead, grinding, rattling, or spinning at full speed without ever ramping down
  • Wi-Fi that won’t connect, or drops constantly on a network other devices hold fine
  • A webcam that shows a black frame or isn’t detected by the system at all
  • USB ports that won’t read a flash drive or charge a phone
  • A DC jack that only charges when the cable is held at an angle
  • HDMI or USB-C video output that shows no signal, or a distorted picture on a known-good display

Test one variable at a time. A USB drive that fails in one port and works in the other three points at the port. A drive that fails in all four points at the drive. Same logic for video: swap the cable and the display before you conclude the laptop is at fault.

Let the manufacturer’s diagnostics do the arguing

Every major vendor ships a hardware test that runs before the operating system loads, which is exactly what you want when you’re trying to separate a driver problem from a dead part. On most Dell machines, tap F12 at power-on and choose Diagnostics (Dell Support). On HP, press Esc at power-on, then F2 for HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (HP Support). Lenovo exposes the same thing through Lenovo Vantage and the UEFI menu (Lenovo Support). On an Apple silicon Mac, hold the power button until startup options appear, then press Command-D for Apple Diagnostics; on an Intel Mac, hold D at startup.

How to tell if the screen is actually defective

Dead pixels, stuck pixels, flicker, cracks, and dim backlighting are their own category, not folded into general hardware.

Fill the screen with pure white in a dim room. Dead pixels show as small black dots that stay put; stuck pixels show as fixed red, green, or blue dots. Then switch to pure black, which is where backlight bleed and bright stuck pixels become obvious. If brightness or color shifts as you tilt the lid, that’s usually a loose display cable rather than a failed panel, but it belongs in the defective screen category either way.

On a touchscreen, run a finger along every edge of the glass. A crack you can barely see can still leave a dead strip of touch input, and that counts even when the picture is perfect.

How to tell if the keyboard is defective

Open a text editor and press every key, including Fn, both Ctrl and Alt keys, the arrow cluster, and the number row. You’re watching for three failures: a key that doesn’t register, a key that registers twice from one press, and a key that feels loose or sits lower than its neighbors.

Spilled liquid belongs here too, even if the machine still boots and even if the keys eventually unstick. So does a missing keycap. An external USB keyboard working perfectly doesn’t move the laptop back to fully functional, because the built-in keyboard is the part being priced.

How to read a battery report

Don’t guess from how long it lasts on a charge. Both operating systems will tell you the number.

On Windows, open Command Prompt and run powercfg /batteryreport. Windows writes an HTML file to your user folder listing design capacity against full charge capacity, along with the cycle count (Microsoft’s powercfg documentation). Divide full charge capacity by design capacity and you have the battery’s remaining health as a percentage.

On a Mac, open System Settings, then Battery, and click the info button beside Battery Health. macOS reports condition as Normal or Service Recommended, and the cycle count lives in System Information under Power. Apple rates recent Mac notebook batteries to hold roughly 80 percent of their original capacity through 1,000 charge cycles (Apple), so a machine well past that is expected to read low.

A practical reading of a battery report. Where a quote form states its own threshold, that wording wins.

If you want a hands-on read on how much runtime is actually left rather than what the report claims, our guide on how to measure your laptop’s battery life walks through timing a real discharge.

A swollen battery changes how the laptop ships

If the lid no longer closes flat, the base bulges, or the trackpad has been pushed upward, stop charging the laptop and stop using it. The Consumer Product Safety Commission treats swelling and overheating as failure warning signs on lithium-ion cells (CPSC), and damaged or defective lithium batteries are forbidden from air transport under FAA rules (FAA PackSafe). Flag it when you request the quote so shipping can be arranged correctly rather than discovered at a sorting facility.

Missing or undetected storage

This category covers three situations: a drive that doesn’t appear in the operating system or the BIOS at all, a drive that boots but throws read and write errors, and a laptop sold with the drive already removed.

Check the BIOS or UEFI menu before you assume the drive is dead. A drive that’s invisible to Windows but listed in BIOS usually has a driver, partition, or cable problem rather than a hardware failure, and that changes which category applies. On machines with both an M.2 slot and a SATA bay, confirm which one is actually populated before reporting anything missing.

Pulled drives are routine on retired business and school fleet devices, where storage is removed for data security before the hardware moves on. If you’re processing units in volume, our school buyback and corporate buyback programs are built around exactly that condition.

For a laptop you’re still using, sign out of your accounts before you ship: deactivate Find My, remove the device from your Apple or Microsoft account, and run a factory reset. That’s a separate step from condition reporting, but it’s the one people forget.

Common issues and the category they belong to

What you’re seeingCategory to selectQuick checkFan grinding, rattling, or never idlingDefective hardwareTen minutes of load, then listen at idleWi-Fi drops or won’t connectDefective hardwareTry a second network and a USB adapterWebcam black or not detectedDefective hardwareCamera app, then Device Manager or System ReportA USB port won’t read a driveDefective hardwareTest the same drive in every portCharges only at a certain cable angleDefective hardwareMove the cable while watching the charge iconHDMI blank or distortedDefective hardwareSwap the cable, then the displayCracks, flicker, dimming, or dead pixelsDefective screenFull-screen white, then full-screen blackKeys dead, doubled, sticky, or missingDefective keyboardType every key in a text editorWon’t hold a charge, or any swellingDefective batteryFull charge capacity against design capacityDrive missing, unreadable, or removedDefective / missing storageLook in BIOS or UEFI, not just the OSScratches, dents, worn palm restCosmetic, reported separatelyPhotograph it in daylight, lid open and closed

Gaming laptops fail in their own way

The category logic doesn’t change, but the failure pattern does. High-wattage machines run their fans hard for years, so check thermals more carefully than you would on an ultrabook. Run a game or a stress test for ten minutes and listen for grinding or a fan that never ramps down once the load stops. Worn keycaps on WASD, a hinge that has started to lift the bottom panel, and dried thermal paste showing up as thermal throttling are all common on trade-ins.

Visual artifacts under load, such as flickering textures or colored blocks that vanish at the desktop, point at the GPU rather than the screen. That belongs under defective hardware, not defective screen. If you’re preparing one to trade in, our page for selling a gaming laptop shows which condition details the quote tool asks for.

What an accurate condition report is worth

Resale value on a used laptop is set by three things: the model, the condition categories you select, and how quickly you act, since hardware depreciates every month it sits in a drawer. At Gadget Salvation, the quote is built from the model plus the categories you report, which means the fastest route to a payment that matches the number on screen is to select every category that applies the first time. A defect disclosed up front is priced into the offer. The same defect found at inspection turns into a revised offer and a longer wait.

Even a laptop that fails in several categories is worth submitting. Working parts get harvested, and reuse keeps the machine out of the waste stream, which the EPA puts ahead of recycling in its own hierarchy for electronics (EPA). Start with our sell your laptop page, or read how it works to see what happens after you submit. If you’d rather compare your options first, our guide on where to sell used electronics lays out the alternatives.

Before you request a quote

  • Run the five-minute pass and write down every failure as you find it
  • Pull the battery report and note the capacity percentage
  • Confirm the storage drive in BIOS, and note its size if it’s there
  • Photograph any cosmetic damage in daylight, lid open and closed
  • Select every category that applies, not just the worst one
  • Sign out of your accounts and factory reset the machine before it ships

Frequently asked questions

How do I check my laptop’s battery health before selling it?

Use your operating system’s built-in report. On Windows, run powercfg /batteryreport in Command Prompt and compare full charge capacity against design capacity. On macOS, open System Settings, then Battery, and check Battery Health for a Normal or Service Recommended reading. A battery well below its rated capacity, or one flagged for service, should be reported as defective when you request a quote.

What if I’m not sure whether the problem is hardware or software?

Run the manufacturer’s pre-boot diagnostics, or boot from a USB drive or the recovery environment. If the fault still appears outside your normal operating system, it’s almost certainly hardware. If it disappears, a driver reinstall or a clean OS install may fix it before you need to report anything at all.

Does a laptop with a missing hard drive still get a quote?

Yes. It falls under defective or missing storage rather than fully functional. This is routine on retired business and school laptops where the drive was pulled for data security. Report it as missing and you’ll get an accurate quote instead of one that assumes a working drive and gets revised later.

Will a loud fan lower my laptop’s category even if everything else works?

Yes. A fan that grinds, doesn’t spin, or runs at full speed at idle counts as defective hardware regardless of how the rest of the machine performs. It’s one of the most common findings on older gaming laptops that ran hot for years.

Should I report cosmetic damage separately from functional defects?

Yes, wherever the form allows it. Scratches, dents, and a worn keyboard deck affect grading differently than a defect that stops a component from working. Reporting both, rather than only the more obvious one, gets you a quote closer to what the laptop will actually appraise at.

Is it safe to ship a laptop with a swollen battery?

Not without flagging it first. FAA rules forbid damaged or defective lithium batteries from air transport, so a swollen pack changes how the device has to be shipped. Stop charging and using the laptop, don’t press on the bulge, and note the swelling when you request your quote so shipping can be arranged the right way.

Do I need to erase my data before sending the laptop in?

Yes, and do it before it leaves your hands. Sign out of your accounts, turn off Find My or device locks, remove the machine from your Apple or Microsoft account, and run a factory reset. A device still tied to an active account can stall processing even when its physical condition is exactly as reported.

Circular unveils Ring 3 series with contactless payments and on-finger vibration alerts

Smart ring maker Circular on Thursday unveiled its upcoming Ring 3 series, which consists of a Pro model and a Slim option. Both of the smart rings will feature an integrated NFC chip for contactless payments, vibrating alerts for alarms and reminders, and more.

The Ring 3 Pro features a slimmer design than its predecessor and comes with FDA-cleared ECG for AFib detection, blood pressure trend tracking, glucose tracking, advanced sleep analysis, and comprehensive biometric monitoring. The ring offers up to 12 days of battery life, up from seven days on its predecessor.

Image Credits:Circular /

The Slim option is thinner and lighter than the Pro model and features basic health and wellness tracking in a compact design, including sleep, heart rate, HRV, SpO₂, skin temperature, and daily activity. It features up to 10 days of battery life.

The Circular Ring 3 series announcement comes amid a year of heightened competition in the smart ring market, following the launches of the Oura Ring 5 and RingConn Gen 3.

“We understand that not everyone wants every health feature,” Circular CEO Amaury Kosman said in a company announcement, shared with TechCrunch via email. “Many people simply want a beautifully designed, fashionable smart ring that delivers essential wellness insights and effortless contactless payments. That’s why we created Circular Ring 3 Slim—a lighter, more streamlined experience that retains the convenience of secure NFC payments while offering the core health tracking features many users want in an incredibly compact design.”

The on-finger vibrations, which are available on both models, can be used for silent wake-up alarms, medication reminders, vital health alerts, and guided breathing exercises.

Image Credits:Circular /

Both of the Ring 3 models are made from titanium steel, feature 50-metre water resistance, and support wireless charging. They will be available in sizes 6-14. As with the Ring 2, the new smart rings will be available in gold, rose gold, silver, and black.

Pricing and preorder information for both smart rings will be announced in the coming months, Circular said. The rings are expected to become available in early 2027.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

GoPro to be acquired for $285M, will remain a public company

After years of financial struggles, action camera pioneer GoPro is being acquired for $285 million.

A company called Starman Optical has agreed to merge with GoPro. The deal involves Starman Optical paying GoPro shareholders $1.14 per share and leaving those shareholders with about 10% of the newly combined company. The deal, expected to close by the end of this year, will wipe away GoPro’s outstanding debt of $92 million.

The merger, announced Tuesday morning, comes a few months after GoPro revealed it was considering pivoting from building cameras to becoming a defense tech company. A day or so ago, YouTuber Markiplier revealed he had amassed an 8.5% stake in GoPro.

That appears to still be in the cards, as the company said the merger will “maximize the value of GoPro’s IP and growth potential in consumer, commercial and defense markets by recapitalizing the company, strengthening its balance sheet, investing in growth and onshoring the manufacturing of products for strategic markets.”

GoPro will also “fully support” its existing consumer products while “investing in growth and a broader, diversified product roadmap.”

It’s not exactly clear what all that means, and Starman Optical doesn’t have a significant track record to judge its performance.

The company bills itself as an “optical-photonics company focused on the development and domestic manufacturing of optical transceivers and related photonics technologies through its Starman New Photonics business.” Both Starman Optical and Starman New Photonics are part of Starman Holding, which owns consumer tech brands like Incase, Incipio, and Griffin.

Starman Optical was only incorporated in Delaware on August 31, while Starman New Photonics appears to have been created in 2025 and is building a manufacturing facility in New Jersey.

“Advanced optics and imaging are essential to AI, national security, and the broader economy, yet much of the critical hardware supporting these technologies continues to be manufactured overseas,” Charles Tebele, the CEO of Starman Holdings, said in a statement. “The combination of GoPro’s world-class optical expertise and intellectual property with Starman’s advanced transceiver capabilities and U.S. manufacturing platform creates a unique opportunity. Together, we intend to bring production of these critical components back to the United States.”

GoPro went public in 2014, when its action cameras were selling millions of units per year. In the decade since, the company tried branching into new categories like drones and 360-degree cameras, but it didn’t find much luck with either. GoPro then refocused on high-performing versions of its action cameras, and kept them targeted at pros, prosumers, and athletes, but it had to conduct multiple rounds of layoffs as it narrowed the business.

In June, GoPro warned shareholders that it may go out of business without new funding. The following month, founder and CEO Nick Woodman said he was putting $20 million into the business to keep things going.

“We expect this merger to enable GoPro to grow across consumer, commercial and defense markets as a leading American imaging and optical solutions company, addressing important areas of national security related to cameras, optics and AI infrastructure. We’re excited to combine with the Starman team to capitalize on this opportunity and play an important role in America’s future,” Woodman said in a statement.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

What We Know So Far

OpenAI is reportedly building its own AI chip, codenamed Jalapeno, with Broadcom. Here’s what’s confirmed, what’s rumored, and why it matters for anyone buying AI hardware.

What is OpenAI’s Jalapeno Chip?

Jalapeno is the reported codename for OpenAI’s first custom AI accelerator, a chip designed in-house rather than bought from NVIDIA or AMD. The project is a partnership with Broadcom, which builds custom silicon for several major cloud and AI companies, and the chip is meant to run inside OpenAI’s own data centers rather than ship in a consumer product. Nothing about Jalapeno is a finished, shipping part yet. What’s public comes from industry reporting, not an OpenAI spec sheet, so treat the details below as the current picture rather than a settled one.

Why is OpenAI Building its Own Chip in a First Place? 

Because running models like ChatGPT at OpenAI’s scale means buying an enormous amount of compute, and every chip in that stack currently comes from Nvidia at a premium. Custom silicon lets a company tune the hardware to its own workload, mostly inference (running a trained model to answer queries) rather than training new ones from scratch. It also reduces dependence on a single supplier during a period when demand for AI chips outstrips supply. Google, Amazon, and Microsoft have already gone down this road with their own accelerators, and outlets like The Verge and Ars Technica have covered the industry-wide shift toward custom AI silicon in some depth.

What Do We Actually Know About Jalapeno’s Specs and Partners?

The confirmed part is the partnership structure: OpenAI designs, Broadcom helps engineer and manufacture, and the chip is expected to be fabricated using an advanced TSMC process node, the same foundry that makes Apple’s and NVIDIA’s chips. Reports point to the chip being built for internal inference workloads rather than for sale to other companies. No verified core count, memory bandwidth figure, or power draw is in circulation, and any number you see attached to Jalapeno right now should be read as speculation rather than a manufacturer spec. That’s a meaningful gap, and it’s worth being upfront about it instead of repeating an unconfirmed number.

What’s confirmed vs. what’s rumor

Confirmed: OpenAI is partnering with Broadcom on custom AI accelerator silicon, intended for internal use.

Unconfirmed: The “Jalapeno” codename, exact specs, production timeline, and manufacturing volume.

Architectural Innovations

Core FeatureTechnical ImplementationPractical BenefitAI-Assisted DesignDesigned using OpenAI’s internal AI tools.Significantly shortened chip development cycles.KV Cache LocalityExplicitly keeps Key-Value cache local to active compute blocks.Minimizes data movement and cuts communication delays.Full-Stack Co-DesignSynchronized design across models, serving software, memory, and rack architecture.Eliminates hardware bottlenecks specific to LLM agent workflows.

How Does Jalapeno Compare to Other Custom AI chips?

It sits in the same category as Google’s TPU, Amazon’s Trainium, and Microsoft’s Maia — all chips built by AI or cloud companies to run their own models more cheaply than renting Nvidia GPUs. None of these companies publish head-to-head benchmark numbers against Nvidia’s chips, so any chart claiming to rank them by raw performance is guessing. What’s genuinely comparable is the strategy: each company decided that owning its inference hardware, at least in part, was worth the engineering cost. If you’re tracking where AI hardware is headed generally, our piece on the superchip era and NVIDIA RTX Spark laptops covers the consumer side of that same shift.

A recent Bloomberg Tech report offers helpful context on how OpenAI’s new custom silicon compares directly to established hardware in real-world workloads:

Does This Affect the Laptop or Smartphone You Already Own?

Not directly, and not soon. Jalapeno is server hardware built to run inside OpenAI’s own infrastructure, not a chip that will show up in a laptop or phone. What it does signal is that AI compute demand keeps climbing, and that demand has real costs — our piece on the hidden energy cost of AI walks through why. On the consumer end, “AI-ready” hardware is becoming a real shopping category, whether that’s a laptop with a dedicated neural processor or a phone like the OnePlus Open Dual-SIM running on-device AI features. If you’re shopping for one, our 2026 AI laptop buying guide is a better starting point than chasing server-chip news.

If chasing the newest AI hardware means an older laptop or phone is sitting in a drawer, trading it in through Gadget Salvation is a straightforward way to get cash back and keep it out of a landfill.

Strategic & Economic Importance

  1. Lower Inference Costs: Increasing compute output per kilowatt-hour allows OpenAI to serve higher request volumes at reduced operational expenditure.

  2. Reduced Hardware Bottlenecks: Decreases sole reliance on third-party GPU vendors like Nvidia while optimizing hardware specifically for OpenAI’s software stack.

  3. Agent Optimization: Interactive AI agents generate compounding delays during long reasoning paths; Jalapeño’s low latency directly mitigates this bottleneck.

This custom silicon foundation establishes an integrated vertical stack, positioning OpenAI to scale next-generation agentic models far more efficiently.

Frequently Asked Questions:

What is OpenAI’s Jalapeno chip?

Jalapeno is the reported codename for a custom AI accelerator OpenAI is developing with Broadcom. It’s meant to run inference workloads inside OpenAI’s own data centers rather than ship as a product you’d buy. The name and most technical details come from industry reporting, not an official OpenAI announcement, so specifics remain unconfirmed.

Is OpenAI making its own hardware now?

Yes, in the sense that it’s designing chips in partnership with a manufacturing partner, not a factory OpenAI owns. Broadcom is reportedly handling engineering and production using an advanced foundry process, similar to how Google and Amazon work with manufacturing partners on their own AI chips rather than building fabs themselves.

Will Jalapeno replace NVIDIA GPUs at OpenAI?

Probably not entirely, at least not soon. Custom chips like Jalapeno are typically built to supplement GPU capacity for specific workloads, mainly inference, while training still relies heavily on Nvidia hardware. Companies that build their own silicon generally keep buying GPUs alongside it rather than switching over completely.

When will the Jalapeno chip be available?

There’s no confirmed release date. Reports suggest OpenAI’s custom silicon efforts with Broadcom are targeting deployment sometime in the next couple of years, but that timeline hasn’t been confirmed by OpenAI itself and could shift. Treat any specific date you see elsewhere as a projection, not a commitment.

Can I buy a device with the Jalapeno chip in it?

No. Jalapeno is server-side infrastructure hardware built for OpenAI’s own data centers, not a chip destined for laptops, phones, or any consumer product. If you’re looking for AI-capable hardware to buy today, look at laptops and phones with dedicated neural processing hardware instead, since those are the parts actually shipping in retail devices.

Why does OpenAI need its own chip instead of using cloud GPUs?

Cost and supply. Running AI models at OpenAI’s scale requires enormous, continuous compute, and Nvidia GPUs are both expensive and in high demand across the industry. A custom chip built for OpenAI’s specific workloads can be more cost-efficient and reduce reliance on a single hardware supplier.

The Theragun Sense makes everyday recovery surprisingly easy

As my 20s are set to come to an end later this year, I’ve officially reached the age where sleeping in the wrong position or stretching just a little too far can cause aches and pains. I’ve always been somewhat skeptical of massage guns, mostly because I’ve tried a few off-brand ones and just assumed they’d eventually end up collecting dust in a drawer.

But after a few weeks of testing the Therabody Theragun Sense (2nd Gen), I was surprised. Turns out massage guns aren’t as gimmicky as I had thought.

The Theragun Sense, which retails for $299, is a wellness-focused massage gun that’s designed for everyday aches, muscle tension, relaxation, and soreness. It’s more of a gentle massaging and relaxation tool rather than a hardcore recovery massage gun.

If you’re looking for more of a deep-tissue massage, it might be worth checking out the Theragun PRO or Prime. But if you don’t need a super heavy-duty massage gun with features like heated therapy and deep- tissue capabilities, the Theragun Sense is a great option for everyday use. 

My favorite thing about the massage gun is that it features built-in visually guided routines. The device comes with four routines, and you can access additional routines through the Therabody app and sync your favorite ones to the device using Bluetooth.

Image Credits:Therabody /

The Theragun Sense has an LCD screen that walks you through routines step by step. Once you select a routine, the screen shows you exactly where to use the massage gun, how long to spend on each area, and how much pressure to apply.

As someone who never really had an idea of what to do with a massage gun other than pointing it to a sore muscle and hoping for the best, I liked that the Therabody Sense takes a lot of the guesswork out of using a massage gun. 

My favorite routine was the six-minute “Sleep” routine that’s essentially a quick full-body massage to get you ready for the night. The app lets you choose from many other routines, like “Pre-Walk Warm-up,” “Desk Relief,” “Lower Back Recovery,” and more. 

The massage gun features five speeds to fine-tune pressure to allow for a more relaxing touch, moderate pressure, or a deeper tension release. I liked having the flexibility to change the intensity depending on how sore I was feeling that day.

Since the device is designed to be lightweight, I found it easy to hold and get to those spots on my back and shoulders that are harder to reach.

Image Credits:Therabody /

For people who want more personalization, the Therabody app takes the guided experience a step further with Coach, the company’s AI feature that creates personalized recovery recommendations based on your goals and activity. Coach can recommend which part of your body to target, which settings or attachments to use, and when to fit a recovery session into your day. 

The relatively quiet motor was another feature I appreciated, as I could easily use the device while watching TV or relaxing without the sound of the massage gun acting as a distraction. 

The Theragun Sense comes with a USB-C charging cable, a travel pouch, and two massage attachments: the Standard Ball and the Dampener, which is designed to target knots and tender areas. Separately, you can purchase the “Supersoft” attachment for $35 for extra sensitive areas on the body. 

Overall, the Theragun Sense (2nd Gen) won me over. It’s easy to use, comfortable to hold, and notably takes the guesswork out of using a massage gun. At $299, it isn’t cheap, but I think it’s a great option for people who want an everyday wellness device that can help them relax and recover.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Google’s new Fitbit Air brings Pokémon Sleep to your wrist

Google is giving Pokémon fans a new reason to wear a Fitbit. The company announced Thursday a special-edition Fitbit Air that works with Pokémon Sleep, combining Fitbit’s health and fitness tracking and the sleep-focused Pokémon game. The announcement comes as Pokémon celebrates its 30th anniversary this year.

Pokémon Sleep first launched in 2023, turning something as ordinary as going to bed into a Pokémon game. Players can earn in-game rewards for getting to sleep before their set bedtime, while the amount and quality of sleep they get helps drive their progress. You start with a big, sleepy Snorlax. The more you sleep, the more “Drowsy Power” your Snorlax builds up, which in turn attracts more Pokémon for you to discover.

The Fitbit Air adds another layer to that experience. It can sync with both the Google Health app and Pokémon Sleep, allowing users to track metrics including daily movement, heart rate, and cardio load during the day, then use the device to record sleep duration and quality overnight.

This isn’t the first wearable that can connect with Pokémon Sleep. The app already supports several wearables including Apple Watch, the Fitbit series, Galaxy Watch, and Google Pixel Watch. Players can also use Pokémon Sleep without a wearable at all.

For Pokémon’s 30th anniversary, however, it’s a particularly clever crossover. It turns something people already do every night into another opportunity to engage with the franchise, while giving Google a playful way to make wearable health tracking feel more fun. Google has also recently teamed up with athlete Stephen Curry for a special edition of the Pixel Watch for $579, featuring an exclusive design built for workouts.

The special-edition device is available to preorder for $129 and starts shipping September 15. It will be sold online and in stores through the Google Store and Target. 

The standard Fitbit Air, meanwhile, costs $99. Google introduced its new Fitbit Air in May, featuring a slimmer design, improved health and fitness tracking, and an AI-powered coach that provides personalized guidance based on users’ activity, sleep, and wellness data.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Plaud’s new earphones come with an eSIM-enabled case for talking to AI agents

Hardware companies have realized that note-taking is one of the easiest AI use cases to build for, and consequently have been busy shoving mics into everything from pendants and rings to credit-card-sized pucks and wristbands. Still, despite the variety of devices, only a few companies have been able to stand out.

One of these companies is Plaud, which has over 2.5 million people using its hardware or software. It is now launching a note-taker in a new form factor: earphones. Called Plaud One, these adopt the simple bare-bones style of Apple’s Airpods, and can record calls, while their case can be used to record in-person conversations or take notes.

Plaud isn’t the first to this form factor. Its rivals Viaim and Anker already have similar note-taking earbuds in the market.

But the company is betting on its software and AI chops to set these apart. Plaud said that once the earbuds transcribe your conversation, its AI agent — which can connect to tools like Gmail, Google Calendar, Notion and Slack — can do things like writing follow-up emails and creating documents or presentations based on the contents of the conversation.

By itself, that isn’t a unique pitch. Software note-takers like Granola, Fathom and Read AI have been offering similar workflow automation for a while now, transcribing calls and conversations, and allowing you to subsequently get an AI agent to do various tasks.

The Plaud One takes that a step further, though, with its case, which supports an eSIM card. That feature, the company says, allows users to instruct Plaud’s AI agents remotely without using their phone or computer.

Image Credits:Plaud

The Plaud One has 12mm drivers and features active noise cancellation. The company says the case can capture voices clearly within a range of five meters, and the earphones can record six hours of in-person meetings and three hours of calls on a single charge. Combined with the case, users can record up to 25 hours of conversations on a single charge.

Buyers get 300 minutes of free transcription per month, after which they will need to buy additional plans, which start from $8.33 per month (paid annually).

That said, this launch seems to be more of a trial run. The Plaud One will be limited in quantity, as the startup likely wants to gauge demand for such AI-focused earphones before it commits to the format.

Plaud is also working on building agentic capabilities, which is expected to arrive as part of an update in the coming months. The company says it will introduce a credit-based system for different tasks, and buyers of the Plaud One will get $200 in credits for these tasks.

The company has had a good run so far, claiming in June that it had reached annual run-rate revenue of $100 million. However, competition in the market is intense, with new hardware note-takers releasing every week. Its rival, YC-backed Pocket, has also reached that milestone, and tons of other companies like Anker, Comu, Viaim, and software startup Genspark are building in the space.

Plaud’s CEO Nathan Xu holds that there should be an interface to talk to AI to invoke it from anywhere, and earbuds meet that need.

“[For AI] we need to have a wearable and an always-ready interface, one that people love to wear, is socially acceptable and private by design,” he said in a briefing.

Still, the company may find it challenging to draw people away from using their AirPods, Google Pixel Buds, Samsung Galaxy Buds, or wireless earbuds from any number of audio companies, which can pretty much do the same job when paired with any note-taking app.

But Xu says Plaud is not necessarily competing against these companies, but positioning its meeting-recording tech to adopt a popular wearable format.

Users can pre-order the device now for $249, and it will ship in the fourth quarter of 2026.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Best AI Laptop in 2026: A Practical Buying Guide

NPU specs get thrown around a lot now, but here is what actually separates a real AI laptop from a marketing label, and which model actually earns the title in 2026.

What Actually Makes a Laptop an “AI Laptop”?

A laptop earns the “AI” label when it ships with a dedicated neural processing unit, or NPU, built into the main chip alongside the CPU and GPU. That NPU handles machine-learning tasks — background blur in a video call, live captioning, local image generation — without leaning on the CPU or draining the battery the way a GPU-only approach would.

The term got slapped on marketing copy for almost everything in 2024 and 2025, so it is worth being precise. Microsoft’s Copilot+ PC program requires an NPU capable of at least 40 trillion operations per second, a threshold you can check on the Microsoft Surface product pages. Apple’s Neural Engine has been in every M-series chip since the M1, documented on Apple’s own MacBook Pro tech specs page. If a laptop cannot point to a specific NPU spec, it is running AI features on general-purpose silicon — which still works, just less efficiently.

Do You Need a Dedicated NPU, or Will a CPU and GPU Do?

Most people do not need a dedicated NPU to use AI features today. Cloud-based tools like ChatGPT or Copilot run on someone else’s servers regardless of what chip is in your laptop. An NPU only matters when you want those tasks running locally — for privacy, for offline use, or because you are doing sustained on-device work like local large-language-model inference or AI-assisted video editing.

If that describes you, prioritize the NPU. If it does not, a fast CPU and a capable GPU will cover the AI features baked into Windows, macOS, and most creative apps without you needing to shop by TOPS rating at all.

Best AI Laptops for Everyday and Creative Work

For most buyers, a MacBook Pro with an M-series chip or a Surface Laptop covers day-to-day AI work without complication. Apple’s Neural Engine handles on-device features across Photos, Final Cut Pro, and third-party apps, and the unified memory architecture means the GPU can use the same pool of RAM the NPU uses—no separate VRAM bottleneck. Our MacBook Air M5 vs. MacBook Pro M5 guide breaks down which chip tier actually needs the Pro’s active cooling.

On the Windows side, Copilot+ certified Surface Laptops meet the 40 TOPS NPU threshold and integrate Windows Studio Effects and Recall at the OS level. If you already own an older Surface Laptop, our piece on whether the Surface Laptop 5 still holds up in 2026 is worth reading before you assume an upgrade is necessary — the 5 predates the Copilot+ NPU requirement entirely, which is the honest reason to consider trading it in rather than keeping it.

Best AI Laptop for Gaming and Heavy Local Workloads

If your AI workload includes gaming or GPU-bound generative work, a discrete NVIDIA GPU still outperforms any laptop NPU for those tasks. The Eluktronics Prometheus XVI G2 and Eluktronics Prometheus XVII are built around high-power mobile GPUs rather than a low-wattage NPU, which is the right trade-off if you run local Stable Diffusion workflows, upscale video with GPU acceleration, or train small models alongside gaming. The XVI G2 runs a 16-inch panel; the XVII steps up to a 17-inch display and chassis, with more room for cooling and a larger battery.

Neither model is chasing the Copilot+ badge, and that is fine — a 4000-series-class GPU handles CUDA-accelerated AI tools faster than any current NPU, just at a higher power draw. With a similar philosophy in a different chassis, our review of the MSI Vector 16 HX AI covers how a gaming laptop balances GPU muscle against an onboard NPU.

How Do Screen Sizes Compare Across These Laptops?

Screen size is one of the clearest, most verifiable differences between an AI-focused ultraportable and an AI-capable gaming rig. Gaming laptops run larger to fit better cooling and bigger batteries; MacBooks and Surface Laptops stay compact because thermal load is lower.

Display size comparison across AI-capable laptops

Surface Laptop (13.8″)
13.8 in

MacBook Pro 14″
14 in

Surface Laptop (15″)
15 in

MacBook Pro 16″
16 in

Prometheus XVI G2
16 in

Prometheus XVII
17 in

LaptopDisplay sizeSurface Laptop (small config)13.8 inMacBook Pro14 inSurface Laptop (large config)15 inMacBook Pro16 inEluktronics Prometheus XVI G216 inEluktronics Prometheus XVII17 in

AI Laptop vs. Regular Laptop: What’s Actually Different?

The honest answer is: less than the marketing suggests, unless you’re running local models. Here is what actually changes when a laptop is built around AI, versus one that just runs the same software on general-purpose hardware.

FeatureCopilot+/Apple Silicon AI laptopStandard CPU/GPU laptopDedicated NPUYes, rated in TOPSNo, or below Copilot+ thresholdOn-device features (Recall, live captions, background effects)Runs locally, low power drawRuns on CPU, higher power drawLocal LLM / image generationLimited by NPU throughputFaster with a discrete GPUBattery impact of AI tasksMinimalNoticeableBest suited forEveryday productivity, creative appsGaming, GPU-accelerated AI work

Should You Upgrade to an AI Laptop or Wait?

Upgrade now only if you have a specific local-AI use case; otherwise, your current laptop’s CPU and GPU are already running most AI features fine through the cloud. The NPU race is still moving — TOPS ratings that looked impressive in 2024 are already the entry point in 2026 — so buying the newest chip purely for a spec you won’t use is money spent on headroom you don’t need. If you’re weighing whether to buy new for school or work first, our 2026 back-to-school laptop guide covers the budget side of that decision in more depth.

If you do decide to move on from your current notebook, do it deliberately rather than letting it sit in a drawer. Our guide to trading in, reselling, or donating an old laptop walks through which path actually gets you the most value. When you’re ready, you can sell a laptop to Gadget Salvation directly for cash, so it gets a second life instead of becoming e-waste.

Frequently Asked Questions:

What is the minimum NPU rating for a Copilot+ PC?

Microsoft requires at least 40 trillion operations per second (TOPS) of NPU performance for Copilot+ certification. This threshold is what unlocks OS-level features like Recall and Windows Studio Effects. Laptops below that rating can still run Windows and most software, but they fall back on the CPU for AI tasks, which uses more power and runs slower.

Do Eluktronics Prometheus laptops have an NPU?

They’re built around discrete NVIDIA GPUs rather than a Copilot+-rated NPU. That’s a deliberate trade-off: a discrete GPU accelerates CUDA-based AI workloads and gaming far better than a low-power NPU, at the cost of higher battery draw. If your AI use case is GPU-bound rather than efficiency-bound, this is the better architecture.

Is a MacBook or a Windows laptop better for AI tasks?

It depends on what “AI tasks” means for you. Apple’s Neural Engine is tightly integrated with macOS and creative apps like Final Cut Pro, while Windows Copilot+ laptops offer OS-level AI features across more third-party software. For local large-model work, a Windows laptop with a discrete GPU generally has more flexibility.

Can I add an NPU to an older laptop?

No, the NPU is built into the main chip and cannot be added or upgraded separately. If your current laptop lacks one and you need local AI performance, replacing the machine is the only option. For most cloud-based AI tools, though, an older laptop’s CPU and GPU are still perfectly capable.

Is it worth buying an AI laptop just for the NPU?

Only if you have a concrete use case that needs local processing. If you mainly use cloud-based AI tools like ChatGPT or Copilot, the NPU rating won’t change your experience much, and you’re better off spending the money on RAM, storage, or a better display.

Hearing tech startup Legato emerges from stealth with $12M and a peek at its AI hearing glasses

Hearing loss affects an estimated 50 million adults in the United States, but only around 20% of those with diagnosed hearing loss seek treatment. Legato, a new hearing tech company, aims to close that gap. 

The startup is emerging from stealth on Wednesday with $12 million in funding and a first look at its AI hearing glasses, the company told TechCrunch exclusively. The glasses, called Legato Frames, integrate the company’s patented hearing-assistance technology into the arms of eyewear frames. Legato Frames are expected to launch later this fall.

Legato was founded by Mehul Trivedi and Steve Romine, who bring extensive experience in wearables and hearing care from Bose, where Trivedi led the creation of Bose Frames and Romine ran the hearing aids division. Trivedi left Bose to work at EssilorLuxottica, where he led smart eyewear efforts and worked on the Meta Ray-Bans, while Romine went on to serve as COO of hearing care company Audicus.

After spending years at larger companies, Trivedi took some time off to explore the intersection of hearing technology and smart eyewear. During that time, Trivedi came across technology he believed could bring the two together, so he contacted Romine and the pair founded Legato in late 2024.

Image Credits:Legato /

“Our goal is to make hearing as ubiquitous as vision,” Trivedi said in an interview with TechCrunch. “It’s kind of a no-brainer that you go to an eye exam, you get your glasses, you wear your glasses, and you’re happy, and you do that for the rest of your life — and the idea of it being blurry again where you would just stop wearing them is not a consideration. I think that’s what we want to do with hearing: just make it something that people address and almost forget about.”

Legato is targeting people with mild to moderate hearing loss, which represents the largest segment of the hearing-loss population, the startup says. 

The company started with the goal of making hearing care more accessible by addressing the cost, comfort, and stigma associated with traditional hearing aids. Legato set out to make the glasses as small and lightweight as possible, and developed a proprietary acoustic system, signal-processing stack, and mechanical architecture to achieve it. 

Legato co-founders Mehul Trivedi (left) and Steve Romine (right)Image Credits:Legato /

Traditional hearing aids often use directional microphones to focus on sounds coming from a particular direction, which works well in quiet settings but can be difficult in noisy environments, such as restaurants. Legato takes a different approach by using an AI-powered system to differentiate between background noise and voices, amplifying only the voices.

The goal is to make conversations clearer without creating the cognitively draining listening experience that can come with some traditional hearing aids.

“We wanted to deliver an experience that was unique,” Trivedi said. “So a form factor that’s really discreet and looks normal. They’re meant to feel and look like regular glasses. And so, we want it to be a product that’s effortless, easy to use, with kind of no controls that you need to fiddle with, works everywhere, works throughout your day, doesn’t need a ton of configuration, and just delivers you better hearing.”

While the frames have an open-ear design, sound isn’t broadcast to people around you. They feature a dual-speaker system that directs sound toward the wearer while canceling sound that escapes, reducing sound by 99% just a few inches away from the ear. 

Image Credits:Legato /

The company’s funding, which is from Neotribe Ventures, Listen, and Village Global, has largely gone toward product development, along with marketing efforts. 

“We have an opportunity to address a population with this product and build something that delivers without all the compromises of traditional hearing aids,” Trivedi said. “Hearing, at first glance, it’s not so much just like ‘I want to hear the TV better.’ It’s really about connection. When you hear better, you connect to the world. It reduces dementia risk and depression risk,” he continued.

“There’s impactful hearing health factors associated with better hearing. We’ve got a product that lives on people for 16 hours that is trusted to help them with their hearing and their vision, and we’d love to continue helping them in every way we can.”

When the frames launch later this year, Legato says they’ll be available through select eye-care providers nationwide and will “cost a fraction” of traditional hearing aids and may be eligible for vision insurance when purchased through an eye-care clinic.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Life360 expands pet tracking with new $8 scannable tags and zoomie alerts

Family location-sharing and safety app Life360 is expanding its pet-tracking capabilities on Tuesday with the launch of a new product line of $7.99 scannable pet tags and other pet care features that tap into its tracking network technology.

Life360 expanded into pet tech last year with the launch of GPS pet trackers that leverage the lost-item-finding capabilities that the company integrated into its platform after its 2021 acquisition of AirTag rival Tile. With Tile, the company now offers not just location-sharing features for families, but also the ability for members to track other things of importance — like keys, handbags, luggage, and pets.

Since then, families on the service have added more than 8 million pets to their accounts, the company says.

However, the team found that not everyone wants to attach a bulky tracker to their pet’s collar, and not everyone needs access to location-tracking features or other advanced options like geofences and escape alerts.

In many cases, pet owners just want to put their contact information on a pet’s tag, which is what the new scannable pet tags support.

Image Credits:Life360

But there’s a twist. Instead of just providing a pet owner’s phone number when someone scans the QR code printed on the new pet tags, the scan also alerts the family through the Life360 app installed on the family’s smartphones. (The person who found the pet does not need to have the app for this to work.)

This helps in multiple ways — not only does it provide peace of mind to families searching for a lost pet, but it also provides the pet’s location details. That can be useful if the lost pet escapes from the finder’s control and runs off again, as the family will at least have the last known location recorded.

Families can update their contact details through the Life360 pet profile in the app.

In addition, the company is rolling out several new pet care features for families, including tools that let families schedule “care logs” to manage and track whether the pet has been fed, walked, given medication, or had its litter cleaned. Everyone in the family can see these care routines, so they will know if the pet needs their attention.

Image Credits:Life360

Another fun feature is “Zoomies Alerts” for GPS trackers, which track the bursts of energy a pet has at particular points during the day or evening. A new Weekly Roundup will recap other routines, like the distance walked or information about who in the family provided the pet with the most care during the week.

Image Credits:Life360

With the new features, the company is also making its pet trackers more affordable. Before, the Pet GPS trackers were only available with the higher-tier Platinum and Gold subscriptions, but now they’re included with the $99-per-year Silver bundles, too.

The new pet tags and GPS trackers are sold on both the comapny’s website and Amazon in the U.S., Canada, Australia, New Zealand, and the U.K.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Apple’s latest Mac Mini runs on a new M6 chip, and starts at $899

Apple on Tuesday unveiled a new Mac Mini that runs on the latest iteration of its “M” processors, the M6.

The base model of this device comes with 256GB of storage, 16GB of RAM, and costs $899. It’s available for pre-order now, but the device will ship only after September 22, the company said.

Apple said the new Mac Mini’s AI performance is 4x better than the M4 model, and storage and graphics are twice as fast. The new processor has a 12-core CPU and 12-core GPU, as compared to the 10-core CPU and 10-core GPU on the M4.

Alongside the M6 model, there is also a Mac Mini with the M5 Pro chip. This model comes with base storage of 512 GB and RAM of 24GB, and starts at $1,699. By default the M5 Pro chip ships with a 15-core CPU and 16-core GPU, and can be upgraded to a 18-core CPU and 20-core GPU.

Both variants have Wi-Fi 7 and Bluetooth 6, along with a 2.5Gb Ethernet port. Users can upgrade to a 10Gb port as well.

The new Mac Minis will start shipping on September 22nd with macOS 27 and Siri AI.

The Mac Minis have grown popular over the past year among tech enthusiasts for running local AI agents such as OpenClaw and Hermes. People were selling Mac Minis at marked-up prices on platforms like eBay earlier this year due to rising demand.

Besides the new Mac Minis, the company also released new Mac Studio models that run on the M5 Max and M5 Ultra chips, starting at $2,499 and $5,499, respectively. The M5 Max base model comes with 36GB of unified memory and 512GB of storage. The M5 Ultra base model has 96GB of unified memory and 1TB storage.

Earlier this year, the company discontinued the previous base model of the Mac Mini, which offered 256GB of storage and retailed for $599. It was until now offering the 512GB version with an M4 processor for $799 as the base model.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Fitbit founders launch Luffu Link, an LTE health and safety band

Luffu, a new startup from Fitbit’s co-founders James Park and Eric Friedman, on Tuesday launched Luffu Link, an LTE-enabled health and safety band designed to monitor the wearer’s overall health, both physical and mental. The wearable combines all-day health sensing, voice logging, location awareness, and the ability to get help from trusted contacts into a single device, even when no phone is nearby.

The currently $250 device is available for pre-order and is expected to ship in early 2027. It comes in three colors: halo gold, onyx black, and sterling blue.

Luffu Link represents the next step in the startup’s mission to develop an intelligent family care system, as it complements the Luffu health-monitoring app, launched earlier this year. The app uses AI in the background to gather and organize family information, learn day-to-day patterns, and flag notable changes so families can stay aligned and address potential well-being issues. 

Image Credits:Luffu /

Luffu was born out of Park and Friedman’s own experiences caring for their families and aging parents. They built Luffu to give families a clearer picture of a loved one’s health without constant check-ins or making them feel monitored. 

“When you become a family caregiver, or the CEO of the family, these people are spending an enormous amount of time doing it,” Park said in an interview with TechCrunch. “Research shows over 27 hours a week on average, which is a crazy amount of time…I think technology can play a big role in helping reduce this load, but as we found out, the tools to help them are pretty fragmented,” he said.

Link users can press a button to capture information in the moment by voice, like updates about medications, symptoms, meals, mood, reminders, and more. The Luffu app then organizes that information and incorporates it into the family’s broader context. The company sees its market as including family caregivers, independent older adults, and health- and safety-conscious adults who want to stay on top of their health.

The wearable also continuously collects standard health and wellness data, such as activity, sleep, resting heart rate, calories burned, heart-rate variability (HRV), and breathing rate to identify daily patterns, track changes over time, and provide personalized insights or alerts. 

“Link does a lot of what a typical health tracker would do, but it’s not just about tracking,” Park said. “It’s about what Luffu does with that data. It’s looking for patterns, so maybe your activity has been unusually low,” he continues.

Image Credits:Luffu /

“Maybe your sleep patterns have changed. Maybe that change happened after a new medication. So it’s looking at all this data, and it’s not to give families another dashboard full of graphs — I designed a lot of that at Fitbit — it’s to help answer some key questions like ‘what changed? Does it matter? Does somebody need to know?’ And people can just continue to live their life without feeling like they’re being constantly monitored.” 

The device uses built-in GPS to keep trusted contacts informed of a wearer’s location, including where they have been and when they enter or leave specific areas. A quick double press also lets the wearer check in with family members without making a call or sending a text. Additionally, built-in LTE lets wearers send a help request without needing to use a phone. (The LTE data service is included so it doesn’t require a separate carrier plan.)

For example, the wearer could press the button and say something like, “I fell and hurt my wrist. Can someone come get me?” Link will then send the voice message along with the wearer’s location, battery level, and health data, like their heart rate and recent activity, to trusted family members. 

Unlike other screenless wearables on the market that are focused on individual health and fitness, Link is designed around everyday health and family connection, the company says.

“There’s a trend to have no screens on this new class of wearables, but here, it’s very purposeful,” Park explained. “We want to be in the background. Link is designed to be on your wrist as a quiet guardian throughout your day, and we also wanted to make this feel nothing like a traditional wearable, nothing like a generic-looking fabric brand or a wrist thing with a screen or a bulky pendant that you’re wearing for emergency purposes. So, the device takes a lot of cues from jewelry.”

The startup teased that it’s developing a home device that extends Luffu into the home, marking the next step in its intelligent family care system.

While Link is currently available for pre-order at a discounted price, its expected retail price is $300.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Is the Surface Laptop 5 Still Worth Buying in 2026?

Is the Surface Laptop 5 still worth buying in 2026?

Yes, if you want a well-built Windows laptop for everyday work and you don’t need on-device AI features. The Surface Laptop 5 shipped with 12th-generation Intel Core processors, a color-accurate PixelSense touchscreen, and an aluminum or Alcantara chassis that still feels premium next to laptops released this year.

Two numbers should drive your decision more than anything on the spec sheet.

The first is October 25, 2028. That’s the published end-of-servicing date for Surface Laptop 5 firmware and driver updates, per Microsoft’s Surface lifecycle policy — six years from its October 25, 2022 release. As of August 2026, that leaves a little over two years of hardware-level support.

The second is 40 TOPS. That’s Microsoft’s minimum NPU throughput for a machine to qualify as a Copilot+ PC. The Surface Laptop 5’s Alder Lake-U processors have no NPU at all, so the gap isn’t narrow — it’s categorical. No amount of RAM or storage closes it.

If your work is documents, browsers, spreadsheets, and video calls, neither number is disqualifying. If you want Recall, local translation or Windows Studio Effects, this is the wrong machine.

Configurations

Surface Laptop 5: 13.5-inch vs 15-inch

Both sizes share the same processor family, port layout and 3:2 aspect ratio. Screen area, weight and battery capacity are the real differences.

Surface Laptop 5 configuration options, 13.5-inch model compared with 15-inch model. Source: Microsoft Support device specifications; battery capacity and measured weights via Notebookcheck.SpecificationSurface Laptop 5 13.5‑inchSurface Laptop 5 15‑inchScreen size and resolution13.5‑inch, 2256 × 1504 (201 PPI)15‑inch, 2496 × 1664 (200 PPI)Aspect ratio and refresh rate3:2 aspect ratio, 60 Hz, 10‑point touch3:2 aspect ratio, 60 Hz, 10‑point touchProcessor optionsCore i5‑1235U or i7‑1255U (consumer); i5‑1245U or i7‑1265U (commercial)Core i7‑1255U (consumer); i7‑1265U (commercial)Memory (soldered, not upgradeable)8 GB, 16 GB or 32 GB LPDDR5x8 GB, 16 GB or 32 GB LPDDR5xStorage256 GB, 512 GB or 1 TB removable M.2 2230 SSD256 GB, 512 GB or 1 TB removable M.2 2230 SSDPorts1× USB‑C (USB4 / Thunderbolt 4), 1× USB‑A 3.1, 3.5 mm jack, Surface Connect1× USB‑C (USB4 / Thunderbolt 4), 1× USB‑A 3.1, 3.5 mm jack, Surface ConnectBattery capacityNot published by Microsoft47.4 WhRated battery lifeUp to 18 hours (Microsoft)Up to 17 hours (Microsoft)Weight2.80–2.84 lb (1.27–1.29 kg)3.44–3.48 lb (1.56–1.58 kg)Copilot+ eligibleNo — no NPUNo — no NPUFirmware support endsOctober 25, 2028October 25, 2028

Know your configuration before you price it. Get a Surface buyback quote →

What are the Surface Laptop 5’s full specifications?

Microsoft sold the Surface Laptop 5 in 13.5-inch and 15-inch sizes, both with a 3:2 PixelSense touchscreen—a taller aspect ratio than the 16:9 panels on most competing laptops, which matters more than it sounds once you’re scrolling a long document.

The configuration list, per Microsoft’s own specs page:

  • Processor: 12th-gen Intel Core i5-1235U or i7-1255U on consumer models; i5-1245U or i7-1265U on commercial models. All built on the Intel Evo platform.
  • RAM: 8GB, 16GB or 32GB LPDDR5x, soldered to the board
  • Storage: 256GB, 512GB or 1TB removable M.2 2230 SSD
  • Display: 13.5-inch at 2256 × 1504 (201 PPI) or 15-inch at 2496 × 1664 (200 PPI), both 3:2, 60 Hz, 10-point touch, Gorilla Glass 5, Dolby Vision IQ
  • Ports: one USB-C with USB4 / Thunderbolt 4, one USB-A 3.1, 3.5mm headphone jack, Surface Connect
  • Wireless: Wi-Fi 6, Bluetooth 5.1
  • Camera: 720p (0.9 MP) front camera with Windows Hello face sign-in
  • Battery: 47.4 Wh on the 15-inch model; Microsoft rated 18 hours on the 13.5-inch and 17 hours on the 15-inch

One correction worth making, because it’s repeated widely: the RAM is not upgradeable and never was. The SSD is removable, but Microsoft treats it as a technician-serviced part, and Notebookcheck’s teardown notes the chassis can’t be opened by an owner without damage. Buy the configuration you actually need.

If you’re weighing 12th-gen Intel against the current generation, our breakdown of whether Intel Core i-series processors are still worth buying in 2026 covers where Alder Lake sits today.

How fast is the Surface Laptop 5 in 2026?

Fast enough for office work, and measurably behind its own class average on sustained multi-core loads.

Notebookcheck’s measured results for the 15-inch i7-1255U configuration put it at 8,930 points in Cinebench R23 multi-core and 1,673 in single-core. The single-core figure is the interesting one: it lands within about 2% of the office-laptop class average from the same test period, which is why the machine still feels responsive in everyday use. Multi-core is where it drops — roughly 24% below that class average.

Measured performance

Surface Laptop 5 CPU benchmarks

Notebookcheck results for the 15-inch Core i7-1255U configuration. Single-core performance is competitive; multi-core is where the 15 W U-series chip gives ground.

Cinebench R23 — Multi-core

Higher is better. Points.

Cinebench R23 multi-core scores in points: Dell XPS 15 9520 with Core i7-12700H, 14130. Office laptop class average, 11695. Surface Laptop 4 15-inch with Ryzen 7 4980U, 9164. Surface Laptop 5 15-inch with Core i7-1255U, 8930. LG Gram 15Z90Q with Core i5-1240P, 8337. Surface Laptop 4 13-inch with Core i7-1185G7, 5139.

Dell XPS 15 9520 · i7-12700H 14,130

Office laptop class average 11,695

Surface Laptop 4 15 · Ryzen 7 4980U 9,164

Surface Laptop 5 15 · i7-1255U 8,930

LG Gram 15Z90Q · i5-1240P 8,337

Surface Laptop 4 13 · i7-1185G7 5,139

Cinebench R23 — Single-core

Higher is better. Points.

Cinebench R23 single-core scores in points: Dell XPS 15 9520 with Core i7-12700H, 1773. Office laptop class average, 1700. Surface Laptop 5 15-inch with Core i7-1255U, 1673. Surface Laptop 4 13-inch with Core i7-1185G7, 1525. LG Gram 15Z90Q with Core i5-1240P, 1501. Surface Laptop 4 15-inch with Ryzen 7 4980U, 1260.

Dell XPS 15 9520 · i7-12700H 1,773

Office laptop class average 1,700

Surface Laptop 5 15 · i7-1255U 1,673

Surface Laptop 4 13 · i7-1185G7 1,525

LG Gram 15Z90Q · i5-1240P 1,501

Surface Laptop 4 15 · Ryzen 7 4980U 1,260

Source: Notebookcheck, Surface Laptop 5 15 review. Class average reflects office-category laptops tested in the two years preceding the review.

The more useful comparison is against the laptop it replaced. Against the Surface Laptop 4 13-inch with a Core i7-1185G7, Notebookcheck measured the Surface Laptop 5 as about 33% faster on average. Against the AMD-powered Surface Laptop 4 15-inch with a Ryzen 7 4980U, it was slower in multi-core — 8,930 versus 9,164 points. Microsoft dropped the AMD option for this generation, and on sustained multi-threaded work that was a downgrade.

Does the Surface Laptop 5 throttle under load?

Yes, and the pattern is worth understanding before you buy.

Notebookcheck measured the i7-1255U drawing 60 W for roughly one to two seconds before settling at a sustained 30 W. In a Cinebench R15 multi-core loop, the first run scored 1,577 points, and the average across the loop fell to 1,257 — about a 20% decline once thermals caught up. On battery, multi-core performance dropped a further 8% or so.

Sustained load

What happens when the load doesn’t stop

The i7-1255U draws 60 W for one to two seconds, then settles at 30 W. In a looped Cinebench R15 multi-core test, the score falls about 20% from the first run to the loop average.

Cinebench R15 multi-core — first run vs loop average

Higher is better. Points.

Cinebench R15 multi-core, first run versus sustained loop average, in points. Surface Laptop 5 15-inch with Core i7-1255U: first run 1577, loop average 1257, a decline of 20 percent. Surface Laptop 4 15-inch with Ryzen 7 4980U: first run 1658, loop average 1412, a decline of 15 percent.

Surface Laptop 5 15 · i7-1255U

Loop average (sustained) 1,257  −20%

Surface Laptop 4 15 · Ryzen 7 4980U (previous generation)

Loop average (sustained) 1,412  −15%

Measured display performance

438

cd/m² peak brightness

ΔE 0.8

color accuracy, sRGB profile

28.7 ms

black-to-white response — slow

60 Hz

refresh rate ceiling

Source: Notebookcheck, Surface Laptop 5 15 review. Display measured with X-Rite i1Pro 2 and CalMAN. PWM dimming detected at 22 kHz below 50% brightness.

What this means in practice: short bursts are quick, long renders are not. Opening a heavy spreadsheet, loading thirty tabs, exporting a few photos — fine. A twenty-minute video export will finish, slowly, at a fraction of the peak clock.

The display is the part of this machine that has aged best. Notebookcheck measured 438 cd/m² peak brightness, 1369:1 contrast, and 97.3% sRGB coverage with a ColorChecker deviation of ΔE 0.8 in the sRGB profile — accurate enough for photo work straight out of the box, without calibration. The trade-offs are a 60 Hz refresh rate, a 28.7 ms black-to-white response time that’s slower than about 76% of laptops tested, and a very reflective finish that makes outdoor use difficult.

Why can’t the Surface Laptop 5 run Copilot+ features?

Because Copilot+ is a hardware certification, and the Surface Laptop 5 misses one of its three requirements outright.

Microsoft requires three things for the Copilot+ badge: an NPU rated at 40+ TOPS, at least 16GB of RAM, and at least 256GB of storage, running Windows 11 24H2 or newer. The Surface Laptop 5 clears the memory and storage bars in most configurations. It has no NPU, so it fails the one that matters.

Copilot+ eligibility

Where the Surface Laptop 5 falls short

Copilot+ is a hardware certification with three requirements. The Surface Laptop 5 meets two of them and misses the one that cannot be worked around.

Copilot+ PC hardware requirements compared with Surface Laptop 5 capability. Requirements per Microsoft Windows 11 specifications; device specifications per Microsoft Support.RequirementCopilot+ minimumSurface Laptop 5ResultNPU throughput40+ TOPSNo NPU presentBlockedMemory16 GB DDR5 or LPDDR5Up to 32 GB LPDDR5xMetStorage256 GB SSD or UFS256 GB to 1 TB SSDMetOperating systemWindows 11 24H2 or newerWindows 11 supportedMet

What stays unavailable

Recall, Live Captions with translation, Cocreator and Windows Studio Effects require the NPU. On the Surface Laptop 5 these remain unavailable permanently — no Windows update changes that. For comparison, the Snapdragon X processors in the Copilot+ Surface generation are rated at 45 TOPS.

Source: Microsoft, Windows 11 specs and system requirements.

For reference, the Snapdragon X chips in the Copilot+ Surface generation are rated at 45 TOPS. This is a hardware boundary, not a software lockout — Recall, Live Captions with translation, Cocreator and Windows Studio Effects stay unavailable on the Surface Laptop 5 permanently, regardless of Windows updates.

Whether that matters is a genuinely open question, and we’ve argued both sides in our take on the 2026 Copilot+ upgrade debate. If you want to see what the architecture shift actually buys you, our Surface Pro 13 Snapdragon X2 Elite review walks through the trade-offs in more detail.

How much longer will the Surface Laptop 5 be supported?

Firmware and driver updates run until October 25, 2028. Windows updates continue past that date.

These are two separate clocks, and conflating them is the most common mistake buyers make. Microsoft’s Surface lifecycle policy gives devices released on or after January 1, 2021 at least six years of driver and firmware servicing. For the Surface Laptop 5, released October 25, 2022, that’s October 25, 2028. After the servicing date, the machine keeps receiving Windows OS feature and security updates under the standard Windows lifecycle policy — but if a future Windows update breaks something specific to this hardware, Microsoft has no obligation to fix it.

Support calendar

How long the Surface Laptop 5 stays supported

Two clocks run separately. Firmware and driver servicing has a fixed end date. Windows updates continue past it.

OCTOBER 25, 2022

Surface Laptop 5 released

Servicing clock starts. Microsoft guarantees at least six years of firmware and driver updates for Surface devices released on or after January 1, 2021.

TODAY

Roughly 26 months of firmware support remaining

The device is inside its servicing period and still eligible for new driver and firmware updates through Windows Update.

OCTOBER 25, 2028

End of firmware and driver servicing

Microsoft stops publishing new drivers and firmware. If a later Windows release breaks something specific to this hardware, there is no obligation to fix it.

AFTER OCTOBER 2028

Windows updates continue

The machine keeps receiving Windows OS feature and security updates under the standard Windows lifecycle policy. It does not stop working.

Neighboring generations

Surface Laptop 4 — firmware servicing ends April 15, 2027

Surface Pro 9 — firmware servicing ends October 25, 2028

Source: Microsoft Learn, Surface devices driver and firmware lifecycle. Dates verified August 2026.

For context on the neighboring generations: the Surface Laptop 4 loses firmware servicing on April 15, 2027, and the Surface Pro 9 shares the Surface Laptop 5’s October 25, 2028 date. If you’re still running Windows 10 on any machine, our guide to preparing for the end of Windows 10 support covers what changes and when.

What are the real trade-offs of buying one now?

Battery age, port count, and the AI gap — in that order of practical impact.

Battery. Microsoft’s 17- and 18-hour ratings came from its own August 2022 testing at 150 nits with a mixed active-use and modern-standby workload. Independent reviewers measured considerably less on a new unit: one review reported around 7.5 hours at half brightness. A machine now three to four years old has cycled its cells well past that. Check measured runtime rather than the spec sheet — our guide to measuring your laptop’s battery life walks through how to test it yourself before you buy or sell.

Ports. One Thunderbolt 4 port and one USB-A is workable but tight. There’s no SD card reader. Plugging in an external monitor and a peripheral at the same time means a hub.

AI features. Covered above. Permanent.

Two things that surprised us in the measured data, both positive: Wi-Fi throughput is strong for a Wi-Fi 6 module, at roughly 1,650 Mbit/s transmit and 1,620 Mbit/s receive in iperf3 testing, and the display’s PWM dimming runs at about 22 kHz — high enough that most people sensitive to flicker won’t notice it.

Who should buy a used or refurbished Surface Laptop 5?

Students, browser-and-Office remote workers, and anyone replacing an aging laptop who cares more about build quality and screen accuracy than raw throughput.

The value case is specific: you’re buying a color-accurate 3:2 touchscreen, a premium chassis, Thunderbolt 4, and Windows Hello, in a 2.8 to 3.5-pound package, with two years of firmware support left. At used pricing that’s a reasonable trade.

It’s a weak fit for anyone doing sustained multi-core work, local AI, or gaming. The 20% sustained-load decline and the absent NPU aren’t things a good price fixes. Those buyers want current silicon.

What is a Surface Laptop 5 worth, and should you sell yours now?

Sell it once you’ve upgraded rather than letting it sit in a drawer, and price it against the support calendar rather than against its launch MSRP.

Configuration, condition, and battery health drive the number, and the October 2028 servicing date is a fixed point that every informed buyer can look up. As that date gets closer, the pool of buyers willing to pay for a machine with a shrinking support window gets smaller. That’s a timing argument, not a claim about how this model performs against others — resale pricing shifts with supply, demand, and new-model launches, so check a current offer rather than a listing from last year.

Gadget Salvation buys working Surface laptops directly — no auction, no buyer flaking, no relisting. You can check what your exact processor, RAM, and storage combination is worth on our sell a Microsoft Surface laptop page, and every device we take in is wiped under our published data erasure protocols before resale. If you’re still deciding between selling, trading in, or donating, our guide to your old laptop’s next chapter lays out the trade-offs.

There’s a reason we’d rather see this machine resold than shelved. The UN’s fourth Global E-waste Monitor recorded 62 million tonnes of e-waste generated worldwide in 2022, with only 22.3% documented as formally collected and recycled — and projects 82 million tonnes by 2030. A Surface Laptop 5 with a good screen, a working keyboard, and two years of firmware support left is not waste. It’s someone’s next laptop.

Frequently Asked Questions

FAQ

Surface Laptop 5: common questions

Does the Surface Laptop 5 support Windows 11?

Yes. It shipped with Windows 11 and meets the TPM 2.0 and processor requirements. It will keep receiving Windows feature and security updates under the standard Windows lifecycle policy, including after its October 25, 2028 firmware servicing date. It will not gain Copilot+ AI features, which require a 40+ TOPS NPU it does not have.

Can you upgrade the RAM in a Surface Laptop 5?

No. The LPDDR5x memory is soldered to the motherboard, so whichever configuration you buy — 8 GB, 16 GB or 32 GB — is permanent. The M.2 2230 SSD is removable, but Microsoft treats it as a technician-serviced component rather than a user-replaceable part.

How fast is the Surface Laptop 5 compared to newer laptops?

In Notebookcheck testing, the Core i7-1255U configuration scored 8,930 points in Cinebench R23 multi-core and 1,673 single-core. Single-core performance sits close to the office-laptop class average, so general use still feels quick. Multi-core is roughly 24% below that average, and sustained loads decline about 20% from the first-run peak as the chip settles from 60 W to 30 W.

Does the Surface Laptop 5 have a good screen?

Yes, and it is the strongest part of the machine. Measured figures are 438 cd/m² peak brightness, 1369:1 contrast, 97.3% sRGB coverage and ΔE 0.8 color deviation in the sRGB profile, which is accurate enough for photo editing without calibration. The limits are a 60 Hz refresh rate, a slow 28.7 ms black-to-white response time, and a highly reflective surface that makes outdoor use difficult.

Is the 13.5-inch or 15-inch Surface Laptop 5 better?

It depends on portability versus screen space. The 13.5-inch weighs about 2.8 pounds; the 15-inch is roughly 3.5 pounds with a 47.4 Wh battery and more room for split-screen work. Both use the same 3:2 aspect ratio and 60 Hz refresh rate, and both offer the same single Thunderbolt 4 port.

What is a fair price for a used Surface Laptop 5?

Pricing depends on processor, RAM, storage, condition and battery health, and it moves as new Surface generations launch. The firmware servicing date of October 25, 2028 is the fixed reference point worth checking against any asking price. Get a current buyback quote for your exact configuration rather than working from an older listing.

Ready to move yours on? Check your Surface Laptop 5 value →

Sources

  1. Microsoft Support — Surface Laptop 5 specs and features: https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/surface/models/surface-laptop-5-specs-and-features
  2. Microsoft Learn — Surface devices driver and firmware lifecycle: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/surface/surface-driver-firmware-lifecycle-support
  3. Notebookcheck — Surface Laptop 5 15 review (measured benchmarks, display, thermals, Wi-Fi): https://www.notebookcheck.net/Microsoft-Surface-Laptop-5-15-review-Old-design-for-a-premium-price.709645.0.html
  4. Microsoft — Windows 11 specs and system requirements (Copilot+ criteria): https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/windows-11-specifications
  5. UNITAR / ITU — Global E-waste Monitor 2024: https://unitar.org/about/news-stories/press/global-e-waste-monitor-2024-electronic-waste-rising-five-times-faster-documented-e-waste-recycling

Linkdaze’s smart calendar is built to run a household, not just track a schedule

With back-to-school season approaching (or already here in some places), keeping track of everyone’s schedules can get pretty chaotic. Between work, school, appointments, sports, chores, and everything else going on, a regular paper calendar just doesn’t cut it. That’s where Linkdaze’s smart digital calendar comes in — a touchscreen tablet built specifically to organize a household rather than a single person. 

One of Linkdaze’s biggest strengths is its calendar compatibility. The system can synchronize calendars from popular services, including Google, iCloud, Outlook, Yahoo, and Cozi, which is a dedicated family-organizing app. This is particularly useful for families where different members use different platforms. Instead of asking everyone to switch to a single calendar app, Linkdaze brings multiple schedules together and uses color coding to make individual family members easy to identify.

Launched last December, Linkdaze is available in 15.6-inch and 10.1-inch models, giving you some flexibility depending on how much wall space you have. Beyond calendars and appointments, you can use it for chores and rewards, meal planning, shopping lists, and other family organization. It can even double as a digital photo frame for displaying family photos.

Image Credits:Linkdaze

The most interesting feature, however, is Linkdaze’s AI meal planner with “Snap-to-Sync.” Instead of manually entering everything into a meal-planning app, you can take a photo of a paper recipe or your kid’s school lunch menu. Linkdaze will turn that information into a digital meal plan and generate a shopping list from it. While not an entirely new idea, it’s a useful feature that helps Linkdaze stand out from a basic digital calendar.

Another big plus is that Linkdaze doesn’t require a monthly subscription for its main features. It’s an interesting choice in a category where recurring revenue has become the default. Skylight, a competing smart-calendar brand, offers additional features through its $79 per year subscription. For a hardware company entering a crowded smart-display market, that decision is either going to differentiate its product or look like a lost revenue stream.

Linkdaze is also less expensive up front, with the 10.1-inch model priced at $119.99 compared with Skylight’s 10-inch model starting at $149.99 (if you pay for the subscription.)

Overall, this device could make a practical gift for busy parents who are trying to keep everyone’s schedules in one place. It could also be a great fit for college apartments, where roommates can use it to coordinate chores, study schedules, shared meals, and other household responsibilities. It’s also very helpful for those of us juggling interviews, deadlines, meetings, and story assignments.

This post was first published on August 20, 2026.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Pixel 11 Pro XL review: Snappier cameras can’t hide an iterative upgrade

If you buy the new Pixel 11 Pro, you might have to proactively tell people that you bought the latest phone, unless they are following each and every launch. The main reason is that the Pixel 11 doesn’t look that different from prior models. The main updates to its aesthetics are its new colors, which are admittedly gorgeous, and the addition of a small glowing light on the back of the phone, which has limited use.

The phone arrives with some new Gemini features, but I’m not sure if AI chops are attracting customers to buy new phones these days. In daily use, what you may notice is that the Pixel 11 Pro’s cameras are snappier, and there are more options for you to customize the way your photos look. Otherwise, the Pixel 11 Pro XL feels like the previous-gen phone had a big Pixel Drop update.

I have used the Obsidian Pixel 11 Pro XL for nearly a week, and so far, I can say that despite the relatively iterative updates, the phone is still solid and feels good to use.

Rambler

Rambler is one of my favorite new features on the Pixel 11 Pro XL. This new, AI-powered dictation tool takes out filler words like “um” and “ah” and formats your speech. The feature directly takes on other dictation apps like Wispr and Willow.

Image Credits: Ivan MehtaImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

The dictation tool also handles switching between languages and noisy environments well.
Though it might make its way to some other devices, if you have a Pixel, this is a very cool and useful feature that you could end up using daily, compared with some of the other AI features.

For the last year, I have used dictation tools frequently to take quick notes, reply to emails, and messages on devices that I use. Google’s tool is on par with a few of the top tools in the industry, I found. (The tool is so good that I have pretty much rambled my way into writing this section without needing any edits!)

Gemini updates

I’ve just had the phone for five days, so the Proactive Suggestions feature, designed to surface context-aware suggestions from apps, didn’t yet show up everywhere. I did see it when I conversed with friends over text messages, when they were asking me about my schedule. My only gripe is that I’d want Gemini to know about all my calendars, not just Google’s, and suggest my availability based on that.

Suggestions also don’t always show up. For instance, when someone asked for my address, Gemini should have picked that up from my emails, but it didn’t.

In addition, Gemini offers agentic capabilities that can help you with completing some tasks, such as placing a food order for you. But this feature is available in the U.S., and as I am based in India, I couldn’t test it.

The new Live Translate feature is useful for when you are watching a live stream or a video without translated captions. However, you will need to download specific languages.

HiLight is not really a highlight

One of Google’s marketing messages this year was about how it designed Pixel to make you look at your screen less.

The company has only one feature to show for it called HiLight, an LED notification light on the back of the phone that replaced last year’s temperature sensor. The feature allows you to keep your phone face down, while delivering subtle alerts by way of the light.

The light itself looks cool when active as it lights up in green, yellow, pink, purple, or white. But a big limitation is that it only works when you activate Gemini or get phone calls from your favorite contacts, not texts.

The light can also indicate that Gemini is listening or thinking. This may be useful to know that Gemini is processing information after you have asked it to execute a complex task. But besides that, I can only think of a few scenarios when my phone is face down, and I’m not wearing any earbuds to listen for the activation sound, but still need to know if Gemini is active.

Image Credits: Ivan mehtaImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

Besides, for favorite callers, you can always set a special ringtone. There may be only a few occasions when your phone is on silent, and if you haven’t set up calls from close people to get through, and you are paying attention to a light on the back of the phone.

This feature is ripe for future customization, however, so hopefully it continues to be developed. I would like to one day choose a color for when I get a text or WhatsApp message from my contacts. Plus, if I can assign different colors for different apps, I would know if I need to pick up my phone or if I can tackle that task later.

Pixel’s cameras are snappy

Google decided to opt for a larger sensor for both the main and the telephoto sensors compared with the Pixel 10 Pro XL. On paper, this change means cameras can let in more light and, in turn, capture more details. (I didn’t pixel-peep to confirm this). However, thanks to the new processor and software updates, the camera app and capture feel snappy, and you can take photos faster.

Google also made Night Sight, its low-light photography mode, faster, which means you don’t have to hold the phone with the subject in focus for as long and can more easily avoid blurry photos.

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

Google’s Pro Res Zoom feature, which uses AI to upscale some parts of the photo when you go above 30x digital zoom on Pro XL, has been improved. The maximum zoom level was 100x last year, and now it is 120x. It is tough to keep your hand steady and take a legible photo, even after all the AI magic, if the subject is across the street. But for a lower zoom range, you get a usable photo.

One of the marquee features of this year’s camera release is called Looks, which acts like filters, but Google claims that it’s changing the way the computational photography pipeline works on the phone.

There are four core default looks called original, natural, shadows, and vanilla that you can select from the settings menu. You can also switch between other Looks called editorial, classic (with more grain), digi (reminds you of old digital cameras), black tie, and minimal.

VelvetImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

ClassicImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

EditorialImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

OriginalImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

Black TieImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

MinimalImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

VanillaImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

ShadowsImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

NaturalImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

DigiImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

NaturalImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

On the Pixel 11, one-touch quick access controls are customizable, so I could swap out white balance for ISO to appear directly. I could also quickly access Looks through this section and take photos in different styles.

Another new addition to the feature set is Magic Capture, which lets you initiate a video clip and use AI to pull out top moments from the clip that could be saved as photos. This is great for capturing wiggly things like babies or pets, or action shots, as in sports. There are a few limitations, though — the mode doesn’t do well with moving subjects and saves photos only in 12-megapixel resolution.

I have two cats and a dog, so I am going to use this feature frequently! I’ll leave you with a picture of my cat trying to catch a feather, saved by Magic Capture.

Image Credits: Ivan MehtaImage Credits:Ivan Mehta

Price

Unfortunately, the component crunch has forced hardware companies to raise device prices. Google scrapped the 128GB base model, and while it priced the 256GB model the same as last year’s version for the Pixel 11 and the Pixel 11 Pro, it reduced the RAM size from 16GB to 12GB for both.

The Pixel 11 Pro XL also got a $100 bump from last year’s price.

Because of this, the new Pixels don’t incentivize gadget enthusiasts to upgrade from last year’s phone, despite being solid devices. The camera improvements are notable, and Rambler is great, but some of this will likely trickle down to older Pixels in the future.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

The $225 Pebble Time 2 is a refreshingly fun smartwatch

The new $225 Pebble Time 2 smartwatch feels like a toy, and we mean that in the best sense of the word. The refreshed version of the indie smartwatch brand, rebooted by its original founder, feels casual, fun, and playful, — not like a mini-computer on your wrist. Its quirky watchfaces and simple apps and games give it a sort of hacker energy, while its physical buttons, e-paper screen, and long battery life provide its retro vibes.

The first thing you’ll notice about the new Pebble Time 2 is that the device looks nothing like an Apple Watch. Where the Apple Watch has an OLED touchscreen display, the Pebble opts for a color e-paper screen. Where the Apple Watch comes in a range of band types, from sporty straps to high-end metals and leather, the Pebble Time 2 has a silicone watch band, making it feel more like a Swatch rival than a fancy smartwatch. And instead of picking between different aluminum finishes, as with the Apple Watch, the Pebble Time 2 offers a choice of colors: blue, red, silver, or black wrapped around its stainless steel frame of silver or black.

Pebble Time 2 colorsImage Credits:Core Devices

The watch’s 64-color e-paper screen is always on, but can be backlit (via an RGB LED) with a flick of your wrist or via taps. Like almost everything on the watch, you can customize this, too. (I set mine to light up with a single tap instead of two.)

This display is more muted compared with an Apple Watch’s Retina display, but it’s easy to see in bright sunlight, and the trade-off here means the battery can last a long time: about 21 days on a charge, depending on use, with a charger included in the box.

But where Pebble really differentiates itself from other smartwatches is its software and especially, its community. The community is really the reason the watch still exists at all — after the company behind the original Pebble shut down.

Pebble’s comeback

Pebble had first begun as a Kickstarter project before ultimately making its way to Google, by way of a Fitbit acquisition. Before its exit, the company sold 2 million watches, generating $230 million in sales. Even so, its founder, Eric Migicovsky (who has since co-founded the messaging app Beeper), openly shared that Pebble’s financials weren’t able to sustain the business, which forced the sale.

Fitbit kept the watch’s servers and app store alive until mid-2018. After that, the job was taken over by Pebble’s own user community, an unusual show of brand loyalty that effectively kept the product on life support for free.

Image Credits:Core Devices

Then, in 2025, Migicovsky, with the help of some ex-Pebblers and Fitbit folks at Google, convinced the tech giant to open source the original Pebble operating system. This made it possible for him to take another crack at building Pebble watches under his new company, Core Devices.

Core Devices has since shipped a limited edition Pebble 2 Duo watch, and has now sold more than 25,000 of its Pebble Time 2 watches across 93 countries. Its third device, the Pebble Round 2, is expected to begin shipping in September.

While Migicovsky hopes the do-over will give him a chance to correct the mistakes of the past, what hasn’t been left behind is Pebble’s spirit.

Watchfaces! So many watchfaces!

Still very much sustained by its hacker community, the device already ships with over 2,120 watch faces and apps built by Pebble developers, including over 500 new ones from a spring developer contest. This is where things start to get fun. Since the first thing many people do is customize their watch face, this large, whimsical selection showcases the community’s playful vibes.

Pebble Time 2Image Credits:Core Devices

Using the Pebble companion mobile app, you can choose from simple analog or digital displays, if you choose, or you can pick from those featuring silly characters, like cartoon dogs, cats, or axolotls; various backgrounds and scenes; pixelated retro displays; giant, brightly colored numbers; text shown styled in creative fonts, like those from comic books or sci-fi; and more.

You can set the screen to be a favorite meme, like Nyan Cat, or to a watch face involving characters from classic video games like Mario, Kirby, Pokémon, and more. (Don’t ask about the licensing — just enjoy it while it lasts.)

Image Credits:TechCrunch

Apps & Games

Despite a much smaller user base than the Apple Watch, the Pebble app store is full of creative and often niche applications across categories like health and fitness, games, tools and utilities, remotes, and others. There are many useful tools here — timers, Spotify controls, weather apps, to-do lists, calculators, navigation aids, stock trackers, Strava activity trackers, medication reminders, health apps, calendars, and many fun, often retro-inspired, games.

Pebble app storeImage Credits:Core Devices

What’s incredible about the selection is that many of these were created by individuals who simply wanted an app for a specific purpose, so they built it themselves. That could be an app for tracking a local train schedule, or their tennis score, their Claude AI usage, when to apply more sunscreen, or a thousand other things that would never make sense for an indie developer to build as a business.

There are also newer AI-powered apps for those who want access to a chatbot or agent on their wrist.

There are many playful apps, too, like the PebbleGoBrrrr app that tells time by vibrating the watch, or one where you can whack a mole for fun. (I don’t know, why not?). Among the most popular apps is the self-described “pointless” Pixelminer game, where your little character mines for treasure. Another popular creation offers a FitCat virtual pet and activity tracker.

Pixel Miner gameImage Credits:Pixel Miner

There’s even an app you can use to make other apps.

If there’s any complaint to be made here, it’s that there’s almost too much to explore. The Pebble app store could benefit from more search and discovery tools, similar to Apple’s App Store — subcategories, lists, editorial selections, or personalized recommendations. You could spend hours, weeks, or months browsing the app store and still find new things.

Image Credits:TechCrunch

All the basics, too

However, even if you used the Pebble Time 2 without installing extra apps, the watch itself is still very functional. It mirrors the notifications sent to your phone, which you can individually toggle on and off in the Pebble companion app. Plus, you can control your music playing on your phone, set alarms and timers, and more. While the app doesn’t market itself as a fitness tracker, it does offer some basic functions, like tracking steps, sleep, and heart rate.

Image Credits:TechCrunch

The watch also offers a classic Pebble feature known as the timeline, accessed by the down button on the right side. This lets you scroll through your day, including past and upcoming calendar events, reminders, weather, and pins added by other apps. It’s an at-a-glance look at what you have coming up next, which comes in handy.

Image Credits:TechCrunch

The Pebble Time 2’s buttons are intuitive to use. The watch comes with four buttons, more than you’ll find on the Apple Watch, but they make sense. The top button is the up button, the bottom one is down, and the middle is select. The button on the left side of the watch is back. What’s more, you can customize any button to launch a favorite app with a tap or long press. (By default, a long press on the back button launches Quiet Time, which silences your notifications.)

Further specs are available on Migicovsky’s blog. Note that the watch has some water resistance — 30 m / 3 ATM — which means it can handle everyday water exposure like rain or handwashing, but don’t go swimming or diving with it.

Being less connected: a perk or a problem?

Where the watch falls short is mainly in areas the company can’t control, like its compatibility with iOS. Apple’s rules restrict the watch from being able to do many things, like taking actions on notifications, responding to texts, or making various iOS apps work with the watch. That means even basic features, like your daily alarms, won’t sync over automatically to the Pebble — you’ll have to set them up directly on the watch itself.

But there’s a silver lining to this. Because Pebble is more limited, it doesn’t become another thing you have to pay attention to and engage with. You can stay connected without feeling an obligation to immediately respond or take some sort of action. Though it took some adjustment, I’ll admit, after a while I found it easier to simply glance at the watch and look away without feeling the tug to do something.

What’s worth watching here is where this go next. The company ships new firmware every few weeks and updates its companion mobile app. It’s been adding new APIs and other improvements after launch, and still plans to add features in the future, like enabling the second mic for noise cancellation.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Oura faces lawsuit accusing it of misleading consumers about sleep-tracking accuracy

A proposed class action lawsuit is accusing smart ring maker Oura of deceiving consumers about the accuracy of its sleep tracking features.

The lawsuit, filed on Thursday by Clarkson Law Firm in San Francisco, alleges that Oura rings are unable to measure any of the physiological signals needed to assess sleep quality or determine sleep stages, and that they instead rely on AI-generated estimates that have “a coin flip’s chance of being correct,” according to the complaint.

The lawsuit follows years of Oura users taking to the internet to share their frustration with the smart ring’s sleep accuracy, with some saying they felt they slept poorly but were told their sleep had been optimal. Some have also expressed doubts about the device’s ability to monitor and detect sleep cycles.

“To capitalize on consumers’ desire for a tracker that could actually track sleep and monitor their sleep cycles, Oura sold expensive tracking rings, priced at $300 and up, advertising exactly that: that Oura rings are capable of seeing what only a hospital sleep lab can see, including the four different stages of sleep,” the complaint reads. “Oura did not just claim to measure a heartbeat or a temperature, but the exact stage of sleep the wearer is in—which in reality requires electrodes in the scalp and sensors on the eyes, as only a hospital or other clinical setting can do.”

Despite this, the complaint alleges that Oura marketed its ring as being “built for accuracy” and offering “unparalleled accuracy.” It says Oura told customers its smart rings could achieve 79% accuracy in their measurements, and more recently claimed that the rings offered 95% sleep-staging accuracy compared with clinical sleep labs.

The complaint goes on to allege that Oura cannot measure sleep or cycles because “sleep happens in the brain, not on one’s finger.”

Oura did not immediately respond to TechCrunch’s request for comment.

“When people rely on a device to guide decisions about their health, misinformation cannot be tolerated,” said Ryan Clarkson, co-founder and managing partner at Clarkson Law Firm, in an emailed press release. “Oura users trust that the numbers on their screen reflect reality. People structure their days, interpret the way they feel, and design their lives around inaccurate figures spit out by these devices. Marketing an inaccurate sleep tracker as precise and reliable is dangerous because people believe it – and change their behavior accordingly.”

The complaint calls on Oura to stop deceiving consumers by falsely advertising its wearables as having capabilities they don’t deliver. It also seeks injunctive relief to prevent Oura from continuing to misrepresent its products, as well as restitution for consumers who purchased the products based on those allegedly false claims.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Linkdaze’s smart calendar is built to run a household, not just track a schedule

With back-to-school season approaching (or already here in some places), keeping track of everyone’s schedules can get pretty chaotic. Between work, school, appointments, sports, chores, and everything else going on, a regular paper calendar just doesn’t cut it. That’s where Linkdaze’s smart digital calendar comes in — a touchscreen tablet built specifically to organize a household rather than a single person. 

One of Linkdaze’s biggest strengths is its calendar compatibility. The system can synchronize calendars from popular services, including Google, iCloud, Outlook, Yahoo, and Cozi, which is a dedicated family-organizing app. This is particularly useful for families where different members use different platforms. Instead of asking everyone to switch to a single calendar app, Linkdaze brings multiple schedules together and uses color coding to make individual family members easy to identify.

Launched last December, Linkdaze is available in 15.6-inch and 10.1-inch models, giving you some flexibility depending on how much wall space you have. Beyond calendars and appointments, you can use it for chores and rewards, meal planning, shopping lists, and other family organization. It can even double as a digital photo frame for displaying family photos.

Image Credits:Linkdaze

The most interesting feature, however, is Linkdaze’s AI meal planner with “Snap-to-Sync.” Instead of manually entering everything into a meal-planning app, you can take a photo of a paper recipe or your kid’s school lunch menu. Linkdaze will turn that information into a digital meal plan and generate a shopping list from it. While not an entirely new idea, it’s a useful feature that helps Linkdaze stand out from a basic digital calendar.

Another big plus is that Linkdaze doesn’t require a monthly subscription for its main features. It’s an interesting choice in a category where recurring revenue has become the default. Skylight, a competing smart-calendar brand, offers additional features through its $79 per month subscription. For a hardware company entering a crowded smart-display market, that decision is either going to differentiate its product or look like a lost revenue stream.

Linkdaze is also less expensive up front, with the 10.1-inch model priced at $119.99 compared with Skylight’s 10-inch model at $159.99.

Overall, this device could make a practical gift for busy parents who are trying to keep everyone’s schedules in one place. It could also be a great fit for college apartments, where roommates can use it to coordinate chores, study schedules, shared meals, and other household responsibilities. It’s also very helpful for those of us juggling interviews, deadlines, meetings, and story assignments.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Is the New Google Pixel 11 Worth the Upgrade?

The Google Pixel 11 lineup brings steady, incremental changes rather than a redesign. Here’s how it stacks up against past Pixels, rival flagships, and what it means for resale value.

What’s New in the Google Pixel 11 Lineup?

The Pixel 11 lineup keeps Google’s recent formula: a new Tensor chip generation, a sharper AI push, and a camera system that gets tuned rather than rebuilt. Google has spent the last few generations leaning into on-device AI, from call screening to photo editing, and the Pixel 11 series continues that trajectory instead of breaking from it. The design language carries over from the last two generations, too, with the same horizontal camera bar and flat-edge frame that Pixel owners have gotten used to.

Lineup Specs & Hardware Breakdown:

Feature / SpecGoogle Pixel 11Pixel 11 ProPixel 11 Pro XLPixel 11 Pro FoldStarting Price$899 (256GB)$1,099 (256GB)$1,299 (256GB)$1,899 (256GB)Display6.3″ OLED (120Hz, 3,000 nits)6.3″ LTPO OLED (3,600 nits)6.8″ LTPO OLED (3,600 nits)6.5″ Cover / 8.0″ Inner OLEDProcessorTensor G6 (TSMC 2nm)Tensor G6 (TSMC 2nm)Tensor G6 (TSMC 2nm)Tensor G6 (TSMC 2nm)RAM / Base Storage12GB / 256GB12GB (16GB opt.) / 256GB12GB (16GB opt.) / 256GB16GB / 256GBRear Cameras48MP Main + 13MP UW + 10.8MP (5x)50MP Main + 48MP UW + 48MP (5x)50MP Main + 48MP UW + 48MP (5x)48MP Main + 10.5MP UW + 10.8MP (5x)Battery & Charging4,985 mAh (30W / Qi2)4,850 mAh (30W / Qi2)5,115 mAh (45W / Qi2)4,806 mAh (30W / Qi2)HiLight ModuleNoYesYesYes

In short, for those expecting a dramatic redesign, you won’t find it here. That’s consistent with how Google has approached its flagship line since the Pixel 8 Pro: refine the software, tune the sensors, and let the hardware evolve gradually rather than all at once.

How Does the Pixel 11 Differ from Earlier Pixel Generations?

The gap between the Pixel 11 and last year’s Pixel 10 Pro XL is smaller than the gap between the Pixel 7 Pro and the Pixel 8 Pro was. Google made bigger jumps in 2022 and 2023, when it moved from a plastic-feeling frame to a more premium aluminum build and pushed Tensor’s AI capabilities hard for the first time. Since then, changes have been more about refinement: better low-light processing, longer AI feature support, and small efficiency gains per generation.

If you’re coming from a Pixel 8, Pixel 8 Pro, or Pixel 9, the Pixel 11 will feel like a meaningful leap, mostly in camera processing and assistant features. If you already own a Pixel 10 Pro XL, the difference will be harder to notice day-to-day. Our earlier look at the Pixel 10 paradox covers why that generation already felt like a plateau for many users, and the Pixel 11 doesn’t really move past it.

How Does the Pixel 11 Compete Against Other 2025 and 2026 Flagships?

It competes mainly on AI features and camera software, not raw specs. Samsung’s Galaxy S26 line and Apple’s current iPhones offer comparable build quality and screen technology, and neither lags on chip performance. Where Google still holds an edge is in how quickly its AI features reach the phone and how deeply they’re tied into stock Android, since Google controls both ends of that stack. We covered how Samsung is positioning its own flagship in our Galaxy S26 upgrade guide, and the comparison holds here too: hardware is close, and the deciding factor is usually which ecosystem you’re already in.

What About the Foldable Pixel Lineup?

The Pixel Fold line remains a smaller, more niche purchase, and the Pixel 11 generation doesn’t change that. Google’s original Pixel Fold and the follow-up Pixel 10 Pro Fold built a case for foldables as a legitimate flagship category, but they still trail Samsung’s Fold line in software polish and third-party app support. Our side-by-side of the Galaxy Z Fold 6 against the Pixel 9 Pro Fold found the gap narrowing but not closed, and that comparison still applies to the current generation.

Software Support and What it Means for Resale Value

Google now guarantees seven years of OS and security updates on Pixel 8 and later devices, which puts it on par with Samsung’s Galaxy S24 and later commitment. That matters for resale because a phone with years of guaranteed updates left holds its value longer than one approaching the end of its support window, a pattern The Verge has covered in its device support reporting. A Pixel 11 bought today should stay usable, and sellable, well past the point where older Pixels start losing buyer interest.

Years of guaranteed OS and security updates by lineup

Pixel 8 and later
7 years

Galaxy S24 and later
7 years

LineupGuaranteed OS and security updatesGoogle Pixel 8 and later7 yearsSamsung Galaxy S24 and later7 years

Do Google Phones Hold Their Salvage Value as Well as Other Brands?

Historically, no. Pixels have tended to depreciate faster than comparable iPhones and, in many cases, faster than Samsung’s Galaxy S-series flagships. Part of that comes down to smaller sales volume and less brand demand in the secondhand market, not build quality. That gap has been narrowing as Google’s update commitment has matched Samsung’s, but Apple’s resale premium is still driven by broader demand rather than anything Google can fix with a spec bump. If you check phone-focused threads on Reddit, you’ll see this pattern show up consistently in real owner experience, not just in company marketing.

This year, Google rolled out aggressive direct trade-in offers of up to $1,000 on the Google Store ahead of the Pixel 11 launch. So if you are upgrading, taking advantage of those offers would be the smartest move. However, for those looking to sell a smartphone for cash instead, Gadget Salvation can easily give you an estimate in seconds and buy it, should you choose us as your preferred buyback platform. We will even pay for shipping!

Conclusion: Should the Average Pixel User Upgrade to the Pixel 11?

If you’re on a Pixel 9 or Pixel 10 Pro XL, probably not yet. The generational jump is smaller than in past years, and you won’t miss much by waiting a cycle. But if you’re still using a Pixel 7 Pro, Pixel 7a, or Pixel 8, the case gets stronger: you’ll notice the camera and AI feature improvements, and your current phone is further from the front of its update window. Our general guide on how often you should upgrade is worth a read before you commit either way.

FAQ:

Is the Pixel 11 a big upgrade over the Pixel 10 Pro XL?

Not really, no. The design, core camera hardware, and general feel are close to last year’s phone, with the improvements focused on AI processing and software features rather than the physical hardware. If you already own a Pixel 10 Pro XL, you can safely skip this cycle. The upgrade makes more sense if you’re coming from a Pixel 8 or earlier.

How long will Google support the Pixel 11 with updates?

Google’s current pledge covers seven years of OS and security updates for Pixel 8 and later devices, and the Pixel 11 falls under that same commitment. That matches Samsung’s current Galaxy S-series pledge and is longer than what most Android manufacturers have historically offered. A longer update window also helps the phone hold resale value longer.

Do Pixel phones lose value faster than iPhones?

Yes. Pixel smartphones have historically depreciated much faster than iPhones on the used market, mostly due to lower overall demand rather than any hardware flaw. Samsung’s flagship Galaxy phones have also tended to hold value better than Pixels in many cases. The gap has narrowed with Google’s longer update commitments, but it hasn’t closed entirely.

Should I wait for the Pixel 12 instead?

If you’re happy with your current phone and it still has years of update support left, waiting costs you nothing. Google’s release cadence is now roughly annual with incremental changes, so skipping a generation rarely means missing something essential. The better trigger for upgrading is your current phone nearing the end of its support window, not the calendar. Besides, waiting out an upgrade cycle or two is a good practice to curb the demand for new hardware manufacturing.

Is the Pixel Fold worth buying over the standard Pixel 11?

Only if you specifically want a foldable form factor and are comfortable with a smaller software ecosystem around it. The Pixel Fold line trails Samsung’s Fold series in third-party app optimization and has a narrower resale market. For most buyers who just want the best mainstream camera and AI features, the standard Pixel 11 is the more practical choice.

Apple’s new macOS update reportedly contains a video of AirPods with a camera

Apple seems to be already preparing launch materials for its upcoming AirPods with a camera, a leaked video in the latest macOS update spotted by MacRumors suggests.

The video, found in macOS 26.7 RC, shows a man holding up a book and talking with Siri about it using visual information.

“With Visual Intelligence, your world becomes savable. See something you like? Just ask me to save it for later,” the voiceover in the video says.

MacRumous reports that these new AirPods have a camera that can be used to examine objects in front of the user and answer questions about it. The publication apparently found a line in the software code that suggests the AirPods will notify you if your hair or something else is covering the camera.

In May, Bloomberg reported that Apple was in the late stages of testing such a device. The report said the camera-equipped AirPods would look like the AirPods Pro 3, but will have a longer stem and an LED light to indicate that data is being sent to the cloud.

Other devices, like the Ray-Ban Meta Glasses, Looki pendant, and smart glasses from Rokid, already do something similar. This might be Apple’s move to embed real-world intelligence into devices before it launches smart glasses of its own.

Bloomberg noted that Apple wanted to release the new AirPods in the first half of 2026, but now that it will ship the new Siri in September, it will look to launch them along with the operating system updates.

Fairphone is launching its latest repairable phone in the US too

Fairphone, the Dutch company known for its sustainable and repair-friendly phones, on Tuesday said its latest smartphone, Fairphone (Gen 6+), is now available in the U.S, starting at $649.

The company previously had a partnership with French open-source operating system maker e/OS to sell a “de-Googled” version of its previous smartphones in the States, but this is the first time people in the U.S. can buy the company’s phones directly without any modifications. The company said the Fairphone 6+ will support T-Mobile and AT&T at launch.

The Fairpone 6+ is strictly a midrange Android offering, but given the increasing prices of consumer gadgets amid the ongoing component shortages, a repairable device that can be made to last for years may prove a good proposition.

Image Credits: FairphoneImage Credits:Fairphone

“We’re delivering a device built from the ground up to be opened, repaired, and kept alive for many years,” Fairphone CEO Raymond van Eck said.

The Fairphone 6+ runs on Qualcomm’s mid-range Snapdragon 7s Gen 4 processor, and has 12GB of RAM. The phone has a 4,415 maAh battery with support for 30W fast-charging. It features a 6.31 LTPO OLED display with an adaptive refresh rate of up to 120Hz.

As for photography, the phone’s main camera has a 50-megapixel Sony sensor with an f/1.88 aperture, and the secondary camera has a 13-megapixel ultrawide sensor with an f/2.2 aperture. The selfie camera on the front is a 32-megapixel sensor with an f/2.0 aperture.

Personally, I would have preferred a telephoto camera instead of an ultrawide for a two-camera setup. On paper, these cameras look like they would be good enough to take photos in the daylight, but in low light, expect the performance to dwindle.

The Fairphone’s main selling point, however, are its 12 replaceable parts, which include important components like the battery, cameras, USB-C port, and the display, which can be swapped out using a single screwdriver. The company offers five years of warranty and software support until 2033.

Fairphone claims it also focuses on keeping its manufacturing process sustainable. The company said it was able to reduce the carbon footprint to 30 kg of CO2e for each of the Fairphone 6+ it manufactured.

The Fairphone 6+ is available in Forest Green, Horizon Black, and Cobalt Blue colorways. The company is also selling accessories, like a finger loop, lanyard and card holder, which users can install by removing the back cover.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Acer Predator Helios or Lenovo Legion: Which Line is Better?

The Lenovo Legion line outperforms the Acer Predator Helios line overall, offering superior sustained performance, quiet thermal engineering, higher resale value, and exceptional long-term build durability. However, the Acer Predator Helios (particularly the Helios Neo series) wins on raw price-to-performance, offering higher CPU and GPU hardware tiers at lower price points for budget-focused buyers.

Here, we break down performance, thermals, pricing, and resale value across both lineups to find the smarter buy.

Feature & Value Comparison Matrix

CriteriaLenovo Legion (Legion 5 / Pro 5 / Pro 7)Acer Predator Helios (Helios 16 / 18 / Neo)Overall PerformanceExcellent sustained multi-core & GPU stabilityHigh peak out-of-the-box FPS; aggressive power limitsThermal SystemColdfront Vapor Chamber; quieter fansDual AeroBlade 3D fans; high cooling power, loud fansCost-EffectivenessModerate–High (Slight price premium for build)High–Excellent (Best spec-to-dollar ratio)Resale ValueHigh (Retains ~45%–55% after 2–3 years)Moderate (Retains ~30%–40% after 2–3 years)Build & KeyboardStealth aesthetic, TrueStrike keyboard, rear I/OStriking RGB gamer design, solid chassis, plastic accentsSoftware ControlLegion Vantage (Clean, deep undervolting)PredatorSense (Basic customization, occasional bugs)Expected Lifespan4–6 Years3–5 Years

1. Overall Performance & Thermal Management

Winner: Lenovo Legion

While both brands utilize high-wattage NVIDIA GeForce RTX graphics cards and Intel/AMD processors, Lenovo Legion wins on sustained thermal performance and noise control.

  • Lenovo Legion: Uses Lenovo’s Coldfront thermal architecture (with liquid metal on higher Pro models and vapor chambers). It distributes heat evenly without forcing the fans into deafening decibel ranges. Legion BIOS settings allow for accessible CPU undervolting and custom fan curves. Crucially, Lenovo rarely cuts corners on RAM configurations, shipping dual-channel setups out of the box to avoid CPU bottlenecks.

  • Acer Predator Helios: Focuses heavily on aggressive power delivery to squeeze out maximum peak frame rates in short bursts. The custom-engineered 5th Gen AeroBlade 3D fans move immense volumes of air, but at the cost of high fan noise under load. Thermal spikes are slightly more frequent on Helios models, requiring aggressive fan profiles to prevent thermal throttling during multi-hour gaming sessions.

Performance & thermals MetricScore (out of 10)Peak GPU power Sustained / thermals Display quality Portability Upgradeability Value for money Resale value

Scores are Gadget Salvation editorial ratings out of 10, weighted for how each flagship line holds up over an ownership cycle. Ready to trade up? Get an instant quote for your gaming laptop.

2. Cost-Effectiveness & Value

Winner: Acer Predator Helios

If your primary goal is getting the fastest CPU and GPU possible for every dollar spent, the Acer Predator Helios line takes the lead.

  • Acer Predator Helios / Neo: Acer consistently undercuts Lenovo by $100 to $300 for equivalent hardware specs. It is common to find a Helios Neo equipped with an RTX 4070 or RTX 5060-tier card for the price of a mid-tier Lenovo Legion with lower GPU specs. For buyers on a strict budget who prioritize FPS above all else, Acer delivers unmatched raw hardware value.

  • Lenovo Legion: Demands a slight price premium. While you pay extra for the underlying engineering—such as a better display panel, superior trackpad, quieter fans, and cleaner chassis—it offers lower raw component value per dollar on paper.

3. Resale Value & Secondary Market Demand

Winner: Lenovo Legion

Despite the widespread belief that gaming laptops depreciate faster than most other categories, we don’t find it to be true. After over a decade of handling all kinds of brands of notebooks, we spot the same trend without fail: six- to eight-year-old gaming models still have value today, but a home-use computer from the same year typically loses salvageable value in that timespan.

Of the two flagship lines we discuss in this post, Legion models hold their value significantly better on the secondhand market.

  • Lenovo Legion: Enjoys an exceptional reputation among hardware enthusiasts. Used Legion laptops (on platforms like eBay, Swappa, and Reddit’s r/hardwareswap) regularly sell for 40% to 55% of their original MSRP after 2 to 3 years. Buyers seek them out secondhand because of their reliable cooling and sleek, non-flashy design that doubles as a professional workstation.

  • Acer Predator Helios: Experiences steeper depreciation, retaining roughly 30% to 40% of its original retail price after 2 to 3 years. The secondary market views Acer as a budget brand, and aggressive gamer styling (blue accents, heavy branding) narrows the buyer pool compared to Legion’s understated aesthetics.

Upgrading to a new Predator or Legion this year? Gadget Salvation will give you an instant quote on your current gaming laptop – actual money you can put toward whichever line you pick.

GET MY QUOTE →

4. Build Quality, Ergonomics & Longevity

Winner: Lenovo Legion

Laptop longevity depends heavily on chassis rigidity, hinge construction, component temperatures, and long-term driver support.

  • Lenovo Legion: Renowned for structural integrity. Featuring aluminum lids and high-grade polymer bases, Legion laptops suffer minimal keyboard flex and zero hinge wobble. The rear-facing port layout with LED indicators keeps desk setups clean and strain off cable ports. Lenovo’s TrueStrike keyboard is widely regarded as one of the best laptop keyboards for both typing and gaming. Additionally, open-source software alternatives like LenovoLegionToolkit give users lightweight control without bloatware.

  • Acer Predator Helios: Build quality has improved substantially on recent generations, featuring sturdy metal display lids and tight assembly. However, Acer uses more hard plastics around the palm rests and exhaust vents. The PredatorSense control software can occasionally reset lighting profiles or fan settings after Windows updates, requiring manual troubleshooting.

Which Line Should You Buy?

  • Buy the Lenovo Legion if you want a quiet, durable, premium gaming laptop that stays cool under load, doubles as an understated work/school machine, and holds solid value when you decide to sell it in a few years.

  • Buy the Acer Predator Helios if you are on a strict budget, want the absolute highest FPS and screen refresh rate possible for your money, and don’t mind wearing headphones to block out fan noise.

Frequently Asked Questions:

01Which is better for competitive or esports gaming, Predator Helios or Legion Pro?

Both lines top out at the same RTX 5090 Laptop GPU capped near 175W, so peak horsepower is essentially tied. Over long, sustained sessions the gap comes down to cooling: Legion Pro’s vapor-chamber ColdFront system tends to hold boosted clocks more consistently, while Predator Helios models have shown CPU throttling in Performance mode and higher GPU temperatures in Turbo mode in independent testing.

02Which runs cooler and quieter, Acer Predator or Lenovo Legion?

Lenovo’s Legion Pro line generally runs cooler and quieter thanks to its vapor-chamber ColdFront cooling and liquid metal application. Independent reviews of the Predator Helios 18 AI have measured GPU hotspots approaching 105°C and notably loud fan noise once the laptop is pushed into Turbo mode.

03    Which gaming laptop line lasts longer: Predator Helios or Legion Pro?

It depends on what you value. Predator Helios 18 AI offers the most upgrade headroom in the category, with four RAM slots (up to 256GB) and three M.2 slots (up to 6TB), which extends a machine’s useful life. Legion Pro 7i offers less upgrade ceiling (64GB RAM, two M.2 slots) but its cooler-running thermal design puts less sustained heat stress on internal components over years of use.

04Can you upgrade the RAM and storage on either line?

Yes, both lines offer user-upgradeable memory and storage on their higher-end configurations. The Predator Helios 18 AI has four SO-DIMM slots supporting up to 256GB of DDR5 and three PCIe Gen5 M.2 slots supporting up to 6TB of storage. The Legion Pro 7i offers two CSODIMM slots supporting up to 64GB of DDR5 and dual M.2 slots supporting up to roughly 2TB.

Who really needs a cocktail robot?

Bartesian’s cocktail makers would be best described like a Keurig or Nespresso machine, but for alcoholic drinks. The Bartesian Duet model that I tested certainly lives up to that description — it’s really easy to serve a bunch of different cocktails with the push of a button, plus your own liquor.

But as I sipped on my raspberry ginger gimlet, I couldn’t shake the nagging question: who is actually going to buy a $300 cocktail robot?

There’s nothing wrong with the product. And it does exactly what it says! In the sleekly designed machine, you add your spirits of choice (between one and four types of liquor, depending on what model you’re using) and plop in a Bartesian capsule with hyper-concentrated mixes for multi-ingredient drinks like espresso martinis, watermelon margaritas, mai tais, and cosmos. There’s a barcode on the capsule that your machine scans to determine what spirit (or spirits) you need in your drink, and then you can select how strong you want your drink to be, which modulates the amount of water the machine will use to dilute the concentrate. Then, you put the drink in the provided, high-quality cocktail shaker with some ice to cool it down before pouring it into your glass.

When I invited some friends over to test the Bartesian, we enjoyed the inherent novelty of trying out a product we’d never seen or used before. Once we all sat down with our various drinks, we tried to decide who actually makes up the target audience for such an odd product, which also requires the purchase of cocktail capsules at about $2.50 each.

Image Credits:Bartesian /

The Bartesian is not for true cocktail lovers — the capsules don’t actually contain any alcohol, which means that if you’re making a drink like an aviation, you’re getting some sort of non-alcoholic approximation of ingredients like crème de violette and maraschino liqueur.

It’s no coincidence that my friends and I all liked the Bartesian’s lemon drop capsules the best, since the only alcoholic ingredient in the drink is the vodka that we bought ourselves to add to the machine. To be fair to Bartesian, it’s not like you’d recommend a Nespresso machine to your friend who owns a Fellow kettle and only buys single origin beans.

This cocktail robot is also not for anyone who is even remotely worried about the amount of counter space in their kitchen. It’s pretty big for something that you (hopefully?) aren’t using on a daily basis, and if anything, it would probably encourage me to start drinking more often just to justify the $300 expense. Plus, if you have counter space to spare, you probably have a lot of money. And if you have a lot of money and like cocktails, I’d say you are more likely to have a fully stocked bar with fancy liqueurs already. What will the other partners at your law firm say if you serve aviations that don’t use real crème de violette?

Even as someone who thinks Tito’s is top-shelf liquor (I am not that fancy), I could tell that something tasted a little bit artificial about most of these drinks. My friends and I all doctored up our drinks with some seltzer and lemon juice, which made them taste much better. But this kind of post-robot mixing sort of defeats the point of the whole endeavor.

Maybe my tastes just don’t align with the mixologists at Bartesian — my colleague Lauren reviewed a different Bartesian unit last year and told me that she loved it, especially the margaritas.

Drink preferences aside, I still keep coming back to the same question: who is this product for?

I could see the Bartesian being useful if you host a lot of parties and don’t hire a bartender, since you can make a whole cocktail menu’s worth of drinks without much effort or planning. One friend remarked that this machine feels like the sort of thing that an older couple would keep in their beach house to impress their friends. A colleague suggested that this could really shine in a retirement home. Personally, I could see a Bartesian at a co-working space’s happy hour, where people are just happy to get free drinks… then again, there’s a reason why WeWork stopped offering unlimited beer back in the day.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Google’s Pixel 11 lineup offers fewer hardware changes, but much more Gemini

For the last few years, Google’s Pixel has been a showcase of new AI features, with few hardware changes from the previous year’s devices. Similarly, the Pixel 11 series isn’t too different in design and internals from its predecessor.

However, this year’s devices have more Gemini features to complete tasks in the background, including a new Wispr Flow-like transcription feature, a live translation feature that works across content, and a new camera feature that captures the right frames.

Image Credits:Google

AI advances on the Pixel 11

With this year’s Pixel 11 series launch, Google is thinking more agentic AI to complete your tasks. With Gemini, U.S.-based users will be able to order groceries, book rides, or get coffee, for instance. Plus, Gemini can call businesses on users’ behalf for table reservations or appointments. Google said that users can take over or stop tasks at any point in time and also review transcripts for AI-operated calls.

Over the next few weeks, a new slate of connected apps will be able to work with Gemini to get things done, including Granola, Otter.ai, Wix, Fever, Get Your Guide, Localiza, OpenTable (U.K.), Ticketmaster, iHeartRadio, Pandora, Angi, Thumbtack, and Zocdoc.

The company has also evolved the “Magic Cue” feature from last year to use Gemini, which proactively surfaces contextual information, to now display information from across your apps to help you find suggestions for things like a dinner spot or show.

In May, Google announced a dictation product called Rambler to take on competitors like Wispr Flow and Aqua. Now, that product is making its way to the Pixel phones.

The new Pixel series phones have some other helpful features that might be handy for daily usage, too. First, the device can translate videos, podcasts, and voice messages in the target language. The company is also making its “Circle to Search” gesture-based feature available directly in the camera, something that Apple also did in iOS 27 by making Siri available in the camera.

What’s more, Google is adding an accessibility feature to the camera, which uses Gemini to translate sign language into text to help people communicate with others who have hearing impairments. And the company has redesigned the live transcribe interface for improved communication.

Camera features

Google also added a few AI tricks embedded into its camera. One feature is called “Magic Capture,” which picks the best frames out of hundreds of frames it captures between when users press start and end. The idea is to take a video and get photos as a byproduct. Google said that the feature also auto-crops and unblurs the frames to make them ready for sharing.

The company has upgraded its super zoom from 100x to 120x for Pro phones, and from 20x to 30x for the base Pixel 11. With the new devices, users will be able to create custom looks for the camera, which are specialized filters that appear when users are snapping images.

Image Credits:Google

The Pro phones are also getting faster capture with a feature called “Instant Night Sight,” which takes 4.5x less time than the previous-gen phone’s Night Sight. Google enhanced video shooting, too, with support for 8K resolution with video boost and better stability.

For creators, Google added a “creator suite” mode in video settings, which lets you use Pixel 11 devices as a teleprompter while shooting clips. When you are done shooting, the clip is saved in a dedicated folder, making it easier to find for editing.

Hardware upgrades

All the Pixel phones now run the latest Tensor G6 processor, which has 20% better power efficiency and
allows for 25% faster browsing, as per Google. Plus, it lets users take faster low-light photos with Night Sight Instant.

The new image signal processing on the chip also enables 120x magic zoom on the Pixel 11 Pro XL. The company said that the new processors run the latest models with lower latency, but didn’t offer any specific metrics.

The display size on all phones is the same, but the Pro models get a slightly brighter display, which could be helpful in the daylight.

Image Credits:Google

Google said Pro models get an updated main camera sensor that takes higher-quality photos than the previous generation without specifying any numbers. It also said the new telephoto sensor allows for 32% more light while capturing an image.

Image Credits:Google

London-based startup Nothing made its phones recognizable by Glyph bars and then a Glyph interface. Google is not that extravagant, but it has now placed an LED light on the back, which is built around the flashlight. This acts as an indicator for calls or messages from favorite contacts when Gemini is thinking or listening.

All these devices are available to preorder starting today and will start with a base storage of 256GB.

The Pixel 11 starts at $899, the 11 Pro starts at $1,099, and the 11 Pro XL starts at $1,299. (The prices of the Pixel 11 and the Pixel 11 Pro are the same as last year’s 256GB models, but you could buy a 128GB model at that time with a $100 lower price tag.)

With the rising prices of components, the company has bumped the price of the top model by $100 compared to the Pixel 10 XL.

A new lineup of Pixel 11 accessories is also arriving alongside the phones, including new Pixelsnap cases (which now include clear) and Pixelsnap Ring Stand colors.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Google takes on AirTag with the new $29 Pixel Tag

Alongside its announcement of a new lineup of Pixel 11 smartphones, Google on Wednesday introduced its answer to Apple’s AirTag. At its Made by Google 2026 event, the company unveiled a new product designed for keeping track of your valuable items: the $29 Google Pixel Tag.

Similar to how Apple’s AirTag leverages its network of iPhones to find lost devices, the new Pixel Tag uses Google’s Find Hub network, which taps into Android devices around the world. Android users can add the tag to their phone’s built-in Android Find Hub, which is already used to help users find their lost Android smartphones and other devices, similar to Apple’s Find My.

Helpfully, you can locate and ring your Pixel Tag directly from your Pixel Watch, too, not just your phone.

Image Credits:Google

Where the Pixel Tag differs from AirTag is in its look and feel.

Apple’s lost-item finder is small, round, and engravable; Google opted for a slimmer, elongated device instead. Spec-by-spec, the Pixel Tag is 1.1 inches wide, compared to the AirTag’s 1.26 inches. As the Pixel Tag is oval-shaped, it’s 1.8 inches high from top to bottom. Thickness-wise, the Pixel Tag clocks in at a depth of 0.2 inches, compared with the AirTag’s 0.31 inches (which Apple calls its height).

By weight, the two competitors are comparable, as the Pixel Tag weighs 0.4 ounces with the battery, and the AirTag comes in at 0.39 oz.

Both are also rated IP67 for splash, water, and dust resistance, meaning they can withstand submersion in a maximum depth of 1 meter for up to 30 minutes.

Image Credits:Google

Taking other cues from AirTag, the Pixel Tag offers connectivity via Bluetooth and Ultra Wideband for precision finding; however, it doesn’t include NFC. Pixel Tag has a built-in speaker to help you find the lost device when nearby, and it’s powered by the user-replaceable CR2032 coin cell battery — the same used by the AirTag. This allows the Pixel Tag to work for roughly a year before the battery needs to be replaced.

Designed to be attached to items like keychains and bags, the Pixel Tag will cost $29 for a one-pack and $99 for a four-pack when it becomes available for purchase on November 11, 2026.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Google unveils the Pixel Watch 5 with a smarter Gemini and advanced health monitoring

At its Made by Google event on Wednesday, Google unveiled the Pixel Watch 5 with a smarter Gemini experience, as well as advanced fitness and health monitoring. The new smartwatch, which starts at $399, can track blood pressure patterns and insulin resistance, as well as deliver personalized help and better sleep tracking.

Google says it designed the watch to deliver personalized and proactive help right when it’s needed. For example, the watch will proactively suggest relevant actions or information based on a text message’s context, like instantly pulling up a smoothie place your sister sent you.

You can raise your wrist to ask Gemini a question, handle requests like finding a nearby lunch spot with navigation, or use Gemini offline to manage timers, alarms, and workouts with your voice.

The watch will also dynamically surface timely updates right at the bottom of the watch face, like flight info, ETAs, and other helpful reminders.

Image Credits:Google

The Pixel Watch 5 is also launching with “Health Guardian,” a suite of new proactive health and safety tools.

The tech giant says the smartwatch uses sensors and machine learning to track blood pressure patterns before they can put strain on your heart. Google says the feature was tested against 24-hour blood pressure monitors and uses an advanced waveform model trained on more than 1 billion minutes of data from over 500,000 people.

The insulin resistance feature is designed to identify changes in metabolic health that may be associated with insulin resistance and an increased risk of developing prediabetes or type 2 diabetes. The feature combines signals from sleep, heart rate, physical activity, and other health data. A large sensor model then analyzes these signals over time to identify long-term changes in insulin resistance.

Google will give users a summary of their blood pressure and insulin resistance trends every month.

There’s also a new feature that can detect a persistent drop in oxygen saturation and will contact emergency services if the watch determines that a breathing emergency may be occurring. This feature is launching in select European countries before expanding to additional regions.

Image Credits:Google

Additionally, the watch’s sleep-stage tracking is 15% more accurate, and there’s also a new bedtime watch face that reduces nighttime distractions. A new “Smart Wake” feature wakes users at an optimal point in their sleep cycle, while a new sleep breathing quality metric tracks minute-by-minute changes in blood oxygen levels.

As for fitness, Google says the Pixel Watch 5 delivers its most accurate GPS route tracking yet, with route mapping that’s two times more accurate than previous generations. The improved accuracy is designed to provide users with more precise workout and running data, including a closer match between your recorded route and the actual course.

The Pixel Watch 5 features the Qualcomm Snapdragon W5 Gen 2 platform and has 12% more CPU performance and 50% more RAM than the previous platform. Google says the Watch 5 is 20% faster overall.

The Pixel Watch 5 supports up to 40 hours of battery life and is available in new colors, including Canyon Fog and Olive. The 41mm version starts at $399, while the 44mm starts at $429. The smartwatch is available for preorder starting Wednesday and will be available on August 20.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

The 2026 Guide to Getting Paid Fairly

Most people don’t have an electronics problem. They have a drawer problem. A last-generation phone, a laptop replaced by a work machine, a tablet nobody charges anymore — all of it quietly depreciating while it waits for a decision. The question isn’t whether the hardware is worth something. It’s where to sell used electronics without losing half the value to fees, lowball offers, or three weeks of unanswered messages.

There are four realistic paths, and they trade off against each other in predictable ways.

The four options, side by side

Method
Typical payout
Time to cash
Effort
Risk

Buyback platform
Fair market, minus refurb margin
3–7 days
Low
Very low

Peer-to-peer marketplace
Highest ceiling
1–6 weeks
High
Scams, chargebacks

Manufacturer trade-in
Low to moderate
2–4 weeks
Low
Usually store credit

Local cash sale
Lowest
Same day
Moderate
Meetup safety

1. Buyback platforms

A buyback service quotes you a price up front, ships you a prepaid label, inspects the device, and pays. You aren’t negotiating with strangers or writing a listing — you’re selecting your model, condition and configuration, and locking a number.

The tradeoff is honest: a buyback quote sits below the absolute peak a patient private seller might extract, because the company has to test, refurbish, warranty and resell the unit. What you’re buying with that difference is certainty and speed. For most sellers — especially anyone offloading a working laptop or phone they’d rather not photograph, list, and defend in a comment thread — that’s the correct trade.

The important variable is whether the quote holds. Reputable platforms honor the price you were given as long as your condition disclosure was accurate. That’s why describing screen wear, battery health and any functional faults truthfully at quote time matters more than optimism does.

2. Peer-to-peer marketplaces

You’re also absorbing the reseller’s job. That means writing the listing,
answering “is this still available,” pricing against a moving market, shipping
insured, and staying exposed to buyer-initiated disputes for weeks after the
sale.

The fees are steeper than most sellers expect. eBay’s final value fee is 13.6%
in most categories, including consumer electronics, plus a $0.40 per-order fee
(eBay seller fee schedule,
checked August 10, 2026). That percentage is charged on the total sale —
item price plus the shipping and sales tax the buyer pays — so the effective
bite on your device is higher than the headline rate. eBay’s own worked example
for a cell-phone seller puts it plainly: a $500 phone with $5 shipping at a 7%
tax rate costs $73.89 in fees, netting $426.11. That’s 14.8% of the item price.

And the sale isn’t final when the money lands. A “not as described” claim can
reverse a completed transaction entirely.

If your device is rare, in exceptional condition, or you genuinely enjoy the
process, this path pays. If you just want the drawer empty, the effort-adjusted
return is often worse than a buyback quote.

3. Manufacturer and retailer trade-in programs

Nearly every major brand runs one. A Dell trade in, HP’s program, Apple’s Trade In, and the carrier offers attached to new phone purchases all follow the same shape: quick, convenient, and structured to keep you inside their ecosystem.

Two things to watch. First, the payout usually arrives as store credit or a gift card rather than cash — fine if you’re already buying a replacement from them, less useful otherwise. Second, carrier trade-in “credits” are frequently spread across 24 or 36 monthly bill credits, which means leaving the carrier early forfeits the balance. Compare the headline number against a cash offer before you commit; the gap is often larger than the convenience is worth.

4. Local cash sales and pawn shops

Same-day money, no shipping, no waiting. Also the lowest offers you’ll see anywhere — pawn shops typically pay a fraction of resale because they’re pricing in the risk of holding inventory. Worth it only when speed genuinely outranks value.

Which electronics are actually worth selling

Not everything in the drawer has a market. The categories that consistently hold value:

  • Laptops — business-class and premium consumer models retain value well, particularly recent Apple silicon MacBooks and current-generation Intel Core Ultra and AMD Ryzen AI machines. Sell a laptop is usually the highest-value item in the pile.
  • Smartphones — flagships from the last three to four generations move reliably. Unlocked units outperform carrier-locked ones, and IMEI status is non-negotiable. Sell a smartphone.
  • Gaming hardware — GPUs, consoles and gaming laptops hold strongly, and discrete graphics is the single biggest value driver on a portable. Sell a gaming laptop.
  • Tablets and wearables — moderate but real value, especially cellular-capable models.

What doesn’t: aging budget Chromebooks, printers, most Bluetooth speakers, and anything with a swollen battery.

Resale value: what actually moves your number

Four factors do most of the work. Age is the largest — consumer electronics shed roughly 20–35% of their value in the first year and continue declining steadily, which is why the most expensive decision is usually waiting. Configuration comes next: RAM, storage capacity, discrete GPU and display type can separate two identical-looking machines by hundreds of dollars. Cosmetic and functional condition sets the tier. Accessories — the original charger especially, and on high-wattage gaming laptops the proprietary 240W or 330W brick — meaningfully affect the final offer.

At Gadget Salvation, we’ve been buying consumer electronics since 2008, and the pattern hasn’t changed: sellers who quote early and describe accurately get the best outcomes. Our quote is firm before you ship, the prepaid label is free and insured, and payment is approved within two business days of inspection via PayPal, Venmo, Zelle, CashApp or physical check. No listings, no negotiation, no chargeback window.

Before you ship anything

  1. Back up to cloud or an external drive.
  2. Sign out of every account — Apple ID, Google, Microsoft, Find My.
  3. Factory reset, and disable activation locks. A locked device can’t be processed.
  4. Confirm your exact model number so the quote matches the hardware.
  5. Include the original charger.

Frequently asked questions

Where can I sell used electronics for the most money?
Peer-to-peer marketplaces have the highest ceiling, but after fees, shipping and time invested, a buyback platform often nets more per hour spent — and carries none of the dispute risk.

Do I need the original box?
No. Packaging helps marginally on collectible items but has little effect on a buyback quote. The charger matters far more.

Can I sell a device that’s damaged or won’t turn on?
Yes. Cracked screens, failed batteries, dead boards and water damage all still carry value — components are recoverable. Select the matching condition when quoting so the offer holds at inspection.

How long does payment take?
With a buyback service, typically 3–7 days door to door. Marketplace sales average two to three weeks, and manufacturer trade-ins often run three to four.

Is it safe to mail my laptop?
Use an insured, tracked prepaid label from an established buyback company. Wipe the drive first — reputable processors also perform certified multi-pass data sanitation on every incoming device.

Ready to see what your hardware is worth? Get an instant quote — it takes about ninety seconds.

Back-to-School Laptops 2026

As the 2026–2027 academic year approaches, buying a college laptop is no longer just about picking a slim chassis and a decent keyboard. The laptop landscape has undergone a massive shift toward specialized neural processing units (NPUs), multi-day battery efficiencies, and hyper-capable ARM architecture. Whether you are an incoming freshman taking general education courses, an engineering major running intensive CAD simulations, or a digital arts student rendering 3D scenes, choosing the right machine will define your day-to-day productivity for the next four years.

This guide breaks down the top student laptops of 2026 across every budget, major, and performance requirement.

Top Laptop Picks for Sudents in 2026

1. Best Value MacBook: Apple MacBook Neo

  • Starting Price: ~$599 ($499 with education pricing)

  • Best For: Most college students, humanities, general productivity, and budget-conscious macOS users.

Apple redefined its entry-level lineup with the MacBook Neo, making macOS more accessible than ever. Powered by the fanless A18 Pro chip, the Neo effortlessly handles everyday student tasks like multi-tab web research, document editing, 4K media playback, and light creative work in total silence. Housed in a durable 2.7-pound aluminum chassis available in vibrant finishes (Silver, Blush, Citrus, and Indigo), it features a crisp 13.0-inch Liquid Retina display, a 1080p FaceTime HD camera, and up to 16 hours of battery life. It represents the ultimate entry point for students who want Apple software and build quality without paying four figures.

2. Best Windows All-Rounder: HP OmniBook 5 14 (Snapdragon)

Powered by Qualcomm’s newest Snapdragon X architecture, the HP OmniBook 5 14 leads the Windows thin-and-light space. The standout highlight here is stamina: test benchmarks routinely clear 30+ hours of continuous video playback and light work, meaning you can leave your power adapter in your dorm room for days at a time. It features a bright 14-inch display, a spacious glass touchpad, and instant-wake responsiveness that rivals Apple Silicon.

3. Best 2-in-1 Convertible: Lenovo Yoga 9i Gen 10 Aura Edition

If you prefer handwriting lecture notes, sketching diagrams, or folding your laptop into tent mode for late-night streaming, Lenovo’s flagship 2-in-1 remains unmatched. Equipped with Intel Core Ultra hardware, a dazzling 2.8K OLED touch display, and a bundled active stylus, the Yoga 9i Gen 10 balances heavy-duty multitasking with tablet-like flexibility.

4. Best Budget Windows Laptop: Acer Aspire 16 AI

Budget laptops often force sacrifices on screen quality or build construction, but the Acer Aspire 16 AI avoids those traps. It pairs a generous 16-inch 16:10 matte display with AMD Ryzen AI processing, delivering smooth multi-tab browsing, quick photo edits, and full numeric keypad functionality for statistics or accounting coursework.

5. Best Powerhouse for Engineering & Design: Asus ProArt P16

  • Starting Price: ~$2,999 (Configurations vary)

  • Best For: Engineering, 3D animation, video production, and heavy gaming.

When coursework requires dedicated GPU acceleration (NVIDIA RTX 40/50 series graphics) and maximum thermal headroom, thin-and-light ultrabooks won’t cut it. The Asus ProArt P16 packs high-wattage silicon into a refined, dark aluminum chassis that looks professional in a seminar room while delivering workstation-grade performance for MATLAB, SolidWorks, and Premiere Pro.

2026 Student Laptop Comparison

Laptop Model
Processor Architecture
Typical Battery Life
Starting Price
Primary Advantage

Apple MacBook Neo
Apple Silicon (A18 Pro)
14–16 Hours
$599
Most affordable Mac ever, fanless, ultra-portable

HP OmniBook 5 14
ARM (Snapdragon X)
30+ Hours
$899
Market-leading battery life, strong value

Lenovo Yoga 9i Gen 10
x86 (Intel Core Ultra)
12–15 Hours
$1699
Best-in-class 2-in-1 OLED touch display

Acer Aspire 16 AI
x86 (AMD Ryzen AI)
10–12 Hours
$709
Large screen and strong performance per dollar

Asus ProArt P16
x86 + Dedicated GPU
6–8 Hours
$2,999
Maximum graphical power for engineering & media

Prices as of August 2026.

Understanding depreciation is essential when making a multi-year hardware investment. Across the 2026 laptop landscape, Apple MacBooks retain their value significantly better than Windows competitors. Entry-level models like the MacBook Neo and mid-range MacBook Airs generally retain approximately 60% of their original value after two years of ownership, and roughly 40% to 46% after four years of college.

Projected Resale Value at the 2-Year Mark

// 2026 LAPTOP LINEUP · BASED ON HISTORICAL RESALE DATA

MACBOOK
NEO

HP OMNIBOOK
5 14

LENOVO YOGA
9i GEN 10

ACER ASPIRE
16 AI

ASUS PROART
P16

* Projections based on historical resale trends by platform and Gadget Salvation trade-in data. Actual values vary by condition, configuration, and market timing.

In contrast, mainstream Windows computers (including Intel, AMD, and Qualcomm Snapdragon laptops) depreciate faster on secondary marketplaces like Facebook Marketplace or eBay, typically retaining 35% to 45% of their original value after two years and 20% to 30% by graduation. Still, high-demand premium lines (such as Lenovo ThinkPads or specialized gaming/mobile workstation rigs) depreciate relatively slower. To minimize loss, keep original packaging, use a protective sleeve, and consider manufacturer trade-in programs when upgrading post-graduation. And for cash sales, consider at least getting an estimate through a buyback platform like Gadget Salvation. We’ve been around since 2008, know all the ins and outs of tech resale, and can help you get rid of an old laptop real fast.

Conclusion

There’s no single best back-to-school laptop for 2026. But there’s a best laptop for each kind of student. The good news is that all five picks here share the same floor: sufficient amount of RAM, fast SSD storage, and a screen that won’t strain anyone through a full semester of reading.
Whatever ends up in the backpack this fall, the computer it’s replacing likely still has value. Get a quick no-obligation quote from Gadget Salvation before it depreciates any further.

FAQ:

Is 8GB of RAM on the MacBook Neo enough for college?

For general coursework (writing essays, managing spreadsheets, browsing dozens of tabs, streaming media, and lightweight photo editing) 8GB of unified memory on the A18 Pro chip should be enough. However, if your major involves heavy video editing, compiling code, running virtual machines, or 3D modeling, upgrading to a 16GB+ machine like the MacBook Air or a higher-spec Windows PC is recommended.

Do students need a Copilot+ or AI PC for school in 2026?

No. On-device AI features like Recall, Live Captions, and local image generation are nice extras, not requirements. They matter more for CS, design, and data-heavy majors than for a common course.

Should I buy a Chromebook for college?

Only if coursework is genuinely browser-first. Chromebooks are cheaper up front and excellent on battery life, but ChromeOS has a real software ceiling, and Auto Update Expiration dates limit how long a Chromebook stays supported — which also hinders its resale value.

How much will my laptop be worth in a few years?

It depends heavily on platform. Apple laptops tend to retain the most value, premium Windows ultrabooks depreciate moderately, and budget Windows laptops lose value fastest. Gadget Salvation can provide a free, no-obligation estimate for any of the models above at any point.

What is the single most important hardware feature to prioritize?

For students moving between dorms, libraries, and lecture halls, battery life and weight take priority over pure raw processing speed. A laptop that lasts through a full day of classes without forcing you to hunt for wall outlets will vastly improve your daily academic routine.

Google’s new Pixel 11 Pro Fold offers a stronger build and brighter screens

Samsung’s short and wide foldable is the talk of the town, but Google is not experimenting with its design with today’s unveiling of the new Pixel 11 Fold, which appears largely unchanged on the outside. The company said that the new foldable is stronger and lighter than the previous-gen phone, but it’s also costlier.

Google said that it developed a new, stronger hinge for this year’s Pixel 11 Pro Fold. It’s also adding a Super Actua display to the outer display with 3,600 nits of peak brightness. Both the inner and outer displays are 20% brighter than its predecessor, according to the company.

There is a bit of a battery downgrade, however, as it now offers a 4,750 mAh capacity battery instead of 5,015 mAh from last year’s model. On the plus side, this is probably the reason the phone is 1mm thinner and roughly 20 grams lighter.

Image Credits:Google

Another small upgrade on the charging front is that the new foldable supports 25W wireless charging.

The Pixel 11 Pro Fold is getting an updated 48-megapixel sensor that pulls in more light for more detailed photos in different lighting conditions. Because of the new G6 Tensor chip and the updated image processor, the phone can digitally zoom at 30x, up from 20x.

The device will be available in both the Olive and Obsidian colors, and will cost $1,899.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Why Stream ring-maker Sandbar says the future of AI wearables is voice

AI notetaking hardware has taken off over the past couple of years, with credit-card-sized devices, pendants, pins, and even transcribing earbuds all promising to capture your meetings and turn them into summaries and action items. Now, a whole wave of wearables — rings especially — are betting people want to capture stray thoughts and ideas the same way. 

One of the companies chasing that bet is Sandbar, the startup behind the private voice ring Stream, which has raised $36 million to date, including a $23 million Series A led by Adjacent and Kindred Ventures. 

On this episode of TechCrunch’s Equity podcast, Rebecca Bellan talks with Sandbar co-founder and CEO Mina Fahmi about why he thinks so many voice hardware devices before Stream struggled to break through, and why he’s betting that keeping the human firmly in control is what it’ll take to get wearable tech right. 

Subscribe to Equity on YouTube, Apple Podcasts, Overcast, Spotify and all the casts. You also can follow Equity on X and Threads, at @EquityPod. 

Everything announced at Made by Google ’26: Pixel 11, Pixel Watch 5, Pixel Tag, and tons of Gemini features

Google is holding its Made by Google 2026 event on Wednesday, unveiling the Pixel 11 series, the Pixel Watch 5, and even a competitor to Apple’s AirTag. The tech giant also used the event to show off new Gemini-powered features across its devices.

Gemini gets more useful on Pixel

Google spent a good portion of the event talking about Gemini and other AI features coming to its devices.

One of the more notable accessibility updates is an expansion of “Live Transcribe” to support American Sign Language. Using the Pixel Camera, users can have sign language translated into text, giving people another way to communicate without relying on typing.

Image Credits:Google

Google also introduced “Rambler,” a new voice-input feature designed to better understand the way people actually talk. Rather than requiring carefully phrased sentences, Rambler is designed to handle run-on sentences, filler words, and less structured speech while still figuring out what the user is trying to say.

There are a few smaller additions, too. “Circle to Search” can now be accessed more directly from the Pixel Camera, allowing users to identify objects, search for things in the distance, translate text, or ask questions about what’s around them without leaving the camera experience.

Pixel 11

Image Credits:Google

The standard Pixel 11 gets a redesigned camera bar that is thinner than the one on the previous generation. Google says the new camera bar is more than 40% thinner and now uses an all-glass surface that stretches across the width of the phone. Google is also increasing the base storage to 256GB, doubling the previous starting capacity.

The starting price for the new model is set at $899, reflecting a $100 increase compared to the Pixel 10. This price hike comes with the decision to drop the 128GB storage option. Plus, the ongoing RAM supply shortage plays a part in this increase.

The Pixel 11 will be available in Frost, Hibiscus, Pistachio, and Obsidian.

Pixel 11 Pro and Pro XL

Image Credits:Google

Google is making durability a bigger part of the Pro lineup. The company says the Pixel 11 Pro and Pixel 11 Pro XL have improved drop resistance and a new anti-scratch display coating that provides more than twice the scratch resistance of the Pixel 10 Pro models.

The Pixel 11 Pro starts at $1,099, compared to $999 for the Pixel 10 Pro.

The phones are available in Canyon, Fog, Olive, and Obsidian. Notably, this year’s Obsidian option gets an all-matte finish.

Pixel 11 Pro Fold

Google says the new foldable is nearly 10% lighter and almost 1mm thinner than the Pixel 10 Pro Fold. It also has slimmer bezels, a 48-megapixel main camera, and 30x Super Zoom.

The company is also building on the IP68 water and dust resistance introduced with the Pixel 10 Pro Fold. The Pixel 11 Pro Fold uses a glass-fiber composite back cover designed to better withstand cracking, while a redesigned hinge offers additional protection for the inner display. Google says the changes make the model three times more durable than its predecessor.

The Pixel 11 Pro Fold comes in Olive and Obsidian.

Google takes aim at Apple’s AirTag

Image Credits:Google

Google finally has its own tracking tag. Called Pixel Tag, the small device is designed to help people keep tabs on things such as keys, wallets, and luggage. It connects to Android’s Find Hub network, allowing users to see the tag’s location through the Find Hub app (similar to Apple’s Find My).

The tag, priced at $29 (or $99 for a four-pack), can also be located from a Pixel Watch. Pixel Buds users can ask Gemini to find or ring a Pixel Tag, adding a voice-controlled option for tracking something down.

Pixel Watch 5

Image Credits:Google

The Pixel Watch 5 is getting several health-related updates. The Google Health app will provide monthly summaries of blood pressure trends, with the goal of helping users notice patterns over time. It will also provide monthly summaries of insulin resistance trends.

The 41mm Pixel Watch 5 starts at $399, while the 45mm version starts at $429. Google is also offering a Stephen Curry edition for $579, with an exclusive design built for workouts. (This is featured in the image above.) 

Meanwhile, the Pixel Buds Pro is arriving in a new Olive color.

Image Credits:Google

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

The 2022 Flagship That Still Hits Hard in 2026

MSI Raider GE67HX review: this 2022 Core i7-12800HX gaming laptop still hits hard in 2026. Full specs, real benchmarks, OLED verdict, and current resale value.

Most gaming laptops from 2022 have quietly slid into the “budget option” bracket — the thing you settle for when the current generation is out of reach.

The MSI Raider GE67HX didn’t. It was the first 15.6-inch laptop built around Intel’s Alder Lake-HX platform, and that one engineering decision — a desktop die in a mobile package — is why a four-year-old machine still turns in frame rates that embarrass plenty of newer mid-range hardware.

This review covers what the GE67HX actually delivers today, where it genuinely falls short, and what it’s worth if you’re ready to move on from it.

Specs at a glance

Component
Configuration

Model line
Raider GE67 HX 12UGS / 12UHS (2022)

CPU
Intel Core i7-12800HX (16C/24T, 1.5–4.8 GHz) or Core i9-12900HX

Power limits
110 W sustained (PL1), 190 W short burst (PL2)

GPU
GeForce RTX 3070 Ti (12UGS) or RTX 3080 Ti (12UHS), 150 W TGP, MUX switch

Display
15.6″ 240 Hz OLED (FHD and QHD SKUs), plus IPS options

Memory
16–64 GB DDR5-4800, 2× SODIMM slots

Storage
1–2 TB PCIe 4.0 NVMe, 2× M.2 2280 slots

Battery
99.9 Wh

Power adapter
330 W (~1.36 kg)

Ports
Thunderbolt 4, USB4 40 Gbps, USB-C 3.2 Gen 2×2, 3× USB-A, HDMI 2.0, 2.5 GbE, SD

Wireless
Killer Wi-Fi 6E AX1675i, Bluetooth 5.2

Dimensions
358 × 267 × 23.4 mm

Weight
2.47 kg (5.44 lbs)

Launch price
From ~$2,500

The HX bet, and why it aged well

Most 2022 gaming laptops shipped with Alder Lake-H silicon — 45 W parts tuned to balance speed against battery life. MSI went the other way. The GE67HX uses Alder Lake-HX: essentially a desktop die, running at a 110 W sustained power limit with a 190 W short-burst ceiling.

The gap that opened up was not subtle. In Notebookcheck’s testing, the Core i7-12800HX turned in roughly 25 percent more multi-threaded performance than the Core i9-12900HK in the GE66 it replaced, and left AMD’s Zen 3 mobile parts 40 to 45 percent behind. In several tests it also cleared the desktop Core i7-12700K.

Chart 01 — CPU multi-core

The i7-12800HX beats desktop chips

Cinebench R23 multi-core, higher is better. The GE67HX clears every mobile chip of its generation and the desktop Core i7-12700K.

Intel Core i9-12900K · desktop
27,005

MSI GE67HX · i7-12800HX
22,456

MSI GE76 Raider · i9-12900HK
18,288

Schenker XMG Neo 15 · i7-12700H
17,626

Eurocom Raptor X15 · i7-12700K desktop
17,003

ASUS ROG Strix Scar 15 · i9-12900H
16,917

MSI Raider GE66 12UHS · i9-12900HK
16,530

Schenker XMG Apex 15 · Ryzen 7 5800H
12,663

MSI Delta 15 · Ryzen 9 5900HX
11,746

Source: Notebookcheck, MSI Raider GE67 HX 12UGS review · Chart by Gadget Salvation

That’s the whole reason the GE67HX doesn’t feel dated in 2026. CPU-bound games, streaming while playing, compiling, video exports — none of it has outrun this chip.

The rest of the system keeps up. PCMark 10 landed at 8,042 points, essentially matching the GE66 running a faster RTX 3080 Ti. Geekbench 5 multi-core came in at 14,213.

The GPU is faster than its badge suggests

The RTX 3070 Ti in the GE67HX is not the RTX 3070 Ti you’d find in a thinner laptop. MSI ran it at the full 150 W TGP and paired it with DDR5, and the result is 3DMark scores roughly 12 percent above the average laptop carrying the same GPU — most of which cap out at 130 W or lower on slower DDR4 memory.

The margin is wide enough that this 3070 Ti performs roughly on par with the RTX 3080 Ti in the earlier GE66. Time Spy: 12,239. Fire Strike: 28,492.

Chart 02 — Native frame rates

RTX 3070 Ti at 150 W, no upscaling

Measured frames per second at maximum preset, DLSS off. Everything here stays above 60 fps at 1080p, and all but Cyberpunk clears it at 1440p before upscaling.

1080p Ultra
1440p Ultra

Final Fantasy XV · High preset

GTA V · Highest, 4x MSAA

The Witcher 3 · Ultra, HBAO+

Cyberpunk 2077 · patch 1.6, Ultra

Bars scaled to 207 fps. Witcher 3 has no published 1440p Ultra figure.
Source: Notebookcheck, MSI Raider GE67 HX 12UGS review · Chart by Gadget Salvation

Turn on DLSS in anything from the last few years and the 3070 Ti clears 60 fps at native QHD in nearly everything. The 12UHS trim with the RTX 3080 Ti pushes further still.

What the GE67HX gives up against a current RTX 40- or 50-series machine is frame generation and newer ray tracing cores. Those are real gaps — but they don’t stop this laptop from playing modern games well.

One caveat worth knowing: unplugged, performance falls off a cliff. A Fire Strike run on battery returned a graphics score of 11,614 against 31,096 on mains. This is a wall-socket machine.

The OLED panel is still the reason to want one

The GE67 was among the first laptops to pair an OLED panel with a 240 Hz refresh rate, and the measurements hold up: black-to-white response of 0.4 ms, a 50%-to-80% grey transition of 0.25 ms, and effectively infinite contrast from true black levels. Average brightness measured 358 nits with 99 percent uniformity.

The caveats are real, and they matter whether you’re buying or selling:

  • It ships uncalibrated. Coverage measured about 90 percent sRGB and 72 percent Display P3 — fine for gaming, not for color-critical editing.
  • PWM flicker at 480 Hz, present at every brightness level including 100 percent. Most people won’t notice. If you’re PWM-sensitive, you will.
  • No G-Sync or adaptive sync on the internal display.
  • Glossy only, no matte option, so bright rooms mean reflections.

Then there’s burn-in, which is the live question on any OLED this old. Static HUD elements and taskbars can leave faint traces after years of use. Check it on a full-screen grey test image — and disclose it honestly if you’re selling. It affects the offer; it doesn’t disqualify the machine.

Build, cooling, and the noise problem

Metal lid and keyboard deck, plastic bottom panel, twin 55–60 mm fans and seven heat pipes. The cooling works: the keyboard deck peaked at 34.4 °C under gaming load against a 40.4 °C average for the gaming laptop class, and the palm rest stayed at roughly 20 °C — genuinely cool to the touch.

The trade-off is volume, and it’s not a small one.

(Source: RTINGS.COM)

Chart 03 — Emissions & power

Cool to touch, loud to hear, thirsty to run

The GE67HX runs meaningfully cooler than the gaming laptop class average — and pays for it in fan noise and wall draw.

Measurement
GE67HX
Reference
Verdict

Keyboard deck, max under load
34.4 °C
Class avg 40.4 °C
COOL

Bottom panel, max under load
42.0 °C
Class avg 43.2 °C
COOL

Palm rest, max
20.4 °C
Similar devices 28.8 °C
COOL

Fan noise, true idle
22.9 dB(A)
Room floor 22.7 dB(A)
SILENT

Fan noise, web browsing
30–34 dB(A)
Any power profile
AUDIBLE

Fan noise, Witcher 3 (Extreme)
55.7 dB(A)
50+ = headphones
LOUD

Fan noise, Cooler Boost
57.4 dB(A)
Maximum fan mode
LOUD

Wall draw, Witcher 3
237 W
GE66 drew 202 W
HIGH

Peak draw, Prime95 + FurMark
291 W
330 W adapter, 1.36 kg
HIGH

Battery, Wi-Fi browsing
5h 36m
99.9 Wh, Balanced
SOLID

USB-C charging
None
Barrel plug only
N/A

Source: Notebookcheck, MSI Raider GE67 HX 12UGS review · Chart by Gadget Salvation

Running The Witcher 3 in Extreme Performance mode produced 55.7 dB(A), rising to 57.4 dB(A) with Cooler Boost. Headphones aren’t optional. Fans also stay audible in the 30–34 dB(A) range during light tasks like browsing, regardless of profile — though the machine does go effectively silent at 22.9 dB(A) when truly idle.

The keyboard is per-key RGB with shallow, ultrabook-like travel — divisive, but consistent. The webcam is a 1080p sensor with no privacy shutter and no Windows Hello.

Battery, and the power brick problem

The 99.9 Wh battery is the largest capacity permitted under FAA lithium rules, and it delivers about 5 hours 36 minutes of Wi-Fi browsing on the Balanced profile. For a machine this powerful, that’s respectable.

The charger is the sticking point. The GE67HX ships with a 330 W adapter weighing about 1.36 kg — up from the 280 W brick on the GE66 — and the system can’t charge over USB-C. Peak measured draw under combined CPU and GPU stress hit 291 W. Total travel weight is closer to 8 lbs than 5.

If you’re selling, that adapter matters more than usual. Third-party replacements at this wattage aren’t cheap or common, and a GE67HX without one is meaningfully harder to move.

Upgradability is the quiet superpower

This is what separates the GE67HX from most laptops of its era. Two accessible PCIe 4.0 x4 M.2 2280 slots and two DDR5 SODIMM slots sit under the bottom panel, reachable with a Phillips screwdriver.

A 2022 machine can therefore run 64 GB of DDR5 and 4 TB of NVMe in 2026 for a couple hundred dollars. A soldered-RAM competitor from the same year can’t. The EPA makes the same argument from the other end: for a computer or laptop, upgrading the hardware is preferable to replacing the whole product, since donating and reusing working electronics extends the life of valuable products and keeps them out of the waste stream longer.

One caveat: the drives have no heat spreaders, and sustained sequential reads fall from around 7,000 MB/s to as low as 1,500 MB/s during extended transfers. Adding a thin thermal pad when you install a new SSD is a worthwhile five-minute job.

What’s not great

Being fair about it:

  • It’s loud. Nearly 56 dB(A) under gaming load is above what most people tolerate without headphones.
  • It’s power-hungry. The Witcher 3 pulls about 237 W at the wall versus 202 W on the GE66. Prime95 alone draws roughly 165 W against the GE66’s 90 W.
  • The SD reader is slow. About 83 MB/s — roughly half what the Razer Blade 15 managed with the same card.
  • Thunderbolt 4 drops out in discrete GPU mode, which is easy to trip over if you rely on a TB dock.
  • No frame generation. DLSS 3 and 4 frame gen need RTX 40-series or newer. On the newest, heaviest titles, this is where a modern laptop pulls clearly ahead.
  • OLED risk compounds with age. A four-year-old panel that’s seen heavy static-UI use may show wear.

Who should still buy one used

The GE67HX makes sense in 2026 if you want high-refresh QHD gaming without paying current-flagship prices, if you do CPU-heavy work alongside gaming, or if you value being able to open the machine and upgrade it yourself. If you’re shopping that tier generally, it’s worth reading how it stacks up against the current crop of gaming laptops under $1,000 before you commit.

It makes less sense if you need portability, quiet operation, or the newest ray tracing and frame generation features.

Resale value: what a GE67HX is worth today

Here’s where the 2022 vintage stops being a liability.

Gaming laptops depreciate faster than mainstream notebooks — the general rule of thumb runs 20 to 50 percent a year against 15 to 45 percent for standard consumer machines — but high-TGP Ampere hardware has been an exception to its own category. The performance-per-dollar is hard to beat on the used market, and the GE67HX in particular is remembered as one of the fastest 15-inch machines of its generation. Timing still matters, though: when you sell affects what you get, and every month a laptop sits unused is value quietly leaving the building.

Chart 04 — Resale value

What actually moves a GE67HX offer

Ranked by how much each factor shifts the number. Get the top three right and the rest is rounding.

Factor
What to check
Effect

GPU tier
12UHS (RTX 3080 Ti) carries a clear premium over 12UGS (RTX 3070 Ti)
HIGH

330 W adapter
Original brick only — no USB-C charging, and replacements are scarce
HIGH

240 Hz OLED panel
OLED SKUs price above the IPS trims, provided the panel is clean
HIGH

OLED burn-in
Run a full-screen grey image and look for HUD or taskbar ghosting
MEDIUM

RAM & storage
32 GB DDR5 and 1–2 TB NVMe configurations price above the base build
MEDIUM

Hinge play
The most common inspection finding on this chassis — open and flex the lid
MEDIUM

Battery health
A four-year-old 99.9 Wh cell will have measurable cycle wear
MEDIUM

Original box
Handy for shipping, but it doesn’t change the quote
MINOR

Won’t power on
Still purchasable — select the matching condition and the offer adjusts
ACCEPTED

The short version of what shapes your offer:

  • GPU tier is the biggest lever. An RTX 3080 Ti 12UHS commands a meaningful premium over the RTX 3070 Ti 12UGS.
  • The OLED panel adds real value over the IPS SKUs — assuming it’s free of burn-in.
  • Memory and storage upgrades carry over. 32 GB and 1–2 TB configurations price above the base.
  • The 330 W adapter is close to mandatory. Missing it costs you more than a typical charger would.
  • Panel condition and hinge play are the two things inspection catches most often on this chassis.

Gadget Salvation has been buying used electronics since 2008, and gaming laptops like the Raider line are a core part of what we take in. You get a firm quote in seconds by selecting your exact model and answering a few questions about condition — no listing to write, no lowball messages from strangers, no meeting a buyer in a parking lot. Shipping is a free, insured, prepaid label, and payment goes out within two business days of inspection via PayPal, Venmo, Zelle, CashApp, or a mailed check.

We also buy laptops that don’t power on, have cracked screens, or have OLED burn-in. The condition you select determines the offer, and our team confirms it when the machine arrives.

Ready to see the number? Get an instant quote on the Sell MSI Laptop page, or start from Sell Gaming Laptop if you’re clearing out more than one machine.

The verdict

The MSI Raider GE67HX was built around a bet that desktop-class silicon belonged in a 15-inch chassis, and that bet is exactly why it still holds up. The Core i7-12800HX remains genuinely fast, the 150 W GPU punches above its badge, and the 240 Hz OLED is still a display worth wanting.

It’s loud, thirsty, and saddled with a brick of a charger. But as a used buy in 2026, few gaming laptops from its year give you this much for the money — and if you’re the one selling, that’s the good news, because the same reasons it’s a smart used purchase are the reasons it’s still worth real cash.

Frequently asked questions

MSI Raider GE67HX, answered

01
How do I tell which GE67HX configuration I have?

Check the label underneath the laptop, or press Win + R, run msinfo32, and read the System Model field. 12UGS means the RTX 3070 Ti; 12UHS means the RTX 3080 Ti. The suffix after that — for example -013 or -069 — identifies the SKU and tells you the memory, storage, and display combination. Entering the exact model gets you the most accurate offer and avoids a discrepancy at inspection.

02
Is the GE67HX still good for gaming in 2026?

Yes, for the large majority of titles. The 150 W RTX 3070 Ti handled Cyberpunk 2077 at 88 fps at 1080p Ultra and 56 fps at 1440p Ultra with no upscaling, and DLSS pushes 1440p comfortably past 60 in nearly everything. The RTX 3080 Ti version has more headroom still. The Core i7-12800HX is fast enough that it isn’t the bottleneck in CPU-heavy games. What you give up is DLSS frame generation and newer ray tracing hardware, which require RTX 40-series or later.

03
Does OLED burn-in hurt my trade-in value?

It affects the offer, but it doesn’t disqualify the laptop. We purchase laptops in all operational states, including screen burn-in, cracked displays, battery wear, and units that won’t power on. Select the matching condition when you get your quote and the value locks in. Disclosing burn-in honestly upfront is the best way to make sure your quote holds when our team inspects the machine.

04
Do I need to include the 330 W charger?

Strongly recommended. The GE67HX uses an unusually high-wattage adapter that can’t be swapped for a standard laptop charger, and the machine doesn’t support USB-C charging at all. A unit shipped without its original power supply is worth noticeably less, so indicate whether you’re including it when you complete your quote. A missing charger is one of the most common reasons a laptop quote comes in lower than the owner expected — more on that in our guide to average laptop resale value.

05
Should I wipe the SSD before shipping it?

Back up your files to an external drive or cloud storage and sign out of your Microsoft account before you box the laptop. You don’t need to remove the M.2 drives — every device we receive is securely wiped again during processing, so your personal data is never at risk. If your GE67HX has two NVMe drives installed, leave both in and note the total storage in your quote.

06
How fast do I get paid?

Once your laptop reaches us and our team completes functional and cosmetic testing, payment is approved within two business days via PayPal, Venmo, Zelle, CashApp, or a mailed physical check. Your prepaid shipping label is free and fully insured. Start the process on our Sell Laptop page.

In this article

  1. Specs at a glance
  2. The HX bet, and why it aged well
  3. The i7-12800HX beats desktop chips
  4. The GPU is faster than its badge suggests
  5. RTX 3070 Ti at 150 W, no upscaling
  6. The OLED panel is still the reason to want one
  7. Build, cooling, and the noise problem
  8. Cool to touch, loud to hear, thirsty to run
  9. Battery, and the power brick problem
  10. Upgradability is the quiet superpower
  11. What’s not great
  12. Who should still buy one used
  13. Resale value: what a GE67HX is worth today
  14. What actually moves a GE67HX offer
  15. The verdict
  16. MSI Raider GE67HX, answered

Written by



Cesar Navarro
Gadget Salvation Team

Gadget Salvation has been buying, refurbishing and rehoming used electronics since 2014. We write about squeezing real value out of the tech you already own.

Done reading?

Find out what your device is worth.

Free instant quote. Free shipping. Paid within 2 business days of inspection.

Get my quote

Got a gadget gathering dust?

Get an instant quote and turn your old tech into cash today.

Get My Quote

The Kindle Scribe Colorsoft is a lot of fun, but it’s not a must-have

After testing the Kindle Scribe Colorsoft for two months, I found that it was made for a very specific kind of note-taker and reader. While the device is pretty and lightweight, it’s not something the everyday person needs due to its hefty price tag and size. 

However, for those who have been waiting for a color Kindle that doubles as a digital notebook, the Kindle Scribe Colorsoft is worth considering. 

The device starts at a steep $630 and is available in two colors: Black and Fig, a pretty purple shade. It weighs just 400 grams and features an 11-inch display that makes it similar in size to a traditional sheet of paper.

Its thin design is impressive, but its larger size means it’s not exactly something you can hold comfortably with one hand. I found it most comfortable to use when it was propped up against my knees while sitting on a bed or placed flat on a desk.

One thing I like about e-readers is that they’re usually quite portable, so I can easily pop one into my purse when I’m on the go. That wasn’t the case with the Kindle Scribe Colorsoft because its size meant I never ended up taking it out of the house. However, if you’re an avid note-taker or researcher, I could see why you’d want to put it in your work bag to take with you to the office or to a coffee shop to get some work done. Beyond those situations, it’s not a device I’d reach for during a quick trip in an Uber or while waiting at a doctor’s office.

The larger size does mean that there’s more room for writing and note-taking, or even sketches and diagrams. And of course, the larger display makes reading PDFs and other documents easier.

When it comes to reading, the larger screen has both benefits and drawbacks, as the extra space is helpful when reading books with charts or maps, but the size also gets rid of the cozy feeling that makes smaller Kindles appealing.

Image Credits:TechCrunch /

What I liked about the larger size was that I was able to create an easy-to-read color-coded digital planner and reading journal, especially since the device comes with templates for daily, weekly, and monthly planners. And as someone who normally has a physical reading journal, I found it quite efficient to be able to finish a book and then open up a digital notebook on the same device to log my reading. 

The device comes with a Kindle Scribe Pen that attaches magnetically to the side of the e-reader. The pen feels nice in your hand and can be programmed for various actions. The eraser works smoothly and responds almost instantly. 

While the color display is fun, it’s important to recognize that colors look more like soft highlighter shades rather than the vibrant tones you see on a regular tablet. That’s not necessarily an issue for note-taking, but it does mean that comics and other visual content won’t look as rich as the original colors.

The device’s color options were useful when highlighting books because I could assign specific colors to different types of notes. For example, while reading a twisty thriller, I used blue to mark details I thought I might need to remember later and red for quotes I enjoyed and wanted to note. It’s also easy to quickly switch between the different colors thanks to the device’s fast refresh rate. 

As for battery life, I found it to be excellent. I only had to charge the device twice over the course of two months. It is worth noting, however, that writing uses more power than reading.

All in all, the Kindle Scribe Colorsoft makes the most sense for students, researchers, and journalers who want one device for reading, annotating, and organizing handwritten notes. For everyone else, the steep cost is hard to justify.

If you’re simply looking to upgrade an older Kindle, I don’t think the Kindle Scribe Colorsoft is worth the investment, as you’d be better off with the more reasonably priced Kindle Paperwhite, which starts at $159.99.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

OpenAI’s new AI smart speaker will reportedly sell for between $300 and $400

More details continue to trickle out about OpenAI’s mysterious new hardware device — described previously as an AI-fueled smart speaker that will be the “physical manifestation” of ChatGPT.

Bloomberg now reports that the device will be “donut-shaped,” designed thusly to allow users to carry it around their home and place it in different locations, like a bedside table or a kitchen counter.

It will be constructed from “high-quality metal,” have a “premium look,” and (in a detail that mystifies) will have distinct “moving parts,” sources told Bloomberg.

It also could be slightly more expensive than your average smart speaker, perhaps $300 to $400 per unit, according to this report. For comparison, most of Amazon’s smart home speakers range in price from $40 on the low end to $240 on the high end.

So, to sum up: an expensive talking AI donut that has … moving parts? OpenAI releasing a smart home device has a certain logic to it, in that it would further integrate ChatGPT into users’ lives. However, historically speaking, smart speakers have not always been profitable and may prove a difficult market to break into. The potentially high price point also might not help.

The device, which is being developed in partnership with LoveFrom, the design studio founded by famous former Apple developer Jony Ive, will likely be released at some point in 2027, Bloomberg writes.

The company’s attempt to enter the hardware market has not gone off without a hitch. OpenAI is being sued by the current king of hardware, Apple, which has accused the AI lab of stealing trade secrets. OpenAI has denied wrongdoing.

Is Acer Nitro V 16 ANV16-72-70F4 the New Mid-Range King?

BOTTOM LINE — ACER NITRO V 16 ANV16-72-70F4 Acer Nitro V 16 ANV16-72-70F4 CPU: INTEL CORE 7 240H GPU: RTX 5060 · 8GB GDDR7…

BOTTOM LINE — ACER NITRO V 16 ANV16-72-70F4

Acer Nitro V 16 _ANV16-72-70F4_

CPU: **INTEL CORE 7 240H** GPU: **RTX 5060 · 8GB GDDR7 · 95W** DISPLAY: **16″ WUXGA 180HZ IPS** RAM: **16GB DDR5-5600** PRICE: **$1,024.99 MSRP**

**Bottom line:** The Acer Nitro V 16 ANV16-72-70F4 is one of the most complete sub-$1,100 gaming laptops money can buy in 2025–2026. An NVIDIA GeForce RTX 5060 with a full 95W TGP, a crisp 16:10 180Hz IPS panel, Thunderbolt 4, Killer networking, and an upgrade path make it a formidable daily driver — provided you can live with its plastic chassis and modest 512GB starting storage. Unless you specifically need a 2560×1600 display or faster multi-core CPU performance, there’s no compelling reason to spend $475 more on the Core 9 version for a gaming-primary machine.

The Acer Nitro V 16 (ANV16-72-70F4) emerged in 2026 as the “sweet spot” configuration for mid-range gamers. By moving away from the “Nitro 5” branding and adopting the 16:10 aspect ratio, Acer has modernized its budget lineup to compete with the likes of the [Lenovo LOQ](https://cashforusedlaptops.com/is-lenovo-loq-a-good-gaming-laptop/ “Is Lenovo LOQ a Good Gaming Laptop?”) and ASUS TUF series.

Acer Nitro V 16 ANV16-72-70F4: Specs at Glance

The ANV16-72-70F4 is the entry-level configuration of Acer’s refreshed Nitro V 16 (ANV16-72) line — a gaming laptop family that sits directly below the Predator Helios but above the stripped-down Aspire Gaming series. This model ships with Intel’s Arrow Lake-H Core 7 240H, NVIDIA’s Blackwell-architecture RTX 5060, and a 76Wh battery in a familiar all-black plastic chassis.

Component
Specification

Processor
Intel Core 7 240H (10 Cores, up to 5.20 GHz)

Graphics
NVIDIA GeForce RTX 5060 (8GB GDDR7)

Memory
16GB DDR5 RAM (5600MHz)

Storage
512GB PCIe Gen4 SSD

Display
16″ WUXGA (1920 x 1200) IPS, 180Hz, 16:10

Connectivity
Thunderbolt 4, HDMI 2.1, Wi-Fi 6E

Design and Build Quality

Acer keeps the Nitro V 16’s aesthetic deliberately restrained. The all-black plastic chassis features a tapered profile — thinner at the front lid, thickening toward the rear exhaust — that at least gives the impression of purposeful engineering. The lid wears a metallic Nitro logo at the center. Nothing about the exterior loudly announces “gaming laptop,” which lets it easily blend in in an office environment.

The polymer construction is high-quality for the price, with noticeably greater rigidity than older Nitro releases. The hinge opens to ~140 degrees and holds the display well at any angle. Admittedly, the chassis is not as good as aluminum, but it doesn’t feel cheap either.

At 5.29 lbs, it’s heavier than true ultrabooks but comparable to competing 16-inch gaming laptops. The bundled 135W adapter adds another ~300g, so budget bag space accordingly.

Port Layout & Connectivity

Port placement is well thought out for right-handed mouse users. The two fastest USB-A ports (10Gbps) sit on the right, keeping the mouse pad area clear of cable clutter. The left side hosts RJ-45 Ethernet, a slower USB-A Gen 1 port, and a microSD slot. Notable bonuses include a full Thunderbolt 4/USB4 40Gbps port, HDMI 2.1 output (supporting 4K/60Hz or 1080p/240Hz external displays), and Killer E2600 Gigabit Ethernet backed by Killer Wi-Fi 6.

Display Performance

The 16:10 aspect ratio is a true upgrade over older 16:9 gaming laptops: Users get more vertical real estate for code editors, browser tabs, and document windows. 100% sRGB coverage ensures colors are accurate enough for light content, and the anti-glare coating keeps reflections manageable indoors. The 3ms overdrive response time pairs well with the 180Hz panel for competitive play.

The main limitations are familiar Nitro compromises: 300 nits of peak brightness makes outdoor use uncomfortable, and there’s no DCI-P3 or HDR certification. If you plan to do color-sensitive photo or video editing, step up to the Intel Core 9-based version with the optional WQXGA (2560×1600) panel. But purely for gaming and everyday productivity, this screen is genuinely excellent at its price.

CPU & GPU Performance

Intel Core 7 240H

The Core 7 240H uses Intel’s hybrid P+E core architecture: six Performance cores clocked up to 5.20 GHz and four Efficiency cores reaching 4.00 GHz. The on-die NPU handles AI-accelerated workloads and offloads tasks like background noise suppression and video upscaling. In everyday gaming and streaming scenarios, the Intel Core 7 240H keeps up without bottlenecking the RTX 5060 — it’s ranked around #91 in LaptopMedia’s CPU performance hierarchy, which is perfectly competitive in the sub-$1,100 tier.

NVIDIA GeForce RTX 5060 (95W TGP)

The RTX 5060’s key wins over the outgoing RTX 4060 are DLSS 4 with Multi-Frame Generation and an upgraded 572 AI TOPS neural processing capability. In practice, DLSS 4 MFG in supported titles like Alan Wake 2 can double or triple the rendered frame rate with minimal perceptible loss in quality — effectively making the RTX 5060 feel like a faster-tier GPU. The 95W Max Graphics Power configuration in this model (vs. the 85W variant in some competing configurations) means Acer isn’t artificially throttling the GPU to save thermals or cost.

Real-world gaming benchmarks place the ANV16-72-70F4 at approximately 85–110 FPS in titles like Counter-Strike 2 at 1200p on “Very High” settings. Shadow of the Tomb Raider runs comfortably at 90–100 FPS at native resolution on the “Highest” preset. Metro Exodus Enhanced (ray-tracing enabled) lands at around 70 FPS — playable and visually stunning for a sub-$1,100 machine.

Thermal Management

The GPU cooling story is excellent: Acer’s dual-fan system keeps the RTX 5060 stable and cool during extended sessions, resulting in consistent frame rates without GPU throttling. The CPU tells a different story under prolonged multi-threaded workloads — sustained Cinebench runs show the Core 7 240H throttling back after the initial boost window as the system prioritizes GPU thermals. For gaming, this is largely irrelevant. For CPU-heavy tasks like video encoding or 3D rendering, you will notice thermal limitations.

// THERMAL TIP

Using Acer’s NitroSense utility, switch between Silent, Balanced, and Performance modes. Enabling Performance mode and pairing it with the laptop on a hard, flat surface (not a pillow) dramatically reduces CPU throttling under load. ## **Intel Core 7 240H vs Core 9 270H Versions: Which Should You Buy?**

The Nitro V 16 ANV16-72 lineup spans three CPU tiers — Core 5 210H, Core 7 240H, and Core 9 270H — paired with either an RTX 5060 or RTX 5070. The two most relevant configurations for most buyers are the Core 7 240H + RTX 5060 (our subject today) and the step-up Core 9 270H + RTX 5070. Here’s how they compare head-to-head:

|
| ANV16-72-70F4 CORE 7 240H + RTX 5060 | ANV16-72-933F CORE 9 270H + RTX 5070 |
|—|—|—|
| CPU Rank | \#91 | \#33 |
| GPU | RTX 5060 (95W) | RTX 5070 |
| GPU Speed Diff. | Baseline | ~11% faster |
| Display Options | WUXGA 1920×1200 only | WUXGA + WQXGA 2560×1600 |
| Base RAM | 16GB DDR5-5600 | 32GB DDR5-5600 |
| Base Storage | 512GB PCIe Gen 4 | 1TB PCIe Gen 4 |
| Multi-core Work | Good | Significantly better |
| CPU Throttling | Moderate under load | More pronounced — same cooling system |
| Price (MSRP) | **$1,024.99** | **~$1,499.99** |
| Best For | 1080p/1200p gaming, everyday use | 1440p gaming, heavier CPU workloads |

The Core 9 270H model has a faster CPU on paper, but there’s an important catch: The same cooling system that excels at keeping the RTX 5070 cool struggles to adequately manage the Core 9 270H under heavy CPU loads, leading to more aggressive throttling than you’d expect for a $1,500 laptop. If you’re buying this laptop primarily for gaming— which most people are — the Core 7 240H + RTX 5060 combination is the smarter value proposition at $1,025. The GPU performance delta between the RTX 5060 and RTX 5070 is only ~11%, and DLSS 4 effectively closes that gap further in supported titles.

The only scenario where we’d confidently recommend spending up to the Core 9 is if you need the WQXGA 2560×1600 display option (sharper, significantly better for content work).

5 Ways to Reduce the Cost of Your Acer Nitro V 16 Upgrade

The ANV16-72-70F4 already offers an excellent value at its $1,025 MSRP, but the 2026 global memory price surge has made new computers more expensive across the board. So here are five concrete strategies to lower your real out-of-pocket cost:

  1. Time your purchase around major sale events. Historically, Acer Nitro V models drop 12–18% during Amazon Prime Day (July), Best Buy’s Black Friday sale (November), and Micro Center’s periodic student deals. If you can wait, signing up for price-drop alerts on CamelCamelCamel for the B0FS8BZDQ9 ASIN will notify you when the price dips. Plan the transition so your old computer sells quickly, while your new one is on discount.

2. Sell your current laptop on Gadget Salvation first. Before you buy anything, get an instant offer on the computer you are replacing at GadgetSalvation.com. A 2–3 year-old mid-range gaming laptop in good condition can net $200–$500, directly offsetting the cost of the Nitro V 16. The process is free to use, including complimentary shipping postage, and pays within one to two business days — you can time the selling ahead of your new laptop purchase.

3. Choose the Core 7 configuration over the Core 9. As established in our comparison above, the $1,025 ANV16-72-70F4 (Core 7 + RTX 5060) delivers approximately 91% of the gaming performance of the $1,499 Core 9 + RTX 5070 model. For most gamers at 1200p resolution, the Core 7 is the smarter purchase — pocket the $475 difference.

4. Buy open-box or Acer Certified Refurbished. Acer’s certified refurbished program and retailers like Best Buy’s open-box section regularly list Nitro V 16 configurations at 10–20% below MSRP. Combined with Acer’s standard warranty on certified units, the risk is minimal.

5. Self-upgrade RAM and storage post-purchase. Rather than paying Acer’s factory premium for 32GB or 1TB configurations, buy the base 16GB/512GB model and upgrade yourself. A 2×16GB DDR5-5600 kit costs ~$45–60; a 2TB PCIe Gen 4 SSD runs ~$80–100. Total self-upgrade cost: ~$160, versus a ~$200–300 MSRP premium for the factory-configured version.

The Verdict

Acer Nitro V 16 ANV16-72-70F4 is the rare budget gaming laptop that doesn’t feel like a compromise. At $1,025, you get a full-power RTX 5060, a really good 180Hz 16:10 screen, Thunderbolt 4 connectivity, Killer networking, and the ability to upgrade RAM and storage down the line. The Intel Core 7 240H won’t win benchmark trophies, but it keeps pace with the GPU without becoming the bottleneck. Unless you specifically need a 2560×1600 screen or significantly faster multi-core CPU performance, there’s no compelling reason to spend $475 more on the Core 9 version for a strictly gaming laptop. Finally, you can further offset the cost of a new Nitro V 16 model if you sell old Acer (or almost any other brand!) on Gadget Salvation.

How to Practice Mindful Reuse in Your Daily Life

We talk about recycling all the time — but recycling is a last resort. Before a product gets broken down and reborn as something…

We talk about recycling all the time — but recycling is a last resort. Before a product gets broken down and reborn as something new, it has a whole second, third, or even fourth life waiting. Mindful reuse is the practice of seeing that potential before the bin even enters your mind.

The concept of “reduce, reuse, recycle” has been drilled into us since grade school — yet in practice, most people jump straight from “use once” to “bin it.” The middle step, reuse, is by far the most impactful: it preserves the energy, materials, and labor that went into making a thing in the first place. And it costs almost nothing.

Mindful reuse isn’t about obsessive frugality or filling your home with junk you’ll never use again. It’s a small shift in perception — pausing before disposal and asking: Does this have an alternative use?

1. Everyday Objects: Start With What’s Already in Your Home

The most impactful reuse habits aren’t dramatic — they’re tiny decisions made twenty times a day. A glass jar becomes a pantry container. A worn-out t-shirt becomes a cleaning rag. A cardboard box becomes packing material for your next shipment.

The trick is slowing down enough to notice the object before you toss it. A brief pause at the bin — five seconds — is usually all it takes to spot alternate utility.

  • Before buying a new item, check whether you already own something that could do the job
  • Keep a small basket near your kitchen bin for items that need a second look before disposal
  • Designate a “reuse shelf” in a cupboard — old containers, bags, ribbons, rubber bands — raid it before buying new
  • Switch to cloth napkins, beeswax wraps, and refillable bottles for daily household use

Every product in your home represents hours of human labor and decades of ecological debt. Using it once and discarding it is the real waste.
1.

2. Clothing & Textiles: Rethink Your Wardrobe Before You Shop

The fashion industry is one of the most resource-intensive sectors on the planet. The antidote isn’t a capsule wardrobe sold to you by another brand — it’s learning to work with what you have, repair what’s broken, and pass on what you’ve genuinely outgrown.

Clothes swaps with friends are an easy win: A social event where everyone brings items they no longer wear and leaves with something “new.” Platforms like Vinted and Depop have industrialized this principle — anything you no longer love is someone else’s treasure.

Before donating, consider whether a worn item can be repaired first. A cobbler can resole boots. A tailor can take in a blazer that no longer fits. The bar for “beyond repair” is much higher than most of us assume.

3. Technology: Your Old Devices Have More Life Left Than You Think

Electronics are among the most resource-intensive objects we own — rare-earth metals, complex manufacturing chains, and significant carbon costs go into every phone, laptop, and tablet. Yet the average upgrade cycle is under three years, and most people discard devices that still function perfectly well.

Mindful reuse here has two dimensions: Extending the life of what you own and responsibly rehoming it when you’re done. A laptop that’s two years old and “feels slow” likely just needs a memory upgrade, a battery replacement, or a fresh OS install — not a new machine.

50M+

TONNES OF E-WASTE / YEAR

3×

LONGER LIFESPAN WITH CARE

When upgrading is unavoidable, [selling your old electronics](https://cashforusedlaptops.com/6-reasons-why-electronics-reselling-matters/ “6 Reasons to Sell Used Electronics”) is far better than letting them gather dust in a drawer — for both the planet and your wallet. Resale platforms have made this easier than ever, and reputable services will even handle the logistics.

// BUYBACK SERVICE ADVICE

### Sell Your Old Mac or PC With Gadget Salvation

Gadget Salvation is a long-standing buyback platform specializing in used laptops, smartphones, desktops, game consoles, and more. Site visitors can calculate an instant quote, receive a complimentary shipping label, should they choose to move forward, and get paid ultra-fast. We at Gadget Salvation strive to make truly easy for our customers to give their old electronics a new life. Resale is one of the cleanest ways to practice mindful reuse with your tech. Our company’s motto is “Go green and make green”!

The environmental case for device resale is compelling. When a laptop is resold and reused for even one extra year, it defers the production of a new unit — and [manufacturing a new laptop](https://cashforusedlaptops.com/whats-my-computers-footprint-the-environmental-cost-of-tech/ “Computer Footprint”) generates significantly more carbon than keeping an existing one running.

4. Food & Kitchen: Zero-Waste Cooking Is Closer Than You Think

Food waste is one of the largest contributors to greenhouse gas emissions globally, yet kitchen reuse is among the easiest habits to build. Vegetable peelings become stock. Stale bread becomes breadcrumbs or croutons. Overripe bananas freeze for later or become banana bread.

The practice of “mise en place” — preparing and repurposing ingredients intentionally — is a useful frame not just for professional kitchens but for home cooks. Cook once, eat twice: roast a whole chicken on Sunday, use the carcass for stock on Monday, and the leftover meat in a salad on Tuesday.

  • Keep a stock bag in the freezer — add vegetable trimmings throughout the week, then simmer for 30 minutes
  • Learn the “use-it-up” meal: a weekly dish built from whatever needs eating before it spoils
  • Invest in good glass containers that go from fridge to oven to table — fewer single-use packaging moments
  • Compost anything that can’t be eaten — it closes the loop and feeds your garden or a local scheme

Individual action matters, but the leverage of mindful reuse multiplies when it happens at the community level. Tool libraries let neighborhoods share drills, ladders, and lawnmowers that would otherwise sit idle 98% of the time. Buy Nothing groups on Facebook and Nextdoor enable hyper-local gifting of items that still have value.

Libraries themselves — the original sharing economy — deserve more credit than they get. Beyond books: libraries of things, seed libraries, toy libraries, and skills-sharing programs are growing in cities around the world. The infrastructure of reuse already exists in most communities; it just needs participation.

Ownership is often just custody. The most mindful thing you can do with an object is make sure it ends up in the hands of someone who actually needs it.
[Repair hubs](https://www.repaircafe.org/en/ “Repair Cafe”) are another underrated resource: volunteer-run spaces where people bring broken items (lamps, bicycles, clothing, small electronics) and skilled volunteers fix them for free. They exist in most major cities and are a true act of community building alongside their sustainability benefits.

Conclusion: From Convenience to Consciousness

The deeper shift that underpins all of this is moving from a default of convenience to a habit of consideration. Modern consumer culture has trained us to treat disposal as frictionless and acquisition as the default solution to nearly any problem. Mindful reuse reverses that: it makes you ask what already exists before reaching for something new.

This doesn’t mean stoicism and deprivation. It means a different relationship with stuff— one where an object’s story doesn’t end when you’re done with it. The jacket you pass on during a neighborhood winter coat drive, the laptop you sell through Gadget Salvation, the jar you wash and refill — each of these is a small act of care for the material world we all share.

Start with one room. One category. One habit. Mindful reuse compounds quietly, and over time, it stops feeling like effort — it just becomes the way you live.

## **Frequently Asked Questions**
—
**What exactly is mindful reuse, and how is it different from recycling?**[Recycling](https://cashforusedlaptops.com/state-of-recycling-in-the-us/ “Recycling in the US”) breaks a material down to create something new — it’s a last resort that still consumes energy. Mindful reuse means extending the life of an object in its current form: repurposing, repairing, reselling, or donating before it ever reaches the bin. It preserves far more of the original energy and resources than recycling does.
**Where do I start if I’ve never thought about reuse before?**Start with one category: Your kitchen is usually the easiest. Swap single-use items for reusable alternatives (cloth napkins, glass containers, a reusable water bottle) and add a five-second pause before throwing anything away to ask if it has another use. Small habits compound quickly.
**Is it worth repairing old electronics, or should I just buy new?**Almost always worth repairing first. A slow laptop often just needs more RAM or a storage replacement — both are far cheaper than a new computer. If repair isn’t viable, selling on a marketplace (eBay, Facebook) or through a buyback platform like [Gadget Salvation](https://www.gadgetsalvation.com/) and many others gives your tech a second life with someone who needs it more.
**Does mindful reuse actually make a measurable environmental difference?**Yes — significantly. Manufacturing new products accounts for a large share of their lifetime carbon footprint. Keeping an existing laptop in use for one extra year, for example, defers the production of a new unit and its associated emissions entirely. When multiplied across millions of households, reuse habits have a genuine, measurable impact on resource consumption and greenhouse gas emissions.

iPhone Air: Apple’s Thinnest Smartphone Yet

TABLE OF CONTENTS: What We Love 5.6mm frame redefines what a premium smartphone can look like today A19 Pro chip with 12GB RAM is…

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

– [Design & Build Quality](#aioseo-design-build-quality-3)
– [Display & Brightness](#aioseo-display-brightness-9)
– [Performance & Apple Intelligence](#aioseo-performance-apple-intelligence-13)
– [iPhone Air Camera System](#aioseo-camera-system-18)
– [Battery Life & Charging](#aioseo-battery-life-charging-24)
– [iPhone Air vs. The Competition](#aioseo-iphone-air-vs-the-competition-26)
– [iPhone Air Resale Value Projection](#aioseo-resale-value-projection-31)
– [Verdict](#aioseo-verdict-34)

What We Love

– 5.6mm frame redefines what a premium smartphone can look like today
– A19 Pro chip with 12GB RAM is absolute overkill — in the best way
– Grade 5 titanium with Ceramic Shield 2 front and back: very durable
– LTPO 120Hz display matches the Pro lineup in quality and brightness
– Battery efficiency punches far above the 3,149 mAh cell’s weight
– 18MP Center Stage front camera is a generational leap for selfies
– Full Apple Intelligence suite runs entirely on-device for privacy
– Exceptional long-term resale value — Apple phones lead the secondhand market

What We Don’t

– Single rear camera misses ultrawide, macro, and spatial video entirely
– Mono speaker sounds noticeably weaker compared to dual-speaker rivals
– $999 entry price — $200 more than iPhone 17 for significant trade-offs
– No MagSafe Battery included; add-on pack costs an extra $99
– Titanium is fingerprint-prone; a case is strongly recommended
With the new iPhone Air, Apple’s proposition is simple: What if we made the thinnest, lightest iPhone we possibly could, and didn’t apologize for any of the trade-offs? At 5.6mm thick and weighing 5.96oz, this smartphone feels more futuristic than the chunky glass-and-steel slabs dominating the market in recent years.

But elegance has a price. A single rear camera, a 3,149 mAh battery smaller than the iPhone 17’s, a mono speaker, and no ultrawide lens are all the trade-offs Apple made in the name of thinness. Whether that bargain makes sense for you depends almost entirely on what you actually do with your phone.

Design & Build Quality

Holding the iPhone Air for the first time is an experience in itself. The polished Grade 5 titanium frame (crafted from 80% recycled titanium) catches light the way jewelry does, with a high-gloss mirror finish that feels decisively high-end. The form is so thin that the eye initially refuses to accept it as a real smartphone: it reads more like a concept render mockup.

At the heart of the design is the plateau — a precision-milled raised section on the back that houses the camera, speaker grille, and Apple silicon. Rather than treating this bulge as a necessary evil (the camera bump approach taken by the Pro line), Apple has leaned into it architecturally, making it a geometric accent that anchors the otherwise plain back panel. The result is something genuinely distinctive.

The four available colors — Space Black, Cloud White, Light Gold, and Sky Blue — are all understated and sophisticated. Sky Blue is particularly interesting: it shifts character under different lighting, reading almost white in bright indoor conditions, then revealing a soft, steel-tinted blue outdoors. It’s the same color-shifting quality Apple brought to the M4 MacBook Air, and it works beautifully on titanium.

Durability credentials are strong: Ceramic Shield 2 on the front delivers 3× better scratch resistance than any previous iPhone, and the back is now Ceramic Shield-protected as well — a first. Drop tests suggest the frame handles concrete impacts better than the iPhone 17(!) despite being thinner, a testament to titanium’s strength-to-weight ratio. The Action button and Camera Control button both return from the Pro lineup, a welcome addition at this price point.

Display & Brightness

Apple’s decision to equip the iPhone Air with the same panel technology used in the Pro models pays enormous dividends here. The 6.5-inch Super Retina XDR OLED runs at up to 120Hz with Apple’s LTPO adaptive refresh technology, dropping as low as 1Hz when the always-on display is idle. At 460 ppi and a resolution of 2736×1260, sharpness is essentially a non-issue at any reasonable viewing distance.

Peak brightness hits 3,000 nits outdoors — comfortably readable in direct Chicago summer sunlight — while HDR content peaks at 1,600 nits. Color accuracy is excellent, with support for both HDR10 and Dolby Vision, and the always-on display locks in for a useful persistent glance layer without meaningful battery drain thanks to the LTPO panel’s efficiency.

The slight curvature at the corners and the tight tolerances at the titanium-to-glass transition give the display a cohesive, jewelry-grade feel that the iPhone 17’s aluminum frame simply can’t match. This is, point for point, one of the finest smartphone displays available at any price in the first half of 2026.

Performance & Apple Intelligence

The A19 Pro chip with its 16-core Neural Engine and 12 GB of RAM is not a watered-down processor — it’s the same silicon powering the iPhone 17 Pro, and it shows in every interaction. Apps launch instantly, multitasking feels frictionless, and demanding tasks like 4K video export, on-device AI image generation, and AAA gaming sustain peak performance without thermal throttling that was sometimes noticeable on the iPhone 14 Pro.

Apple Intelligence — the suite of on-device AI features baked into iOS 26 — runs entirely locally on the Neural Engine, meaning features like Clean Up, Writing Tools, visual intelligence via the Camera Control button, and the enhanced Siri with deeper app integration are available without cloud roundtrips. The privacy implications of this architecture are really meaningful in an era when competing AI phone features routinely send data to remote servers.

iPhone Air Camera System

The camera is where the iPhone Air gets a lot of both praise and hate. Rather than include an ultrawide lens — which would have required a taller, wider bump— Apple equipped the Air with a single 48MP Fusion Main camera at f/1.6 with sensor-shift optical image stabilization. Software handles the rest: Apple’s computational photography stack produces a 2× optical-quality telephoto at 52mm by cropping to the center 12MP of the sensor.

In practical use, the main camera works fine. Daylight images are punchy, detailed, and color-accurate, with a wide dynamic range that handles challenging scenes like backlit subjects. Night Mode has continued to improve, and the larger pixels enabled by going single-lens deliver noticeably better low-light performance than you’d expect.

The front camera is a meaningful leap: the new 18MP Center Stage camera with its square sensor enables both portrait and landscape selfies in native orientation. For video calls and group selfies, AI automatically expands the field of view and rotates framing to keep everyone included — it’s the kind of feature that sounds gimmicky until you use it, and then you wonder why it took this long.

Where the camera system falls short is macro photography (no ultrawide means no macro), spatial video (requires two lenses), and telephoto reach beyond 2× optical quality. For most people, none of these omissions will sting daily. For photographers who reach for a 5× zoom or shoot architecture, the iPhone 17 Pro’s triple-lens system is a far better tool.

Battery Life & Charging

Battery life is where users should be prepared to manage their expectations. However, we should also note that Apple’s engineering team has performed quite a miracle here. The iPhone Air’s 3,149 mAh cell is the smallest battery in Apple’s 2025 iPhone lineup, smaller than those of the iPhone 17 and iPhone 17 Pro. On paper, this is alarming for a $999 flagship.

In practice, the combination of the LTPO display’s adaptive refresh rate (1–120Hz), the efficiency-tuned A19 Pro, and iOS 26’s aggressive background power management produces results that defy the spec sheet. In fact, the manufacturer claims up to 27 hours of video playback. At the same time, real-world video streaming endurance ranges from 13 to 22 hours, which is still pretty impressive for a battery of this size.

## **iPhone Air vs. The Competition**

The Apple iPhone Air is somewhat of a novelty among other flagships. It’s thinner than Samsung’s own ultra-thin contender (S25 Edge) and more powerful than any Android at the same price point — but it also makes camera and battery compromises that the competition does not. Here’s where each cellphone wins:

| SPEC | IPHONE AIR | IPHONE 17 | GALAXY S25 EDGE |
|—|—|—|—|
| CHIP | A19 Pro | A19 | Snapdragon 8 Elite |
| RAM | 12 GB | 8 GB | 12 GB |
| NEURAL ENGINE | 16-core | 16-core | Hexagon NPU |
| ON-DEVICE AI | Full · Apple Intelligence | Full · Apple Intelligence | Partial · Galaxy AI |
| FRAME MATERIAL | Titanium | Aluminum | Titanium |
| DISPLAY | 6.5″ LTPO 120Hz | 6.3″ LTPO 120Hz | 6.7″ LTPO 120Hz |
| REAR CAMERAS | 1 (48 MP) | 2 (48 MP + 12 MP) | 2 (200 MP + 12 MP) |
| BATTERY | 3,149 mAh | 3,577 mAh | 3,900 mAh |
| PRICE (BASE) | $999 | $799 | $1,099 |

**iPhone Air** **vs. iPhone 17:** The iPhone 17 at $799 is the pragmatist’s choice. It has a larger battery, a second ultrawide camera, stereo speakers, and faster charging — and it costs $200 less. The iPhone Air wins on looks/design, processor class, RAM, display size, and frame material. The split comes down to whether thinness and premium finish justify the price.

iPhone Air vs. Samsung Galaxy S25 Edge: Samsung’s own thin flagship is a fascinating phone. The S25 Edge is slightly thicker than Air, but it packs a 200MP main camera and a larger battery. It runs Android 15 with Galaxy AI, a strong competitor to Apple Intelligence for some workflows, but still relies more heavily on cloud processing. The Galaxy S25 Edge starts at $1,099 — $100 more than the iPhone Air, making Apple’s device the better value in the ultra-thin segment, particularly for anyone already in the Apple ecosystem.

iPhone Air Resale Value Projection

Apple consistently leads the smartphone resale market, and the iPhone Air’s premium positioning — titanium frame, Pro-class chip, Pro-equivalent display — means it should retain salvage value comparable to that of the iPhone Pro lineup. Based on historical iPhone depreciation curves, here is how the Air is projected to retain its value over the first four years of ownership:

Projected Resale Value Retention

IPHONE AIR · BASED ON HISTORICAL IPHONE PRO RESALE DATA

NEW
2025

1 YEAR

2 YEARS

3 YEARS

4 YEARS

* Projections based on historical iPhone Pro resale trends. Actual values vary by condition, storage tier, color, and market timing.

These numbers reflect why timing your sale matters. The steepest drop occurs in the first 12 months — from $999 to roughly $765 — which makes year one the worst time to sell. But holding through years two and three still yields a meaningful cashback, especially for 512GB and 1TB configurations.

💸

// RESALE TIP //

When you’re ready to upgrade, [Gadget Salvation](https://www.gadgetsalvation.com/sell-iphone) is one of the most reliable buyback sites to sell your used iPhone. We offer instant online valuations, free shipping, and fast payment — no auctions, no waiting, no buyers flaking. For Apple gadgets in particular, our quotes have been consistently competitive, making it worth checking our site out before you hand your cell to a carrier for a fraction of its worth.
## **Verdict**

The iPhone Air is one of the more philosophically interesting Apple products in years. It is not the best iPhone you can buy — the iPhone 17 Pro is more capable in almost every aspect. It is not the most affordable iPhone — the standard iPhone 17 costs $200 less and offers most of the same experience. What it is, however, is a statement: proof that premium design and premium performance can coexist in a form factor that feels almost futuristic.

For those who value how a device feels in the hand and pocket, and how it looks, this smartphone is definitely a compelling choice. For heavy camera users, battery-anxious travelers, or anyone working within a tighter budget, the iPhone 17 or iPhone 17 Pro, at an extra $200, is a more sensible choice.

Which One is More Powerful?

The 2026 MacBook Pro 16 with Apple’s M5 Pro chip and the newly rebranded Dell XPS 16 running Intel’s Panther Lake platform represent opposite…

The 2026 MacBook Pro 16 with Apple’s M5 Pro chip and the newly rebranded Dell XPS 16 running Intel’s Panther Lake platform represent opposite philosophies for what a pro laptop should be. One bets everything on silicon integration and ecosystem. The other bets on Windows flexibility, a knockout OLED display, and dedicated NVIDIA graphics. Here’s how they actually compare.

Dell XPS 16 vs MacBook Pro 16: The Short Version

If you live in the Apple ecosystem and need blistering, sustained performance with near-day-and-a-half battery life, the MacBook Pro 16 M5 Pro is the most capable 16-inch laptop money can buy. It starts at $2,699, and the performance-per-watt lead over any Intel-based competitor remains commanding in 2026.

The latest 2026 Dell XPS 16— rebranded from last year’s “Dell 16 Premium” — is the better choice if you need Windows, dedicated GPU horsepower for gaming or CUDA workflows, a next-generation tandem OLED display, or the flexibility of upgrading storage yourself. It starts at $1,750, undercutting Apple by a meaningful margin.

Benchmarks & Real-World Speed

The M5 Pro marks a significant architectural leap. Apple claims roughly 20% more CPU throughput and 30–50% more GPU performance than the M4 Pro, and independent benchmarks confirm the story. In Geekbench 6 multi-core, the M5 Pro’s 18-core configuration scores around 25,000 — comfortably ahead of the Core Ultra X7 358H’s approximately 9,700 in the same test. That gap is wide by any measure.

For CPU-bound workloads — video encoding, compiling, running local AI models — the MacBook Pro’s lead is essentially unassailable on a per-watt basis. The M5 Pro sustains its peak speeds without throttling, a hallmark of Apple silicon’s thermal discipline. Even during extended benchmarking sessions, reviewers report the fans barely register.

The Dell tells a different story once you add a discrete GPU. The optional NVIDIA RTX 5070 configuration unlocks CUDA acceleration, ray tracing, and gaming performance that Apple simply can’t match in a thin-and-light chassis. For 3D rendering in Blender, DLSS-assisted gaming at native 4K, or CUDA-dependent scientific workloads, the XPS 16 wins convincingly.

SSD Speed: The M5 Pro MacBook Pro comes with faster PCIe 5.0 SSD storage, delivering roughly 2× the sequential read speeds of the Dell’s PCIe Gen 4 drive. For workflows involving large media files, this translates to very noticeable time savings.

Screen Quality: Mini-LED vs Tandem OLED

Display Metric
MacBook Pro 16 (XDR)
Dell XPS 16 (Tandem OLED)

Technology
Mini-LED (Liquid Retina XDR)
Tandem OLED

Native Resolution
3456 x 2234 (254 ppi)
3200 x 2000

Peak Brightness (HDR)
1600 nits
~750-800 nits

Sustained Brightness
1000 nits
500 nits

Refresh Rate
120Hz ProMotion
20Hz – 120Hz Adaptive

Color Accuracy
Delta-E
Delta-E ~0.21

Touch Capability
No
Yes (10-point multi-touch)

This is perhaps the most nuanced comparison in the whole article, because both displays are excellent — just in different ways. The MacBook Pro’s 16.2-inch Liquid Retina XDR Mini-LED panel delivers 1,000 nits sustained SDR brightness and an eye-watering 1,600 nits in HDR. For outdoor use, prolonged sessions in bright offices, or HDR video work, it’s peerless. ProMotion (10–120Hz adaptive) ensures buttery smooth scrolling and responsiveness throughout.

The Dell XPS 16 counters with a 16.3-inch tandem OLED — the headline feature of the 2026 redesign. Tandem OLED stacks two emissive layers, dramatically boosting peak brightness while preserving true color depth and ultra-vivid contrast. Furthermore, it significantly increases the display’s lifespan, mitigating the burn-in risks expected from OLED. The panel supports full DCI-P3 and Dolby Vision, making it ideal for color-critical creative work and HDR video consumption.

Endurance: A Decisive Win for MacBook Pro 16 M5

Battery life is where the MacBook Pro’s advantage becomes almost comically large. Apple officially claims up to 24 hours of use; however, owners report approximately 20 hours. This is extraordinary for a laptop with pro-level processing power.

The Dell XPS 16, by contrast, delivers what you’d expect from an Intel-based laptop with a discrete GPU: approximately 9 to 12 hours in light workloads, and considerably less under sustained load. Not terrible for a Windows laptop — it’s actually competitive — but the MacBook’s lead is difficult to overstate for anyone who works on the go.

Performance on battery: Apple silicon delivers identical performance whether plugged in or running on battery. Intel’s x86 chips often throttle when unplugged. For on-the-go professionals, the MacBook’s behavioral consistency is a meaningful real-world advantage.

Chassis, Keyboard & Portability

Apple’s MacBook Pro 16 design didn’t change. Its all-recycled-aluminium (!) body, massive ForceTouch trackpad, and backlit keyboard remain class-leading. The laptop weighs 4.7 lbs and includes full-size ports that require no dongles: MagSafe 3, three Thunderbolt 5, HDMI, and a full-size SD card slot.

Dell’s 2026 XPS 16 redesign brings welcome modifications. The chassis now opens from the keyboard side for storage upgrades — a first for the XPS line and a nod to repairability. And it is slightly lighter than Mac, at 4.3 lbs. The zero-lattice keyboard and invisible-until-needed touchpad are visually striking. Dell has added subtle edge ridges to the touchpad so users can locate it by feel, addressing a common criticism of earlier XPS designs.

Ecosystem, AI Features & Long-Term Support

The MacBook Pro ships with macOS Tahoe and Apple Intelligence — on-device AI features powered by the M5’s 16-core Neural Engine. Apple’s advantage here is privacy: AI tasks run locally rather than in the cloud. For creative professionals already using Final Cut Pro, Logic, or the Adobe suite, macOS’s tight hardware/software co-design translates to real speed gains.

The Dell XPS 16 is a Copilot+ certified PC, meaning it meets Microsoft’s NPU performance requirements for the latest AI-powered Windows features. Intel’s Panther Lake platform includes a built-in NPU to accelerate on-device tasks such as live captions, image generation, and Recall. The XPS 16 also benefits from Windows’ broader app compatibility — particularly for enterprise software, niche creative tools, and gaming.

Long-term software support is another Apple strength: macOS Tahoe will run on MacBooks back to 2018, and Apple’s track record on software updates significantly outlasts the standard Windows OEM support span. For buyers planning on a 4- to 5-year ownership timeframe, this matters.

M5 MacBook Pro 16 vs Dell XPS 16: Long-Term Value

Purchase price is only half the ownership cost story. The other half is what you can recover when it’s time to sell. This is an area where Apple’s MacBooks have consistently dominated the premium laptop resale market — and the 2026 generation is no different.

NEW
2026

1 YEAR
2027

2 YEARS
2028

3 YEARS
2029

4 YEARS
2030

MACBOOK PRO 16 M5 PRO · 2-YEAR COST

Purchase price $2,699

Resale @ 2 yrs (68%) − $1,079

Effective 2-yr cost $1620

$432 / year of ownership

DELL XPS 16 · 2-YEAR COST

Purchase price $1,750

Resale @ 2 yrs (48%) − $700

Effective 2-yr cost $1050

$455 / year of ownership

💰

**Ready to sell your MacBook Pro or Dell XPS?** Get an instant online quote from [Gadget Salvation](https://www.gadgetsalvation.com) — we buy used laptops in almost any condition. Get the highest cashback today before next-gen announcements drive down the resale value.

\* Projected resale values are estimates based on historical MacBook and Dell XPS secondary market data compiled from Gadget Salvation, Swappa, Back Market, and eBay sold listings. Actual values vary by condition, storage tier, market timing, and configuration. Dollar values calculated against base-tier purchase prices ($2,699 MBP / $1,750 XPS 16).
In two to three years’ time, or whenever you are ready to upgrade, come back to GadgetSalvation.com to [sell your MacBook Pro](https://www.gadgetsalvation.com/sell-macbook/macbook-pro-16-inch “Sell MacBook Pro 16”) or [Dell XPS](https://www.gadgetsalvation.com/sell-laptop/dell/xps “Sell Dell XPS Laptop | Gadget Salvation”). We provide instant online offers based on current secondary market data, free shipping labels, and pay within a day of delivery and inspection.

Bottom Line

These two laptops aren’t really competing for the same buyer. The MacBook Pro 16 M5 Pro is the most capable professional laptop in the world for macOS users — full stop. Its performance lead, long-lasting battery, and resale value make it a rational long-term investment. The Dell XPS 16 (2026) is the best 16-inch Windows laptop to date, offering a transcendent OLED display, dedicated GPU options, and a less-prohibitive price point. And while the math on total cost of ownership is remarkably close, the MacBook Pro’s day-to-day user experience remains a step ahead.

2025 Razer Blade 14 Laptop: Premium Portable Gaming Power

The 2025 Razer Blade 14 is Razer’s boldest statement yet in the compact gaming laptop space. Combining AMD’s Ryzen AI 9 365 with NVIDIA’s…

The 2025 Razer Blade 14 is Razer’s boldest statement yet in the compact gaming laptop space. Combining AMD’s Ryzen AI 9 365 with NVIDIA’s RTX 50-series Blackwell GPU—all inside a narrow-profile chassis—it targets a very specific buyer: the mobile gamer who refuses to compromise on performance or aesthetics. Starting at $2,299 and climbing to $2,999 for the top configuration, this is unambiguously a premium laptop. But does it deliver premium results? Keep reading to find out.

Design & Build Quality

Razer has always excelled at making laptops that look and feel expensive, and the 2025 Blade 14 is no exception. The CNC-machined aluminum chassis comes in a new Mercury White colorway alongside the classic Onyx Black, both featuring a subtle, not-at-all-gaming aesthetic. The hinge is firm yet smooth, and the lid opens easily with one hand while keeping the display panel steady.

At 12.23 x 8.83 x 0.62 inches and just 3.59 lbs, Razer claims this is the thinnest Blade 14 ever produced — a statement that holds up in practice. The reduced bezels around the 14-inch OLED panel make the footprint feel even smaller than the specs suggest. Connectivity is solid: two USB4 (USB-C) ports, two USB-A 3.2 Gen 2 ports, HDMI 2.1, a microSD slot, a combo audio jack, and a Kensington lock slot cover virtually every use case without the need for a hub.

2025 Razer Blade 14 OLED Display

The 2025 Blade 14’s screen is, without question, one of its strongest selling points. The 14-inch OLED panel running at 2880×1800 resolution with a 120Hz refresh rate delivers colors and contrast that make even high-quality IPS displays look flat and washed out by comparison. Black levels are absolute, colors are vivid and accurate, and the high pixel density (approximately 240 PPI) makes text, UI elements, and game textures appear razor-sharp.

The upgrade from prior LCD-based Blade 14 models is immediately noticeable and arguably one of the most compelling reasons for existing Razer laptop owners to upgrade.

Performance: CPU & GPU

Under the hood, the 2025 Blade 14 is powered by the AMD Ryzen AI 9 365 — a 10-core, 20-thread chip built on AMD’s Zen 5 architecture, with a base clock of 2 GHz and a boost up to 5 GHz. The chip also includes AMD’s integrated NPU capable of up to 50 TOPS, positioning the Blade 14 as an AI-ready machine for Copilot+ tasks and local AI workloads.

GPU options are the NVIDIA GeForce RTX 5060 (entry-level) or the RTX 5070 (mid- and top-level configs). Both are built on NVIDIA’s new Blackwell architecture, which introduces Multi-Frame Generation (MFG) — a key feature that dramatically boosts frame rates in supported titles by generating up to 4x frames. In testing, the RTX 5070 model hit approximately 91 fps in Cyberpunk 2077 at native 1800p with Ray Tracing Ultra settings and 4x MFG enabled — a result that would have been unthinkable on this class of hardware a generation ago.

RAM configurations span 16 GB, 32 GB, and 64 GB of LPDDR5X, while storage is either a 1 TB or 2 TB PCIe Gen4 NVMe SSD, with sequential read speeds approaching 7 GB/s. The 32 GB / 1 TB mid-tier configuration at $2,699 represents the sweet spot for most buyers.

Benchmark Highlights (RTX 5070 / 32 GB config):

  • Cyberpunk 2077 (RT Ultra, 1800p, DLSS Quality + 4x MFG): ~91 fps
  • Final Fantasy XIV: Dawntrail (1800p, max settings): ~68 fps average
  • PCIe SSD speeds: up to ~7 GB/s sequential read
  • 3DMark Steel Nomad / Speedway: competitive with other RTX 5070 laptop implementations

Thermal Management & Fan Noise

Image source: razer.com

One of the headline improvements in the 2025 model is a redesigned fan layout that moves more air through the chassis with less noise. In practice, gaming sessions remain noticeably quieter than you might expect for a 3.6 lb machine running an RTX 5070. Temperatures remain well managed under sustained load, making the Blade 14 a rare example of a thin-and-light gaming laptop that doesn’t throttle aggressively due to heat.

Battery Life & Unplugged Performance

Battery life is where the Blade 14 tells a more complicated story. The 72 Wh Li-ion pack is physically limited by the thin chassis, and real-world performance reflects that. For productivity and light workloads, expect 5–7 hours of mixed use — workable for a work shift if you’re disciplined about brightness and browser tabs. Under gaming load, the battery runtime drops to approximately 2 hours (or less).

More critically, Razer’s Synapse software locks performance profiles when the laptop is unplugged, meaning you cannot manually select a higher-performance mode on battery. Users are stuck with a throttled, mid-range performance tier the moment they disconnect from power — a deliberate design decision that preserves battery and thermals, but one that undercuts the “mobile powerhouse” narrative. For users who primarily game at a desk and occasionally travel between locations, this is a non-issue. For true on-the-go gaming, it is a genuine limitation.

Keyboard & Trackpad

Razer’s per-key RGB keyboard remains a highlight: the key travel, actuation feel, and overall responsiveness are class-leading for a thin gaming laptop. Typing long documents or coding sessions is genuinely comfortable.

The trackpad, however, has drawn mixed reactions. Its size and surface quality are fine, but some reviewers have noted inconsistent tracking and a stiffer-than-expected click. For a $2,700 machine, the trackpad should be exceptional rather than merely adequate. Pairing a mouse for serious productivity or gaming use is advised.

Audio

The speaker configuration produces sound that’s surprisingly full for a chassis this thin. Audio is clear at medium volumes, though the low end naturally lacks the depth of larger laptops. For casual music and video playback, it’s perfectly acceptable. Competitive gamers will want headphones regardless.

Software & AI Features

The Blade 14 ships with Windows 11 and Razer’s Synapse software suite for lighting, fan control, and performance profiles. Synapse remains both feature-rich and occasionally finicky — a firmware update shortly after launch is recommended to address early stability issues some users encountered.

The AMD Ryzen AI 9 365’s NPU enables Copilot+ features on Windows 11, including Live Captions, AI-powered image editing, and emerging on-device AI integrations. As the software ecosystem matures, these features will become increasingly relevant.

How the 2025 Razer Blade 14 Compares to Competition

The 2025 Razer Blade 14’s most direct competitor is the Asus ROG Zephyrus G14 GU405, which offers a similar form factor at a slightly lower price, but with an RTX 5080 in its top config. For raw GPU performance per dollar, the G14 has an edge. The Blade 14 counters with superior build quality, a quieter fan profile, better keyboard feel, and Razer’s refined chassis design.

For buyers who prioritize a larger screen, the Razer Blade 18 offers a major step up in both display size and GPU options. For those on a tighter budget, the Asus TUF Gaming A14 can be found for under $2,000.

Resale Value & Selling Your Razer Laptop

Razer laptops are known for holding their value better than many gaming laptop brands, thanks to premium build quality, brand recognition, and a loyal enthusiast community. When it’s time to upgrade — whether moving from an older 2024 14-inch gaming laptop model or simply changing direction — selling your used Razer can recover a meaningful portion of your original investment.

Gadget Salvation is one of the best platforms for selling used Razer laptops quickly and at a fair buyback value. Our online resale process is straightforward: get an instant quote, ship your computer for free, and receive payment once it is inspected (typically within 24 business hours of delivery). For sellers who want to avoid the hassle of marketplace listings, buyer negotiations, and the risks of fraud associated with eBay or Craigslist, Gadget Salvation offers a reliable alternative. So, if you’re sitting on a 2021, 2022, or 2023 Razer Blade 14, now is an ideal time to get an offer before the resale market adjusts further to the 2025-2026 releases.

Verdict

The 2025 Razer Blade 14 is one of the finest compact gaming laptops ever built. Its OLED display is stunning, its RTX 5070/Ryzen AI 9 365 combination is powerful, and its build quality is in a class of its own for the size. NVIDIA’s Multi-Frame Generation technology helps the RTX 5070 punch significantly above its hardware weight in supported titles.

The caveats are real but narrow: the price is steep, the trackpad needs improvement, and the battery performance will frustrate users who genuinely need full gaming power away from an outlet. But for the majority of buyers — professionals and gamers who want premium portability without sacrificing desktop-like performance — the 2025 Blade 14 is an outstanding computer.

## **FAQ**
—
**How does the 2025 Blade 14 compare to the Asus ROG Zephyrus G14?**The two are close competitors. The G14 offers a slightly better GPU (RTX 5070 Ti in top config) at a lower price in the US, while the Blade 14 edges ahead in build quality, keyboard feel, and thermal noise.
**Can I game on battery with the 2025 Razer Blade 14?**Yes, but with reduced performance. Razer’s Synapse software locks the performance profile when unplugged, throttling the GPU to a mid-range tier. Full RTX 5070 performance is only available when plugged into a power outlet.
**Is the 2025 Razer Blade 14 good for video editing and creative work?**Absolutely. The OLED display’s color accuracy, the Ryzen AI 9 365’s multi-core performance, and up to 64 GB of RAM make it a capable creative workstation, not just a gaming laptop.
**Where can I sell my old Razer laptop when upgrading?**While [Razer does not have a trade-in program](https://cashforusedlaptops.com/is-there-a-razer-trade-in-and-what-are-the-alternatives/ “Razer Trade In”), Gadget Salvation is a great alternative platform for selling used Razer laptops (and other computer brands). We provide instant quotes, free shipping, and fast payment — making it one of the simplest ways to recoup salvage value on your older gadget.

When Is the Best Time to Sell Your iPhone?

Timing is everything when it comes to getting the most money for your old iPhone. Sell too late, and you could lose a meaningful…

Timing is everything when it comes to getting the most money for your old iPhone. Sell too late, and you could lose a meaningful sum in buyback value almost overnight. Understanding the best time to sell your iPhone comes down to one core principle: get ahead of Apple’s release cycle, not behind it.

However, as of mid-2026, the iPhone resale market is uniquely volatile, influenced by the recent introduction of the iPhone 17e, faster depreciation of experimental models like the iPhone Air, and the impending disruption of a bifurcated iPhone 18 launch cycle that threatens to upend nearly two decades of established market behavior.

Why Timing Matters So Much?

While iPhones don’t devalue as quickly as competitor flagship phones, understanding their depreciation trends is crucial. Basically, as soon as a new model is announced — let alone released — demand for older models drops sharply, and resale prices follow. According to data from resale platforms, an iPhone can lose between 15% and 36% of its resale value in the weeks surrounding a new launch. That means a well-timed sale can be worth $25–$150 more (depending on your iPhone model and specs) than waiting even just one month.

Timeline of Milestone Releases and Market Impact

The introduction of the iPhone 15 and 16 series marked a shift toward a more aggressive depreciation cycle. Resale data indicates that the iPhone 15 depreciated by an average of 55.57% in its first year, a significant increase from the 40% seen with the iPhone 13 series. This acceleration is partly due to saturation in the high-end smartphone market and the increasing longevity of modern hardware, which, paradoxically, makes older models more durable and less expensive.

The following table contextualizes the current 2026 market within the broader history of the product’s release cadence, illustrating how release frequency has increased over time.

Model Generation
Announcement Date
Market Release Date
Key Technological Shift

Original iPhone
Jan 9, 2007
June 29, 2007
Multi-touch Interface

iPhone 4
June 7, 2010
June 24, 2010
Retina Display / FaceTime

iPhone 6 / 6 Plus
Sept 9, 2014
Sept 19, 2014
Large Screen Format

iPhone X
Sept 12, 2017
Nov 3, 2017
Face ID / OLED Transition

iPhone 12
Oct 13, 2020
Oct 23, 2020
5G Connectivity / MagSafe

iPhone 15
Sept 12, 2023
Sept 22, 2023
USB-C Transition

iPhone 17
Sept 9, 2025
Sept 19, 2025
2nm Process Potential

iPhone 17e
Feb 19, 2025
March 11, 2026
Mid-Cycle Budget Entry

The shift from summer to fall releases, solidified by the iPhone 4S in 2011, established the September “value reset” that has defined the market for fifteen years. In 2026, however, the March launch of the iPhone 17e has introduced a new mid-year volatility point, as consumers now have a current-generation alternative available halfway through the flagship cycle.

Tiered Depreciation: iPhone Pro Models vs. Standard and Experimental Units

One of the most persistent trends in the secondary market is the superior value retention of “Pro” and “Pro Max” models compared to standard, “Plus,” or “Air” models. Pro models are sought after by second-hand buyers for their superior displays and camera systems, which typically remain competitive for three to four years after release.

Model Category
1-Year Retention Rate
2nd-Year Retention Rate
2026 Market Volatility

iPhone Pro Max
65-72%
45-50%
Low

iPhone Standard
55-60%
35-40%
Moderate

iPhone SE / e-Series
45-50%
25-30%
High

iPhone Air (Ultra-Thin)
50-55% (10 Weeks)
TBD
Extreme

The 2026 market has been particularly unkind to the iPhone Air, an ultra-thin model introduced with the 17-series. Data from the resale markets just ten weeks after its launch showed that the iPhone Air depreciated materially faster than the rest of the 17-series lineup, losing an average of 44.3% of its value in just over two months. This suggests that “design-first” models may face skepticism in the secondary market due to perceived compromises in thermal management and structural durability.

The Best Windows to Sell Your iPhone

Aside from the most recent 17e March release, Apple normally announces its new iPhone lineup in September each year. That makes the summer months — particularly June through early August — the sweet spot for sellers. Demand is still steady, your model is still considered “current,” and buyers haven’t yet been tempted by what’s coming next.

As the market approaches the fall of 2026, the traditional September release cycle is expected to face its most significant disruption in the product’s history. Rumors indicate that Apple will adopt a “split launch” strategy for the iPhone 18 lineup, separating the premium models from the mass-market offerings.

Anticipated iPhone Release Phases for 2026 and 2027.

Expected Date
Models
Impact on Resale Value

September 2026
iPhone 18 Pro, 18 Pro Max, iPhone Fold
High-end 17 Pro value collapses

December 2026
Extends 17 standard model values
Creates ultra-premium price floor

Spring 2027
iPhone 18, iPhone 18e, iPhone Air 2
Extends 17 standard model’s buyback value

This split launch means the standard iPhone 17 and iPhone 17e may not have direct successors this September. It could create a unique “value plateau” where standard models retain their value longer because there is no $799 or $899 new alternative available to drive prices down. Conversely, the introduction of the first foldable iPhone (rumored to cost upwards of $2,000) will shift the focus of the high-end market, potentially making current Pro Max models appear more “mid-tier”.

iPhone Buyback Ecosystem

In 2026, the iPhone resale route remains as critical as the timing. When selecting a platform, the seller should weigh the trade-off between cashback value and transaction convenience:

  1. Online Buyback Aggregators (e.g., SellCell): These offer an effective way to maximize cash returns. By comparing 40+ vetted buyers, these sites ensure the highest market rate and often offer “Best Price Guarantees”.
  2. Dedicated Buyback Sites (e.g., Gazelle, Gadget Salvation, Gizmogo): These platforms are ideal for fast payouts, with many issuing payments via PayPal or Venmo within 24 hours of receiving the phone. They often accept older or damaged models that Apple or carriers would reject or value at zero.
  3. Marketplace-Buyback Hybrids (e.g., Back Market, Swappa): Back Market uses a matching system that connects the seller with over 250 verified refurbishers. This can lead to more competitive offers for high-end models, as refurbishers compete for inventory.
  4. Apple Trade-In: This is the most seamless option, but rarely the most profitable. It is primarily useful for those who want instant store credit toward a new purchase. For smartphones more than two years old, Apple’s offers typically sit 30% below top online buyback sites.
  5. Carrier Trade-In Programs: Carriers like Verizon and AT&T often advertise very high trade-in values (up to $1,000). However, these are almost always paid out as monthly bill credits over 36 months. If the user cancels their service or upgrades early, they lose the remaining credits. This makes carriers a poor choice for those seeking liquid cash.

Selling a Used iPhone: A Step-by-Step Strategy

Regardless of the platform you choose, we highly recommend following this value maximization strategy:

Step 1: Honest Condition Assessment and Preparation

Before shopping for offers, you must remove all personal data, sign out of iCloud (Find My), and remove the SIM card. Any physical damage, even minor scratches, should be noted. Buyback and trade-in platforms will lower their offer if the iPhone is in a condition worse than described. If the original box and accessories are available, they should be included, as this can marginally improve the offer on peer-to-peer marketplaces.

Step 2: Multi-Platform Comparison

Never accept the first offer received; shop around instead. At a minimum, a comparison should be made between:

  • Gadget Salvation (for fast cash, ease of use, 30-day offer guarantee).
  • Swappa (if you are willing to manage the sale for a potential 10% higher payout).
  • Apple Trade-In (only as a baseline for store credit).

Step 3: Timing the Quote

If selling during the spring, the quote should be initiated in early April. If selling in the fall, the quote should be initiated in mid-to-late August. Ideally, look for a 30-day price lock for maximum flexibility.

Step 4: Shipping and Payments

If selling via a buyback platform, a prepaid free shipping label is typically provided by the company. However, if selling on a marketplace like eBay, the shipping costs are the seller’s responsibility. And while an iPhone can either sell within an hour of listing or may take weeks, you’ll receive the funds (minus the fees) within 24 hours to 3 days after the item is confirmed delivered, so be sure the package is trackable.

As for buyback platforms, most issue payments within 24 to 72 hours of inspection — check the site’s FAQ for the exact timeframe.

Conclusion: Should I Sell My iPhone Before the New One Comes Out?

It might seem logical to hold on to your phone until the newest model drops, then sell it when everyone wants an upgrade. But this is the most common mistake sellers make. By the time the next iPhone is in people’s hands, your older one has already lost significant value.

Ultimately, the best time to sell an iPhone in 2026 is either late March-early April (but looks like you already missed that window?) or mid-late August. With the online buyback upfront instant offers feature and 30-day price locks, sellers can navigate seasonal shifts with minimal risk and get the most cashback for their older technology.

## **FAQ**
—
**What is the best time of year to sell an iPhone?**The best time to sell your iPhone is between April and mid-August, before Apple announces its next iPhone in September. The buyer’s demand for current/last year’s models remains strong, and resale prices have yet to decline, driven by new iPhone shipments.
**Does iPhone storage size affect resale value?**Absolutely. Models with larger storage—256GB and above—hold their value better than the base 128GB option (which typically oversaturates the secondhand market). If you’re buying a new iPhone with resale in mind, opting for more storage is often a worthwhile investment.
**Should I sell my iPhone to Apple or use a third-party platform?**Apple’s trade-in is a convenient way to upgrade, but it does not always offer the best value. Third-party options like Gadget Salvation, Swappa, or eBay typically yield 15–40% more money, especially if you sell at the right time.
**What should I do before selling my iPhone?**Back it up, remove passcodes/Face ID, sign out of iCloud, and do a factory reset. Clean the iPhone, take well-lit close-up photos if selling on a marketplace, and be sure to include the cable or packaging — all of which can increase buyer confidence and your selling price.

The Ultimate ASUS TUF Gaming F16 FX608 Laptop Review

PROS AND CONS: The FX608L ASUS TUF Gaming F16 is the most significant refresh the TUF lineup has seen in years — and it arrives at…

PROS AND CONS:

The FX608L ASUS TUF Gaming F16 is the most significant refresh the TUF lineup has seen in years — and it arrives at exactly the right moment. Announced at CES in March alongside the A16 and A18, the F16 sheds the “budget compromise” label once and for all. What you get instead is an Intel Arrow Lake powerhouse wrapped in a battle-tested chassis, equipped with an OLED screen option that was unthinkable in this segment just 24 months ago.

With this model, ASUS pulled off a genuine trifecta: a brand-new Intel Core Ultra 9 290HX Plus processor, up to an NVIDIA GeForce RTX 5070 Laptop GPU, and — the headline grabber — a choice between a breathtaking 2.5K 165Hz OLED panel or an ultra-smooth 2.5K 300Hz IPS for the competitive crowd. The TUF F16 isn’t trying to be an ROG Zephyrus. It’s something arguably more useful: a machine that does everything well, breaks nothing on price, and will still be relevant in three years.

“For the first time, the TUF A16 and F16 can be configured with either a 2.5K OLED panel with a 165Hz refresh rate, or a high-refresh 2.5K 300Hz IPS option for competitive gamers — a major shift from the IPS-only past.”

ASUS TUF F16 Design & Build Quality

ASUS describes the F16’s design philosophy as “blending power with portability,” and now that statement finally feels wholly earned. The chassis clocks in at just 17.9mm at its thinnest point — genuinely slim for a laptop packing this much hardware — and weighs approximately 4.85lbs. That means the F16 will actually fit in the laptop sleeve of most everyday backpacks.

The F16 has an understated look: no aggressive, gamer-angry angularity, no RGB strips bleeding through the chassis. ASUS knows who the TUF customer is — someone who needs a capable computer for gaming at home but doesn’t want to look conspicuous pulling it out to work at a coffee shop or in a campus lecture hall.

Durability credentials remain a cornerstone of the TUF identity. Every unit passes rigorous MIL-STD-810H testing, which covers drops, vibration, humidity, and extreme temperatures. The full-width rear exhaust vent is a functional detail that frees up both side panels entirely for I/O — a clean layout that shows careful engineering rather than cost-cutting.

The 180-degree hinge design lets the lid lie completely flat, which is surprisingly useful for presentations, sketching with a stylus on an external display, or simply sharing your screen with someone across the table.

Display: A Stunning OLED Upgrade

This is the headline for the TUF Gaming F16 line. For the first time, ASUS offers a 2.5K OLED panel at 165Hz in the TUF series — and the results are predictably stunning. Deep, inky blacks, near-infinite contrast, and color accuracy that rivals purpose-built creator screens. If you split your time between gaming and content creation (or if you simply can’t stand the grey “blacks” on most IPS screens), this is the configuration to choose.

The panel uses a 16:10 native resolution (2560×1600)— a meaningful aspect-ratio upgrade over the 16:9 screens that dominated mid-range gaming laptops for years. The extra vertical space is a game-changer. And the instantaneous 0.2ms response time eliminates motion blur completely, keeping fast-paced action entirely sharp. All configurations natively support G-Sync to eradicate screen tearing.

Performance: Arrow Lake + Blackwell

CPU: Intel Core Ultra 9 290HX Plus

The latest Intel Core Ultra 9 290HX Plus — part of Intel’s Arrow Lake refresh lineup — powers new F16 FX608L models. ASUS highlights improvements in multi-threaded throughput and per-core efficiency compared to prior generations. In practice, the Ultra 9 290HX Plus delivers a significant boost to both sustained gaming and creative workloads like video editing and 3D rendering.

In content creation benchmarks, the F16’s CPU+GPU pairing achieves a DaVinci Resolve PugetBench score north of 8,200, which means timeline scrubbing and real-time 4K playback are handled without breaking a sweat. For developers, data scientists, or streamers who also game, the chip offers built-in AI acceleration in select content creation apps — a practical advantage that compounds over time as software optimizations roll out.

GPU: NVIDIA GeForce RTX 5070 Laptop

The GeForce RTX 5070 Laptop GPU is the star of the show, and ASUS hasn’t kneecapped it with a stingy TGP allocation. In tested configurations, the GPU runs at a full 115W — a power envelope that allows it to punch well above its technical tier, competing head-to-head with lower-TGP RTX 5060 configurations found in competing laptops.

Game / Benchmark
Settings
Resolution
Avg FPS

Cyberpunk 2077
Ultra + DLSS 4 MFG
2.5K
120+ fps

Black Myth: Wukong
Ultra + DLSS 4 MFG
2.5K
120+ fps

Indiana Jones & the Great Circle
Ultra
1200p
~90 fps

Shadow of the Tomb Raider
Highest
1080p
95 fps

Far Cry 6
Ultra
1080p
90 fps

Valorant
Max
2.5K
165Hz+ cap

DLSS 4 with Multi Frame Generation is the RTX 50-series’ most transformative feature for gaming laptops, and the TUF F16 takes full advantage. In the most demanding AAA titles — Cyberpunk 2077, Black Myth: Wukong — DLSS 4 MFG pushes frame rates past 120 fps at the panel’s native 2.5K resolution. That’s a level of performance that felt exclusive to $2,500+ laptops just one generation ago.

Thermals & Cooling

ASUS has long earned its thermal reputation in the TUF line, and the latest F16 release maintains that standard. The cooling system pairs second-generation Arc Flow Fans with five heat pipes and a full-width rear heatsink. In extended stress testing, the RTX 5070 maintains a stable average core temperature of approximately 72°C — considerably cooler than most competitors at the same TGP — allowing the GPU to sustain higher boost clocks for longer without throttling.

CPU temperatures stay manageable even under prolonged combined CPU+GPU loads, rarely breaching 90°C in Turbo mode. The system does get loud at peak — that’s the trade-off for thermal headroom — but the Armoury Crate software offers three fan modes (Silent, Performance, Turbo) to let you dial in the balance you need for the moment. In Silent mode, the laptop is genuinely quiet for everyday tasks.

ASUS TUF F16 FX608 Battery Life

Let’s be frank: the Intel-based F16’s battery life is its major weakness. Although we also have to keep in mind that gaming laptops are not known for battery longevity in general. Still, in light-use testing — web browsing, video playback, productivity apps — expect up to 5 hours on the 90Wh cell. That’s workable for a coffee shop session, but it’s almost half what the AMD-powered TUF A16 can achieve. If maximum unplugged endurance is your priority, the A16 is the clear recommendation.

The 100W USB-C charging is a genuine convenience. Whether you’re using the bundled adapter or a compatible GaN charger from a bag full of cables, topping up on the go requires no heavy power brick — a meaningful quality-of-life upgrade for commuters and travelers.

Keyboard, Audio & Connectivity

The TUF F16’s keyboard delivers desktop-quality in all the right ways. It is very snappy, thanks to ASUS’s Overstroke technology; the F16 will definitely have users notice improved responsiveness for rapid inputs. Each key is rated for over 20 million presses, and the uniform RGB backlighting — with highlighted WASD accents — looks polished without being overdone.

Image source: Asus.com.

Audio is handled by twin speakers powered by Dolby Atmos, with Hi-Res Audio over headphones and two-way AI noise cancellation for calls and streams. The speakers are competent — wider soundstage than most thin-and-light laptops — though bass is limited, as with virtually all thin gaming notebooks.

The FX608’s port selection is ample:

  • Thunderbolt 4 (USB-C, DisplayPort 1.4)
  • USB 3.2 Gen 2 Type-C with DisplayPort 1.4
  • HDMI 2.1 FRL for 4K/8K output
  • Multiple USB-A 3.2 ports
  • Gigabit Ethernet (RJ-45)
  • Wi-Fi 6E + Bluetooth 5.3
  • 3.5mm audio combo jack

Image source: Asus.com.

Multi-monitor setups are fully supported out of the box — a bonus for streamers and power users who want to expand their workspace without dongles.

Resale Value & Long-Term Investment

The latest TUF Gaming F16 laptop is expected to hold its value exceptionally well in the used-laptop market. The MIL-STD-810H build quality means units should maintain their structural integrity after years of real-world use. And the combination of an upgradeable RAM and storage configuration (two SO-DIMM slots, dual M.2 support) means buyers can upgrade the hardware (and thus improve performance) rather than replace the whole notebook, extending its lifespan for at least another year or two. But when the time comes to move on, Gadget Salvation will make selling your used ASUS TUF Gaming laptop a swift, easy experience. We provide instant, competitive online valuations, free shipping, expedited processing, and multiple payment options for sellers to choose from. At any rate, visit our site for a no-obligation offer when the time to sell your Asus TUF gaming finally comes.

Who Is the ASUS TUF Gaming F16 FX608 For?

The F16 is built for the pragmatic gamer — someone who wants top-tier performance in a well-engineered package without paying ROG-level premiums or carrying ROG-level weight. It’s equally well-suited to:

  • Serious gamers who want 2.5K gaming with ray tracing and DLSS 4 at a realistic price point.
  • Content creators who game — the CPU/GPU combo handles video editing, 3D rendering, and game streaming simultaneously.
  • Students and professionals who want a durable daily driver with a subtle aesthetic that works in any environment.
  • Competitive players who want a 300Hz IPS panel with G-SYNC to chase frame rates in esports titles.

It is not ideal for users who need all-day battery life — for those buyers, the AMD-based TUF A16 is the better choice.

The Verdict

As of today, the ASUS TUF Gaming F16 is the most complete mid-range gaming laptop ASUS has ever built. A first-ever OLED option, the best Intel mobile processor of the year, RTX 5070 muscle with a high-power TGP, and the same battle-hardened chassis the TUF series has been perfecting for years — all in a sub-4.9lbs body with Thunderbolt 4 and 100W USB-C charging. The only meaningful concession of the Intel-based configuration is poor battery life compared to AMD, but for plugged-in gaming and serious everyday performance, no laptop at this price comes close to doing it all.

## **Frequently Asked Questions**
—
**What processor does the ASUS TUF FX608 Gaming F16 use?**The latest TUF Gaming F16 lineup is powered by the new Intel Core Ultra 9 290HX Plus, part of Intel’s Arrow Lake refresh. This chip delivers improved multi-threaded throughput and better per-core efficiency compared to prior TUF generations, and is paired with up to an NVIDIA GeForce RTX 5070 Laptop GPU. The earlier FX608 release features Intel Core i5-13450HX and Core i7-14650HX processors.
**Does the TUF Gaming F16 have an OLED display?** Yes — for the first time in TUF F-series history. The most recent F16 refresh offers a 2.5K 165Hz OLED panel for stunning color and contrast, and a 16:10 aspect ratio with advanced anti-reflection coating.
**Is the ASUS TUF Gaming F16 FX608 good for content creation?**Absolutely. The Intel Core Ultra 9 290HX Plus, paired with the RTX 5070, makes it a capable computer for creators. The model achieves a DaVinci Resolve PugetBench score above 8,200, enabling smooth 4K timeline editing and rendering.
**How long does the 2026 ASUS TUF Gaming F16 battery last?** In light-use scenarios (web browsing, video playback), the Intel-based F16 delivers up to 5 hours of use. During active gaming with the laptop **plugged in**, performance is unrestricted. For users who need longer unplugged endurance, the AMD-powered TUF A16 has longer battery life on the same cell.

How We Use Technology Today vs 10 Years Ago

Think back to 2015-16. Streaming was still considered a novelty, you could find a massive desktop tower in any office, and “the cloud” was…

Think back to 2015-16. Streaming was still considered a novelty, you could find a massive desktop tower in any office, and “the cloud” was something your IT department quietly warned about. Fast-forward a decade, and the technological landscape has shifted almost beyond recognition. The way we work, communicate, store information, and even think about our devices has fundamentally transformed — and those changes carry real implications for the tech you own right now.

Computing: From Desktops to Edge AI

Ten years ago, the average home had one or two primary computers — a desktop or a chunky notebook — running Windows 7 or 8. Processing power was mostly wasted on idle desktops, and upgrading RAM was still a weekend project that enthusiasts looked forward to. By 2026, computing power will have become nearly invisible. Thin-and-light laptops outperform server racks from 2015, ARM chips have redefined what portable means, and on-device AI has turned ordinary machines into genuinely intelligent tools.

Smartphones: From Nice-to-Have to Central Nervous System

In 2015, a flagship smartphone had a 12–16 MP camera, 2 GB of RAM, and fit in most pockets without drama. They were impressive — but they were accessories. Today, your AI-capable phone is your wallet, your boarding pass, your ID, your fitness tracker, your therapist, your office, and your videographer. The mobile ecosystem has swallowed whole categories: dedicated GPS devices, point-and-shoot cameras, MP3 players, and physical boarding passes have all but disappeared for most consumers.

Category
2015
2025

Storage
16–64 GB on-device
512 GB–1 TB + cloud-first

Camera
Single lens, 12 MP
Multi-lens, 200 MP, AI-enhanced

Connectivity
4G LTE
5G mmWave + Wi-Fi 7

Primary use
Calls, social, maps
Work, payments, health, AI assistant

Avg. upgrade cycle
Every 2 years
Every 3–4 years

The Cloud Took Over Everything

A decade ago, backing up your files meant plugging in an external hard drive every few weeks — if you remembered. Google Drive, Dropbox, and iCloud have been around, but mostly felt optional. But fast forward to today, and local storage is almost an afterthought for most users. Documents live in the cloud, software is licensed as a service, and the idea of reinstalling apps from a disc is quaint enough to get a laugh. The shift to cloud-first has also accelerated hardware replacement: when your data travels with you, there’s less friction in switching to another device.

Remote Work Reshaped the Hardware Market

Nothing accelerated technology adoption like the shift to remote and hybrid work over the past five years. Webcams, external monitors, microphones, and ergonomic peripherals flew off the shelves. Business laptops became interchangeable with personal computers. The result was a massive wave of hardware investment — and a corresponding wave of refresh cycles, with millions of formerly enterprise-grade machines entering the secondary market at an unprecedented pace.

The typical enterprise laptop refresh cycle shrank from 4–5 years in 2015 to 2.5–3 years in 2025 — meaning that high‑quality used hardware now enters circulation much faster than it did a decade ago.

A Decade of Progress in Terms of Salvage Value

All of this technological evolution has a financial dimension that often gets overlooked. Electronics that once depreciated to near-zero within a few years now hold meaningful residual value — especially business-class laptops, workstations, and Apple hardware. Consumer awareness of secondary markets has grown substantially, and platforms have emerged to make selling used tech straightforward and transparent. Our buyback site, Gadget Salvation, has been at the origins of this shift, launching the service way back in 2008. Today, we bring over a decade of expertise to the computer buyback and resale market. Our data-driven approach to valuation of pre-owned technology reflects just how dramatically the landscape has changed and continues to change. What we see now is a positive, emerging shift to used hardware retaining better salvage value over time, thanks to the continuous switch to higher-quality hardware across industries.

What This Means for the Devices You Own Today

The accelerating pace of change cuts both ways. On one hand, today’s technology is significantly more capable and durable than anything available in 2015-16. On the other hand, the rapid cadence of AI-capable hardware means that a laptop from 2022 may already feel underpowered for the 2026 workloads. Knowing when to hold, when to upgrade, and how to extract value from aging hardware has never been more important — or more financially rewarding when done right.

## **Frequently Asked Questions**
—
**How has everyday computer use changed most dramatically in the last 10 years?** The biggest shift is the move from **local to cloud-first workflows**. Files, apps, and identities now live online, making the physical backup drive or even a server almost secondary. The rise of AI tools has also changed how people write, code, and create — tasks that took hours in 2015 now take minutes.
**Is a 10-year-old laptop still “workable” today?**While a well-maintained computer can still work for basic tasks like email, browsing, and document editing, modern collaboration tools, AI features, and security requirements increasingly demand the latest hardware. Furthermore, a decade-old laptop is universally considered obsolete today; thus, it has no cashback value (with a few exceptions for certain Apple Macs) if you were planning on selling it.
**Why do devices depreciate faster now than they used to?**Faster innovation cycles — particularly around AI-capable chips and new form factors — mean that each new product generation brings a more meaningful performance leap than before. Remote work also drove mass purchasing, which increased the supply of near-new used devices and compressed resale timelines.
**What is the best way to sell an old computer?**Dedicated online resale platforms offer the most convenient process. **Gadget Salvation** is a well-established option with over a decade of experience in computer resale. We can calculate instant offers on your old computer based on the specific model and condition, handle shipping logistics, and pay promptly, making it far simpler than selling on marketplaces.

How to Sell an LG Laptop Fast & Get the Best Price

You bought an LG Gram, arguably one of the best ultrabooks ever made, but now it’s time to move on. Maybe you’re upgrading, maybe…

You bought an LG Gram, arguably one of the best ultrabooks ever made, but now it’s time to move on. Maybe you’re upgrading, maybe you’ve switched ecosystems, or maybe it’s simply no longer needed. Either way, you’re about to discover something that surprises a lot of American sellers: LG laptops are harder to flip in the US than you might expect.

This guide explains why, what that means for your resale price, and — most importantly — the absolute fastest way to get paid for your LG laptop without the drama of marketplace listings.

The LG Laptop Paradox: A Superstar Abroad, a Niche Brand at Home

If you’ve spent time in South Korea, you probably have seen LG Gram computers everywhere — in cafes, in schools, on subway commuters’ laps. That’s not a coincidence. LG Electronics is one of South Korea’s most trusted national brands, and the Gram line is a real cultural phenomenon there.

\#1 Laptop brand among Koreans in their 20s (2018)

~9% LG Electronics global laptop market share (2025)

24% Lenovo US share — the American default

In Korea, the laptop brand competitiveness index consistently places LG at or near the top, trading the top spot with Samsung depending on the year. The Gram series, famous for its under-3-lb build and military-grade durability certification, resonates deeply with consumers who value premium portability.

Cross the Pacific, and the picture shifts dramatically. The US laptop market is dominated by Lenovo (approx. 24% market share), HP (approx. 20%), Dell (approx. 15%), and Apple (approx. 9%). LG USA doesn’t register in most US-focused market reports. While the brand has a loyal following among ultrabook enthusiasts and online tech reviewers, it simply does not have the same recognition here to drive strong second-hand demand.

Market Reality:

When fewer Americans want an LG laptop, the pool of private buyers willing to pay top dollar on eBay or Facebook Marketplace is smaller — meaning longer wait times and more lowball offers than you’d face selling a ThinkPad or MacBook of comparable specs.

Why This Matters for Your Resale Value

Resale value is driven by two main factors: hardware quality and buyer demand. LG Gram scores exceptionally on quality: these laptops use premium Intel chips, IPS panels, and magnesium-alloy chassis that hold up very well over time. But buyer demand in the US secondary market lags far behind brands like Apple and Lenovo, creating a gap between what your laptop is worth and what you can realistically get in a reasonable timeframe.

> “While it may be easy to sell a popular gizmo, like the latest iPhone model, certain computers can be a tough sell.” //from Gadget Salvation Blog

Speaking from experience, niche-brand laptops tend to sit for months on Facebook Marketplace, [OfferUp](https://offerup.com/explore/k/1 “OfferUp”), and even eBay. You’ll encounter buyers who aren’t familiar with the Gram line, don’t understand its value proposition, and instinctively compare it to whatever Acer Aspire or Lenovo Ideapad all-plastic chassis computer they saw at Best Buy for $200 less.

Typical LG Gram Resale Value Retention

// BASED ON HISTORICAL ULTRABOOK RESALE TRENDS · US SECONDARY MARKET

NEW
2026

1 YEAR

2 YEARS

3 YEARS

4 YEARS

* Estimates based on observed LG Gram resale patterns in the US secondary market. Values vary by model year, RAM/storage config, condition, and timing.

The takeaway? The longer you wait to sell, the steeper the depreciation curve — and the smaller the pool of qualified US buyers for a niche brand, like LG. **Speed matters.**

The Fastest Way to Sell Your LG Laptop: Use a Buyback Service

The single fastest, most reliable way to sell a used LG laptop in the US is to use a dedicated electronics buyback platform, like Gadget Salvation, and we do accept a number of LG Gram models.

We have been purchasing pre-owned electronics since 2008 — before resale platforms were a thing — and have built a name for fast, transparent, no-hassle transactions. Unlike a typical store trade-in program (which pays in store credit, not cash), Gadget Salvation pays actual cash via PayPal, Venmo, Zelle, Cash App, or check.

How it Works:

01

### Get an instant offer

Browse our buyback database by brand and model. It includes well over 4,000 gadgets. If your exact LG model isn’t listed, use the Custom Quote email form, and we’ll let you know if we can make an offer.

02

### Ship for free

Once you check out online, a prepaid shipping label is issued at no cost to you. Pack your laptop well, drop it at any UPS location, and you’re done with your part.

03

### Receive funds within 1 business day

After we receive and inspect your LG Gram, payment is issued within one to two business days via your preferred method. No waiting weeks for a buyer to materialize.

## **Tips to Maximize Your LG Laptop’s Resale Value**

Whether you go with Gadget Salvation or another route, these steps will help you extract maximum value from your used LG Gram.

1. Sell sooner rather than later

Every month you wait, the resale value ticks down. Intel-based Gram models from 2022–2023 remain competitive, but a new generation of AI-integrated ultrabooks has already entered the market. Don’t let a perfectly sellable laptop become a “vintage” one in a matter of months.

2. Be precise about specs

The resale price difference between an LG Gram with an Intel Core i5 11th-generation chip and an Intel Core Ultra 7 155H one is significant. Know your exact model number (e.g., 16Z90P, 14Z90R) and specs before you get an offer.

3. Assess and disclose the condition honestly

Cosmetic wear, battery health, and any functional issues all affect the offer. Be upfront: if Gadget Salvation or another buyer receives the laptop in worse condition than described, they’ll revise the offer or return the device. Honesty keeps the selling process smooth.

4. Factory reset before shipping

Wipe data before your LG laptop leaves your hands. On Windows: Go to Settings → System → Recovery → Reset this PC. This protects you and speeds up inspection at the buyer’s end.

5. Include accessories if you have them

The original charger is expected to be included. Boxes and sleeves won’t dramatically affect the offer, but can add a few extra dollars and speed up a private sale.

Selling an LG Laptop Online vs. Other Options

Buyback Service (Gadget Salvation)

– Payment in 1 business day — no waiting for buyers
– Postage cost included, no selling fees to deduct
– Cash payout via PayPal, Zelle, Venmo, Cash App, or check
– No negotiations, no meetup follow-throughs
– Works for broken laptops, not just mint condition
– No risk: decline the offer and get your gadget back

Private Marketplace (eBay / FB Marketplace)

– LG brand recognition is low: Expect slower turnaround
– eBay fees eat 10–13% of your final sale price
– No-shows, scammers, and endless low-ball offers
– You handle shipping, disputes, and returns
– Price research required; easy to under or overprice
– Average sell time for niche laptops: 3 weeks to several months
## **The Bottom Line**

LG makes exceptional laptops. The Gram series is versatile and offers some of the finest ultrabook engineering available — lightweight, durable, and surprisingly capable. But exceptional hardware doesn’t automatically translate to a fast, high-value resale in the US second-hand market, where LG simply doesn’t have the same brand recognition as Apple, Dell, or HP.

The smart move is to sell fast and sell to a buyer who already understands the value. Gadget Salvation fits that profile — we’ve been buying both niche and mainstream laptops since 2008, and the selling process requires almost no effort on your part.

## Ready to sell your LG laptop?

Get an instant offer from Gadget Salvation — free shipping, speedy payment, zero risk.

Get My Free Quote →

ASUS TUF Gaming A14: The Featherweight Fighter

The latest FA401GM ASUS TUF Gaming A14 model has a lot to offer. From the GeForce RTX 5060 upgrade to the MIL-STD-810H-certified chassis, all…

The latest FA401GM ASUS TUF Gaming A14 model has a lot to offer. From the GeForce RTX 5060 upgrade to the MIL-STD-810H-certified chassis, all while staying under 4 lbs, the new A14 is the most portable TUF ever.

ASUS TUF Gaming A14 Key Specs at a Glance

Two configurations were launched at CES 2026. Our review focuses on the FA401GM — the gaming-first model pairing NVIDIA’s discrete RTX 5060 with AMD’s Ryzen AI 9 465 processor.

CPU

AMD Ryzen AI 9 465

10-core · 20-thread · up to 5.0 GHz · 34MB cache

GPU

RTX 5060 Laptop GPU

8 GB GDDR7 · 115W TGP · DLSS 4 · MUX Switch

NPU / AI

AMD XDNA · 50 TOPS

Copilot+ PC · Windows AI features

Display

14″ · 2560×1600 · IPS

165 Hz · 3ms · G-SYNC · sRGB 100% · 16:10

RAM

32 GB LPDDR5X-7500

Dual-channel · soldered · max 32 GB

Storage

1 TB PCIe 4.0 NVMe

2× M.2 2280 slots · up to 4 TB total

Battery

73 Wh

50% charge in ~30 min · USB-C 100W PD

Weight

1.46 kg (3.22 lbs)

Lightest RTX 5060 gaming laptop in class

Dimensions

312 × 220 × 16.9mm

CNC aluminum lid · diamond-cut underside

USB / Video Out

USB4 · USB-C · 2× USB-A

HDMI 2.1 FRL · DP via USB4 & USB-C

Storage I/O

microSD UHS-II

312 MB/s · 3.5mm combo audio jack

Wireless

Wi-Fi 6E · BT 5.3

Realtek 8852CE · 2.4 / 5 / 6 GHz

Keyboard

Backlit Chiclet

Redesigned for airflow · Copilot key

Cooling

Dual 97-blade fans

135W TDP max · 0dB silent mode · +15% airflow

OS

Windows 11 Home

Copilot+ PC certified · also available no OS

## **Design & Build**

Right out of the box, the first thing that stands out is just how light the new ASUS TUF Gaming A14 is (3.22 lbs). ASUS achieved this through a CNC-machined aluminum lid with geometric diamond-shaped cutouts in the underside that double as air intake vents. It looks intentional rather than cheap.

The chassis earns its MIL-STD-810H certification through a battery of tests covering temperature extremes, vibration, humidity, and drop resistance. It doesn’t feel fragile — there’s almost no flex in the lid or keyboard base. The hinge is firm without being stiff. Overall, A14 sports a precision finish that elevates it above typical plastic-heavy gaming laptops at this price.

***THERMAL DESIGN NOTE***

The redesigned keyboard now actively contributes to airflow, and the 97-blade fans draw in 15% more air than the first-gen A14. In practice, the laptop runs remarkably cool to the touch under sustained workloads — an area where heavier competitors often lose.

Display

The 14-inch 2560×1600 (2.5K) IPS panel is a highlight — literally. Running at a 16:10 aspect ratio at 165 Hz with a 3ms response time, it’s an excellent canvas for both gaming and content work. G-SYNC support (via MUX Switch + Optimus) means tearing is essentially absent once you flip into dGPU-only mode. Colors cover 100% of sRGB, which is accurate and punchy for gaming and everyday media consumption.

One honest critique: At a borderline premium price, the absence of an OLED or DCI-P3 panel feels like a letdown. Rivals like the ROG Zephyrus G14 have trained buyers to expect OLED at this weight class. That said, for gaming specifically — where response time and refresh rate trump panel type — the IPS here more than holds its own.

ASUS TUF Gaming A14 Gaming Performance

The RTX 5060 Laptop GPU at 115W TGP in Manual Mode is a meaningful jump from the constrained 80W–90W implementations common in ultra-thin notebooks. Blackwell architecture with DLSS 4 Multi Frame Generation means the A14 can punch above its GPU tier in supported titles.

In practice: Cyberpunk 2077 at 2.5K with Ultra settings + DLSS Quality lands comfortably in the 70–90 FPS range. At 1080p, competitive titles hit well above 120 FPS. The MUX Switch makes a measurable difference — bypassing the iGPU drops latency and recovers roughly 10–15% GPU performance in demanding scenes.

⚠ FA401EA WARNING:

The alternative FA401EA model (Ryzen AI Max+ 392 + Radeon 8060S) trades the discrete RTX 5060 for a powerful integrated APU. Tom’s Hardware found it adequate for moderate gaming but a weak value at ~$2,200 versus the RTX 5060 model at $1,500 or less. Unless you specifically need unified memory for AI or creative workflows, the FA401GM is the better pick.

Silent Mode: A Sleeper Feature

ASUS’s 0dB Ambient Cooling cuts the fans entirely during light workloads, letting the chassis dissipate heat passively. Essentially, streaming videos and browsing are all done “fanless”. This is not a small thing for a gaming laptop. The fans auto-resume when temperatures rise, making it usable as a quiet daily driver rather than just a gaming rig.

How It Compares: 14-Inch Gaming Laptop Showdown

The 14-inch gaming laptop space has never been more competitive. Here’s how the ASUS TUF Gaming A14 stacks up against its most direct rivals in 2026:

|
| ASUS TUF A14 FA401GM | ROG Zephyrus G14 | Razer Blade 14 | Acer Predator Triton 14 AI |
|—|—|—|—|—|
| CPU | Ryzen AI 9 46510-core · up to 5.0 GHz | Ryzen AI 9 46510-core | Ryzen AI 9 365or Intel Core Ultra | Core Ultra 9 288V“Lunar Lake” |
| GPU | RTX 5060 · 115W TGPHighest TGP in class | RTX 5060~80–100W TGP | RTX 5070~100W TGP | RTX 5070~110W TGP |
| Display | 2.5K IPS · 165 HzG-SYNC · sRGB 100% · MUX | 2.5K OLED · 165 HzBest panel in class | 2.5K OLED · 165 HzG-SYNC · MUX | 2.5K IPS · 165 HzG-SYNC |
| Weight | 1.46 kgLightest in class | 1.5 kg | 1.75 kg | 1.9 kg |
| RAM | 32 GB LPDDR5XSoldered · dual-channel | 32 GB LPDDR5XSoldered | 32 GB LPDDR5XSoldered | 32 GB LPDDR5XSoldered |
| Battery | 73 Wh50% in 30 min · fast charge | 73 WhStandard charge | 68 WhSmallest in class | 75 WhLargest in class |
| Build | CNC Al lid · MIL-810HDiamond-cut intake | Full metal bodyMost premium build | Full CNC aluminumFlagship construction | Metal + plastic mixMid-tier build quality |
| Wireless | Wi-Fi 6E · BT 5.3 | Wi-Fi 6E · BT 5.3 | Wi-Fi 7 · BT 5.4Ahead of class | Wi-Fi 7 · BT 5.4 |
| Starting Price | ~$1,099–$1,299Best value in class | ~$1,599 | ~$2,099 | ~$2,499 |
| Value Edge | Highest RTX 5060 TGPat the lowest price | Better displayfor $300+ more | Faster GPU tierfor $800+ more | Faster GPU tierfor $1,200+ more |

The TUF A14 wins decisively on **weight**, **GPU power per dollar**, and **thermal management**. It loses the display comparison — the Zephyrus G14 and Razer Blade 14 both offer OLED at their respective price points. The Blade 14, in particular, is a stunning computer, but at nearly double the price, it’s in a different product category.

Resale Value & Long-Term Ownership

Gaming laptops depreciate, but they don’t depreciate equally. The ASUS TUF line has historically lost salvage faster than competitors, but durable build and the continued upgrades the series receives each year are earning it increasing recognition in the secondhand market.

For the best experience reselling your used laptop when you’re ready to upgrade, why not start with Gadget Salvation — a trusted platform that offers instant valuations and quick cash payment for used ASUS laptops, including the TUF Gaming line. Our transparent pricing and straightforward process make getting value back on your aging tech genuinely painless.

NEW
2026

1 YEAR
~2027

2 YEARS
~2028

3 YEARS
~2029

4 YEARS
~2030

Year 1 Retention

68%

Above gaming avg.

Year 2 Retention

56%

Strong mid-life value

Sell-Sweet Spot

Yr 1–2

Before next GPU gen

💡

Ready to sell your ASUS TUF? Get an instant quote at [Gadget Salvation](https://www.gadgetsalvation.com) — fast payment, no hassle, competitive pricing on used gaming laptops.

* Projections based on historical ASUS TUF resale trends via Gadget Salvation market data. Actual values vary by condition, configuration, and market timing.

## **Verdict: Who Should Buy It?**

Buy the ASUS TUF Gaming A14 if you want the most gaming GPU power available in a sub-4-lb chassis without paying the Razer Blade or Predator Triton 14 AI kind of price. You care about thermals — this thing runs cool and silent when you need it to. You travel frequently and need a machine that won’t wreck your back. You’re a student who needs a workhorse for games.

Look elsewhere if: Display quality is your top priority, in which case the Zephyrus G14’s OLED is worth paying more for. You need more than 32 GB RAM (soldered, not upgradeable).

## **Frequently Asked Questions**
—
**How much does the ASUS TUF Gaming A14 laptop cost?**The FA401GM (Ryzen AI 9 465 + RTX 5060) starts around $1,299 (on sale). The FA401EA (Ryzen AI Max+ 392 + Radeon 8060S) launched at Best Buy for $2,199. For gaming, the RTX 5060 variation is the clear value winner.
**Can I upgrade RAM on the 2026 TUF Gaming A14 model?**No, the RAM is soldered onto the motherboard, and there are no additional RAM slots. The FA401GM ships with 32 GB LPDDR5X-7500 in dual-channel and cannot be expanded. Storage is a different story: dual M.2 2280 PCIe 4.0 slots let you add or swap SSDs up to 4 TB total.
**How does it compare to the ROG Zephyrus G14?**The Zephyrus G14 is ASUS’s premium thin-and-light gaming laptop, offering a superior OLED display and a more refined build. It typically costs $300–$400 more for a comparable GPU tier. The TUF A14 wins on GPU power-per-dollar and thermal headroom; the G14 wins on display quality and looks.
**Does the TUF 14 support gast charging?**Yes. The 73 Wh battery supports fast charging via the included 100W USB-C adapter, reaching 50% capacity in approximately 30 minutes at optimal temperatures (68–110°F). The USB4 port also supports third-party USB-C charging.

Is the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold8 Ultra Worth the Price?

Is Samsung Galaxy Z Fold8 Ultra the best one yet? Sure, the battery life is great, but its camera didn’t get the “Ultra” treatment. At $2,099+, this is a phone for people who will actually use the big screen, not those chasing the best camera or the best deal.

Samsung has officially pushed the boundaries of foldable technology with the Galaxy Z Fold8 Ultra. But starting at a eye-watering $2,099.99 for the base 256GB model and climbing up to $2,699.99 for the maxed-out 1TB configuration, it is now one of the most expensive consumer smartphones on the market today.

At a price point that could easily buy a high-end laptop and a top-tier tablet, the question becomes inescapable: Is the Z Fold8 Ultra actually worth the steep price, or has mobile tech officially crossed into luxury absurdity?

Galaxy Z Fold8 Ultra: What’s Actually New

Let’s clear up the naming confusion first. This year Samsung split its Fold line in two: the standard Galaxy Z Fold8 is an entirely new, wider “passport” shape built for media and everyday use, while the Z Fold8 Ultra keeps the tall, narrow body that’s defined every Fold since the Z Fold5. If you have a Galaxy Z Fold7, the Ultra is your direct successor — not the phone that shares its base name.

Once you get past that, the Z Fold8 Ultra’s changes are real but targeted: a larger silicon-carbon battery, faster charging, a brighter and less creased inner display, a new magnet-assisted hinge that makes the phone easier to pry open, and an ultrawide camera bump. Essentially, it’s what the phone the Z Fold7 should have always been, just $100 to $280 more expensive, depending on storage.

Z Fold8 Ultra vs. Z Fold7
Side by side, the generational jump is smaller than the price increase suggests, but the changes that did land are the ones Fold7 owners complained about most:

What Does $2,100+ Buy You?

To evaluate the price tag, you have to look at the massive engineering leaps packed into this generation. The Z Fold8 Ultra isn’t just an incremental spec bump—it’s a structural overhaul.

  • Ultra-Thin Titanium Engineering: Unfolded, the phone measures a mind-bending 4.1mm thin and weighs just 215 grams. Thanks to the new Flex Titanium hinge, it feels remarkably light without sacrificing structural rigidity.

  • Peak Display Tech: You get an expansive 8.0-inch inner Dynamic LTPO AMOLED 2X display that hits 3,000 nits of peak brightness, backed by an upgraded anti-reflective coating and a significantly reduced crease.

  • Pro-Grade Cameras: Borrowing hardware muscle from Samsung’s Ultra lineup, it features a 200MP main camera sensor alongside an upgraded 50MP ultra-wide lens.

  • Flagship Performance: Under the hood, it packs the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 for Galaxy, a 5,000 mAh silicon-carbon battery, and a promise of 7 years of Android OS updates.

Full Spec Breakdown

The essentials, at a glance:

Inner Display

8.0″ AMOLED

120Hz · 3,000 nits peak

Cover Display

6.5″ AMOLED

120Hz · Gorilla Glass Ceramic 3

Chipset

Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5

3nm · Octa-core

Memory

12GB or 16GB RAM

256GB / 512GB / 1TB · no microSD

Main Camera

200MP, f/1.7

OIS · multi-directional PDAF

Ultrawide + Tele

50MP + 10MP

3x optical zoom telephoto

Battery

5,000 mAh

Silicon-carbon cell

Charging

45W wired

20W wireless (Qi2.2)

Build

215g · 4.1mm unfolded

Flex Titanium hinge, IP48

Software

Android 17 / One UI 9

7 years of major OS upgrades

Colors

3 finishes

Graphite, Cream, Violet Shadow

Starting Price

$2,099.99

256GB / 12GB RAM

Battery & Charging: The Upgrade That Actually Matters

The Z Fold7’s battery life was its most common complaint. Samsung addressed it head-on with a larger silicon-carbon cell and, for the first time on a Fold, 45W wired charging.

Rated Battery Endurance

// EU ENERGY LABEL COMPARISON · HOURS OF RATED USE

GALAXY Z FOLD7

GALAXY Z FOLD8 ULTRA

* Based on leaked EU energy label endurance ratings. Real-world battery life varies by usage, brightness, and network conditions.

That’s roughly a 25% jump in rated endurance, plus charging to 67% in 30 minutes — up from a charging speed that hadn’t moved in years. It’s the single upgrade that will be felt on day one, every day.

The Camera Problem

This is where the “Ultra” name stops holding up. The 200MP main sensor is genuinely excellent, and bumping the ultrawide from 12MP to 50MP is a meaningful upgrade for cropping and detail. But the telephoto lens — the camera most people actually judge a flagship on — is the exact same 10MP, 3x optical zoom unit Samsung has shipped for three generations running.

Reviewers who spent hands-on time with the phone flagged this directly: rival foldables have started shipping considerably higher-resolution telephoto sensors at similar price points, which makes a three-year-old zoom camera feel out of place on a phone that now costs over $2,000. If mobile photography — especially zoomed shots — is your top priority, a Galaxy S26 Ultra or a rival flagship slab phone will outperform the Z Fold8 Ultra for less money.

Who Is the Target Audience for the Galaxy Fold8 Ultra Phone?

Samsung clearly built the Fold8 Ultra for specific power-user niches rather than the general public:
1 – The Executive & Mobile Power User: Professionals who need to review spreadsheets, edit documents side-by-side, manage communication channels, and run desktop-style workflows anywhere without lugging around a laptop bag.

2 – Bleeding-Edge Tech Enthusiasts: Early adopters who want the absolute latest pinnacle of mobile engineering and are willing to pay a heavy premium to hold the most futuristic smartphone in the room.

3 – Outdoor and Travel-Heavy Users: The brighter, anti-reflective display and longer battery life solve two of the main complaints about earlier Folds.

The Reality of Reselling Used Galaxy Flagships

Before dropping over two grand on a mobile phone, understanding its long-term value retention is crucial. Historically, Android flagships, including Samsung’s foldable line, experience faster depreciation on third-party resale platforms compared to iPhones. If you try to sell a used Galaxy flagship independently after 1–2 years, you can generally expect to recover up to 40% its original retail value.

However, Samsung actively offsets this depreciation curve with its aggressive trade-in ecosystem. When upgrading to future generations, Samsung frequently offers guaranteed trade-in values of up to $1,000+ for recent Galaxy flagships during pre-order windows. If you plan to upgrade every year or two, leveraging Samsung’s official trade-in promotions provides far better financial value than trying to resell your used phone on the secondhand market.
At the same time, the good news for the cash resellers is that the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold line consistently holds salvage value better than any other foldable on the market.

Projected Resale Value Retention

// GALAXY Z FOLD8 ULTRA · BASED ON HISTORICAL GALAXY Z FOLD RESALE DATA

NEW
2026

1 YEAR

2 YEARS

3 YEARS

4 YEARS

* Projections based on historical Galaxy Z Fold resale trends. Actual values vary by condition, configuration, storage tier, and market timing.

The Verdict

The Samsung Galaxy Z Fold8 Ultra smartphone is an incredible technological achievement. If you have the disposable income and your daily routine heavily leverages multi-screen productivity, it is easily the best foldable money can buy. For everyone else, standard bar flagships—or the slightly more affordable base Z Fold8—offer a much more forgiving return on investment.

Frequently asked questions

01
Is the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold8 Ultra worth $2,099?

For buyers who genuinely use the big inner screen — multitasking, split-screen work, S Pen note-taking — yes. The battery and display upgrades are real and long overdue, and the 8.0-inch panel now hits 3,000 nits with a noticeably reduced crease. For anyone judging it purely against a flagship slab phone on camera quality or price, it’s a much harder sell: a Galaxy S26 Ultra outperforms it on zoom for meaningfully less money.

02
What’s the difference between the Galaxy Z Fold8 and the Z Fold8 Ultra?

The standard Z Fold8 uses a new wider, shorter passport-style body built for media and everyday use. The Z Fold8 Ultra keeps the familiar tall, narrow shape that has defined every Fold since the Z Fold5, and it is the true spec successor to the Galaxy Z Fold7 — with a third rear camera, a larger battery, and a higher starting price. If you own a Fold7, the Ultra is your upgrade path, not the phone that shares its base name.

03
How much better is the Z Fold8 Ultra’s battery than the Z Fold7’s?

Leaked EU energy-label data puts the Z Fold8 Ultra at roughly 51 hours of rated endurance versus about 40.5 hours for the Z Fold7 — close to a 25% improvement, thanks to a larger 5,000 mAh silicon-carbon cell. Charging finally moved too: 45W wired gets you to about 67% in 30 minutes. Real-world numbers are still to come, but this is the upgrade you’ll feel on day one.

04
Is the Z Fold8 Ultra’s camera actually Ultra-level?

Not entirely. The 200MP main sensor is excellent and the ultrawide jumped from 12MP to 50MP, which helps a lot for cropping and detail. But the telephoto is still a 10MP, 3x optical zoom unit — the same part Samsung has shipped for three generations, and behind what some rival foldables now offer at similar prices. If zoomed photography is your top priority, this isn’t the phone to spend $2,099 on.

05
Should Z Fold7 owners upgrade to the Z Fold8 Ultra?

Most reviewers consider this a skippable generation for existing Fold7 owners. Battery, brightness, and charging speed are all genuinely better, but they’re incremental against a $100–$280 price increase. The upgrade math looks far more compelling coming from a Z Fold6 or earlier, where you gain the battery jump, the brighter anti-reflective panel, and the magnet-assisted hinge all at once.

06
How can I offset the cost of a new Galaxy Z Fold8 Ultra?

Selling the phone you’re replacing is the most effective way to soften a $2,099 starting price, and Galaxy flagships depreciate fastest in their first year — so timing matters. Gadget Salvation gives you an instant quote, a free insured shipping label, and payment within two business days of inspection, with no listings, buyer messages, or no-shows to manage. Start with a quote to sell your Samsung Galaxy and put that cash straight toward the new Fold.

>

Which Is Better for Selling Your Used Tech?

Both platforms help you turn old electronics into money. They are not, however, the same kind of service — and the difference decides how much work you do, how long you wait, and how much can go wrong along the way.

If you’ve searched for where to sell a laptop, a phone, or a console, Swappa has almost certainly come up. It’s a well-run, long-standing marketplace with a real reputation for keeping scammers out. This isn’t a post about why one company is good, and the other is bad. It’s about a structural difference that most comparison articles skip: Swappa is a place to sell. Gadget Salvation is a buyer.

That single distinction shapes everything downstream — who sets the price, who does the work, who absorbs the risk, and how certain you can be about the number that lands in your account.

The closest everyday comparison is selling a car. You can list it privately and hold out for the best offer, or you can drive it to a dealer, take the number they quote, and be done before lunch. Neither choice is wrong. They’re answers to different questions.

Swappa is the private sale. It connects you to another individual who wants your exact device, and it does a genuinely good job of policing that connection — every listing is reviewed by staff before it goes live, and payments run through PayPal with protections on both sides. But you are still the seller of record. You write the listing, take the photos, set the price, answer the questions, buy the packaging, ship the box, and stand behind the device after it arrives.

Gadget Salvation is the dealer. We quote you a price, pay for the shipping, inspect the device, and send the money. There’s no listing, no audience to wait for, and no buyer on the other end of the transaction — becaushttps://www.gadgetsalvation.com/blog/how-to-prepare-your-laptop-for-sale/e we’re the buyer.

What selling on Swappa actually involves

A marketplace listing is a small project. Here’s the honest sequence:

  1. Research what comparable units are selling for and pick an asking price that’s competitive but not underpriced.
  2. Photograph the device to the platform’s standards and write an accurate condition description.
  3. Submit the listing and wait for staff approval — listings that miss a requirement get sent back for edits.
  4. Field comments and questions from prospective buyers, sometimes for weeks.
  5. Wipe your data, source a box and padding, pay for packaging, and ship promptly once it sells.
  6. Handle anything that happens afterward — a damage claim, a condition dispute, a return request.

Three constraints are worth knowing before you commit to that path. Swappa charges 3% to each side of the sale, so your list price isn’t your payout. Swappa doesn’t allow broken items — each category has condition requirements that a listing must meet, which rule out cracked screens, dead batteries, and units that won’t power on. And Swappa is US sellers only.

The biggest variable, though, is time. A listing has no deadline. It sells when someone decides to buy it, which might be tomorrow or might be after two price cuts and a month of waiting while newer models push your device’s market value down.

What selling to Gadget Salvation involves

How it works

Three steps. No listing, no waiting.

Two of them take minutes. The third happens while your device is in our lab.

Get an instant quote

Find your model in our catalog of 4,000+ devices, answer a few condition questions, and see your offer immediately. Our pricing algorithm pulls live data from eBay, Amazon, and other secondhand marketplaces, so the number reflects what your device is actually worth right now. Not in the catalog? Request a custom quote and our team evaluates it, usually within a day.

TAKES ~2 MINUTES
NO OBLIGATION

Ship it free

Accept the offer and we email you a prepaid UPS label. Print it, box the device, drop it at any UPS location. You never pay for shipping, and you never negotiate with anyone.

SHIPPING IS FREE
ANY UPS LOCATION

Get paid in two business days

Our technicians inspect and factory-reset the device, then payment goes out within two business days of arrival — via Zelle, Venmo, Cash App, PayPal, or a mailed check. With standard UPS transit, the whole process typically wraps in three to five business days.

5 PAYOUT METHODS
DATA WIPED BY US

Total time, start to finish

3–5 business days

No listing to write, no buyers to answer, nothing to manage after the box leaves your hands.

Get your instant quote →

:::
“`
Notice what’s missing from that list: no photography, no pricing research, no listing approval, no buyer messages, no postage costs, and nothing to manage after the box leaves your hands. We’ve been doing this since 2008, and the entire model is built around removing those steps rather than helping you through them.

Gadget Salvation vs Swappa at a glance

 
Gadget Salvation
Swappa

Model
Buyback — we purchase the device from you directly
Peer-to-peer marketplace — you sell to another user

Who sets the price
Instant quote from our pricing database, locked in when you accept
You research the market and set your own asking price

Fees
NONE — your quote is your payout
3% seller fee, plus a separate 3% buyer fee added at purchase

Time to payment
Typically 3–5 business days end to end; payment within two business days of arrival
Open-ended — however long it takes a buyer to appear, then transit

Broken or non-working devices
Accepted — cracked screens, failing batteries, keyboard faults, units that won’t power on
Not permitted; listings must meet each category’s condition requirements

Work required from you
Answer a few questions, print a label, drop off a box
Photos, description, pricing, approval process, buyer Q&A, fulfillment

Shipping
Free prepaid UPS label, provided by us
You buy postage and packaging and arrange the shipment

Data removal
Factory reset performed by our technicians as part of testing
Entirely your responsibility before the box goes out

After the sale
Nothing — the transaction is closed once payment is sent
You handle follow-up questions, condition disputes, and any return

Best for
Certainty, speed, damaged hardware, multiple devices at once
Maximizing gross price on a clean, in-demand device when time isn’t tight

When Swappa is the right call

We’d rather tell you the truth than win every reader. Swappa is the better option when all of the following are true at once:

Your device is clean and fully functional — no cracks, no battery warnings, no dead keys.

It’s a model people actively search for, like a recent MacBook Pro or a current-generation console.

You have no deadline and are comfortable waiting weeks if that’s what it takes.

You’re willing to do the listing work and stay responsive after the sale.

Under those conditions, a private sale usually clears more money than any buyback service, ours included. That’s the reward for taking on the effort and the risk.

Who Gadget Salvation is built for

Our customers tend to arrive with one of five situations, and none of them are well served by a listing:

The device isn’t perfect. A cracked screen or a swollen battery ends a marketplace listing before it starts. It doesn’t end a quote — it just changes the number.

There’s a deadline. The new machine ships Friday, the lease ends this month, the money is needed now. A locked quote and a known timeline beat an open-ended listing every time.

There’s more than one device. Three old laptops and a drawer of phones means three listings and a drawer of listings. One shipment closes all of it.

The seller doesn’t want to be a merchant. Some people simply don’t want to price-check comps, photograph a laptop lid, or answer messages from strangers about their charger.

Certainty matters more than the last 15%. A guaranteed figure you can plan around is worth more to most people than a hypothetical figure they might reach eventually.

Resale value: gross price versus what you actually keep

The mistake in most comparisons is treating a marketplace asking price and a buyback offer as the same kind of number. They aren’t. A listing price is gross. Subtract the 3% seller fee, the box and padding, the trip to the carrier, and the days the device sat losing value while it waited for a buyer, and the gap narrows considerably. Subtract a single return or condition dispute and it can invert entirely.

A Gadget Salvation quote is net. There’s no commission, no listing fee, and no shipping cost, so the figure you accept is the figure that reaches your account — and because our algorithm prices against live eBay and Amazon secondhand data, it tracks the real market rather than a fixed depreciation schedule. On a mint, high-demand device, a patient private seller will usually still come out ahead. On anything with cosmetic wear, a battery problem, an older chipset, or a broken component, the buyback number is frequently the higher realized number — because the alternative listing either underperforms or isn’t permitted in the first place.

One more factor that rarely makes it into these comparisons: resale value decays continuously. A laptop listed in January and sold in March is not the same asset it was when the listing went up. Speed isn’t only convenience — it’s part of the price.

Where the hiccups come from

Swappa handles marketplace risk about as well as a marketplace can. Human moderators review listings, fraud tooling screens for bad actors, and payments run through a protected system. The point isn’t that the platform is careless — it’s that no marketplace can remove the seller’s operational exposure, because the seller is a party to the transaction.

So the friction lives in ordinary places: a listing bounced back for a missing photo requirement, a week of questions from people who never buy, a price cut when a newer model launches, a buyer who reports the device arrived differently than described, a damage claim you have to document and pursue with the carrier. Each one is manageable. Together, they’re the reason a lot of devices stay in a drawer instead of getting sold at all.

A buyback removes those branches rather than managing them. There’s one price, one label, one inspection, one payment. If our technicians find the condition doesn’t match what was selected, we send a revised offer — and if you’d rather not take it, we ship the device back to you free of charge. That’s the only branch in the process, and it ends with you keeping your hardware or keeping your money. Never neither.

See your number before you commit to anything

Quotes are free, instant, and carry no obligation. Find your model, answer a few condition questions, and compare our offer against what a listing would realistically net you. Get your instant quote →

FREE SHIPPING · NO FEES · PAID IN TWO BUSINESS DAYS

The bottom line

Swappa is a strong marketplace for sellers who want maximum gross price and are prepared to run the sale themselves. Gadget Salvation is a buyback service for people who want a firm number, a short timeline, and nothing to manage — including for devices a marketplace won’t accept at all. If your priority is the highest theoretical price, list it. If your priority is a reliable outcome on a known schedule, check how our process works and take two minutes to see your quote.

Frequently asked questions

01 Is Gadget Salvation a marketplace like Swappa?

No, and the distinction matters. Swappa is a peer-to-peer marketplace — it connects you with an individual buyer and you handle the sale yourself. Gadget Salvation is a buyback service: we purchase the device from you directly. There’s no listing to create, no audience to wait for, and no buyer to negotiate with, because we’re the one buying. You receive a quote, ship free, and get paid. 02 Will I make more money selling on Swappa?

Sometimes — and we’d rather say so plainly. If your device is in excellent cosmetic and functional condition, is a model buyers actively want, and you’re not in a hurry, a private sale will often clear a higher gross figure. Just compare the right numbers: subtract the 3% seller fee, packaging, postage, your time, and the value the device loses while it waits for a buyer. For anything with wear, a fault, or an older chipset, a buyback offer is frequently the higher amount you actually keep. 03 Can I sell a broken device that a marketplace won’t let me list?

Yes. Marketplaces generally don’t permit broken items — listings have to clear condition requirements before going live. We buy hardware in a range of operational states, including cracked screens, failing or swollen batteries, keyboard and touchpad faults, and machines that won’t power on. Select the condition honestly during the quote and the offer reflects it. Start with our sell your laptop page to see what your device is worth as-is. 04 How fast do I get paid, and how?

Payment is issued within two business days of your device arriving and passing inspection. Standard UPS transit from most U.S. locations runs one to three business days, so the full process typically completes in three to five business days. Choose your payout method at checkout: Zelle, Venmo, Cash App, PayPal, or a mailed paper check. A marketplace listing, by contrast, has no clock at all — it pays when a buyer decides to buy. 05 What happens if my device’s condition doesn’t match my quote?

Our technicians confirm condition on arrival. Revisions are uncommon and generally happen when the model or condition selected during the quote doesn’t match the hardware we receive. If that occurs, we email a revised offer — you can accept it, or decline and we’ll ship the device back to you at no cost. You’re never locked into a number you didn’t agree to, and you never lose both the device and the payment. Data is handled on our end too: every unit is reset to factory settings as part of testing.

Five Years That Rewrote the Rules of Tech Resale

Over the last five years, the consumer tech industry has witnessed a massive paradigm shift. Once dominated by an unyielding cycle of “buy new, upgrade yearly, discard old,” the electronics industry has evolved to embrace recommerce (reverse commerce). Between 2021 and 2026, the second-hand and refurbished electronics market actually continued to transform from a niche arena for bargain hunters into a mainstream, multi-billion-dollar economic powerhouse.

Driven by shifting consumer values, macroeconomic pressures, and structural changes in technology, the tech resale market has rewritten the rules of retail.

Electronics is now the fastest-rising resale segment — projected to climb from 16% to 20% of the global market by 2036. Refurbished gadgets, once viewed as a last resort, are becoming the mainstream choice for cost-conscious and environmentally aware buyers alike.

A Five-Year Timeline

Major Shifts in the Tech Resale Market (2021–2026)

Several core catalysts have accelerated the growth of the tech resale ecosystem over the last five years:

1. Premium Pricing and Inflationary Pressures

The price of flagship smartphones, laptops, and gaming consoles has steadily climbed. With new premium cellphones and AI-capable laptops pushing well past the $1,000 mark, consumers have faced tightening household budgets due to inflation. Recommerce has provided a vital alternative, allowing individuals to access high-quality, relatively recent tech at a fraction of the retail cost.

2. The Rise of the Green Consumer and Circular Economy

Environmental consciousness has migrated from marketing buzzwords to an active driver of consumer behavior, particularly among Gen Z and Millennials. E-waste is one of the fastest-growing environmental crises globally. Buying refurbished and pre-owned gadgets or responsibly recycling old ones is now viewed as an ethical imperative. Extending a device’s lifecycle by just a few years dramatically slashes its carbon and mining footprint.

3. Legislative and Regulatory Momentum

The “Right to Repair” movement resulted in historic legislative acts in several states (including CA, MA, MN, and NY). These laws forced original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) to provide better access to parts, tools, and manuals. This unlocked a steady supply of repairable inventory for refurbishers, standardizing quality and boosting consumer trust in second-hand electronics.

4. The Rise of Buyback Platforms

In the past five years, electronics buyback platforms have gained greater trust and popularity among used-tech resellers, prompting a shift away from peer-to-peer models. Completing a transaction in under a week via an online platform became preferable to meetups for many consumers, given the challenges of handling lowball offers, data security, and shipping logistics.

Navigating the Ecosystem: Where Consumers Go

The current tech resale landscape is broadly split into three spaces:

  • OEM & Big Retail Trade-ins: Programs run by Apple, Samsung, Best Buy, or mobile carriers. While convenient, they often tie consumers to specific store credits or lock them into long-term carrier contracts.
  • Marketplace Aggregators: Platforms like Back Market or Swappa, which host third-party sellers. These are great for buyers, but still require sellers to manage listings or wait for a buyer to bite.
  • Direct BuyBack Sites: Services that buy pre-owned electronics directly from consumers, inspect them, and pay out cash. This is where long-standing platforms like Gadget Salvation have cemented their value.

Gadget Salvation: Streamlining the Resale Process

Founded in 2008 with a mission to reduce e-waste by keeping dated technology in circulation, Gadget Salvation is an example of how direct-to-platform resale has perfected the user experience to meet modern consumer demands.

Because we handle the entire resale process in-house — rather than acting as a marketplace middleman — we can pass back more of the sale proceeds to the seller. Here is how we stand out:

Algorithmic, Real-Time Valuation

Our platform uses a proprietary pricing algorithm that pulls real-time resale data from major e-commerce platforms and calculates offers based on that information. A seller can go on our site, look up their specific device type (ranging from Windows laptops and MacBooks to iPhones, gaming consoles, and smartwatches), brand, and specs, checkmark its cosmetic and functional condition from the options menu, and receive an instant quote.

Risk-Free Transaction

One of the historical deterrents of online resale was shipping costs and transit risks. Gadget Salvation removes this barrier by providing a free, prepaid shipping label. If, after arrival, our technicians find that its condition doesn’t match the user’s initial description, we’ll follow up with an adjusted offer. If the seller declines, our team ships the device back normally at no extra charge (unless it does not meet the requirements outlined in the Service Agreement).

Speed and Payout Flexibility

Amazon Prime spoiled us: We now expect things to arrive quickly all the time, so when it comes to resale, consumers also expect rapid liquidity. We sped up the turnaround by eliminating the wait for mailers and offering digital labels instead, saving sellers a solid week. Once a package reaches Gadget Salvation’s HQ, it is inspected within one to two business days. Rather than forcing sellers to accept store gift cards or wait weeks for a paper check, we offer the most popular instant digital payment options, including Zelle, Venmo, Cash App, and PayPal (alongside traditional checks). The entire process—from dropping a box at a UPS store to cash in hand—is compressed into a matter of days.

Data Security

At Gadget Salvation, we use NIST-compliant data erasure software as part of our standard electronics processing. Every gadget is wiped beyond a simple factory reset, and failing or non-readable storage drives are physically destroyed and then recycled, giving sellers peace of mind.

Conclusion: Sustainability Has Never Mattered More to Consumers

Beyond the financial calculus, resale is now deeply tied to environmental consciousness. Electronics manufacturing is resource-demanding (mining rare earth materials, energy-hungry fabrication, global shipping). And every used/refurbished gadget that finds a second owner delays the production of a new one.

Platforms like ours have been built around this mission since their inception, re-routing working gadgets from landfills and reconditioning them for continued use. As consumers increasingly factor a device’s resale potential into their original purchase decisions, a habit currently practiced by only 30% of buyers, but one that is growing, the circular economy is steadily becoming the norm.

Will It Be a Worthy Upgrade?

For over a decade, Apple executives (dating back to Steve Jobs himself) insisted that touchscreens didn’t belong on a MacBook. But times change, and so does Apple’s design philosophy.

As we enter the second half of 2026, the tech community is buzzing with reports of supply chain leaks and analyst reports pointing to the most radical laptop redesign that Cupertino has ever attempted: the first-ever touchscreen MacBook Pro. Armed with a Tandem OLED display, a next-generation M6 chip, and a brand-new interface, this laptop is set to rewrite the rules of macOS.

Here is a detailed breakdown of everything we know so far about the upcoming MacBook Pro touchscreen model, its expected specs, and whether you should save your money or wait for this historic release.

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

– [When Will the MacBook Pro Touchscreen Come Out? (Release Date)](#aioseo-when-will-the-macbook-pro-touchscreen-come-out-release-date-4)
– [What the Touchscreen MacBook Pro M6 is Expected to Offer](#aioseo-what-the-touchscreen-macbook-pro-m6-is-expected-to-offer-13)
– [1. Ultra Retina XDR Tandem OLED Display](#aioseo-1-ultra-retina-xdr-tandem-oled-display-15)
– [2. The Dynamic Island Comes to Mac (Goodbye, Notch!)](#aioseo-2-the-dynamic-island-comes-to-mac-goodbye-notch-17)
– [3. Next-Gen Apple M6 Pro & M6 Max Chips (2nm Architecture)](#aioseo-3-next-gen-apple-m6-pro-m6-max-chips-2nm-architecture-19)
– [4. Re-Engineered Hinge and Ultra-Thin Frame](#aioseo-4-re-engineered-anti-wobble-hinge-and-ultra-thin-frame-21)
– [5. Built-in 5G Connectivity & N1 Wireless Chip](#aioseo-5-built-in-5g-connectivity-n1-wireless-chip-23)
– [How Will the Touchscreen Work on macOS 27?](#aioseo-how-the-touchscreen-actually-works-on-macos-27-25)
– [Touch Gestures Coming to macOS](#aioseo-touch-gestures-coming-to-macos-28)
– [Is It a Worthy Upgrade for Apple Users?](#aioseo-is-it-a-worthy-upgrade-for-apple-users-30)
– [Who Should WAIT for the Touchscreen MacBook Pro:](#aioseo-who-should-wait-for-the-touchscreen-macbook-pro-33)
– [Who Should SKIP It:](#aioseo-who-should-skip-it-38)
– [Sell Your Current Mac Before the M6 Arrives](#aioseo-sell-your-current-mac-before-the-m6-arrives-42)
– [The Bottom Line](#aioseo-the-bottom-line-49)

## **When Will the MacBook Pro Touchscreen Come Out? (Release Date)**

Following the March 2026 rollout of the M5 Pro and M5 Max MacBook Pros, Apple is already looking toward its next massive hardware cycle.

According to seasoned Apple analysts like Bloomberg’s Mark Gurman and Ming-Chi Kuo, the touchscreen version of the MacBook Pro is currently scheduled for a late 2026 or early 2027 release.

  • The Optimistic Timeline (Late 2026): Mass production on the touch-capable OLED panels has reportedly begun ahead of schedule. If Apple clears its manufacturing checkpoints, a special keynote in October or November 2026 is highly likely.

M6 MacBook Pro — Release Timeline

2023 — First Reports

Bloomberg’s Mark Gurman first floats the idea of a touchscreen MacBook, dismissed widely as speculation.

September 2025 — Analyst Confirmation

Ming-Chi Kuo publishes supply chain research pointing to late-2026 mass production for an OLED MacBook Pro with on-cell touch tech.

October 2025 — Bloomberg Detail

Gurman reports the machines are codenamed K114 (14-inch) and K116 (16-inch), confirming a late 2026 to early 2027 target launch window.

February 2026 — Deep Detail

A major Bloomberg report reveals Dynamic Island, OLED display, macOS 27 touch optimizations, and confirms the M6 Pro / M6 Max chipset pairing.

May 2026 — Samsung Production Begins

Samsung Display reportedly begins mass-producing the Tandem OLED panels. Foxconn assembly expected to begin Q3 2026. Chip shortages may push the full launch toward early 2027.

– **The Delayed Timeline (Early 2027):** More recent supply chain reports cite global SSD/RAM component shortages and “supply chain snags” regarding the new display assembly. If these bottlenecks persist, the release could slide into the first quarter of 2027.

Regardless of the exact date, the touchscreen model is being positioned as a celebration of the MacBook Pro’s 20th anniversary, making a late 2026 launch the target Apple is aiming for.

What the Touchscreen MacBook Pro M6 is Expected to Offer

Apple isn’t just slapping a touch digitizer onto the existing MacBook architecture; they are completely re-engineering the laptop. Here are the groundbreaking specs expected for the 14-inch and 16-inch models:

1. Ultra Retina XDR Tandem OLED Display

Say goodbye to Mini-LED. The new MacBook Pro will borrow the Tandem OLED technology first seen in the iPad Pro. By stacking two OLED panels, the screen will achieve infinite contrast ratios, pitch-black dark modes, and unprecedented HDR peak brightness—all while drawing less power. Naturally, this panel will feature multi-touch integration.

2. The Dynamic Island Comes to Mac (Goodbye, Notch!)

The controversial display notch introduced in 2021 is finally on its way out. Leaks suggest Apple will transition to a punch-hole camera design integrated with software-based Dynamic Island functionality. Adapted for macOS, this digital island will expand and contract to show background tasks, rendering progress, AirDrop transfers, and system alerts.

3. Next-Gen Apple M6 Pro & M6 Max Chips (2nm Architecture)

While the current M5 line is incredibly fast, the touchscreen MacBook Pro is expected to debut the M6 series silicon. Built on TSMC’s cutting-edge 2-nanometer (2nm) process, the M6 chip will focus heavily on next-level on-device AI efficiency, massive graphics processing improvements, and thermal regulation to keep the laptop cool.

4. Re-Engineered Hinge and Ultra-Thin Frame

To address Steve Jobs’ original critique of touchscreen laptops, Apple is redesigning the MacBook chassis. The laptop will feature a significantly thinner, lighter aluminum frame and a reinforced friction hinge. A stiffer hinge is meant to prevent the display from wobbling or flexing backward when you tap, swipe, or pinch-to-zoom on the screen.

5. Built-in 5G Connectivity & N1 Wireless Chip

For professionals on the go, the MacBook Pro touchscreen variation is rumored to offer an optional built-in 5G cellular modem (Apple’s proprietary C-series chip). Additionally, it will pack the N1 networking chip to deliver blazing-fast Wi-Fi 7 and Bluetooth 6 performance.

How Will the Touchscreen Work on macOS 27?

The most important thing to understand about the M6 MacBook Pro touchscreen is that Apple is not trying to turn it into an iPad. Touch is being positioned as a complementary input method, not a replacement for the keyboard and trackpad that define the Mac experience.

Instead, macOS will introduce a dynamic interface mode that detects when touch input is being used and adapts accordingly. When the system detects a touch, UI elements like menu bar items will expand into larger, finger-friendly controls. Switch back to the trackpad and everything returns to its traditional, compact dimensions.

Touch Gestures Coming to macOS

Familiar iOS and iPadOS gestures are expected to be natively supported, including fast scrolling, pinch-to-zoom on images, PDFs, and web pages, and swipe-based window and desktop management. The emoji picker is also reportedly getting a touch-optimized interface, letting users tap characters directly on-screen.

Is It a Worthy Upgrade for Apple Users?

As with any major redesign, a major price hike is to be expected. Premium components like Tandem OLED and a 2nm M6 chip mean the touchscreen MacBook Pro will likely cost a few hundred dollars more than the current M5 MacBook Pro models.

So, should you buy one?

Who Should WAIT for the Touchscreen MacBook Pro:

  • Digital artists & content creators: If you frequently jump between an iPad Pro and a Mac to sketch, edit, or control complex UI layouts, a unified touch-enabled MacBook Pro should significantly streamline your workflow.
  • Power users & early adopters: If you want a future-proof Mac with 5G connectivity, an OLED display, and the absolute latest 2nm M6 processing power, this will be the gold standard.
  • Windows converts: If you’ve stayed on Windows simply because you love touchscreen ultrabooks like the Dell XPS or Microsoft Surface, this is the laptop you’ve been waiting for.

Who Should SKIP It:

  • Traditionalists: If you strictly use a mouse and keyboard and find the idea of fingerprints on a laptop screen frustrating, the touch features will offer you no real value.
  • Budget-conscious buyers: The current M5 MacBook Pro models (released in early 2026) already deliver staggering speed and AI efficiency. If you don’t need a touchscreen, there is no reason to upgrade so soon.

Sell Your Current Mac Before the M6 Arrives

Here’s a truth that doesn’t get enough attention in upgrade conversations: MacBooks have the best resale value retention of any laptop brand. A three-year-old MacBook Pro typically retains between 50–60% of its original purchase price. A comparable Windows laptop at the same age is often worth 20 cents on the dollar.

That also means resale value is highest right now, before the touchscreen MacBook Pro release date is officially announced. History consistently shows that MacBook resale prices drop 10–20% within weeks of a major new release.

M6 MacBook Pro: Projected Resale Value Retention

ESTIMATED BASED ON HISTORICAL MACBOOK PRO RESALE DATA

NEW
2026-2027

1 YEAR

2 YEARS

3 YEARS

4 YEARS

* Projections based on historical MacBook Pro resale trends. Actual values vary by condition, configuration, and market timing.

The implication is clear: to get the maximum value back, sell your current MacBook _before_ the M6 announcement, not after. You’ll pocket considerably more money (or trade-in credit)-whichever reselling method you’ll end up choosing.

♻️

#### Sell Your Mac with Gadget Salvation

When it comes to selling used computers, Gadget Salvation is the smart choice. We offer instant quotes, free shipping, and fast payment via an app of seller’s choice. No haggling, no fees, no waiting for a buyer to show up. Gadget Salvation specializes in electronics resale, meaning we understand Mac pricing better than most.

If you’re planning to upgrade to the M6 MacBook Pro, sell your current Mac now, before the announcement eats into its buyback value.

Sell My MacBook Pro Now →

## The Bottom Line

The first-ever touchscreen MacBook Pro won’t be a gimmick. It is meant to represent a carefully considered shift in Apple’s platform strategy, one that the brand has resisted for over a decade. Touch on macOS 27 is designed to complement, not replace, the keyboard and trackpad. Tandem OLED is a leap in laptop displays. Dynamic Island is a hardware+software unification that makes the entire Apple ecosystem feel more coherent. And the M6 chip — Apple’s first on a 2nm process — will be the fastest, most efficient Mac silicon ever made.

Which Used Apple Mac Retains the Most Value?

When investing in a premium personal computer, the initial price tag is only a part of the financial equation. The other, often overlooked aspect is residual value: how much of that money you can get back when it is time to upgrade. Historically, Apple’s computer lineup has run circles around its Windows competitors, treating Mac owners to significantly softer depreciation curves. However, not all Macs lose value at the same pace.

Whether you are a student eyeing an entry-level laptop or a creative professional configuring a powerhouse workstation, understanding how different models age can save you thousands of dollars. Let’s break down the data to see which Mac model is the reigning value-retention champion.

Why Every Mac Owner Worries About Resale Value

When you spend $1,200 or $3,500 on a laptop, what happens to that money two years later isn’t an afterthought — it’s part of the total cost of ownership. And here, Macs have an enviable track record. Apple Silicon models retain 55–75% of their retail price after one year, and 40–60% after two years — numbers that Windows laptops simply can’t match in the same category.

But not all Macs depreciate equally. The chip generation, RAM configuration, and model tier you choose at purchase will dramatically shape what you can recover when it’s time to upgrade.

The single biggest factor? Chip generation. Each new generation adds approx. $100 more to resale value. An M1 MacBook Air nets $180-200 in 2026, while an M3 Air gets $430–470 — same form factor, completely different market.

Best Used Mac Models to Sell in 2026

Here’s how the current lineup stacks up — ranked by how much of your original purchase price you can expect to recover.

Resale Value Retention At-A-Glance

Mac Model
Avg. Year 1 Retention
Avg. Year 3 Retention
Primary Value Drivers

MacBook Air (Base Specs)
50% – 65%
43% – 50%
Massive student demand, low initial entry cost

MacBook Pro 14″ (Base)
60% – 70%
45% – 50%
XDR Display, high port layout, active cooling appeal

MacBook Pro 16″ (Maxed Specs)
55% – 68%
35% – 40%
Niche pro buyers, massive custom markup loss

Mac Studio & Desktops
50% – 60%
40% – 45%
Workstation stability, specific professional target audience

The Clear Winner: MacBook Pro with M4 Pro or M4 Max

No other Mac holds value like a MacBook Pro. A base 14-inch M4 MacBook Pro that retailed for $1,599 currently sells for approximately $999 on eBay — a decent return on each dollar spent after two years of ownership. Configured pre-owned Pro 16 models with M4 Pro or M4 Max chips also yield a decent cashback on the resale markets.

The reason is simple: creative professional audience (video editors, developers, 3D artists) needs sustained performance and doesn’t compromise. Max chip configurations are also comparatively rare on the secondhand market, which supports solid pricing through basic supply dynamics. At the same time, limited audiences mean lower demand, which, in turn, drives prices down.

Why the MacBook Air is a Close Second

If you are looking for the absolute safest way to get into the Apple ecosystem, the base-configuration 13-inch MacBook Air gets you there. It sells faster than any other Mac on the resale market because more buyers can use it. The M3 and M4 Air models, in particular, with 16GB of RAM, have become the sweet spot — they appeal to students, remote workers, and casual creatives alike. That wide buyer pool translates to faster sales while still maintaining competitive pricing.

One important caveat: the 8GB RAM configurations are depreciating faster than they used to. As Apple Intelligence and modern apps push memory requirements upward, buyers in 2026 are specifically filtering for 16GB configurations.

The Depreciation Traps: What Loses Value Fastest?

To maximize your return on investment, it is just as vital to understand which Mac setups decline the fastest in depreciation. The data highlights two massive traps:

1. High-End Custom Configurations (“BTO/CTO”)

If you purchase a MacBook Pro and max out the specifications to 96GB of RAM and a 4TB or 8TB SSD, you are paying a massive, non-recoverable premium. On the secondary market, a buyer looking for a used Mac will compare your listing to the base model. While they might pay a slight premium for your upgraded storage, they will come nowhere near compensating you for the hefty upgrades Apple initially charged you.

2. High-Tier Desktop Workstations

Computers like the Mac Studio and high-end Mac Pro face niche-market demand. Because technology in professional spaces moves exceptionally fast, businesses looking for Max or Ultra chips usually buy brand new to secure warranties and instant corporate tax write-offs. Consequently, used desktop workstations see a much shallower pool of individual buyers.

How to Maximize Your Mac’s Resale Value

Getting the most money for your used Mac is about preparation and timing. A few simple steps can meaningfully increase the amount of money you recover.

Sell before a new launch: Apple typically updates the MacBook Pro in October–November and the MacBook Air in March–April. Values can drop 10–17% in the days following a keynote announcement. Pay attention to each press release, however, because those cycles shift. For example, the upcoming release of the touchscreen MacBook Pro will likely alter this schedule. In any case, the sweet spot for selling is 4–6 weeks before an expected announcement cycle.

Clean, reset, and document: A factory reset, clean keyboard, and a screen free of fingerprints and scratches signal to buyers that the computer was well cared for throughout its lifecycle. Take clear photos in natural light. Include original accessories, even the box, if you still have it.

Use a reputable resale service. When it comes to getting a fair price without the hassle of listing and negotiating, Gadget Salvation is a go-to for many Mac owners. We buy a variety of used MacBook models, providing competitive instant valuations, cover shipping costs, and pay quickly — no waiting for a buyer, no replying to endless lowball offers on marketplaces. Whether your MacBook is in perfect condition or has seen better days, Gadget Salvation will make an offer.

SELL YOUR MAC

Get a free quote from
Gadget Salvation

Trade in your MacBook — working, broken, or anything in between. Gadget Salvation specializes in used computers and offers competitive instant appraisals with free shipping and speedy payments.

FREE SHIPPING INSTANT OFFERS ACCEPTING NON-WORKING UNITS FAST PAYMENT

[Calculate Your Mac’s Resale Value →](https://www.gadgetsalvation.com/sell-macbook)

NO OBLIGATION · TAKES LESS THAN 60 SECONDS

—
## **Mac Resale Value: Your Questions Answered**
—
**Do Apple Silicon Macs hold value better than older Intel models?**Yes, exponentially better. The shift to M-series chips completely altered the landscape. Intel-based Macs plummeted in value because modern software and modern macOS releases are optimized entirely for Apple Silicon architecture.
**Does trading directly with Apple give the best value?**Not necessarily. Apple Trade-In provides maximum convenience but often offers the lowest financial return (unless the seller takes advantage of the incentives Apple offers with each new product release). In most cases, selling your Mac privately or through an established third-party resale platform can net you 20% to 40% more cash.
**How much does battery health affect resale value?**Substantially. On the used market, a Mac with a battery health percentage above 80% sells for a significantly higher price. If the battery status says “Service Recommended,” expect buyers to demand a discount equal to or greater than the cost of a battery replacement (even if that battery still holds a charge).
**What about the MacBook Neo resale value?**The [MacBook Neo](https://cashforusedlaptops.com/macbook-neo-laptop-the-new-standard-for-affordable-computing/) is too new for historical resale data, but based on the pattern of its predecessors, it should retain 60–70% of retail after one year. The 8GB base model may depreciate faster as the software ecosystem catches up with AI demands. The Neo’s neural engine and Apple Silicon architecture give it strong long-term software support, which is the backbone of Mac resale value.

HP ZBook Power G11: The Mobile Workstation That Means Business

Finding a balance between enterprise-level performance and reasonable cost has always been a challenge in the mobile workstation market. For years, professionals needing desktop-class power for CAD, 3D rendering, and machine learning were forced to choose between ultra-premium (and ultra-expensive) flagship lines and compromises in build quality.

Enter the HP ZBook Power G11. Positioned in the sweet spot of HP’s legendary ZBook lineup, the Power G11 sits comfortably between the entry-level Firefly and the beefy Fury workstations. Refreshed with the latest Intel Core Ultra and AMD Ryzen processors, alongside NVIDIA RTX Ada Generation graphics, this 16-inch workhorse promises elite-tier durability and performance without the astronomical price tag.

In this comprehensive review, we’ll take a deep dive into the ZBook Power G11’s design, benchmarks, display options, upgrades, and overall value.

HP ZBook Power G11: Key Specifications

Before diving into the details, let’s take a look at the technical hardware options available for this 16-inch beast:

Component
Specification Options

Processor (CPU)
Intel Core Ultra 5 / Ultra 7 / Ultra 9 (Series 1 / Meteor Lake) OR AMD Ryzen 5 / 7 / 9 PRO 8000 Series

Graphics (GPU)
Integrated Intel Arc / Radeon 780M; Dedicated up to NVIDIA RTX 3000 Ada Generation (8GB GDDR6)

Memory (RAM)
Up to 64 GB DDR5 SODIMM (Dual-channel, user-upgradable)

Storage
Dual M.2 PCIe Gen4 x4 NVMe SSD slots (Up to 8 TB total storage)

Display
16.0″ 16:10 aspect ratio; options from WUXGA (1920×1200) IPS to 120Hz WQXGA (2560×1600) IPS

Battery
83Wh with HP Fast Charge (50% charge in 30 minutes)

Connectivity
Wi-Fi 6E/7, Bluetooth 5.3, optional Nano SIM/LTE module

Weight
Starts at 4.68 lbs

Dimensions
14.15″ x 9.88″ x 0.90″

Design and Build Quality: Solid and Professional

The HP ZBook Power G11 boasts a newly refreshed chassis. HP opted for an all-aluminum, dark-silver finish that is incredibly rigid and highly resistant to fingerprint smudges. There are no flashy RGB elements or over-the-top styling cues here; this laptop is built to blend seamlessly into boardrooms, engineering labs, and production sets.

Key Design Highlights:

  • Military-Grade Durability: The G11 is built to pass rigorous MIL-STD-810H tests, meaning it can survive drops, vibrations, extreme temperatures, and dusty environments.
  • Great Keyboard Input: Key travel is satisfying without being mushy, and the larger chassis allows for a roomy palmrest. The touchpad uses a subtly cooler gray finish that contrasts with the silver chassis, a small design touch that works well in practice.
  • Upgradeability: Two SODIMM slots and two M.2 2280 Gen 4 SSD ports translate into longevity — a feature that consumer ultrabooks increasingly forgo and one that directly affects long-term ownership value.

⚖️ Portability reality check: At 4.68 lbs, this is heavier than a typical 16-inch consumer laptop, but well within expectations for its class. If daily commuting is your primary concern, the ZBook Firefly is the better fit.

Performance: Where ZBook Power G11 Earns Its Name

The defining characteristic of the ZBook Power G11 laptop is how it manages its hardware. Unlike consumer thin-and-lights that thermal-throttle under sustained workloads, this model is designed for continuous, high-intensity processing.

CPU Performance

The Core Ultra 9 185H returned a Geekbench 6 single-core score of 2,397 and a multi-core score of 11,906 in independent testing: respectable results that trail the newer Intel Series 2 chips (which typically reach 2,700–2,900 single-core). The AMD G11 A variant with the Ryzen 9 Pro 8945HS performs comparably, with both platforms demonstrating HP’s capable thermal management.

Even though it is now an “older” Series 1 variation, Ultra 9 185H performs exceptionally well, easily competing with modern desktop-class processors. It excels at multi-threaded tasks such as code compilation, scientific simulations, and large-scale data manipulation.

GPU and 3D Capabilities

The real star of the show is the NVIDIA RTX 3000 Ada Generation dedicated graphics card. Designed specifically for enterprise workloads, independent software vendor (ISV) certifications ensure it runs seamlessly with pro software like Autodesk, SolidWorks, and Adobe Creative Suite.

In the OpenCL graphics benchmarks, the ZBook Power G11 scored an exceptional 88,543 points. That’s more than twice the output of a GeForce RTX 4060 in consumer gaming laptops (~35,000) and nearly three times the scores of integrated AMD or Intel Arc graphics solutions (~27,000–33,000). For 3D rendering, CAD visualization, and simulation workloads, this gap is the entire reason to buy this computer.

🚀 Key GPU takeaway: The RTX Ada Generation GPUs in the ZBook Power G11 are professional-grade: NVIDIA Quadro-class compute, not gaming-oriented GeForce. This means ISV certification for AutoCAD, SolidWorks, Catia, and Maya, plus ECC memory support and optimized OpenGL/Direct X drivers. The performance gap over consumer GPUs is real and practically meaningful.

Display Options: Functional, but Choose Wisely

The G11 comes with a 16:10 aspect ratio screen—ideal for productivity, as it gives you more vertical screen space for timelines and code. However, you must choose your display panel configuration carefully.

  1. The Base WUXGA (1920 x 1200) IPS Panel: While bright (averaging around 380-450 nits in real-world use) and color-accurate enough for general office tasks (covering 98% sRGB), its pixel density is low at just 141 PPI. Text can appear slightly soft if you are accustomed to high-resolution displays.
  2. The WQXGA (2560 x 1600) 120Hz IPS Panel (Recommended): If your budget permits, this is the display to get. The jump to a sharper QHD resolution and a fluid 120Hz refresh rate makes a massive difference for 3D modeling, video editing, and overall user experience.
  3. HP Sure View Reflect: An optional privacy screen that blocks off-angle viewing with the touch of a button—excellent for working with sensitive data in public spaces.

Battery Life: A Pleasant Surprise

Battery life has historically been subpar in mobile workstation laptops. But the HP ZBook Power G11 attempts to change that trend. In video playback endurance tests, it yields up to 12 hours, well above average for the class and enough to last a full working day.

HP suggests up to 13 hours for the Intel variant and 13–18 hours for the AMD G11 A, depending on configuration. The 83Wh battery is the maximum you can carry on a commercial flight, and the fast-charge system can reach 50% in approximately 30 minutes when the machine is off or in standby — a real convenience for frequent travelers.

Thermal Management

The Power G11’s cooling system is one of its most underappreciated strengths. HP has fitted a sizable thermal array with larger fans than you’d find in a consumer laptop, but the key engineering achievement is that it runs quietly under sustained load. During extended rendering tests, the CPU maintained impressive sustained clocks, a result that simply doesn’t happen without a well-tuned thermal design.

The fans do spin up under heavy workloads, as you’d expect, but never to the distracting high-pitched whine common in thinner ultrabooks. For engineers who need to run simulations in a shared office, this does matter.

I/O Ports Galore

The ZBook Power G11 includes exactly what a professional laptop should, and nothing it shouldn’t. It features:

  • 2x Thunderbolt 4 / USB-C ports (with Power Delivery and DisplayPort 2.1)
  • 2x USB Type-A ports (one supporting charging)
  • 1x HDMI 2.1 port
  • 1x RJ-45 Gigabit Ethernet port
  • 1x SD Card Reader (Optional/Configuration dependent)
  • 1x Audio combo jack

This is a dock-friendly lineup. The pair of Thunderbolt 4 ports supports HP’s full range of Thunderbolt docks for single-cable desktop-mode deployment: connect one cable, and you have power, two displays, Ethernet, and peripherals. Wi-Fi 6E ensures strong throughput in congested office environments, and Bluetooth 5.3 handles peripherals without issue. An optional Intel 4G WWAN can provide connectivity on the go.

Smart Financial Lifecycle: Used HP Resale Value & Trade-Ins

A mobile workstation is a major financial investment. When buying enterprise hardware like the HP ZBook Power G11, it’s vital to consider the full lifecycle of your tech.

Used workstation laptops occupy an interesting niche in the secondhand market. They depreciate faster than premium consumer ultrabooks in percentage terms, largely because enterprise procurement cycles create a steady flood of off-lease units. However, their durability, upgradeability, and professional certification offer real value to small businesses, independent contractors, and researchers who can’t justify purchasing new hardware.

Based on standard PC depreciation curves and HP ZBook historical trade-in data, here’s what a well-maintained ZBook Power G11 can realistically retain of its original value over time:

In the resale space, ZBook Power G11’s upgradeable RAM and dual-SSD configuration don’t add much in terms of buyback value. If you plan to sell or trade in within the next 2–3 years, maximizing the CPU/GPU tier at purchase typically yields the best long-term cost of ownership.

Online Buyback to the Rescue

Selling a used HP ZBook Power G11 is an excellent way to offset the cost of your next purchase. And one of the easiest (and arguably fastest) ways to do it is to sell through Gadget Salvation. Why? Because we offer an instant online valuation process, provide free shipping labels, and rapid payments upon delivery. Utilizing our platform ensures that your workstation is either safely repurposed or recycled in an environmentally responsible way—all while putting cash back in your pocket.

Pros and Cons of the HP ZBook Power G11

Pros:

  • Superb Build Quality: Rugged, all-aluminum chassis that passes military durability standards.
  • Exceptional Graphics Performance: The NVIDIA RTX 3000 Ada GPU handles intense 3D and AI workloads with ease.
  • Superb Thermal System: Extremely quiet fan, even under sustained rendering loads.
  • Outstanding Upgradability: Has two RAM slots and two SSD slots.
  • Good Port Selection: Includes Ethernet, Thunderbolt 4, and an SD card reader.

Cons:

  • Underwhelming Base Display: The entry-level 1200p screen lacks sharpness and vibrant color depth.
  • Bulky Footprint: At 0.90 inches thick, it’s noticeably bulkier than creative laptops like the Dell XPS 16.
  • A bit Cramped: The inclusion of a numpad forces a smaller main keyboard layout.

Conclusion: Who is the HP ZBook Power G11 For?

The HP ZBook Power G11 is, without a doubt, an absolute workhorse. It delivers the structural integrity, thermal efficiency, and ISV software certifications of elite workstations at a price point that won’t break the bank.

If you are a 3D artist, CAD engineer, software developer, or data scientist who needs reliable, non-throttling desktop performance on the move, the ZBook Power G11 is a worthy buy. Just make sure to skip the entry-level 1200p screen in favor of the sharper 1600p 120Hz display option to truly unlock its potential.

## **FAQ**
—
**Is the HP ZBook Power G11 good for gaming?**While the dedicated NVIDIA RTX Ada GPUs are optimized for professional design software (CAD, rendering, etc.), they run on the same core architecture as GeForce gaming cards. The G11 will easily run modern AAA games at respectable frame rates, though gaming-specific features like optimized game-ready drivers and high-refresh-rate display synchronization (G-Sync) are not the primary focus of this laptop model.
**How does the ZBook Power compare to the ZBook Fury?**The _ZBook Power_ is designed to be a more accessible, slightly thinner, and lighter option. The _ZBook Fury_ is HP’s flagship desktop replacement, offering even higher-tier GPU options (like the RTX 5000 Ada) and four memory slots, but it is significantly thicker, heavier, and more expensive.
**What is the battery life like on the HP ZBook Power G11?**For light productivity tasks (web browsing, document editing) with optimized power saving, the 83Wh battery can last 10–12 hours. However, if you are actively utilizing the dedicated GPU for heavy tasks like 3D rendering or compile runs, expect the battery life to drop significantly to around 3 hours.
**Can I upgrade the RAM and storage on the ZBook Power G11?**Yes! The laptop features two user-accessible DDR5 SODIMM slots (supporting up to 64GB) and two M.2 PCIe Gen 4×4 SSD slots (supporting up to 8TB of total storage).

Razer Blade 16 Intel Core Ultra 9 vs AMD Ryzen 9

For years, choosing a premium gaming laptop meant looking no further than Razer’s iconic snake logo. But in 2026, the decision isn’t just about selecting which ultra-powerful NVIDIA GeForce RTX 50-series Laptop GPU you want inside your chassis—it is also about deciding on the silicon brain driving the machine.

With the latest Razer Blade 16 lineup offering both the Intel Core Ultra 9 386H and the AMD Ryzen AI 9 365, buyers face a major dilemma. Not only do these chips represent entirely different structural designs, but the Intel version continues to command a steep, eye-watering premium.

In this deep-dive comparison, we will unpack the performance realities of these 2026 powerhouses, analyze why the Intel 386H version is so much more expensive, look at how both stack up against alternatives from ASUS and Lenovo, and explore the resale value of Razer laptops on the used market.

Intel Core Ultra 9 386H vs. AMD Ryzen AI 9 365: The 2026 Core Differences

To understand the massive price gap, we first have to look at what’s happening under the aluminum hood of these 2026 configurations.

Feature
Intel Core Ultra 9 386H
AMD Ryzen AI 9 365

Architecture
Panther Lake (advanced 3D hybrid layout)
Strix Point (hybrid Zen 5 + Zen 5c)

Core & Thread Count
Up to 16 Cores / 22 Threads
10 Cores (4 Zen 5, 6 Zen 5c) / 20 Threads

Manufacturing Process
Intel 18A / TSMC (multi-tile layout)
TSMC 4nm

Max Turbo Boost
Up to 4.9 – 5.1 GHz
Up to 5.0 GHz

Integrated Graphics
Graphics 4 Xe3 (Intel Xe3-LPG)
Radeon 880M (RDNA 3.5, 12 CUs)

Neural Processing Unit
Intel NPU (Up to 50 TOPS)
AMD XDNA 2 (Up to 50 TOPS)

Total Platform AI Power
~80+ TOPS
Up to 73 TOPS

Max Native I/O
Native Thunderbolt 5 (Up to 120Gbps)
USB4 (Up to 40Gbps)

A Note on Battery Performance

The AMD Ryzen AI 9 365 represents efficient, high-performance computing on the go. AMD utilizes a smart hybrid layout, combining 4 full-fat Zen 5 performance cores with 6 highly efficient Zen 5c dense cores. It helps extend the laptop’s battery life, giving users up to 30% more work time for standard productivity tasks on a single charge compared to the Intel model.

The Intel Core Ultra 9 386H focuses on pushing the envelope in single-core burst speed and high-bandwidth multimedia capabilities. Backed by Intel’s newest Xe3-LPG graphics architecture for its iGPU, it offers phenomenal media encoding speeds. However, under heavy loads, it demands significantly more power, making it a system designed primarily to run while plugged into the power source.

Why Is the Intel Core Ultra 9 Version So Much More Expensive?

If AMD’s Ryzen AI 9 is more power-efficient with less fan noise, why does the Intel Core Ultra 9 version of the Razer Blade 16 cost $1600 more? It comes down to manufacturing complexity, premium I/O, and platform bundling.

1. Complex 3D Silicon Stacking

The Core Ultra 9 386H is one of the first mass-market chips manufactured on Intel’s own 18A node, using Intel’s 3D Foveros technology to stack different tiles (compute, SoC, graphics, and I/O) on top of each other. This multi-tile manufacturing process is highly complex and has lower fabrication yields than AMD’s consolidated TSMC 4nm chiplet/monolithic designs. Unfortunately, the production complexity is passed directly to the consumer.

2. Native Thunderbolt 5 Integration

Intel’s high-end mobile platforms feature native Thunderbolt 5 support, delivering a mind-boggling bidirectional bandwidth of up to 120 Gbps (via Bandwidth Boost). Implementing Thunderbolt 5 requires strict certification, physical logic controllers on the motherboard, and advanced routing on the motherboard. AMD’s system relies on USB4, which, while incredibly fast and backward-compatible with Thunderbolt, is capped at 40 Gbps and cannot match Thunderbolt 5’s massive throughput for external PCIe arrays and multi-8K displays.

3. Razer’s Component Upselling and Exclusivity

Razer deliberately uses its premium Intel configurations as the vehicle for its highest-end auxiliary components. If you want the ultra-premium dual-mode Mini-LED display (which lets you switch between 4K 120Hz and FHD+ 240Hz) or the absolute top-tier RTX 5090 GPU, Razer reserves these features for the Intel-based configuration.

Razer Blade 16 Gaming & CPU Performance: AMD vs Intel

In GPU-bound gaming scenarios (the vast majority of modern titles at QHD+ with RTX features enabled), both Ultra 9 and AMD Ryzen AI 9 perform nearly identically. Meaning the price gap here doesn’t buy you more frames.

But things diverge in CPU-heavy loads. The AMD Ryzen AI 9 HX 370, with its Zen 5 architecture and 24 threads, leads in sustained multi-threaded tasks such as video encoding, 3D rendering, and code compilation. Benchmarks consistently show AMD pulling ahead in Cinebench R24 multi-core, though the Intel chip wins in single-core efficiency and thermal headroom within the thin chassis.

Intel’s real and decisive advantage is power efficiency. The Core Ultra 9 386H from Panther Lake consumes approximately 3–4x less power than the previous-generation HX desktop-class chips Razer used in 2024.

Razer Blade 16 vs. Alternatives in 2026

The Razer Blade 16 exists in a pretty narrow category: Ultra-thin premium gaming laptops where build quality and display excellence raise the bar (and the cost). And while the competitor brand options aren’t exactly cheap, several rivals offer more performance per dollar, particularly ASUS and Lenovo gaming laptops (at the cost of a less refined aesthetic or a heavier chassis):

Laptop
CPU
Max GPU
From ($)
How it Compares

Blade 16 (2026)
Core Ultra 9 386H
RTX 5090
$3,499
Best build & display; priciest in class

Blade 16 (2025)
Ryzen AI 9 HX 370
RTX 5090
$2,399
Same chassis, more GPU tiers compared to 2026 RTX 5060, lower price

ASUS ROG Zephyrus G16 (2026)
Core Ultra 9 386H
RTX 5090
~$2,799
$500–800 cheaper; lower HDR brightness; same chip

Lenovo Legion 9i
Core Ultra 9 / i9-14900HX
RTX 5090
~$3,299
Upgradeable RAM; thicker; better sustained TGP

Alienware 16 Area-51 (2026)
Core Ultra 9 285H+
RTX 5090
~$3,499
Cherry MX keyboard option; heavier; more serviceable

MSI Titan GT16 HX
Core i9-14900HX
RTX 5090
~$3,299
Desktop-class CPU; far heavier; no portability pretense

The 2026 ASUS ROG Zephyrus G16 is the Blade’s most direct rival: it uses the same Panther Lake chip, similar GPU options, and has a comparably thin chassis. It consistently undercuts the Blade by $500–$800, depending on configuration. Razer wins on display quality and build prestige. Blade’s OLED produces noticeably richer colors and dramatically brighter HDR highlights. Whether that gap justifies the price difference is a personal call.

The Lenovo Legion 9i makes a compelling case for workstation users who care about upgradability — it has upgradable DDR5 RAM slots rather than soldered LPDDR5X, and its thicker chassis allows higher sustained GPU TGP. The Alienware 16 Area-51 competes closely on price with Cherry MX keyboard options and better repairability. Neither can match the Blade’s design, which matters to some buyers and not at all to others.

Related: The ASUS TUF Gaming F16 FX608 Laptop Review.

The Reality of Razer Blade Resale Value

When a laptop costs more than $3,000, you have to consider the long-term cost of ownership. Historically, Razer Blade models have depreciated at a moderate rate. Nevertheless, because hardware updates and refreshes are so frequent, a two-year-old Razer Blade will often lose 40% to 60% of its initial retail value on platforms like eBay, Swappa, or r/Hardwareswap. Used-laptop buyers are often cautious about purchasing out-of-warranty high-end models due to the higher costs of maintenance and repair.

Interestingly, we are now seeing a shift, with AMD Ryzen AI configurations tending to hold a higher percentage of their value on the used market. Second-hand buyers specifically seek out AMD-based Blades for their reputation for better thermal management and significantly better long-term battery health. This was not the case just a few years ago, when buyers favored Intel over AMD. So, if you plan to sell your laptop in 2 to 3 years to fund your next upgrade, the AMD version might actually save you money on both ends of the transaction.

Selling Your Used Razer Laptop with Gadget Salvation

When the time comes, Gadget Salvation is a strong choice for a hassle-free resale experience. We buy the full Razer Blade lineup across many generations, including current RTX 50-series models, offer instant online quotes, and pay quickly with no selling fees to deduct. If your configuration isn’t listed in our online database, our custom quote form lets you provide the details directly for evaluation. And sure, you’ll receive slightly less than you would through a private eBay sale, but the trade-off in convenience and security is significant for high-value computers.

## Ready to sell your Razer Blade computer?

Get an instant cash offer from Gadget Salvation, and enjoy free shipping + your payment deposited within 24 business hours of delivery.

Get My Free Quote →

## The Verdict: Which Razer Blade 16 Should You Buy?

  • Buy the AMD Ryzen AI 9 365 version if you want a cooler-running laptop, better battery life, a slightly lower price point, and better retention of resale value over time. It is the practical choice for most gamers and students.
  • Buy the Intel Core Ultra 9 386H if you require the absolute highest transfer speeds over native Thunderbolt 5, want high-end content creation performance, or want the specific display panel + GPU configuration combo exclusive to the Intel version.

## **FAQ:**
—
**Can you upgrade the RAM on either of the Razer Blade 16 models?** No. Both the Intel Core Ultra 9 386H and AMD Ryzen AI 9 365 Razer Blade 16 versions use soldered LPDDR5X memory, which cannot be upgraded after purchase. Choose your configuration at checkout carefully. 32GB covers most use cases; opt for 64GB if you run heavy virtual machines, do 4K video editing, or want to future-proof the system.
**Does the Intel Core Ultra 9 386H perform better in games than the AMD Ryzen AI 9 365?**When plugged into a wall outlet, gaming performance is almost identical. The Intel 386H might offer a minor 3% to 5% advantage in highly CPU-bound esports titles at 1080p, but at native QHD or 4K display resolutions, the GPU does the heavy lifting, making the gaming difference unnoticeable.
**Does the Razer Blade 16 overheat during extended gaming?** The ultra-thin chassis imposes TGP limits — the Blade sustains up to 130 W GPU TGP with 155 W Dynamic Boost, less than thicker competitors. Both AMD and Intel configurations use a vapor chamber and Honeywell PTM7958 thermal interface gel for heat management. Under max settings for extended sessions, expect the chassis to get noticeably warm. The 2026 Intel model runs cooler at the CPU level, which aids sustained GPU boost clocks. A laptop cooling pad is a worthwhile accessory for prolonged gaming or rendering sessions.
**Should I wait for the Intel Blade 16’s price to drop before buying?**If you can wait 6–9 months, probably yes. Razer Blade pricing historically drops by $200–$400 within the first year as AMD inventory clears and Intel models become standard. If you need a laptop now, the previous 2025 AMD model at a discounted price offers excellent value (comparable, if not better). Another option is to consider pre-owned inventory, although, given the computer is so recent, there isn’t much supply yet.

Is It Worth Buying a Laptop with an Intel Core i Processor in 2026?

The Intel Core i series defined a decade of laptops. But with the Core Ultra Series 3 (Panther Lake) now shipping, AMD Ryzen AI 300 threatening the mainstream, and Apple Silicon eating into resale values across the board — where does the classic “i5” or “i7” badge stand today?

Intel Core i Processors History

Intel’s naming history is a mess. The “Core i” branding — i3, i5, i7, i9 — ran from 2010 through roughly 2023 before Intel transitioned to “Core Ultra.” If someone’s selling a laptop with an “Intel Core i7” today, they’re almost certainly offering a machine built around 12th- or 13th-generation silicon, code-named Alder Lake or Raptor Lake. These aren’t bad chips. But they are aging.

In 2024, Intel rebranded aggressively. The “Core Ultra 100” series (Meteor Lake), “Core Ultra 200” series (Arrow Lake / Lunar Lake), and now the flagship Core Ultra Series 3 (Panther Lake, launched this year) have all dropped the “i” suffix entirely. So when you see “Core i5” or “Core i7” on a listing today, the generational context matters enormously.

Branding
Codename / Gen
Year
Verdict in 2026

Core i (10th–11th Gen)
Ice Lake / Tiger Lake
2019–2021
Avoid

Core i (12th Gen)
Alder Lake
2021–2022
Budget only

Core i (13th Gen)
Raptor Lake
2022–2023
Discounted deals

Core Ultra 100
Meteor Lake
2023–2024
Decent midrange

Core Ultra 200H/HX
Arrow Lake
2024–2025
Solid buy

Core Ultra Series 3
Panther Lake
2026
Current gen

The table above is the single most important filter. A “Core i7” sticker on a new-ish laptop at a suspiciously low price almost certainly means you’re looking at 12th or 13th Gen — silicon that’s now 3–4 years old and heading toward the software support cliff.

How Does Legacy Intel Core i Hold Up Today?

Let’s be clear: For everyday productivity (email, Office, browsing, video calls), a 12th-generation Core i7 is still perfectly functional in 2026. The problem isn’t performance in isolation. It’s the competitive context in which Core i chips now exist.

Intel’s Panther Lake (Core Ultra Series 3), launched at CES 2026 on the new Intel 18A process node, represents the company’s most dramatic single-generation improvement in years. The flagship Core Ultra X9 388H ships with up to 16 CPU cores, integrated Arc B390 graphics with 12 Xe3 GPU cores, and a 50 TOPS NPU — delivering claimed multi-threaded performance improvements of around 60% over the previous generation, plus up to 77% faster gaming throughput. Battery life tests on Panther Lake systems regularly hit 20+ hours of real-world use, closing the gap with Apple Silicon, which has long plagued Intel.

And AMD isn’t sitting still either. The Ryzen AI 300 series (Strix Point), with its XDNA 2 NPU architecture and Radeon 890M integrated graphics, competes directly at the high-performance end while often delivering better multi-core efficiency. On the ARM side, Apple’s M5 chips — and increasingly Windows on ARM via Qualcomm’s Snapdragon X2 — are setting a new efficiency standard that x86 is only just beginning to close in on.

For a legacy Intel Core i-based laptop purchased today, software depreciation alone is the real threat. Microsoft’s AI-powered Copilot+ features require a 40+ TOPS NPU, which no Core i generation meets. Windows will continue to run fine, but the “AI PC” wave of 2025–2027 will completely pass these computers by.

What Happens to Your Intel Laptop’s Value Over Time?

This is where the Intel Core i story gets pretty painful. Laptops depreciate at roughly 35% per year on average, and budget Intel-based ones tend to land at the harsher end of that curve:

Resale Value Retention by Laptop Category

// PROJECTED FROM PURCHASE PRICE · BASED ON MARKET RESALE DATA

Core Ultra Premium (XPS / ThinkPad)

* Projections based on market resale trends (Gadget Salvation, Back Market, Swappa). Actual values vary by condition, configuration, and market timing.

A mid-range Core i-based notebook purchased for $800 may resell for up to $450 after one year of use, ~$300 after two, and under $200 after three. Compare that to a MacBook M-series equivalent at the same price point, which commonly retains 50–63% of its value at the two-year mark.

Brand matters too. Premium Intel lines like Dell XPS or Lenovo ThinkPad hold value meaningfully better than budget Inspiron or budget Ideapad configurations: Build quality and software support longevity create demand in the secondary market. A Core i7 in a quality chassis will always depreciate at a slower pace than a Core i5 in a plastic shell.

**Have an outdated Core i7 laptop?** Gadget Salvation buys Intel laptops — even older Core i generations — for instant cash. Sell it before the value drops further.

[Get an Instant Offer →](https://www.gadgetsalvation.com/sell-laptop/)The broader point: if you’re buying an Intel Core i laptop today, understand that its resale mileage is shorter than you might expect. The secondhand market is aware that these chips are now effectively retired, and pricing reflects that.

Pros and Cons of Buying a Core i Laptop in 2026

There are real use cases where a Core i computer still makes sense. At the same time, there are situations where buying a discounted processor is ill-advised. Here’s the breakdown.

PROS:

  • Unbeatable Value: Retailers are aggressively discounting 13th and 14th-generation Core i laptops. You can easily pick up a highly capable Core i7 model for a fraction of the cost of a mid-tier modern Core Ultra one.

  • Overkill for Basic Productivity: If your daily routine consists of web browsing, processing large Excel sheets, streaming video, or working within standard SaaS applications, a recent (12th- to 14th-generation) Core i5 or i7 provides more than enough raw computational speed.

  • Ecosystem and Drivers: Unlike newer ARM-based architectures, which still battle occasional software compatibility hiccups, x86 Core i chips run every legacy Windows application perfectly.

CONS:

  • Subpar Battery Life: Compared to 2026 standards set by Intel’s Lunar Lake/Arrow Lake or Qualcomm’s Snapdragon platforms, older Intel Core i architectures are notoriously power-hungry, leading to significantly worse battery life.
  • Zero Next-Gen AI Support: Without an NPU, you lose access to local AI features, smart background removal, real-time translations, and automated productivity enhancements built into modern OS kernels.
  • Diminishing Software Longevity: Over the next 2–3 years, developers will optimize software specifically for NPU and hybrid architectures, potentially making older chips feel sluggish when running next-gen OS updates.

If You’re Buying Intel in 2026, This Is the One

It’s worth separating “legacy Core i” from “new Intel” entirely, because Core Ultra Series 3 laptops represent a genuine step forward. Intel’s 18A has provided the efficiency gains that Arrow Lake promised, but didn’t fully deliver.

That said, even a Panther Lake laptop bought today will depreciate faster than an equivalent MacBook. Apple Silicon’s combination of platform lock-in and aspirational brand value sustains secondhand prices in a way Windows hardware simply doesn’t. We consistently see Mac resale prices running 15–25% higher than comparable Windows premium laptops at the same depreciation stage.

Already Own an Intel Core i Laptop? Here’s What to Do

If you’re reading this because you already have a Core i machine and you’re weighing whether to hold or sell — the answer almost always favors selling sooner rather than later.

Resale values for Core i laptops (particularly 10th and 11th Gen) are eroding quickly as the gap to current-gen silicon widens. A 12th or 13th Gen machine still commands reasonable secondhand prices today, but in 12–18 months the Panther Lake wave will push those valuations lower. The depreciation curve is nonlinear — it steepens as newer architectures arrive and legacy machines lose software relevance.

The math: if your Core i laptop is worth $400 today and loses 25% per year, waiting one more year to sell costs you roughly $100. That’s money that could reduce the cost of a current-gen upgrade. Time-of-sale decisions matter, and acting during a strong secondary market window preserves more of your original investment.

Turn Your Core i Laptop Into Cash While You Still Can

Gadget Salvation pays top dollar for used laptops — Intel Core i- and AMD Ryzen-based, Core Ultra, and more. Get an instant online offer in just 30 seconds.

[Calculate My Offer →](https://www.gadgetsalvation.com/sell-laptop/) [Browse All Gadgets](https://www.gadgetsalvation.com/sell-all-gadgets/)

## **The Bottom Line**

Legacy Core i at full retail price: hard pass. You’d be overpaying for discontinued hardware, locked out of AI features, and set to depreciate faster than AMD and Snapdragon counterparts. The only context where an older Core i-based computer makes sense is a heavily discounted or pre-owned purchase where you don’t care about future resale, but even then, shop carefully.

Core Ultra 200H / 200V: still a good buy if the price is right. These chips perform well and run Copilot+ features (200V). Expect steep secondary-market depreciation relative to Apple, but the hardware is very much still considered current and capable.

Core Ultra Series 3 (Panther Lake): the first Intel mobile chip in years that’s genuinely exciting. Battery life that competes with ARM, integrated graphics that can finally handle gaming, and a 50 TOPS NPU that meets every current AI standard. If you want a Windows laptop in mid-2026, this is the architecture to buy.

And when it’s time to move on — whether you’re upgrading from a four-year-old Core i5 or a pristine Core Ultra 9 Series 3 — Gadget Salvation is here to turn that hardware into cash. The best time to sell a laptop is always before the next generation comes out.

## **FAQ**
—
**Did Intel stop making Core i3, i5, i7, and i9 chips?**Yes. Intel officially retired the “Core i” architecture starting late 2023. They replaced it with the “Intel Core” (for mainstream entry chips) and “Intel Core Ultra” (for performance and AI-focused chips) nomenclature.
**Will Windows 11 continue to support Intel Core i processors?**Absolutely. Windows 11 fully supports 8th-generation Intel chips and newer. Standard security updates, operating system patches, and basic feature sets will function without issue on Core i laptops for years to come. However, specialized local AI features will be locked out due to the lack of an NPU.
**Can I still play modern games on a Core i laptop in 2026?**Yes, assuming the laptop has a capable dedicated GPU (such as an NVIDIA RTX 40-series GPU), as modern games still heavily prioritize raw clock speeds and GPU power over NPU-driven capabilities.
**How do I tell if a Core i laptop is too old to buy?**Look at the generation number directly following the modifier (e.g., Core i7-**13**700H is 13th Gen; Core i5-**12**40P is 12th Gen). In 2026, we strongly recommend avoiding anything below a 12th-generation chip, as older models lack the hybrid performance/efficiency core architecture and will bottleneck rapidly.

How to Sell Your Used HP Laptop Online in 2026

OK, so that HP Pavilion, Spectre, or EliteBook has served you well. But with next-gen AI PCs and the latest HP OmniBook lineup taking over the tech world, your current laptop model might be starting to feel a little (or a lot) dated.

The good news? The secondhand laptop market is booming. Whether you’re looking to fund a brand-new upgrade or doing some digital decluttering, selling your used HP laptop online can net you a solid chunk of change.

Here is your foolproof, step-by-step guide to prepping, pricing, and successfully selling your HP laptop online.

What Your HP Laptop Is Actually Worth in 2026

HP’s laptop lineup spans more price tiers than almost any other manufacturer, which means resale value varies enormously depending on which model you own.

Zbook mobile workstations and the Omen gaming HP series hold their resale value best. The demand for used consumer models like the Pavilion is not as robust: anyone who wants a cheap laptop tends to buy new rather than used.

If you’re not sure exactly what HP model you have, flip the laptop over. The model number is usually on a sticker on the bottom panel, or you can check Settings → System → About in Windows.

How Condition Affects Your Payout

Condition is the single biggest lever you can actually control. A pristine HP EliteBook and a beat-up one of the same model can differ in resale value by 40% or more. Buyers — whether that’s an individual on eBay or a buyback service like Gadget Salvation — grade laptops consistently across a few standard tiers:

// CONDITION GRADING

How Condition Affects Your Payout

// TIER A

Flawless

No cosmetic wear whatsoever. Screen, chassis, keyboard, and ports look exactly as they would out of the box. Zero scratches, scuffs, or marks.

Full resale value

// TIER B

Good

Light surface scratches or minor scuffs visible on close inspection. Screen clear with no marks. Normal signs of careful everyday use.

~75–90% of value

// TIER C

Fair

Visible scratches, scuffs, or wear marks noticeable at arm’s length. May include minor dents on corners or edges. Screen free of damage.

~50–70% of value

// TIER D

Poor

Heavy cosmetic damage — deep scratches, significant dents, cracked casing, or a damaged screen. All core functions still work.

~25–45% of value

Be honest with yourself here. Overrating your computer’s condition is the most common reason sellers end up disappointed when a trade-in service adjusts its quote after a physical inspection. Gadget Salvation’s inspection process is transparent — if there’s a discrepancy in the seller’s description, we’ll explain it and let you either accept the revised offer or get your gadget back at no cost.

Prep Your HP Laptop Before You Sell

These steps take about 30 minutes and can meaningfully improve your payout, or at a minimum, protect you from surprises. Don’t skip the data wipe. Ever.

  1. Back up everything. Use an external drive or cloud backup (OneDrive, Google Drive) to copy your documents, photos, and any application data you want to keep. Once you factory reset, this data is gone.
  2. Deauthorize software licenses. If you have licensed software tied to this notebook (Adobe Creative Cloud, Microsoft 365, or similar), deactivate it before resetting. Most apps have a “Sign out” or “Deauthorize this device” option in their account settings. This frees up the license for your next computer.
  3. Factory reset Windows. Go to Settings → System → Recovery → Reset this PC. Choose “Remove everything” and select “Remove files and clean the drive” for the most thorough wipe. This option overwrites data rather than just deleting the pointer to it (important if this device is going to a stranger).
  4. Clean the exterior. A microfiber cloth and a small amount of isopropyl alcohol (70%) can remove fingerprints, dust, and grime that make a laptop photograph poorly and look worse than it is. Clean the keyboard, screen, and chassis. Don’t spray directly on the screen; dampen the cloth first.
  5. Check battery health. Run powercfg /batteryreport from the Command Prompt. This generates an HTML report showing your battery’s current capacity compared to its original design capacity. Know this number: it’s something any serious buyer or trade-in service will assess. If it’s below 60%, that factor is factored into pricing.

// PRE-SALE CHECKLIST

Before You Ship Your HP Laptop

–

Data backed up

External drive or cloud — documents, photos, anything you want to keep

–

Software deauthorized

Sign out of Adobe, Microsoft 365, and any other licensed apps on this device

–

Windows factory reset — full drive wipe

Settings → System → Recovery → Reset this PC → Remove everything → Remove files and clean the drive

–

Exterior cleaned

Microfiber cloth on screen, keyboard, and chassis — removes grime that lowers perceived condition

–

Model number confirmed

Bottom sticker or Settings → System → About — needed for an accurate quote

Most buyers/buyback sites expect the charger to be included with the laptop. But additional accessories, such as docking stations, spare chargers, a mouse, or storage upgrades, rarely add any meaningful dollar value to your used HP. Still, if you list on a marketplace (Facebook Marketplace or eBay), noting the extras in the description can speed up the sale.

Where to Sell a Used HP: Platform Comparison

Every selling platform involves a trade-off between payout potential and the time and risk you take on. Here’s how the main options stack up for selling an HP laptop in 2026:

Platform Type
Best Examples
Pros
Cons

Instant Buyback Sites
Gadget Salvation, BuyBackTronics, etc.
Zero hassle, instant quote, free shipping labels.
You’ll get slightly less than market value. But it is a cash payout.

Peer-to-Peer Marketplaces
eBay, Swappa
Reaches a massive audience; yields the highest payout.
Platform fees, shipping logistics, potential return hassles, and chargebacks.

Local Sales
Facebook Marketplace, OfferUp
Quick cash, no shipping costs, no platform fees.
Flaky buyers, safety concerns (always meet in a public, well-lit place).

Retailer Trade-Ins
Best Buy Trade-In, HP Trade-In
Convenient and streamlined. Perfect for when you are upgrading to the newer model or buying another gadget from that retailer.
Pays out in store credit, not cash. Offers are typically 25-45% below what a dedicated reseller will pay.

For many people in 2026, when it comes to selling a used HP laptop online, Gadget Salvation strikes the perfect balance. You get real cash (not store credit), you don’t have to deal with buyers directly or even wait for a motivated buyer, and the whole process takes days rather than weeks.

Creating a Listing on a Marketplace

If you decide to sell your HP on eBay, Swappa, or Facebook Marketplace, the listing needs to stand out from the sea of other sellers.

Ditch the Stock Photos

Buyers want to see your actual product. Take clear photos in good, natural lighting from multiple angles: the top lid, the screen turned on (showing it successfully boots), the keyboard, and the ports. Be completely honest and take close-ups of any scratches or dings. Honesty prevents returns and bad reviews later.

Write a Clear, Spec-Heavy Title

An example of eBay listing titles.

Don’t just write “HP Laptop.” Use keywords that buyers actually search for.

  • Bad: HP Laptop for sale
  • Good: HP Spectre x360 14″ Intel Core i7-1355U, 16GB RAM, 512GB SSD, in Mint Condition

Be Transparent in the Description

List the exact specs (Processor, RAM, Storage, Screen Resolution, and Battery Health if you know it). State clearly what is included (e.g., “Comes with original HP charger and a protective sleeve”).

Price It Competitively

Do a quick search on eBay for your exact model and filter by “Sold Items” to see what people are actually paying, not just what other sellers are asking. Price yours competitively based on its condition. If you want a quick sale, price it about 5% to 10% below what a competitor asks. Monitor and revise the price regularly.

In Conclusion

Selling a used HP laptop online doesn’t have to be complicated, but getting it right takes a few deliberate steps and choices. Know your model, research prices, be honest about the condition, and factory reset your HP. Lastly, don’t wait: every month a laptop sits unused is a month of depreciation you’re absorbing for free. In other words, your HP is worth more today than it will be six months from now.

## **FAQ**
—
**What is my HP laptop worth in 2026?**It depends heavily on the model line and specs. For example, [Intel Core i-based](https://cashforusedlaptops.com/is-it-worth-buying-a-laptop-with-an-intel-core-i-processor-in-2026/ “Intel Core i Laptops”) HP models will likely see a dramatic drop in resale value as new Ultra-series processors continue to be released.
**Can I sell an HP laptop if it has a dead battery or a broken screen?**Absolutely, but you must clearly select and state “For Parts / Not Working” in both the title and description, if selling on a marketplace, or specify that the computer is “Defective” when calculating an offer on the buyback site.
**Does the HP laptop need to come with the original box or charger?**While you don’t need the original packaging, a working charger is often expected or even required to be included. If you are shipping the computer, make sure to securely pack it in a sturdy box with padding.
**Is Gadget Salvation legit for selling HP laptops?**Yes, we have been operating since 2008 and maintain an A+ rating with the Better Business Bureau. Because we are not a generalized marketplace, our buyback process is designed specifically for selling used computers (along with smartphones, tablets, and other gadgets). Here, upfront, transparent pricing, free shipping, and fast payment are the standard, not the exception.

A Deep Dive into NVIDIA RTX Spark Laptops

NVIDIA’s first-ever Windows chip fuses a Grace ARM CPU, a Blackwell GPU, and up to 128GB of unified memory into the thinnest, most capable AI laptops ever built. Here is everything you need to know before Fall 2026.

What Is the NVIDIA RTX Spark?

At Computex 2026 in Taipei, NVIDIA CEO Jensen Huang walked onto the stage beside Microsoft’s Satya Nadella and announced something the industry had been whispering about for three years: NVIDIA was finally entering the consumer PC chip market. The result is the NVIDIA RTX Spark Superchip — the company’s first-ever Windows system-on-chip (SoC), and arguably the most significant laptop platform announcement since Apple Silicon.

NVIDIA N1X ARM-based laptop processor.

RTX Spark is not a discrete graphics card strapped onto a CPU. It is a unified superchip — NVIDIA’s own ARM-based Grace CPU paired directly to a Blackwell-architecture GPU, connected by the company’s NVLink C2C interconnect, and sharing a single pool of up to 128GB of LPDDR5X memory. The whole package is manufactured on TSMC’s 3nm process. The result is a chip that delivers up to 1 petaflop of FP4 AI compute inside a chassis thin enough to forget you’re carrying it.

RTX Spark Superchip: Full Specs

NVIDIA has confirmed two chip variants under the RTX Spark umbrella. The N1X (RTX Spark Superchip) is the platform’s flagship. A more accessible N1 variant targets lower price points with reduced CPU and GPU resources.

Feature / Specification
Flagship Tier (N1X Silicon)
“Budget” Tier (N1 Silicon)

CPU
20-Core NVIDIA Grace CPU (Arm-based)
12-Core NVIDIA Grace CPU (Arm-based)

GPU
Blackwell RTX GPU (6,144 CUDA Cores)
Blackwell RTX GPU (RTX 5050 equivalent)

Unified Memory
Up to 128GB LPDDR5X Unified Memory
Up to 64GB LPDDR5X (128-bit bus)

AI Tensor Precision
5th Gen Tensor Cores with FP4 Support
5th Gen Tensor Cores with FP4 Support

Target Form Factor
Premium 15″ – 16″ Pro laptops (~12.9mm thin)
Ultraportable 13″ – 14″ laptops (~3lbs)

### **Real-World Performance Expectations:**

  • Local Frontier AI Models: With up to 1 Petaflop of local processing power via FP4 precision, these laptops can execute massive 120-billion-parameter Large Language Models (LLMs) with up to a 1-million-token context window completely offline. This transitions the PC from a simple tool into an active, autonomous teammate that handles data, coding, and asset generation with ultimate local privacy.
  • Heavy Creation & World Building: Because the system dynamically shares a massive memory pool, 3D artists can render ultra-large 90GB+ 3D scenes natively in tools like Blender or NVIDIA Omniverse. Major software suites like Adobe are completely rearchitecting Photoshop and Premiere Pro from scratch to leverage this architecture, promising a 2x leap in rendering and AI performance.
  • Elite Mobile Gaming: Traditionally, “Windows on Arm” architectures have struggled with gaming due to bad emulation. NVIDIA has bridged this gap by combining Microsoft’s enhanced Prism emulation layer with native driver hooks. RTX Spark laptops run AAA titles beautifully, delivering crisp 1440p gaming at over 100 FPS with full support for real-time ray tracing, DLSS Frame Generation, Reflex, and G-Sync.
  • The Battery Breakthrough: Because the heavy lifting is handled by an ultra-efficient Arm architecture, these laptops defy the old rule that high performance means short-lived battery. Early designs routinely achieve true all-day battery life while maintaining ultra-thin profiles.

Every RTX Spark Laptop Confirmed So Far

NVIDIA has confirmed partnerships with six laptop brands for the initial launch, with Acer and GIGABYTE to follow shortly. In total, over 30 laptops and around 10 compact desktops are expected at launch this fall. Here’s what we know about each confirmed device:

Surface Laptop Ultra

128 GB Blackwell GPU Co-developed

Microsoft’s own flagship RTX Spark device. Built for creators and AI developers, with the deepest Windows agent integration of any OEM — Microsoft co-designed the platform alongside NVIDIA.

Fall 2026

ProArt P16

4K 120Hz OLED G-SYNC 99.9 Wh

16-inch creator flagship with Lumina Pro OLED up to 4K 120Hz VRR, 1,600-nit peak, G-SYNC. CNC-machined chassis in Nano Black or Neo White. Up to 128 GB unified memory.

Fall 2026

ProArt P14

3K OLED ~0.5″ thin

Compact 14-inch sibling to the P16. Lumina Pro OLED up to 3K, ultra-thin CNC chassis. Built for creators who prioritise portability without sacrificing the full N1X AI stack.

Fall 2026

XPS 16 Creator Edition

Tandem OLED HDR 600 HDMI + SD

The XPS 16 reborn for the AI era. True Black HDR 600 Tandem OLED, full-size HDMI and SD card slot, up to 128 GB. Aimed at creators who refused to choose between ports and performance.

Fall 2026

OmniBook Ultra 16

15.73 mm thin Thinnest 16″

HP claims this will be one of the thinnest RTX Spark laptops available — just 15.73 mm at the rear. A strong option for road warriors who need full N1X power in the slimmest possible chassis.

Late 2026

OmniBook X 14

13.53 mm thin Thinnest 14″

The 14-inch counterpart to HP’s Ultra 16, claiming the title of thinnest 14-inch RTX Spark laptop at just 13.53 mm rear height. Ultra-portable with full Spark AI capability.

Late 2026

Yoga Pro 9n

16-inch Creator Focus

Lenovo’s beloved Yoga Pro 9 line steps into the RTX Spark era with a 16-inch N1X configuration. Full display and pricing specs are still TBA, but the Yoga Pro pedigree promises a premium build.

Fall 2026

Prestige N16 Flip AI+

UHD+ OLED Touchscreen 2-in-1

The only confirmed convertible in the first RTX Spark wave. 16-inch UHD+ Tandem OLED touchscreen, MSI Nano Pen stylus, 99.9 Wh battery. Ideal for artists and tablet-mode AI workflows.

Fall 2026

// More Coming

Acer & GIGABYTE

Second wave confirmed by NVIDIA. Details TBA.

In addition to laptops, MSI is shipping the [EdgeMesa N AI+ Mini PC](https://www.msi.com/news/detail/MSI-Unveils-EdgeMesa-N-AI–Mini-PC-Powered-by-NVIDIA-RTX-Spark-at-COMPUTEX-2026-148987 “EdgeMesa N AI+ Mini PC”), a micro-form-factor desktop with enough USB-C and HDMI bandwidth to drive up to four external displays simultaneously. It is positioned as a 24/7 local AI agent computer that can run models continuously at your desk without the power constraints of a laptop chassis.

Microsoft Surface Laptop Ultra is one of the first laptop models optimized for the RTX Spark chip.

Gadget Salvation Buyback

Upgrading to RTX Spark?

Sell your current laptop before its resale value declines. Calculate an instant quote online, ship for free, and get paid fast!

[ Get a Free Quote ](https://www.gadgetsalvation.com/)## **How Much Will RTX Spark Laptops Cost?**

While no official prices have been published yet, let’s not kid ourselves: NVIDIA RTX Spark laptops are going to be very expensive. This is enterprise-grade supercomputer hardware tailored into a consumer clamshell, and the early models will carry a premium.

Morgan Stanley projects that the entry-level models with N1 silicon (paired with 16GB of unified RAM) will start at a steep base price of $1,800. If your workload demands the top-tier N1X configuration with 128GB of RAM, expect to spend around $3,500 to $5,000+.

This prohibitive pricing stems from three manufacturing caveats:

  1. On-Substrate Memory Routing: Integrating massive, high-speed, unified pools of LPDDR5X memory directly adjacent to the processing cores requires specialized, low-yield advanced packaging methods.
  2. Massive Silicon Footprint: Fusing a Grace CPU with a heavy Blackwell GPU requires a giant physical die layout, driving up semiconductor fabrication costs.
  3. Premium Chassis and Displays: Laptop vendors are treating these as halo-tier products. You won’t find these chips in cheap plastic bodies. Every announced device incorporates high-end CNC-machined aluminum builds, advanced cooling arrays, and elite display tech (such as 4K 120Hz Lumina OLEDs or 2,000-nit Mini-LED panels).

For ordinary consumers, these numbers will hurt. But for AI developers who currently pay for cloud GPU time, an RTX Spark laptop running 120B-parameter models locally could pay for itself within months in avoided API costs.

Whom Are Spark Laptops For?

Given the steep financial investment and extreme performance overhead, an RTX Spark laptop is completely unnecessary for everyday tasks like web browsing, document writing, or casual media streaming. Instead, this ecosystem caters to specific elite tiers of power users:

  • AI Developers, Researchers, and Data Scientists. This is RTX Spark’s strongest use case, and the premium price is most easily justified here. It is ideal for those writing, fine-tuning, or prototyping cutting-edge local AI models using CUDA-accelerated PyTorch, llama.cpp, and TensorRT. The 128GB memory ceiling enables local testing of models that previously required thousands of dollars per month in cloud compute infrastructure.
  • High-End Creative Professionals & World Builders. Adobe’s deep partnership with NVIDIA on RTX Spark is a serious signal. For editors, motion designers, and 3D artists who have been forced to choose between portability and horsepower, RTX Spark is the first truly compelling answer.
  • No-Compromise Premium Enthusiasts Who Game. Users who have long envied the silent operation, premium build, and long-lasting battery of high-end MacBook Pros, but refuse to leave the native Windows ecosystem, local developer environments, or the vast world of AAA ray-traced PC gaming, will appreciate RTX Spark.

NVIDIA RTX Spark vs. Apple Silicon: How Do They Compare?

The obvious reference point for an ARM SoC with a large unified memory pool and thin-and-light form factor is Apple Silicon. The comparison is inevitable and interesting because the two chips make very different trade-offs.

Apple Silicon vs. RTX Spark

// BENCHMARK COMPARISON · PRE-LAUNCH ESTIMATES · COMPUTEX 2026

AI Compute

AI TOPS
(FP4 / Neural Engine)

Max LLM
Parameters (local)

GPU Performance

GPU Synthetic
(est. relative)

Memory

CPU

* Pre-launch estimates based on NVIDIA Computex 2026 disclosures, Notebookcheck analysis, and comparable DGX Spark benchmark data. RTX Spark devices not yet available for independent testing. Gaming estimates assume DLSS 4.5 enabled. Apple M5 bandwidth figures per Apple spec sheet. Actual results will vary by OEM thermal implementation.

NVIDIA RTX Spark has a massive lead in raw AI computing power thanks to the Blackwell Tensor Core architecture and FP4 support. Apple’s Neural Engine delivers 38 TOPS compared to RTX Spark’s ~1,000 TOPS (a 26× gap). For GPU-accelerated AI frameworks like PyTorch and the full CUDA ecosystem, RTX Spark is decisively ahead.

The picture is more nuanced for creative work and general performance. The N1X’s GPU performance should sit between the Apple M5 Pro and M5 Max in creative benchmarks, while NVIDIA expects an edge in games. Apple Silicon’s single-core CPU performance and memory bandwidth remain class-leading, and macOS app compatibility is still broader than Windows on ARM for many creative professionals.

The main argument for RTX Spark is the CUDA software ecosystem. Every AI development tool, every GPU-accelerated renderer, every CUDA-native application (ComfyUI, Stable Diffusion, Blender GPU rendering, DaVinci Resolve with CUDA acceleration) runs natively and optimally. For anyone already living inside CUDA workflows, this is not a small thing.

NVIDIA’s Three-Generation Spark Commitment

One of the most strategically significant moments at Computex 2026 wasn’t the unveiling of the RTX Spark chip — it was Jensen Huang publicly committing to a three-generation roadmap for the Spark platform. This matters because the biggest risk with any new Windows on ARM platform is partner hesitation: OEMs and software vendors are reluctant to invest unless they believe the platform will be around for multiple cycles.

// Gen 1 Fall 2026 Launching Now

Grace Blackwell

20-core Grace CPU 6,144 CUDA Cores 1 PFLOP FP4 128 GB LPDDR5X TSMC 3nm 300 GB/s

The debut superchip. A 20-core Grace ARM CPU paired with a Blackwell GPU over NVLink C2C, delivering 1 petaflop of FP4 AI compute in chassis as thin as 13mm. Launches in 30+ laptops from ASUS, Dell, HP, Lenovo, Microsoft, and MSI.

// Gen 2 ~2027–2028

Vera Rubin

Vera CPU Rubin GPU LPDDR6 Memory Higher Bandwidth Next-gen node

The second Spark generation advances to NVIDIA’s Vera CPU architecture alongside the Rubin GPU. The move to LPDDR6 memory promises significantly higher bandwidth and improved power efficiency — the same generational leap Apple Silicon typically delivers every two years.

// Gen 3 ~2028–2029

Rosa Feynman

Rosa CPU Feynman GPU Next-gen Memory TBA

The third confirmed generation pairs a Rosa CPU with Feynman GPU architecture. Memory technology is yet to be publicly specified. Publicly committing to this generation at Computex 2026 is NVIDIA’s clearest signal yet that RTX Spark is a long-term platform — not a one-cycle experiment.

* Roadmap confirmed by Jensen Huang at Computex 2026. Gen 2 and Gen 3 specs are not yet fully disclosed. Timeline estimates based on NVIDIA’s typical 18–24 month architecture cadence.

The third confirmed generation pairs a Rosa CPU with a Feynman GPU architecture and a next-generation memory solution that is yet to be publicly outlined. The platform roadmap extends NVIDIA’s commitment to the Spark form factor well into the end of the decade.

This multi-generational public commitment is NVIDIA’s answer to the question that killed Qualcomm’s Windows on ARM ambitions: “Will you still be here in three years?” NVIDIA’s answer is “yes“, and they’re showing the receipts. For enterprise buyers, ISVs, and OEMs evaluating whether to invest in the platform, this roadmap is foundational to any decision.

Should You Buy an RTX Spark Laptop?

The RTX Spark superchip is, without a doubt, a historic announcement. For the first time, a Windows laptop will offer the full NVIDIA CUDA ecosystem, datacenter-class AI compute, and a large unified memory pool in a thin chassis with all-day battery life. On paper, it closes the gap with Apple Silicon that Windows users have been tolerating for four years. And as far as AI workloads go, Spark doesn’t just close the gap, it laps it.

Buy if: You are an AI developer paying for GPU cloud time, a creative professional whose workflows are bottlenecked by VRAM, a researcher who needs to run large local models privately, or a gamer who also does serious creative work. For these buyers, the premium is legitimate, and the platform will be genuinely transformative.

Wait if: You primarily use your laptop for productivity, communication, or light media consumption. The mainstream Windows laptop market is well-stocked with $800–$1,500 offerings, and RTX Spark’s advantages don’t apply to those tasks. Additionally, early adopters on Windows on ARM always face some app compatibility friction, so waiting a generation allows the software ecosystem to iron out the wrinkles.

Sell your laptop now if: You know an RTX Spark computer is in your future. The optimal moment to trade in your current model is before the new release shifts the resale market. We at Gadget Salvation have been helping people get compelling cash back for aging hardware since 2008, and our instant quotation system lets you lock in today’s resale value in minutes.

## Frequently asked questions
01 What is the NVIDIA RTX Spark Superchip?

RTX Spark is NVIDIA’s first-ever Windows system-on-chip, unveiled at Computex 2026. Rather than bolting a discrete GPU onto a CPU, it fuses an ARM-based Grace CPU directly to a Blackwell-architecture GPU over NVLink C2C, sharing a single pool of up to 128GB of LPDDR5X unified memory on TSMC’s 3nm process. The flagship N1X tier delivers roughly 1 petaflop of FP4 AI compute in a chassis as thin as 13mm, making it arguably the most significant laptop platform announcement since Apple Silicon.

02 What’s the difference between the N1X and N1 chip variants?

The **N1X** is the flagship tier: a 20-core Grace CPU, a Blackwell GPU with 6,144 CUDA cores, and up to 128GB of unified memory, aimed at premium 15–16″ pro laptops around 12.9mm thin. The more accessible **N1** targets lower price points with a 12-core Grace CPU, an RTX 5050-equivalent GPU, and up to 64GB of LPDDR5X on a 128-bit bus, built for ultraportable 13–14″ designs around 3 lbs. Both share 5th-gen Tensor Cores with FP4 support.

03 How much will RTX Spark laptops cost, and when do they launch?

No official pricing has been published, but these are halo-tier products. Morgan Stanley projects entry-level N1 models (with 16GB of unified RAM) starting around $1,800, while top-tier N1X configurations with 128GB of RAM are expected to run roughly $3,500 to $5,000+. The premium stems from on-substrate memory routing, a large fused Grace + Blackwell die, and high-end CNC chassis with elite displays. The first wave launches in Fall 2026, with 30+ laptops and around 10 compact desktops expected, and HP’s OmniBook models arriving in late 2026.

04 How does RTX Spark compare to Apple Silicon?

RTX Spark holds a massive lead in raw AI compute — roughly 1,000 TOPS versus the Apple M5’s ~38 TOPS Neural Engine, about a 26× gap — and can run larger local models (120B parameters vs. ~70B). The N1X’s GPU is estimated to land between the M5 Pro and M5 Max, with an edge in AAA gaming at 1440p. Apple still leads on single-core CPU performance and memory bandwidth, and macOS app compatibility remains broader than Windows on ARM for many creatives. The real draw for Spark is native access to the full CUDA software ecosystem.

05 Should I buy an RTX Spark laptop, or wait?

**Buy** if you’re an AI developer paying for cloud GPU time, a creative professional bottlenecked by VRAM, a researcher running large local models privately, or a gamer who also does serious creative work — the premium is legitimate for those workflows. **Wait** if you mainly browse, write, communicate, or stream, since mainstream $800–$1,500 Windows laptops cover those tasks and Spark’s advantages don’t apply. Early Windows on ARM adopters also face some app compatibility friction, so waiting a generation lets the software ecosystem mature.

06 Is Windows on ARM still a gaming and app-compatibility problem?

Gaming is dramatically improved over earlier Windows on ARM attempts. NVIDIA pairs Microsoft’s enhanced Prism emulation layer with native driver hooks, and RTX Spark laptops are expected to run AAA titles at 1440p above 100 FPS with full support for ray tracing, DLSS Frame Generation, Reflex, and G-Sync. That said, app compatibility friction hasn’t vanished entirely — some software still runs through emulation, and macOS remains broader for certain creative tools. The ecosystem is expected to keep tightening as the platform matures.

07 Should I sell my current laptop before RTX Spark arrives?

If an RTX Spark machine is in your future, the smart move is to trade in your current laptop _before_ the Fall 2026 launch shifts the resale market — values typically dip once a major new platform lands. **Gadget Salvation** has helped people get compelling cash back for aging hardware since 2008, and our instant quotation system lets you lock in today’s resale value in minutes. Calculate a free quote online, ship for free with a prepaid insured label, and get paid within two business days of inspection.

The Ultimate Guide to Your Old Laptop’s Next Chapter

We’ve all got one: that “tech drawer” or shelf where our old electronics retire. Sitting tucked away is your previous laptop. It might be a bit sluggish, the battery might not hold a charge as long as it used to, or maybe you simply upgraded to a newer model and never quite figured out what to do with this one.

But letting an old laptop sit there doesn’t just clutter your home. It is a missed opportunity. Depending on its age and condition, your computer could be a source of fast store credit, extra cash in your account, or a lifeline for someone bridging the digital divide.

Deciding whether to trade in, resell, or donate your laptop comes down to balancing three factors: time, money, and social impact. This guide will walk you through the steps to prepare your laptop and help you choose the best path forward.

The Quick Decision Path

If you only read one section, read this one. Here’s how most people land on the right answer.

### **Option 1: Trade It In (Cash or Store Credit)**

Trading in means selling your laptop directly to a service that specializes in buying and reselling used electronics. You answer a few questions about the model and condition, get a locked quote, ship the device in (often with a prepaid label), and get paid — usually within a few days of the laptop arriving.

Why Do People Choose It:

  • Speed. The timeframe from a quote to payout (or upgrade credit) is typically measured in days.
  • No buyer risk. No flaky buyers, no lowball offers and bargaining, no chargebacks.
  • Buyback works with broken laptops, too. Cracked screen, dead battery, won’t boot: most online buyback sites, including Gadget Salvation, still pay something because individual components (RAM, SSD, etc.) retain value even when the whole unit no longer works as intended.
  • Data handling is built in. Reputable services securely wipe the drive as part of processing, which removes one of the more stressful parts of letting go of a device that’s had your whole digital life on it.

Where It Falls Short:

  • You’ll typically get less than what a private sale could fetch, as you’re trading a portion of the cashback amount for speed and certainty.
  • Quotes and speed vary by service, so it’s worth comparing two or three before committing.

A trade-in or selling via an online buyback is the right call for most people, most of the time. It’s the path of least resistance, and for a laptop that’s still in working order, it often yields the best dollars-per-minute-of-effort among the three options.

Option 2: Sell It Privately

This is the eBay, Facebook Marketplace, Craigslist route: listing the old laptop yourself and selling directly to another individual. It’s the option with the highest price potential, but also the highest effort required.

Why Do People Choose It:

  • Higher potential payout. Cutting out the middleman can help you capture more of a laptop’s resale value, especially for desirable or recent models.
  • You control pricing. You can set your asking price rather than accepting a fixed quote.

Where It Falls Short:

  • Time. Taking photos, providing an accurate description, answering buyer questions, negotiating — this easily eats a few hours, sometimes spread across days (or even months).
  • Risk. No-show buyers, payment scams, and chargeback fraud are all real and common on peer-to-peer marketplaces.
  • Shipping is on you. You’re responsible for safely packaging and shipping the computer and handling any damage-in-transit disputes.

Private resale makes the most sense for well-known laptop models with strong demand. More recent MacBooks, popular gaming laptops, and premium ultrabooks are where the price gap between a trade-in quote and a private sale is large enough to justify the legwork.

Option 3: Donate It

Donating is the right move when a laptop’s resale value is low or nonexistent, but it still has functional life left. Or when you’d simply rather see it go to a school, nonprofit, or someone who needs a basic computer than chase a small cash payout.

Why Do People Choose It:

  • Zero financial expectation, zero stress. No listing, no negotiating, no shipping logistics to manage.
  • Tax deduction potential. In the US, donations to registered 501(c)(3) organizations are generally deductible at fair market value if you itemize and get the receipt.
  • Direct community impact. Schools, libraries, and nonprofits often have an ongoing need for basic, working laptops.

Where It Falls Short:

  • You get $0 (aside from a possible tax deduction), so it’s the wrong choice if the laptop has real resale value.
  • Many donation programs have minimum requirements and won’t accept nonfunctional or damaged laptops, so check before dropping off the computer.

Donation is best reserved for laptops that are pretty old, have basic, low-spec hardware (like Celeron/Pentium CPU, 4GB RAM, 64GB eMMC), or are too cosmetically unappealing to be worth selling (think anything more than six years old, or models that have already been quoted near $0 by a trade-in service).

Side-by-Side Comparison

| Factor | Trade-In | Private Sale | Donate |
|—|—|—|—|
| Payout speed | Days | Days to weeks (sometimes months) | None |
| Typical dollar value | Moderate, guaranteed | Highest, uncertain | $0 (tax write-off only) |
| Effort required | Low | High | Low |
| Works if broken / won’t boot | Usually yes | Rarely worth it | Often not accepted |
| Buyer risk / scams | None | Real risk | None |
| Data wiping handled for you | Yes, by service | No, your responsibility | No, your responsibility |

## **How Much Your Laptop Loses Just by Waiting**

One factor that pushes a lot of people toward buyback/trade-in over the “I’ll get to it eventually” is that laptops depreciate, i.e., lose resale value, as time goes by. A notebook that’s worth a meaningful sum today will be worth meaningfully less in twelve months, and a lot less in three years.

## **Before You Choose: Always Do This First**

  • Back up your files. Photos, documents, anything you’d miss: get it onto a drive or cloud storage before that old laptop leaves your hands.
  • Sign out of every account. iCloud, Google, Microsoft, and, in particular, any DRM-locked software. Forgetting this step can leave the computer inaccessible (thus useless) to the next owner.
  • Securely wipe storage. Use your operating system’s built-in secure erase or reset tool. If you’re trading in, reputable services handle this for you as part of processing.
  • Note the condition honestly. The condition of the hardware is just as important (if not more so) than looks. Battery health, for example, is something buyers care about; therefore, it is factored in in the laptop’s resale price. Be upfront about any known issues and blemishes when getting quotes or listing for sale, to safeguard yourself from potential returns and offer adjustments.

So, Which One Should You Pick?

So here is the short version: buyback/trade-in wins on convenience and certainty, private sale wins on maximum dollars (if you’re willing to put in the time), and donation wins when the resale value is too low to bother chasing. For the large majority of working hardware under five years old, trade-in hits the best balance. And it costs nothing to check what your laptop is worth before deciding anything else.

## **FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS:**
—
**Can I trade in a laptop that doesn’t turn on?**Yes. Most trade-in services, including Gadget Salvation, still buy non-functional laptops.
**Is it better to trade in or sell a laptop privately?**Trade-in is better when speed, certainty, and zero hassle matter most. You get a locked quote and fast payment without listing, photographing, or shipping risk. Private resale can net more money but takes longer, carries risks, and generally requires more effort.
**How do I calculate the tax deduction for a donated laptop?**To claim a tax deduction, you must donate to a registered 501(c)(3) non-profit organization, which will provide you with a tax receipt. The deduction amount is based on the laptop’s _fair market value_: what a buyer would reasonably pay for it in its current condition, rather than what you originally paid for it new. Consult a tax professional for specific filings.
**What should I include with my old laptop?**You should always include the original power charger. Omitting it will lower laptop’s trade-in or resale value. Including optional extras like the original box, a laptop sleeve, or a wireless mouse can make your listing much more appealing to private buyers, but is not relevant when trading in online.

The Best Windows Equivalent to the MacBook Neo

When Apple announced the MacBook Neo in March 2026, it wasn’t just another MacBook Air refresh — it was the first Mac ever built around an iPhone chip. The A18 Pro, originally destined for iPhone 16 Pro models, gave the 13-inch Neo enough power for everyday tasks and on-device AI at a starting price of just $599. It was quickly dubbed the best budget laptop Apple has ever shipped, and it sold well enough that Apple had to order an entirely new production run of chips to keep up with the demand.

That kind of success doesn’t go unnoticed. The PC ecosystem has scrambled to respond to Apple’s budget breakthrough. None of the current Windows laptops is a perfect match, since the Neo’s strength is Apple’s tight hardware-software integration rather than any single metric on a spec sheet. But several come close enough, and a few actually beat it outright in specific areas.

What Actually Makes a Good Neo Rival

Before getting into specific models, it’s worth defining what “Windows equivalent” should mean here. It’s not just about hitting a similar price — it’s about matching the feel of a laptop that doesn’t feel cheap.

Price Band

$599–$799

Anything pricier stops being a true Neo competitor and becomes a different category.

Build

Metal, not plastic

The Neo’s aluminum chassis is the bar every Windows maker is now building toward.

Battery

All-day minimum

The Neo claims up to 16 hours; competitors need to match or beat that to matter.

On-Device AI

NPU-equipped

Copilot+ PC certification or equivalent NPU power to match Apple Intelligence.

## **5 Windows Laptops Going Head-to-Head With the MacBook Neo**

Two of these are available on shelves today: the Dell 14 Plus and the Acer Swift Go 14. The Dell XPS 13, Asus Zenbook A14, and MSI Modern 14S AI+ were just announced at Computex 2026 and are expected to ship later this year, so the specs below are close to final but not yet confirmed.

1. Best Upgradeable: Dell XPS 13 (2026)

From $699

  • Aluminum chassis that Dell calls the thinnest and lightest XPS it has ever built — and it’s actually lighter in hand than the Neo
  • Runs Intel’s new “Wildcat Lake” chips, configurable up to a Core Ultra 7 Series 3 processor
  • Unlike the Neo’s fixed 8GB, RAM is configurable up to 32GB — a real advantage for anyone planning to keep the laptop for years
  • 120Hz touchscreen with an anti-reflective coating, USB-C ports on both sides, a backlit keyboard, and Windows Hello face unlock

2. Best Display & Battery: Asus Zenbook A14

From $749

  • An OLED 120Hz panel with deep blacks, a real step up from the Neo’s already-sharp LCD display
  • Built from Asus’ Ceraluminum, a ceramic-aluminum blend, in a 2.6-pound chassis
  • Available with Intel, AMD, or Qualcomm Snapdragon chips, with the Snapdragon variant priced lowest and claiming up to 21 hours of battery life
  • Better port selection than the Neo: two USB-C ports, one USB-A, and a full-size HDMI

3. Longest Battery Life: Acer Swift Go 14

From $599

  • A laser-etched aluminum chassis with a 180-degree hinge (a clear step up from Acer’s old budget-plastic reputation), at around 2.5 pounds
  • Available with Intel’s latest Core Ultra (Panther Lake) chips, or a Qualcomm Snapdragon X Plus configuration for longer unplugged time
  • OLED display options ranging from 1920×1200 up to 2880×1800, with up to 400 nits and full DCI-P3 coverage on the higher tiers
  • A generous 71Wh battery — nearly double the Neo’s 36.5Wh cell — alongside Copilot+ AI features and Wi-Fi 7

An existing Acer line refreshed for 2026 and already shipping in select configurations, unlike many of the brand-new Computex announcements here.

4. Toughest Build: MSI Modern 14S AI+

Pricing TBA

  • Aluminum alloy chassis (apart from the bottom panel), weighing roughly 3 pounds, paired with a 14-inch OLED display
  • The most complete port selection here: Ethernet, full HDMI, USB-A, and two USB-C ports
  • MIL-STD-810H certified, meaning it’s built to handle drops, dust, and temperature swings far better than the Mac Neo
  • Runs the same Intel Wildcat Lake chip family as the Dell and Acer options

First shown at CES 2026, with more details outlined at this year’s Computex. Would be a best fit for students or commuters who beat don’t treat their hardware with kid gloves.

5. Available Today: Dell 14 Plus

From $810

  • In stores and ready for shipment. Users have already called it one of the best bang-for-the-buck Windows laptops around
  • Aluminum lid and base keep the build feeling solid
  • Ships standard with 32GB of RAM, four times the Neo’s fixed 8GB, plus a 1TB SSD
  • Port selection beats the Neo outright: Thunderbolt 4, a second USB-C with DisplayPort, USB-A, and HDMI 2.1

**Upgrading to a new laptop this year?** Get an instant quote and turn your current model into cashback.

[Get My Free Offer](https://www.gadgetsalvation.com) ## **Specs Comparison**

Laptop
Starting Price
Chip
Display
Battery
Build

MacBook Neo
$599
Apple A18 Pro
13″ Liquid Retina, 500 nits
Claimed up to 16 hrs
Aluminum, 60% recycled

Dell XPS 13
$699
Series 3 Intel Core CPU
13″ 2.5K touch
Not yet available
Aluminum, upgradeable to 32GB RAM

Asus Zenbook A14
$749
Intel / AMD / Snapdragon
14″ OLED, 120Hz
Up to 21 hrs claimed (Snapdragon)
Ceraluminum, 2.6 lbs

Acer Swift Go 14
$599
Intel Core Ultra (Panther Lake) or Snapdragon X Plus
14″ OLED, up to 2880×1800
71Wh battery (~2x Neo capacity)
Laser-etched aluminum, ~2.5 lbs

MSI Modern 14S AI+
TBA
Intel Wildcat Lake
14″ OLED
Not yet disclosed
Aluminum alloy, MIL-STD-810H

Dell 14 Plus
$810
Intel Core Ultra Series 2
14″ 2.5K, non-touch
32 GB LPDDR5X; solid real-world battery life
Aluminum lid/base, plastic palmrest, ships today

Quick Picks by Priority

✓ Want Neo-level build quality, but upgradeable specs: Dell XPS 13 is the only option here with configurable RAM up to 32GB.

✓ Want the best screen and longest-lasting battery: Asus Zenbook A14 (Snapdragon configuration).

✓ Want maximum battery capacity for heavy daily use: Acer Swift Go 14 has a 71Wh battery, nearly double the Neo’s size.

✓ Want a laptop that survives drops, spills, and travel: MSI Modern 14S AI+ — MIL-STD-810H certified, better I/O port selection.

The Elephant in the Room: 8GB RAM Debate

If you read other tech reviews in search of a Neo-comparable PC laptop, you’ll notice a key talking point: Windows 11 vs. macOS memory management.

While an 8GB Windows laptop like the entry-level Dell XPS 13 can occasionally stutter under heavy multitasking, the Mac Neo handles the exact same workload surprisingly well. Because macOS and the A18 Pro chip are tightly integrated, Apple can squeeze every drop of performance from the measly 8 GB of RAM.

When choosing a Windows equivalent to the MacBook Neo, we highly recommend spending an extra $50 to $100 to get a 16GB RAM configuration. Windows simply thrives with more memory, and having 16GB ensures your laptop will feel fast for years to come.

Upgrading? Don’t Let Your Old Laptop Sit in a Drawer

Whichever direction you go, stick with macOS or wait for the RTX Spark superchip, you’re probably retiring something older to make room for it. That old laptop likely still has resale value, and letting it sit unused is the most expensive way to store it. Macs, in particular, tend to hold their resale value better than most PC laptops, but a well-maintained Windows computer still has salvage value, especially if the model is fairly recent.

Gadget Salvation has been buying back laptops since 2008, and we have perfected the process over the years. It’s very simple: get an instant valuation, ship the gadget for free, and get paid fast once we receive it, no waiting around, no haggling.

## **FAQ:**
—
**Is there a true Windows equivalent to the MacBook Neo?**Not a perfect spec-for-spec match, but several 2026 launches target the same $600–800 price band and thin-and-light aluminum build. The Dell XPS 13, Asus Zenbook A14, and MSI Modern 14S AI+ each compete with the Neo in different ways — some on battery, some on display, some on durability.
**Which Windows laptop has the best battery life compared to the MacBook Neo?**Asus claims up to 21 hours on the Snapdragon-powered Zenbook A14, though real-world results vary by usage. The Acer Swift Go 14 also packs a 71Wh battery, nearly double the Neo’s capacity.
**Should I buy the MacBook Neo now or wait for the Windows competition?**It depends on your priorities. Almost anyone who wants the cleanest out-of-the-box experience and does not mind macOS would prefer the Neo. Those looking for upgradeable RAM and storage, a higher-refresh OLED display, or a wider port selection may find it worth waiting a few more months for the newer Windows models to start shipping.
**What should I do with my old laptop when I upgrade?**Trade it in instead of letting it sit unused. Gadget Salvation, established in 2008 and BBB A+ rated, offers instant no-obligation quotes, free shipping, and fast cash payouts for resale-worthy laptop models.

MacBook Air M5 vs. MacBook Pro M5: The Ultimate Buying Guide

Apple refreshed both the MacBook Air and the entry-level MacBook Pro with the M5 chip, and now these two models share the same 10-core CPU, Neural Engine, and even the same webcam. On paper, they’re almost identical. In practice, the Pro is a meaningfully different laptop, and identifying those differences actually determines which is the right one for your money.

This guide breaks down every category that matters: performance under load, display quality, ports, battery, price, and long-term resale value. If you’re upgrading from an Intel Mac, an M1, or an M2-generation machine, we’ll also tell you whether the jump makes sense at all — and how to get top dollar for whatever you’re trading in.

Side-by-Side Specifications

Spec
MacBook Air M5
MacBook Pro M5 (14″)

CHIP
Apple M5
Apple M5 (base); M5 Pro / M5 Max available

CPU
10-core (4P + 6E)
10-core (4P + 6E) base

GPU
8-core (10-core on 15″ and upgrades)
10-core

NEURAL ENGINE
16-core
16-core

UNIFIED MEMORY
16GB / 24GB / 32GB
16GB / 24GB / 32GB

BASE STORAGE
512GB SSD UPGRADE
512GB SSD

DISPLAY
Liquid Retina, 500 nits, 60 Hz
Liquid Retina XDR, 1000 nits sustained / 1600 nits peak, ProMotion 120 Hz (PRO WINS)

SCREEN SIZE
13.6″ or 15.3″
14.2″

COOLING
Fanless (passive)
Active (fan) _(PRO WINS)_

PORTS
MagSafe 3, 2× Thunderbolt 4, 3.5mm
MagSafe 3, 3× Thunderbolt 4, HDMI, SDXC, 3.5mm (PRO WINS)

WIRELESS
Wi-Fi 7, Bluetooth 6 (AIR WINS)
Wi-Fi 6E, Bluetooth 5.3

BATTERY LIFE
Up to 18 hours of video
Up to 24 hours of video (PRO WINS)

WEIGHT
2.7 lbs (13″) / 3.3 lbs (15″) (AIR WINS)
3.4 lbs

THICKNESS
0.44″ (AIR WINS)
0.61″

COLORS
Silver, Starlight, Sky Blue, Midnight (AIR WINS)
Silver, Space Black

STARTING PRICE
$1,099 (13″) / $1,299 (15″) (AIR WINS)
$1,699

1. MacBook Air M5 vs MacBook Pro: Raw Power and Performance

When it comes to pure computing, the architectural designs of these two laptop models are quite different:

  • MacBook Air M5: Powered by the baseline M5 chip, the Air features a robust 10-core CPU (4 super-charged performance cores and 6 high-efficiency cores) paired with up to a 10-core GPU. It achieves a blazing 153GB/s of memory bandwidth. Crucially, the Air operates on a completely fanless design, prioritizing silent operation over sustained, heavy-duty processing thermal curves.
  • MacBook Pro M5: The Pro series exists in an entirely different performance tier. While a standard 14-inch Pro is available with the base M5 chip, the M5 Pro and M5 Max configurations truly redefine workstation metrics. Built on Apple’s new multi-die Fusion Architecture, the M5 Max boasts an astonishing 18-core CPU and up to a 40-core GPU, paired with a massive 614 GB/s of memory bandwidth. Furthermore, the MacBook Pro line utilizes high-efficiency active dual-fan cooling systems, allowing the silicon to run at peak capacity indefinitely without thermal throttling.

🏆 Performance Winner: MacBook Pro M5. For professional rendering, complex programming, heavy 3D modeling, and local LLM prompt handling, the Pro’s active thermal management and higher multi-core limits surpass the Air.

2. Best for School and Academic Life

For the average student, university life requires a computer that boots up instantly, lasts through back-to-back lectures, and won’t weigh down a backpack.

  • MacBook Air M5: The Air excels effortlessly here. It offers up to 18 hours of continuous video streaming and dead-silent operation, ideal for quiet libraries or crowded lecture halls. Weighing just 2.7 pounds, it is incredibly easy to carry around all day.
  • MacBook Pro M5: The Pro is undeniably powerful, but its feature set is massive overkill for typical student tasks like writing papers, building slide decks, and running research browser tabs. The only notable exceptions are advanced STEM, data analytics, film production, or architecture students who rely heavily on intensive software applications such as MATLAB, AutoCAD, or DaVinci Resolve.

🏆 School Winner: MacBook Air M5. The lower baseline pricing, coupled with standard 16GB RAM and a spacious 512GB starting storage, makes the Air the most sensible, economical, and lightweight companion for 90% of students.

3. Best for Office and Enterprise Environments

Workplace demands often boil down to two critical factors: multi-display connectivity and expansive I/O options.

  • MacBook Air M5: Offers excellent day-to-day office capabilities, natively supporting up to two external displays even over a single Thunderbolt port. This makes it an exceptional choice for standard office workers and remote administrators.
  • MacBook Pro M5: The Pro transforms into the ultimate desktop replacement. Equipped with Thunderbolt 5 ports (on Pro/Max models), an HDMI port, a high-fidelity SDXC card slot, and support for up to four external high-resolution displays simultaneously, it handles dense dock setups with ease.

🏆 Office Winner: MacBook Pro M5. Thanks to native multi-display versatility, desktop-grade ports, and unmatched multi-threaded task handling, the Pro remains the gold standard for enterprise environments.

4. MacBook Air M5 vs MacBook Pro: Travel Friendliness and Portability

On the road, every millimeter and ounce matters.

  • MacBook Air M5: At an ultra-thin 0.44 inches in profile and weighing a mere 2.7 pounds for the 13-inch variant, it slides into any travel sleeve unnoticed. Its lightweight compact power adapter further simplifies packing for travel.
  • MacBook Pro M5: The Pro is noticeably chunkier. The 14-inch model is 0.61 inches thick, while the muscular 16-inch model measures 0.66 inches and weighs up to 4.7 pounds. While the Pro boasts a legendary 24-plus-hour real-world battery life under standard workflows, hauling its heavier brick through airport security is a heavier burden.

🏆 Travel Winner: MacBook Air M5. The Air wins decisively for pure portability. It is tailor-made for airplane trays, café tables, and nomadic professional setups where physical footprint is a primary constraint.

Resale Value: MacBooks Age Better

One of the advantages of any MacBook Air or Pro is how exceptionally well it holds its value. MacBooks typically retain approximately 50% of their original price after three years, compared to 25–40% for Windows equivalents from Dell, HP, or Lenovo. Several factors drive this: aluminum construction that resists damage to the hinges and chassis, years of macOS software support, and broad demand for secondhand inventory from existing (and new) Apple users.

The M5 generation’s strong resale outlook is reinforced by Apple’s track record with Silicon. M1 MacBooks from 2020 still sell for $233–$600 in 2026, six years after launch. The M5 architecture, with Apple promising 7–8 years of macOS support for current silicon, is on track to follow the same curve:

Projected Resale Value Retention

// MACBOOK M5 · BASED ON HISTORICAL M-SERIES RESALE DATA

NEW
2026

1 YEAR

2 YEARS

3 YEARS

4 YEARS

### **Selling Your Current MacBook** **Laptop**

If an M5 MacBook Air or Pro is on your radar, selling your current computer first is often the smartest move. Apple Trade-In is convenient for upgrades, but a no-go for cash sales. Besides, it consistently offers trade-in values below market value unless you catch a promo deal right after the new Mac is released. Gadget Salvation, on the other hand, offers competitive valuations for MacBook Air and MacBook Pro models across generations, with free shipping and payment within a day of delivery. For anyone upgrading, the resale proceeds can easily cover $100–$500 of the newer model’s cost.

Conclusion: Essentially, a $600 Question

The 13-inch MacBook Air M5 starts at $1,099. The 14-inch MacBook Pro M5 starts at $1,699, an extra $600. That extra buys you the XDR display, active cooling, and more ports.

For most people, the Air is the rational choice. It handles everything short of sustained professional rendering or multi-display creative workstations. The $600 premium on a Pro only makes sense if you’ll genuinely need what it offers.

## Frequently Asked Questions
01 Does the MacBook Air M5 have a cooling fan?

No. The MacBook Air M5 utilizes a completely fanless, passive thermal design. It runs in absolute silence, even under heavy processing loads.

02 Is the MacBook Air M5 good enough for video editing?

Yes, it handles light-to-moderate 4K video editing well. For short exports and color grading it performs close to the MacBook Pro M5. Under sustained heavy renders it will eventually throttle due to its fanless design, so professionals doing long, continuous exports will benefit from the Pro’s active cooling.

03 Which one holds its resale value better?

Both age well: M-based MacBooks retain up to 50% of their value after three years, well above comparable Windows laptops. Still, MacBook Pros generally retain a higher dollar amount.

04 Which model has better battery life?

While the MacBook Air M5 delivers a whopping 18 hours of video playback, the larger 16-inch MacBook Pro M5 Max models routinely cross 24 to 27 hours in standard productivity testing due to their massive physical batteries.

Microsoft Surface Pro 13 Snapdragon X2 Elite: Outstanding or Good Enough?

The mid-2026 release of the Microsoft Surface Pro 13-inch (12th Edition) marks a massive milestone for Windows on Arm. Powered by Qualcomm’s second-generation Snapdragon X2 Elite processor, this 2-in-1 isn’t just a minor iteration; it’s a direct shot at the traditional laptop market and Apple’s iron grip on efficient silicon.

Below is an analytical review of the Surface Pro 13-inch X2 Elite, focusing on how it stacks up against standard laptops, its viability as a full PC replacement, and its performance relative to Apple Silicon.

Microsoft Surface Pro 13 Technical Specifications

The Surface Pro 13 12th Edition ships in two primary chip configurations: Snapdragon X2 Plus (10-core) and Snapdragon X2 Elite (12-core), with LCD or OLED displays, up to 64GB of RAM, and up to 1TB of removable SSD storage. This review focuses on the X2 Elite with OLED.

Component
Specification

Processor
Qualcomm Snapdragon X2 Elite (12 Cores)

Graphics
Qualcomm Adreno X2-90 iGPU

Display
13-inch OLED, 2880 x 1920 (3:2), 120Hz, 900 nits peak HDR

Memory / Storage
16GB / 32GB / 64GB LPDDR5X / 256GB / 512GB / 1TB (removable SSD)

NPU
Hexagon NPU (Copilot+ PC Certified)

Battery Life
Up to 15 hours of video playback / Up to 10–12 hours of mixed use

Starting Price
$1,499 (Tablet only; keyboard sold separately)

Microsoft’s Surface Pro has always been compelling enough to justify its existence, but expensive enough to question it. The 12th Edition changes calculus more than any generation before. For one, Qualcomm’s Snapdragon X2 Elite is a very welcome addition. The optional OLED finally does justice to the form factor, and Windows on ARM simply shines now. But Microsoft still charges you extra for the keyboard, and Apple, as always, charges ahead.

1. Can It Compete With the Latest Laptop Models?

Historically, the Surface Pro has struggled to compete with traditional laptops. But the Snapdragon X2 Elite lineup brought some fundamental changes:

  • The Display Advantage: The 13-inch 120Hz OLED panel is spectacular. With a 3:2 aspect ratio, it offers more vertical workspace than standard 16:9 or 16:10 laptops, making it excellent for documents and web browsing.
  • The Lapability Fix: Microsoft’s premium Surface Pro Flex Keyboard changes the game. It is stiffer and heavier, featuring a haptic trackpad that rivals the best MacBooks. Because it operates wirelessly when detached, this keyboard offers versatility that standard laptops cannot match.
  • The Price Caveat: It competes in performance, but pricing is aggressive. At $1,799 for the X2 Elite/OLED model (before adding the $300+ Flex Keyboard), you are firmly in high-end laptop territory (e.g., MacBook Pro or Intel Panther Lake ultrabooks).

2. How Comparable is Performance to Apple Silicon?

While the Snapdragon X2 Elite seeks to bridge the gap, its architectural philosophy differs markedly from Silicon’s. Here is how it stacks up against Apple’s baseline M5 generation:

CPU Performance

  • Single-Core (Apple Wins): Apple’s architectural advantage remains superior. In single-core benchmarks (like Cinebench 2024), the Apple M5 outperforms the Snapdragon X2 Elite by roughly 35%. For snappiness in basic daily tasks, Apple still holds the crown.
  • Multi-Core (Snapdragon Wins/Ties): When utilizing all 12 cores, the X2 Elite is a powerhouse, boasting up to a 49% generational leap over the original X1 Elite. It easily matches (and even beats) base Apple M5 performance in heavily threaded tasks like rendering and video compilation. However, it still lags behind Apple’s premium M5 Pro and Max chips.

PERFORMANCE BENCHMARKS

Surface Pro 13 X2 Elite vs. MacBook Air M5

Surface Pro 13 · X2 Elite

* Estimates based on aggregated third-party benchmark data. Actual Surface Pro 13 X2 Elite scores may vary. Direct comparisons account for platform and thermal differences.

### **Graphics & Gaming**

Qualcomm’s Adreno X2-90 iGPU is a massive leap forward, capable of pushing titles like Cyberpunk 2077 to ~40 FPS at 1200p (Medium settings with FSR 3).

The Catch: While raw frame rates are high, the 1% lows (minimum frame rates) suffer from optimization stutters, dropping into the high teens. Apple Silicon’s metal optimization and Intel’s Panther Lake (Arc B390) still provide a smoother, more consistent gaming and graphical experience.

Battery & Efficiency

With a real-world battery life hitting roughly 13–15 hours of mixed productivity (and up to 17 hours of video playback), the Surface Pro finally matches the “charge once a day” luxury popularized by the MacBook Pro and Air models.

3. Does It Fully Replace a Computer?

For 90% of users, absolutely. For power-users and gamers, not quite.

Whether this replaces a traditional desktop or beefy laptop depends entirely on your software ecosystem.

  • The Win-on-Arm Emulation Layer is Mature: In 2026, the Prism emulation layer in Windows 11 handles legacy x86 applications seamlessly. Standard apps (Microsoft 365, Slack, Spotify) and native ARM creative apps (Adobe Suite, Handbrake) run perfectly without noticeable overhead.
  • Peripherals and Docks: With USB4/Thunderbolt support, you can plug this tablet into a dual-4K monitor setup with an external mouse and keyboard, and it behaves identically to a high-end desktop tower.
  • Where it Fails as a Full Replacement: 1. Extensive Gaming: Anti-cheat software (like Vanguard or Ricochet) and kernel-level drivers often do not play nice with ARM architecture, making many popular competitive multiplayer games unplayable. 2. Niche Legacy Software: Specialized enterprise database tools or older proprietary x86 software may run slowly or fail to launch entirely.

PC REPLACEMENT TEST

Can It Actually Replace a Computer?

✅

Replace for: Knowledge Work

Writing, research, Office 365, email, video calls, light development — the Surface Pro handles all of it without compromise.

⚠️

Consider carefully: Creative Pro

Adobe CC runs well; DaVinci Resolve is improving. Pen input is outstanding for illustrators. But GPU-heavy workflows still favor a MacBook Pro or dedicated workstation.

❌

Not yet: Gaming & Legacy x86

Anti-cheat incompatibility blocks most competitive titles. Specialized x86-only software runs via emulation with performance penalties.

## **Depreciation & What Your Surface Pro Is Worth Later**

While at the beginning the Surface Pro tablets retained their salvage value measurably better than any other PC, that is no longer the case. And just like any Windows-based device, they now depreciate much faster than MacBooks. Apple’s locked ecosystem, consistent software support across generations, and consumer brand loyalty create a secondary market that Surface Pros and Surface Laptops simply no longer can match. That said, the Pro 13th edition premium configuration and the halo effect of a strong Snapdragon X2 launch should provide above-average initial retention (for a Windows device).

Based on historical Surface Pro resale trends, buyers who keep their tablets in excellent condition can expect roughly 50–65% of retail value at the one-year mark, dropping to around 40% by year two. These curves steepen as new generations hit the market. Microsoft’s annual iteration pace is both a feature and a resale risk. If you plan to upgrade in a year or two, selling your Surface Pro while it is relatively current and in top condition is essential.

Projected Resale Value Retention

SURFACE PRO 13 · BASED ON HISTORICAL SURFACE PRO RESALE DATA

NEW
2026

1 YEAR

2 YEARS

3 YEARS

4 YEARS

* Projections based on historical Surface Pro resale trends (2019–2025). Actual values vary by condition, configuration, and market timing. OLED configs retain slightly better than LCD equivalents.

The most effective strategy for Surface Pro owners: Sell within 12–18 months of purchase, before the next-generation announcement triggers a price drop on resale markets. [Gadget Salvation’s buyback](https://www.gadgetsalvation.com/) process makes this straightforward:

1 – Get an instant quote

2 – Ship for free, and

3 – Receive the payment within 1-2 business days of delivery.

The Verdict

The Microsoft Surface Pro 13-inch with Snapdragon X2 Elite is the best 2-in-1 Microsoft has built to date. The removable SSD is a feature most competitors lack. And the camera quality beats any laptop, period.

  • Buy it if: You want the ultimate hybrid device, true all-day battery life, do heavy multi-threaded productivity work, and enjoy the tablet/stylus form factor.
  • Skip it if: You are on a budget (the total package scales past $2,100), require a flawless gaming computer, or rely on highly specialized x86 software.

## Questions & Answers
01 Can the Surface Pro 13 (2026) fully replace a laptop?

For most productivity, content creation, and school tasks, yes, particularly if paired with the Flex Keyboard. The Snapdragon X2 Elite delivers genuine laptop-class performance and Windows 11 runs full desktop applications. The main caveats are the separately-sold keyboard (not included), limited gaming compatibility on ARM, and niche software that still relies on x86 emulation.

02 How does the Snapdragon X2 Elite compare to Apple M5?

The Snapdragon X2 Elite holds a meaningful advantage in multi-core CPU throughput (roughly 35% ahead of M5 MacBook Air) and NPU performance with 80 TOPS versus Apple’s ~38 TOPS. Apple’s M5 retains the edge in single-core speeds and efficiency, sustaining far lower wattage under load (26W vs up to 45W), which translates to noticeably better real-world battery life.

03 Is the OLED display worth the upgrade?

Yes, for most users who spend significant time looking at their screen. The OLED model hits 900 nits peak brightness (vs 600 nits on LCD), with deeper blacks and better color accuracy. For artists, photographers, video editors, and anyone who consumes media on the device, the OLED is a clear upgrade. If you primarily work in bright office environments and use the display for spreadsheets and documents, the LCD saves money without meaningful loss.

04 Does the Surface Pro 13 support gaming?

Gaming on the Surface Pro 13 is improving but still limited by ARM compatibility. Many popular titles run via Prism x86 emulation or native ARM ports, and the Adreno X2-85 GPU is now competitive for casual gaming. However, anti-cheat software for most competitive multiplayer titles remains unsupported on ARM Windows, making this a poor choice for dedicated PC gamers. Microsoft has committed to expanding ARM gaming support through 2026, so the situation is improving.

05 How does the Surface Pro 13 hold its resale value?

Windows 2-in-1 tablets depreciate faster than MacBooks due to continuously higher demand for pre-owned Apple products on resale markets. A Surface Pro typically retains around 50-60% of its value at one year, dropping to roughly 40–45% after two years. Selling promptly after upgrading, while the tablet is still in excellent condition, maximizes return. Gadget Salvation offers competitive buyback pricing for Surface Pro models — get an instant no-obligation quote at gadgetsalvation.com.

This $9 key physically locks your most addictive apps

Screen-time apps aren’t effective for many people because, in the end, they depend on your willpower. They remind you to stop scrolling or let you set timers, but such notifications can be easy to ignore. 

Autonomous Key takes a different approach to this issue simply by being a physical device. It’s an NFC key that pairs with a companion app to let you lock away distracting apps. So instead of tapping a button to bypass the block, you have to physically scan the key with your phone to regain access to your locked apps. Each unlock session can last for up to 60 minutes before the apps are automatically locked again.

That physical requirement is what makes the idea compelling. Instead of depending on your self-control, you can leave the NFC key in another room, or even at the office or gym, turning a mindless impulse to open Instagram or TikTok into a deliberate decision that requires extra effort.

At just $9, Autonomous Key is considerably cheaper than its competitors like Blok ($29), Unpluq ($26.50), and Brick ($59).

Brick does offer a few more advanced features, including Sleep Mode and the ability to block in-app purchases, but Autonomous Key covers the core functionality at a fraction of the price.

The key itself is compact, measuring about 3 inches long, and works with smartphones running Android 8.0 or later, and iPhones running iOS 15 or later.

Image Credits:Autonomous

The companion app also provides AI-powered insights, tracking how often you unlock distracting apps, how long they remain accessible, and the times of day you’re most likely to reach for them.

Notably, the AI summarizes your habits with a deliberately sassy personality. For example, if you repeatedly unlock your apps immediately after locking them, it might say that the key clearly wasn’t far enough away and will suggest putting it somewhere less convenient.

Plus, unlike many app blockers, there are no subscriptions or premium tiers required to unlock additional features. One key can be paired with multiple phones, making it a practical option for people who may have multiple devices, or for families.

Image Credits:Autonomous

During my testing, however, I noticed the NFC scan occasionally required multiple attempts to register. So it’s probably not the best choice for locking important apps (like messaging or email) that you may need to access throughout the day.

There’s also the question of what happens if you lose the key. If your apps are locked, the current workaround is to uninstall and reinstall the companion app. If they’re already unlocked, you can simply remove the key from your account. The company says it’s developing a backup unlock method that will arrive in a future update.

Autonomous Key is currently in beta following a Kickstarter campaign, and began shipping earlier this month. It’s available in five colors: pink, orange, blue, gray, and brown.

This post was originally published on July 27, 2026.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

What’s the best handheld mini fan?

It’s summer. You are sweaty. There’s some unprecedented heat wave that’s even worse than the last unprecedented heat wave. You are uncomfortable. You’re getting sweatier by the second. What do you do?

This predicament — one that’s becoming more and more common — just flat out sucks. But if you have a handheld mini fan on you, the situation can change from “actively horrific” to “less than ideal.” In sweaty circumstances, that’s a miracle.

Over the last few summers, I’ve bought a handful of random mini fans on Amazon or TikTok Shop. While those $10 to $15 devices have become staples in my summer purse, I noticed that premium brands like Shark and Dyson were rolling out their own handheld fans at much higher price points ($100 to $150). As someone who suffers from the SSRI sweats — if you know, you know — I was curious whether these higher-end products are really that much better than the drop-shipped fans I’d bought in summers past.

The verdict is: they’re all pretty good in their own way! But the best one for you depends on your budget, the size of your go-to summer bag (or pockets), and your tolerance for drawing attention to yourself with a large device blowing air in your face.

Image Credits:TechCrunch

Most powerful: Dyson HushJet ($99)

I wasn’t surprised to find that the Dyson HushJet is an exceptionally powerful mini fan — this company is best known for vacuums, air purifiers, and hair dryers. Dyson knows how to make stuff that blows air! But at about 7 inches tall, the HushJet is the tallest and heaviest device I tried. It will still fit in most purses, but it’s not pocketable.

The HushJet comes with a travel bag, a charging/desktop stand, a neck lanyard, and a USB-C charger (all of these fans charge via USB-C — woohoo!).

If my desk weren’t directly below an air vent, I could see myself using this while I work, since it functions so well on a desktop. The neck lanyard looks a little dorky, and I imagined myself wearing it while pushing a stroller at Disney World. This is an odd image, since I don’t have children, but maybe the reason I envisioned a hot day out with kids is because the lanyard frees up your hands? Or, maybe it’s because if I had to give one of these devices to a kid and bet they wouldn’t break it, I’d say the Dyson is the most kid-proof? Unfortunately, the lanyard doesn’t really help the fan blow air at you while you wear it — you still have to pick it up to direct it at your face.

The HushJet is more powerful than any other mini fan I tried, but that power comes with some noise. Luckily, it has five different power settings, and the lower ones are quieter.

Dyson HushJetImage Credits:TechCrunch

Most versatile: Shark ChillPill ($149)

The Shark ChillPill is the most expensive fan of the bunch, but to be fair, it also does the most. The ChillPill comes with three attachments: a fan, a water mister, and a cooling plate that you touch to your wrist or temple to help you cool down. Like the Dyson HushJet, the ChillPill can sit up on its own for desktop use. It’s about 4 inches long and about double the width of the other options because of its dual-cylinder design.

I chose to bring the ChillPill with me to a softball tournament, since I knew I’d already be sweaty enough that a mister would benefit me without making me look unnecessarily damp (there is no universe in which I would not appear damp at an all-day outdoor event in the summer).

You just have to pour a tiny bit of water into the attachment and it works great. The cooling plate is interesting, but I personally found the fan more immediately effective — plus, it has ten speeds!

I might be more inspired to bring the ChillPill with me in my bag if it came with a case for all of its accessories — I wasn’t really sure what to do with the extra little components. I mostly used the ChillPill with its fan attachment, but I was impressed by the product design when it comes to changing out attachments. There’s a locking mechanism, which you toggle when you want to remove or add a new attachment. It feels secure enough that it would be pretty difficult for an attachment to accidentally fall off or something.

I understand why the ChillPill is as wide as it is — there’s probably a lot of technical components in there that make the 3-in-1 design possible. The design works for outdoor events like music festivals, sports games, or beach days, but I prefer smaller fans for other circumstances, like when you’re the only one at the bar who thinks it’s a little hot inside, and you feel weird about that.

Shark ChillPillImage Credits:TechCrunch

Good enough: JISULIFE 3-in-1 Portable Fan ($13)

The JISULIFE 3-in-1 Portable Fan was the first mini fan I ever bought, and it’s served me well for the last three years — it still works just as good as new. I’ve taken it on vacations without AC and found it endlessly valuable. It has a flashlight, though not one that’s any better than your phone flashlight, and a USB plug-in to charge your phone. Of all the fans I tested, the JISULIFE is the weakest (though still decent), and it can be kind of annoying to flip open. Then again, it has little bear ears on it. Does Dyson randomly put little bear ears on its fans? I didn’t think so.

This product isn’t going to knock your socks off. The charging is slow, yet effective. The fan is fine. The light is kind of dim. But it gets the job done well enough that it’s accompanied me on a few “glamping” trips and a trip to Paris during a heat wave. Sure, those trips all took place before I had tried any of these other fans, but I wasn’t sitting around thinking, “Gee, I sure wish I had a better fan.” (Rather, I was reflecting on how the most American thing about me is that I love AC.)

The fan is about 4.5 inches when folded, and about 8 inches when using the fan.

JISULIFE FanImage Credits:TechCrunch

Best overall: This random fan from Amazon ($15)

While over $250 worth of review unit mini fans sat at home, I couldn’t stop reaching for this random MACMORE fan from Amazon when I went out. It’s definitely some sort of sketchy drop-shipping situation — the images on the listing all look very obviously edited. The company, MACMORE, only lists two products (both mini fans) on Amazon. But what can I say? I love this little thing. I even bedazzled it. (Bedazzling kit sold separately, but highly recommended to maximize whimsy.)

At 4 inches tall, this fan is both the smallest and lightest one I tried. It’s not as strong as the Shark or Dyson fans, but it works well enough that I’m not wishing the fan were stronger. It comes with a removable clip, so you can attach it to your shirt or the strap of a crossbody bag to keep cool, hands-free. Like every other fan, it makes some sound, but it’s small and quiet enough that I don’t feel like I’m drawing attention to myself when I use it in public.

When it comes down to it, the size (and low price) is probably what makes me love this fan so much. It takes up less space in my purse than my keys, and it fits in a pocket too, so it’s become a staple. But really, this all comes down to personal preference. I’m optimizing for discretion, but maybe you’ll choose to optimize for a fan with the most features or that has little bear ears on it.

MACMORE FanImage Credits:TechCrunch

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

This $9 key physically locks your most addictive apps

Screen-time apps aren’t effective for many people because, in the end, they depend on your willpower. They remind you to stop scrolling or let you set timers, but such notifications can be easy to ignore. 

Autonomous Key takes a different approach to this issue simply by being a physical device. It’s an NFC key that pairs with a companion app to let you lock away distracting apps. So instead of tapping a button to bypass the block, you have to physically scan the key with your phone to regain access to your locked apps. Each unlock session can last for up to 60 minutes before the apps are automatically locked again.

That physical requirement is what makes the idea compelling. Instead of depending on your self-control, you can leave the NFC key in another room, or even at the office or gym, turning a mindless impulse to open Instagram or TikTok into a deliberate decision that requires extra effort.

At just $9, Autonomous Key is considerably cheaper than its competitors like Blok ($29), Unpluq ($26.50), and Brick ($59).

Brick does offer a few more advanced features, including Sleep Mode and the ability to block in-app purchases, but Autonomous Key covers the core functionality at a fraction of the price.

The key itself is compact, measuring about three-inches long, and works with smartphones running Android 8.0 or later, and iPhones running iOS 15 or later.

Image Credits:Autonomous

The companion app also provides AI-powered insights, tracking how often you unlock distracting apps, how long they remain accessible, and the times of day you’re most likely to reach for them.

Notably, the AI summarizes your habits with a deliberately sassy personality. For example, if you repeatedly unlock your apps immediately after locking them, it might say that the key clearly wasn’t far enough away and will suggest putting it somewhere less convenient.

Plus, unlike many app blockers, there are no subscriptions or premium tiers required to unlock additional features. One key can be paired with multiple phones, making it a practical option for people who may have multiple devices, or for families.

Image Credits:Autonomous

During my testing, however, I noticed the NFC scan occasionally required multiple attempts to register. So it’s probably not the best choice for locking important apps (like messaging or email) that you may need to access throughout the day.

There’s also the question of what happens if you lose the key. If your apps are locked, the current workaround is to uninstall and reinstall the companion app. If they’re already unlocked, you can simply remove the key from your account. The company says it’s developing a backup unlock method that will arrive in a future update.

Autonomous Key is currently in beta following a Kickstarter campaign, and began shipping earlier this month. It’s available in five colors: pink, orange, blue, gray and brown.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Can Apple make smart glasses that aren’t a constant privacy threat?

As Apple prepares to launch its first smart glasses, the company is also wrestling with how to address consumer privacy concerns, according to Bloomberg’s Mark Gurman.

Gurman reports that Apple has pushed back the launch target from early 2027, with the glasses now set for unveiling at the Worldwide Developers Conference in June 2027 and actually becoming available by the end of the year. That delay allows Apple to work on the product itself, and on the messaging around privacy.

It sounds like the company has noticed the concerns around Meta’s smart glasses — sometimes decried as “pervert glasses” — being used to make non-consensual video recordings. That could be a bigger issue for Apple, which constantly emphasizes privacy in its marketing.

Among other things, Apple will reportedly try to emphasize privacy-friendly features like on-device processing, as well as the absence of facial recognition. The company will likely steer clear of using customer recordings to train AI models, and it’s unlikely to follow Meta’s reported practice of using contractors to review customer footage.

Can an Apple lawsuit derail OpenAI’s hardware plans?

Apple recently filed a trade secrets lawsuit against OpenAI, accusing the AI company of a pattern of misconduct aimed at getting current and former Apple employees to share confidential information. (In response, OpenAI said it is “not aware of any evidence that this complaint has merit.”)

On the latest episode of TechCrunch’s Equity podcast, Kirsten Korosec, Sean O’Kane, and I debated whether this lawsuit will cast a shadow over OpenAI’s much-discussed plans to get into the hardware business (starting with a mobile smart speaker) and go public.

“Even setting aside whether or not the court grants any kind of injunctive relief or any kind of restraining order over what OpenAI is doing, it just naturally can lead to that sort of situation where it’s going to cause some delays in what OpenAI is working on,” Sean suggested. “Which I’m sure was probably part of the reasoning behind Apple doing this. They don’t do this stuff willy nilly.”

With all those plans on the line, will OpenAI try to settle this as quickly as possible, or did it learn from its recent courtroom victory against Elon Musk that it can endure the cost and embarrassment of a trial? Kirsten, at least, predicts the latter.

Keep reading for a preview of our conversation, edited for length and clarity.

Kirsten Korosec: Sean, how do you feel about Sam Altman listening to you with a little device maybe in your pocket?

Sean O’Kane: I’m good. Maybe that’s predictable, but I’m good. No thanks.

We’ll get into it, I’m sure, but this is allegedly the first product that OpenAI has been working on in its hardware division with Jony Ive and company. They’ve been really coy ever since that weird video they put out last year of them sitting at that coffee shop or bar in San Francisco and sort of talking very vaguely about hardware and legacy devices, meaning laptops and phones. And so if this is the direction they’re headed in, all power to people who want to have somebody like that always listening to them. This is not going to be for me.

Anthony Ha: Part of what we have to remember about those kinds of devices is also that, depending on how mobile it is, it’s not just listening to you, it’s listening to the people around you. I might be fine with it — I’m not fine with it, but let’s say I was — but then if we met up in-person at Disrupt, then suddenly it might be listening to all of us. 

There’s all kinds of social norms that are going to have to be renegotiated if these things become widespread. I think we should make fun of and criticize people who record other people without consent.

Kirsten: Well, I bring up the device that has been speculated about for a really long time, and we’ll see what it really ends up being once it’s officially introduced, but it’s important in the context of this lawsuit that Apple filed last Friday. 

It was the biggest news of the week, certainly, and this is a trade secret lawsuit. It has some pretty wild allegations and we should very much emphasize these are allegations that have been filed in a complaint by Apple. But what it is accusing OpenAI of is a pattern of misconduct at the highest levels, specifically directed towards OpenAI employees who used to work at Apple. And in fact they’ve named the chief hardware officer Tang Tan in this lawsuit.

This is all important because Apple is accusing OpenAI of essentially stealing their trade secrets, but in the context of that, this could be then used for a competing hardware product. I’m wondering if maybe we don’t get into whether this lawsuit has merits, because we haven’t gone through full discovery, but what are your initial impressions of the lawsuit aside from the fact that wow, this is going to be entertaining?

Sean: Two things. One, this is a pretty big risk potentially to whatever it is OpenAI is working on. Even setting aside whether or not the court grants any kind of injunctive relief or any kind of restraining order over what OpenAI is doing, it just naturally can lead to that sort of situation where it’s going to cause some delays in what OpenAI is working on, which I’m sure was probably part of the reasoning behind Apple doing this. They don’t do this stuff willy nilly.

The other is that we think that OpenAI is — we know that they’ve filed confidentially for an IPO. We think it might happen as early as the end of this year, or early next year, if you believe Sam Altman’s cautious language around the IPO. And this just raises a whole bunch of questions around that because, on the one hand, we think their business right now is probably overwhelmingly the software; they’re not really factoring in any hardware business into that picture at the moment.

They’re about to go to the markets and they’re going to be pitching bankers and investors on where they think their addressable market should be, and if they have a big amount of that pegged to a potential hardware division and hardware products, this could be a huge risk to that and changes a lot of the calculus of sort of how the IPO gets priced. So that’s where my head’s at.

Anthony: One [allegation] that I assume that Apple must have pretty solid like numbers on is, they said more than 400 Apple employees now work at OpenAI. Granted, both of them are very large companies with many thousands or tens of thousands of employees. So as a percentage, it’s not necessarily huge. But that seems like a lot of people and a pretty serious talent drain. 

And the other thing I’m wondering is related to Sean’s point. With the context of the potential IPO, how much damage did OpenAI ultimately take from a marketing and brand perspective from the trial it already went through? That it seemed to basically win, but there was a lot of not-terrible-but-kind-of-embarrassing dirty laundry that came out in the testimony. To what extent are they just like, “We do not want to go through that again”? Or did they take the lesson of, “Hey, we went through it and we survived and we’ll be okay if we have to do another trial with Apple”?

Kirsten: I fully predict the latter, by the way.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

I replaced my space heater and ceiling fan with one Dyson appliance

The Dyson Hot+Cool HF1 is a sleek 2-in-1 smart appliance that provides heating in the winter and cooling in the summer. Designed for year-round comfort, the $499 unit combines quiet operation and smart controls with Dyson’s signature bladeless design.

I typically use a ceiling fan for the summer and a space heater for the winter. After three months of testing, the HF1 was a game changer for me, and not just because it replaced two appliances. It was HF1’s smart features that made this appliance particularly handy.  Dyson provided the HF1 unit, which will be returned to the manufacturer.

Related: Download the latest 345win App with fast access, a modern interface, and complete features designed for a smoother mobile experience.

 

Although you can control the HF1 using the onboard controls or the included remote, you can also operate it from your smartphone with the MyDyson app. I found it especially convenient to turn the HF1 on or off from my phone — even when I wasn’t in the room — as well as set timers, adjust the oscillation, and create schedules so it would automatically turn on whenever I wanted.

The HF1 is quiet enough for bedrooms and home offices. In Sleep mode, it operates at just 26 decibels and automatically dims its display. I’m a light sleeper who prefers complete silence at night, and I was able to adjust the fan noise quickly.

The HF1 features an adjustable tilt that lets you direct airflow where you need it. For wider coverage, it can be adjusted to oscillate at 15, 40, or 70 degrees.

Image Credits:Dyson

The HF1’s intelligent thermostat continuously monitors the room and automatically adjusts its heating output to reach and maintain your chosen temperature. One important caveat: the HF1’s cooling mode is essentially a high-powered fan, not an air conditioner, so it circulates air rather than lowering the room’s temperature.

One of my favorite features about the HF1 is its bladeless design, which makes it incredibly easy to clean. A quick wipe with a cloth is all it takes to remove dust, and unlike traditional fans and heaters, you don’t have to clean any grilles or blades.

The bladeless design also makes it a safer choice for homes with pets and children, as there are no exposed blades for curious hands or paws to get caught in. However, the metal casing around the front of the HF1 can get slightly hot to the touch while it’s in the heating mode.

Another nice safety feature is that the fan automatically shuts off if it’s tipped over.

In terms of size, the HF1 is compact and light, weighing just under six pounds and standing 23 inches tall. Its slim design made it easy to move from room to room without taking up too much space or looking out of place.

While the HF1 comes with a premium price tag, it’s a worthwhile investment if you want a single appliance for year-round use. Its combination of heating, cooling, smart features, quiet operation, and easy maintenance makes it a compelling upgrade over a standard space heater or fan.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

reMarkable’s new Paper Pure is good. That’s why I wrote this review on it.

For years, the central ethos of reMarkable has been to get you away from screens and create an experience that emulates the feeling of writing with pen and paper. With its new device, the reMarkable Paper Pure, the company continues the trend of creating a device counter-positioned against phones, iPads, and laptops. As it lacks notifications and multitasking apps, the Paper Pure aims to attract writers, designers, and researchers looking for reading and writing without any distractions.

When reviewing devices, I typically write down or record notes in different forms, across different apps, and, at times, on different devices. But since this device is meant for writing, I thought it would be fitting to write the review itself on the new reMarkable Paper Pure. I have written this whole review on the tablet using its handwriting conversion feature and edited it on WordPress.

The new $399 reMarkable Paper Pure tablet is the successor to the reMarkable 2, which was released six years ago. In the meantime, the company decided to release the $499 Paper Pro with a color screen and a smaller Paper Pro Move with better portability.

The Paper Pure goes back to basics with a monochrome display in notebook size. It has a 10.3-inch
screen — the same size as the reMarkable 2. But the company flipped the resolution to make the display both wider and shorter. This means more text fits on the horizontal line, both when reading and writing. I’ve tried the reMarkable 2 in the past, and with the new tablet, the writing experience is crisper.

Apart from the hardware revamp, the company included software features that make it easier for you to access content outside of the tablet. It also improved its handwriting search to let you search across notes.

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

One neat new feature is that you can now sync your calendar to the tablet. This allows you to access meeting details from the calendar icon on the device and then start taking notes within that particular meeting block.

When you’re done, you can convert handwritten notes and share them with one tap. You’ll get a link in your email to access these notes and share them with others. When I use meeting note-takers for transcriptions, I find it helpful to look back on my notes so I can add thoughts or follow-up questions to ask later.

You can also share your other notes the same way to access them through email, or access them using reMarkable’s new web app.

reMarkable has worked on improving the outside reading experience with the release of Paper Pure. Now, you can send an article as a native notebook to the tablet, which makes it easier for you to highlight portions, add notes, and send it to the web app. (I wish the company would send articles to a separate folder by default, however.)

The device has improved its performance when working with different documents. You can easily integrate Drive, Dropbox, or OneDrive to import and export documents. The documents are imported as a notebook where you can work on them.

The device still doesn’t handle PDFs in an ideal way. When I imported Paper Pure’s review guide, the edges were cut off. While reMarkable supports ePUB, the reading experience is nowhere near that of a dedicated e-reader like Kindle.

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

reMarkable’s positioning is clear: It’s largely a work device for note-taking, sketching ideas, and reading articles or documents. This device won’t act as an all-in-one gadget for both reading books and taking notes.

I understand reMarkable’s position as an augmentative device with minimal distracting technology. I also see the appeal of just sitting with a device and jotting down ideas. But once I have taken those notes, I might want to easily sync them with my other notes and search across them. reMarkable doesn’t need to add extra AI features to the device, but it would be interesting to see how the company approaches integration with other AI tools after you export the notes.

At $399, the device is not cheap. But the core promise of distraction-free writing works. When I am writing on my MacBook, I admittedly get distracted by apps or by my open tabs, as if I am opening my refrigerator for snacks. In the past, I would go to a cafe to think about some story ideas, but using an internet-connected device didn’t work. As I used reMarkable Paper Pure more, I became comfortable carrying just that to jot down ideas or start rough drafts, and got more confident that its software could convert my crappy handwriting well, too.

The Paper Pure’s base $399 model comes bundled with a stylus. There is also a $449 bundle, which includes a Marker Plus stylus with an eraser function, along with a sleeve folio in various colors.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Parents want safer phones for kids. These companies are answering the call.

As parents become increasingly concerned about the potential dangers of unrestricted smartphone access for children, a growing number of companies are developing devices specifically designed for kids. 

Today’s kid-friendly phones typically feature touchscreens, cameras, and communication capabilities similar to regular smartphones. However, the software on these devices is heavily modified to remove or restrict access to web browsers, social media, app stores, and other distractions.

Parents can usually manage these devices through a companion app, allowing them to approve contacts, monitor locations, set screen time limits, select available apps, and, in some cases, receive alerts regarding cyberbullying, explicit content, or online predators.

In addition to these modified devices, some companies offer a more minimalist approach, creating devices that focus solely on calling and texting.

There are also home phones designed specifically for children, like Tin Can and the recently launched Pinwheel Home.

Here’s a look at the major players shaping the kid-phone market.

The Bark Phone

Image Credits:Bark

The Bark Phone is probably one of the most popular kid-specific smartphones on the market. 

Built on Samsung Galaxy hardware and powered by Bark’s monitoring software, it only allows calls and texts with approved contacts. Bark continuously scans texts, emails, photos, and supported apps for signs of cyberbullying, grooming, suicidal ideation, sexual content, and other potential concerns, then sends alerts to parents. 

A big standout feature is that parents can gradually unlock web browsing, apps, and other features as their child matures. The phone also includes GPS tracking and screen-time management.

Current pricing for the standard model is $240, plus a required wireless plan beginning at $29/month. Higher-tier plans add internet access and unlimited texting.

Gabb

Image Credits:Gabb

Gabb is a well-known name in the kid-friendly phone category. Unlike Bark, however, Gabb focuses less on monitoring content and more on eliminating online risks altogether.

Its phones don’t include social media, a browser, or an app store. Instead, children get calling, texting, and a carefully curated selection of preloaded apps, including a camera, calendar, and calculator. The company also touts its “worry-free” music streaming library with millions of songs. 

Additionally, parents can view location and manage certain device settings, while optional services such as “Gabb Guard” help block spam calls and unwanted texts.

Current phone pricing starts around $159.99, with cellular service starting around $24.99 per month.

Pinwheel

Image Credits:Pinwheel

With Pinwheel, parents approve every app, control contacts, schedule screen time, create custom routines, and monitor location history. 

One standout feature is the ability to create different “modes” throughout the day. For example, limiting the phone to calling and navigation during school hours before unlocking additional features after homework.

Pinwheel phones start around $119, while the Caregiver Portal subscription begins at $14.99 per month without cell service. (Cellular service can be purchased separately through participating carriers.)

The company recently launched two landline phones for $68 and $79. It also offers a smartwatch at $160.

Teracube Thrive

Image Credits:Teracube

Launched in 2022, Teracube offers a tailored version of Android known as Thrive OS. This enables parents to approve every app download, filter web browsing, set app-specific and overall screen-time limits, monitor location, and create customized routines for school or bedtime. However, because it has more traditional smartphone features, it’s often recommended for older children.

Thrive currently sells for $99, with plans starting at $35 per month.

Ooma MyPhone

Image Credits:Ooma

Unlike the other products in this roundup, Ooma MyPhone isn’t a mobile phone at all. This kid-focused home phone is designed as a modern replacement for the traditional household landline.

The service allows calls only between approved contacts through its Trusted Circle feature, offers scheduled Quiet Hours, provides address-based 911 service, sends emergency alerts when 911 is dialed, and lets parents review call logs through an online portal. There are no apps, internet browsing, texting, or social media.

The phone costs $99.99, while service starts at $7.99 per month.

Tin Can

Image Credits:Tin Can

For $100, Tin Can resembles a landline phone with a distinctive tin can design, which is the inspiration behind its name.

This device does not require a traditional phone jack, but connects via Wi-Fi. Only approved contacts can make calls, effectively preventing spam or unauthorized communications. Parents can easily manage contacts through a user-friendly companion app.

Tin Can offers a free plan for calling other Tin Can users, as well as a $9.99 per month plan that allows calls to all approved contacts.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Phone maker OnePlus says it won’t release new phones in the U.S. and Europe

Update July 16, 2026 (3:00 am PT): OnePlus said that the company won’t launch new products in Europe and North America.

“After careful assessment, OnePlus will no longer launch new products in Europe and North America. All users’ rights and interests, including after-sales support and software updates, will remain fully guaranteed,” it said in a statement to TechCrunch.

Amid rising consumer electronics prices and slow demand for new purchases, Android phone maker OnePlus plans to wind down its U.S. and Europe operations this week, according to a report from Bloomberg.

The report cited a source saying that OnePlus’ shuttering of its U.S. and European shops is part of a corporate rejig at parent company Oppo. It also noted that OnePlus will wind down its operations in India, one of its biggest markets outside China.

OnePlus was started by Pete Lau and Carl Pei in 2013 to make affordable Android phones for tech enthusiasts. Over time, the company expanded the range of offerings and that created global demand for its products. Pei left the company in 2020 to start Nothing. As the price of the company’s flagship phones increased, OnePlus also ventured into more affordable phones with its Nord series.

Analytics firms like IDC and Counterpoint have predicted that smartphone shipments are going to decline by more than 13% in 2026 due to a limited supply of memory chips that’s been described as RAMageddon.

Oppo faced a double-digit shipment decline year-over-year for the second quarter of 2026, according to a report by Counterpoint. It noted that the company faced “softness across most of its key markets” because of weak demand.

The company plans to continue operating OnePlus in China and sell Realme phones abroad in areas like the Nordic region, where it has proved successful, according to the Bloomberg report.

Counterpoint said that the company’s shipments to other companies have dwindled in the last year. The firm said that its shipment share to U.S. dropped below 1% last year.

“OnePlus built its name as the “flagship killer” — high-end specs, mid-range price, and aggressive global expansion. That growth era’s over. The company is now doubling down on China and retreating from the rest of the world,” Counterpoint’s senior research analyst Maurice Klaehne told TechCrunch.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Phone maker OnePlus reportedly plans to wind down US and Europe operations

Amid rising consumer electronics prices and slow demand for new purchases, Android phone maker OnePlus plans to wind down its U.S. and Europe operations this week, according to a report from Bloomberg.

The report cited a source saying that OnePlus’s shuttering of its U.S. and European shops is part of a corporate rejig at parent company Oppo. It also noted that OnePlus will wind down its operations in India, one of its biggest markets outside China.

OnePlus was started by Pete Lau and Carl Pei in 2013 to make affordable Android phones for tech enthusiasts. Over time, the company expanded the range of offerings and that created global demand for its products. Pei left the company in 2020 to start Nothing. As the price of the company’s flagship phones increased, OnePlus also ventured into more affordable phones with its Nord series.

Analytics firms like IDC and Counterpoint have predicted that smartphone shipments are going to decline by more than 13% in 2026 due to a limited supply of memory chips that’s been described as RAMageddon.

Oppo faced a double-digit shipment decline year-over-year for the second quarter of 2026, according to a report by Counterpoint. It noted that the company faced “softness across most of its key markets” because of weak demand.

The company plans to continue operating OnePlus in China and sell Realme phones abroad in areas like the Nordic region, where it has proved successful, according to the Bloomberg report.

Smart glasses without a camera? Even Realities bets productivity beats recording everyone

In the past few years, multiple tech executives have told us that glasses could be the next big interface for consumer hardware. And yet, today’s smart glasses rely a lot on phones, even if they have good hardware. Even Realities’ G2 smart glasses are in the same boat. They’re a premium-looking pair of glasses with a neon-style heads-up display you can see in any lighting — but their functionality relies heavily on their connectivity with the phone, which can be** unreliable and frustrating.

Even Realities takes a different approach to smart glasses than players like Meta. Their devices have a monochrome heads-up display that shows text and information in green, giving it the look of a neon board.

There are no cameras or speakers, and that is by design. The company wants to focus on productivity rather than recording, so the people around you don’t have to worry about being filmed.

The G2 is the second pair of smart glasses from Even Realities and an improvement over the G1 released a few years ago. The G2 has a brighter 1,200-nit display (vs. 1,000 nits on the G1), four mics (vs. two), and a 75% larger display area than its predecessor. The new display also has a better 60Hz refresh rate, compared with 20Hz on the G1.

In the few months I’ve used the G2, the connectivity with the phone has improved tremendously. Early on, the glasses would disconnect from the app so frequently that I nearly gave up on them. But after a few app updates, that issue got better.

The glasses are targeted at people who might be constantly in meetings, giving presentations, and traveling to countries where different languages are spoken. 

Design

The glasses, which come in two frame designs, are very light at 35 grams. The frame is made out of magnesium alloy, and the temples (the arms that go over your ears) are made out of titanium alloy. In terms of weight and fit, the glasses were comfortable to wear. 

Since I work from home most of the time, though, I didn’t feel much need to wear them all day. That said, the lenses have UV protection built in, so they’re still worth wearing outside just for eye protection — smart features or not.

Image Credits: Even RealitiesImage Credits:Even Realities

The company claims that, based on typical usage, G2’s battery can last up to two days on a single charge. The glasses come with a protective case that can recharge them up to seven times before needing to be plugged in itself. I personally didn’t test the two-day claim, but the battery lasted me long enough to put them back into the case without running out of juice.

That case is big — you can’t shove it in a pocket — but it’s solid, and the glasses fit in snugly.

Features and operation

The glasses act as your companion for schedules, reminders, and access to notes. You can wake them up by tapping on the stem-based controls. If you double-tap on the control pad on the stem, you will see a dashboard with information like your upcoming meetings, stocks, and top news. 

The G2 can also show real-time phone notifications, but the pop-ups weren’t always reliable — and since my phone is usually within reach anyway, I didn’t find much use for the feature.

Long-pressing the temple control opens a menu with several functions: a notifications tray, Translate, Conversate, Teleprompt, a to-do list, and Navigate. Translate lets you set a target language and converse with anyone. At the recent Global Connect Show (GCS) in China, I wore the glasses while talking to company reps doing demos, and the translation was good enough for me to follow along when someone spoke Chinese. I also tried it with other journalists speaking various languages, including French and Spanish. (The downside of this feature is that the other person doesn’t know what you’re saying in your language unless they’re also using the app.)

Navigate is a cool feature that shows turn-by-turn directions on the heads-up display. The catch: it doesn’t work with Google or Apple Maps. Instead, you have to set your route through the Even Realities app. I tried it a few times walking to cafes near my house. The directions showed up well on the display, but the app kept getting the addresses wrong, so I can’t rely on it for places I don’t already know how to get to. Still, I could see cyclists or motorbike riders finding it useful once the company fixes the accuracy issues.

Conversate, at first, just showed a live transcript of the conversation on the glasses, which felt pointless since you can just as easily record a meeting with an app or an external notetaker. Later, the company added a “prep notes” feature that surfaces more context: you can manually add notes or documents ahead of a meeting and let the AI reference them during the conversation, or let it listen in real time and pop up short explainer bubbles for concepts as they come up. For instance, during a briefing about energy, it showed me a bubble for “Green Hydrogen,” and tapping it brought up a definition right in front of my eyes. That was genuinely useful — though I wouldn’t want a transcript or explainer bubbles for every conversation I have.

At the center of all this is the built-in assistant, Even AI. As with any voice assistant, you say a wake word to activate it and ask questions or add items to your to-do list. It often misunderstood my to-do list requests, and for general questions, the answers were often long paragraphs that streamed across the screen with no way to interrupt or skip ahead.

Another issue: despite having four mics, Even AI often failed to activate, or misheard me, when I was outside. The ambient noise in India could have played a part, but I’d still expect a modern gadget to have better noise handling.

The G2’s screen was legible in most conditions, but in a bright room I had to adjust the brightness manually through the app. Even if the company hasn’t built an automatic-brightness sensor yet, I’d like to see a manual brightness control built into the glasses themselves, rather than requiring the phone app.

Don’t put the R1 ring on it

Even launched a companion ring called the R1 alongside the G2. The idea is to control the glasses through a touch surface on the ring instead of the glasses’ own touch controls. But its price and functionality don’t quite justify the cost.

The ring works well, and I didn’t have any issues using it. But I struggled to find scenarios where I actually needed it, since the touch-sensitive temples on the glasses already do the same job.

Image Credits: Even RealitiesImage Credits:Even Realities

On top of that, Even built health tracking into the ring — heart rate, calories, steps, sleep, and SpO2 (blood oxygen level). Personally, I’d rather go for a dedicated ring like Oura or Ultrahuman if I wanted that form factor with health tracking. Second, if I already use a fitness tracker, I wouldn’t want to buy a ring where health is an auxiliary function for a ring that is meant to control the glass. 

All this functionality bumps up the ring’s price to $249, which is not cheap. If I used my smart glasses a lot, I would consider buying a controller ring at a lower price if it also had a mic, which I could use for issuing commands to the AI assistant. As it stands, I’d skip the R1. 

Where does Even G2 stand?

Smart glasses are coming out fast. Camera-equipped, screen-free models like the Meta Ray-Bans are popular, but Meta, Snap, and other competitors are racing to build glasses with color screens, too. Only a handful of Chinese companies — like Rokid and Inmo — are making glasses with this same neon-display style.

The Even G2 costs $599 and delivers solid hardware in a light, good-looking frame. The company is also working to make the glasses more customizable by supporting third-party apps, though I didn’t find any app compelling enough to make me reach for the glasses more often. They’re a nice-to-have: fun to explore if you like tinkering with new hardware and don’t mind trying out third-party apps.

The hardware itself is good, but outside of jobs that require constant translation or teleprompting, it’s hard to find a clear everyday use case for smart glasses like these.

Even’s bet is that skipping the camera and speakers is the right move for a productivity-focused device — and I don’t disagree with that direction. But now that the company has newly reached unicorn status, it needs to build out more first-party software to make the glasses something people actually reach for every day.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Dumb Co dared me to trade my iPhone for a hacked flip phone

When Lydia Peabody saw her friend pull out a flip phone at a party last year, she burst out laughing.

“I was like, ‘Girl, what are you doing with that thing? That has to be a joke!’” Peabody told TechCrunch. But it wasn’t just a prop — her friend was participating in Month Offline, a community challenge in which a small cohort of people exchange their smartphones for flip phones.

Peabody couldn’t fathom giving up her smartphone, but her friend inspired her. A year later, her life looks different. She left her career as a licensed therapist to become the founding CMO of Dumb Co, the flip phone company that grew out of Month Offline. She’s happier.

“I did Month Offline, and I was like, ‘Whoa, why am I suddenly not anxious? Am I feeling good?’” she said. “I didn’t even know that this is what I needed, and that spending this much time on my screen after work was causing me to feel so yucky.”

Dumb Co sells flip phones that sync to your smartphone, rather than replace it, forging a happy medium between the infinite connectivity of the iPhone and the unrealistic limitations of an early 2000s relic. Funded by friends and family, the company is run by a small team in their 20s and early 30s. Like their peers, they’re dissatisfied with the fast pace of plugged-in, frictionless life. They grew up with iPads and Instagram but now crave something simpler.

In the humble shell of a $20 TCL flip phone, Dumb Co loads its own software so that users can access apps like WhatsApp, Spotify, Apple Music, and Uber. You can even access iMessage through a third-party app (shh, don’t tell Apple). By packaging familiar comforts like music streaming, maps, and blue bubble texts in a flip phone, Dumb Co is creating something for people who want to reduce their screen time and be more present but struggle to fully disconnect in a world built for the smartphone.

Image Credits:Dumb Co

“We are trying to make something where you can leave your smartphone at home and literally just live your life and engage with other people,” Afreka Ebanks, Dumb Co’s communications director, told TechCrunch. “And when you want to be on your smartphone and you come back home, you can use it, because the feature for call forwarding and text forwarding can be turned off.”

I spent over a month testing the device — which Dumb Co calls the Dumb Phone — buoyed by the knowledge that in case of emergency, I always had my iPhone on hand. I didn’t use the Dumb Phone that much at first, but as I carried it around to show my friends, I noticed that they weren’t confused by my flip phone — they were envious of it.

“I’ve been getting into a lot of interesting conversations with people as I’m walking and someone sees me at the stoplight like, ‘What is this thing you have?’” said Ebanks, who bedazzled her flip phone. “I think it’s a great conversation starter, and I think it’s incredible watching people — myself included — work through the awkwardness of socializing with others, because I’m no longer distracted because I’m looking down at my phone.”

The author using an iPhone and a Dumb Phone.Image Credits:Sam Rizer (opens in a new window)

The Dumb Phone is clunky at times. It’s slower than I’m used to, and I end up spending more time typing T9 texts than if I just used my iPhone (what I really want is a dumb Sidekick with a QWERTY keyboard). Yet there’s something undeniably refreshing about knowing that if you want to open social media, take a picture you’ll never look at again, or check your email, you can’t.

When I talked to Peabody toward the end of my month of dual iPhone/flip phone ownership, she asked if I had ever left the house with just my flip phone. I confessed that I had not. I explained that sometimes I need to check public transit schedules, or keep up with Slack if I go to an appointment during the day.

“The truth is, when you say the word need, it almost gives the same meaning as like, ‘I need food or shelter,’” Peabody told me. “Yeah, sure, it’s actually helpful to know when the buses are coming, but if you don’t have that information, you turn to your neighbor and say, ‘Do you know when the next bus is coming?’”

Image Credits:Jacques Morel / Dumb Co

Peabody dared me to leave my iPhone at home. The day we spoke, I had already planned to report on an event at a library across town. I tried to explain that I had never been to this library and wasn’t sure what subway stop to get off at. She told me to just write down directions before I left. I worried that I wouldn’t be able to record interviews at the event. She told me that the Dumb Phone can record audio.

“I really, really want you to do this, because I know that this is something that’s best experienced,” Peabody said. “When I switched to a Dumb Phone last summer, I did not use my smartphone for seven weeks, and I went on a cross-country road trip to New Mexico. I did not think I could do that, but I’m telling you that you can.”

I was running out of excuses. Peabody drove thousands of miles without a smartphone. How could I tell her that I needed my iPhone so that I could triple-check that Tasker-Morris is the right train stop?

Smartphones and social media are not a one-sided evil. There’s real value in connecting with friends online, sending pictures of your dog to your grandma, and using Apple Pay when you forget your wallet. While researchers don’t classify smartphone dependence like they would a substance addiction, there are certainly parallels. Not everyone has an adversarial relationship with their phone, but for people like me, more screen time often makes me feel more anxious, unfocused, and less grounded. Peabody even compared her relationship with her phone to getting hooked on Juul in college.

“It was really, really hard, but I totally broke that addiction, and now when I see a vape or something, I actually detest it – I’m like, ‘Oh no, I do not want that,’” she said. “When I turned off my smartphone for seven weeks, I would think about using it again, and I felt that same repulsion. I actually didn’t look at it or touch it.”

The author using an iPhone and a Dumb PhoneImage Credits:Sam Rizer (opens in a new window)

I was nervous to leave my iPhone at home, but I trusted my knowledge of the transit system and managed to get myself across town without my iPhone (I will admit, I texted someone just to be extra super sure that the library is off the Tasker-Morris stop). When I needed to send a text that was too long for T9 typing, I sent a voice message. I felt more connected with the world around me, and nothing went wrong.

I don’t see myself exclusively switching to the Dumb Phone, but I find it valuable as a tool to help me pay more attention to how and when I’m using my smartphone. The Dumb Phone ships with a black velour pouch, which you’re supposed to put your smartphone in when you leave it at home. I can’t quit the iPhone cold turkey, but I tossed the velour pouch in my bag on a beach trip, just in case. I used it for a few things, like ordering food and checking train times. But while I enjoyed a day on the beach, I didn’t take out my phone. I had a book, a sandwich, two bottles of water, some sunscreen – what else could I need?

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Meta wants its AI glasses to seem less creepy. Its AI strategy says otherwise.

Meta’s AI glasses have a growing reputation as a creepy technology. The company hopes to change that opinion by announcing an update that will disable the camera if the LED light that indicates the glasses are recording has been tampered with.

The move is seemingly a concession to consumer sentiment that the glasses aren’t just fun, fashionable accessories, happily promoted by Kylie Jenner, but have serious implications for consumer privacy: They can be abused as surveillance devices.

Yet, even as Meta touts the new safeguard this week, the company is also pushing products and features that ask users to surrender more of their privacy to the company.

Whether that’s training its AI on your images, enabling AI features using your personal content unless you opt out, or exploring ways to continuously record or use biometric facial recognition, Meta’s vision of the future seems to always depend on collecting more of your personal data.

In its blog post about the new camera safety feature, the company pats itself on the back, noting that “no other kind of camera has done this and we’re proud to lead the industry effort.” However, Meta also admits that the move was necessary because some people had been using tape to cover the LED light, which had already forced Meta to adapt its tech to disable recording when the LED is blocked.

Determined, those same AI glasses creeps would then use “sophisticated efforts to modify or destroy the capture LED,” Meta’s announcement explains.

In other words, Meta is confirming that some people who use AI glasses have hidden agendas — namely a desire to record situations or people (often women) without their consent.

Despite this, the company is reportedly testing a prototype of AI glasses that would “continuously collect audio while taking photos every few seconds,” sources recently told Financial Times.

Meta’s blog post about the glasses feature attempts to assuage people’s fears about the devices’ privacy by answering questions like “who can see the photos and videos I take on my glasses?” Meta answers by promising, “You, and only you — unless you choose to share them.” Yet, Meta’s privacy policy has explained that any image you share with Meta AI can be used to train its AI.

Image Credits:Meta (screenshot of privacy policy on July 8, 2026)

All the while, the company is facing multiple investigations and lawsuits over Meta AI glasses privacy violations. One lawsuit comes after Meta notably canceled a contract with an outsourced tech firm after some of its Kenyan workers alleged they had to view graphic content, like sex, nudity, and people using the toilet, while training Meta’s AI using people’s Meta AI glasses’ videos.

These are hardly Meta’s first scrapes with privacy violations or safety measures, either.

Arguably, Meta’s reputation on privacy has been tainted for years after numerous leaks and lost lawsuits about its alleged lack of child safety measures and desire for growth at all costs. There are books by whistleblowers documenting its alleged abuses, not to mention previous large-scale privacy disasters, like the Cambridge Analytica data scandal and others.

After the 2018 Cambridge Analytica scandal, Meta now insists on its Privacy Progress Update page, “Since 2019, we’ve invested significantly in people, products, and technology to continue to evolve our rigorous privacy program.”

Still, the company plows forward with what many people would consider privacy-violating ideas. Case in point: On the same day it announced the Meta glasses’ new safeguard, it shared that Meta AI can now use anyone’s public Instagram photos to make AI images, unless you opt out.

It also built features to use Meta AI on images in your Camera Roll you’ve never shared and implemented such poor privacy controls in its Meta AI app, leading users to essentially dox themselves by revealing their embarrassing searches.

This is the same company that Apple wouldn’t partner with due to privacy concerns, that records its employees’ keystrokes to train its AI, and that plans to sell targeted ads based on data in your AI chats.

So, while an LED safeguard on AI glasses might be a necessary feature, consumers clearly still have many reasons to remain distrustful of how social media will use their images and data, especially in its broader AI plans.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Google’s Pixel event is set for August 12

Google is preparing for its Made by Google launch event, which is scheduled for August 12 in New York City, as announced on Tuesday.

We’re hoping this event will be less cringeworthy than last year’s, which featured Jimmy Fallon and other celebrities, including Stephen Curry and the Jonas Brothers.

There are numerous rumors circulating about the upcoming Pixel 11 lineup. According to email invites shared by outlets like The Verge and Bloomberg, the new devices are expected to feature design upgrades, particularly a new gold color variant for the Pixel 11.

Google Pixel event – August 12 pic.twitter.com/Veo1RCJN7j

— Mark Gurman (@markgurman) July 7, 2026

Other leaks suggest that the base Pixel 11 may come with slimmer bezels and a sleek black camera bar, while the Pixel 11 Pro is rumored to be slightly thinner than its predecessor. Additionally, there is speculation about the Pixel 11 Pro Fold, which might have a redesigned camera bump and a lighter profile compared to the previous model.

On a negative note, one report suggests that Google may skip the 128GB option for the new models, starting instead with 256GB, which could lead to a higher price tag.

Last year, the event took place on August 20, where Google announced the Pixel 10 series, AI-powered upgrades, and other devices, including a new foldable, the Pixel Watch 4, and the second generation of its budget-friendly A-Series earbuds.

Amazon competitor Bookshop.org says Kobo e-reader support will happen this year after all

If you’re looking for an e-reader that allows you to buy expensive bestsellers from your local independent bookshops, your research will inevitably point you to Rakuten’s Kobo eReader. But, as it turns out, this reputation is largely based on outdated methods for buying Kobo books, involving signing up for a Kobo account from bookshops’ websites.

While there are a handful of indie bookshops nationwide still supporting Kobo through this website method, most of that kind of support ended years ago. I’ve found it impossible to buy e-books for my recently purchased Kobo from any of my local, beloved bookshops.

I want to support these bookshops, and I don’t want to own a physical copy of every book I read. I also want to use an e-reader rather than an Android or iOS app on a phone or tablet because e-readers offer long battery life, digital ink, and low-glare screens. These allow me to read comfortably for hours, even outdoors, similar to a physical book.

One solution for Kobo owners, originally promised for 2025, was a partnership with Bookshop.org, an Amazon competitor that supports local bookshops with every order. Bookshop.org currently offers e-books through its mobile app for iOS and Android.

That partnership was at first promised for 2025 and then delayed to 2026, and for a brief time earlier this year, looked like it would be delayed indefinitely.

After Bookshop.org changed the wording on its webpage referencing Kobo support, removing “2026” and replacing it with “sometime in the future,” I reached out to get a status update.

Bookshop.org’s founder and CEO, Andy Hunter, told me in an emailed reply that progress with Kobo has now been made. The webpage has been updated, saying once again that support is expected to roll out “later this year.”

“The Kobo integration is something both Kobo and Bookshop.org want to make happen,” Hunter said.

The hold-up has been both on the business side and engineering to ensure it is “done in such a way that respects publisher requirements for digital rights management. It took us some time to hammer out the business terms and allocate the necessary engineering resources,” he explained.

Hunter, whose company also competes with Amazon by selling physical books, says his engineers have been focused on improving the mobile device app, which launched about 15 months ago.

Their attention is now being returned to Kobo support, albeit the timing remains vague. “We have recently settled on business terms with Kobo, and we are confident the collaboration is going to happen, but can’t promise a specific launch date until the engineering work is further along,” Hunter said.

Obviously, whether or not Bookshop.org ever figures out Kobo support, Kobo users don’t have to buy all their books from Japanese-based e-commerce giant Rakuten. Kobo users can read a large selection of digital rights management (DRM)-free books on their readers, and a large selection (though not all) of library books offered through Overdrive. Independent e-book store Books.com also delivers DRM-protected books in a format that Kobo supports, it says.

Another solution, should your goal be to support local bookshops with e-book purchases, is to use a different e-reader. An Android reader like Boox or Meebook that supports the Google Play app store should be able to download Bookshop.org’s app, the bookseller says.

Still, like countless other Kobo owners, I’m rooting for the Bookshop.org integration to materialize. Supporting local independent bookstores was my main motivation for buying this particular e-reader, misled as I was by my online research (and the confident advice of ChatGPT).

Now that I own a Kobo Libra Colour, I really do love its reading screen, fast response, and long battery life. I also continue to hold onto my six-year-old Kindle for the same reasons.

But I also love the local, small-business bookstores with their personalized recommendations, support of local authors, and sheer love of books. Here’s hoping that the top e-commerce site that supports local shops, Bookshop.org, will soon actually support the popular Kobo device, which claims 12 million users in 190 countries.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

5 desk gadgets that can make your workday better

We spend dozens of hours at our desks each week (if not more), so it’s worth creating a workspace that’s productive and enjoyable. The right desk gadgets can help you reduce clutter, stay focused, and add a little extra convenience to your day.

From ambient lighting to smart mugs, there are lots of products designed to make your time at your desk better, so we’ve combined a list of some options. Whether you’re working from home or in an office, these gadgets can help transform your workspace.

Odistar Desktop Vacuum Cleaner — $13

Image Credits:Odistar

The Odistar desktop vacuum is an affordable option for keeping your desk clean and crumb-free, especially if you often eat lunch or snack at your desk. You can also use it to clean your keyboard and remove dust and debris between keys. 

It’s quiet and simple to use, and because it’s so compact, you can keep it on your desk or tuck it away in a drawer until you need it. It’s cordless and uses two AA batteries. At just $13, the desktop vacuum is a great way to keep your desk clean as you work. 

Ember Mug 2 — $150

Image Credits:Ember

If you’re someone who enjoys hot coffee but often finds yourself drinking it cold after getting sidetracked while working, the Ember Mug 2 can help keep your drinks at the perfect temperature. 

You can set an exact temperature using your phone and the smart mug maintains it for up to one and a half hours with the 10-ounce version and up to 80 minutes with the 12-ounce version. The mug allows for a more consistent coffee experience, making your workday more enjoyable. 

Amazon Echo Dot — $50

Image Credits:Amazon

The Amazon Echo Dot can be a great addition to your work desk as you can use voice commands to set reminders, create to-do lists, check your calendar, play music, adjust smart lights, or get quick answers to questions without having to reach for your phone. 

Since it’s small, you can easily place it anywhere on your desk where it can act as a hands-free assistant that helps keep you organized and focused throughout your workday.

Govee Glide Hexa Light Panels — $189.99

Image Credits:Govee

The Govee Glide Hexa Light Panels are a simple and fun way to add some personality to your work desk setup without taking up any actual desk space. The hexagon-shaped panels mount on the wall behind your monitor and can display different colors and customizable lighting effects through the Govee app. 

They can be used to create a focused atmosphere during work hours and can be switched to more dynamic effects when gaming or taking a break. The panels can be arranged in different patterns to match your style.

Speks — $35

Image Credits:Speks

If you’re someone who hasn’t yet delved into the world of fidget toys but often finds yourself playing with random objects or even wrappers during calls or meetings, Speks might be for you. They’re tiny magnets that you can fidget or build with to keep your brain focused and your hands busy.

Instead of fidgeting with whatever happens to be within reach, you can have something that is actually made for the job and is more satisfying to have in your hands. They can help you stay focused and relieve stress throughout your workday.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

The Dune keypad device can be your meeting controller and more

My biggest pet peeve with meeting apps is that each one has a different shortcut for muting your mic or turning off your webcam. It’s hard to remember which keys do what when you’re mid-meeting and trying to make a point or ask a question. I always wanted a physical, universal button for mute and camera control — something I could hit without thinking. Project Mirage’s Dune, a tiny, three-key aluminum keypad — about the size of a stick of gum — that plugs into your MacBook’s USB-C port, does just that.

The $119 gadget has three buttons, and it changes context based on what app you are looking at. For instance, in meeting apps and sites, it could be toggle mic, toggle video, and bring window to the front. For Excel or Sheets, it could be copy, paste, and undo. For Chrome, it could be refresh, jump to URL bar, and paste. You get the gist. Developers can also use it with apps like VS Code or GitHub to merge, approve, or close a pull request.

The startup builds each unit to match your specific Mac model, so it sits flush against the laptop with no gap underneath. If your ports are already in use, you can connect it through a dongle instead. Dune has no battery and needs no separate charger — it draws power straight from the MacBook.

Currently, the startup supports M2 Air or later and M1 Pro or later models of MacBook running macOS 15 Sequoia or a later version.

The device looks and feels nice, but I felt the keys had more resistance. Right now, it is easy to push a key by mistake. A few times, I mistakenly unmuted myself or killed my camera because my hand brushed the device while reaching for a water bottle or coffee mug. It shouldn’t be this easy to press a key.

Dune ships with a companion app for configuring shortcuts, either per-app or system-wide. Within a given app, you can assign a Dune key to a keyboard shortcut, a command, or a link that opens an app or URL.

Image Credits:Project Mirage

Through the app, Dune also syncs with your calendar and surfaces your next meeting a few minutes before it starts, so you can join, dismiss, or send an “I’m running late” message with one tap.

If you want deeper customization, you can write and run your own Python script. If you don’t code, Dune has an easy integration with Claude Desktop: you describe the shortcut you want in plain language, and Claude writes it and assigns it to a key for that app — no manual setup required.

I built a shortcut that, whenever I’m on a startup’s website, pulls up a quick brief on the company: its competitors, investors, and questions I might ask if I booked a meeting with them. For anyone whose job involves sizing up companies quickly — investors, founders, operators — it’s a task tailor-made for Dune. I also built one that converts images to JPG so I can upload them quickly to WordPress or social platforms. Both were easy to build and needed no manual configuration, though getting a shortcut fully working still takes some back-and-forth with Claude, including debugging once you actually run it.

The app also has a marketplace, from where you can explore skills made by other Dune owners. If the marketplace takes off, it could become core to Dune’s growth and retention strategy — hardware as a thin front-end for a Claude-powered skills ecosystem, where each new skill gives owners one more reason to stick around.

However, at the moment, there are only limited skills. Plus, there is no way to test out a skill without assigning it to the hardware button — ideally, the app would let you preview a skill before committing it to hardware. The startup also needs to proactively add more of its own suggested skills for different apps to its users.

Project Mirage’s device retails for $149 after its introductory price expires, and it’s a solid pick for anyone productivity-minded. MuteMe covers just mute/unmute, and Stream Deck offers business-focused macros, but Dune is easier to customize on both hardware and software.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

SpaceX has an AI device prototype, and it sure sounds phone-ish

Elon Musk’s SpaceX has shown investors a prototype of a “handset-like” AI device, reports The Wall Street Journal.

The prototype is reportedly sleeker and slimmer than an iPhone, making us wonder if it’s something between a small touchscreen phone and a Rabbit R1. SpaceX reportedly showed the device to investors and stakeholders before it went public, and told them it’s at an early enough stage that the design could still change. 

Musk has denied the reporting, calling it “utterly false.”

SpaceX, alongside sister company Tesla, does have the manufacturing expertise to pull off mass-producing a bunch of AI devices — not to mention access to the chips needed to power any on-device compute. SpaceX has also signaled that it’s keen to expand into wireless, with Starlink Mobile as a potential competitor to Verizon and AT&T. One analyst even went as far as to speculate that T-Mobile or AT&T would make fine acquisition targets for the rocket builder, though such a purchase would, undoubtedly, be pricey.

It’s also not clear if SpaceX is just throwing spaghetti at the wall or if it will attempt to really mass-produce and market such a device. But one thing that seems clearer is that if OpenAI is doing it, Musk would, perhaps, want to try to do it better.

As we know, OpenAI is working with Apple’s former chief design officer Jony Ive on an AI device that CEO Sam Altman has claimed will be more peaceful than an iPhone. Reports from last autumn suggest the company has been struggling to get the details right, and OpenAI recently brought on another Apple executive to potentially help move things along. News dropped last week that Paul Meade, Apple’s VP in charge of the Vision Pro headset, has joined OpenAI’s hardware team. 

Like OpenAI, SpaceX’s prototype is reportedly designed to run on a proprietary operating system and integrate technology from xAI, Musk’s AI company that SpaceX acquired earlier this year. This would prevent these new devices from being trapped inside another company’s platforms (like Google’s Android). But the intent also appears to be to create something new, with native AI interfaces. That said, the graveyard is crowded with the unsuccessful launches of AI devices from companies like Humane and Rabbit. A company wanting to sell an AI device does not equate to consumers wanting to buy such a thing. Yet.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Clicks shows off its BlackBerry-inspired phone in a new hands-on video

Clicks Technology, a startup that’s preparing to launch its own take on the BlackBerry smartphone, is showing off what it has in store in a new video, released today.

The device, known as the Clicks Communicator, was introduced at January’s Consumer Electronics Show (CES) in Las Vegas to cater to people who do a lot of work on their phones, like texting and emailing. It’s particularly meant to appeal to those who miss the BlackBerry’s physical keyboard, which some argue is better for these types of tasks.

Priced at $499, the Communicator looks a lot like a modern-day BlackBerry might, with a screen for viewing and responding to messages, and a tactile, touch-sensitive keyboard below.

The phone goes beyond being just a BlackBerry dupe, however, by innovating in other areas. For instance, its clever “Signal Light” feature offers a light-up button on the side of the phone that can be customized with different colors and light patterns to indicate when you’ve received messages from certain people, groups, or apps. 

It also offers customizable back covers that can be popped off and swapped, a 3.5 mm headphone jack, a physical SIM card tray (in addition to an eSIM), expandable microSD storage (up to 2TB), and a tactile switch for turning on or off airplane mode.

The Clicks Communicator may also appeal to the growing number of users looking to distance themselves from modern-day smartphones, with their addictive social apps and games. (The company partnered with the Niagara Launcher to provide access to the Android apps it runs). With the Signal Light, you can safely ignore your phone unless you see a critical notification come through.

Image Credits:Clicks Technology

In the new video, the company shows its pre-production hardware and internal software as a preview of what’s to come when the phone begins shipping in the fourth quarter of this year.

At CES, TechCrunch was able to get a feel for the Communicator by handling a prototype that was the same size and weight as the device that’s preparing to ship at the end of this year. We found it felt good to hold, not too light or heavy, and was easy to grip. The keys were also fairly clicky, giving it a BlackBerry-like feel, though the team was then planning to slightly adjust the pressure to make the device work better for fast typers.

Future videos will go more in-depth into specific Clicks Communicator features, like the Signal Light, Prompt Key, Message Hub, touch-sensitive keyboard, and more.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Microsoft Surface Pro 13 Snapdragon X2 Elite: Outstanding or Good Enough?

The mid-2026 release of the Microsoft Surface Pro 13-inch (12th Edition) marks a massive milestone for Windows on Arm. Powered by Qualcomm’s second-generation Snapdragon X2 Elite processor, this 2-in-1 isn’t just a minor iteration; it’s a direct shot at the traditional laptop market and Apple’s iron grip on efficient silicon.

Below is an analytical review of the Surface Pro 13-inch X2 Elite, focusing on how it stacks up against standard laptops, its viability as a full PC replacement, and its performance relative to Apple Silicon.

Microsoft Surface Pro 13 Technical Specifications

The Surface Pro 13 12th Edition ships in two primary chip configurations: Snapdragon X2 Plus (10-core) and Snapdragon X2 Elite (12-core), with LCD or OLED displays, up to 64GB of RAM, and up to 1TB of removable SSD storage. This review focuses on the X2 Elite with OLED.

ComponentSpecificationProcessorQualcomm Snapdragon X2 Elite (12 Cores)GraphicsQualcomm Adreno X2-90 iGPUDisplay13-inch OLED, 2880 x 1920 (3:2), 120Hz, 900 nits peak HDRMemory / Storage16GB / 32GB / 64GB LPDDR5X
/ 256GB / 512GB / 1TB (removable SSD)NPUHexagon NPU (Copilot+ PC Certified)Battery LifeUp to 15 hours of video playback / Up to 10–12 hours of mixed useStarting Price$1,499 (Tablet only; keyboard sold separately)

Microsoft’s Surface Pro has always been compelling enough to justify its existence, but expensive enough to question it. The 12th Edition changes calculus more than any generation before. For one, Qualcomm’s Snapdragon X2 Elite is a very welcome addition. The optional OLED finally does justice to the form factor, and Windows on ARM simply shines now. But Microsoft still charges you extra for the keyboard, and Apple, as always, charges ahead.

1. Can It Compete With the Latest Laptop Models?

Historically, the Surface Pro has struggled to compete with traditional laptops. But the Snapdragon X2 Elite lineup brought some fundamental changes:

  • The Display Advantage: The 13-inch 120Hz OLED panel is spectacular. With a 3:2 aspect ratio, it offers more vertical workspace than standard 16:9 or 16:10 laptops, making it excellent for documents and web browsing.
  • The Lapability Fix: Microsoft’s premium Surface Pro Flex Keyboard changes the game. It is stiffer and heavier, featuring a haptic trackpad that rivals the best MacBooks. Because it operates wirelessly when detached, this keyboard offers versatility that standard laptops cannot match.
  • The Price Caveat: It competes in performance, but pricing is aggressive. At $1,799 for the X2 Elite/OLED model (before adding the $300+ Flex Keyboard), you are firmly in high-end laptop territory (e.g., MacBook Pro or Intel Panther Lake ultrabooks).

2. How Comparable is Performance to Apple Silicon?

While the Snapdragon X2 Elite seeks to bridge the gap, its architectural philosophy differs markedly from Silicon’s. Here is how it stacks up against Apple’s baseline M5 generation:

CPU Performance

  • Single-Core (Apple Wins): Apple’s architectural advantage remains superior. In single-core benchmarks (like Cinebench 2024), the Apple M5 outperforms the Snapdragon X2 Elite by roughly 35%. For snappiness in basic daily tasks, Apple still holds the crown.
  • Multi-Core (Snapdragon Wins/Ties): When utilizing all 12 cores, the X2 Elite is a powerhouse, boasting up to a 49% generational leap over the original X1 Elite. It easily matches (and even beats) base Apple M5 performance in heavily threaded tasks like rendering and video compilation. However, it still lags behind Apple’s premium M5 Pro and Max chips.

PERFORMANCE BENCHMARKS

Surface Pro 13 X2 Elite vs. MacBook Air M5

Surface Pro 13 · X2 Elite

* Estimates based on aggregated third-party benchmark data. Actual Surface Pro 13 X2 Elite scores may vary. Direct comparisons account for platform and thermal differences.

Graphics & Gaming

Qualcomm’s Adreno X2-90 iGPU is a massive leap forward, capable of pushing titles like Cyberpunk 2077 to ~40 FPS at 1200p (Medium settings with FSR 3).

The Catch: While raw frame rates are high, the 1% lows (minimum frame rates) suffer from optimization stutters, dropping into the high teens. Apple Silicon’s metal optimization and Intel’s Panther Lake (Arc B390) still provide a smoother, more consistent gaming and graphical experience.

Battery & Efficiency

With a real-world battery life hitting roughly 13–15 hours of mixed productivity (and up to 17 hours of video playback), the Surface Pro finally matches the “charge once a day” luxury popularized by the MacBook Pro and Air models.

3. Does It Fully Replace a Computer?

For 90% of users, absolutely. For power-users and gamers, not quite.

Whether this replaces a traditional desktop or beefy laptop depends entirely on your software ecosystem.

  • The Win-on-Arm Emulation Layer is Mature: In 2026, the Prism emulation layer in Windows 11 handles legacy x86 applications seamlessly. Standard apps (Microsoft 365, Slack, Spotify) and native ARM creative apps (Adobe Suite, Handbrake) run perfectly without noticeable overhead.
  • Peripherals and Docks: With USB4/Thunderbolt support, you can plug this tablet into a dual-4K monitor setup with an external mouse and keyboard, and it behaves identically to a high-end desktop tower.
  • Where it Fails as a Full Replacement: 1. Extensive Gaming: Anti-cheat software (like Vanguard or Ricochet) and kernel-level drivers often do not play nice with ARM architecture, making many popular competitive multiplayer games unplayable. 2. Niche Legacy Software: Specialized enterprise database tools or older proprietary x86 software may run slowly or fail to launch entirely.

PC REPLACEMENT TEST

Can It Actually Replace a Computer?

✅

Replace for: Knowledge Work

Writing, research, Office 365, email, video calls, light development — the Surface Pro handles all of it without compromise.

⚠️

Consider carefully: Creative Pro

Adobe CC runs well; DaVinci Resolve is improving. Pen input is outstanding for illustrators. But GPU-heavy workflows still favor a MacBook Pro or dedicated workstation.

❌

Not yet: Gaming & Legacy x86

Anti-cheat incompatibility blocks most competitive titles. Specialized x86-only software runs via emulation with performance penalties.

Depreciation & What Your Surface Pro Is Worth Later

While at the beginning the Surface Pro tablets retained their salvage value measurably better than any other PC, that is no longer the case. And just like any Windows-based device, they now depreciate much faster than MacBooks. Apple’s locked ecosystem, consistent software support across generations, and consumer brand loyalty create a secondary market that Surface Pros and Surface Laptops simply no longer can match. That said, the Pro 13th edition premium configuration and the halo effect of a strong Snapdragon X2 launch should provide above-average initial retention (for a Windows device).

Based on historical Surface Pro resale trends, buyers who keep their tablets in excellent condition can expect roughly 50–65% of retail value at the one-year mark, dropping to around 40% by year two. These curves steepen as new generations hit the market. Microsoft’s annual iteration pace is both a feature and a resale risk. If you plan to upgrade in a year or two, selling your Surface Pro while it is relatively current and in top condition is essential.

Projected Resale Value Retention

SURFACE PRO 13 · BASED ON HISTORICAL SURFACE PRO RESALE DATA

NEW
2026

1 YEAR

2 YEARS

3 YEARS

4 YEARS

* Projections based on historical Surface Pro resale trends (2019–2025). Actual values vary by condition, configuration, and market timing. OLED configs retain slightly better than LCD equivalents.

The most effective strategy for Surface Pro owners: Sell within 12–18 months of purchase, before the next-generation announcement triggers a price drop on resale markets. Gadget Salvation’s buyback process makes this straightforward:

1 – Get an instant quote

2 – Ship for free, and

3 – Receive the payment within 1-2 business days of delivery.

The Verdict

The Microsoft Surface Pro 13-inch with Snapdragon X2 Elite is the best 2-in-1 Microsoft has built to date. The removable SSD is a feature most competitors lack. And the camera quality beats any laptop, period.

  • Buy it if: You want the ultimate hybrid device, true all-day battery life, do heavy multi-threaded productivity work, and enjoy the tablet/stylus form factor.
  • Skip it if: You are on a budget (the total package scales past $2,100), require a flawless gaming computer, or rely on highly specialized x86 software.

Questions & Answers

01
Can the Surface Pro 13 (2026) fully replace a laptop?

For most productivity, content creation, and school tasks, yes, particularly if paired with the Flex Keyboard. The Snapdragon X2 Elite delivers genuine laptop-class performance and Windows 11 runs full desktop applications. The main caveats are the separately-sold keyboard (not included), limited gaming compatibility on ARM, and niche software that still relies on x86 emulation.

02
How does the Snapdragon X2 Elite compare to Apple M5?

The Snapdragon X2 Elite holds a meaningful advantage in multi-core CPU throughput (roughly 35% ahead of M5 MacBook Air) and NPU performance with 80 TOPS versus Apple’s ~38 TOPS. Apple’s M5 retains the edge in single-core speeds and efficiency, sustaining far lower wattage under load (26W vs up to 45W), which translates to noticeably better real-world battery life.

03
Is the OLED display worth the upgrade?

Yes, for most users who spend significant time looking at their screen. The OLED model hits 900 nits peak brightness (vs 600 nits on LCD), with deeper blacks and better color accuracy. For artists, photographers, video editors, and anyone who consumes media on the device, the OLED is a clear upgrade. If you primarily work in bright office environments and use the display for spreadsheets and documents, the LCD saves money without meaningful loss.

04
Does the Surface Pro 13 support gaming?

Gaming on the Surface Pro 13 is improving but still limited by ARM compatibility. Many popular titles run via Prism x86 emulation or native ARM ports, and the Adreno X2-85 GPU is now competitive for casual gaming. However, anti-cheat software for most competitive multiplayer titles remains unsupported on ARM Windows, making this a poor choice for dedicated PC gamers. Microsoft has committed to expanding ARM gaming support through 2026, so the situation is improving.

05
How does the Surface Pro 13 hold its resale value?

Windows 2-in-1 tablets depreciate faster than MacBooks due to continuously higher demand for pre-owned Apple products on resale markets. A Surface Pro typically retains around 50-60% of its value at one year, dropping to roughly 40–45% after two years. Selling promptly after upgrading, while the tablet is still in excellent condition, maximizes return. Gadget Salvation offers competitive buyback pricing for Surface Pro models — get an instant no-obligation quote at gadgetsalvation.com.

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

Flipper Device’s new Busy Bar is a customizable display for productivity

London-based Flipper Devices is known for its Flipper Zero gadget, used by hackers and tinkerers to access different radios with Bluetooth, RFID, NFC, and a sub-1GHz transceiver. The company today took a different direction and launched a productivity-focused gadget called Busy Bar, which helps you set timers, block apps, and display custom messages and widgets on an LED display.

Flipper Devices announced the device last year, and now it is putting it on open sale next month. The Busy Bar looks like a table clock with many knobs and buttons. On the front, it has a 72×16 LED matrix display with up to 400 nits of brightness, support for 16 million colors, and a sensor to adjust brightness automatically.

On the back, there is a monochrome screen to display status, timer, battery, and connectivity indicators. This lets you look at information if the screen is facing the other side. What’s more, there is a small speaker on the side for playing custom sounds and notifications.

Image Credits:Flipper Devices

On top, there is a mode selector switch, a start/stop button, an indicator, and a scroll wheel to navigate menus and set the time. The device has Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and USB connection options.

The Busy Bar has a 3250 mAh battery, which can last up to eight hours of active status time and up to two weeks of standby time. The company said that with a 15W adapter, users can fully charge the device in an hour.

The idea behind the device is that you can set a message to indicate to others (and to yourself) when you are doing a task. This is helpful in a work-from-home setup where you might have other people in the house. You can also set Pomodoro-style timers for productivity blocks for you to concentrate on finishing tasks.

Flipper Devices is releasing apps for iOS, Android, and macOS, with support planned for a Windows app. Users can block select apps with different types of timers on iOS and Android. Plus, there is a mic integration with macOS, through which the device shows an “on call” status on the display and mutes notifications when you join meetings or start recording or streaming.

Image Credits: Flipper DevicesImage Credits:Flipper Devices

The Busy Bar is also Matter-certified, meaning that it can work with your existing smart home setup across Amazon, Apple, and Google-based smart home ecosystems. This means users can trigger smart home automations based on the bar’s status.

The company has made the device suitable for developers to customize with open firmware. They can use open HTTP API, MQTT, and official Python and TypeScript libraries to build widgets and components. Users can also control the Busy Bar over the internet through its cloud API.

The first 3,000 users will be able to purchase the device at $199. All other users will have to shell out $249 for the device. Shipping and sales will begin from July 14 to the U.S., EU, U.K., and Canada. The company also plans to release accessories, including wall mounts, screen protectors, and custom switches.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

MacBook Air M5 vs. MacBook Pro M5: The Ultimate Buying Guide

Apple refreshed both the MacBook Air and the entry-level MacBook Pro with the M5 chip, and now these two models share the same 10-core CPU, Neural Engine, and even the same webcam. On paper, they’re almost identical. In practice, the Pro is a meaningfully different laptop, and identifying those differences actually determines which is the right one for your money.

This guide breaks down every category that matters: performance under load, display quality, ports, battery, price, and long-term resale value. If you’re upgrading from an Intel Mac, an M1, or an M2-generation machine, we’ll also tell you whether the jump makes sense at all — and how to get top dollar for whatever you’re trading in.

Side-by-Side Specifications

SpecMacBook Air M5MacBook Pro M5 (14″)CHIPApple M5Apple M5 (base); M5 Pro / M5 Max availableCPU10-core (4P + 6E)10-core (4P + 6E) baseGPU8-core (10-core on 15″ and upgrades)10-coreNEURAL ENGINE16-core16-coreUNIFIED MEMORY16GB / 24GB / 32GB16GB / 24GB / 32GBBASE STORAGE512GB SSD UPGRADE512GB SSDDISPLAYLiquid Retina, 500 nits, 60 HzLiquid Retina XDR, 1000 nits sustained / 1600 nits peak, ProMotion 120 Hz (PRO WINS)SCREEN SIZE13.6″ or 15.3″14.2″COOLINGFanless (passive)Active (fan) (PRO WINS)PORTSMagSafe 3, 2× Thunderbolt 4, 3.5mmMagSafe 3, 3× Thunderbolt 4, HDMI, SDXC, 3.5mm (PRO WINS)WIRELESSWi-Fi 7, Bluetooth 6 (AIR WINS)Wi-Fi 6E, Bluetooth 5.3BATTERY LIFEUp to 18 hours of videoUp to 24 hours of video (PRO WINS)WEIGHT2.7 lbs (13″) / 3.3 lbs (15″) (AIR WINS)3.4 lbsTHICKNESS0.44″ (AIR WINS)0.61″COLORSSilver, Starlight, Sky Blue, Midnight (AIR WINS)Silver, Space BlackSTARTING PRICE$1,099 (13″) / $1,299 (15″) (AIR WINS)$1,699

1. MacBook Air M5 vs MacBook Pro: Raw Power and Performance

When it comes to pure computing, the architectural designs of these two laptop models are quite different:

  • MacBook Air M5: Powered by the baseline M5 chip, the Air features a robust 10-core CPU (4 super-charged performance cores and 6 high-efficiency cores) paired with up to a 10-core GPU. It achieves a blazing 153GB/s of memory bandwidth. Crucially, the Air operates on a completely fanless design, prioritizing silent operation over sustained, heavy-duty processing thermal curves.
  • MacBook Pro M5: The Pro series exists in an entirely different performance tier. While a standard 14-inch Pro is available with the base M5 chip, the M5 Pro and M5 Max configurations truly redefine workstation metrics. Built on Apple’s new multi-die Fusion Architecture, the M5 Max boasts an astonishing 18-core CPU and up to a 40-core GPU, paired with a massive 614 GB/s of memory bandwidth. Furthermore, the MacBook Pro line utilizes high-efficiency active dual-fan cooling systems, allowing the silicon to run at peak capacity indefinitely without thermal throttling.

🏆 Performance Winner: MacBook Pro M5. For professional rendering, complex programming, heavy 3D modeling, and local LLM prompt handling, the Pro’s active thermal management and higher multi-core limits surpass the Air.

2. Best for School and Academic Life

For the average student, university life requires a computer that boots up instantly, lasts through back-to-back lectures, and won’t weigh down a backpack.

  • MacBook Air M5: The Air excels effortlessly here. It offers up to 18 hours of continuous video streaming and dead-silent operation, ideal for quiet libraries or crowded lecture halls. Weighing just 2.7 pounds, it is incredibly easy to carry around all day.
  • MacBook Pro M5: The Pro is undeniably powerful, but its feature set is massive overkill for typical student tasks like writing papers, building slide decks, and running research browser tabs. The only notable exceptions are advanced STEM, data analytics, film production, or architecture students who rely heavily on intensive software applications such as MATLAB, AutoCAD, or DaVinci Resolve.

🏆 School Winner: MacBook Air M5. The lower baseline pricing, coupled with standard 16GB RAM and a spacious 512GB starting storage, makes the Air the most sensible, economical, and lightweight companion for 90% of students.

3. Best for Office and Enterprise Environments

Workplace demands often boil down to two critical factors: multi-display connectivity and expansive I/O options.

  • MacBook Air M5: Offers excellent day-to-day office capabilities, natively supporting up to two external displays even over a single Thunderbolt port. This makes it an exceptional choice for standard office workers and remote administrators.
  • MacBook Pro M5: The Pro transforms into the ultimate desktop replacement. Equipped with Thunderbolt 5 ports (on Pro/Max models), an HDMI port, a high-fidelity SDXC card slot, and support for up to four external high-resolution displays simultaneously, it handles dense dock setups with ease.

🏆 Office Winner: MacBook Pro M5. Thanks to native multi-display versatility, desktop-grade ports, and unmatched multi-threaded task handling, the Pro remains the gold standard for enterprise environments.

4. MacBook Air M5 vs MacBook Pro: Travel Friendliness and Portability

On the road, every millimeter and ounce matters.

  • MacBook Air M5: At an ultra-thin 0.44 inches in profile and weighing a mere 2.7 pounds for the 13-inch variant, it slides into any travel sleeve unnoticed. Its lightweight compact power adapter further simplifies packing for travel.
  • MacBook Pro M5: The Pro is noticeably chunkier. The 14-inch model is 0.61 inches thick, while the muscular 16-inch model measures 0.66 inches and weighs up to 4.7 pounds. While the Pro boasts a legendary 24-plus-hour real-world battery life under standard workflows, hauling its heavier brick through airport security is a heavier burden.

🏆 Travel Winner: MacBook Air M5. The Air wins decisively for pure portability. It is tailor-made for airplane trays, café tables, and nomadic professional setups where physical footprint is a primary constraint.

Resale Value: MacBooks Age Better

One of the advantages of any MacBook Air or Pro is how exceptionally well it holds its value. MacBooks typically retain approximately 50% of their original price after three years, compared to 25–40% for Windows equivalents from Dell, HP, or Lenovo. Several factors drive this: aluminum construction that resists damage to the hinges and chassis, years of macOS software support, and broad demand for secondhand inventory from existing (and new) Apple users.

The M5 generation’s strong resale outlook is reinforced by Apple’s track record with Silicon. M1 MacBooks from 2020 still sell for $233–$600 in 2026, six years after launch. The M5 architecture, with Apple promising 7–8 years of macOS support for current silicon, is on track to follow the same curve:

Projected Resale Value Retention

// MACBOOK M5 · BASED ON HISTORICAL M-SERIES RESALE DATA

NEW
2026

1 YEAR

2 YEARS

3 YEARS

4 YEARS

Selling Your Current MacBook Laptop

If an M5 MacBook Air or Pro is on your radar, selling your current computer first is often the smartest move. Apple Trade-In is convenient for upgrades, but a no-go for cash sales. Besides, it consistently offers trade-in values below market value unless you catch a promo deal right after the new Mac is released. Gadget Salvation, on the other hand, offers competitive valuations for MacBook Air and MacBook Pro models across generations, with free shipping and payment within a day of delivery. For anyone upgrading, the resale proceeds can easily cover $100–$500 of the newer model’s cost.

Conclusion: Essentially, a $600 Question

The 13-inch MacBook Air M5 starts at $1,099. The 14-inch MacBook Pro M5 starts at $1,699, an extra $600. That extra buys you the XDR display, active cooling, and more ports.

For most people, the Air is the rational choice. It handles everything short of sustained professional rendering or multi-display creative workstations. The $600 premium on a Pro only makes sense if you’ll genuinely need what it offers.

Frequently Asked Questions

01
Does the MacBook Air M5 have a cooling fan?

No. The MacBook Air M5 utilizes a completely fanless, passive thermal design. It runs in absolute silence, even under heavy processing loads.

02
Is the MacBook Air M5 good enough for video editing?

Yes, it handles light-to-moderate 4K video editing well. For short exports and color grading it performs close to the MacBook Pro M5. Under sustained heavy renders it will eventually throttle due to its fanless design, so professionals doing long, continuous exports will benefit from the Pro’s active cooling.

03
Which one holds its resale value better?

Both age well: M-based MacBooks retain up to 50% of their value after three years, well above comparable Windows laptops. Still, MacBook Pros generally retain a higher dollar amount.

04
Which model has better battery life?

While the MacBook Air M5 delivers a whopping 18 hours of video playback, the larger 16-inch MacBook Pro M5 Max models routinely cross 24 to 27 hours in standard productivity testing due to their massive physical batteries.

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

Pocket raises $11M in bet on rising demand for AI note-taking devices

Unlike AI gadgets like Rabbit or Humane, companies building dedicated gadgets for recording and transcribing meetings have actually seen some traction. The market is huge — though a bit constrained, as smartphones work fine for such tasks when paired with note-taking apps — and startups like Plaud, Mobvoi, Anker, Viaim, and Vibe have jumped in to take advantage.

In this crowded market, Y Combinator-backed Pocket thinks it can win with its design, packaging, and pricing. The company sells a $129 credit card-shaped puck, which sticks to the back of your phone, and promises unlimited recordings, transcriptions, and to-do items, no subscription required.

The startup says it has sold more than 130,000 units since launching last year, and that momentum has now helped it score $11 million in funding from Accel, Y Combinator, and ElevenLabs CEO and co-founder Mati Staniszewski.

Pocket’s core idea isn’t novel: You stick the puck to the back of your phone, turn on recording during a meeting, and it’ll record and transcribe your conversations.

Image Credits:Pocket

Users can then ask the accompanying phone app to generate summaries of meetings, ask an AI assistant questions about meetings, create mind maps, and transform the text into different templates.

While the basic transcription comes free with the puck, the company sells a $200-per-year plan to unlock unlimited AI summaries, queries to the AI assistant, daily highlights, and file attachments.

“You can record on the go, offline, and in the field, which is exactly how lawyers, salespeople, doctors, real estate agents, construction workers, and students use Pocket today,” Accel partner Cecilia Wang said. “Not only are people present rather than shifting focus to take notes, but more information and insights also get captured than ever before, which otherwise would have been lost. Over time, that accumulation of insights is really valuable: one central place where your ideas, conversations, and thoughts live, rather than scattered and lost,” Wang said.

Pocket was founded by Akshay Narisetti, who was a founding member of rival note-taking startup Omi; and Gabriel Dymowski, who previously founded a blockchain-based document management startup.

Pocket co-founders Akshay Narisetti and Gabriel Dymowski Image Credits:Pocket

“We thought every meeting notetaker was built for online conversations, but nothing was geared towards real-life talk. AI really needs a lot of context to work better for us, and a lot of that context exists offline,” Narisetti told TechCrunch.

For its enterprise customers, Pocket offers custom workflow management, webhook support, and integration with apps such as Google Calendar, OneDrive, Google Drive, Obsidian, Claude, and Cursor. Plus, there is a model context protocol (MCP) server to connect its AI assistant to other databases.

Like other meeting notetakers, Pocket wants to help people automate tasks like drafting emails, updating CRMs, and creating action items based on meetings. The company is banking on shipping software fast to enable these integrations.

Devices like Pocket undoubtedly face competition from software players such as Granola, Zoom, Fireflies, Otter, and Read AI. However, device-first companies like Plaud, which is on track to generate annual revenue of $100 million via software sales, are also building enterprise capacity along with desktop apps for digital meetings.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Govee’s smart nugget ice maker makes every iced drink feel like a luxury

For some people, the ice in a beverage is almost as important as the drink itself. That’s the audience Govee had in mind when designing its latest ice maker, the GoveeLife Smart Nugget Ice Maker Pro. This $500 premium smart home gadget is aimed at those who crave what’s called “the good ice,” the soft, chewable nugget ice often found in fast food or restaurant drinks. 

Govee says that the modern-design gadget delivers nugget ice in as little as six minutes. That’s a claim that proved true in my testing. It can make up to 60 pounds of ice per day, and has a 3.5-pound ice basket that automatically refills as you scoop out ice.

The hefty price tag means it’s not for people who are perfectly happy with refrigerator ice and don’t know what “good ice” even means. Instead, it’s for self-proclaimed ice enthusiasts willing to splurge on a fun, luxury gadget that makes everyday drinks a little more enjoyable. 

It’s simple to use, as you just need to fill the tank with water and press start on the screen. You can also control the ice maker with the GoveeHome app, which lets you start ice production from your phone or schedule it so ice is ready when you need it, such as before your morning coffee. 

Image Credits:TechCrunch/Aisha Malik

The app control is quite convenient. I could start ice production from my phone while working at my desk, and by the time I wanted an iced latte, there was fresh nugget ice ready to go without ever having to walk to the kitchen to turn the machine on. The app also shows ice production in real time and how much is currently in the ice bin, which is useful for wanting to stop production when you just want a certain amount. 

The ice maker also supports voice commands with Alexa and Google Assistant, which means a quick ““Hey Google, start the ice maker,” leads to fresh ice. 

The ice maker uses what Govee calls AI NoiseGuard technology to keep operating noise low, too. Designed to operate at around 40 dB, the system can automatically trigger defrosting cycles to minimize noise and help ensure a steady supply of ice. The machine does produce a steady hum while making ice, but I didn’t find the noise distracting or overtly loud. 

It wouldn’t be a Govee product if it didn’t offer customizable ambient lighting. The smart ice maker has a light that illuminates the ice basket and adds a fun visual element to the appliance. Through the app, you can choose from a variety of presets or create your own custom lighting effects. You can choose how bright you want the lights to be or turn them off altogether. 

I mostly kept it on a light pink setting, but occasionally switched to the “cyberpunk” mode, which casts a changing purple and red glow that felt fun and futuristic when I had people over. 

Image Credits:TechCrunch/Aisha Malik

Measuring 17.28 inches deep, 13.98 inches wide, and 17.01 inches tall, the ice maker takes up a lot of counter space and weighs a hefty 50 pounds. If you have a small kitchen, it can appear bulky, especially because its sleek design doesn’t exactly resemble an ice maker from afar.

As for setup, it was pretty straightforward, but afterwards I definitely needed my husband’s help to place it in our kitchen, and then again when I needed to move it around when it came to descaling and cleaning the machine. 

Overall, the nugget ice elevated my iced drinks, giving them a coffee shop feel at home and making my morning routine more enjoyable. I also observed that the ice melted more slowly than my fridge ice, so my drinks stayed colder for longer without getting watered down as quickly.

Another big plus was its speed. It made ice much faster than my refrigerator, so I always had enough on hand when hosting friends and family. The ice maker itself was something guests noticed when they came over, not just because of its size and beaming lights, but because the nugget ice was a hit with the other self-proclaimed ice connoisseurs in my life (some even threatened to steal it). 

Whether or not the GoveeLife Smart Nugget Ice Maker Pro is for you really comes down to how much you care about having nugget ice on demand and how often you’ll actually use it. If you aren’t much into ice, you obviously don’t need a fairly niche appliance.

But if you’re someone who regularly drinks iced beverages and loves “the good ice,” this ice maker could be the gadget you never knew you needed.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Apple raises Mac and iPad prices, spares iPhone for now

Amid a worldwide memory shortage driven by the AI buildout, Apple is raising prices of its Mac and iPad lineups, as reported by Bloomberg. For the moment, there is no rise in iPhone prices, but there is a possibility that it could arrive later in the year.

The new entrant to the MacBook lineup, MacBook Neo, will now cost $699 instead of $599. The company also raised the base MacBook Air’s price from $1,099 to $1,299 and the MacBook Pro’s price from $1,699 to $1,999. The desktop-class Mac Studio now costs $2,499, up from $1,999

iPads also received a price bump: the Air now costs $749, up from $599, and the Pro now costs $1,199, up from $999. The base iPad model with the A16 chip now costs $449 instead of $349, and the iPad Mini with the A17 chip costs $599 instead of $499.

Apple’s smart home devices are costlier as well. The standard HomePod is up from $299 to $349, HomePod Mini is up from $99 to $129, and the Apple TV box is up from $99 to $129.

The company’s Vision Pro headset is now priced at $3,699, from its already costly tag of $3,499.

“The consumer electronics industry is facing an unprecedented challenge. The rapid expansion of AI data centers has created an extraordinary surge in demand for memory and storage. We have never seen a component price increase this much, this quickly,” the company told CNBC in a statement.

“We know this is not welcome news, and we are working tirelessly to find solutions,” it added.

Last week, Tim Cook told the Wall Street Journal that price hikes for Apple’s products were “unavoidable,” as memory and storage component prices keep rising because of the AI boom. During the company’s earnings call in April, Cook alluded that for iPhones, the company was facing constraints on the main processing chip rather than memory. He also said that it “may take several months to reach supply-demand balance” for Mac Studio and Mac Mini.

Apple discontinued the base 256GB $599 Mac Mini in May, and made the $799 base model with 512GB storage the base model. The M4 Pro configuration is now $1,599, up from $1,399.

In March, analyst firm Counterpoint noted that smartphone DRAM prices have jumped by 50%, and NAND Flash storage prices have jumped by over 90% quarter-over-quarter in Q1 2026.

“We have reached a point where absorbing memory price hikes is impossible unless one wishes to run a business at a major loss. Memory prices have increased more than fourfold since Q4 2025, and this single component has eroded the profit margins of most consumer electronics players. Apple has done well to hold prices steady until now, though it hinted at increases last week,” Tarun Pathak, Research Director at Counterpoint, told TechCrunch.

“The growing demand for AI infrastructure has fundamentally changed the memory supply chain, meaning higher BOM (Bill of Materials) costs are now a lasting challenge. We also expect other PC and tablet OEMs to follow Apple’s example. They may raise prices on select products, cut discounts, or adjust their product lines to focus more on premium devices,” he added.

While the AI chip crunch is affecting consumer companies, suppliers like Micron are reaping the benefits. The company clocked in a 4x jump in year-over-year revenue in its most recent earnings.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Is Acer Nitro V 16 ANV16-72-70F4 the New Mid-Range King?

BOTTOM LINE — ACER NITRO V 16 ANV16-72-70F4

Acer Nitro V 16 ANV16-72-70F4

CPU: INTEL CORE 7 240H
GPU: RTX 5060 · 8GB GDDR7 · 95W
DISPLAY: 16″ WUXGA 180HZ IPS
RAM: 16GB DDR5-5600
PRICE: $1,024.99 MSRP

Bottom line: The Acer Nitro V 16 ANV16-72-70F4 is one of the most complete sub-$1,100 gaming laptops money can buy in 2025–2026. An NVIDIA GeForce RTX 5060 with a full 95W TGP, a crisp 16:10 180Hz IPS panel, Thunderbolt 4, Killer networking, and an upgrade path make it a formidable daily driver — provided you can live with its plastic chassis and modest 512GB starting storage. Unless you specifically need a 2560×1600 display or faster multi-core CPU performance, there’s no compelling reason to spend $475 more on the Core 9 version for a gaming-primary machine.

The Acer Nitro V 16 (ANV16-72-70F4) emerged in 2026 as the “sweet spot” configuration for mid-range gamers. By moving away from the “Nitro 5” branding and adopting the 16:10 aspect ratio, Acer has modernized its budget lineup to compete with the likes of the Lenovo LOQ and ASUS TUF series.

Acer Nitro V 16 ANV16-72-70F4: Specs at Glance

The ANV16-72-70F4 is the entry-level configuration of Acer’s refreshed Nitro V 16 (ANV16-72) line — a gaming laptop family that sits directly below the Predator Helios but above the stripped-down Aspire Gaming series. This model ships with Intel’s Arrow Lake-H Core 7 240H, NVIDIA’s Blackwell-architecture RTX 5060, and a 76Wh battery in a familiar all-black plastic chassis.

ComponentSpecificationProcessorIntel Core 7 240H (10 Cores, up to 5.20 GHz)GraphicsNVIDIA GeForce RTX 5060 (8GB GDDR7)Memory16GB DDR5 RAM (5600MHz)Storage512GB PCIe Gen4 SSDDisplay16″ WUXGA (1920 x 1200) IPS, 180Hz, 16:10ConnectivityThunderbolt 4, HDMI 2.1, Wi-Fi 6E

Design and Build Quality

Acer keeps the Nitro V 16’s aesthetic deliberately restrained. The all-black plastic chassis features a tapered profile — thinner at the front lid, thickening toward the rear exhaust — that at least gives the impression of purposeful engineering. The lid wears a metallic Nitro logo at the center. Nothing about the exterior loudly announces “gaming laptop,” which lets it easily blend in in an office environment.

The polymer construction is high-quality for the price, with noticeably greater rigidity than older Nitro releases. The hinge opens to ~140 degrees and holds the display well at any angle. Admittedly, the chassis is not as good as aluminum, but it doesn’t feel cheap either.

At 5.29 lbs, it’s heavier than true ultrabooks but comparable to competing 16-inch gaming laptops. The bundled 135W adapter adds another ~300g, so budget bag space accordingly.

Port Layout & Connectivity

Port placement is well thought out for right-handed mouse users. The two fastest USB-A ports (10Gbps) sit on the right, keeping the mouse pad area clear of cable clutter. The left side hosts RJ-45 Ethernet, a slower USB-A Gen 1 port, and a microSD slot. Notable bonuses include a full Thunderbolt 4/USB4 40Gbps port, HDMI 2.1 output (supporting 4K/60Hz or 1080p/240Hz external displays), and Killer E2600 Gigabit Ethernet backed by Killer Wi-Fi 6.

Display Performance

The 16:10 aspect ratio is a true upgrade over older 16:9 gaming laptops: Users get more vertical real estate for code editors, browser tabs, and document windows. 100% sRGB coverage ensures colors are accurate enough for light content, and the anti-glare coating keeps reflections manageable indoors. The 3ms overdrive response time pairs well with the 180Hz panel for competitive play.

The main limitations are familiar Nitro compromises: 300 nits of peak brightness makes outdoor use uncomfortable, and there’s no DCI-P3 or HDR certification. If you plan to do color-sensitive photo or video editing, step up to the Intel Core 9-based version with the optional WQXGA (2560×1600) panel. But purely for gaming and everyday productivity, this screen is genuinely excellent at its price.

CPU & GPU Performance

Intel Core 7 240H

The Core 7 240H uses Intel’s hybrid P+E core architecture: six Performance cores clocked up to 5.20 GHz and four Efficiency cores reaching 4.00 GHz. The on-die NPU handles AI-accelerated workloads and offloads tasks like background noise suppression and video upscaling. In everyday gaming and streaming scenarios, the Intel Core 7 240H keeps up without bottlenecking the RTX 5060 — it’s ranked around #91 in LaptopMedia’s CPU performance hierarchy, which is perfectly competitive in the sub-$1,100 tier.

NVIDIA GeForce RTX 5060 (95W TGP)

The RTX 5060’s key wins over the outgoing RTX 4060 are DLSS 4 with Multi-Frame Generation and an upgraded 572 AI TOPS neural processing capability. In practice, DLSS 4 MFG in supported titles like Alan Wake 2 can double or triple the rendered frame rate with minimal perceptible loss in quality — effectively making the RTX 5060 feel like a faster-tier GPU. The 95W Max Graphics Power configuration in this model (vs. the 85W variant in some competing configurations) means Acer isn’t artificially throttling the GPU to save thermals or cost.

Real-world gaming benchmarks place the ANV16-72-70F4 at approximately 85–110 FPS in titles like Counter-Strike 2 at 1200p on “Very High” settings. Shadow of the Tomb Raider runs comfortably at 90–100 FPS at native resolution on the “Highest” preset. Metro Exodus Enhanced (ray-tracing enabled) lands at around 70 FPS — playable and visually stunning for a sub-$1,100 machine.

Thermal Management

The GPU cooling story is excellent: Acer’s dual-fan system keeps the RTX 5060 stable and cool during extended sessions, resulting in consistent frame rates without GPU throttling. The CPU tells a different story under prolonged multi-threaded workloads — sustained Cinebench runs show the Core 7 240H throttling back after the initial boost window as the system prioritizes GPU thermals. For gaming, this is largely irrelevant. For CPU-heavy tasks like video encoding or 3D rendering, you will notice thermal limitations.

// THERMAL TIP

Using Acer’s NitroSense utility, switch between Silent, Balanced, and Performance modes. Enabling Performance mode and pairing it with the laptop on a hard, flat surface (not a pillow) dramatically reduces CPU throttling under load.

Intel Core 7 240H vs Core 9 270H Versions: Which Should You Buy?

The Nitro V 16 ANV16-72 lineup spans three CPU tiers — Core 5 210H, Core 7 240H, and Core 9 270H — paired with either an RTX 5060 or RTX 5070. The two most relevant configurations for most buyers are the Core 7 240H + RTX 5060 (our subject today) and the step-up Core 9 270H + RTX 5070. Here’s how they compare head-to-head:

ANV16-72-70F4
CORE 7 240H + RTX 5060
ANV16-72-933F
CORE 9 270H + RTX 5070

CPU Rank
#91
#33

GPU
RTX 5060 (95W)
RTX 5070

GPU Speed Diff.
Baseline
~11% faster

Display Options
WUXGA 1920×1200 only
WUXGA + WQXGA 2560×1600

Base RAM
16GB DDR5-5600
32GB DDR5-5600

Base Storage
512GB PCIe Gen 4
1TB PCIe Gen 4

Multi-core Work
Good
Significantly better

CPU Throttling
Moderate under load
More pronounced — same cooling system

Price (MSRP)
$1,024.99
~$1,499.99

Best For
1080p/1200p gaming, everyday use
1440p gaming, heavier CPU workloads

The Core 9 270H model has a faster CPU on paper, but there’s an important catch: The same cooling system that excels at keeping the RTX 5070 cool struggles to adequately manage the Core 9 270H under heavy CPU loads, leading to more aggressive throttling than you’d expect for a $1,500 laptop. If you’re buying this laptop primarily for gaming— which most people are — the Core 7 240H + RTX 5060 combination is the smarter value proposition at $1,025. The GPU performance delta between the RTX 5060 and RTX 5070 is only ~11%, and DLSS 4 effectively closes that gap further in supported titles.

The only scenario where we’d confidently recommend spending up to the Core 9 is if you need the WQXGA 2560×1600 display option (sharper, significantly better for content work).

5 Ways to Reduce the Cost of Your Acer Nitro V 16 Upgrade

The ANV16-72-70F4 already offers an excellent value at its $1,025 MSRP, but the 2026 global memory price surge has made new computers more expensive across the board. So here are five concrete strategies to lower your real out-of-pocket cost:

  1. Time your purchase around major sale events. Historically, Acer Nitro V models drop 12–18% during Amazon Prime Day (July), Best Buy’s Black Friday sale (November), and Micro Center’s periodic student deals. If you can wait, signing up for price-drop alerts on CamelCamelCamel for the B0FS8BZDQ9 ASIN will notify you when the price dips. Plan the transition so your old computer sells quickly, while your new one is on discount.

2. Sell your current laptop on Gadget Salvation first. Before you buy anything, get an instant offer on the computer you are replacing at GadgetSalvation.com. A 2–3 year-old mid-range gaming laptop in good condition can net $200–$500, directly offsetting the cost of the Nitro V 16. The process is free to use, including complimentary shipping postage, and pays within one to two business days — you can time the selling ahead of your new laptop purchase.

3. Choose the Core 7 configuration over the Core 9. As established in our comparison above, the $1,025 ANV16-72-70F4 (Core 7 + RTX 5060) delivers approximately 91% of the gaming performance of the $1,499 Core 9 + RTX 5070 model. For most gamers at 1200p resolution, the Core 7 is the smarter purchase — pocket the $475 difference.

4. Buy open-box or Acer Certified Refurbished. Acer’s certified refurbished program and retailers like Best Buy’s open-box section regularly list Nitro V 16 configurations at 10–20% below MSRP. Combined with Acer’s standard warranty on certified units, the risk is minimal.

5. Self-upgrade RAM and storage post-purchase. Rather than paying Acer’s factory premium for 32GB or 1TB configurations, buy the base 16GB/512GB model and upgrade yourself. A 2×16GB DDR5-5600 kit costs ~$45–60; a 2TB PCIe Gen 4 SSD runs ~$80–100. Total self-upgrade cost: ~$160, versus a ~$200–300 MSRP premium for the factory-configured version.

The Verdict

Acer Nitro V 16 ANV16-72-70F4 is the rare budget gaming laptop that doesn’t feel like a compromise. At $1,025, you get a full-power RTX 5060, a really good 180Hz 16:10 screen, Thunderbolt 4 connectivity, Killer networking, and the ability to upgrade RAM and storage down the line. The Intel Core 7 240H won’t win benchmark trophies, but it keeps pace with the GPU without becoming the bottleneck. Unless you specifically need a 2560×1600 screen or significantly faster multi-core CPU performance, there’s no compelling reason to spend $475 more on the Core 9 version for a strictly gaming laptop. Finally, you can further offset the cost of a new Nitro V 16 model if you sell old Acer (or almost any other brand!) on Gadget Salvation.

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

Vertu wants CEOs to run companies from an AI foldable starting at $6,880

Luxury smartphone brand Vertu on Thursday unveiled a foldable phone powered by an AI agent that connects with enterprise software and coordinates workflows. The company is targeting executives who manage business operations and communications on the move.

Called the Alphafold, the foldable smartphone starts at $6,880 for the calfskin version. Higher-end models feature bespoke finishes including alligator leather, 18K gold, and natural diamond accents, along with customized detailing. This continues Vertu’s long-standing strategy of positioning its phones as luxury status symbols aimed at affluent buyers. The company told TechCrunch that its highest-end standard model is currently priced at $46,800, with further customization options available.

The launch marks Vertu’s latest attempt to reinvent itself for the AI era after struggling to remain relevant in the modern smartphone market. The Hong Kong-headquartered company, once known for luxury handsets and concierge services popular among wealthy buyers before the rise of the iPhone, has changed ownership multiple times over the years as mainstream smartphone makers came to dominate the industry. Nonetheless, Vertu is betting the Alphafold can help reinvent the brand for the AI era by combining luxury hardware with enterprise-focused AI capabilities.

Vertu’s Alphafold comes with Hermes Agent, built on top of the open source Hermes project by Nous Research. The agent can connect to enterprise systems like ERP and CRM, and coordinate tasks such as approvals, scheduling, sales tracking, travel planning, and operational reporting through natural-language prompts. However, the company said that its Phone-to-ERP and VPS deployments would be customized for each customer depending on their existing enterprise systems, with pricing varying accordingly.

Image Credits:Vertu

The Alphafold, Vertu said, can route requests across multiple AI models, including OpenAI’s GPT, Anthropic’s Claude, Google’s Gemini, and selected open source models, while also integrating with more than 80 apps and dozens of native phone functions for cross-platform workflows.

Existing AI features on smartphones from major manufacturers remain focused largely on consumer tools such as image editing and voice assistance, Vertu CEO Molly Ma said. This leaves room for more advanced AI-agent workflows tied to enterprise systems. She also pointed to earlier AI-agent smartphone experiments in China that gained popularity before facing challenges over data privacy and cloud-based data collection.

The Alphafold, Ma said, aims to address those concerns through a privacy-focused architecture featuring a proprietary A5 security chip. This silicon is designed to isolate authentication keys, biometric credentials, and sensitive enterprise information from the main operating system, the company said. It added that commercially sensitive data can be processed locally on the device, while prompts sent to external AI models are redacted or tokenized before leaving the phone.

While Vertu has emphasized the device’s privacy and security architecture, including on-device processing and data redaction features, the company said the system has not yet undergone third-party security audits or independent certification. However, Vertu told TechCrunch that independent audits and certification remain on its security roadmap “as an explicit next-stage commitment,” adding that it would “communicate the progress and the results publicly” once the product matures further.

The Alphafold is powered by Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Gen 4 processor and features an 8.05-inch foldable display alongside a 6.53-inch outer screen, a 6,500 mAh battery, and satellite communication capabilities. The device also includes a triple rear camera setup with 50-megapixel primary and ultrawide cameras, as well as a 5-megapixel telephoto lens. Vertu said the phone’s hinge uses metal, titanium, and carbon-fiber components and is rated for up to 650,000 folds.

The Alphafold is not Vertu’s first attempt to combine AI with foldable devices. The company last year introduced Agent Q, a clamshell-style foldable smartphone focused on AI-driven automation and productivity features.

However, Ma told TechCrunch that Alphafold represents a significant step forward from Agent Q, arguing that AI-agent technology has matured rapidly over the past year, with improvements in memory, automation, and app integration.

Foldable smartphones remain a niche segment globally despite years of investment by major manufacturers, including Samsung and Huawei. As many as 20 million foldable smartphones were shipped globally in 2025, accounting for less than 2% of total smartphone shipments, according to IDC data shared with TechCrunch. The research firm said foldables sold at an average price of about $1,300 last year — roughly three times the price of non-foldable smartphones.

Kiranjeet Kaur, associate research director for mobile phones research at IDC, said foldables could eventually benefit from AI-agent workflows because their larger displays are better suited for multitasking and productivity-oriented experiences. She, however, added that enterprise AI adoption on smartphones still lags behind computers, and that most enterprise smartphone decisions continue to be driven by ecosystem integration and device management support rather than AI capabilities.

The first 115-unit batch of Vertu’s Alphafold begins shipping this week across major markets, including the U.S.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

How to Practice Mindful Reuse in Your Daily Life

We talk about recycling all the time — but recycling is a last resort. Before a product gets broken down and reborn as something new, it has a whole second, third, or even fourth life waiting. Mindful reuse is the practice of seeing that potential before the bin even enters your mind.

The concept of “reduce, reuse, recycle” has been drilled into us since grade school — yet in practice, most people jump straight from “use once” to “bin it.” The middle step, reuse, is by far the most impactful: it preserves the energy, materials, and labor that went into making a thing in the first place. And it costs almost nothing.

Mindful reuse isn’t about obsessive frugality or filling your home with junk you’ll never use again. It’s a small shift in perception — pausing before disposal and asking: Does this have an alternative use?

1. Everyday Objects: Start With What’s Already in Your Home

The most impactful reuse habits aren’t dramatic — they’re tiny decisions made twenty times a day. A glass jar becomes a pantry container. A worn-out t-shirt becomes a cleaning rag. A cardboard box becomes packing material for your next shipment.

The trick is slowing down enough to notice the object before you toss it. A brief pause at the bin — five seconds — is usually all it takes to spot alternate utility.

  • Before buying a new item, check whether you already own something that could do the job
  • Keep a small basket near your kitchen bin for items that need a second look before disposal
  • Designate a “reuse shelf” in a cupboard — old containers, bags, ribbons, rubber bands — raid it before buying new
  • Switch to cloth napkins, beeswax wraps, and refillable bottles for daily household use

Every product in your home represents hours of human labor and decades of ecological debt. Using it once and discarding it is the real waste.

2. Clothing & Textiles: Rethink Your Wardrobe Before You Shop

The fashion industry is one of the most resource-intensive sectors on the planet. The antidote isn’t a capsule wardrobe sold to you by another brand — it’s learning to work with what you have, repair what’s broken, and pass on what you’ve genuinely outgrown.

Clothes swaps with friends are an easy win: A social event where everyone brings items they no longer wear and leaves with something “new.” Platforms like Vinted and Depop have industrialized this principle — anything you no longer love is someone else’s treasure.

Before donating, consider whether a worn item can be repaired first. A cobbler can resole boots. A tailor can take in a blazer that no longer fits. The bar for “beyond repair” is much higher than most of us assume.

3. Technology: Your Old Devices Have More Life Left Than You Think

Electronics are among the most resource-intensive objects we own — rare-earth metals, complex manufacturing chains, and significant carbon costs go into every phone, laptop, and tablet. Yet the average upgrade cycle is under three years, and most people discard devices that still function perfectly well.

Mindful reuse here has two dimensions: Extending the life of what you own and responsibly rehoming it when you’re done. A laptop that’s two years old and “feels slow” likely just needs a memory upgrade, a battery replacement, or a fresh OS install — not a new machine.

50M+

TONNES OF E-WASTE / YEAR

80%

NOT FORMALLY RECYCLED

3×

LONGER LIFESPAN WITH CARE

When upgrading is unavoidable, selling your old electronics is far better than letting them gather dust in a drawer — for both the planet and your wallet. Resale platforms have made this easier than ever, and reputable services will even handle the logistics.

// BUYBACK SERVICE ADVICE

Sell Your Old Mac or PC With Gadget Salvation

Gadget Salvation is a long-standing buyback platform specializing in used laptops, smartphones, desktops, game consoles, and more. Site visitors can calculate an instant quote, receive a complimentary shipping label, should they choose to move forward, and get paid ultra-fast. We at Gadget Salvation strive to make truly easy for our customers to give their old electronics a new life. Resale is one of the cleanest ways to practice mindful reuse with your tech.
Our company’s motto is “Go green and make green”!

The environmental case for device resale is compelling. When a laptop is resold and reused for even one extra year, it defers the production of a new unit — and manufacturing a new laptop generates significantly more carbon than keeping an existing one running.

4. Food & Kitchen: Zero-Waste Cooking Is Closer Than You Think

Food waste is one of the largest contributors to greenhouse gas emissions globally, yet kitchen reuse is among the easiest habits to build. Vegetable peelings become stock. Stale bread becomes breadcrumbs or croutons. Overripe bananas freeze for later or become banana bread.

The practice of “mise en place” — preparing and repurposing ingredients intentionally — is a useful frame not just for professional kitchens but for home cooks. Cook once, eat twice: roast a whole chicken on Sunday, use the carcass for stock on Monday, and the leftover meat in a salad on Tuesday.

  • Keep a stock bag in the freezer — add vegetable trimmings throughout the week, then simmer for 30 minutes
  • Learn the “use-it-up” meal: a weekly dish built from whatever needs eating before it spoils
  • Invest in good glass containers that go from fridge to oven to table — fewer single-use packaging moments
  • Compost anything that can’t be eaten — it closes the loop and feeds your garden or a local scheme

5. Community: Reuse Is More Powerful When It’s Shared

Individual action matters, but the leverage of mindful reuse multiplies when it happens at the community level. Tool libraries let neighborhoods share drills, ladders, and lawnmowers that would otherwise sit idle 98% of the time. Buy Nothing groups on Facebook and Nextdoor enable hyper-local gifting of items that still have value.

Libraries themselves — the original sharing economy — deserve more credit than they get. Beyond books: libraries of things, seed libraries, toy libraries, and skills-sharing programs are growing in cities around the world. The infrastructure of reuse already exists in most communities; it just needs participation.

Ownership is often just custody. The most mindful thing you can do with an object is make sure it ends up in the hands of someone who actually needs it.

Repair hubs are another underrated resource: volunteer-run spaces where people bring broken items (lamps, bicycles, clothing, small electronics) and skilled volunteers fix them for free. They exist in most major cities and are a true act of community building alongside their sustainability benefits.

Conclusion: From Convenience to Consciousness

The deeper shift that underpins all of this is moving from a default of convenience to a habit of consideration. Modern consumer culture has trained us to treat disposal as frictionless and acquisition as the default solution to nearly any problem. Mindful reuse reverses that: it makes you ask what already exists before reaching for something new.

This doesn’t mean stoicism and deprivation. It means a different relationship with stuff— one where an object’s story doesn’t end when you’re done with it. The jacket you pass on during a neighborhood winter coat drive, the laptop you sell through Gadget Salvation, the jar you wash and refill — each of these is a small act of care for the material world we all share.

Start with one room. One category. One habit. Mindful reuse compounds quietly, and over time, it stops feeling like effort — it just becomes the way you live.

What exactly is mindful reuse, and how is it different from recycling?

Where do I start if I’ve never thought about reuse before?

Is it worth repairing old electronics, or should I just buy new?

Does mindful reuse actually make a measurable environmental difference?

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

iPhone Air: Apple’s Thinnest Smartphone Yet

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

What We Love

  • 5.6mm frame redefines what a premium smartphone can look like today
  • A19 Pro chip with 12GB RAM is absolute overkill — in the best way
  • Grade 5 titanium with Ceramic Shield 2 front and back: very durable
  • LTPO 120Hz display matches the Pro lineup in quality and brightness
  • Battery efficiency punches far above the 3,149 mAh cell’s weight
  • 18MP Center Stage front camera is a generational leap for selfies
  • Full Apple Intelligence suite runs entirely on-device for privacy
  • Exceptional long-term resale value — Apple phones lead the secondhand market

What We Don’t

  • Single rear camera misses ultrawide, macro, and spatial video entirely
  • Mono speaker sounds noticeably weaker compared to dual-speaker rivals
  • $999 entry price — $200 more than iPhone 17 for significant trade-offs
  • No MagSafe Battery included; add-on pack costs an extra $99
  • Titanium is fingerprint-prone; a case is strongly recommended

With the new iPhone Air, Apple’s proposition is simple: What if we made the thinnest, lightest iPhone we possibly could, and didn’t apologize for any of the trade-offs? At 5.6mm thick and weighing 5.96oz, this smartphone feels more futuristic than the chunky glass-and-steel slabs dominating the market in recent years.

But elegance has a price. A single rear camera, a 3,149 mAh battery smaller than the iPhone 17’s, a mono speaker, and no ultrawide lens are all the trade-offs Apple made in the name of thinness. Whether that bargain makes sense for you depends almost entirely on what you actually do with your phone.

Design & Build Quality

Holding the iPhone Air for the first time is an experience in itself. The polished Grade 5 titanium frame (crafted from 80% recycled titanium) catches light the way jewelry does, with a high-gloss mirror finish that feels decisively high-end. The form is so thin that the eye initially refuses to accept it as a real smartphone: it reads more like a concept render mockup.

At the heart of the design is the plateau — a precision-milled raised section on the back that houses the camera, speaker grille, and Apple silicon. Rather than treating this bulge as a necessary evil (the camera bump approach taken by the Pro line), Apple has leaned into it architecturally, making it a geometric accent that anchors the otherwise plain back panel. The result is something genuinely distinctive.

The four available colors — Space Black, Cloud White, Light Gold, and Sky Blue — are all understated and sophisticated. Sky Blue is particularly interesting: it shifts character under different lighting, reading almost white in bright indoor conditions, then revealing a soft, steel-tinted blue outdoors. It’s the same color-shifting quality Apple brought to the M4 MacBook Air, and it works beautifully on titanium.

Durability credentials are strong: Ceramic Shield 2 on the front delivers 3× better scratch resistance than any previous iPhone, and the back is now Ceramic Shield-protected as well — a first. Drop tests suggest the frame handles concrete impacts better than the iPhone 17(!) despite being thinner, a testament to titanium’s strength-to-weight ratio. The Action button and Camera Control button both return from the Pro lineup, a welcome addition at this price point.

Display & Brightness

Apple’s decision to equip the iPhone Air with the same panel technology used in the Pro models pays enormous dividends here. The 6.5-inch Super Retina XDR OLED runs at up to 120Hz with Apple’s LTPO adaptive refresh technology, dropping as low as 1Hz when the always-on display is idle. At 460 ppi and a resolution of 2736×1260, sharpness is essentially a non-issue at any reasonable viewing distance.

Peak brightness hits 3,000 nits outdoors — comfortably readable in direct Chicago summer sunlight — while HDR content peaks at 1,600 nits. Color accuracy is excellent, with support for both HDR10 and Dolby Vision, and the always-on display locks in for a useful persistent glance layer without meaningful battery drain thanks to the LTPO panel’s efficiency.

The slight curvature at the corners and the tight tolerances at the titanium-to-glass transition give the display a cohesive, jewelry-grade feel that the iPhone 17’s aluminum frame simply can’t match. This is, point for point, one of the finest smartphone displays available at any price in the first half of 2026.

Performance & Apple Intelligence

The A19 Pro chip with its 16-core Neural Engine and 12 GB of RAM is not a watered-down processor — it’s the same silicon powering the iPhone 17 Pro, and it shows in every interaction. Apps launch instantly, multitasking feels frictionless, and demanding tasks like 4K video export, on-device AI image generation, and AAA gaming sustain peak performance without thermal throttling that was sometimes noticeable on the iPhone 14 Pro.

Apple Intelligence — the suite of on-device AI features baked into iOS 26 — runs entirely locally on the Neural Engine, meaning features like Clean Up, Writing Tools, visual intelligence via the Camera Control button, and the enhanced Siri with deeper app integration are available without cloud roundtrips. The privacy implications of this architecture are really meaningful in an era when competing AI phone features routinely send data to remote servers.

iPhone Air Camera System

The camera is where the iPhone Air gets a lot of both praise and hate. Rather than include an ultrawide lens — which would have required a taller, wider bump— Apple equipped the Air with a single 48MP Fusion Main camera at f/1.6 with sensor-shift optical image stabilization. Software handles the rest: Apple’s computational photography stack produces a 2× optical-quality telephoto at 52mm by cropping to the center 12MP of the sensor.

In practical use, the main camera works fine. Daylight images are punchy, detailed, and color-accurate, with a wide dynamic range that handles challenging scenes like backlit subjects. Night Mode has continued to improve, and the larger pixels enabled by going single-lens deliver noticeably better low-light performance than you’d expect.

The front camera is a meaningful leap: the new 18MP Center Stage camera with its square sensor enables both portrait and landscape selfies in native orientation. For video calls and group selfies, AI automatically expands the field of view and rotates framing to keep everyone included — it’s the kind of feature that sounds gimmicky until you use it, and then you wonder why it took this long.

Where the camera system falls short is macro photography (no ultrawide means no macro), spatial video (requires two lenses), and telephoto reach beyond 2× optical quality. For most people, none of these omissions will sting daily. For photographers who reach for a 5× zoom or shoot architecture, the iPhone 17 Pro’s triple-lens system is a far better tool.

Battery Life & Charging

Battery life is where users should be prepared to manage their expectations. However, we should also note that Apple’s engineering team has performed quite a miracle here. The iPhone Air’s 3,149 mAh cell is the smallest battery in Apple’s 2025 iPhone lineup, smaller than those of the iPhone 17 and iPhone 17 Pro. On paper, this is alarming for a $999 flagship.

In practice, the combination of the LTPO display’s adaptive refresh rate (1–120Hz), the efficiency-tuned A19 Pro, and iOS 26’s aggressive background power management produces results that defy the spec sheet. In fact, the manufacturer claims up to 27 hours of video playback. At the same time, real-world video streaming endurance ranges from 13 to 22 hours, which is still pretty impressive for a battery of this size.

iPhone Air vs. The Competition

The Apple iPhone Air is somewhat of a novelty among other flagships. It’s thinner than Samsung’s own ultra-thin contender (S25 Edge) and more powerful than any Android at the same price point — but it also makes camera and battery compromises that the competition does not. Here’s where each cellphone wins:

SPEC
IPHONE AIR
IPHONE 17
GALAXY S25 EDGE

CHIPA19 ProA19Snapdragon 8 Elite
RAM12 GB8 GB12 GB
NEURAL ENGINE16-core16-coreHexagon NPU
ON-DEVICE AIFull · Apple IntelligenceFull · Apple IntelligencePartial · Galaxy AI
FRAME MATERIALTitaniumAluminumTitanium
DISPLAY6.5″ LTPO 120Hz6.3″ LTPO 120Hz6.7″ LTPO 120Hz
REAR CAMERAS1 (48 MP)2 (48 MP + 12 MP)2 (200 MP + 12 MP)
BATTERY3,149 mAh3,577 mAh3,900 mAh
PRICE (BASE)$999$799$1,099

iPhone Air vs. iPhone 17: The iPhone 17 at $799 is the pragmatist’s choice. It has a larger battery, a second ultrawide camera, stereo speakers, and faster charging — and it costs $200 less. The iPhone Air wins on looks/design, processor class, RAM, display size, and frame material. The split comes down to whether thinness and premium finish justify the price.

iPhone Air vs. Samsung Galaxy S25 Edge: Samsung’s own thin flagship is a fascinating phone. The S25 Edge is slightly thicker than Air, but it packs a 200MP main camera and a larger battery. It runs Android 15 with Galaxy AI, a strong competitor to Apple Intelligence for some workflows, but still relies more heavily on cloud processing. The Galaxy S25 Edge starts at $1,099 — $100 more than the iPhone Air, making Apple’s device the better value in the ultra-thin segment, particularly for anyone already in the Apple ecosystem.

iPhone Air Resale Value Projection

Apple consistently leads the smartphone resale market, and the iPhone Air’s premium positioning — titanium frame, Pro-class chip, Pro-equivalent display — means it should retain salvage value comparable to that of the iPhone Pro lineup. Based on historical iPhone depreciation curves, here is how the Air is projected to retain its value over the first four years of ownership:

Projected Resale Value Retention

IPHONE AIR · BASED ON HISTORICAL IPHONE PRO RESALE DATA

NEW
2025

1 YEAR

2 YEARS

3 YEARS

4 YEARS

* Projections based on historical iPhone Pro resale trends. Actual values vary by condition, storage tier, color, and market timing.

These numbers reflect why timing your sale matters. The steepest drop occurs in the first 12 months — from $999 to roughly $765 — which makes year one the worst time to sell. But holding through years two and three still yields a meaningful cashback, especially for 512GB and 1TB configurations.

💸

// RESALE TIP //

When you’re ready to upgrade, Gadget Salvation is one of the most reliable buyback sites to sell your used iPhone. We offer instant online valuations, free shipping, and fast payment — no auctions, no waiting, no buyers flaking. For Apple gadgets in particular, our quotes have been consistently competitive, making it worth checking our site out before you hand your cell to a carrier for a fraction of its worth.

Verdict

The iPhone Air is one of the more philosophically interesting Apple products in years. It is not the best iPhone you can buy — the iPhone 17 Pro is more capable in almost every aspect. It is not the most affordable iPhone — the standard iPhone 17 costs $200 less and offers most of the same experience. What it is, however, is a statement: proof that premium design and premium performance can coexist in a form factor that feels almost futuristic.

For those who value how a device feels in the hand and pocket, and how it looks, this smartphone is definitely a compelling choice. For heavy camera users, battery-anxious travelers, or anyone working within a tighter budget, the iPhone 17 or iPhone 17 Pro, at an extra $200, is a more sensible choice.

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

Oura unveils its Ring 5 with a thinner, lighter design starting at $399

Oura on Thursday unveiled the fifth generation of its popular smart ring, starting at $399. The Ring 5, which Oura describes as the world’s smallest smart ring, arrives just a year and a half after the company launched the Ring 4 and seven months after the Ring 4 Ceramic. The Ring 5 is 40% smaller than its predecessor and comes with more accurate sensing and enhanced battery life.

The Ring 5 is launching alongside new software updates that include blood pressure signals, live activity tracking, on-demand care, and other features that will also roll out to the Oura Ring Gen3 and later.

The new smart ring is available for preorder starting today and will start shipping on June 4. It’s available in sizes 6 to 13 and comes in six finishes, including a redesigned Gold with a truer gold tone, an updated Deep Rose with a copper-like look, plus Silver, Brushed Silver, Black, and Stealth. The Black and Silver retail for $399, while the rest cost $499. For comparison, the Ring 4 started at $349.

Maz Brumand, VP of Product at Oura, told TechCrunch that the company reduced the ring’s width by about two millimeters and its thickness by roughly 30%. Brumand noted that Oura members had been asking the company to make a ring that was smaller and thinner, prompting the shift toward a slimmer design. Oura achieved the new size by redesigning the mechanical, electrical, optical, battery, and sensing architectures, Brumand explained.

Image Credits:Oura / Oura

The new ring is designed to be desirable to a broader audience, especially people who have found smart rings too bulky in the past. Oura says the latest model is designed to look and feel like any other ring.

While Oura could previously get away with a bulkier design as the dominant player in the smart ring market, new products from subscription-free rivals like RingConn and Ultrahuman have increased the pressure to innovate. Increased competition also likely explains why Oura is launching a new ring just a year and a half after the Ring 4, compared with the roughly three-year gap between the Ring 3 and Ring 4. It’s also worth noting that the announcement of the Ring 5 arrives a day before RingConn’s Gen 3 is set to start shipping.

In terms of the enhanced battery life, the Ring 5 can last between six to nine days, compared to the five to eight days on the Ring 4.

Oura also says it has reengineered its sensors for better skin contact and added more powerful LEDs in an effort to increase accuracy across a wider range of finger sizes and skin tones.

Software updates

As for the software updates, Oura is launching “Health Radar,” which is designed to monitor key biometric signals in the background to surface patterns members should pay attention to. Health Radar is launching with two foundational capabilities: Blood Pressure Signals and Nighttime Breathing.

Oura says it will continuously detect shifts and patterns that may indicate cardiovascular strain, alerting members when their biometrics suggest signs of increasing blood pressure. With Blood Pressure Signals, Oura tracks blood pressure patterns during sleep when the body’s cardiovascular patterns are most stable, since blood pressure should naturally dip overnight. When it doesn’t, it can signal potential cardiovascular risk that daytime readings may miss, Oura notes.

Image Credits:Oura

Members will also be able to log actual blood pressure readings from cuffs directly in the Oura app.

With Nighttime Breathing, Oura wants to give users a better understanding of how sleep and breathing patterns may impact their health. Members will get a 30-day rolling view of sleep-related breathing patterns and disturbances, expanding on the nightly breathing regularity insights they already receive.

Oura is also moving beyond insights into offering actual care. The company is partnering with Counsel Health, an on-demand platform that combines AI with licensed physicians to bring care directly into the Oura app. Members will be able to ask health questions, receive personalized medical advice, and connect with licensed physicians in the U.S. To access this, members will have to pay an additional fee on top of the standard $5.99 monthly subscription, though Oura did not say how much the added service will cost.

Members in the U.S. will also be able to import diagnosed conditions, medications, lab results, and allergies into the app to get a fuller picture of their health. While some may be understandably wary of uploading their health data to the app, the company promises it’s taking a privacy-first approach to the records.

Image Credits:Oura

Additionally, Oura is adding a new live activity tracking experience that lets members start a workout and view key metrics in real time on their phone, such as pace and distance during activities like running and cycling. The company also updated its “Automatic Activity Detection” to be more accurate for low-motion activities, like Pilates. Members can also connect third-party heart-rate monitors to see their heart rate in real time.

Oura is also adding GLP-1 insights that will give members a longitudinal view of their medication journey and track weight and body changes in one place.

For the first, time, Oura is also attempting to study brain health. Eligible members will be able to enroll in a Brain Health Study that seeks to match short in-app tasks with long-term physiological trends. Oura believes it will eventually be able to map how daily choices and recovery impact mental sharpness and long-term brain health.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

This $300 pizza oven can easily help elevate your summer pizza nights

If you enjoy homemade pizza but don’t love the hassle that comes with it, an electric pizza oven may be the ideal upgrade. The Ninja Artisan Outdoor Pizza Oven is aimed at people who want delicious pizza nights without having to deal with things like propane or wood pellets, unlike many other pizza ovens.

I need to preface this review by admitting that I am no pizza connoisseur, but I ended up with quick, restaurant-style pizzas using the oven, largely thanks to its simplicity and easy-to-use design.

The oven plugs into a standard outdoor outlet and gets up to 700°F. It’s worth noting that although it’s electric, it’s not suitable for indoor use. 

It features five pizza settings — Neapolitan, New York, Thin Crust, Pan Pizza, and Custom — that you can quickly toggle between. It comes with a pizza stone that can cook 12-inch pizzas. While I found that the 12-inch size was perfect for me and my husband, some may wish for the option to make bigger pizzas when feeding a larger crowd.

Since the oven has heating elements on both the top and bottom, pizzas cook evenly and consistently without needing to rotate the pie, manage a flame, or constantly babysit the cooking process, especially once you’ve gotten familiar with the different modes.

Image Credits:Aisha Malik/TechCrunch

Just like the cooking process, setup was quite easy. All I had to do was remove the oven and pizza stone from the box and packaging, plug it in, and start the preheating process. 

I first tested the Neapolitan setting, which cranks the oven to its max temperature of 700°F and can cook a pizza in just three minutes. It took about 20 minutes for the oven to preheat, and it beeped to let me know it was ready. I had my first pizza ready on the pizza peel that Ninja sent me alongside the oven (sold separately), and I was able to easily shimmy it onto the pizza stone inside the oven. 

After that, you just need to push the Start button to begin cooking the pizza and begin the timer. While the pizza is cooking, you can adjust the timer using the dial if you want to cook it for a custom amount of time. 

While I did keep an eye on the pizza through the small front window and internal light to make sure it didn’t burn, the three-minute cook time ended up being perfect, leaving me with a pizza that had an airy crust, puffed edges, and light charring. The airy crust is something I was never able to achieve when making homemade pizzas in my standard kitchen oven. 

For the subsequent Neapolitan pizzas that I made, I didn’t have to keep an eye on them and instead relied on the timer to beep and let me know when they were ready. 

It’s worth noting that if you’re looking for that authentic wood-fired flavor, you won’t get that with this oven. But if you’re happy with consistent, reliable results, then this oven is perfect for you. 

Image Credits:Aisha Malik/TechCrunch

I also tried the New York setting, which sets a lower temperature than the Neapolitan mode and has a longer cook time. I used this setting for a topping-heavy pizza to get an even bake and more doneness in the middle. With this setting, I got less of a char on the crust, which is what I was looking for. 

As for cleaning the oven, it’s fairly straightforward and low maintenance since you don’t have to deal with soot from an open flame. The interior can be easily wiped down with a damp cloth to remove crumbs and any light messes. For the pizza stone itself, I scraped off debris after it cooled down, since you’re not supposed to use soap on a pizza stone because it’s porous and can absorb water and potentially crack or shatter when exposed to high heat.

What I like most about the pizza oven is that homemade pizza nights no longer feel like a weekend-only activity. Before, making pizza at home felt like too much of a project for a weekday, so I saved it for occasional weekends. But with how fast and simple the Ninja Artisan oven is to use, homemade pizza now feels like something I can quickly make after work without it feeling like a task.

I think the pizza oven is worth buying if you want to make restaurant-style pizza at home without the complexity of traditional pizza ovens.

The Ninja Artisan Pizza Oven costs $300 and comes in four colors: green and gold, blue and gold, black and gold, and dark gray.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

MacBook Pro 16 M5 vs Dell XPS 16: Which One is More Powerful?

The 2026 MacBook Pro 16 with Apple’s M5 Pro chip and the newly rebranded Dell XPS 16 running Intel’s Panther Lake platform represent opposite philosophies for what a pro laptop should be. One bets everything on silicon integration and ecosystem. The other bets on Windows flexibility, a knockout OLED display, and dedicated NVIDIA graphics. Here’s how they actually compare.

Dell XPS 16 vs MacBook Pro 16: The Short Version

If you live in the Apple ecosystem and need blistering, sustained performance with near-day-and-a-half battery life, the MacBook Pro 16 M5 Pro is the most capable 16-inch laptop money can buy. It starts at $2,699, and the performance-per-watt lead over any Intel-based competitor remains commanding in 2026.

The latest 2026 Dell XPS 16— rebranded from last year’s “Dell 16 Premium” — is the better choice if you need Windows, dedicated GPU horsepower for gaming or CUDA workflows, a next-generation tandem OLED display, or the flexibility of upgrading storage yourself. It starts at $1,750, undercutting Apple by a meaningful margin.

Benchmarks & Real-World Speed

The M5 Pro marks a significant architectural leap. Apple claims roughly 20% more CPU throughput and 30–50% more GPU performance than the M4 Pro, and independent benchmarks confirm the story. In Geekbench 6 multi-core, the M5 Pro’s 18-core configuration scores around 25,000 — comfortably ahead of the Core Ultra X7 358H’s approximately 9,700 in the same test. That gap is wide by any measure.

For CPU-bound workloads — video encoding, compiling, running local AI models — the MacBook Pro’s lead is essentially unassailable on a per-watt basis. The M5 Pro sustains its peak speeds without throttling, a hallmark of Apple silicon’s thermal discipline. Even during extended benchmarking sessions, reviewers report the fans barely register.

The Dell tells a different story once you add a discrete GPU. The optional NVIDIA RTX 5070 configuration unlocks CUDA acceleration, ray tracing, and gaming performance that Apple simply can’t match in a thin-and-light chassis. For 3D rendering in Blender, DLSS-assisted gaming at native 4K, or CUDA-dependent scientific workloads, the XPS 16 wins convincingly.

SSD Speed: The M5 Pro MacBook Pro comes with faster PCIe 5.0 SSD storage, delivering roughly 2× the sequential read speeds of the Dell’s PCIe Gen 4 drive. For workflows involving large media files, this translates to very noticeable time savings.

Screen Quality: Mini-LED vs Tandem OLED

Display MetricMacBook Pro 16 (XDR)Dell XPS 16 (Tandem OLED)TechnologyMini-LED (Liquid Retina XDR)Tandem OLEDNative Resolution3456 x 2234 (254 ppi)3200 x 2000Peak Brightness (HDR)1600 nits~750-800 nitsSustained Brightness1000 nits500 nitsRefresh Rate120Hz ProMotion20Hz – 120Hz AdaptiveColor AccuracyDelta-E Delta-E ~0.21Touch CapabilityNoYes (10-point multi-touch)

This is perhaps the most nuanced comparison in the whole article, because both displays are excellent — just in different ways. The MacBook Pro’s 16.2-inch Liquid Retina XDR Mini-LED panel delivers 1,000 nits sustained SDR brightness and an eye-watering 1,600 nits in HDR. For outdoor use, prolonged sessions in bright offices, or HDR video work, it’s peerless. ProMotion (10–120Hz adaptive) ensures buttery smooth scrolling and responsiveness throughout.

The Dell XPS 16 counters with a 16.3-inch tandem OLED — the headline feature of the 2026 redesign. Tandem OLED stacks two emissive layers, dramatically boosting peak brightness while preserving true color depth and ultra-vivid contrast. Furthermore, it significantly increases the display’s lifespan, mitigating the burn-in risks expected from OLED. The panel supports full DCI-P3 and Dolby Vision, making it ideal for color-critical creative work and HDR video consumption.

Endurance: A Decisive Win for MacBook Pro 16 M5

Battery life is where the MacBook Pro’s advantage becomes almost comically large. Apple officially claims up to 24 hours of use; however, owners report approximately 20 hours. This is extraordinary for a laptop with pro-level processing power.

The Dell XPS 16, by contrast, delivers what you’d expect from an Intel-based laptop with a discrete GPU: approximately 9 to 12 hours in light workloads, and considerably less under sustained load. Not terrible for a Windows laptop — it’s actually competitive — but the MacBook’s lead is difficult to overstate for anyone who works on the go.

Performance on battery: Apple silicon delivers identical performance whether plugged in or running on battery. Intel’s x86 chips often throttle when unplugged. For on-the-go professionals, the MacBook’s behavioral consistency is a meaningful real-world advantage.

Chassis, Keyboard & Portability

Apple’s MacBook Pro 16 design didn’t change. Its all-recycled-aluminium (!) body, massive ForceTouch trackpad, and backlit keyboard remain class-leading. The laptop weighs 4.7 lbs and includes full-size ports that require no dongles: MagSafe 3, three Thunderbolt 5, HDMI, and a full-size SD card slot.

Dell’s 2026 XPS 16 redesign brings welcome modifications. The chassis now opens from the keyboard side for storage upgrades — a first for the XPS line and a nod to repairability. And it is slightly lighter than Mac, at 4.3 lbs. The zero-lattice keyboard and invisible-until-needed touchpad are visually striking. Dell has added subtle edge ridges to the touchpad so users can locate it by feel, addressing a common criticism of earlier XPS designs.

Ecosystem, AI Features & Long-Term Support

The MacBook Pro ships with macOS Tahoe and Apple Intelligence — on-device AI features powered by the M5’s 16-core Neural Engine. Apple’s advantage here is privacy: AI tasks run locally rather than in the cloud. For creative professionals already using Final Cut Pro, Logic, or the Adobe suite, macOS’s tight hardware/software co-design translates to real speed gains.

The Dell XPS 16 is a Copilot+ certified PC, meaning it meets Microsoft’s NPU performance requirements for the latest AI-powered Windows features. Intel’s Panther Lake platform includes a built-in NPU to accelerate on-device tasks such as live captions, image generation, and Recall. The XPS 16 also benefits from Windows’ broader app compatibility — particularly for enterprise software, niche creative tools, and gaming.

Long-term software support is another Apple strength: macOS Tahoe will run on MacBooks back to 2018, and Apple’s track record on software updates significantly outlasts the standard Windows OEM support span. For buyers planning on a 4- to 5-year ownership timeframe, this matters.

M5 MacBook Pro 16 vs Dell XPS 16: Long-Term Value

Purchase price is only half the ownership cost story. The other half is what you can recover when it’s time to sell. This is an area where Apple’s MacBooks have consistently dominated the premium laptop resale market — and the 2026 generation is no different.

NEW
2026

1 YEAR
2027

2 YEARS
2028

3 YEARS
2029

4 YEARS
2030

MACBOOK PRO 16 M5 PRO · 2-YEAR COST

Purchase price $2,699

Resale @ 2 yrs (68%) − $1,079

Effective 2-yr cost
$1620

$432 / year of ownership

DELL XPS 16 · 2-YEAR COST

Purchase price $1,750

Resale @ 2 yrs (48%) − $700

Effective 2-yr cost
$1050

$455 / year of ownership

💰

Ready to sell your MacBook Pro or Dell XPS? Get an instant online quote from Gadget Salvation — we buy used laptops in almost any condition. Get the highest cashback today before next-gen announcements drive down the resale value.

* Projected resale values are estimates based on historical MacBook and Dell XPS secondary market data compiled from Gadget Salvation, Swappa, Back Market, and eBay sold listings. Actual values vary by condition, storage tier, market timing, and configuration. Dollar values calculated against base-tier purchase prices ($2,699 MBP / $1,750 XPS 16).

In two to three years’ time, or whenever you are ready to upgrade, come back to GadgetSalvation.com to sell your MacBook Pro or Dell XPS. We provide instant online offers based on current secondary market data, free shipping labels, and pay within a day of delivery and inspection.

Bottom Line

These two laptops aren’t really competing for the same buyer. The MacBook Pro 16 M5 Pro is the most capable professional laptop in the world for macOS users — full stop. Its performance lead, long-lasting battery, and resale value make it a rational long-term investment. The Dell XPS 16 (2026) is the best 16-inch Windows laptop to date, offering a transcendent OLED display, dedicated GPU options, and a less-prohibitive price point. And while the math on total cost of ownership is remarkably close, the MacBook Pro’s day-to-day user experience remains a step ahead.

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

2025 Razer Blade 14 Laptop: Premium Portable Gaming Power

The 2025 Razer Blade 14 is Razer’s boldest statement yet in the compact gaming laptop space. Combining AMD’s Ryzen AI 9 365 with NVIDIA’s RTX 50-series Blackwell GPU—all inside a narrow-profile chassis—it targets a very specific buyer: the mobile gamer who refuses to compromise on performance or aesthetics. Starting at $2,299 and climbing to $2,999 for the top configuration, this is unambiguously a premium laptop. But does it deliver premium results? Keep reading to find out.

Design & Build Quality

Razer has always excelled at making laptops that look and feel expensive, and the 2025 Blade 14 is no exception. The CNC-machined aluminum chassis comes in a new Mercury White colorway alongside the classic Onyx Black, both featuring a subtle, not-at-all-gaming aesthetic. The hinge is firm yet smooth, and the lid opens easily with one hand while keeping the display panel steady.

At 12.23 x 8.83 x 0.62 inches and just 3.59 lbs, Razer claims this is the thinnest Blade 14 ever produced — a statement that holds up in practice. The reduced bezels around the 14-inch OLED panel make the footprint feel even smaller than the specs suggest. Connectivity is solid: two USB4 (USB-C) ports, two USB-A 3.2 Gen 2 ports, HDMI 2.1, a microSD slot, a combo audio jack, and a Kensington lock slot cover virtually every use case without the need for a hub.

2025 Razer Blade 14 OLED Display

The 2025 Blade 14’s screen is, without question, one of its strongest selling points. The 14-inch OLED panel running at 2880×1800 resolution with a 120Hz refresh rate delivers colors and contrast that make even high-quality IPS displays look flat and washed out by comparison. Black levels are absolute, colors are vivid and accurate, and the high pixel density (approximately 240 PPI) makes text, UI elements, and game textures appear razor-sharp.

The upgrade from prior LCD-based Blade 14 models is immediately noticeable and arguably one of the most compelling reasons for existing Razer laptop owners to upgrade.

Performance: CPU & GPU

Under the hood, the 2025 Blade 14 is powered by the AMD Ryzen AI 9 365 — a 10-core, 20-thread chip built on AMD’s Zen 5 architecture, with a base clock of 2 GHz and a boost up to 5 GHz. The chip also includes AMD’s integrated NPU capable of up to 50 TOPS, positioning the Blade 14 as an AI-ready machine for Copilot+ tasks and local AI workloads.

GPU options are the NVIDIA GeForce RTX 5060 (entry-level) or the RTX 5070 (mid- and top-level configs). Both are built on NVIDIA’s new Blackwell architecture, which introduces Multi-Frame Generation (MFG) — a key feature that dramatically boosts frame rates in supported titles by generating up to 4x frames. In testing, the RTX 5070 model hit approximately 91 fps in Cyberpunk 2077 at native 1800p with Ray Tracing Ultra settings and 4x MFG enabled — a result that would have been unthinkable on this class of hardware a generation ago.

RAM configurations span 16 GB, 32 GB, and 64 GB of LPDDR5X, while storage is either a 1 TB or 2 TB PCIe Gen4 NVMe SSD, with sequential read speeds approaching 7 GB/s. The 32 GB / 1 TB mid-tier configuration at $2,699 represents the sweet spot for most buyers.

Benchmark Highlights (RTX 5070 / 32 GB config):

  • Cyberpunk 2077 (RT Ultra, 1800p, DLSS Quality + 4x MFG): ~91 fps
  • Final Fantasy XIV: Dawntrail (1800p, max settings): ~68 fps average
  • PCIe SSD speeds: up to ~7 GB/s sequential read
  • 3DMark Steel Nomad / Speedway: competitive with other RTX 5070 laptop implementations

Thermal Management & Fan Noise

Image source: razer.com

One of the headline improvements in the 2025 model is a redesigned fan layout that moves more air through the chassis with less noise. In practice, gaming sessions remain noticeably quieter than you might expect for a 3.6 lb machine running an RTX 5070. Temperatures remain well managed under sustained load, making the Blade 14 a rare example of a thin-and-light gaming laptop that doesn’t throttle aggressively due to heat.

Battery Life & Unplugged Performance

Battery life is where the Blade 14 tells a more complicated story. The 72 Wh Li-ion pack is physically limited by the thin chassis, and real-world performance reflects that. For productivity and light workloads, expect 5–7 hours of mixed use — workable for a work shift if you’re disciplined about brightness and browser tabs. Under gaming load, the battery runtime drops to approximately 2 hours (or less).

More critically, Razer’s Synapse software locks performance profiles when the laptop is unplugged, meaning you cannot manually select a higher-performance mode on battery. Users are stuck with a throttled, mid-range performance tier the moment they disconnect from power — a deliberate design decision that preserves battery and thermals, but one that undercuts the “mobile powerhouse” narrative. For users who primarily game at a desk and occasionally travel between locations, this is a non-issue. For true on-the-go gaming, it is a genuine limitation.

Keyboard & Trackpad

Razer’s per-key RGB keyboard remains a highlight: the key travel, actuation feel, and overall responsiveness are class-leading for a thin gaming laptop. Typing long documents or coding sessions is genuinely comfortable.

The trackpad, however, has drawn mixed reactions. Its size and surface quality are fine, but some reviewers have noted inconsistent tracking and a stiffer-than-expected click. For a $2,700 machine, the trackpad should be exceptional rather than merely adequate. Pairing a mouse for serious productivity or gaming use is advised.

Audio

The speaker configuration produces sound that’s surprisingly full for a chassis this thin. Audio is clear at medium volumes, though the low end naturally lacks the depth of larger laptops. For casual music and video playback, it’s perfectly acceptable. Competitive gamers will want headphones regardless.

Software & AI Features

The Blade 14 ships with Windows 11 and Razer’s Synapse software suite for lighting, fan control, and performance profiles. Synapse remains both feature-rich and occasionally finicky — a firmware update shortly after launch is recommended to address early stability issues some users encountered.

The AMD Ryzen AI 9 365’s NPU enables Copilot+ features on Windows 11, including Live Captions, AI-powered image editing, and emerging on-device AI integrations. As the software ecosystem matures, these features will become increasingly relevant.

How the 2025 Razer Blade 14 Compares to Competition

The 2025 Razer Blade 14’s most direct competitor is the Asus ROG Zephyrus G14 GU405, which offers a similar form factor at a slightly lower price, but with an RTX 5080 in its top config. For raw GPU performance per dollar, the G14 has an edge. The Blade 14 counters with superior build quality, a quieter fan profile, better keyboard feel, and Razer’s refined chassis design.

For buyers who prioritize a larger screen, the Razer Blade 18 offers a major step up in both display size and GPU options. For those on a tighter budget, the Asus TUF Gaming A14 can be found for under $2,000.

Resale Value & Selling Your Razer Laptop

Razer laptops are known for holding their value better than many gaming laptop brands, thanks to premium build quality, brand recognition, and a loyal enthusiast community. When it’s time to upgrade — whether moving from an older 2024 14-inch gaming laptop model or simply changing direction — selling your used Razer can recover a meaningful portion of your original investment.

Gadget Salvation is one of the best platforms for selling used Razer laptops quickly and at a fair buyback value. Our online resale process is straightforward: get an instant quote, ship your computer for free, and receive payment once it is inspected (typically within 24 business hours of delivery). For sellers who want to avoid the hassle of marketplace listings, buyer negotiations, and the risks of fraud associated with eBay or Craigslist, Gadget Salvation offers a reliable alternative. So, if you’re sitting on a 2021, 2022, or 2023 Razer Blade 14, now is an ideal time to get an offer before the resale market adjusts further to the 2025-2026 releases.

Verdict

The 2025 Razer Blade 14 is one of the finest compact gaming laptops ever built. Its OLED display is stunning, its RTX 5070/Ryzen AI 9 365 combination is powerful, and its build quality is in a class of its own for the size. NVIDIA’s Multi-Frame Generation technology helps the RTX 5070 punch significantly above its hardware weight in supported titles.

The caveats are real but narrow: the price is steep, the trackpad needs improvement, and the battery performance will frustrate users who genuinely need full gaming power away from an outlet. But for the majority of buyers — professionals and gamers who want premium portability without sacrificing desktop-like performance — the 2025 Blade 14 is an outstanding computer.

How does the 2025 Blade 14 compare to the Asus ROG Zephyrus G14?

Can I game on battery with the 2025 Razer Blade 14?

Is the 2025 Razer Blade 14 good for video editing and creative work?

Where can I sell my old Razer laptop when upgrading?

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

Meta is reportedly developing an AI pendant

Meta is developing an AI-powered pendant that it plans to start testing in the next year, according to a memo viewed by The Information.

This device would presumably build on the work of Limitless, an AI device startup that Meta acquired at the end of 2025. The startup made an AI pendant that users could attach to their shirt or wear as a necklace to record their conversations. At the time, Meta said the acquisition would allow it to “accelerate our work to build AI-enabled wearables.”

Earlier AI wearables have failed to catch on with consumers — perhaps due to privacy concerns and tone-deaf marketing, or perhaps because they just weren’t that useful. But companies like OpenAI aren’t giving up.

The memo also reportedly states that the company is planning to expand its lineup of AI glasses and launch a business subscription called Wearables for Work. With all these planned devices, Meta is apparently hoping to reverse the fortunes of its hardware-focused Reality Labs division, which lost $4 billion in the first quarter of this year.

TechCrunch has reached out to Meta for comment.

When Is the Best Time to Sell Your iPhone?

Timing is everything when it comes to getting the most money for your old iPhone. Sell too late, and you could lose a meaningful sum in buyback value almost overnight. Understanding the best time to sell your iPhone comes down to one core principle: get ahead of Apple’s release cycle, not behind it.

However, as of mid-2026, the iPhone resale market is uniquely volatile, influenced by the recent introduction of the iPhone 17e, faster depreciation of experimental models like the iPhone Air, and the impending disruption of a bifurcated iPhone 18 launch cycle that threatens to upend nearly two decades of established market behavior.

Why Timing Matters So Much?

While iPhones don’t devalue as quickly as competitor flagship phones, understanding their depreciation trends is crucial. Basically, as soon as a new model is announced — let alone released — demand for older models drops sharply, and resale prices follow. According to data from resale platforms, an iPhone can lose between 15% and 36% of its resale value in the weeks surrounding a new launch. That means a well-timed sale can be worth $25–$150 more (depending on your iPhone model and specs) than waiting even just one month.

Timeline of Milestone Releases and Market Impact

The introduction of the iPhone 15 and 16 series marked a shift toward a more aggressive depreciation cycle. Resale data indicates that the iPhone 15 depreciated by an average of 55.57% in its first year, a significant increase from the 40% seen with the iPhone 13 series. This acceleration is partly due to saturation in the high-end smartphone market and the increasing longevity of modern hardware, which, paradoxically, makes older models more durable and less expensive.

The following table contextualizes the current 2026 market within the broader history of the product’s release cadence, illustrating how release frequency has increased over time.

Model GenerationAnnouncement DateMarket Release DateKey Technological ShiftOriginal iPhoneJan 9, 2007June 29, 2007Multi-touch InterfaceiPhone 4June 7, 2010June 24, 2010Retina Display / FaceTimeiPhone 6 / 6 PlusSept 9, 2014Sept 19, 2014Large Screen FormatiPhone XSept 12, 2017Nov 3, 2017Face ID / OLED TransitioniPhone 12Oct 13, 2020Oct 23, 20205G Connectivity / MagSafeiPhone 15Sept 12, 2023Sept 22, 2023USB-C TransitioniPhone 17Sept 9, 2025Sept 19, 20252nm Process PotentialiPhone 17eFeb 19, 2025March 11, 2026Mid-Cycle Budget Entry

The shift from summer to fall releases, solidified by the iPhone 4S in 2011, established the September “value reset” that has defined the market for fifteen years. In 2026, however, the March launch of the iPhone 17e has introduced a new mid-year volatility point, as consumers now have a current-generation alternative available halfway through the flagship cycle.

Tiered Depreciation: iPhone Pro Models vs. Standard and Experimental Units

One of the most persistent trends in the secondary market is the superior value retention of “Pro” and “Pro Max” models compared to standard, “Plus,” or “Air” models. Pro models are sought after by second-hand buyers for their superior displays and camera systems, which typically remain competitive for three to four years after release.

Model Category1-Year Retention Rate2nd-Year Retention Rate2026 Market VolatilityiPhone Pro Max65-72%45-50%LowiPhone Standard55-60%35-40%ModerateiPhone SE / e-Series45-50%25-30%HighiPhone Air (Ultra-Thin)50-55% (10 Weeks)TBDExtreme

The 2026 market has been particularly unkind to the iPhone Air, an ultra-thin model introduced with the 17-series. Data from the resale markets just ten weeks after its launch showed that the iPhone Air depreciated materially faster than the rest of the 17-series lineup, losing an average of 44.3% of its value in just over two months. This suggests that “design-first” models may face skepticism in the secondary market due to perceived compromises in thermal management and structural durability.

The Best Windows to Sell Your iPhone

Aside from the most recent 17e March release, Apple normally announces its new iPhone lineup in September each year. That makes the summer months — particularly June through early August — the sweet spot for sellers. Demand is still steady, your model is still considered “current,” and buyers haven’t yet been tempted by what’s coming next.

As the market approaches the fall of 2026, the traditional September release cycle is expected to face its most significant disruption in the product’s history. Rumors indicate that Apple will adopt a “split launch” strategy for the iPhone 18 lineup, separating the premium models from the mass-market offerings.

Anticipated iPhone Release Phases for 2026 and 2027.

Expected DateModelsImpact on Resale ValueSeptember 2026iPhone 18 Pro, 18 Pro Max, iPhone FoldHigh-end 17 Pro value collapsesDecember 2026Extends 17 standard model valuesCreates ultra-premium price floorSpring 2027iPhone 18, iPhone 18e, iPhone Air 2Extends 17 standard model’s buyback value

This split launch means the standard iPhone 17 and iPhone 17e may not have direct successors this September. It could create a unique “value plateau” where standard models retain their value longer because there is no $799 or $899 new alternative available to drive prices down. Conversely, the introduction of the first foldable iPhone (rumored to cost upwards of $2,000) will shift the focus of the high-end market, potentially making current Pro Max models appear more “mid-tier”.

iPhone Buyback Ecosystem

In 2026, the iPhone resale route remains as critical as the timing. When selecting a platform, the seller should weigh the trade-off between cashback value and transaction convenience:

  1. Online Buyback Aggregators (e.g., SellCell): These offer an effective way to maximize cash returns. By comparing 40+ vetted buyers, these sites ensure the highest market rate and often offer “Best Price Guarantees”.
  2. Dedicated Buyback Sites (e.g., Gazelle, Gadget Salvation, Gizmogo): These platforms are ideal for fast payouts, with many issuing payments via PayPal or Venmo within 24 hours of receiving the phone. They often accept older or damaged models that Apple or carriers would reject or value at zero.
  3. Marketplace-Buyback Hybrids (e.g., Back Market, Swappa): Back Market uses a matching system that connects the seller with over 250 verified refurbishers. This can lead to more competitive offers for high-end models, as refurbishers compete for inventory.
  4. Apple Trade-In: This is the most seamless option, but rarely the most profitable. It is primarily useful for those who want instant store credit toward a new purchase. For smartphones more than two years old, Apple’s offers typically sit 30% below top online buyback sites.
  5. Carrier Trade-In Programs: Carriers like Verizon and AT&T often advertise very high trade-in values (up to $1,000). However, these are almost always paid out as monthly bill credits over 36 months. If the user cancels their service or upgrades early, they lose the remaining credits. This makes carriers a poor choice for those seeking liquid cash.

Selling a Used iPhone: A Step-by-Step Strategy

Regardless of the platform you choose, we highly recommend following this value maximization strategy:

Step 1: Honest Condition Assessment and Preparation

Before shopping for offers, you must remove all personal data, sign out of iCloud (Find My), and remove the SIM card. Any physical damage, even minor scratches, should be noted. Buyback and trade-in platforms will lower their offer if the iPhone is in a condition worse than described. If the original box and accessories are available, they should be included, as this can marginally improve the offer on peer-to-peer marketplaces.

Step 2: Multi-Platform Comparison

Never accept the first offer received; shop around instead. At a minimum, a comparison should be made between:

  • Gadget Salvation (for fast cash, ease of use, 30-day offer guarantee).
  • Swappa (if you are willing to manage the sale for a potential 10% higher payout).
  • Apple Trade-In (only as a baseline for store credit).

Step 3: Timing the Quote

If selling during the spring, the quote should be initiated in early April. If selling in the fall, the quote should be initiated in mid-to-late August. Ideally, look for a 30-day price lock for maximum flexibility.

Step 4: Shipping and Payments

If selling via a buyback platform, a prepaid free shipping label is typically provided by the company. However, if selling on a marketplace like eBay, the shipping costs are the seller’s responsibility. And while an iPhone can either sell within an hour of listing or may take weeks, you’ll receive the funds (minus the fees) within 24 hours to 3 days after the item is confirmed delivered, so be sure the package is trackable.

As for buyback platforms, most issue payments within 24 to 72 hours of inspection — check the site’s FAQ for the exact timeframe.

Conclusion: Should I Sell My iPhone Before the New One Comes Out?

It might seem logical to hold on to your phone until the newest model drops, then sell it when everyone wants an upgrade. But this is the most common mistake sellers make. By the time the next iPhone is in people’s hands, your older one has already lost significant value.

Ultimately, the best time to sell an iPhone in 2026 is either late March-early April (but looks like you already missed that window?) or mid-late August. With the online buyback upfront instant offers feature and 30-day price locks, sellers can navigate seasonal shifts with minimal risk and get the most cashback for their older technology.

What is the best time of year to sell an iPhone?

Does iPhone storage size affect resale value?

Should I sell my iPhone to Apple or use a third-party platform?

What should I do before selling my iPhone?

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

If you want to cut your screen time, just get a Brick

I’ve had screen time limits on my iPhone for years, allowing me 30 minutes on social media each day. How many times have I dismissed the limit notification and continued watching mindless Reels? I’d be horrified to find out.

It turns out that all along, what I needed was a $59 hunk of grey plastic (self-discipline would have been more affordable, but it was out of stock). The Brick — a magnetic, matchbox-sized gadget — has accomplished what no screen time app has ever achieved. It actually got me to use my phone less and improve my sleep habits.

Brick stands apart from your standard screen time app because it takes things a step further into the physical world. The gadget is a branded, NFC-enabled square that only lets you deactivate your custom screen time limits if you tap your phone to the Brick, just like you’re buying something at a tap-to-pay kiosk. Apparently, if I have to physically get up and tap my phone to the Brick to go on Instagram, I will not go on Instagram.

“Brick was born from a personal need: our phones were getting in the way of living,” co-founder Zach Nasgowitz told TechCrunch via email. “We searched for solutions to this problem in our lives, but we found that nothing was quite right, so we decided to build something for ourselves that would solve this problem.”

Image Credits:Brick (opens in a new window)

I used Brick to help me with my sleep hygiene, and I am embarrassed to admit that it’s working even better than I could have hoped.

Like many other millennials — especially those of us whose jobs are so connected to the internet — I have a bad habit of getting into bed at night and scrolling mindlessly on my phone, making it harder to sleep. Even worse, sometimes when I wake up, I end up staying in bed on my phone, and I start the day feeling groggy.

I created a “Sleep” mode on the Brick app, which turns on each night at 10:30 p.m.. Then, my phone automatically blocks all apps except for messaging apps (I want to be reachable, just in case) and audio apps (I sometimes listen to podcasts or audiobooks to help me sleep). When I wake up, I can’t waste time on my phone unless I get out of bed, walk downstairs, and tap my phone to the Brick. (If you want to leave your phone out of your bedroom altogether, but use podcasts as a sleep aid, I’d suggest the Dreamie alarm clock.)

It’s embarrassing that I needed a $59 piece of plastic to make a lifestyle change, but without the Brick, it would be too easy for me to fall back into old habits. I’ve been testing a Brick that the company sent me to review, and it’s been so effective that I’m going to buy one so that I can keep using it (we return or give away our review units for ethical reasons). If you really wanted to, you could even try to DIY something like a Brick by using an NFC tag and Apple Shortcuts.

“Software-only solutions like Screen Time and Digital Wellbeing are easy to bypass, and what actually works is adding friction,” Brick co-founder TJ Driver told TechCrunch via email. “This has allowed physical technology to come into play to create real separation that a software prompt can’t replicate. By requiring you to physically return to the device to unblock your apps, the decision to reconnect becomes an intentional one rather than an unconscious reflex.”

Users are provided a small number of “emergency unbricks,” just in case you’re out when your phone bricks and you really need a specific app, like Google Maps or Uber, to get home safely. But I find it easier to just lump those apps into my sleep mode for the rare occasion that I’m out late, so I don’t need to waste an emergency unbrick. It doesn’t affect my sleep to know that I can open the Uber app. I do not doomscroll on Uber.

“Rather than constantly relying on willpower, it can be more effective to design your environment so that you don’t have to always be taxing your willpower or brain,” Driver said. “Things like Brick help people choose how they want their phone to best serve them for a given moment or task, and then design their digital environment so that they don’t have to think about it anymore.”

Image Credits:Brick, screenshots by TechCrunch

This emphasis on personalization and agency is what has made the product work for so many customers.

“One user had wanted a dumb phone for years, but couldn’t give up his primary texting app, KakaoTalk, for communicating with his wife and friends based in Korea,” said Nasgowitz. “He shared that, ‘Brick has turned my phone into what I always wanted – a phone that can text, call, take some photos, and use Kakao. It’s perfect.’”

People are getting more interested in switching to “dumb phones” as they become more disillusioned with Big Tech. But flip phones aren’t made for our current lifestyles, where we scan our phones instead of printing out concert tickets, use our phones to pay subway fares, and have jobs that require us to use specific two-factor authentication apps. (Some companies, like Dumb.Co and Commodore, are trying to remedy this by hacking flip phones to load apps like authenticators and WhatsApp, or by creating new hardware altogether.)

If you’re nervous about making a more extreme change like getting a flip phone, the Brick is a happy medium — it works, but it’s not as drastic an intervention. You can make your phone as dumb as you want, whenever you want.

“When you zoom out and think about the screen time movement as a whole, it isn’t about rejecting technology,” Driver said. “It’s about reclaiming agency and being intentional again.”

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Board, the new game startup from Mirror founder Brynn Putnam, raises $20M, has already sold thousands

Board, the three-year-old, New York-based startup building what it calls “together tech” — tech designed to bring people physically into the same room — has closed a $20 million Series A led by Union Square Ventures.

General Partner Michael Mignano, in his first investment since joining USV, will join the company’s board of directors. The round also brought in some famous angel investors including Biz Stone, Tim Ferriss, and Scott Belsky.

The raise comes about eight months after founder Brynn Putnam — who previously sold connected fitness startup Mirror to Lululemon for $500 million — unveiled Board publicly at TechCrunch Disrupt last October.

The $399 Board device is a 24-inch touchscreen in a wood-finish frame that uses proprietary technology to recognize physical game pieces, blending the tactile feel of board games with the interactivity of video games.

Traction since launch has been strong, the company says: Board is now in tens of thousands of homes, schools, hospitals, and restaurants across all 50 states, with 85% of customers averaging 30 or more play sessions per month.

Alongside the funding, Board announced Board Studio, an AI-powered creation platform launching later this year that will let anyone build original games using natural language prompts — from idea to playable prototype in under an hour, it says.

Board had previously raised $15 million in funding led by the venture firm Lerer Hippeau, which had also led Mirror’s $3 million seed round years earlier. That was a bet that paid off handsomely when Putnam sold the connected fitness company to Lululemon in 2020.

Putnam sees Board as a natural extension of what she learned about consumer hardware while building Mirror. “Mirror was very much about me,” she once told TechCrunch. “It was my reflection, my performance, it was about making your own self better. At that next phase, my life was really just much more about my family and my friends and my relationships.”

The result is a product built around the simple but increasingly popular idea that the best use of tech might be to get people to put their devices down and look each other in the face.

The raise arrives at a moment when consumer tech, long out of favor with investors, is showing signs of bouncing back, driven in large part by what AI is making newly possible.

“I’m more excited about consumer than I’ve been in a long time,” said Ben Lerer, managing partner of Lerer Hippeau, late last year during a separate sit-down with TechCrunch. “We’re seeing a very high-quality group of founders saying, ‘Now’s the time to get back in the pool.’ There are things that are possible today that weren’t possible six months ago or a year ago, and the slope is steep.”

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Cyberdecks are having a moment, rejecting big tech surveillance with style and substance

When I reach out to the self-proclaimed “open source baddie” CC for an interview, I’m pretty sure she’s emailing me back from a pink mermaid purse.

“I’m just having so much fun,” she tells me about her seashell cyberdeck. “It’s a Tamagotchi. It’s also an e-reader. It’s networked to my vault and my servers, so it has access to all of my server data, which has all my PDFs, and books, and notes, and everything… It’s also connected to my local AI setup at home.”

CC has no background in software engineering or computer science, but she’s gotten good enough at building unconventional cyberdecks — small DIY computers — that she documents the process on her blog Bimbo Tech so that other women can follow her lead, even if they don’t yet know what RAM is.

The idea of the cyberdeck originated in William Gibson’s 1984 sci-fi novel “Neuromancer,” and when credit card-sized computers like the Raspberry Pi came on the market in the 2010s, hardware enthusiasts began building and sharing their own cyberdecks in niche online communities. But over the last few months, these communities have exploded in popularity thanks to women on social media who are teaching each other to build artistic, hyper-feminine computers by documenting their building processes.

“I have a running joke that there’s this underlying misogyny in tech — because whenever they release a pro model, or an elite model… I’m always like, let me guess, it’s black or silver,” CC said. “It’s never going to come in pink.” 

The process of customizing and designing a cyberdeck has become an art form in itself. On Instagram and TikTok, you can find a cyberdeck made of wood and moss that runs Game Boy Color games; a desert-inspired MP3 player built inside a 3D-printed fossil; a Barbie dollhouse that opens up to reveal a functional mini-computer; or a duck figurine that can be used to record voice notes.

CC’s cyberdeck during the building processImage Credits:CC / Bimbo Tech

“I don’t want Meta AI glasses. I want to pirate books in a tiny embellished shell,” said the creator Sarahbelle Kim on TikTok. “No one can surveil you there. You can get some basic parts at the thrift store or eBay and just customize it.”

There’s obviously an aesthetic motivation to the rise of girly cyberdecks — why not use a Hello Kitty purse to check your email? It’s fun for the sake of fun. But the women building these over-the-top, bedazzled cyberdecks aren’t in it for the glitter alone. This trend is reaching its peak at a time when people feel powerless against the omnipresent homogeneity of big tech.

“I think that’s such a refreshing thing for people who were sold these devices that are like Apple’s… If you try to jailbreak it, if you try to do anything to this phone that you paid $1,000 for, that you own, it’s out of warranty,” CC said. “So I just love seeing people taking the power back into their hands, taking the control back into their hands, which obviously always means creativity when people are given the means to go outside of the black box.”

Maro Vardanyan doesn’t work with hardware as a blockchain developer, but she’s always enjoyed collecting and tinkering with old computer parts.

“A few months ago, I just started as a hobby making art and jewelry pieces and purses with recycled or upcycled old computers I had,” she said. “When I saw everyone doing cyberdecks, I was like, wait, why am I just doing recycled and upcycled ones when I can actually preserve the pieces on something that’s wearable, that’s movable?” 

Image Credits:Maro Vardanyan

Vardanyan has taken a different approach to building cyberdecks, opting instead to emphasize the historic relationship between fiber art and technology. Vardanyan refers to her work as “crocheting with computers” or “macrame motherboards,” deliberately nodding to the role of weaving — a practice often viewed as domestic, women’s labor — in the history of early computing.

Before silicon processors, some early computers ran on magnetic-core memory, made up of copper wiring that was precisely threaded to encode the 1s and 0s of binary code. In order for NASA to build the Apollo Guidance Computer, for example, expert women textile workers were tasked with meticulously weaving wires in painstakingly complex patterns, which powered the spacecraft that landed the first man on the moon.

Image Credits:Maro Vardanyan

“The original processor was handwoven by seamstresses, not by engineers or anybody else,” she said. “I feel like the hand weaving, and even the fashion-meets-technology… It’s so full circle.”

Vardanyan started weaving pink Raspberry Pis to make purses and corsets, then posted photos of her works-in-progress on X.

“Of course, when the macrame went viral, all of the men are like, ‘This is such a waste of the Raspberry Pi,’ … or, ‘what about the rain?’” she said. “And then I have to be like, ‘Actually, it’s preserved in an acrylic shell.’ And then they’re like, ‘This is so performative, and the GPIO is gonna lose energy!’ And I’m like, ‘Actually, I’m using a conductive thread, so it actually will move and be fully functioning.’”

@gazi.ai

grass cyberdeck (allat to play pokemon yellow 🥀). thoughts ↓ cyberdecks were never about making the “best” computer. they came out of Neuromancer (yes, i wrote my senior essay on it) as messy, personal machines. now it’s a whole maker subculture, but the core’s the same: control + identity + a quiet resistance to how polished tech has become. this one’s a grass cyberdeck, wood + moss + exposed parts. something that feels a little alive, a little off. built on a Raspberry Pi, nothing fancy. honestly a simple build, just wanted to show how easy it is to make something like this in your bedroom (i post my pc a lot, but this is just as cool). it’s not trying to compete with a GeForce RTX 4090 or be practical. it’s more about rejecting the “black box” (our everyday sealed, untouchable devices) and leaning into radical ownership, something you can open, understand, and actually call yours. more optimization soon 🙂 #cyberdeck #pokemonyellow #reelsinstagram #hardware

♬ original sound – Gazi Jarin

CC has also encountered condescending men on the internet who balk at the idea that someone would use a Raspberry Pi on something as frivolous as a seashell purse computer during a RAM shortage.

“This guy on Reddit was like, ‘You built your first computer a month ago, calm the f— down.’ Mind you, I’ve been building PCs for years,” CC said. “So, long story short, he ends up apologizing and buying me the circuit board for my next cyberdeck.”

From CC’s mermaid purse computer to Vardanyan’s Raspberry Pi corset, these cyberdecks are a direct rejection of Silicon Valley culture, and not just in their egregious embrace of the color pink. They’re impractical and inefficient on purpose, which seems sacrilegious in a culture so obsessed with optimization that unregulated Chinese peptide injections are trendy. It’s a radical act to opt for hacky, DIY tech experiences in order to forge a closer relationship with the devices that feel so abstract despite their ubiquity.

“Ten years ago, I would walk into a conference, there would be three girls, and people would literally just be like, ‘Were you hired for the marketing team?’” Vardanyan said. “I can’t even tell you how amazing it is seeing so many girls all over my social media and Instagram being into hardware, being into software, and then educating [each other], and that’s definitely the energy that we’re missing on every level in society.”

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

The Ultimate ASUS TUF Gaming F16 FX608 Laptop Review

PROS AND CONS:

The FX608L ASUS TUF Gaming F16 is the most significant refresh the TUF lineup has seen in years — and it arrives at exactly the right moment. Announced at CES in March alongside the A16 and A18, the F16 sheds the “budget compromise” label once and for all. What you get instead is an Intel Arrow Lake powerhouse wrapped in a battle-tested chassis, equipped with an OLED screen option that was unthinkable in this segment just 24 months ago.

With this model, ASUS pulled off a genuine trifecta: a brand-new Intel Core Ultra 9 290HX Plus processor, up to an NVIDIA GeForce RTX 5070 Laptop GPU, and — the headline grabber — a choice between a breathtaking 2.5K 165Hz OLED panel or an ultra-smooth 2.5K 300Hz IPS for the competitive crowd. The TUF F16 isn’t trying to be an ROG Zephyrus. It’s something arguably more useful: a machine that does everything well, breaks nothing on price, and will still be relevant in three years.

“For the first time, the TUF A16 and F16 can be configured with either a 2.5K OLED panel with a 165Hz refresh rate, or a high-refresh 2.5K 300Hz IPS option for competitive gamers — a major shift from the IPS-only past.”

ASUS TUF F16 Design & Build Quality

ASUS describes the F16’s design philosophy as “blending power with portability,” and now that statement finally feels wholly earned. The chassis clocks in at just 17.9mm at its thinnest point — genuinely slim for a laptop packing this much hardware — and weighs approximately 4.85lbs. That means the F16 will actually fit in the laptop sleeve of most everyday backpacks.

The F16 has an understated look: no aggressive, gamer-angry angularity, no RGB strips bleeding through the chassis. ASUS knows who the TUF customer is — someone who needs a capable computer for gaming at home but doesn’t want to look conspicuous pulling it out to work at a coffee shop or in a campus lecture hall.

Durability credentials remain a cornerstone of the TUF identity. Every unit passes rigorous MIL-STD-810H testing, which covers drops, vibration, humidity, and extreme temperatures. The full-width rear exhaust vent is a functional detail that frees up both side panels entirely for I/O — a clean layout that shows careful engineering rather than cost-cutting.

The 180-degree hinge design lets the lid lie completely flat, which is surprisingly useful for presentations, sketching with a stylus on an external display, or simply sharing your screen with someone across the table.

Display: A Stunning OLED Upgrade

This is the headline for the TUF Gaming F16 line. For the first time, ASUS offers a 2.5K OLED panel at 165Hz in the TUF series — and the results are predictably stunning. Deep, inky blacks, near-infinite contrast, and color accuracy that rivals purpose-built creator screens. If you split your time between gaming and content creation (or if you simply can’t stand the grey “blacks” on most IPS screens), this is the configuration to choose.

The panel uses a 16:10 native resolution (2560×1600)— a meaningful aspect-ratio upgrade over the 16:9 screens that dominated mid-range gaming laptops for years. The extra vertical space is a game-changer. And the instantaneous 0.2ms response time eliminates motion blur completely, keeping fast-paced action entirely sharp. All configurations natively support G-Sync to eradicate screen tearing.

Performance: Arrow Lake + Blackwell

CPU: Intel Core Ultra 9 290HX Plus

The latest Intel Core Ultra 9 290HX Plus — part of Intel’s Arrow Lake refresh lineup — powers new F16 FX608L models. ASUS highlights improvements in multi-threaded throughput and per-core efficiency compared to prior generations. In practice, the Ultra 9 290HX Plus delivers a significant boost to both sustained gaming and creative workloads like video editing and 3D rendering.

In content creation benchmarks, the F16’s CPU+GPU pairing achieves a DaVinci Resolve PugetBench score north of 8,200, which means timeline scrubbing and real-time 4K playback are handled without breaking a sweat. For developers, data scientists, or streamers who also game, the chip offers built-in AI acceleration in select content creation apps — a practical advantage that compounds over time as software optimizations roll out.

GPU: NVIDIA GeForce RTX 5070 Laptop

The GeForce RTX 5070 Laptop GPU is the star of the show, and ASUS hasn’t kneecapped it with a stingy TGP allocation. In tested configurations, the GPU runs at a full 115W — a power envelope that allows it to punch well above its technical tier, competing head-to-head with lower-TGP RTX 5060 configurations found in competing laptops.

Game / BenchmarkSettingsResolutionAvg FPSCyberpunk 2077Ultra + DLSS 4 MFG2.5K120+ fpsBlack Myth: WukongUltra + DLSS 4 MFG2.5K120+ fpsIndiana Jones & the Great CircleUltra1200p~90 fpsShadow of the Tomb RaiderHighest1080p95 fpsFar Cry 6Ultra1080p90 fpsValorantMax2.5K165Hz+ cap

DLSS 4 with Multi Frame Generation is the RTX 50-series’ most transformative feature for gaming laptops, and the TUF F16 takes full advantage. In the most demanding AAA titles — Cyberpunk 2077, Black Myth: Wukong — DLSS 4 MFG pushes frame rates past 120 fps at the panel’s native 2.5K resolution. That’s a level of performance that felt exclusive to $2,500+ laptops just one generation ago.

Thermals & Cooling

ASUS has long earned its thermal reputation in the TUF line, and the latest F16 release maintains that standard. The cooling system pairs second-generation Arc Flow Fans with five heat pipes and a full-width rear heatsink. In extended stress testing, the RTX 5070 maintains a stable average core temperature of approximately 72°C — considerably cooler than most competitors at the same TGP — allowing the GPU to sustain higher boost clocks for longer without throttling.

CPU temperatures stay manageable even under prolonged combined CPU+GPU loads, rarely breaching 90°C in Turbo mode. The system does get loud at peak — that’s the trade-off for thermal headroom — but the Armoury Crate software offers three fan modes (Silent, Performance, Turbo) to let you dial in the balance you need for the moment. In Silent mode, the laptop is genuinely quiet for everyday tasks.

ASUS TUF F16 FX608 Battery Life

Let’s be frank: the Intel-based F16’s battery life is its major weakness. Although we also have to keep in mind that gaming laptops are not known for battery longevity in general. Still, in light-use testing — web browsing, video playback, productivity apps — expect up to 5 hours on the 90Wh cell. That’s workable for a coffee shop session, but it’s almost half what the AMD-powered TUF A16 can achieve. If maximum unplugged endurance is your priority, the A16 is the clear recommendation.

The 100W USB-C charging is a genuine convenience. Whether you’re using the bundled adapter or a compatible GaN charger from a bag full of cables, topping up on the go requires no heavy power brick — a meaningful quality-of-life upgrade for commuters and travelers.

Keyboard, Audio & Connectivity

The TUF F16’s keyboard delivers desktop-quality in all the right ways. It is very snappy, thanks to ASUS’s Overstroke technology; the F16 will definitely have users notice improved responsiveness for rapid inputs. Each key is rated for over 20 million presses, and the uniform RGB backlighting — with highlighted WASD accents — looks polished without being overdone.

Image source: Asus.com.

Audio is handled by twin speakers powered by Dolby Atmos, with Hi-Res Audio over headphones and two-way AI noise cancellation for calls and streams. The speakers are competent — wider soundstage than most thin-and-light laptops — though bass is limited, as with virtually all thin gaming notebooks.

The FX608’s port selection is ample:

  • Thunderbolt 4 (USB-C, DisplayPort 1.4)
  • USB 3.2 Gen 2 Type-C with DisplayPort 1.4
  • HDMI 2.1 FRL for 4K/8K output
  • Multiple USB-A 3.2 ports
  • Gigabit Ethernet (RJ-45)
  • Wi-Fi 6E + Bluetooth 5.3
  • 3.5mm audio combo jack

Image source: Asus.com.

Multi-monitor setups are fully supported out of the box — a bonus for streamers and power users who want to expand their workspace without dongles.

Resale Value & Long-Term Investment

The latest TUF Gaming F16 laptop is expected to hold its value exceptionally well in the used-laptop market. The MIL-STD-810H build quality means units should maintain their structural integrity after years of real-world use. And the combination of an upgradeable RAM and storage configuration (two SO-DIMM slots, dual M.2 support) means buyers can upgrade the hardware (and thus improve performance) rather than replace the whole notebook, extending its lifespan for at least another year or two. But when the time comes to move on, Gadget Salvation will make selling your used ASUS TUF Gaming laptop a swift, easy experience. We provide instant, competitive online valuations, free shipping, expedited processing, and multiple payment options for sellers to choose from. At any rate, visit our site for a no-obligation offer when the time to sell your Asus TUF gaming finally comes.

Who Is the ASUS TUF Gaming F16 FX608 For?

The F16 is built for the pragmatic gamer — someone who wants top-tier performance in a well-engineered package without paying ROG-level premiums or carrying ROG-level weight. It’s equally well-suited to:

  • Serious gamers who want 2.5K gaming with ray tracing and DLSS 4 at a realistic price point.
  • Content creators who game — the CPU/GPU combo handles video editing, 3D rendering, and game streaming simultaneously.
  • Students and professionals who want a durable daily driver with a subtle aesthetic that works in any environment.
  • Competitive players who want a 300Hz IPS panel with G-SYNC to chase frame rates in esports titles.

It is not ideal for users who need all-day battery life — for those buyers, the AMD-based TUF A16 is the better choice.

The Verdict

As of today, the ASUS TUF Gaming F16 is the most complete mid-range gaming laptop ASUS has ever built. A first-ever OLED option, the best Intel mobile processor of the year, RTX 5070 muscle with a high-power TGP, and the same battle-hardened chassis the TUF series has been perfecting for years — all in a sub-4.9lbs body with Thunderbolt 4 and 100W USB-C charging. The only meaningful concession of the Intel-based configuration is poor battery life compared to AMD, but for plugged-in gaming and serious everyday performance, no laptop at this price comes close to doing it all.

What processor does the ASUS TUF FX608 Gaming F16 use?

Does the TUF Gaming F16 have an OLED display?

Is the ASUS TUF Gaming F16 FX608 good for content creation?

How long does the 2026 ASUS TUF Gaming F16 battery last?

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

How We Use Technology Today vs 10 Years Ago

Think back to 2015-16. Streaming was still considered a novelty, you could find a massive desktop tower in any office, and “the cloud” was something your IT department quietly warned about. Fast-forward a decade, and the technological landscape has shifted almost beyond recognition. The way we work, communicate, store information, and even think about our devices has fundamentally transformed — and those changes carry real implications for the tech you own right now.

Computing: From Desktops to Edge AI

Ten years ago, the average home had one or two primary computers — a desktop or a chunky notebook — running Windows 7 or 8. Processing power was mostly wasted on idle desktops, and upgrading RAM was still a weekend project that enthusiasts looked forward to. By 2026, computing power will have become nearly invisible. Thin-and-light laptops outperform server racks from 2015, ARM chips have redefined what portable means, and on-device AI has turned ordinary machines into genuinely intelligent tools.

Smartphones: From Nice-to-Have to Central Nervous System

In 2015, a flagship smartphone had a 12–16 MP camera, 2 GB of RAM, and fit in most pockets without drama. They were impressive — but they were accessories. Today, your AI-capable phone is your wallet, your boarding pass, your ID, your fitness tracker, your therapist, your office, and your videographer. The mobile ecosystem has swallowed whole categories: dedicated GPS devices, point-and-shoot cameras, MP3 players, and physical boarding passes have all but disappeared for most consumers.

Category20152025Storage16–64 GB on-device512 GB–1 TB + cloud-firstCameraSingle lens, 12 MPMulti-lens, 200 MP, AI-enhancedConnectivity4G LTE5G mmWave + Wi-Fi 7Primary useCalls, social, mapsWork, payments, health, AI assistantAvg. upgrade cycleEvery 2 yearsEvery 3–4 years

The Cloud Took Over Everything

A decade ago, backing up your files meant plugging in an external hard drive every few weeks — if you remembered. Google Drive, Dropbox, and iCloud have been around, but mostly felt optional. But fast forward to today, and local storage is almost an afterthought for most users. Documents live in the cloud, software is licensed as a service, and the idea of reinstalling apps from a disc is quaint enough to get a laugh. The shift to cloud-first has also accelerated hardware replacement: when your data travels with you, there’s less friction in switching to another device.

Remote Work Reshaped the Hardware Market

Nothing accelerated technology adoption like the shift to remote and hybrid work over the past five years. Webcams, external monitors, microphones, and ergonomic peripherals flew off the shelves. Business laptops became interchangeable with personal computers. The result was a massive wave of hardware investment — and a corresponding wave of refresh cycles, with millions of formerly enterprise-grade machines entering the secondary market at an unprecedented pace.

A Decade of Progress in Terms of Salvage Value

All of this technological evolution has a financial dimension that often gets overlooked. Electronics that once depreciated to near-zero within a few years now hold meaningful residual value — especially business-class laptops, workstations, and Apple hardware. Consumer awareness of secondary markets has grown substantially, and platforms have emerged to make selling used tech straightforward and transparent. Our buyback site, Gadget Salvation, has been at the origins of this shift, launching the service way back in 2008. Today, we bring over a decade of expertise to the computer buyback and resale market. Our data-driven approach to valuation of pre-owned technology reflects just how dramatically the landscape has changed and continues to change. What we see now is a positive, emerging shift to used hardware retaining better salvage value over time, thanks to the continuous switch to higher-quality hardware across industries.

What This Means for the Devices You Own Today

The accelerating pace of change cuts both ways. On one hand, today’s technology is significantly more capable and durable than anything available in 2015-16. On the other hand, the rapid cadence of AI-capable hardware means that a laptop from 2022 may already feel underpowered for the 2026 workloads. Knowing when to hold, when to upgrade, and how to extract value from aging hardware has never been more important — or more financially rewarding when done right.

How has everyday computer use changed most dramatically in the last 10 years?

Is a 10-year-old laptop still “workable” today?

Why do devices depreciate faster now than they used to?

What is the best way to sell an old computer?

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

Oura Ring 5 review: Thinner, lighter, better

When I opened the box the Oura Ring 5 comes in, my first thought was, “Wow, that’s tiny.” My second thought was that this is a smart ring a lot of people have been waiting for. 

As someone who got quite used to wearing the Oura Ring 4 Ceramic, I was surprised how noticeably smaller and lighter the new Ring 5 is.

The Ring 5, which Oura describes as the world’s smallest smart ring, is 40% smaller than its predecessor, measuring 6.09 mm wide compared to the Ring 4’s 7.90 mm, and 2.28 mm thick compared to the Ring 4’s 2.88 mm. Although the exact weight depends on your ring size, the Ring 5 weighs between 2 grams and 2.69 grams, while the Ring 4 weighs between 3.3 grams and 5.2 grams. 

I found that these changes dramatically improve the ring’s comfort, and also make it more aesthetically pleasing compared to its predecessor. The ring no longer screams smart ring, and blends in with the rest of your jewelry. Oura says the Ring 5 is designed to look and feel like any other ring, and I think the company has achieved that. 

The Ring 5 starts at $399.

Whenever I saw people discussing Oura’s smart rings, there always seemed to be two opposing viewpoints. One side swore the ring had changed their life, and the other argued that it was too bulky and that they would never consider getting one. I think the Oura Ring 5 changes the game and appeals to a larger audience, including those who shied away from smart rings due to their bulkiness. 

Image Credits:Aisha Malik/TechCrunch

Oura was aware of the demand for a smaller ring. The company told me that users had been asking for a thinner and more compact design, prompting the company to comply. Of course, Oura has also had to update its rings in response to competition from subscription-free rivals like RingConn and Ultrahuman, both of which sell rings lighter than the Ring 4. 

While I never found the Oura Ring 4 overtly uncomfortable, the Ring 5 feels noticeably better on my finger. With the Ring 4, I was always aware that I was wearing it, but with this latest model, I often forget it’s there, which is great for people like me who don’t always wear jewelry. 

I also found that the ring’s smaller size makes it more comfortable to wear at night for tracking sleep and health metrics. A smart ring is more comfortable than a smartwatch for nighttime wear, and the Ring 5’s smaller design lets it be even less noticeable at night.

As for battery life, the Ring 5 lasts between six and nine days, compared to the five- to eight-day range on the Ring 4. In my experience, the improvement seems to hold up. The ring arrived 50% charged, and after about 30 minutes on the charger following the set-up process, it reached 75%. After five days of continuous wear, I still haven’t needed to charge it, and I’m down to about 25% battery. 

It’s worth mentioning that the Ring 5 comes in fewer sizes (sizes 6 to 13) than the Ring 4 (sizes 4 to 15). Oura told me that the fewer sizing options are due to the challenges of manufacturing smaller rings in the new form factor. The company said it chose to focus on the most popular sizes, and is monitoring demand for the discontinued sizes.

Image Credits:Oura

The Ring 5 comes in six finishes, including a redesigned Gold with a truer gold tone, an updated Deep Rose with a copper-like look, plus Silver, Brushed Silver, Black, and Stealth.

Oura sent me the Gold version, and I really like how it looks. Unlike previous gold Oura rings, this new color doesn’t have a yellow tinge to it, and instead has a subtler tone that feels closer to actual gold jewelry. It’s worth noting that the Gold finish, along with the Stealth and Deep Rose finishes, is priced at $499, exactly $100 more than the standard finishes. 

As for durability, Oura says the Ring 5 is more scratch-resistant than previous generations thanks to a new finishing technique, but I can’t fully speak to durability yet considering I’ve only had it for five days. There was a moment when I thought I had scratched the ring’s alignment guide line when I’d grabbed a rusty swing chain, but it turned out that rust had only rubbed on to the ring, and I was able to clean it off with a cloth.

Oura says the Ring 5’s new physical vapor deposition (PVD) coating process ensures the wearable retains its premium “out-of-the-box” look for longer. It will be interesting to see how this promise holds up.

The Oura Ring 5 is being launched alongside new software features that are also coming to the Oura Ring Gen3 and later products, including Blood Pressure Signals and Nighttime Breathing. I can’t speak to those yet, as they’re set to launch later this month. 

Overall, the Oura Ring 5 is a notable upgrade over the Ring 4 in terms of comfort and aesthetics, making it a great choice for anyone who has yet to buy a smart ring. As for people who already have the Oura Ring 4, the decision to upgrade depends on your budget and how much you value aesthetics, especially since the Ring 4 will get all of the new software updates.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

How to Sell an LG Laptop Fast & Get the Best Price

You bought an LG Gram, arguably one of the best ultrabooks ever made, but now it’s time to move on. Maybe you’re upgrading, maybe you’ve switched ecosystems, or maybe it’s simply no longer needed. Either way, you’re about to discover something that surprises a lot of American sellers: LG laptops are harder to flip in the US than you might expect.

This guide explains why, what that means for your resale price, and — most importantly — the absolute fastest way to get paid for your LG laptop without the drama of marketplace listings.

The LG Laptop Paradox: A Superstar Abroad, a Niche Brand at Home

If you’ve spent time in South Korea, you probably have seen LG Gram computers everywhere — in cafes, in schools, on subway commuters’ laps. That’s not a coincidence. LG Electronics is one of South Korea’s most trusted national brands, and the Gram line is a real cultural phenomenon there.

#1
Laptop brand among Koreans in their 20s (2018)

~9%
LG Electronics global laptop market share (2025)

24%
Lenovo US share — the American default

In Korea, the laptop brand competitiveness index consistently places LG at or near the top, trading the top spot with Samsung depending on the year. The Gram series, famous for its under-3-lb build and military-grade durability certification, resonates deeply with consumers who value premium portability.

Cross the Pacific, and the picture shifts dramatically. The US laptop market is dominated by Lenovo (approx. 24% market share), HP (approx. 20%), Dell (approx. 15%), and Apple (approx. 9%). LG USA doesn’t register in most US-focused market reports. While the brand has a loyal following among ultrabook enthusiasts and online tech reviewers, it simply does not have the same recognition here to drive strong second-hand demand.

Market Reality:

When fewer Americans want an LG laptop, the pool of private buyers willing to pay top dollar on eBay or Facebook Marketplace is smaller — meaning longer wait times and more lowball offers than you’d face selling a ThinkPad or MacBook of comparable specs.

Why This Matters for Your Resale Value

Resale value is driven by two main factors: hardware quality and buyer demand. LG Gram scores exceptionally on quality: these laptops use premium Intel chips, IPS panels, and magnesium-alloy chassis that hold up very well over time. But buyer demand in the US secondary market lags far behind brands like Apple and Lenovo, creating a gap between what your laptop is worth and what you can realistically get in a reasonable timeframe.

“While it may be easy to sell a popular gizmo, like the latest iPhone model, certain computers can be a tough sell.”
//from Gadget Salvation Blog

Speaking from experience, niche-brand laptops tend to sit for months on Facebook Marketplace, OfferUp, and even eBay. You’ll encounter buyers who aren’t familiar with the Gram line, don’t understand its value proposition, and instinctively compare it to whatever Acer Aspire or Lenovo Ideapad all-plastic chassis computer they saw at Best Buy for $200 less.

Typical LG Gram Resale Value Retention

// BASED ON HISTORICAL ULTRABOOK RESALE TRENDS · US SECONDARY MARKET

NEW
2026

1 YEAR

2 YEARS

3 YEARS

4 YEARS

* Estimates based on observed LG Gram resale patterns in the US secondary market. Values vary by model year, RAM/storage config, condition, and timing.

The takeaway? The longer you wait to sell, the steeper the depreciation curve — and the smaller the pool of qualified US buyers for a niche brand, like LG. Speed matters.

The Fastest Way to Sell Your LG Laptop: Use a Buyback Service

The single fastest, most reliable way to sell a used LG laptop in the US is to use a dedicated electronics buyback platform, like Gadget Salvation, and we do accept a number of LG Gram models.

We have been purchasing pre-owned electronics since 2008 — before resale platforms were a thing — and have built a name for fast, transparent, no-hassle transactions. Unlike a typical store trade-in program (which pays in store credit, not cash), Gadget Salvation pays actual cash via PayPal, Venmo, Zelle, Cash App, or check.

How it Works:

01

Get an instant offer

Browse our buyback database by brand and model. It includes well over 4,000 gadgets. If your exact LG model isn’t listed, use the Custom Quote email form, and we’ll let you know if we can make an offer.

02

Ship for free

Once you check out online, a prepaid shipping label is issued at no cost to you. Pack your laptop well, drop it at any UPS location, and you’re done with your part.

03

Receive funds within 1 business day

After we receive and inspect your LG Gram, payment is issued within one to two business days via your preferred method. No waiting weeks for a buyer to materialize.

Tips to Maximize Your LG Laptop’s Resale Value

Whether you go with Gadget Salvation or another route, these steps will help you extract maximum value from your used LG Gram.

1. Sell sooner rather than later

Every month you wait, the resale value ticks down. Intel-based Gram models from 2022–2023 remain competitive, but a new generation of AI-integrated ultrabooks has already entered the market. Don’t let a perfectly sellable laptop become a “vintage” one in a matter of months.

2. Be precise about specs

The resale price difference between an LG Gram with an Intel Core i5 11th-generation chip and an Intel Core Ultra 7 155H one is significant. Know your exact model number (e.g., 16Z90P, 14Z90R) and specs before you get an offer.

3. Assess and disclose the condition honestly

Cosmetic wear, battery health, and any functional issues all affect the offer. Be upfront: if Gadget Salvation or another buyer receives the laptop in worse condition than described, they’ll revise the offer or return the device. Honesty keeps the selling process smooth.

4. Factory reset before shipping

Wipe data before your LG laptop leaves your hands. On Windows: Go to Settings → System → Recovery → Reset this PC. This protects you and speeds up inspection at the buyer’s end.

5. Include accessories if you have them

The original charger is expected to be included. Boxes and sleeves won’t dramatically affect the offer, but can add a few extra dollars and speed up a private sale.

Selling an LG Laptop Online vs. Other Options

Buyback Service (Gadget Salvation)

  • Payment in 1 business day — no waiting for buyers
  • Postage cost included, no selling fees to deduct
  • Cash payout via PayPal, Zelle, Venmo, Cash App, or check
  • No negotiations, no meetup follow-throughs
  • Works for broken laptops, not just mint condition
  • No risk: decline the offer and get your gadget back

Private Marketplace (eBay / FB Marketplace)

  • LG brand recognition is low: Expect slower turnaround
  • eBay fees eat 10–13% of your final sale price
  • No-shows, scammers, and endless low-ball offers
  • You handle shipping, disputes, and returns
  • Price research required; easy to under or overprice
  • Average sell time for niche laptops: 3 weeks to several months

The Bottom Line

LG makes exceptional laptops. The Gram series is versatile and offers some of the finest ultrabook engineering available — lightweight, durable, and surprisingly capable. But exceptional hardware doesn’t automatically translate to a fast, high-value resale in the US second-hand market, where LG simply doesn’t have the same brand recognition as Apple, Dell, or HP.

The smart move is to sell fast and sell to a buyer who already understands the value. Gadget Salvation fits that profile — we’ve been buying both niche and mainstream laptops since 2008, and the selling process requires almost no effort on your part.

Ready to sell your LG laptop?

Get an instant offer from Gadget Salvation — free shipping, speedy payment, zero risk.

Get My Free Quote →

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

ASUS TUF Gaming A14: The Featherweight Fighter

The latest FA401GM ASUS TUF Gaming A14 model has a lot to offer. From the GeForce RTX 5060 upgrade to the MIL-STD-810H-certified chassis, all while staying under 4 lbs, the new A14 is the most portable TUF ever.

ASUS TUF Gaming A14 Key Specs at a Glance

Two configurations were launched at CES 2026. Our review focuses on the FA401GM — the gaming-first model pairing NVIDIA’s discrete RTX 5060 with AMD’s Ryzen AI 9 465 processor.

CPU

AMD Ryzen AI 9 465

10-core · 20-thread · up to 5.0 GHz · 34MB cache

GPU

RTX 5060 Laptop GPU

8 GB GDDR7 · 115W TGP · DLSS 4 · MUX Switch

NPU / AI

AMD XDNA · 50 TOPS

Copilot+ PC · Windows AI features

Display

14″ · 2560×1600 · IPS

165 Hz · 3ms · G-SYNC · sRGB 100% · 16:10

RAM

32 GB LPDDR5X-7500

Dual-channel · soldered · max 32 GB

Storage

1 TB PCIe 4.0 NVMe

2× M.2 2280 slots · up to 4 TB total

Battery

73 Wh

50% charge in ~30 min · USB-C 100W PD

Weight

1.46 kg (3.22 lbs)

Lightest RTX 5060 gaming laptop in class

Dimensions

312 × 220 × 16.9mm

CNC aluminum lid · diamond-cut underside

USB / Video Out

USB4 · USB-C · 2× USB-A

HDMI 2.1 FRL · DP via USB4 & USB-C

Storage I/O

microSD UHS-II

312 MB/s · 3.5mm combo audio jack

Wireless

Wi-Fi 6E · BT 5.3

Realtek 8852CE · 2.4 / 5 / 6 GHz

Keyboard

Backlit Chiclet

Redesigned for airflow · Copilot key

Cooling

Dual 97-blade fans

135W TDP max · 0dB silent mode · +15% airflow

OS

Windows 11 Home

Copilot+ PC certified · also available no OS

Design & Build

Right out of the box, the first thing that stands out is just how light the new ASUS TUF Gaming A14 is (3.22 lbs). ASUS achieved this through a CNC-machined aluminum lid with geometric diamond-shaped cutouts in the underside that double as air intake vents. It looks intentional rather than cheap.

The chassis earns its MIL-STD-810H certification through a battery of tests covering temperature extremes, vibration, humidity, and drop resistance. It doesn’t feel fragile — there’s almost no flex in the lid or keyboard base. The hinge is firm without being stiff. Overall, A14 sports a precision finish that elevates it above typical plastic-heavy gaming laptops at this price.

***THERMAL DESIGN NOTE***

The redesigned keyboard now actively contributes to airflow, and the 97-blade fans draw in 15% more air than the first-gen A14. In practice, the laptop runs remarkably cool to the touch under sustained workloads — an area where heavier competitors often lose.

Display

The 14-inch 2560×1600 (2.5K) IPS panel is a highlight — literally. Running at a 16:10 aspect ratio at 165 Hz with a 3ms response time, it’s an excellent canvas for both gaming and content work. G-SYNC support (via MUX Switch + Optimus) means tearing is essentially absent once you flip into dGPU-only mode. Colors cover 100% of sRGB, which is accurate and punchy for gaming and everyday media consumption.

One honest critique: At a borderline premium price, the absence of an OLED or DCI-P3 panel feels like a letdown. Rivals like the ROG Zephyrus G14 have trained buyers to expect OLED at this weight class. That said, for gaming specifically — where response time and refresh rate trump panel type — the IPS here more than holds its own.

ASUS TUF Gaming A14 Gaming Performance

The RTX 5060 Laptop GPU at 115W TGP in Manual Mode is a meaningful jump from the constrained 80W–90W implementations common in ultra-thin notebooks. Blackwell architecture with DLSS 4 Multi Frame Generation means the A14 can punch above its GPU tier in supported titles.

In practice: Cyberpunk 2077 at 2.5K with Ultra settings + DLSS Quality lands comfortably in the 70–90 FPS range. At 1080p, competitive titles hit well above 120 FPS. The MUX Switch makes a measurable difference — bypassing the iGPU drops latency and recovers roughly 10–15% GPU performance in demanding scenes.

⚠ FA401EA WARNING:

The alternative FA401EA model (Ryzen AI Max+ 392 + Radeon 8060S) trades the discrete RTX 5060 for a powerful integrated APU. Tom’s Hardware found it adequate for moderate gaming but a weak value at ~$2,200 versus the RTX 5060 model at $1,500 or less. Unless you specifically need unified memory for AI or creative workflows, the FA401GM is the better pick.

Silent Mode: A Sleeper Feature

ASUS’s 0dB Ambient Cooling cuts the fans entirely during light workloads, letting the chassis dissipate heat passively. Essentially, streaming videos and browsing are all done “fanless”. This is not a small thing for a gaming laptop. The fans auto-resume when temperatures rise, making it usable as a quiet daily driver rather than just a gaming rig.

How It Compares: 14-Inch Gaming Laptop Showdown

The 14-inch gaming laptop space has never been more competitive. Here’s how the ASUS TUF Gaming A14 stacks up against its most direct rivals in 2026:

The TUF A14 wins decisively on weight, GPU power per dollar, and thermal management. It loses the display comparison — the Zephyrus G14 and Razer Blade 14 both offer OLED at their respective price points. The Blade 14, in particular, is a stunning computer, but at nearly double the price, it’s in a different product category.

Resale Value & Long-Term Ownership

Gaming laptops depreciate, but they don’t depreciate equally. The ASUS TUF line has historically lost salvage faster than competitors, but durable build and the continued upgrades the series receives each year are earning it increasing recognition in the secondhand market.

For the best experience reselling your used laptop when you’re ready to upgrade, why not start with Gadget Salvation — a trusted platform that offers instant valuations and quick cash payment for used ASUS laptops, including the TUF Gaming line. Our transparent pricing and straightforward process make getting value back on your aging tech genuinely painless.

NEW
2026

1 YEAR
~2027

2 YEARS
~2028

3 YEARS
~2029

4 YEARS
~2030

Year 1 Retention

68%

Above gaming avg.

Year 2 Retention

56%

Strong mid-life value

Sell-Sweet Spot

Yr 1–2

Before next GPU gen

💡

Ready to sell your ASUS TUF? Get an instant quote at
Gadget Salvation
— fast payment, no hassle, competitive pricing on used gaming laptops.

* Projections based on historical ASUS TUF resale trends via Gadget Salvation market data.
Actual values vary by condition, configuration, and market timing.

Verdict: Who Should Buy It?

Buy the ASUS TUF Gaming A14 if you want the most gaming GPU power available in a sub-4-lb chassis without paying the Razer Blade or Predator Triton 14 AI kind of price. You care about thermals — this thing runs cool and silent when you need it to. You travel frequently and need a machine that won’t wreck your back. You’re a student who needs a workhorse for games.

Look elsewhere if: Display quality is your top priority, in which case the Zephyrus G14’s OLED is worth paying more for. You need more than 32 GB RAM (soldered, not upgradeable).

How much does the ASUS TUF Gaming A14 laptop cost?

Can I upgrade RAM on the 2026 TUF Gaming A14 model?

How does it compare to the ROG Zephyrus G14?

Does the TUF 14 support gast charging?

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

Apple says it’s fixed the awful search function for emails, photos

If you are an Apple device user who has ever tried and failed to find an email message that you know you’ve received, or a photo you know you’ve taken, has Apple got news for you. The company said Monday at its WWDC 2026 event that it realized Search didn’t work well. So, it has completely rebuilt it.

“We’ve all had that moment where you search for something you know is there, but it just won’t show up,” Stacey Ford, vice president of OS Program Management, said during the WWDC opening keynote. “So on iOS, iPadOS and macOS, we’ve rebuilt the foundation of search that powers Spotlight, Photos, and Mail. At its core is the Search Index, a rich catalog your device builds of all your content, so it can understand what you have and where to find it.”

Ford says that the company re-architected Search so it will reindex both new and older content. Perhaps most hopeful of all, she said that the mail app will get a new “ranking system” that should surface the mail you are looking for, whenever it was sent.

As a long-time iPhone user myself, I have my fingers crossed that Apple’s new search system will work as promised. I can’t tell you how many times I’ve tried to find a travel itinerary or an email about something important that my husband (an Android user) sent me, only for the device to confidently present me with an old email that doesn’t even include the terms I’ve searched for.

And, if it can help me find the photo I’m seeking, too, hurrah!

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Five Years That Rewrote the Rules of Tech Resale

Over the last five years, the consumer tech industry has witnessed a massive paradigm shift. Once dominated by an unyielding cycle of “buy new, upgrade yearly, discard old,” the electronics industry has evolved to embrace recommerce (reverse commerce). Between 2021 and 2026, the second-hand and refurbished electronics market actually continued to transform from a niche arena for bargain hunters into a mainstream, multi-billion-dollar economic powerhouse.

Driven by shifting consumer values, macroeconomic pressures, and structural changes in technology, the tech resale market has rewritten the rules of retail.

Electronics is now the fastest-rising resale segment — projected to climb from 16% to 20% of the global market by 2036. Refurbished gadgets, once viewed as a last resort, are becoming the mainstream choice for cost-conscious and environmentally aware buyers alike.

A Five-Year Timeline


Major Shifts in the Tech Resale Market (2021–2026)

Several core catalysts have accelerated the growth of the tech resale ecosystem over the last five years:

1. Premium Pricing and Inflationary Pressures

The price of flagship smartphones, laptops, and gaming consoles has steadily climbed. With new premium cellphones and AI-capable laptops pushing well past the $1,000 mark, consumers have faced tightening household budgets due to inflation. Recommerce has provided a vital alternative, allowing individuals to access high-quality, relatively recent tech at a fraction of the retail cost.

2. The Rise of the Green Consumer and Circular Economy

Environmental consciousness has migrated from marketing buzzwords to an active driver of consumer behavior, particularly among Gen Z and Millennials. E-waste is one of the fastest-growing environmental crises globally. Buying refurbished and pre-owned gadgets or responsibly recycling old ones is now viewed as an ethical imperative. Extending a device’s lifecycle by just a few years dramatically slashes its carbon and mining footprint.

3. Legislative and Regulatory Momentum

The “Right to Repair” movement resulted in historic legislative acts in several states (including CA, MA, MN, and NY). These laws forced original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) to provide better access to parts, tools, and manuals. This unlocked a steady supply of repairable inventory for refurbishers, standardizing quality and boosting consumer trust in second-hand electronics.

4. The Rise of Buyback Platforms

In the past five years, electronics buyback platforms have gained greater trust and popularity among used-tech resellers, prompting a shift away from peer-to-peer models. Completing a transaction in under a week via an online platform became preferable to meetups for many consumers, given the challenges of handling lowball offers, data security, and shipping logistics.

Navigating the Ecosystem: Where Consumers Go

The current tech resale landscape is broadly split into three spaces:

  • OEM & Big Retail Trade-ins: Programs run by Apple, Samsung, Best Buy, or mobile carriers. While convenient, they often tie consumers to specific store credits or lock them into long-term carrier contracts.
  • Marketplace Aggregators: Platforms like Back Market or Swappa, which host third-party sellers. These are great for buyers, but still require sellers to manage listings or wait for a buyer to bite.
  • Direct BuyBack Sites: Services that buy pre-owned electronics directly from consumers, inspect them, and pay out cash. This is where long-standing platforms like Gadget Salvation have cemented their value.

Gadget Salvation: Streamlining the Resale Process

Founded in 2008 with a mission to reduce e-waste by keeping dated technology in circulation, Gadget Salvation is an example of how direct-to-platform resale has perfected the user experience to meet modern consumer demands.

Because we handle the entire resale process in-house — rather than acting as a marketplace middleman — we can pass back more of the sale proceeds to the seller. Here is how we stand out:

Algorithmic, Real-Time Valuation

Our platform uses a proprietary pricing algorithm that pulls real-time resale data from major e-commerce platforms and calculates offers based on that information. A seller can go on our site, look up their specific device type (ranging from Windows laptops and MacBooks to iPhones, gaming consoles, and smartwatches), brand, and specs, checkmark its cosmetic and functional condition from the options menu, and receive an instant quote.

Risk-Free Transaction

One of the historical deterrents of online resale was shipping costs and transit risks. Gadget Salvation removes this barrier by providing a free, prepaid shipping label. If, after arrival, our technicians find that its condition doesn’t match the user’s initial description, we’ll follow up with an adjusted offer. If the seller declines, our team ships the device back normally at no extra charge (unless it does not meet the requirements outlined in the Service Agreement).

Speed and Payout Flexibility

Amazon Prime spoiled us: We now expect things to arrive quickly all the time, so when it comes to resale, consumers also expect rapid liquidity. We sped up the turnaround by eliminating the wait for mailers and offering digital labels instead, saving sellers a solid week. Once a package reaches Gadget Salvation’s HQ, it is inspected within one to two business days. Rather than forcing sellers to accept store gift cards or wait weeks for a paper check, we offer the most popular instant digital payment options, including Zelle, Venmo, Cash App, and PayPal (alongside traditional checks). The entire process—from dropping a box at a UPS store to cash in hand—is compressed into a matter of days.

Data Security

At Gadget Salvation, we use NIST-compliant data erasure software as part of our standard electronics processing. Every gadget is wiped beyond a simple factory reset, and failing or non-readable storage drives are physically destroyed and then recycled, giving sellers peace of mind.

Conclusion: Sustainability Has Never Mattered More to Consumers

Beyond the financial calculus, resale is now deeply tied to environmental consciousness. Electronics manufacturing is resource-demanding (mining rare earth materials, energy-hungry fabrication, global shipping). And every used/refurbished gadget that finds a second owner delays the production of a new one.

Platforms like ours have been built around this mission since their inception, re-routing working gadgets from landfills and reconditioning them for continued use. As consumers increasingly factor a device’s resale potential into their original purchase decisions, a habit currently practiced by only 30% of buyers, but one that is growing, the circular economy is steadily becoming the norm.

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

The First-Ever Touchscreen MacBook Pro: Will It Be a Worthy Upgrade?

For over a decade, Apple executives (dating back to Steve Jobs himself) insisted that touchscreens didn’t belong on a MacBook. But times change, and so does Apple’s design philosophy.

As we enter the second half of 2026, the tech community is buzzing with reports of supply chain leaks and analyst reports pointing to the most radical laptop redesign that Cupertino has ever attempted: the first-ever touchscreen MacBook Pro. Armed with a Tandem OLED display, a next-generation M6 chip, and a brand-new interface, this laptop is set to rewrite the rules of macOS.

Here is a detailed breakdown of everything we know so far about the upcoming MacBook Pro touchscreen model, its expected specs, and whether you should save your money or wait for this historic release.

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

When Will the MacBook Pro Touchscreen Come Out? (Release Date)

Following the March 2026 rollout of the M5 Pro and M5 Max MacBook Pros, Apple is already looking toward its next massive hardware cycle.

According to seasoned Apple analysts like Bloomberg’s Mark Gurman and Ming-Chi Kuo, the touchscreen version of the MacBook Pro is currently scheduled for a late 2026 or early 2027 release.

  • The Optimistic Timeline (Late 2026): Mass production on the touch-capable OLED panels has reportedly begun ahead of schedule. If Apple clears its manufacturing checkpoints, a special keynote in October or November 2026 is highly likely.

M6 MacBook Pro — Release Timeline

2023 — First Reports

Bloomberg’s Mark Gurman first floats the idea of a touchscreen MacBook, dismissed widely as speculation.

September 2025 — Analyst Confirmation

Ming-Chi Kuo publishes supply chain research pointing to late-2026 mass production for an OLED MacBook Pro with on-cell touch tech.

October 2025 — Bloomberg Detail

Gurman reports the machines are codenamed K114 (14-inch) and K116 (16-inch), confirming a late 2026 to early 2027 target launch window.

February 2026 — Deep Detail

A major Bloomberg report reveals Dynamic Island, OLED display, macOS 27 touch optimizations, and confirms the M6 Pro / M6 Max chipset pairing.

May 2026 — Samsung Production Begins

Samsung Display reportedly begins mass-producing the Tandem OLED panels. Foxconn assembly expected to begin Q3 2026. Chip shortages may push the full launch toward early 2027.

  • The Delayed Timeline (Early 2027): More recent supply chain reports cite global SSD/RAM component shortages and “supply chain snags” regarding the new display assembly. If these bottlenecks persist, the release could slide into the first quarter of 2027.

Regardless of the exact date, the touchscreen model is being positioned as a celebration of the MacBook Pro’s 20th anniversary, making a late 2026 launch the target Apple is aiming for.

What the Touchscreen MacBook Pro M6 is Expected to Offer

Apple isn’t just slapping a touch digitizer onto the existing MacBook architecture; they are completely re-engineering the laptop. Here are the groundbreaking specs expected for the 14-inch and 16-inch models:

1. Ultra Retina XDR Tandem OLED Display

Say goodbye to Mini-LED. The new MacBook Pro will borrow the Tandem OLED technology first seen in the iPad Pro. By stacking two OLED panels, the screen will achieve infinite contrast ratios, pitch-black dark modes, and unprecedented HDR peak brightness—all while drawing less power. Naturally, this panel will feature multi-touch integration.

2. The Dynamic Island Comes to Mac (Goodbye, Notch!)

The controversial display notch introduced in 2021 is finally on its way out. Leaks suggest Apple will transition to a punch-hole camera design integrated with software-based Dynamic Island functionality. Adapted for macOS, this digital island will expand and contract to show background tasks, rendering progress, AirDrop transfers, and system alerts.

3. Next-Gen Apple M6 Pro & M6 Max Chips (2nm Architecture)

While the current M5 line is incredibly fast, the touchscreen MacBook Pro is expected to debut the M6 series silicon. Built on TSMC’s cutting-edge 2-nanometer (2nm) process, the M6 chip will focus heavily on next-level on-device AI efficiency, massive graphics processing improvements, and thermal regulation to keep the laptop cool.

4. Re-Engineered Hinge and Ultra-Thin Frame

To address Steve Jobs’ original critique of touchscreen laptops, Apple is redesigning the MacBook chassis. The laptop will feature a significantly thinner, lighter aluminum frame and a reinforced friction hinge. A stiffer hinge is meant to prevent the display from wobbling or flexing backward when you tap, swipe, or pinch-to-zoom on the screen.

5. Built-in 5G Connectivity & N1 Wireless Chip

For professionals on the go, the MacBook Pro touchscreen variation is rumored to offer an optional built-in 5G cellular modem (Apple’s proprietary C-series chip). Additionally, it will pack the N1 networking chip to deliver blazing-fast Wi-Fi 7 and Bluetooth 6 performance.

How Will the Touchscreen Work on macOS 27?

The most important thing to understand about the M6 MacBook Pro touchscreen is that Apple is not trying to turn it into an iPad. Touch is being positioned as a complementary input method, not a replacement for the keyboard and trackpad that define the Mac experience.

Instead, macOS will introduce a dynamic interface mode that detects when touch input is being used and adapts accordingly. When the system detects a touch, UI elements like menu bar items will expand into larger, finger-friendly controls. Switch back to the trackpad and everything returns to its traditional, compact dimensions.

Touch Gestures Coming to macOS

Familiar iOS and iPadOS gestures are expected to be natively supported, including fast scrolling, pinch-to-zoom on images, PDFs, and web pages, and swipe-based window and desktop management. The emoji picker is also reportedly getting a touch-optimized interface, letting users tap characters directly on-screen.

Is It a Worthy Upgrade for Apple Users?

As with any major redesign, a major price hike is to be expected. Premium components like Tandem OLED and a 2nm M6 chip mean the touchscreen MacBook Pro will likely cost a few hundred dollars more than the current M5 MacBook Pro models.

So, should you buy one?

Who Should WAIT for the Touchscreen MacBook Pro:

  • Digital artists & content creators: If you frequently jump between an iPad Pro and a Mac to sketch, edit, or control complex UI layouts, a unified touch-enabled MacBook Pro should significantly streamline your workflow.
  • Power users & early adopters: If you want a future-proof Mac with 5G connectivity, an OLED display, and the absolute latest 2nm M6 processing power, this will be the gold standard.
  • Windows converts: If you’ve stayed on Windows simply because you love touchscreen ultrabooks like the Dell XPS or Microsoft Surface, this is the laptop you’ve been waiting for.

Who Should SKIP It:

  • Traditionalists: If you strictly use a mouse and keyboard and find the idea of fingerprints on a laptop screen frustrating, the touch features will offer you no real value.
  • Budget-conscious buyers: The current M5 MacBook Pro models (released in early 2026) already deliver staggering speed and AI efficiency. If you don’t need a touchscreen, there is no reason to upgrade so soon.

Sell Your Current Mac Before the M6 Arrives

Here’s a truth that doesn’t get enough attention in upgrade conversations: MacBooks have the best resale value retention of any laptop brand. A three-year-old MacBook Pro typically retains between 50–60% of its original purchase price. A comparable Windows laptop at the same age is often worth 20 cents on the dollar.

That also means resale value is highest right now, before the touchscreen MacBook Pro release date is officially announced. History consistently shows that MacBook resale prices drop 10–20% within weeks of a major new release.

M6 MacBook Pro: Projected Resale Value Retention

ESTIMATED BASED ON HISTORICAL MACBOOK PRO RESALE DATA

NEW
2026-2027

1 YEAR

2 YEARS

3 YEARS

4 YEARS

* Projections based on historical MacBook Pro resale trends. Actual values vary by condition, configuration, and market timing.

The implication is clear: to get the maximum value back, sell your current MacBook before the M6 announcement, not after. You’ll pocket considerably more money (or trade-in credit)-whichever reselling method you’ll end up choosing.

♻️

Sell Your Mac with Gadget Salvation

When it comes to selling used computers, Gadget Salvation is the smart choice. We offer instant quotes, free shipping, and fast payment via an app of seller’s choice. No haggling, no fees, no waiting for a buyer to show up. Gadget Salvation specializes in electronics resale, meaning we understand Mac pricing better than most.

If you’re planning to upgrade to the M6 MacBook Pro, sell your current Mac now, before the announcement eats into its buyback value.

Sell My MacBook Pro Now →

The Bottom Line

The first-ever touchscreen MacBook Pro won’t be a gimmick. It is meant to represent a carefully considered shift in Apple’s platform strategy, one that the brand has resisted for over a decade. Touch on macOS 27 is designed to complement, not replace, the keyboard and trackpad. Tandem OLED is a leap in laptop displays. Dynamic Island is a hardware+software unification that makes the entire Apple ecosystem feel more coherent. And the M6 chip — Apple’s first on a 2nm process — will be the fastest, most efficient Mac silicon ever made.

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

Apple is fixing the headache of splitting the bill with its new Siri in Camera feature

There’s nothing worse than going to a dinner with a big group of friends, opting out of drinking to save money, but then still having to pay for your friends’ espresso martinis when the group decides to split the bill evenly. You don’t want to come off cheap and make everyone wait while you recalculate the bill. Now, Apple has a solution for this, which it unveiled at WWDC 2026.

With the new feature, you can point your iPhone camera at a receipt. Then Siri mode in the Camera app will make each item selectable so that you can keep track of who got each item, and send people separate Apple Cash payment requests depending on what they actually ordered. Ideally, this feature should make bill splitting a less awkward and drawn-out experience.

“If you’re grabbing a bite with friends and point your iPhone at the bill, then [you can] select what you ordered to split the tab with Apple Cash,” said Apple VP of Software Sebastien Marineau-Mes during Apple’s presentation.

This kind of bill-splitting was already available with apps like SplitWise or Tab, but realistically, these products never got that popular (at least in my experience; no one has ever offered to use one of those tools). Since Apple’s payment features exist within the architecture of native apps like iMessage, it feels more organic to send someone a payment request through an app that they don’t have to go out of their way to download.

You might also use another similar Siri mide in Camera feature while out to dinner — instead of pointing your camera at the bill, you can use it to see estimated nutrition information about the food you’re eating.

Catch up on WWDC 2026

Everything announced, from start to finish

Siri AI’s update, explained

All the new AI features coming to Apple Photos

Apple Intelligence’s updates coming this year

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Apple’s WWDC AI demos looked more real after $250M false ad settlement

The vibe of Apple’s 2026 WWDC event felt like a spouse proudly listing all the items on a honey-do-list they’d finally completed. Rather than showcase something exciting and new, Apple launched the keynote detailing fixes to last year’s “Liquid Glass” design; an overhaul of its awful search function; improvements to its Playground feature; and so on.

Related: Get the latest 388win App with seamless access, an intuitive design, and enhanced features for a convenient mobile experience.

Perhaps most importantly, two years after promising but failing to launch a smarter Siri, Apple finally showed off an overhauled version of its AI-powered voice assistant.

But the most telling detail wasn’t what Apple announced. It was how it chose to show some things off. Many of the Apple Intelligence demoes featured someone standing, phone in hand, pressing buttons or using voice commands in real time, while another camera showed off the phone’s response.

These weren’t live onstage, anything-could-go wrong demos; they were pre-taped. But they looked far more like proof of working features than what Apple showed at WWDC 2024, when the company unveiled Apple Intelligence and a new Siri to the world through slickly produced videos that turned out to be more promise than product.

Apple WWDC 2026 iOS 27 demoImage Credits:Apple/screenshot

This demonstration style was noticed, with comments on X on Monday comparing today’s keynote to those 2024 so-called “vaporware” demos.

Apple said at that time that the features would be available soon to those who upgraded to the iPhone 15 Pro and newer devices with M1 chips or better. But by March 2025, Apple admitted to Daring Fireball that rolling out the features shown via production video was “going to take us longer than we thought to deliver.” Not long after, the Cupertino company faced a lawsuit in federal court alleging false advertising over the features shown at that 2024 event — a case that carried real reputational risk for a company whose brand has long been built on the promise that its products just work.

Last month, Apple agreed to pay a $250 million settlement on the suit, without admitting wrongdoing.

Monday’s presentation appeared designed, at least in part, to avoid a repeat. There were still plenty of fully produced videos of features, like the one showing how to adjust Siri’s voice and another demonstrating improved voice-to-text transcription. But many of the AI features were shown in this “live-like” format, with someone using the feature on an actual device. The implicit message being that these features work on actual devices, and you will soon have them.

Apple WWDC 2026 iOS 27 demoImage Credits:Apple/screenshot

Apple also is not requiring users to buy the latest iPhone to get these features. The new Siri will be available through the new iOS 27 on iPhone 15 Pro and Pro Max and all iPhone 16 models and later, according to the company. The current model is the iPhone 17, meaning most users who upgraded in the past couple of years won’t need to buy new hardware to get access.

It’s a concession, perhaps, that Apple won’t lock the features behind new devices to create upgrade pressure when it promised, two years ago, that such features would be available on iPhone 15.

Apple also said the new features will be available across its broader hardware lineup, including the iPad mini (A17 Pro), iPad models with M1 or later, MacBook Neo (A18 Pro), Mac models with M1 or later, Apple Vision Pro, Apple Watch Series 10 or later, Apple Watch Ultra 2 or later, and Apple Watch SE 3 when paired with an Apple Intelligence-enabled iPhone nearby.

Catch up on WWDC 2026

Everything announced, from start to finish

Siri AI’s update, explained

All the new AI features coming to Apple Photos

Apple Intelligence’s updates coming this year

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

This thin under-pillow speaker helped me fall asleep without earbuds

I’ve struggled with insomnia since I was very young. Like many chronic overthinkers, I tend to fall asleep best when my mind is occupied by something else, such as podcasts, YouTube compilations, or my personal favorite: rain sounds. But earbuds can be uncomfortable, and playing audio out loud isn’t exactly considerate when I’m staying at my partner’s place. 

That’s why I was intrigued by the new Peace Duo Under-Pillow Speaker from Jabees.

Launched last month, this ultra-thin speaker utilizes bone conduction technology — which sends vibrations through your skull directly to your inner ear — to transmit sound through your pillow and into your ear privately. Just place it beneath your pillow and listen as you drift off.

In my testing, I found the Peace Duo was so thin that I almost forgot it was there. I mainly used the built-in sleep sounds, which come preloaded on a micro SD card with four hours of soothing soundscapes, including gentle waves, light rain, rain with thunder, and soft wind. For more personal content, the Peace Duo also offers Bluetooth connectivity, so you can connect your phone and stream your favorite audio.

Image Credits:Jabees

Battery life is another standout. A single charge lasts up to 10 nights of one-hour listening sessions, so you won’t have to remember yet another device that requires nightly charging. The foldable design also makes it easy to put away in the included magnetic fabric travel case.

There is one important caveat: It doesn’t work well with thick memory foam pillows. Unfortunately, that’s what I normally use, so I switched to a regular cotton pillow and the sound came through clearly. (The company claims that thinner memory foam pillows should work fine.)

Image Credits:Jabees

Priced at $59.99, the Peace Duo comes in two colors: Sunrise Yellow and Mist Green. It also offers personalization; users can swap out the magnetic snap-on frames for custom images and even add their names, making it a great gift for families, students, or anyone who needs extra help getting restful sleep.

The Peace Duo won’t cure insomnia, but it’s a practical, unobtrusive sleep gadget — and for what the company is charging, it’s a small price for a decent night’s sleep.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

The new Sonos Play has become my go-to desk and kitchen speaker

I work from home, so I typically listen to audio through headphones or AirPods. But I’ve always wanted a desk speaker that doesn’t take up too much space, which made the new Sonos Play a fitting first Sonos product to review.

The Play, launched in March, is Sonos’ first new device in more than a year. The $299 speaker is a hybrid: part home speaker, part portable. It sits on your desk in a pill-shaped dock, but at 1.3 kilograms, with a “utility loop” on the back, it’s easy to carry around the house or take outside.

Image Credits:Sonos

While testing it, I often started a podcast at my desk and carried the Play to the kitchen while I cooked or made coffee. The advantage over wearing AirPods is that you remain aware of your surroundings — no more missing what someone across the room is saying. And you don’t need to rely on voice commands to control playback; the Sonos Assistant and Alexa are both built in.

Physical controls are another advantage. Skipping tracks or adjusting volume with greasy hands is awkward on AirPods; the Play’s buttons are more forgiving. That said, the controls themselves are easy to miss — they’re the same color as the silicone top and barely raised above the surface. After a few days I had memorized their positions, but the learning curve is a minor frustration that better contrast or more tactile buttons could have avoided.

Image Credits:Ivan Mehta

The speaker is sturdy and IP67-rated, meaning it can handle rain and brief submersion — I ran it under a tap without issue. It can also charge your phone in a pinch, doubling as a power bank, which is a welcome feature for outdoor use.

For sound, the Play relies on dual-angled tweeters, a mid-woofer, and three digital amplifiers, with two passive radiators to reinforce bass outdoors. The result is balanced and detailed at moderate volumes — instrument separation is particularly good. The soundstage is narrow, though, meaning the music can feel somewhat contained rather than expansive, and at higher volumes the mix loses some of its clarity.

The Play is well-suited to a desk or a patio; it isn’t trying to fill a room. For that, Sonos’ Era 100 SL — which launched alongside the Play — is the better choice. Two Play units can be paired into a stereo configuration, either through the app or, more cleverly, by holding the play/pause button on both speakers simultaneously. It’s a useful feature that makes a noticeable difference for music, though less so for television audio — which these speakers aren’t really designed for anyway.

Image Credits:Sonos

Sonos has also built in Trueplay, which uses the speaker’s microphones to automatically calibrate sound based on the room. Earlier versions of this feature required waving your phone around the space to tune the audio — an awkward workaround that would have made little sense on a portable speaker. The new implementation handles it automatically.

Sonos has had well-publicized struggles with its app — disappearing speakers, glitchy volume controls — and while the company has made meaningful improvements, a few rough edges remain. Sync between the Play and my MacBook was occasionally laggy, for example, and playing or pausing audio on YouTube sometimes produced a noticeable delay before the speaker responded.

Switching audio between speakers worked reliably through AirPlay but failed repeatedly in the Sonos app until I installed the Apple Music integration — and even then, the process is more cumbersome than it should be.

The “Apply” button in the Sonos app, required to confirm speaker changes, feels like an unnecessary extra step. AirPlay handles the same action with a single tap.

Pocket Casts integration has a resuming bug: podcasts restart from the beginning rather than picking up where you left off.

Overall, the Sonos Play is a solid speaker that largely delivers on its premise. The app issues are real but not dealbreakers, and Sonos has shown it is willing to iterate. If portability isn’t a priority, the Era 100 ($219) or Era 100 SL ($189) offer more volume for less money. If you want something more rugged and truly portable, the Sonos Roam 2 or JBL Charge 6 are worth considering. But if you want a speaker that works equally well on a desk and a back porch, the Play makes a convincing case for itself.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Which Used Apple Mac Retains the Most Value?

When investing in a premium personal computer, the initial price tag is only a part of the financial equation. The other, often overlooked aspect is residual value: how much of that money you can get back when it is time to upgrade. Historically, Apple’s computer lineup has run circles around its Windows competitors, treating Mac owners to significantly softer depreciation curves. However, not all Macs lose value at the same pace.

Whether you are a student eyeing an entry-level laptop or a creative professional configuring a powerhouse workstation, understanding how different models age can save you thousands of dollars. Let’s break down the data to see which Mac model is the reigning value-retention champion.

Why Every Mac Owner Worries About Resale Value

When you spend $1,200 or $3,500 on a laptop, what happens to that money two years later isn’t an afterthought — it’s part of the total cost of ownership. And here, Macs have an enviable track record. Apple Silicon models retain 55–75% of their retail price after one year, and 40–60% after two years — numbers that Windows laptops simply can’t match in the same category.

But not all Macs depreciate equally. The chip generation, RAM configuration, and model tier you choose at purchase will dramatically shape what you can recover when it’s time to upgrade.

The single biggest factor? Chip generation. Each new generation adds approx. $100 more to resale value. An M1 MacBook Air nets $180-200 in 2026, while an M3 Air gets $430–470 — same form factor, completely different market.

Best Used Mac Models to Sell in 2026

Here’s how the current lineup stacks up — ranked by how much of your original purchase price you can expect to recover.

Resale Value Retention At-A-Glance

Mac Model Avg. Year 1 RetentionAvg. Year 3 RetentionPrimary Value DriversMacBook Air (Base Specs)50% – 65%43% – 50%Massive student demand, low initial entry costMacBook Pro 14″ (Base)60% – 70%45% – 50%XDR Display, high port layout, active cooling appealMacBook Pro 16″ (Maxed Specs)55% – 68%35% – 40%Niche pro buyers, massive custom markup lossMac Studio & Desktops50% – 60%40% – 45%Workstation stability, specific professional target audience

The Clear Winner: MacBook Pro with M4 Pro or M4 Max

No other Mac holds value like a MacBook Pro. A base 14-inch M4 MacBook Pro that retailed for $1,599 currently sells for approximately $999 on eBay — a decent return on each dollar spent after two years of ownership. Configured pre-owned Pro 16 models with M4 Pro or M4 Max chips also yield a decent cashback on the resale markets.

The reason is simple: creative professional audience (video editors, developers, 3D artists) needs sustained performance and doesn’t compromise. Max chip configurations are also comparatively rare on the secondhand market, which supports solid pricing through basic supply dynamics. At the same time, limited audiences mean lower demand, which, in turn, drives prices down.

Why the MacBook Air is a Close Second

If you are looking for the absolute safest way to get into the Apple ecosystem, the base-configuration 13-inch MacBook Air gets you there. It sells faster than any other Mac on the resale market because more buyers can use it. The M3 and M4 Air models, in particular, with 16GB of RAM, have become the sweet spot — they appeal to students, remote workers, and casual creatives alike. That wide buyer pool translates to faster sales while still maintaining competitive pricing.

One important caveat: the 8GB RAM configurations are depreciating faster than they used to. As Apple Intelligence and modern apps push memory requirements upward, buyers in 2026 are specifically filtering for 16GB configurations.

The Depreciation Traps: What Loses Value Fastest?

To maximize your return on investment, it is just as vital to understand which Mac setups decline the fastest in depreciation. The data highlights two massive traps:

1. High-End Custom Configurations (“BTO/CTO”)

If you purchase a MacBook Pro and max out the specifications to 96GB of RAM and a 4TB or 8TB SSD, you are paying a massive, non-recoverable premium. On the secondary market, a buyer looking for a used Mac will compare your listing to the base model. While they might pay a slight premium for your upgraded storage, they will come nowhere near compensating you for the hefty upgrades Apple initially charged you.

2. High-Tier Desktop Workstations

Computers like the Mac Studio and high-end Mac Pro face niche-market demand. Because technology in professional spaces moves exceptionally fast, businesses looking for Max or Ultra chips usually buy brand new to secure warranties and instant corporate tax write-offs. Consequently, used desktop workstations see a much shallower pool of individual buyers.

How to Maximize Your Mac’s Resale Value

Getting the most money for your used Mac is about preparation and timing. A few simple steps can meaningfully increase the amount of money you recover.

Sell before a new launch: Apple typically updates the MacBook Pro in October–November and the MacBook Air in March–April. Values can drop 10–17% in the days following a keynote announcement. Pay attention to each press release, however, because those cycles shift. For example, the upcoming release of the touchscreen MacBook Pro will likely alter this schedule. In any case, the sweet spot for selling is 4–6 weeks before an expected announcement cycle.

Clean, reset, and document: A factory reset, clean keyboard, and a screen free of fingerprints and scratches signal to buyers that the computer was well cared for throughout its lifecycle. Take clear photos in natural light. Include original accessories, even the box, if you still have it.

Use a reputable resale service. When it comes to getting a fair price without the hassle of listing and negotiating, Gadget Salvation is a go-to for many Mac owners. We buy a variety of used MacBook models, providing competitive instant valuations, cover shipping costs, and pay quickly — no waiting for a buyer, no replying to endless lowball offers on marketplaces. Whether your MacBook is in perfect condition or has seen better days, Gadget Salvation will make an offer.

SELL YOUR MAC

Get a free quote from
Gadget Salvation

Trade in your MacBook — working, broken, or anything in between. Gadget Salvation specializes in used computers and offers competitive instant appraisals with free shipping and speedy payments.

FREE SHIPPING
INSTANT OFFERS
ACCEPTING NON-WORKING UNITS
FAST PAYMENT

Do Apple Silicon Macs hold value better than older Intel models?

Does trading directly with Apple give the best value?

How much does battery health affect resale value?

What about the MacBook Neo resale value?

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

HP ZBook Power G11: The Mobile Workstation That Means Business

Finding a balance between enterprise-level performance and reasonable cost has always been a challenge in the mobile workstation market. For years, professionals needing desktop-class power for CAD, 3D rendering, and machine learning were forced to choose between ultra-premium (and ultra-expensive) flagship lines and compromises in build quality.

Enter the HP ZBook Power G11. Positioned in the sweet spot of HP’s legendary ZBook lineup, the Power G11 sits comfortably between the entry-level Firefly and the beefy Fury workstations. Refreshed with the latest Intel Core Ultra and AMD Ryzen processors, alongside NVIDIA RTX Ada Generation graphics, this 16-inch workhorse promises elite-tier durability and performance without the astronomical price tag.

In this comprehensive review, we’ll take a deep dive into the ZBook Power G11’s design, benchmarks, display options, upgrades, and overall value.

HP ZBook Power G11: Key Specifications

Before diving into the details, let’s take a look at the technical hardware options available for this 16-inch beast:

ComponentSpecification OptionsProcessor (CPU)Intel Core Ultra 5 / Ultra 7 / Ultra 9 (Series 1 / Meteor Lake) OR AMD Ryzen 5 / 7 / 9 PRO 8000 SeriesGraphics (GPU)Integrated Intel Arc / Radeon 780M; Dedicated up to NVIDIA RTX 3000 Ada Generation (8GB GDDR6)Memory (RAM)Up to 64 GB DDR5 SODIMM (Dual-channel, user-upgradable)StorageDual M.2 PCIe Gen4 x4 NVMe SSD slots (Up to 8 TB total storage)Display16.0″ 16:10 aspect ratio; options from WUXGA (1920×1200) IPS to 120Hz WQXGA (2560×1600) IPSBattery83Wh with HP Fast Charge (50% charge in 30 minutes)ConnectivityWi-Fi 6E/7, Bluetooth 5.3, optional Nano SIM/LTE moduleWeightStarts at 4.68 lbs Dimensions14.15″ x 9.88″ x 0.90″

Design and Build Quality: Solid and Professional

The HP ZBook Power G11 boasts a newly refreshed chassis. HP opted for an all-aluminum, dark-silver finish that is incredibly rigid and highly resistant to fingerprint smudges. There are no flashy RGB elements or over-the-top styling cues here; this laptop is built to blend seamlessly into boardrooms, engineering labs, and production sets.

Key Design Highlights:

  • Military-Grade Durability: The G11 is built to pass rigorous MIL-STD-810H tests, meaning it can survive drops, vibrations, extreme temperatures, and dusty environments.
  • Great Keyboard Input: Key travel is satisfying without being mushy, and the larger chassis allows for a roomy palmrest. The touchpad uses a subtly cooler gray finish that contrasts with the silver chassis, a small design touch that works well in practice.
  • Upgradeability: Two SODIMM slots and two M.2 2280 Gen 4 SSD ports translate into longevity — a feature that consumer ultrabooks increasingly forgo and one that directly affects long-term ownership value.

⚖️ Portability reality check: At 4.68 lbs, this is heavier than a typical 16-inch consumer laptop, but well within expectations for its class. If daily commuting is your primary concern, the ZBook Firefly is the better fit.

Performance: Where ZBook Power G11 Earns Its Name

The defining characteristic of the ZBook Power G11 laptop is how it manages its hardware. Unlike consumer thin-and-lights that thermal-throttle under sustained workloads, this model is designed for continuous, high-intensity processing.

CPU Performance

The Core Ultra 9 185H returned a Geekbench 6 single-core score of 2,397 and a multi-core score of 11,906 in independent testing: respectable results that trail the newer Intel Series 2 chips (which typically reach 2,700–2,900 single-core). The AMD G11 A variant with the Ryzen 9 Pro 8945HS performs comparably, with both platforms demonstrating HP’s capable thermal management.

Even though it is now an “older” Series 1 variation, Ultra 9 185H performs exceptionally well, easily competing with modern desktop-class processors. It excels at multi-threaded tasks such as code compilation, scientific simulations, and large-scale data manipulation.

GPU and 3D Capabilities

The real star of the show is the NVIDIA RTX 3000 Ada Generation dedicated graphics card. Designed specifically for enterprise workloads, independent software vendor (ISV) certifications ensure it runs seamlessly with pro software like Autodesk, SolidWorks, and Adobe Creative Suite.

In the OpenCL graphics benchmarks, the ZBook Power G11 scored an exceptional 88,543 points. That’s more than twice the output of a GeForce RTX 4060 in consumer gaming laptops (~35,000) and nearly three times the scores of integrated AMD or Intel Arc graphics solutions (~27,000–33,000). For 3D rendering, CAD visualization, and simulation workloads, this gap is the entire reason to buy this computer.

🚀 Key GPU takeaway: The RTX Ada Generation GPUs in the ZBook Power G11 are professional-grade: NVIDIA Quadro-class compute, not gaming-oriented GeForce. This means ISV certification for AutoCAD, SolidWorks, Catia, and Maya, plus ECC memory support and optimized OpenGL/Direct X drivers. The performance gap over consumer GPUs is real and practically meaningful.

Display Options: Functional, but Choose Wisely

The G11 comes with a 16:10 aspect ratio screen—ideal for productivity, as it gives you more vertical screen space for timelines and code. However, you must choose your display panel configuration carefully.

  1. The Base WUXGA (1920 x 1200) IPS Panel: While bright (averaging around 380-450 nits in real-world use) and color-accurate enough for general office tasks (covering 98% sRGB), its pixel density is low at just 141 PPI. Text can appear slightly soft if you are accustomed to high-resolution displays.
  2. The WQXGA (2560 x 1600) 120Hz IPS Panel (Recommended): If your budget permits, this is the display to get. The jump to a sharper QHD resolution and a fluid 120Hz refresh rate makes a massive difference for 3D modeling, video editing, and overall user experience.
  3. HP Sure View Reflect: An optional privacy screen that blocks off-angle viewing with the touch of a button—excellent for working with sensitive data in public spaces.

Battery Life: A Pleasant Surprise

Battery life has historically been subpar in mobile workstation laptops. But the HP ZBook Power G11 attempts to change that trend. In video playback endurance tests, it yields up to 12 hours, well above average for the class and enough to last a full working day.

HP suggests up to 13 hours for the Intel variant and 13–18 hours for the AMD G11 A, depending on configuration. The 83Wh battery is the maximum you can carry on a commercial flight, and the fast-charge system can reach 50% in approximately 30 minutes when the machine is off or in standby — a real convenience for frequent travelers.

Thermal Management

The Power G11’s cooling system is one of its most underappreciated strengths. HP has fitted a sizable thermal array with larger fans than you’d find in a consumer laptop, but the key engineering achievement is that it runs quietly under sustained load. During extended rendering tests, the CPU maintained impressive sustained clocks, a result that simply doesn’t happen without a well-tuned thermal design.

The fans do spin up under heavy workloads, as you’d expect, but never to the distracting high-pitched whine common in thinner ultrabooks. For engineers who need to run simulations in a shared office, this does matter.

I/O Ports Galore

The ZBook Power G11 includes exactly what a professional laptop should, and nothing it shouldn’t. It features:

  • 2x Thunderbolt 4 / USB-C ports (with Power Delivery and DisplayPort 2.1)
  • 2x USB Type-A ports (one supporting charging)
  • 1x HDMI 2.1 port
  • 1x RJ-45 Gigabit Ethernet port
  • 1x SD Card Reader (Optional/Configuration dependent)
  • 1x Audio combo jack

This is a dock-friendly lineup. The pair of Thunderbolt 4 ports supports HP’s full range of Thunderbolt docks for single-cable desktop-mode deployment: connect one cable, and you have power, two displays, Ethernet, and peripherals. Wi-Fi 6E ensures strong throughput in congested office environments, and Bluetooth 5.3 handles peripherals without issue. An optional Intel 4G WWAN can provide connectivity on the go.

Smart Financial Lifecycle: Used HP Resale Value & Trade-Ins

A mobile workstation is a major financial investment. When buying enterprise hardware like the HP ZBook Power G11, it’s vital to consider the full lifecycle of your tech.

Used workstation laptops occupy an interesting niche in the secondhand market. They depreciate faster than premium consumer ultrabooks in percentage terms, largely because enterprise procurement cycles create a steady flood of off-lease units. However, their durability, upgradeability, and professional certification offer real value to small businesses, independent contractors, and researchers who can’t justify purchasing new hardware.

Based on standard PC depreciation curves and HP ZBook historical trade-in data, here’s what a well-maintained ZBook Power G11 can realistically retain of its original value over time:

In the resale space, ZBook Power G11’s upgradeable RAM and dual-SSD configuration don’t add much in terms of buyback value. If you plan to sell or trade in within the next 2–3 years, maximizing the CPU/GPU tier at purchase typically yields the best long-term cost of ownership.

Online Buyback to the Rescue

Selling a used HP ZBook Power G11 is an excellent way to offset the cost of your next purchase. And one of the easiest (and arguably fastest) ways to do it is to sell through Gadget Salvation. Why? Because we offer an instant online valuation process, provide free shipping labels, and rapid payments upon delivery. Utilizing our platform ensures that your workstation is either safely repurposed or recycled in an environmentally responsible way—all while putting cash back in your pocket.

Pros and Cons of the HP ZBook Power G11

Pros:

  • Superb Build Quality: Rugged, all-aluminum chassis that passes military durability standards.
  • Exceptional Graphics Performance: The NVIDIA RTX 3000 Ada GPU handles intense 3D and AI workloads with ease.
  • Superb Thermal System: Extremely quiet fan, even under sustained rendering loads.
  • Outstanding Upgradability: Has two RAM slots and two SSD slots.
  • Good Port Selection: Includes Ethernet, Thunderbolt 4, and an SD card reader.

Cons:

  • Underwhelming Base Display: The entry-level 1200p screen lacks sharpness and vibrant color depth.
  • Bulky Footprint: At 0.90 inches thick, it’s noticeably bulkier than creative laptops like the Dell XPS 16.
  • A bit Cramped: The inclusion of a numpad forces a smaller main keyboard layout.

Conclusion: Who is the HP ZBook Power G11 For?

The HP ZBook Power G11 is, without a doubt, an absolute workhorse. It delivers the structural integrity, thermal efficiency, and ISV software certifications of elite workstations at a price point that won’t break the bank.

If you are a 3D artist, CAD engineer, software developer, or data scientist who needs reliable, non-throttling desktop performance on the move, the ZBook Power G11 is a worthy buy. Just make sure to skip the entry-level 1200p screen in favor of the sharper 1600p 120Hz display option to truly unlock its potential.

Is the HP ZBook Power G11 good for gaming?

How does the ZBook Power compare to the ZBook Fury?

What is the battery life like on the HP ZBook Power G11?

Can I upgrade the RAM and storage on the ZBook Power G11?

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

Meta debuts new, cheaper smart glasses under its own brand

Meta on Tuesday said it’s launching a new line of smart glasses, dubbed Meta Glasses, starting at $299. These glasses are being made in partnership with EssilorLuxottica, but unlike the tech giant’s other smart glasses, they don’t carry Ray-Ban or Oakley branding.

The Meta Glasses are available in several countries starting today in a variety of color and lens combinations.

Meta has been continuing its push into wearables as competition in the space heats up. It’s worth noting that Meta and EssilorLuxottica are the largest players in the space, with an estimated market share of more than 80%, according to data from Counterpoint Research.

Image Credits:Meta

The Meta Glasses don’t have a screen, but they come with a camera and personal speakers. There’s a dedicated button that by default triggers the Meta AI assistant, or you can customize the button to launch a specific feature.

Meta claims these new glasses have over eight hours of battery life, and the on-the-go charging case provides up to 40 hours of additional usage.

The first pair of the new glasses, called the “Meta Adventurer,” features a rectangular shape, and is available in standard and large sizes. The “Meta Fury” frame is boxier, resembling popular styles of men’s glasses. The most notable are “Meta Glasses by Kylie,” which feature a slim oval frame designed in collaboration with American model Kylie Jenner.

Image Credits:Meta

Meta says the Meta AI assistant on these new glasses can answer questions about everything from sports scores to local restaurant picks, can understand what you’re seeing, and can help manage your daily life.

The company said these display-less glasses will soon support the “Pedestrian navigation” feature, which provides turn-by-turn directions for walking around. Meta’s also adding support for 14 new languages for its live translation feature, including Japanese, Chinese (Mandarin), Hindi, and Korean.

Meta’s new smart glass range comes a week after Snap unveiled Specs, its long-awaited consumer smart glasses, at a hefty $2,195 price tag.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Razer Blade 16 Intel Core Ultra 9 vs AMD Ryzen 9

For years, choosing a premium gaming laptop meant looking no further than Razer’s iconic snake logo. But in 2026, the decision isn’t just about selecting which ultra-powerful NVIDIA GeForce RTX 50-series Laptop GPU you want inside your chassis—it is also about deciding on the silicon brain driving the machine.

With the latest Razer Blade 16 lineup offering both the Intel Core Ultra 9 386H and the AMD Ryzen AI 9 365, buyers face a major dilemma. Not only do these chips represent entirely different structural designs, but the Intel version continues to command a steep, eye-watering premium.

In this deep-dive comparison, we will unpack the performance realities of these 2026 powerhouses, analyze why the Intel 386H version is so much more expensive, look at how both stack up against alternatives from ASUS and Lenovo, and explore the resale value of Razer laptops on the used market.

Intel Core Ultra 9 386H vs. AMD Ryzen AI 9 365: The 2026 Core Differences

To understand the massive price gap, we first have to look at what’s happening under the aluminum hood of these 2026 configurations.

FeatureIntel Core Ultra 9 386HAMD Ryzen AI 9 365ArchitecturePanther Lake (advanced 3D hybrid layout)Strix Point (hybrid Zen 5 + Zen 5c)Core & Thread CountUp to 16 Cores / 22 Threads10 Cores (4 Zen 5, 6 Zen 5c) / 20 ThreadsManufacturing ProcessIntel 18A / TSMC (multi-tile layout)TSMC 4nmMax Turbo BoostUp to 4.9 – 5.1 GHzUp to 5.0 GHzIntegrated GraphicsGraphics 4 Xe3 (Intel Xe3-LPG)Radeon 880M (RDNA 3.5, 12 CUs)Neural Processing UnitIntel NPU (Up to 50 TOPS)AMD XDNA 2 (Up to 50 TOPS)Total Platform AI Power~80+ TOPSUp to 73 TOPSMax Native I/ONative Thunderbolt 5 (Up to 120Gbps)USB4 (Up to 40Gbps)

A Note on Battery Performance

The AMD Ryzen AI 9 365 represents efficient, high-performance computing on the go. AMD utilizes a smart hybrid layout, combining 4 full-fat Zen 5 performance cores with 6 highly efficient Zen 5c dense cores. It helps extend the laptop’s battery life, giving users up to 30% more work time for standard productivity tasks on a single charge compared to the Intel model.

The Intel Core Ultra 9 386H focuses on pushing the envelope in single-core burst speed and high-bandwidth multimedia capabilities. Backed by Intel’s newest Xe3-LPG graphics architecture for its iGPU, it offers phenomenal media encoding speeds. However, under heavy loads, it demands significantly more power, making it a system designed primarily to run while plugged into the power source.

Why Is the Intel Core Ultra 9 Version So Much More Expensive?

If AMD’s Ryzen AI 9 is more power-efficient with less fan noise, why does the Intel Core Ultra 9 version of the Razer Blade 16 cost $1600 more? It comes down to manufacturing complexity, premium I/O, and platform bundling.

1. Complex 3D Silicon Stacking

The Core Ultra 9 386H is one of the first mass-market chips manufactured on Intel’s own 18A node, using Intel’s 3D Foveros technology to stack different tiles (compute, SoC, graphics, and I/O) on top of each other. This multi-tile manufacturing process is highly complex and has lower fabrication yields than AMD’s consolidated TSMC 4nm chiplet/monolithic designs. Unfortunately, the production complexity is passed directly to the consumer.

2. Native Thunderbolt 5 Integration

Intel’s high-end mobile platforms feature native Thunderbolt 5 support, delivering a mind-boggling bidirectional bandwidth of up to 120 Gbps (via Bandwidth Boost). Implementing Thunderbolt 5 requires strict certification, physical logic controllers on the motherboard, and advanced routing on the motherboard. AMD’s system relies on USB4, which, while incredibly fast and backward-compatible with Thunderbolt, is capped at 40 Gbps and cannot match Thunderbolt 5’s massive throughput for external PCIe arrays and multi-8K displays.

3. Razer’s Component Upselling and Exclusivity

Razer deliberately uses its premium Intel configurations as the vehicle for its highest-end auxiliary components. If you want the ultra-premium dual-mode Mini-LED display (which lets you switch between 4K 120Hz and FHD+ 240Hz) or the absolute top-tier RTX 5090 GPU, Razer reserves these features for the Intel-based configuration.

Razer Blade 16 Gaming & CPU Performance: AMD vs Intel

In GPU-bound gaming scenarios (the vast majority of modern titles at QHD+ with RTX features enabled), both Ultra 9 and AMD Ryzen AI 9 perform nearly identically. Meaning the price gap here doesn’t buy you more frames.

But things diverge in CPU-heavy loads. The AMD Ryzen AI 9 HX 370, with its Zen 5 architecture and 24 threads, leads in sustained multi-threaded tasks such as video encoding, 3D rendering, and code compilation. Benchmarks consistently show AMD pulling ahead in Cinebench R24 multi-core, though the Intel chip wins in single-core efficiency and thermal headroom within the thin chassis.

Intel’s real and decisive advantage is power efficiency. The Core Ultra 9 386H from Panther Lake consumes approximately 3–4x less power than the previous-generation HX desktop-class chips Razer used in 2024.

Razer Blade 16 vs. Alternatives in 2026

The Razer Blade 16 exists in a pretty narrow category: Ultra-thin premium gaming laptops where build quality and display excellence raise the bar (and the cost). And while the competitor brand options aren’t exactly cheap, several rivals offer more performance per dollar, particularly ASUS and Lenovo gaming laptops (at the cost of a less refined aesthetic or a heavier chassis):

LaptopCPUMax GPUFrom ($)How it ComparesBlade 16 (2026)Core Ultra 9 386HRTX 5090$3,499Best build & display; priciest in classBlade 16 (2025)Ryzen AI 9 HX 370RTX 5090$2,399Same chassis, more GPU tiers compared to 2026 RTX 5060, lower priceASUS ROG Zephyrus G16 (2026)Core Ultra 9 386HRTX 5090~$2,799$500–800 cheaper; lower HDR brightness; same chipLenovo Legion 9iCore Ultra 9 / i9-14900HXRTX 5090~$3,299Upgradeable RAM; thicker; better sustained TGPAlienware 16 Area-51 (2026)Core Ultra 9 285H+RTX 5090~$3,499Cherry MX keyboard option; heavier; more serviceableMSI Titan GT16 HXCore i9-14900HXRTX 5090~$3,299Desktop-class CPU; far heavier; no portability pretense

The 2026 ASUS ROG Zephyrus G16 is the Blade’s most direct rival: it uses the same Panther Lake chip, similar GPU options, and has a comparably thin chassis. It consistently undercuts the Blade by $500–$800, depending on configuration. Razer wins on display quality and build prestige. Blade’s OLED produces noticeably richer colors and dramatically brighter HDR highlights. Whether that gap justifies the price difference is a personal call.

The Lenovo Legion 9i makes a compelling case for workstation users who care about upgradability — it has upgradable DDR5 RAM slots rather than soldered LPDDR5X, and its thicker chassis allows higher sustained GPU TGP. The Alienware 16 Area-51 competes closely on price with Cherry MX keyboard options and better repairability. Neither can match the Blade’s design, which matters to some buyers and not at all to others.

Related: The ASUS TUF Gaming F16 FX608 Laptop Review.

The Reality of Razer Blade Resale Value

When a laptop costs more than $3,000, you have to consider the long-term cost of ownership. Historically, Razer Blade models have depreciated at a moderate rate. Nevertheless, because hardware updates and refreshes are so frequent, a two-year-old Razer Blade will often lose 40% to 60% of its initial retail value on platforms like eBay, Swappa, or r/Hardwareswap. Used-laptop buyers are often cautious about purchasing out-of-warranty high-end models due to the higher costs of maintenance and repair.

Interestingly, we are now seeing a shift, with AMD Ryzen AI configurations tending to hold a higher percentage of their value on the used market. Second-hand buyers specifically seek out AMD-based Blades for their reputation for better thermal management and significantly better long-term battery health. This was not the case just a few years ago, when buyers favored Intel over AMD. So, if you plan to sell your laptop in 2 to 3 years to fund your next upgrade, the AMD version might actually save you money on both ends of the transaction.

Selling Your Used Razer Laptop with Gadget Salvation

When the time comes, Gadget Salvation is a strong choice for a hassle-free resale experience. We buy the full Razer Blade lineup across many generations, including current RTX 50-series models, offer instant online quotes, and pay quickly with no selling fees to deduct. If your configuration isn’t listed in our online database, our custom quote form lets you provide the details directly for evaluation. And sure, you’ll receive slightly less than you would through a private eBay sale, but the trade-off in convenience and security is significant for high-value computers.

Ready to sell your Razer Blade computer?

Get an instant cash offer from Gadget Salvation, and enjoy free shipping + your payment deposited within 24 business hours of delivery.

Get My Free Quote →

The Verdict: Which Razer Blade 16 Should You Buy?

  • Buy the AMD Ryzen AI 9 365 version if you want a cooler-running laptop, better battery life, a slightly lower price point, and better retention of resale value over time. It is the practical choice for most gamers and students.
  • Buy the Intel Core Ultra 9 386H if you require the absolute highest transfer speeds over native Thunderbolt 5, want high-end content creation performance, or want the specific display panel + GPU configuration combo exclusive to the Intel version.

Can you upgrade the RAM on either of the Razer Blade 16 models?

Does the Intel Core Ultra 9 386H perform better in games than the AMD Ryzen AI 9 365?

Does the Razer Blade 16 overheat during extended gaming?

Should I wait for the Intel Blade 16’s price to drop before buying?

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

Is It Worth Buying a Laptop with an Intel Core i Processor in 2026?

The Intel Core i series defined a decade of laptops. But with the Core Ultra Series 3 (Panther Lake) now shipping, AMD Ryzen AI 300 threatening the mainstream, and Apple Silicon eating into resale values across the board — where does the classic “i5” or “i7” badge stand today?

Intel Core i Processors History

Intel’s naming history is a mess. The “Core i” branding — i3, i5, i7, i9 — ran from 2010 through roughly 2023 before Intel transitioned to “Core Ultra.” If someone’s selling a laptop with an “Intel Core i7” today, they’re almost certainly offering a machine built around 12th- or 13th-generation silicon, code-named Alder Lake or Raptor Lake. These aren’t bad chips. But they are aging.

In 2024, Intel rebranded aggressively. The “Core Ultra 100” series (Meteor Lake), “Core Ultra 200” series (Arrow Lake / Lunar Lake), and now the flagship Core Ultra Series 3 (Panther Lake, launched this year) have all dropped the “i” suffix entirely. So when you see “Core i5” or “Core i7” on a listing today, the generational context matters enormously.

BrandingCodename / GenYearVerdict in 2026Core i (10th–11th Gen)Ice Lake / Tiger Lake2019–2021AvoidCore i (12th Gen)Alder Lake2021–2022Budget onlyCore i (13th Gen)Raptor Lake2022–2023Discounted dealsCore Ultra 100Meteor Lake2023–2024Decent midrangeCore Ultra 200H/HXArrow Lake2024–2025Solid buyCore Ultra Series 3Panther Lake2026Current gen

The table above is the single most important filter. A “Core i7” sticker on a new-ish laptop at a suspiciously low price almost certainly means you’re looking at 12th or 13th Gen — silicon that’s now 3–4 years old and heading toward the software support cliff.

How Does Legacy Intel Core i Hold Up Today?

Let’s be clear: For everyday productivity (email, Office, browsing, video calls), a 12th-generation Core i7 is still perfectly functional in 2026. The problem isn’t performance in isolation. It’s the competitive context in which Core i chips now exist.

Intel’s Panther Lake (Core Ultra Series 3), launched at CES 2026 on the new Intel 18A process node, represents the company’s most dramatic single-generation improvement in years. The flagship Core Ultra X9 388H ships with up to 16 CPU cores, integrated Arc B390 graphics with 12 Xe3 GPU cores, and a 50 TOPS NPU — delivering claimed multi-threaded performance improvements of around 60% over the previous generation, plus up to 77% faster gaming throughput. Battery life tests on Panther Lake systems regularly hit 20+ hours of real-world use, closing the gap with Apple Silicon, which has long plagued Intel.

And AMD isn’t sitting still either. The Ryzen AI 300 series (Strix Point), with its XDNA 2 NPU architecture and Radeon 890M integrated graphics, competes directly at the high-performance end while often delivering better multi-core efficiency. On the ARM side, Apple’s M5 chips — and increasingly Windows on ARM via Qualcomm’s Snapdragon X2 — are setting a new efficiency standard that x86 is only just beginning to close in on.

For a legacy Intel Core i-based laptop purchased today, software depreciation alone is the real threat. Microsoft’s AI-powered Copilot+ features require a 40+ TOPS NPU, which no Core i generation meets. Windows will continue to run fine, but the “AI PC” wave of 2025–2027 will completely pass these computers by.

What Happens to Your Intel Laptop’s Value Over Time?

This is where the Intel Core i story gets pretty painful. Laptops depreciate at roughly 35% per year on average, and budget Intel-based ones tend to land at the harsher end of that curve:

Resale Value Retention by Laptop Category

// PROJECTED FROM PURCHASE PRICE · BASED ON MARKET RESALE DATA

Core Ultra Premium (XPS / ThinkPad)

* Projections based on market resale trends (Gadget Salvation, Back Market, Swappa). Actual values vary by condition, configuration, and market timing.

A mid-range Core i-based notebook purchased for $800 may resell for up to $450 after one year of use, ~$300 after two, and under $200 after three. Compare that to a MacBook M-series equivalent at the same price point, which commonly retains 50–63% of its value at the two-year mark.

Brand matters too. Premium Intel lines like Dell XPS or Lenovo ThinkPad hold value meaningfully better than budget Inspiron or budget Ideapad configurations: Build quality and software support longevity create demand in the secondary market. A Core i7 in a quality chassis will always depreciate at a slower pace than a Core i5 in a plastic shell.

Have an outdated Core i7 laptop?
Gadget Salvation buys Intel laptops — even older Core i generations — for instant cash. Sell it before the value drops further.

Get an Instant Offer →

The broader point: if you’re buying an Intel Core i laptop today, understand that its resale mileage is shorter than you might expect. The secondhand market is aware that these chips are now effectively retired, and pricing reflects that.

Pros and Cons of Buying a Core i Laptop in 2026

There are real use cases where a Core i computer still makes sense. At the same time, there are situations where buying a discounted processor is ill-advised. Here’s the breakdown.

PROS:

  • Unbeatable Value: Retailers are aggressively discounting 13th and 14th-generation Core i laptops. You can easily pick up a highly capable Core i7 model for a fraction of the cost of a mid-tier modern Core Ultra one.
  • Overkill for Basic Productivity: If your daily routine consists of web browsing, processing large Excel sheets, streaming video, or working within standard SaaS applications, a recent (12th- to 14th-generation) Core i5 or i7 provides more than enough raw computational speed.
  • Ecosystem and Drivers: Unlike newer ARM-based architectures, which still battle occasional software compatibility hiccups, x86 Core i chips run every legacy Windows application perfectly.

CONS:

  • Subpar Battery Life: Compared to 2026 standards set by Intel’s Lunar Lake/Arrow Lake or Qualcomm’s Snapdragon platforms, older Intel Core i architectures are notoriously power-hungry, leading to significantly worse battery life.
  • Zero Next-Gen AI Support: Without an NPU, you lose access to local AI features, smart background removal, real-time translations, and automated productivity enhancements built into modern OS kernels.
  • Diminishing Software Longevity: Over the next 2–3 years, developers will optimize software specifically for NPU and hybrid architectures, potentially making older chips feel sluggish when running next-gen OS updates.

If You’re Buying Intel in 2026, This Is the One

It’s worth separating “legacy Core i” from “new Intel” entirely, because Core Ultra Series 3 laptops represent a genuine step forward. Intel’s 18A has provided the efficiency gains that Arrow Lake promised, but didn’t fully deliver.

That said, even a Panther Lake laptop bought today will depreciate faster than an equivalent MacBook. Apple Silicon’s combination of platform lock-in and aspirational brand value sustains secondhand prices in a way Windows hardware simply doesn’t. We consistently see Mac resale prices running 15–25% higher than comparable Windows premium laptops at the same depreciation stage.

Already Own an Intel Core i Laptop? Here’s What to Do

If you’re reading this because you already have a Core i machine and you’re weighing whether to hold or sell — the answer almost always favors selling sooner rather than later.

Resale values for Core i laptops (particularly 10th and 11th Gen) are eroding quickly as the gap to current-gen silicon widens. A 12th or 13th Gen machine still commands reasonable secondhand prices today, but in 12–18 months the Panther Lake wave will push those valuations lower. The depreciation curve is nonlinear — it steepens as newer architectures arrive and legacy machines lose software relevance.

The math: if your Core i laptop is worth $400 today and loses 25% per year, waiting one more year to sell costs you roughly $100. That’s money that could reduce the cost of a current-gen upgrade. Time-of-sale decisions matter, and acting during a strong secondary market window preserves more of your original investment.

Turn Your Core i Laptop Into Cash While You Still Can

Gadget Salvation pays top dollar for used laptops — Intel Core i- and AMD Ryzen-based, Core Ultra, and more. Get an instant online offer in just 30 seconds.

The Bottom Line

Legacy Core i at full retail price: hard pass. You’d be overpaying for discontinued hardware, locked out of AI features, and set to depreciate faster than AMD and Snapdragon counterparts. The only context where an older Core i-based computer makes sense is a heavily discounted or pre-owned purchase where you don’t care about future resale, but even then, shop carefully.

Core Ultra 200H / 200V: still a good buy if the price is right. These chips perform well and run Copilot+ features (200V). Expect steep secondary-market depreciation relative to Apple, but the hardware is very much still considered current and capable.

Core Ultra Series 3 (Panther Lake): the first Intel mobile chip in years that’s genuinely exciting. Battery life that competes with ARM, integrated graphics that can finally handle gaming, and a 50 TOPS NPU that meets every current AI standard. If you want a Windows laptop in mid-2026, this is the architecture to buy.

And when it’s time to move on — whether you’re upgrading from a four-year-old Core i5 or a pristine Core Ultra 9 Series 3 — Gadget Salvation is here to turn that hardware into cash. The best time to sell a laptop is always before the next generation comes out.

Did Intel stop making Core i3, i5, i7, and i9 chips?

Will Windows 11 continue to support Intel Core i processors?

Can I still play modern games on a Core i laptop in 2026?

How do I tell if a Core i laptop is too old to buy?

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

How to Sell Your Used HP Laptop Online in 2026

OK, so that HP Pavilion, Spectre, or EliteBook has served you well. But with next-gen AI PCs and the latest HP OmniBook lineup taking over the tech world, your current laptop model might be starting to feel a little (or a lot) dated.

The good news? The secondhand laptop market is booming. Whether you’re looking to fund a brand-new upgrade or doing some digital decluttering, selling your used HP laptop online can net you a solid chunk of change.

Here is your foolproof, step-by-step guide to prepping, pricing, and successfully selling your HP laptop online.

What Your HP Laptop Is Actually Worth in 2026

HP’s laptop lineup spans more price tiers than almost any other manufacturer, which means resale value varies enormously depending on which model you own.

Zbook mobile workstations and the Omen gaming HP series hold their resale value best. The demand for used consumer models like the Pavilion is not as robust: anyone who wants a cheap laptop tends to buy new rather than used.

If you’re not sure exactly what HP model you have, flip the laptop over. The model number is usually on a sticker on the bottom panel, or you can check Settings → System → About in Windows.

How Condition Affects Your Payout

Condition is the single biggest lever you can actually control. A pristine HP EliteBook and a beat-up one of the same model can differ in resale value by 40% or more. Buyers — whether that’s an individual on eBay or a buyback service like Gadget Salvation — grade laptops consistently across a few standard tiers:

// CONDITION GRADING

How Condition Affects Your Payout

// TIER A

Flawless

No cosmetic wear whatsoever. Screen, chassis, keyboard, and ports look exactly as they would out of the box. Zero scratches, scuffs, or marks.

Full resale value

// TIER B

Good

Light surface scratches or minor scuffs visible on close inspection. Screen clear with no marks. Normal signs of careful everyday use.

~75–90% of value

// TIER C

Fair

Visible scratches, scuffs, or wear marks noticeable at arm’s length. May include minor dents on corners or edges. Screen free of damage.

~50–70% of value

// TIER D

Poor

Heavy cosmetic damage — deep scratches, significant dents, cracked casing, or a damaged screen. All core functions still work.

~25–45% of value

Be honest with yourself here. Overrating your computer’s condition is the most common reason sellers end up disappointed when a trade-in service adjusts its quote after a physical inspection. Gadget Salvation’s inspection process is transparent — if there’s a discrepancy in the seller’s description, we’ll explain it and let you either accept the revised offer or get your gadget back at no cost.

Prep Your HP Laptop Before You Sell

These steps take about 30 minutes and can meaningfully improve your payout, or at a minimum, protect you from surprises. Don’t skip the data wipe. Ever.

  1. Back up everything. Use an external drive or cloud backup (OneDrive, Google Drive) to copy your documents, photos, and any application data you want to keep. Once you factory reset, this data is gone. 
  2. Deauthorize software licenses. If you have licensed software tied to this notebook (Adobe Creative Cloud, Microsoft 365, or similar), deactivate it before resetting. Most apps have a “Sign out” or “Deauthorize this device” option in their account settings. This frees up the license for your next computer.
  3. Factory reset Windows. Go to Settings → System → Recovery → Reset this PC. Choose “Remove everything” and select “Remove files and clean the drive” for the most thorough wipe. This option overwrites data rather than just deleting the pointer to it (important if this device is going to a stranger).
  4. Clean the exterior. A microfiber cloth and a small amount of isopropyl alcohol (70%) can remove fingerprints, dust, and grime that make a laptop photograph poorly and look worse than it is. Clean the keyboard, screen, and chassis. Don’t spray directly on the screen; dampen the cloth first.
  5. Check battery health. Run powercfg /batteryreport from the Command Prompt. This generates an HTML report showing your battery’s current capacity compared to its original design capacity. Know this number: it’s something any serious buyer or trade-in service will assess. If it’s below 60%, that factor is factored into pricing.

// PRE-SALE CHECKLIST

Before You Ship Your HP Laptop

  • Data backed up

    External drive or cloud — documents, photos, anything you want to keep

  • Software deauthorized

    Sign out of Adobe, Microsoft 365, and any other licensed apps on this device

  • Windows factory reset — full drive wipe

    Settings → System → Recovery → Reset this PC → Remove everything → Remove files and clean the drive

  • Exterior cleaned

    Microfiber cloth on screen, keyboard, and chassis — removes grime that lowers perceived condition

  • Model number confirmed

    Bottom sticker or Settings → System → About — needed for an accurate quote

Most buyers/buyback sites expect the charger to be included with the laptop. But additional accessories, such as docking stations, spare chargers, a mouse, or storage upgrades, rarely add any meaningful dollar value to your used HP. Still, if you list on a marketplace (Facebook Marketplace or eBay), noting the extras in the description can speed up the sale.

Where to Sell a Used HP: Platform Comparison

Every selling platform involves a trade-off between payout potential and the time and risk you take on. Here’s how the main options stack up for selling an HP laptop in 2026:

Platform TypeBest ExamplesProsConsInstant Buyback SitesGadget Salvation, BuyBackTronics, etc.Zero hassle, instant quote, free shipping labels.You’ll get slightly less than market value. But it is a cash payout.Peer-to-Peer MarketplaceseBay, SwappaReaches a massive audience; yields the highest payout.Platform fees, shipping logistics, potential return hassles, and chargebacks.Local SalesFacebook Marketplace, OfferUpQuick cash, no shipping costs, no platform fees.Flaky buyers, safety concerns (always meet in a public, well-lit place).Retailer Trade-InsBest Buy Trade-In, HP Trade-InConvenient and streamlined. Perfect for when you are upgrading to the newer model or buying another gadget from that retailer. Pays out in store credit, not cash. Offers are typically 25-45% below what a dedicated reseller will pay.


For many people in 2026, when it comes to selling a used HP laptop online, Gadget Salvation strikes the perfect balance. You get real cash (not store credit), you don’t have to deal with buyers directly or even wait for a motivated buyer, and the whole process takes days rather than weeks.

Creating a Listing on a Marketplace

If you decide to sell your HP on eBay, Swappa, or Facebook Marketplace, the listing needs to stand out from the sea of other sellers.

Ditch the Stock Photos

Buyers want to see your actual product. Take clear photos in good, natural lighting from multiple angles: the top lid, the screen turned on (showing it successfully boots), the keyboard, and the ports. Be completely honest and take close-ups of any scratches or dings. Honesty prevents returns and bad reviews later.

Write a Clear, Spec-Heavy Title

An example of eBay listing titles.

Don’t just write “HP Laptop.” Use keywords that buyers actually search for.

  • Bad: HP Laptop for sale
  • Good: HP Spectre x360 14″ Intel Core i7-1355U, 16GB RAM, 512GB SSD, in Mint Condition

Be Transparent in the Description

List the exact specs (Processor, RAM, Storage, Screen Resolution, and Battery Health if you know it). State clearly what is included (e.g., “Comes with original HP charger and a protective sleeve”).

Price It Competitively

Do a quick search on eBay for your exact model and filter by “Sold Items” to see what people are actually paying, not just what other sellers are asking. Price yours competitively based on its condition. If you want a quick sale, price it about 5% to 10% below what a competitor asks. Monitor and revise the price regularly.

In Conclusion

Selling a used HP laptop online doesn’t have to be complicated, but getting it right takes a few deliberate steps and choices. Know your model, research prices, be honest about the condition, and factory reset your HP. Lastly, don’t wait: every month a laptop sits unused is a month of depreciation you’re absorbing for free. In other words, your HP is worth more today than it will be six months from now.

What is my HP laptop worth in 2026?

Can I sell an HP laptop if it has a dead battery or a broken screen?

Does the HP laptop need to come with the original box or charger?

Is Gadget Salvation legit for selling HP laptops?

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

Plaud says its software business topped $100M in ARR after shipping over 2M AI notetakers

There aren’t many success stories to refer to when it comes to AI hardware. Plaud, which makes AI-powered notetakers, is trying to become one by targeting professionals who take a lot of meetings. The company said it has sold more than 2 million of its devices, including Plaud Pins and credit-card-styled gadgets that stick on the back of the phone. It also said that its subscription business has reached more than $100 million in annualized revenue run rate.

Plaud pointed out that many AI companies often rely on digital documents and prompts typed from memories. Its argument is that its devices, which don’t have any screens, help people have conversations in real life and recall important points along with summaries and action items later.

“Most AI companies have scaled through software behind a screen. We took a different path. The conversations that actually move things forward don’t happen on a keyboard. We built the interface for the post-screen world. And the market validated it,” said Nathan Xu, co-founder and CEO of Plaud.

Last year, the company launched the $179 Plaud Pro, and this year, it added the new Plaud Pin S at a similar price. Besides hardware, the company has accelerated its software development, too. Earlier this year, it launched a desktop app that can take Granola-style notes via system audio for online meetings. Last month, it also introduced Plaud Teams with shared memory to target enterprises.

Plaud users can buy the hardware and get 300 minutes of transcription for free. However, if someone has many meetings a day, the free limit is likely to run out quickly. For extra minutes and other features, users can get monthly, annual, or add-on plans. Xu told TechCrunch that its revenue is largely powered by nearly 50% of the device users upgrading from the basic plan to the pro or unlimited plans.

The company doesn’t yet sell standalone software subscriptions. That means, typically, it’s the users who own a Plaud device who are buying its paid plans.

The meeting note-taking hardware market has a lot of competition, including accessories company Anker, Transsion-backed Viaim, Sequoia China-backed Vibe, and YC-backed Pocket.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

Welcome to the Superchip Era: A Deep Dive into NVIDIA RTX Spark Laptops

NVIDIA’s first-ever Windows chip fuses a Grace ARM CPU, a Blackwell GPU, and up to 128GB of unified memory into the thinnest, most capable AI laptops ever built. Here is everything you need to know before Fall 2026.

What Is the NVIDIA RTX Spark?

At Computex 2026 in Taipei, NVIDIA CEO Jensen Huang walked onto the stage beside Microsoft’s Satya Nadella and announced something the industry had been whispering about for three years: NVIDIA was finally entering the consumer PC chip market. The result is the NVIDIA RTX Spark Superchip — the company’s first-ever Windows system-on-chip (SoC), and arguably the most significant laptop platform announcement since Apple Silicon.

NVIDIA N1X ARM-based laptop processor.

RTX Spark is not a discrete graphics card strapped onto a CPU. It is a unified superchip — NVIDIA’s own ARM-based Grace CPU paired directly to a Blackwell-architecture GPU, connected by the company’s NVLink C2C interconnect, and sharing a single pool of up to 128GB of LPDDR5X memory. The whole package is manufactured on TSMC’s 3nm process. The result is a chip that delivers up to 1 petaflop of FP4 AI compute inside a chassis thin enough to forget you’re carrying it.

RTX Spark Superchip: Full Specs

NVIDIA has confirmed two chip variants under the RTX Spark umbrella. The N1X (RTX Spark Superchip) is the platform’s flagship. A more accessible N1 variant targets lower price points with reduced CPU and GPU resources.

Feature / SpecificationFlagship Tier (N1X Silicon)“Budget” Tier (N1 Silicon)CPU20-Core NVIDIA Grace CPU (Arm-based)12-Core NVIDIA Grace CPU (Arm-based)GPUBlackwell RTX GPU (6,144 CUDA Cores)Blackwell RTX GPU (RTX 5050 equivalent)Unified MemoryUp to 128GB LPDDR5X Unified MemoryUp to 64GB LPDDR5X (128-bit bus)AI Tensor Precision5th Gen Tensor Cores with FP4 Support5th Gen Tensor Cores with FP4 SupportTarget Form FactorPremium 15″ – 16″ Pro laptops (~12.9mm thin)Ultraportable 13″ – 14″ laptops (~3lbs)

Real-World Performance Expectations:

  • Local Frontier AI Models: With up to 1 Petaflop of local processing power via FP4 precision, these laptops can execute massive 120-billion-parameter Large Language Models (LLMs) with up to a 1-million-token context window completely offline. This transitions the PC from a simple tool into an active, autonomous teammate that handles data, coding, and asset generation with ultimate local privacy.
  • Heavy Creation & World Building: Because the system dynamically shares a massive memory pool, 3D artists can render ultra-large 90GB+ 3D scenes natively in tools like Blender or NVIDIA Omniverse. Major software suites like Adobe are completely rearchitecting Photoshop and Premiere Pro from scratch to leverage this architecture, promising a 2x leap in rendering and AI performance.
  • Elite Mobile Gaming: Traditionally, “Windows on Arm” architectures have struggled with gaming due to bad emulation. NVIDIA has bridged this gap by combining Microsoft’s enhanced Prism emulation layer with native driver hooks. RTX Spark laptops run AAA titles beautifully, delivering crisp 1440p gaming at over 100 FPS with full support for real-time ray tracing, DLSS Frame Generation, Reflex, and G-Sync.
  • The Battery Breakthrough: Because the heavy lifting is handled by an ultra-efficient Arm architecture, these laptops defy the old rule that high performance means short-lived battery. Early designs routinely achieve true all-day battery life while maintaining ultra-thin profiles.

Every RTX Spark Laptop Confirmed So Far

NVIDIA has confirmed partnerships with six laptop brands for the initial launch, with Acer and GIGABYTE to follow shortly. In total, over 30 laptops and around 10 compact desktops are expected at launch this fall. Here’s what we know about each confirmed device:

Surface Laptop Ultra

128 GB
Blackwell GPU
Co-developed

Microsoft’s own flagship RTX Spark device. Built for creators and AI developers, with the deepest Windows agent integration of any OEM — Microsoft co-designed the platform alongside NVIDIA.

Fall 2026

ProArt P16

4K 120Hz OLED
G-SYNC
99.9 Wh

16-inch creator flagship with Lumina Pro OLED up to 4K 120Hz VRR, 1,600-nit peak, G-SYNC. CNC-machined chassis in Nano Black or Neo White. Up to 128 GB unified memory.

Fall 2026

ProArt P14

3K OLED

~0.5″ thin

Compact 14-inch sibling to the P16. Lumina Pro OLED up to 3K, ultra-thin CNC chassis. Built for creators who prioritise portability without sacrificing the full N1X AI stack.

Fall 2026

XPS 16 Creator Edition

Tandem OLED
HDR 600
HDMI + SD

The XPS 16 reborn for the AI era. True Black HDR 600 Tandem OLED, full-size HDMI and SD card slot, up to 128 GB. Aimed at creators who refused to choose between ports and performance.

Fall 2026

OmniBook Ultra 16

15.73 mm thin
Thinnest 16″

HP claims this will be one of the thinnest RTX Spark laptops available — just 15.73 mm at the rear. A strong option for road warriors who need full N1X power in the slimmest possible chassis.

Late 2026

OmniBook X 14

13.53 mm thin
Thinnest 14″

The 14-inch counterpart to HP’s Ultra 16, claiming the title of thinnest 14-inch RTX Spark laptop at just 13.53 mm rear height. Ultra-portable with full Spark AI capability.

Late 2026

Yoga Pro 9n

16-inch
Creator Focus

Lenovo’s beloved Yoga Pro 9 line steps into the RTX Spark era with a 16-inch N1X configuration. Full display and pricing specs are still TBA, but the Yoga Pro pedigree promises a premium build.

Fall 2026

Prestige N16 Flip AI+

UHD+ OLED
Touchscreen
2-in-1

The only confirmed convertible in the first RTX Spark wave. 16-inch UHD+ Tandem OLED touchscreen, MSI Nano Pen stylus, 99.9 Wh battery. Ideal for artists and tablet-mode AI workflows.

Fall 2026

// More Coming

Acer & GIGABYTE

Second wave confirmed by NVIDIA. Details TBA.

In addition to laptops, MSI is shipping the EdgeMesa N AI+ Mini PC, a micro-form-factor desktop with enough USB-C and HDMI bandwidth to drive up to four external displays simultaneously. It is positioned as a 24/7 local AI agent computer that can run models continuously at your desk without the power constraints of a laptop chassis.

Microsoft Surface Laptop Ultra is one of the first laptop models optimized for the RTX Spark chip.

Gadget Salvation Buyback

Upgrading to RTX Spark?

Sell your current laptop before its resale value declines. Calculate an instant quote online, ship for free, and get paid fast!

Get a Free Quote

How Much Will RTX Spark Laptops Cost?

While no official prices have been published yet, let’s not kid ourselves: NVIDIA RTX Spark laptops are going to be very expensive. This is enterprise-grade supercomputer hardware tailored into a consumer clamshell, and the early models will carry a premium.

Morgan Stanley projects that the entry-level models with N1 silicon (paired with 16GB of unified RAM) will start at a steep base price of $1,800. If your workload demands the top-tier N1X configuration with 128GB of RAM, expect to spend around $3,500 to $5,000+.

This prohibitive pricing stems from three manufacturing caveats:

  1. On-Substrate Memory Routing: Integrating massive, high-speed, unified pools of LPDDR5X memory directly adjacent to the processing cores requires specialized, low-yield advanced packaging methods.
  2. Massive Silicon Footprint: Fusing a Grace CPU with a heavy Blackwell GPU requires a giant physical die layout, driving up semiconductor fabrication costs.
  3. Premium Chassis and Displays: Laptop vendors are treating these as halo-tier products. You won’t find these chips in cheap plastic bodies. Every announced device incorporates high-end CNC-machined aluminum builds, advanced cooling arrays, and elite display tech (such as 4K 120Hz Lumina OLEDs or 2,000-nit Mini-LED panels).

For ordinary consumers, these numbers will hurt. But for AI developers who currently pay for cloud GPU time, an RTX Spark laptop running 120B-parameter models locally could pay for itself within months in avoided API costs.

Whom Are Spark Laptops For?

Given the steep financial investment and extreme performance overhead, an RTX Spark laptop is completely unnecessary for everyday tasks like web browsing, document writing, or casual media streaming. Instead, this ecosystem caters to specific elite tiers of power users:

  • AI Developers, Researchers, and Data Scientists. This is RTX Spark’s strongest use case, and the premium price is most easily justified here. It is ideal for those writing, fine-tuning, or prototyping cutting-edge local AI models using CUDA-accelerated PyTorch, llama.cpp, and TensorRT. The 128GB memory ceiling enables local testing of models that previously required thousands of dollars per month in cloud compute infrastructure.
  • High-End Creative Professionals & World Builders. Adobe’s deep partnership with NVIDIA on RTX Spark is a serious signal. For editors, motion designers, and 3D artists who have been forced to choose between portability and horsepower, RTX Spark is the first truly compelling answer.
  • No-Compromise Premium Enthusiasts Who Game. Users who have long envied the silent operation, premium build, and long-lasting battery of high-end MacBook Pros, but refuse to leave the native Windows ecosystem, local developer environments, or the vast world of AAA ray-traced PC gaming, will appreciate RTX Spark.

NVIDIA RTX Spark vs. Apple Silicon: How Do They Compare?

The obvious reference point for an ARM SoC with a large unified memory pool and thin-and-light form factor is Apple Silicon. The comparison is inevitable and interesting because the two chips make very different trade-offs.

Apple Silicon vs. RTX Spark

// BENCHMARK COMPARISON · PRE-LAUNCH ESTIMATES · COMPUTEX 2026

AI Compute

AI TOPS
(FP4 / Neural Engine)

Max LLM
Parameters (local)

GPU Performance

GPU Synthetic
(est. relative)

Memory

CPU

* Pre-launch estimates based on NVIDIA Computex 2026 disclosures, Notebookcheck analysis, and comparable DGX Spark benchmark data. RTX Spark devices not yet available for independent testing. Gaming estimates assume DLSS 4.5 enabled. Apple M5 bandwidth figures per Apple spec sheet. Actual results will vary by OEM thermal implementation.

NVIDIA RTX Spark has a massive lead in raw AI computing power thanks to the Blackwell Tensor Core architecture and FP4 support. Apple’s Neural Engine delivers 38 TOPS compared to RTX Spark’s ~1,000 TOPS (a 26× gap). For GPU-accelerated AI frameworks like PyTorch and the full CUDA ecosystem, RTX Spark is decisively ahead.

The picture is more nuanced for creative work and general performance. The N1X’s GPU performance should sit between the Apple M5 Pro and M5 Max in creative benchmarks, while NVIDIA expects an edge in games. Apple Silicon’s single-core CPU performance and memory bandwidth remain class-leading, and macOS app compatibility is still broader than Windows on ARM for many creative professionals.

The main argument for RTX Spark is the CUDA software ecosystem. Every AI development tool, every GPU-accelerated renderer, every CUDA-native application (ComfyUI, Stable Diffusion, Blender GPU rendering, DaVinci Resolve with CUDA acceleration) runs natively and optimally. For anyone already living inside CUDA workflows, this is not a small thing.

NVIDIA’s Three-Generation Spark Commitment

One of the most strategically significant moments at Computex 2026 wasn’t the unveiling of the RTX Spark chip — it was Jensen Huang publicly committing to a three-generation roadmap for the Spark platform. This matters because the biggest risk with any new Windows on ARM platform is partner hesitation: OEMs and software vendors are reluctant to invest unless they believe the platform will be around for multiple cycles.

// Gen 1
Fall 2026
Launching Now

Grace Blackwell

20-core Grace CPU
6,144 CUDA Cores
1 PFLOP FP4
128 GB LPDDR5X
TSMC 3nm
300 GB/s

The debut superchip. A 20-core Grace ARM CPU paired with a Blackwell GPU over NVLink C2C, delivering 1 petaflop of FP4 AI compute in chassis as thin as 13mm. Launches in 30+ laptops from ASUS, Dell, HP, Lenovo, Microsoft, and MSI.

// Gen 2
~2027–2028

Vera Rubin

Vera CPU
Rubin GPU
LPDDR6 Memory
Higher Bandwidth
Next-gen node

The second Spark generation advances to NVIDIA’s Vera CPU architecture alongside the Rubin GPU. The move to LPDDR6 memory promises significantly higher bandwidth and improved power efficiency — the same generational leap Apple Silicon typically delivers every two years.

// Gen 3
~2028–2029

Rosa Feynman

Rosa CPU
Feynman GPU
Next-gen Memory
TBA

The third confirmed generation pairs a Rosa CPU with Feynman GPU architecture. Memory technology is yet to be publicly specified. Publicly committing to this generation at Computex 2026 is NVIDIA’s clearest signal yet that RTX Spark is a long-term platform — not a one-cycle experiment.

* Roadmap confirmed by Jensen Huang at Computex 2026. Gen 2 and Gen 3 specs are not yet fully disclosed. Timeline estimates based on NVIDIA’s typical 18–24 month architecture cadence.

The third confirmed generation pairs a Rosa CPU with a Feynman GPU architecture and a next-generation memory solution that is yet to be publicly outlined. The platform roadmap extends NVIDIA’s commitment to the Spark form factor well into the end of the decade.

This multi-generational public commitment is NVIDIA’s answer to the question that killed Qualcomm’s Windows on ARM ambitions: “Will you still be here in three years?” NVIDIA’s answer is “yes“, and they’re showing the receipts. For enterprise buyers, ISVs, and OEMs evaluating whether to invest in the platform, this roadmap is foundational to any decision.

Should You Buy an RTX Spark Laptop?

The RTX Spark superchip is, without a doubt, a historic announcement. For the first time, a Windows laptop will offer the full NVIDIA CUDA ecosystem, datacenter-class AI compute, and a large unified memory pool in a thin chassis with all-day battery life. On paper, it closes the gap with Apple Silicon that Windows users have been tolerating for four years. And as far as AI workloads go, Spark doesn’t just close the gap, it laps it.

Buy if: You are an AI developer paying for GPU cloud time, a creative professional whose workflows are bottlenecked by VRAM, a researcher who needs to run large local models privately, or a gamer who also does serious creative work. For these buyers, the premium is legitimate, and the platform will be genuinely transformative.

Wait if: You primarily use your laptop for productivity, communication, or light media consumption. The mainstream Windows laptop market is well-stocked with $800–$1,500 offerings, and RTX Spark’s advantages don’t apply to those tasks. Additionally, early adopters on Windows on ARM always face some app compatibility friction, so waiting a generation allows the software ecosystem to iron out the wrinkles.

Sell your laptop now if: You know an RTX Spark computer is in your future. The optimal moment to trade in your current model is before the new release shifts the resale market. We at Gadget Salvation have been helping people get compelling cash back for aging hardware since 2008, and our instant quotation system lets you lock in today’s resale value in minutes.

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

Trade In, Resell, or Donate: The Ultimate Guide to Your Old Laptop’s Next Chapter

We’ve all got one: that “tech drawer” or shelf where our old electronics retire. Sitting tucked away is your previous laptop. It might be a bit sluggish, the battery might not hold a charge as long as it used to, or maybe you simply upgraded to a newer model and never quite figured out what to do with this one.

But letting an old laptop sit there doesn’t just clutter your home. It is a missed opportunity. Depending on its age and condition, your computer could be a source of fast store credit, extra cash in your account, or a lifeline for someone bridging the digital divide.

Deciding whether to trade in, resell, or donate your laptop comes down to balancing three factors: time, money, and social impact. This guide will walk you through the steps to prepare your laptop and help you choose the best path forward.

The Quick Decision Path

If you only read one section, read this one. Here’s how most people land on the right answer.

Option 1: Trade It In (Cash or Store Credit)

Trading in means selling your laptop directly to a service that specializes in buying and reselling used electronics. You answer a few questions about the model and condition, get a locked quote, ship the device in (often with a prepaid label), and get paid — usually within a few days of the laptop arriving.

Why Do People Choose It:

  • Speed. The timeframe from a quote to payout (or upgrade credit) is typically measured in days.
  • No buyer risk. No flaky buyers, no lowball offers and bargaining, no chargebacks.
  • Buyback works with broken laptops, too. Cracked screen, dead battery, won’t boot: most online buyback sites, including Gadget Salvation, still pay something because individual components (RAM, SSD, etc.) retain value even when the whole unit no longer works as intended.
  • Data handling is built in. Reputable services securely wipe the drive as part of processing, which removes one of the more stressful parts of letting go of a device that’s had your whole digital life on it.

Where It Falls Short:

  • You’ll typically get less than what a private sale could fetch, as you’re trading a portion of the cashback amount for speed and certainty.
  • Quotes and speed vary by service, so it’s worth comparing two or three before committing.

A trade-in or selling via an online buyback is the right call for most people, most of the time. It’s the path of least resistance, and for a laptop that’s still in working order, it often yields the best dollars-per-minute-of-effort among the three options.

Option 2: Sell It Privately

This is the eBay, Facebook Marketplace, Craigslist route: listing the old laptop yourself and selling directly to another individual. It’s the option with the highest price potential, but also the highest effort required.

Why Do People Choose It:

  • Higher potential payout. Cutting out the middleman can help you capture more of a laptop’s resale value, especially for desirable or recent models.
  • You control pricing. You can set your asking price rather than accepting a fixed quote.

Where It Falls Short:

  • Time. Taking photos, providing an accurate description, answering buyer questions, negotiating — this easily eats a few hours, sometimes spread across days (or even months).
  • Risk. No-show buyers, payment scams, and chargeback fraud are all real and common on peer-to-peer marketplaces.
  • Shipping is on you. You’re responsible for safely packaging and shipping the computer and handling any damage-in-transit disputes.

Private resale makes the most sense for well-known laptop models with strong demand. More recent MacBooks, popular gaming laptops, and premium ultrabooks are where the price gap between a trade-in quote and a private sale is large enough to justify the legwork.

Option 3: Donate It

Donating is the right move when a laptop’s resale value is low or nonexistent, but it still has functional life left. Or when you’d simply rather see it go to a school, nonprofit, or someone who needs a basic computer than chase a small cash payout.

Why Do People Choose It:

  • Zero financial expectation, zero stress. No listing, no negotiating, no shipping logistics to manage.
  • Tax deduction potential. In the US, donations to registered 501(c)(3) organizations are generally deductible at fair market value if you itemize and get the receipt.
  • Direct community impact. Schools, libraries, and nonprofits often have an ongoing need for basic, working laptops.

Where It Falls Short:

  • You get $0 (aside from a possible tax deduction), so it’s the wrong choice if the laptop has real resale value.
  • Many donation programs have minimum requirements and won’t accept nonfunctional or damaged laptops, so check before dropping off the computer.

Donation is best reserved for laptops that are pretty old, have basic, low-spec hardware (like Celeron/Pentium CPU, 4GB RAM, 64GB eMMC), or are too cosmetically unappealing to be worth selling (think anything more than six years old, or models that have already been quoted near $0 by a trade-in service).

Side-by-Side Comparison

Factor
Trade-In
Private Sale
Donate

Payout speed
Days
Days to weeks (sometimes months)
None

Typical dollar value
Moderate, guaranteed
Highest, uncertain
$0 (tax write-off only)

Effort required
Low
High
Low

Works if broken / won’t boot
Usually yes
Rarely worth it
Often not accepted

Buyer risk / scams
None
Real risk
None

Data wiping handled for you
Yes, by service
No, your responsibility
No, your responsibility

How Much Your Laptop Loses Just by Waiting

One factor that pushes a lot of people toward buyback/trade-in over the “I’ll get to it eventually” is that laptops depreciate, i.e., lose resale value, as time goes by. A notebook that’s worth a meaningful sum today will be worth meaningfully less in twelve months, and a lot less in three years.

Before You Choose: Always Do This First

  • Back up your files. Photos, documents, anything you’d miss: get it onto a drive or cloud storage before that old laptop leaves your hands.
  • Sign out of every account. iCloud, Google, Microsoft, and, in particular, any DRM-locked software. Forgetting this step can leave the computer inaccessible (thus useless) to the next owner.
  • Securely wipe storage. Use your operating system’s built-in secure erase or reset tool. If you’re trading in, reputable services handle this for you as part of processing.
  • Note the condition honestly. The condition of the hardware is just as important (if not more so) than looks. Battery health, for example, is something buyers care about; therefore, it is factored in in the laptop’s resale price. Be upfront about any known issues and blemishes when getting quotes or listing for sale, to safeguard yourself from potential returns and offer adjustments.

So, Which One Should You Pick?

So here is the short version: buyback/trade-in wins on convenience and certainty, private sale wins on maximum dollars (if you’re willing to put in the time), and donation wins when the resale value is too low to bother chasing. For the large majority of working hardware under five years old, trade-in hits the best balance. And it costs nothing to check what your laptop is worth before deciding anything else.

Can I trade in a laptop that doesn’t turn on?

Is it better to trade in or sell a laptop privately?

How do I calculate the tax deduction for a donated laptop?

What should I include with my old laptop?

Tech enthusiast and digital storyteller with a passion for demystifying the world of gadgets, software, and emerging technologies.

The Best Windows Equivalent to the MacBook Neo

When Apple announced the MacBook Neo in March 2026, it wasn’t just another MacBook Air refresh — it was the first Mac ever built around an iPhone chip. The A18 Pro, originally destined for iPhone 16 Pro models, gave the 13-inch Neo enough power for everyday tasks and on-device AI at a starting price of just $599. It was quickly dubbed the best budget laptop Apple has ever shipped, and it sold well enough that Apple had to order an entirely new production run of chips to keep up with the demand.

That kind of success doesn’t go unnoticed. The PC ecosystem has scrambled to respond to Apple’s budget breakthrough. None of the current Windows laptops is a perfect match, since the Neo’s strength is Apple’s tight hardware-software integration rather than any single metric on a spec sheet. But several come close enough, and a few actually beat it outright in specific areas.

What Actually Makes a Good Neo Rival

Before getting into specific models, it’s worth defining what “Windows equivalent” should mean here. It’s not just about hitting a similar price — it’s about matching the feel of a laptop that doesn’t feel cheap.

Price Band

$599–$799

Anything pricier stops being a true Neo competitor and becomes a different category.

Build

Metal, not plastic

The Neo’s aluminum chassis is the bar every Windows maker is now building toward.

Battery

All-day minimum

The Neo claims up to 16 hours; competitors need to match or beat that to matter.

On-Device AI

NPU-equipped

Copilot+ PC certification or equivalent NPU power to match Apple Intelligence.

5 Windows Laptops Going Head-to-Head With the MacBook Neo

Two of these are available on shelves today: the Dell 14 Plus and the Acer Swift Go 14. The Dell XPS 13, Asus Zenbook A14, and MSI Modern 14S AI+ were just announced at Computex 2026 and are expected to ship later this year, so the specs below are close to final but not yet confirmed.

1. Best Upgradeable: Dell XPS 13 (2026)

From $699

  • Aluminum chassis that Dell calls the thinnest and lightest XPS it has ever built — and it’s actually lighter in hand than the Neo
  • Runs Intel’s new “Wildcat Lake” chips, configurable up to a Core Ultra 7 Series 3 processor
  • Unlike the Neo’s fixed 8GB, RAM is configurable up to 32GB — a real advantage for anyone planning to keep the laptop for years
  • 120Hz touchscreen with an anti-reflective coating, USB-C ports on both sides, a backlit keyboard, and Windows Hello face unlock

2. Best Display & Battery: Asus Zenbook A14

From $749

  • An OLED 120Hz panel with deep blacks, a real step up from the Neo’s already-sharp LCD display
  • Built from Asus’ Ceraluminum, a ceramic-aluminum blend, in a 2.6-pound chassis
  • Available with Intel, AMD, or Qualcomm Snapdragon chips, with the Snapdragon variant priced lowest and claiming up to 21 hours of battery life
  • Better port selection than the Neo: two USB-C ports, one USB-A, and a full-size HDMI

3. Longest Battery Life: Acer Swift Go 14

From $599

  • A laser-etched aluminum chassis with a 180-degree hinge (a clear step up from Acer’s old budget-plastic reputation), at around 2.5 pounds
  • Available with Intel’s latest Core Ultra (Panther Lake) chips, or a Qualcomm Snapdragon X Plus configuration for longer unplugged time
  • OLED display options ranging from 1920×1200 up to 2880×1800, with up to 400 nits and full DCI-P3 coverage on the higher tiers
  • A generous 71Wh battery — nearly double the Neo’s 36.5Wh cell — alongside Copilot+ AI features and Wi-Fi 7

An existing Acer line refreshed for 2026 and already shipping in select configurations, unlike many of the brand-new Computex announcements here.

4. Toughest Build: MSI Modern 14S AI+

Pricing TBA

  • Aluminum alloy chassis (apart from the bottom panel), weighing roughly 3 pounds, paired with a 14-inch OLED display
  • The most complete port selection here: Ethernet, full HDMI, USB-A, and two USB-C ports
  • MIL-STD-810H certified, meaning it’s built to handle drops, dust, and temperature swings far better than the Mac Neo
  • Runs the same Intel Wildcat Lake chip family as the Dell and Acer options

First shown at CES 2026, with more details outlined at this year’s Computex. Would be a best fit for students or commuters who beat don’t treat their hardware with kid gloves.

5. Available Today: Dell 14 Plus

From $810

  • In stores and ready for shipment. Users have already called it one of the best bang-for-the-buck Windows laptops around
  • Aluminum lid and base keep the build feeling solid
  • Ships standard with 32GB of RAM, four times the Neo’s fixed 8GB, plus a 1TB SSD
  • Port selection beats the Neo outright: Thunderbolt 4, a second USB-C with DisplayPort, USB-A, and HDMI 2.1

Upgrading to a new laptop this year?
Get an instant quote and turn your current model into cashback.

Get My Free Offer

Specs Comparison

LaptopStarting PriceChipDisplayBatteryBuildMacBook Neo$599Apple A18 Pro13″ Liquid Retina, 500 nitsClaimed up to 16 hrsAluminum, 60% recycledDell XPS 13$699Series 3 Intel Core CPU13″ 2.5K touchNot yet availableAluminum, upgradeable to 32GB RAMAsus Zenbook A14$749Intel / AMD / Snapdragon14″ OLED, 120HzUp to 21 hrs claimed (Snapdragon)Ceraluminum, 2.6 lbsAcer Swift Go 14$599Intel Core Ultra (Panther Lake) or Snapdragon X Plus14″ OLED, up to 2880×180071Wh battery (~2x Neo capacity)Laser-etched aluminum, ~2.5 lbsMSI Modern 14S AI+TBAIntel Wildcat Lake14″ OLEDNot yet disclosedAluminum alloy, MIL-STD-810HDell 14 Plus$810Intel Core Ultra Series 214″ 2.5K, non-touch32 GB LPDDR5X; solid real-world battery lifeAluminum lid/base, plastic palmrest, ships today

Quick Picks by Priority

✓ Want Neo-level build quality, but upgradeable specs: Dell XPS 13 is the only option here with configurable RAM up to 32GB.

✓ Want the best screen and longest-lasting battery: Asus Zenbook A14 (Snapdragon configuration).

✓ Want maximum battery capacity for heavy daily use: Acer Swift Go 14 has a 71Wh battery, nearly double the Neo’s size.

✓ Want a laptop that survives drops, spills, and travel: MSI Modern 14S AI+ — MIL-STD-810H certified, better I/O port selection.

The Elephant in the Room: 8GB RAM Debate

If you read other tech reviews in search of a Neo-comparable PC laptop, you’ll notice a key talking point: Windows 11 vs. macOS memory management.

While an 8GB Windows laptop like the entry-level Dell XPS 13 can occasionally stutter under heavy multitasking, the Mac Neo handles the exact same workload surprisingly well. Because macOS and the A18 Pro chip are tightly integrated, Apple can squeeze every drop of performance from the measly 8 GB of RAM.

When choosing a Windows equivalent to the MacBook Neo, we highly recommend spending an extra $50 to $100 to get a 16GB RAM configuration. Windows simply thrives with more memory, and having 16GB ensures your laptop will feel fast for years to come.

Upgrading? Don’t Let Your Old Laptop Sit in a Drawer

Whichever direction you go, stick with macOS or wait for the RTX Spark superchip, you’re probably retiring something older to make room for it. That old laptop likely still has resale value, and letting it sit unused is the most expensive way to store it. Macs, in particular, tend to hold their resale value better than most PC laptops, but a well-maintained Windows computer still has salvage value, especially if the model is fairly recent.

Gadget Salvation has been buying back laptops since 2008, and we have perfected the process over the years. It’s very simple: get an instant valuation, ship the gadget for free, and get paid fast once we receive it, no waiting around, no haggling.

Is there a true Windows equivalent to the MacBook Neo?

Which Windows laptop has the best battery life compared to the MacBook Neo?

Should I buy the MacBook Neo now or wait for the Windows competition?

What should I do with my old laptop when I upgrade?

Olena is an operations manager at Gadget Salvation, wearing many hats and navigating the intersections of efficiency and innovation. With a deep passion for tech and sustainability, they thrive on exploring solutions that drive progress while protecting our planet.

Google bets on Gemini to reinvent the smart home speaker

After years of incremental updates, Google is betting that its Gemini AI can reinvent its smart speaker. On Wednesday, the company introduced its first audio device built specifically for Gemini with the $99.99 Google Home Speaker.

The new Google Home device is the first stand-alone smart speaker from the tech giant since the Nest Audio in September 2020. That older device arrived at a time when smart speakers were thought of largely as handy controllers for your smart home and music-playing systems. They lacked the smarts of today’s AI chatbots, as commands often had to be phrased correctly to get things to work.

The Google Home Speaker is changing that, as you’ll be able to speak using natural language requests and even make multistep requests using the phrasing you’d like. For instance, you could tell the speaker to “turn off all the lights except for my bedside lamp,” or “dim the kitchen lights, play some relaxing music, and set a timer for 20 minutes.”

You can also make corrections mid-sentence as you speak instead of having to try requests again, and Gemini will understand. That means you could say something like, “Turn off the coffee maker … I mean, turn it on!” and the AI will respond appropriately, Google points out.

Image Credits:Google

Plus, the device will ship with 10 new voices that can have two-way conversations with you about topics that aren’t limited to smart home tasks or other simple commands. You can ask more nuanced questions and dive deeper into topics you want to learn about, as you could when speaking with Gemini on your smartphone. The speaker’s microphone can also remain on briefly when using the “Continued Conversation” feature, so you can more naturally ask follow-up questions without having to say “OK, Google” again.

The device looks similar to older versions, with its 3D-knit textile wrapping and rounded 3.4 x 4.2-inch design. In the U.S., the speaker comes in Jade and Berry colors in addition to the Hazel and Porcelain options available in the rest of the world. A new ring light at the bottom will indicate if the speaker is listening, thinking, or responding.

But not all of the new device’s AI smarts will be free.

Google will sell Google Home Premium subscription plans for $10 per month (or $100 per year) if you want to take advantage of more powerful AI features. This includes being able to have more free-flowing conversations with Gemini Live, which you kick off by saying, “Hey, Google, let’s chat.” Home Premium can also help you ask about and make sense of activity captured on your home’s Nest cameras, or offer summaries of what happened in the home while you were out.

Whether those capabilities are compelling enough to justify another monthly subscription remains to be seen, particularly when many of the device’s Gemini features are available without paying.

Google will try to get you used to the advanced features by offering them for free for six months before pushing you to subscribe. If successful, Google will have reinvigorated the smart speaker lineup with generative AI and will have found a way to get some customers to pay for those technological advances.

The device is available for preorder now and will ship later this month.

When you purchase through links in our articles, we may earn a small commission. This doesn’t affect our editorial independence.

F1 26: Simulasi Balapan Formula 1 dengan Fisika yang Realistis

F1 26 menghadirkan berbagai mode permainan yang dapat dinikmati oleh pemain dari semua tingkat keahlian. Career Mode menghadirkan pengalaman menjadi pembalap F1 dengan berbagai pilihan karir, dari tim kecil hingga tim papan atas. My Team memungkinkan pemain untuk membuat tim sendiri dan mengelola berbagai aspek organisasi. Multiplayer menghadirkan pengalaman balapan online yang kompetitif dengan berbagai mode. Braking Point kembali dengan cerita sinematik yang mendalam. Setiap mode menawarkan pengalaman yang unik dan mendalam, memastikan pemain memiliki konten yang hampir tak terbatas untuk dinikmati.

F1 26: Simulasi Balapan Formula 1 dengan Fisika yang Realistis

F1 26 adalah game sports terbaru yang menghadirkan simulasi balapan Formula 1 dengan tingkat realisme yang tinggi dari Codemasters. Sebagai game resmi Formula 1, F1 26 menawarkan pengalaman balapan yang autentik dengan berbagai sirkuit legendaris, tim, dan pembalap dari musim 2026. Pemain dapat merasakan sensasi mengendarai mobil F1 dengan fisika yang realistis, kontrol yang presisi, dan AI yang kompetitif. Bagi Anda yang mencari hiburan gaming berkualitas sambil menjelajahi berbagai pilihan permainan menarik, kunjungi budi4d situs untuk pengalaman bermain yang tidak kalah seru.

Dari sisi gameplay, F1 26 menghadirkan sistem balapan yang lebih realistis dengan berbagai mekanik yang disempurnakan. Fisika mobil yang lebih akurat dengan berbagai faktor yang mempengaruhi performa, dari suhu ban hingga kondisi trek. AI pembalap yang lebih cerdas membuat pertarungan di lintasan terasa lebih intens dan realistis. Sistem damage yang lebih detail dengan berbagai komponen yang dapat rusak. Kontrol yang lebih responsif dengan berbagai opsi untuk menyesuaikan tingkat kesulitan. Kualitas grafis yang lebih baik dengan detail mobil dan sirkuit yang luar biasa serta efek cuaca dinamis yang mempengaruhi kondisi balapan.

Secara visual, F1 26 menunjukkan kualitas grafis yang mengesankan dengan detail mobil yang luar biasa dan sirkuit yang hidup. Efek cuaca dinamis menambah tantangan dan atmosfer balapan yang lebih imersif. Animasi yang fluid dan sinematik membuat setiap momen terasa epik. Sound design yang brilian dengan suara mesin F1 yang autentik memperkuat pengalaman balapan. Musik yang digarap dengan baik menciptakan atmosfer yang energik. Dengan semua elemen yang dimilikinya, F1 26 menjadi salah satu game sports terbaru terbaik yang wajib dimainkan bagi penggemar balapan.

Forever Ago: Petualangan Road-Trip yang Menyentuh Hati di PC 2026

Forever Ago adalah game yang berfokus pada narasi dan emosi, dengan cerita yang menyentuh tentang kehilangan, harapan, penyesalan, dan persahabatan. Sepanjang perjalanannya, Alfred merenungkan hidupnya dan berinteraksi dengan berbagai karakter yang ia temui. Setiap interaksi dan penemuan menambah lapisan pada cerita, menciptakan narasi yang kaya dan bermakna. Game ini tidak terburu-buru, memungkinkan pemain untuk menikmati setiap momen dan merenungkan tema-tema yang diangkat. Ini adalah pengalaman yang lebih mirip dengan film independen atau novel daripada game pada umumnya. Cerita dalam Forever Ago akan mengeksplorasi tema-tema universal tentang kehidupan, kehilangan, dan pencarian makna, dengan cara yang menyentuh dan relatable. Alfred sebagai protagonis adalah karakter yang kompleks dan penuh dengan kenangan, seorang pria tua yang melakukan perjalanan untuk menemukan kedamaian dan memahami masa lalunya.

Forever Ago: Petualangan Road-Trip yang Menyentuh Hati di PC 2026

Forever Ago adalah game petualangan yang dikembangkan oleh Third Shift dan dipublikasikan oleh Annapurna Interactive. Dijadwalkan rilis pada 8 Oktober 2026 untuk PC, Switch, PlayStation 5, dan Xbox Series X|S. Bagi Anda yang ingin mengikuti perkembangan game PC terbaru, kunjungi kingbet188 login. Forever Ago mengikuti kisah Alfred, seorang pria tua yang melakukan perjalanan ke utara dengan minivan, menggunakan kamera instan untuk mendokumentasikan perjalanannya dan memecahkan puzzle. Annapurna Interactive dikenal sebagai penerbit yang selalu menghadirkan game-game indie berkualitas tinggi dengan konsep unik dan cerita yang mendalam, dan Forever Ago tampaknya akan menjadi tambahan yang layak untuk katalog mereka.

Dari segi gameplay, Forever Ago menggabungkan eksplorasi, puzzle, dan narasi. Pemain mengendarai minivan Alfred melalui berbagai lanskap, berhenti di tempat-tempat menarik untuk menjelajah dan memecahkan puzzle. Kamera instan digunakan untuk mendokumentasikan perjalanan dan memecahkan teka-teki, dengan foto-foto yang diambil pemain berfungsi sebagai petunjuk dan kenang-kenangan. Puzzle dirancang dengan cerdas, membutuhkan pengamatan dan pemikiran tanpa terlalu menantang. Fokus utama game ini adalah pada cerita dan pengalaman emosional, bukan pada tantangan gameplay yang sulit. Sistem puzzle dalam Forever Ago dirancang untuk mendukung narasi, bukan menghalangi kemajuan pemain. Setiap puzzle memiliki kaitan dengan cerita atau karakter, menciptakan pengalaman yang kohesif dan bermakna. Pemain dapat menikmati perjalanan dengan kecepatan mereka sendiri, tanpa tekanan atau tenggat waktu.

Grafis Forever Ago menghadirkan lanskap yang indah dan atmosferik, dari jalanan pedesaan hingga pegunungan yang menakjubkan. Gaya visualnya artistik dan ekspresif, menciptakan dunia yang terasa hidup dan personal. Pencahayaan dinamis dan efek cuaca menambah imersi, menciptakan suasana yang sesuai dengan tema game. Sound design juga luar biasa, dengan musik yang menggugah emosi dan efek suara yang menambah kedalaman pengalaman. Game ini adalah karya seni yang menggunakan medium interaktif untuk bercerita dengan cara yang menyentuh. Bagi penggemar game naratif dan penggemar cerita yang menyentuh hati, Forever Ago adalah pilihan yang tepat. Game ini menawarkan pengalaman yang mendalam dan emosional, dengan cerita yang akan membekas di pikiran pemain lama setelah menyelesaikannya. Annapurna Interactive dikenal dengan game-game yang berani dan artistik, dan Forever Ago adalah tambahan yang layak untuk katalog mereka. Jika Anda menyukai game seperti What Remains of Edith Finch atau Firewatch, Forever Ago adalah pilihan yang tepat. Secara keseluruhan, Forever Ago adalah tambahan berharga untuk library game petualangan PC. Dengan cerita yang kuat dan presentasi yang memukau, game ini menawarkan pengalaman yang tak terlupakan.